THE ANATOMY OF THE HUMAN BODY. IN FOUR VOLUMES, ILLUSTRATED WITH ONE HUNDRED AND TWENTY-FIVE ENGRAVINGS. VOLUME III. CONTAINING THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. PART I. THE ANATOMY OF THE BRAIN, AND DESCRIPTION AND COURSE OF THE NERVES. PART II. THE ANATOMY OF THE EYE AND EAR; OF THE NOSE AND ORGAN OF SMELLING; OF THE MOUTH AND ORGAN OF TASTE ; OF THE SKIN AND SENSE OF TOUCH. By CHARLES BELL, FELLOW OF THE ROYAL COLLEGE OF SURGEONS 0|EPE$>!>N»JHf!GfH\7' ---—»«— ; .R.3E0N OFNERAL'S i,TF-*lCE j NEW-YORK: Nwltf. _20."lt)0l I .Jd ri, J&18b. Of the Cervical Nerves - - - 105 Recapitulation of the Distribution of the Cervical Nerves - - - - 108 Of the Dorsal Nerves - ib. Lumbar Nerves - - - - 109 Sacral Nerves - - - - HO Of the Great Sympathetic Nerve, or Intercostal Nerve - ^ - - - ib. The Superior Thoracic Ganglion - 114 Sympathetic Nerve in the Thorax - - ib. Cceliac Ganglion and Plexus - - 115 Cceliac Plexus - ib. Superior Mesenteric Plexus - - 116 Inferior Mesenteric Plexus - - 117 Hypogastric Plexus - - - 118 Ofthe Phrenic Nerve b. Nerves ofthe Arm, Axillary or Brachial Plexus 120 Nerves ofthe Thigh, Leg, and Foot - 125 Of the Cutaneous Nerves of the Thigh - rb. Anterior Crural Nerve - 127 Obturator Nerve - - - - 128 CONTENTS. Page The Origin ofthe Ischiatic Nerve - - 129 Of the Lesser Nerves which go out of the back Part of the Pelvis . - - ib. Of the Cutaneous Nerves of the Back of the Thigh - " " : '!? Ofthe trunk ofthe Ischiatic Nerve in the Thigh 131 Tibial Nerve - lb* The Plantar Nerves - - - 132 The Fibular Nerve - - - 133 The Metatarsal Nerves - l s<* PART II. OF THE SENSES. INTRODUCTION, p. 135. BOOK I. OF THE EYE. CHAP. I. Introductory View ofthe Principles of Optics 142 Simple Idea of the Construction of the Eye 146 CHAP. II. Ofthe Coats ofthe Eye .... 155 Of the Sclerotic Coat - - - ib. Ofthe Cornea .... 157 Ofthe Choroid Coat ... j60 Of the Ciliary Processes - - - 163 CONTENTS. Vll CHAP. III. Page Ofthe Iris - - - - - 166 Of the Muscular Fibres of the Iris - 167 CHAP. IV. Practical Rrmarks deduced from the Structure ofthe Choroid Coat and Iris ... 170 CHAP. V. Ofthe Retina, and Digression concerning the Seat of Vision - 173 Digression on the Seat of Vision - - 178 Further Observations on the Retina - 181 Case I. of Nyctalopia, or Night Blindness, by Dr. Heberden - - - 186 Case II. of Nyctalopia, by Dr. Samuel Pye 187 CHAP. VI. Of the Membrana Pupillaris ... 190 CHAP. VII. Of the Humours ofthe Eye - - 193 Of the Aqueous Humour - - - ib. The Vitrtous Humour - - 196 Of the Crystalline Lens - - 197 Of the Capsule of the Lens and Vitreous Humour 198 CHAP. VIII. Of the Distribution ofthe Central Artery and Vein of the Retina .... 200 CHAP. IX. Of the Vascularity of the Pisi.r.uciD Membranes ^ 202 viii CONTENTS. CHAP. X. Page Some Surgical Observations connected with the Anatomy ofthe Humours - - - ■ 205 CHAP. XL Ofthe Manner in which the Eye adapts itself to the Dis- tance of Objects .... 2©8 CHAP. XII. Of Seeing in general - - - - 217 Parallel Mution ofthe Eyes - - 218 Squinting - - 222 CHAP. XIII. Ofthe Eye-lids, of their Glands, and of the Course of the Tears ..... 227 Of the Secretion and Course ofthe Tears - 229 BOOK II. OF THE EAR. CHAP. I. Of Sound, and of the Ear in general - - 232 CHAP. II. General View of the Varieties in the Ears of Animals 234 CONTENTS. IX CHAP. III. Page Description ofthe Organ of Hearing in particular Animals 240 In the Lobster and Crab - - ib. Ofthe Gar in Reptiles and Amphibious Animals 242 Of the Ear in Birds ... 245 CHAP. IV. Of the Human Ear .... 246 Section 1. Of the External Ear - - 247 2. Ofthe Tympanum or Middle Cavity of the Ear, and its Diseases - - 250 The Anatomy of the Tympanum ib. Of the Membrana Tympani - 252 Of the Chain of Bones in the Tympanum 253 Connection and Motion of these Bones 254 Ofthe Muscles within the Tympanum 256 Of the Diseases of the Tympanum 260 3. Of the Labyrinth - - - 263 Oi the soft Parts contained in the La- byrinth - - 269 4. Of the Nerve - „ 270 CHAP. V. Of Hearing in general .... 272 CHAP. VI. Of the Diseases of the Internal Ear • - - 277 BOOK III. OF THE NOSE AND ORGAN OF SMELLING. Of the Sense of Smelling 280 X CONTENT~ BOOK IV. OF THE MOUTH, SALIVARY GLANDS, AND ORGAN OF TASTE. CHAP. I. Page Of the Mouth and Tongue - - - 283 CHAP. II. Of the Salivary Glands ... - 285 CHAP. III. Velum Palatinum, Uvula, Arches of the Palate, and Amygdalae 287 CHAP. IV. Ofthe Sense of Tasting - - 289 ® BOOK V. OF THE SKIN AND SENSE OF TOUCH Of the Skin - - 292 Ofthe Hairs - - 294 ReteMucosum ..... 293 Of the True Skin ----- 296 Explanation ofthe Plates .... 299 INTRODUCTORY VIEW OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. X HERE can be no natural division of the nervous system, for it is a whole so connected in function, that no one part is capable of receiving or imparting any sensation, or of perform- ing the operation of the intellect. The system has, notwithstanding, been arbitrarily divided into the brain and nerves ; the brain being subdivided into the cerebrum, cerebellum, and medulla oblongata ; while the nerves are subdivided into the nerves of the senses, the vital and involuntary nerves, the nerves of voluntary motion. The brain is defined to be that soft mass contained within the cranium, from which the nerves are propagated to the organs of the senses and over the body, bestowing sensation, and acting as the agents of the will. It is believed to be the receptacle of sensation and the instrument of thought; but our ideas of its functions are vague and imperfect. The substance of the brain is delicate and soft, and possesses a degree of elastic resistance ; but the nerves are firm, hard, and devoid of elasticity; because, though their peculiar sub- stance has equal delicacy with the brain, their membranes give them firmness and strength to enable them to pass through the moving parts of the body without being bruised, or having their function affected. The substance of the brain is protect- ed and supported by the scull and dura mater : its peculiar matter is supported and nourished by the pia mater. The nerves contain the same matter with the brain ; but in their course through the body this matter is disguised by the pecu- liar structure of their membranes, which, while they support their substance, nourish them also, as the membranes do the Vol. III. A 3 INTRODUCTORY vilw brain. But the extremities of the nerves are again reduced ta the same delicate texture with the brain. In the structure of the brain and nerves there is an analogy with the other parts of the body. In a bone or a muscle there is the same intexture of membranes supporting the peculiar substance which is the characteristic ofthe part, and conveying blood vessels for its nourishment. The muscular fibres, or the earth of bone, are, in the midst of this investing membrane, peculiar parts distinct in their properties, as the medullary substance of the nerves is amidst the cellular membrane, which divides them into fasciculi, and gives them their fibrous ap- pearance. When it is said that the nerves are productions of the brain, we are not to understand that they are propagated from it to the distant parts of the body, as if drawn out from it like a thread from the wool. In the embryo the nerves are laid in their sheaths, extending to the remotest parts of the body.— They are connected with the brain, and in this sense they may be considered as elongations of it, the perfect function of both depending upon their union. But they have powers indepen- dently of the brain ; and often an animal is produced having no brain ; and yet, in such embryo, the animal functions are sufficiently perfect. In the same manner, when the trunk of the nerve of a limb is cut, it is only deprived of its connection with the brain, the centre of the nervous system ; and little further effect is produ- ced than the destruction of the powers of the will over the limb ; the nutrition and growth of the part continue, and the action of those parts, which are independent ofthe will, as the muscular power ofthe vessels ofthe limb, remains entire. The nerves of animals are in proportion to the size of their bodies ; but in many of the great tribes of animals the brain bears no such proportion. The nerves ofthe organs also bear a relation to the necessities ofthe animal, not to the size ofthe brain. If the procuring of sustenance depend upon the power of the organ of smelling, or upon the ear, or the eye, or even the bill, an additional supply of nerves is provided, or a peculiar apparatus of nerves suiting to the exigency. This also shews a property in the nerves independent of the brain. We come to this conclusion, that the nerves are analogous to the brain, (being indeed a matter similar in structure and function to it,) diffused over the body, and included like it in the pia mater, or in a similar delicate and vascular membrane and that their proper substance, consisting like the brain of a cineritious and medullary matter, is nourished by these mem- branes. We must conclude also, that they are more indepen- OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 3 dent of the brain than the brain is of them ; for the nerves are capable of continuing the operations of the animal body inde- pendently of the brain ; but without the communication of sensation through the nerves to the brain, its function must be unexercised. The nerves, in their course through the body, form gangli- ons, plexus, and networks. By these a more universal con- nection ofthe several branches of the system is maintained, so that few if any nerves can be traced to one point or origin— When the nerves form ganglions, (which are like knots or swellings upon them,) their fibres are split and irregularly dispersed, while there intervenes a peculiar substance resem- bling the striae ofthe cineritious substance in the brain. From every analogy we must suppose, that those ganglions answer in a less degree*the purpose of that more universal connection which the nerves have with the brain. In their extremities again the nerves are peculiarly organiz- ed : a nerve, in its course, is incapable of receiving any distinct sensation ; when injured, it conveys to us the undefinable sen- sation of pain ; and from the connection with the muscles, and with the whole system* it shakes the limb with involuntary tremors, or sudden spasms. The susceptibility of those pecu- liar impressions which the organs of the senses convey, de- pends upon a structure distinct from that ofthe brain, and disj- unct also from that of the nervous cords ; and this organization is so peculiar, that the nerves of one sense are quite incapable of receiving the impressions which those of another are fitted to convey, though apparently to our reasoning those impres- sions appear to be capable of producing a stronger effect upon the nerves. As the vital organs must be in perpetual action to support life, nature has guarded those functions by making them inde- pendent of the will, and less immediately dependent on the function of the brain. This is a provision which allows the exhausted mental and bodily functions to be recruited by sleep, while the operations of the animal body necessary to life go on uninterrupted. It is an additional reason for believing the use which we have assigned to the plexus and ganglions to be the true one, that those nerves which supply the vital organs arise by small twigs from the brain, take a long course through the body, and neither swell out into large nerves, nor are finally distri- buted until they have received many additions, and formed several remarkable plexus and ganglions. As in sleep the vital functions continue uninterru pted, so the diseases of the brain, which resemble sleep, suddenly de- 4 INTRODUCTORY VIEW, &C prive the body of all voluntary exertion, while the vital motion remains for a time unimpaired, and sinks gradually; for no part of the body is altogether independent of the healthy func- tion of the brain. It is necessary also that we should recollect the connection of the higher attributes of a living being with the animal economy. The brain, the nerves, and the nervous expansions in the organs of the senses, are dependent for the perpetual renewal and support of their function upon the circulation of the blood. We should be tempted to imagine, that the nervous system were a nobler part of the economy, did we not frequently see the powers of the mind as well as the functions of the nerves disturbed, or altogether overthrown by the irregularities ofthe bodily system ; were we not thus reminded of that circle of connections and mutual dependences which support the whole. If the tide of blood flow too rapidly upon the brain, the intel- lect is disordered, the ideas come in rapid and irregular suc- cession. If the exit ofthe blood from the head be obstructed, there is an obstruction to the circulation ofthe blood in the ex- tremities ofthe vessels of the brain ; the function ofthe brain is suddenly suppressed, because, though its attributes seem so peculiar, it requires the perpetual circulation of the blood through it to renovate its powers. The effect of the circulation of the blood through the nerves of the limb is not less remarkable. If the nerve of a limb be cut or tied, the animal can no longer move the limb, having lost the power of the will over it. But if the great artery of a limb be tied, the function of the nerve is, in a short time, equally destroyed, because the circulation ofthe blood through the nerve being obstructed, it loses its powers, and is no longer a living part. Thus, whilst the moving powers of the circulation of the blood are dependent on the state of the nervous system, the nervous system is as immediately dependent on the healthv state of the blood, and the velocity of the circulation. With this general view of our subject, we proceed to inves- tigate the anatomy of the brain as a distinct part, without for- getting the unity of the system. OF THE MEMBRANES OF THE BRAIN. 5 A. A. Hemispheres of the Cerebrum.—B. Corpus Callosum.—c. Raphe, CHAP. I. OF THE MEMBRANES OF THE BRAIN, AND OF THE SUBSTANCE AND TEXTURE OF THE BRAIN ITSELF. OF THE DURA MATER. 1VJ.ANY authors, while they describe the cranium as con- taining the brain, conceive that it also gives it shape. But the brain is formed before the bones which invest it. The first thing that we observe in the embryo is the disproportionate size of the brain to the diminutive body. The ossification of the bones of the scull is a gradual process. The brain, already 6 OF THE MEMBRANES OF THE BRAIN* formed, is invested with the strong membranes ; and betwixt the laminae of the outer membrane, the points of ossification commence, and are not completed until the ninth year. The bony matter, which is deposited betwixt the layers of this membrane, retains a firm connection and interchange of vessels with the now apparently distinct membranes on its inner and outer surfaces. The outer layer, which is so strong in chil- dren newly born, becomes the delicate pericranium, whilst the inner layer is the dura mater. Thus we find that the bones of the head are moulded to the brain, and the peculiar shapes of the bones of the head are determined by the original peculiari- ty in the shape of the brain. This view corrects an error into which many have fallen, that the dura mater and the vessels ramifying upon it impress their form upon the solid bones, and wear channels upon their surface by their incessant pulsation. The membranes and vessels precede the formation of the bone, and the osseous matter is deposited so as to be moulded round the vessels.* Thus the dura mater may be considered as the internal pe- ricranium.! The dura materi; is a firm and somewhat opaque membrane. When the scull-cap is torn off, and it is cleaned from the blood %vhich escapes from the ruptured vessels, it is seen marbled with azure and rosy colours. It partakes more of the former in youth than in those advanced in years, or in the robust and 8anguineous.§ Its outer surface is rough, from the adhesions to the bone being torn up ; but on the surface lying in contact with the brain, it is smooth, shining, and of a pearl colour. Although the dura mater is really the strongest membrane of the body, it is yet divisible into laminae; these are strength- ened and firmly connected by the intertexture of strong fibres. Most anatomists describe it as composed of two laminae.— Some however describe three laminct—the outer lamina, or squamosa ; the middle, or filamentosa ; and the internal (be- ing smooth and uniform,) the lamina membranosa.||—But to * Albini Ac3d. Anat. " Quomodo cranium crefcendo accommodat fe eis qua continet.'" Fifcher, Diflertatio de modo, quo, ofla fe vicinis accommodant partibus. f Some regard only its external lamina as the internal pericranium. Fallopius firft viewed the dura mater in this light, and he is followed by the beft anato- mifts. | The membranes of the brain have the name of mater, becaufe they defend the brain, and protect its tender fubftance, or, according to fome anatomifts of the Arabian fchool, becaufe the other membranes of the body are produced from them. Before Galen, the term Meninx was common to all the membranes of the body, afterwards it was appropriated to thofe of the brain. 5 Malacarns Encefalotomia Nuova, p. 19. :; Mafccame. p. 22. It is defcribed as partly tendinous, partly ligamentous •. Vol. HI. P.O. L.^ th? Scull to/y of a Ckitxt before it be fully Ostified I the Fot\ttmuU», 2 the Pericrcutuua trttem.tly Viisrii/ar .1 tfu>Lenyittidinoi Sinus opotmd by aittmo up the membrane. tn the dirtrtwn > f the Seeqtttal Suture "' OF THE MEMBRANES OF THE BRAIN. 7 separate the dura mater into such laminae, it will, I believe, be necessary to dry it and tear it into shreds. No doubt it may be possible thus to tear it, as some have done, into four, six, seven, or even eight laminae or squamae. It is to be regretted that anatomists should have been proud of such dissections, or that any such descriptions should be thought creditable to their authors, or discoverers as they are called. The dura mater is insensible ; it has, in the way of experi- ment, been pricked and injured by every possible contrivance, by mechanical and by chemical stimulants ; yet the animals, the subjects of such cruel experiments, have given no sign of pain.* Before this fact of the insensibility of the dura mater was thus established, physicians regarded this membrane as the seat and origin of many diseases.f Formerly the natural connection of the scull and dura mater was so resolutely denied—so hotly contested among the vari- ous parties in anatomy and surgery, that we might, by reading their disputes, almost doubt one of the plainest and most obvi- ous facts, were not the closeness of this connection sufficiently proved by the manner of the original formation ofthe cranium, by the resistance to the tearing up of the cranium, and by the bleeding surface of the dura mater ; or, if further proof be required, we may macerate these bones and their membranes in acids, when the laminae of the dura mater will be seen inti- mately connected with the bone, while the pericranium and outer laminae of the dura mater are seen to be continued into each otherf:, by the intermediate cellular texture in which the earth of the bones is deposited. § The dura mater adheres more firmly to the bone in young subjects, because the bone is yet imperfect, and its surface spongy and rough ; and, for the same reason, it is more firmly attached to the scull in the chronic hydrocephalus, because the ossification is imperfect. that is to fay, of a nature refembling thefe, yet not altogether the fame. Vicq d'Azyr found it feparated by purulent matter into two laminae, the fibres of which had a different direction. Acad, de Sciences, An 1781. p. 497.—Bartholin Sp. Hiftor. Anatomise. • Zinn. Exper. circa corpus callofum, cerebellum, duram meningem.—-Mem. par Haller fur les parties fenfibles et irritables.—Blegny Journal de Med. An r.. p. 16. f See Hoffman. Med. Ration, part ^. fsc. ii. c. 1. § 2. and Boneti Sepulch. Anat. lib. i. fee. 1. \ Vicq d'Azyr Memoir, de l'Acad. Roy. 1781, p. 497, and Malacarne (Ade- renze dclla D. M. allae pareti interne del cranio), p. 24. § Taking a portion of the dura mater betwixt the finger and thumb, we can feel the two lamina moving.upon each other, from a slight degree of laxity in the connecting cellular substance. This cellular texture is demonstrated by Malacarne, by forcibly injecting quick-silver betwixt the layers of the membrane. 8 OF THE MEMBRANES OF THE BRAIN. It frequently adheres so firmly to the scull-cap, as to leave its outer lamina adhering to the scull when it is raised. It ad- heres more firmly along the sutures, and from this cause, when the scull is injured, and matter is formed under it, the dura mater will be separated on each side of the suture, and still retain its adhesion to the suture, so as to divide the matter, and, consequently, prevent the full evacuation of the matter when the trepan has been applied on one side of the suture. The dura mater adheres also with peculiar firmness to the base of the scull, because of the numerous chinks and foramina. GLANDS OF THE DURA MATER. Upon the external surface of the dura mater there are little holes, from which emerge fleshy-coloured papillae, and which, upon examining the scull-cap, will be found to have corres- ponding foveae. These are the glandulae Pacchioni.* They are in number from ten to fifteenf on each side, and are seen chiefly lateral to the course of the longitudinal sinus. These bodies were supposed by Pacchioni to be glands. When pressed they give out a fluid ; but in this they do not differ from the loose common cellular membrane. As they are chiefly seen along the line of the great sinus, and are not scat- tered over the whole dura mater, their supposed use of moistening the surface of the membrane!; is quite improbable ; and, indeed, this is a part of that unfounded hypothesis which supposed an interstice betwixt the dura mater and scull, and ascribed motion to this membrane. The surfaces of the dura and pia mater, where they are in contact, being of the nature of the secreting surfaces of the investing membranes of the other viscera, require no such further aid in moistening them, or preventing their adhesion. Many glands are described by authors in the substance, and upon both surfaces of the mem- brane.§ Of the bodies which adhere to the surface of the pia mater, and of those also which are to be seen in the sinuses, we shall speak afterwards, when considering the veins which enter the longitudinal sinus. * See M. Littre Acad. Roy. des Sciences 1704, Hist. p. 32. art. 19. f Haller, El. Phys. p. 106, Mem. par M. Vicq d'Azyr Mem. de l'Acad. Rov. 1781, p-497- \ Viz. the opinion of Fantonius. § Malacarne, fee. 94. OF THE MEMBRANES OF THE BRAIN. 9 ARTERIES OF THE DURA MATER. This membrane must necessarily be supplied with vessels for its own nourishment, for that of the contiguous bone, and for the perpetual exudation of the fluid, or halitus rather, which moistens or bedews its internal surface. We may divide the arteries of the dura mater into anterior, middle, and posterior. The first proceeding from the ophthalmic and ethmoidal branches ; the second from the internal maxillary and superior pharyngeal; the posterior from the occipital and vertebral arteries. The principal artery of the dura mater, named, by way of distinction, the great artery of the dura mater, is derived from the internal maxillary artery, a branch of the external carotid. It is called the spinalis, or spheno-spinalis, from its passing into the head through the spinous hole of the sphenoid bone, or meningea media, from its relative situation, as it rises in the great middle fossa of the scull.* This artery, though it sometimes enters the scull in two branches,! usually enters in one considerable branch, and divides soon after it reaches the dura mater into three or four branches, of which the anterior is the largest; and these spread their ramifications beautifully upon the dura mater, over all that part which is op- posite to the anterior, middle, and posterior lobes of the brain. Its larger trunks run upon the internal surface of the parietal bone, and are sometimes for a considerable space buried in its substance. The extreme branches of this artery extend so as to inosculate with the anterior and posterior arteries of the dura mater, and through the bones (chiefly the parietal and temporal bones) they inosculate with the temporal and occi- pital arteries.:}: The meningeal artery has been known to become aneuris- mal and distended at intervals, it has formed an aneurism, destroying the bones, and causing epilepsy.^ * Malacarne, parte i. fee. ioo. f Soemmerring de Corp. Hum. fab. torn. v. p. 142. This is not the fole artery fent to the dura mater from the internal maxillary, a twig alfo rifes from that branch which goes to the pteregoid mufcles and parts about the Eustachian tube— it enters the fcull, and is diftributed to the 5th pair of nerves, and to the dura mater and cavernous finus. Another enters with the inferior maxillary nerve by the foramen ovale, and rifes upon the dura mater. J Malacarne.—" Antrorfum ramis arteriae ophthalmicae, retrorfum ramis arter- iarum vertebralium, fecutietiam crebro fibi ipfi, nee non epicranii ramis, e. g.ex arteria occipitali ortis etc. in embryonibus potiffimum confpicuis inofculatur." Soemmerring, torn. v. p. 141. § Malacarne, p. 1. fee. ioj. " Poflono le arterie, della D. M. devenire aneu- rifmatiche, il cbe ho veduto in due cranii, in uno dei quali 1'arteria fpinofa era Vol, III. B 10 OF THE MEMBRANES OF THE BRAIN. The Scull Cap with the D. M. adhering. I. Falx. 2. Tentorium. 3. Longitudinal Sinus. 4. 4. great Lateral Sinufes. 5. Fourth Sinus. 6. artery of the D. M. • OF THE SEPTA WHICH INTERSECT THE BRAIN. Those septa, or, as they are called, processes of the dura mater, being extended across from the internal surface of the cranium, support the brain in the sudden motions of the body, tutta gozzi tanto a deftra quanto a finiftra, i maggiori dei quali (ed erano cinque dalprimo, e nove dall' altero lato) poco fuperavano la groffezza dei pifelli : nell' altero ancor giovenile fi vedevano due foli gozzi uguali in diametro al mignolo ful tronco mezzano dell' arteria fpinofa rempetto alia meta del parietale fm- iftro, diftanti nove linee circa l'inferior anteriore dall' altro." Part i. § 105. We have alfo the following cafe from Malacarne. " Juvenis aetati3 22annorum, fan- guinei temperamenti, poft vehementiflimos, et frequentes epilepfix motus in nofocomio D. Joannis, tumente in fumma bregmatis offium parte capitis cutt, fub meis oculis moriebatur. D. Caccia in hac noftra nniverfitate tunc Botanices pro* feffor, quern mihi patronum a morte peremtum adhuc defleo, ut cadaver aperire- tur jufferat, atque in ejufdem capite ex ea parte, qua tenuiffima devenerant offa, ob arteriarum fubrepentium inter duras matris laminas aneurifmata, os quoque omnino deficiens reperiebatur, fub capitis integumentis aneurifmata magnitudinis ovi columbini, exiguo, perruptoque foramine aperto, ut fanguis fub integumentis concrevifcet ; atque tunc novimus ad ea aneurifmatum loea, quae quidem utrinquc erant, in vehemetuia morbi aegrum pugnos infligere coufueviffe."—A curious cafe occurred lately to a friend of mine : A boy was wounded with an arrow in his head ; it ftuck in the parietal bone,- upon withdrawing it, there was a profufe haemorrhagy, for its point had ftruck the artery of the dura mater. r< l, lurgcon OF THE MEMBRANES OF THE BRAIN. 11 and prevent the mutual gravitation of its parts. These parti- tion are formed by the internal lamina of the dura mater, whicn is reflected as the peritoneum is to form the mesentery, or the pleuri to form the mediastinum. The fal:. is the largest of the partitions ; it is attached to the cranium in the line of the sagittal suture, and reaching from the crista galli of the ethmoid bone to the middle of the tentorium, or to the crucial ridge of the occipital bone, it passes deep into the middle of the brain, and divides it into its two hemispheres. It is in shape like a scythe, for anteriorly it does not pass so deep into the substance of the brain ; but it gradually becomes broader, or descends deeper betwixt the hemispheres, as we follow it backwards, which, with the curve, it necessarily takes from the shape of the cranium, has obtained it the name of falx : it is also called septum sagittate, verticale, or mediastinum cerebri. The tentorium separates the cerebrum and cerebellum. It stretches horizontally over the cerebellum, and sustains the posterior lobes of the cerebrum. It is formed by the inner lamina of the dura mater, reflected off from the os occipitis along the whole length of the grooves of the lateral sinuses, and the edge or angle of the temporal bones. This septum, thus running round the cavity of the cranium, divides it into two departments ; the upper one for the lodgment of the cere- brum, and the lower for the cerebellum. But to allow the union of these two great divisions of the encephalon, a circu- lar opening is left upon the anterior part of the tentorium, which is called the notch of the tentorium. There is a little process of the dura mater which may be called the falx of the cerebellum. It runs down upon the internal spine of the occipital bone from the tentorium, gradu- ally contracting until it terminates on the margin of the great occipital foramen. It serves as a kind of ligament strengthen- ing the tentorium, while it divides the cerebellum. It enters, however, but a little way betwixt the lobes. The falx and tentorium being connected and continued into each other at their broadest part, they mutually support each other, and are extremely tense. This tenseness depends on their mutual support, for when one of them is cut the other falls loose. was cautious of applying preflure, left the blood fhould force its way betwixt the dura mater 3nd bs.ne, or diffufe itfelf upon the furface of the brain; he bled the boy largely in the arm, but it had no effect upon the haimorrhagy; and fearing to bring on a greater degree of inflammation by applying the trepan, he made a flight compreffion, and in the now languid ftate of the circulation, the bleeding was fuppreffcr'. 12 OF THE MEMBRANES OF THE BRAIN. OF THE SPHENOIDAL FOLDS. The lateral extremities of the tentorium are continued for- ward into acute lines, formed by the duplicature of the dura mater coming off from the edges of the pars petrosa of the tem- poral bones, and take firm hold on the posterior clynoid pro- cesses. From these two points a fold of the membrane stretch- es forward on each side to the anterior clynoid process, for- ming thus a hollow or cell for the lodgment of the pituitary gland. Another fold or duplicature of the dura mater runs onwards a little way from the edge of the little wing of Ingra- tius. These are the sphenoidal folds. Where the internal lamina of the dura mater forsakes the external to form the falx and tentorium, it leaves a channel or triangular canal; the basis of which triangle is the lamina of the membrane investing the cranium, while the tension ofthe partitions carries the apex out into an acute point. This forms a channel for receiving all the blood of the veins, and this ten- sion and triangular shape give a degree of incompressibility to the canals. These are the sinuses which receive the veins of the encephalon, and guard them from compression :—■ Section ofthe Longitudinal SinUs. Upon the surfaces of the dura mater there are many lacerti, or slips of fibres, which are intricately interwoven with the main body of the membrane, and strengthen it. These fibres are peculiarly strong in the angles, where the duplicatures pass inwards, giving firmness to the sinuses, and allowing the veins to insinuate their trunks betwixt them ; these fasciculi, OF THE MEMBRANES OF THE BRAIN. 13 or slips of fibres, and the sides of the sinuses, are the cordae Wiilisianae. They were considered by Bagleviand Pacchioni* as the tendons of the muscles of the dura mater. Pacchioni conceived that this membrane was muscular. Vicq d'Azyr observes, that in inflammation of the dura mater he has seen it red, and of a fleshy appearance ; and that such a circum- stance might have deceived Pacchioni, and made him believe that there were muscular bellies.f These physicians conceived that the contraction of the falx and dura mater raised the tentorium ; they even conceived that the action of the heart depended upon this motion of the dura mater.l; They were deceived by the pulsation in the ar- teries ofthe brain, communicated to the dura mater, after the operation of trepan, or in their experiments on living animals.§ The motion communicated to the dura mater those Italian anatomists conceived to depend on the rising ofthe tentorium. This motion, which is occasioned by the beating ofthe arteries ofthe brain, had been long before observed :|| some conceived it to be a motion in the brain itself, others believed it to depend on the sinuses.^} The motion caused by respiration was likewise observed.** M. de Lamure's conclusion was, that the motion ofthe brain was caused by the reflux ofthe blood towards it from the vena cava in expiration.ff He undertook to demonstrate this ; and he conceived his proof to be good, when, by pressing the ribs of a subject, he sawthe refluent blood swelling the jugular and abdominal cava. Haller observed the jugular veins swell, and become turgid, during expiration ; and he concluded, that the motion of the brain was occasioned by the refluent blood dis- tending the sinuses of the brain. But he did not believe, as * Thefewere Italian anatomifts. Pacchioni was phyfician to Clement XI. f Mem.del'Acad. Roy. 1781. i Duverney. § There is a diftin&ion in the movement of the dura mater to be obferved up- •n opening the fcull; one depending upon the pulfation of the arteries of the brain ; the other caufed by an obftruction to the exit of blood from the cranium, depending upon the lungs. " On voyoit bien la pulfation des arteres du cerveau, qui coni- " muniquoient quelque mouvement a la dure mere, mais ce mouvement n'avoit " aucune fymmetrie avec celui de la refpiration. Fatigue de ne rien voir apres " avoir fi Yien vu je comprimai la poitrine de l'animal: auffitot le cerveau fi gonfla " evidemment par le reflux du fang de la poitrine qui rempliffoit la jugulaire___Je " lachai la poitrine, et le cerveau redefcendit."—Exper. 78. Mem. ii. par. Haller, fur le Mouv. du. cerv.—" II arrivoit pourtant de terns en terns et fans que cela " continuat que le cerveau fe foulevoit dans l'expiration, et fe laiffoit repomper " dans l'infpiration." Exper. 79. f. chat. [| By Coiterus, Riolanus, Bartholin. *! Diemerbroeck. •* M. Schlichting Mem.des favans Etrangers, 1744. Lorry, Mem. prefect, a I' \cad. des Scien. par divers favans Etrangers. jf M. de Lamure ; vide PAcad. de Sciences, 1744. *4 OF THE MEMBRANES OF THE BRAIN. Lamure did, that this motion took place before the opening of the cranium, as well as after it. When the scull is opened by a wound, the dura mater still protects the brain, resisting inflammation, and giving the neces- sary and uniform support to the more delicate substance and vascular membrane of the brain ; but when the dura mater is lacerated by the trepan, or punctured, or worn by the pulsa- tion against the edge of the bone, there may be sudden hernia of part of the brain from coughing, or a rapid and diseased growth from the pia mater forming a fungus. Such fungus is, in some degree, peculiar to children, and is occasioned, I con- ceive, bv the taking away of that due compression which the resistance of the dura mater ought to give. OF THE PIA MATER. While the dura mater is closely connected with the crani- um, and in contact with the surface of the brain, but still un- connected with it, except by means of veins entering the sin- uses (and that only in the course ofthe sinuses :) the pia mater is closely attached to the brain, and passes into its inmost re- cesses. While the dura mater is firm and opaque, and not prone to inflammation, the pia mater is delicate, transparent, and extremely vascular. Like the dura mater, it is not endow- ed with sensibility ;* it is of great strength, considering its ap- parent delicacy.f The pia mater, which was formerly considered as a simple membrane, consists, in reality, of two membranes, the tuni- ca arachnoides, and the proper pia mater, or tunica vasculosa.l; The tunica arachnoides was discovered and commented upon by a society formed by Blasius Sladus Quina and Swam- merdam.§ They called it Arachnoides, because of its extreme tenuity. It was called also Membrana Cellulosa, from the appearance it took when they insinuated a blow-pipe and blew it up, separating it from the pia mater. This membrane is without the pia mater ; and while the pia mater sinks down into the sulci of the brain, this covers the surface uniformly, without passing into the interstices of the convolutions, or into the ventricles.|| • Haller, Oper. Minor.de. Part. Corpor. humani fent. & irrit. ■f- Sir C. Wintringham Exper. Effays. Taken comparatively, it is ftronger than the aorta. \ There are many, however, who with Lieutaud confider the arachnoid coat as the external lamella of the pia mater. § This was in 1665. I am, perhaps, not correcT; in faying they discovered it ; for Varolius defcribes it plainly, covering the medulla oblongata. ;' Haller Elemen. Phys. torn. iv. fee. viii. p. 7. OF THE MEMBRANES OF THE BRAIN. 15 This membrane is so extremely thin, that it cannot by dis- section be separated for any considerable space from the pia mater, and least of all, over the middle hemispheres of the brain. By the blow-pipe, indeed, we may raise it into cells, but it immediately subsides again ; on the posterior part of the cerebellum, on the spinal marrow and base of the brain, it is more easily raised and demonstrated.* It does not pass deep into the sulci of the brain, but unites them by an extremely de- licate cellular texture. The view which would incline me to consider the tunica arachnoides merely as a layer of the pia mater is this : when the vascular pia mater descends into the sulci, the tunica arach- noides does not follow it, but keeps to the uniform surface of the brain ; but when this vascular membrane is about to enter into some of the lesser sulci which are within the larger, it again parts with another lamella, while its more vascular part descends still deeper into the brain. OF THE PROPER PIA MATER, OR TUNICA VASCULOSA. The pia mater is a simple membrane, without either tendi- nous aponeurotic or muscular fibres. It is extremely vascular, but it is transparent in the interstices of its vessels : it is the membrane which immediately invests and connects itself with the substance of the brain ; and although delicate, it forms the support and strength of its cineritious and medullary substance. All vessels distributed in the body, however minute, are al- ways conveyed in membranes ; the pia mater then follows, or rather conveys the vessels not only into the cavities ofthe brain, but to every part of its substance, it being intimately blended with it.f We see it more distinctly descending in strong plica? into the interstices of the convolutions ; nor is it into them on- ly that it enters, but into every pore which conveys a vessel.^ The pia mater as it passes into the substance of the brain, di- vides and subdivides into partitions and cells, and every capil- lary vessel, and every molecule ofthe substance ofthe brain is invested and supported by its subdivisions. The pia mater is to the brain what the cellular membrane is to the other viscera * F. Ruyfchii Refponfio ad A. os Goelecke Epiftol ix. See Bidloo, table 10; but the membrane is fo delicate (nulla detur in corpore fubtilior, Ruyfchj that it can be but very imperfectly reprefenced by engraving. t Columbus, the afliftant of Veffalius, and afterwards Profeffor in Roma, ex- plained this intimate intertexture of the pia mater with the proper fubftance of ihc brain, fo far back as 1559. t When we tear off the pia mater from the brain (for it cannot be called diffec- tion,) it does not adhere merely at the fulci, but to the whole furface of the con- volutions ; and every where fmall vcffels enter, and with thefe vsflcijdefcfcnds alfo the lamina of the pia mater. 16 OF THE MEMBRANES OF THE BRAIN. and parts of the body ; for it is the peculiar matter lying in the interstitious cellular membrane (as in muscles, bones, &c.) that gives the peculiarity of character to the parts j* the cellu- lar membrane itself is nearly alike in all; therefore, in my judgment, the pia mater is rightly considered by some anato- mists as a cellular substance.f Malacarne says, I am much inclined to consider it with the illustrious Haller, as being composed of lamina, like common adipose membrane, and that the extreme arteries ramify through its cells, for, with a blow-pipe, we can raise it into cells like the common membrane; and if this be carefully done, the air may be made to pass from cell to cell, following the ar- teries in their course betwixt the lobuli, and in the substance of the brain.i; We can follow the pia mater into the ventri- cles, by tracing it betwixt the posterior lobe of the cerebrum and the cerebellum, where it forms the velum interpositum of Haller, and passes under the fornix. We can follow it also into the posterior horn of the lateral ventricles from the base of the brain, where the branches of the middle artery of the cerebrum pass into the lower part of the choroid plexus ; we trace it also into the bottom of the fourth ventricle. The pia mater lining the ventricles is more delicate, and less vascular than that seen upon the surface, and betwixt the convolutions of the brain. It has been said that the ventricles ofthe encephalon served to increase the surface ofthe pia mater, and that whatever pur- poses are served by that membrane and its vessels on the sur- tace of the brain, we must suppose the same performed by it within the ventricles.^ This seems more like a weighty con- clusion than it really is. We have seen how minutely distri- buted the pia mater is through the substance of the brain, inde- pendently of the ventricles ; and we shall find that the ventri- • " Sed cum continuo txiduo in inquifitione faciendo peifeveraffem ; tandem deprehendi cerebri fibrilla3 eadem rationc, continuataque ferie, fibi invicem an- nexas effe ; quemadmodum fibrillas carneas tendinibus adhaerere demonftravi ; cum igitur illam cerebri cum vafis fanguineis connexionem deprehendiffem ; et cam, quam ante dixi, variorum fructuum compagem attenderem ; iterum conclufi dominum, univerfi conditorem, in rerum crcatarum fabrica eafdem vel confimiles fere leges tenuiffe."—" Igitur adverti fibrillas certo loco fibi conjunctas, mox alio loco ab invicem divertere, paido poft iterum coeuntes. Et, fi redte memini, con- fimiles conjunc^iones obfervavi in mufculis cordis," &c. Leeuwenhoek Epift. Phyf. xxxiv. f Bergen. Program de pia matre. See Haller Anat. { Such is the profufion of veffels diftributed to inconceivable minutencfe, that it hasbetn confidered as entirely compofed of veffels, and received the name of cho- rion, from the membrane of the fecundines. Galen de ufu part. 1. viii. cap. 8___ Malacarne, part i. fee. 24,3. § Dr. Monro's Nervous Syftem, chap. vi. OF THE MEMBRANES OF THE BRAIN. 17 cles have important uses, without the necessity of supposing them so subservient to the distribution of the pia mater. As the tunica arachnoides is of a peculiar nature, and has few if any vessels, and as it covers the external surface ofthe brain only, it seems to me probable that this membrane is the cause why effusions in the ventricles are so common, and why fluids are so seldom found betwixt the surface ofthe brain and the dura mater. When by the diseased action of the vessels of the pia mater on the surface ofthe brain an effusion is thrown out, it very seldom lies upon the surface unconfined ; but fre- quently fluids are contained in sacs of the arachnoid coat, be- twixt the convolutions of the brain, or raise it into pellucid ve- sicles upon the surface. The want of a tunica arachnoides up- on the pia mater ofthe ventricles, may be a cause ofthe fluids being so much more readily secreted into them. The raising ofthe pia mater into vesicles by the action of the vessels ofthe pia mater, is rather an argument for the dis- tinct nature of these membranes. The tunica arachnoides is raised by the action ofthe vessels ofthe pia mater, as the cuti- cle is raised into blisters by the inflammatory action ofthe ves- sels ofthe cutis, while no other membranes of the body take such an appearance in their disease. They inflame, indeed • they thicken ; their lamina become more distinct, or their cel- lular substance fills with water, or hydatids are formed in them; but this appearance of water secreted under the tunica arach- noides is quite peculiar. Section ofthe right Hemisphere. 1. Central Medullary Matter......%. Cineritious or Cortical Matter. OF THE SUBSTANCE OF THE BRAIN. The cerebrum and cerebellum consist distincdy of two very different substances ; the cineritious and medullary matter — Vol. III. C 18 OF THE MEMBRANES OF THE BRAIN. The cineritious, or ash-coloured matter, forms the superficial or outer part ofthe encephalon, and is therefore called also the cortical part. The cineritious matter varies much in colour ; in the crura cerebri it is very dark ; in the pons Varolii it is redder ; in the corpora olivaria* it is yellower. The consist- ency of this matter also varies considerably in different parts ; it is soft in the base ofthe brain, betwixt the optic nerves and anterior commissure, and in the third ventricle. The medul- lary matter is chiefly in the internal part of the brain, forming a kind of nucleus or white central part; but in many parts of the brain, there is a mixture of these which form striae! ; and in some of the eminences, the internal part is cineritious, while the external part, or what we might here call the cortical part, is medullary.i; The cortical or cineritious substance does not blend gradu- ally with the white medullary matter, but on the contrary, their line of distinction is abrupt: an intervening substance has been observed. In inflammation of the brain, particularly, it has been said, that this third substance has been found. This may be merely the effect of light upon the union of the two sub- stances. We, however, often observe an appearance of suc- cessive coloured circles upon the edge ofthe medullary matter of the arbor vitae, in the cerebellum. It has been asserted by M* Ludwig,§ that the masses and striae of the cineritious substance, dispersed through the inter- nal parts of the brain, have a communication with each other. This, however, is denied by Vicq'dAzyr.|| He conceives, that the cineritious substances ofthe pons varolii, or ofthe cor- pora olivaria, have no communication with the cineritious sub- stance in any other part ofthe brain ; and that in several parts ofthe brain the cineritious substance is surrounded and isolat- ed by the medullary matter. Its great importance (which • Vicq d'Azyr.—" Exterior cerebri totius facies, donee in fpinalem medullam abeat, plerumque colore eft fubrubride cinereo, vel Janguide ruffeo. Fufciora funt cerebra fanguine ditia, e. g. hominum apoplexia enedtorum, vel hominum craffioris fanguinis; pallidiffima vero funt cerebra hydropica vel hominum pituitoforum vel haemorrhagia mortuorum. Dubio procul color cerebri fanguinis temperaturam fequitur, et ideo pallidius eft infantibus, quam adultis." Sommerring hum. corp. fab. vol. iv. p. 41. f Thus the cineritious fubftance is mixed with the medullary matter in the cor- pus callofum, in the corpora ftriata, the thalami nervorum opticorum, in the tuber- cula quadrigemina,the immenentia mamillaria ; in the crura cerebri; in the pons varolii; in the corpora olivaria, and medulla fpinalis. J: " E xerampelina fulla fuperficie del cervelletto, e dei corpi fcanalati quando non evvi aqua nei ventriculo; fofca nei talami de' nervi ottici, e nelle gambe del eervello, dove qua e la fuole avere del nericante giallognola zolferina, e talvolta granadiglia, nelle eminenze olivari." Malacarne, parte ii. fee. 15. § De cinerea cerebri fubftantia,Lepfiae. t| Hift. de l'Acad. Roy. an 1781^.507. OF THE MEMBRANES OF THE BRAIN. 19 should never have been doubted) has been deduced from its be- ing so generally found towards the origin of the nerves.* The cineritious substance seems to have a much greater quantity of blood circulating in it than the medullary sub- stance. Its vessels come by two distinct routes, partly from the extremities of those arteries which appear in large branches upon the surface of the brain, and partly by vessels which pen- etrate through the medullary substance from the base of the brain. Ruysch and Albinus have made the most minute in- jections of ihis part of the brain. The former conceived it to consist entirely of vessels ; but Vicq d'Azyr and Albinus found always, in their experiments, that a great proportion of it remained colourless after the most minute injection. It is, indeed, very improbable, that so soft a body should be entirely composed of vessels. How, for example, can we suppose the commissura mollis, or cineritious matter, on the sides and bot- ti.m ofthe third ventricle, or the almost transparent lamina, which we find in some parts, to be composed of vessels ? The white medullary substance appears to be a pulpy mass. We observe no peculiarity of structure in it towards the surface ofthe brain, where it is contiguous to the cortical matter ; but towards the origin of the nerves it takes a more fibrous appearance. This appearance of fibres is not owing to any peculiarity in the medullary matter, but to the manner in which the pia mater involves it. The medullary matter, be- ing chiefly internal, has every where through the brain a com- munication from the fore to the back part, from the upper part to the base: from the great central part it extends in form of stria?, into the corpora striata and thajami ; it invests the emi- nences in the lateral ventricles ; and those upper parts have communication with the medullary substance ofthe base. M. Meckel found, upon comparing the brains of an Euro- pean and of a negro, that the medullary matter differed very much in colour. In the negro, instead ofthe whiteness ofthe European, the medullary matter was of a yellow colour, and nearly like the cineritious matter: he observed alsO, that this very peculiar distinction of colour was only to be observed * tl faut que les ufages de la fubftance grife foient tres-importans; car indepen- damment de la portion de cette fubftance que les circonvolutions contiennent, et qui femble appartenir a la maffe blanche du cerveau, ou on obferve des amas plus ou moins confiderables pres des diverfes origines des ncrfs : ainfi pres de la premiere et la deuxieme paire, font les corps ftrits ct les couches optiques; la troifieme paire eft pres d'un efpece noiratre que je decrirai ailletirs; la quatrieme paire fort au deffous des tubercules quadrijumcanx, dont le noyau eft compofe de fubftance grife, la cinquieme, la fixieme, la septieme, fe trouyent aux environs de le protu- berance annulaire, ou la fubftance grife eft melee avec la blanche; la huitieme ct la neuvieme font placees pres de l'eminence olivaire, ou j'ai obferve un melange particulier de fubftance grife. Mem. de l'Acad. Scien. an 1781, p. 507. 20 OF THE MEMBRANES OF THE BRAIN. when the section was recently made, and that the darker co- lour of the medullary matter became fainter when exposed to the air.* OF THE OBSERVATIONS MADE UPON THE MINUTE STRUC- TURE OF THE BRAIN. The opinions regarding the structure ofthe brain have had a dependence on the general doctrines ofthe structure of other secreting organs, and it is, of course, connected with the dis- putations of Malpighi and Ruysch, because the doctrine of the glandular nature of the brain, and the belief of the ner- vous fluid being a secretion, has, in all ages, formed the ba- sis of the most favourite theories.f Malpighi found, on throwing in black and fluid injection, that there remained always particles colourless, and to which the injection did not penetrate. He conceived these to be glandular follicules, and that the cineritious substance of the brain consisted of this follicular or glandular structure, while the medullary matter of the brain was merely the fibrillas of the excretory duct. This opinion was founded on conjecture, with but a very poor shew of experiments, viz. by boiling the substance of the brain in oil, he found it take a granulated ap- pearance, as if formed of small grains, or little glands.^: Such was the received opinion until Ruysch, with a despoti- cal authority, swayed the opinions of physiologists : he alleged, in proof only his own experiments and preparations, in which other anatomists could not follow nor refute him, and therefore * " La moelle du negre etoit d'un jaune clair, tirant un pen fur le gris, tandis que. celJe de 1'Europeen etoit d'une parfaite blancheur.'' " Celui du negre etoit d'un jaune noiratre et celui de 1'Europeen d'une couleur blanche—Prolongeant en- fuit la diffe&ion jufqu' aux grands ventricules du cerveau j'ai coupe horizontale- ment les corps ftries et les couches des nerfs optiques. C'eft la ou la difference a paru vraiment etonnante, le corps ftrie dans le negre etant prefque de la couleur prune d'une ecorce d'arbre, au lieu que celui de 1'Europeen etoit couleur de chair pale tirant au cendre," &c. f Indeed this do&rine of the glandular nature of the brain has defcended from Hippocrates—" Caput quoque ipfum glandulas habet cerebrum enim eft ut glandulae album eft et friabile," &c. | " Pedamentum, fupra quod pofita eft philia in qua confervatur portio cerebri in liquore, quam decoxi in oleo olivarnm per horas, ficuti, facere affolet Dr. Vieuffens. Ea autem plane mutilis et perversa eft preparatis, nam nihilum quidem vafculofi vifui occurrit poft decoctionem in dicto oleo, et quod unufquifque tentare poteft ita ut inventor neutiquam habendus fit Dr. Vieuffens Sc. quod cerebri cor- tex nil fit, nifi extremitates vaforum fanguintorum : in ea autem nemo haftenus (quod fciam) me imitari poterit aut anologum quid fecit." Ruysch Thes. An. x. No. xxxii. OF THE MEMBRANES OF THE BRAIN. 21 they acquiesced. His most unaswerable and most insulting argument was " veni et vide.*" According to Ruysch, the cortical substance of the brain is entirely vascular, and has no appearance of a glandular or follicular structure ; nay, he conceived it to be entirely com- posed of arteries.f But as Malacarne observes, though wc suppose the extremities of the arteries of the cineritious sub- stance to be more minute than those which are distributed to the microscopical corpusculi of the smallest visible insect, there must still remain some part, which is not composed of vessels ; and in regard to the veins of the cineritious substance we may appeal to Albinus, who, from the substance of the brain, finds many veins connected with the arteries of the cineritious substance when he carefully lifts the pia mater. But there is this peculiarity in the distribution of the blood vessels of the brain, that, though the cineritious substance be the most vascular, yet, in the medullary matter, we see the vessels with large open mouths, and more distinct than in the cineritious substance. In following the blood vessels from the base of the brain into the medullary substance, we see them distinct, and of considerable magnitude j but when they are about to enter the cineritious substance, they disperse into minute branches i. In the same manner those arteries, which are carried into the sulci of the surface by the pia mater, branch into extreme minuteness before they finally penetrate the cineritious substance.^ Leeuwenhoeck|| observed, in the cortical substance of the brain, a pellucid, crystalline, and to appearance oily matter ; he calls this, therefore, the substantia vitrea. When he had put a small portion of this under his glass, he saw a fluid, * " Milites quands hoftium adventum audiunt, clamant ad arma! ad arma! fie ego dico hie ad vifum ! ad vifum !" Refponfio ad J. Ch. Bohlium. •f- Vieuffens was latterly of the fame opinion, and is accufed of plagiarifm by Ruyfch. Accordingly, we find, that, in fome parts of his works he defcribes the glands and ducts of Malpighi. \ Leeuwenhoeck faw, in the fubftance ofthe brain, but efpecially in the corti- cal fubftance, red blood veffels, but fo delicate, that he could not comprehend how the globules of the red blood could pafs along them ; and what appeared more particular, they were of a deeper colour than the red particles themfelves: for, when feen fingly, they appeared to have very little colour. This he explained by an experiment made upon a certain little animal. After it had fucked blood very plentifully, he obferved, that the blood was broken down by dipeftion, and con- veyed through the limbs and horns of the creature, fo as to make it univerfully red. So here he conceives that the globules of the blood may be broken dowt: and ahered in their fbape to enter the minute veffels of the brain. § Malacarne, Part II. fed. 18 || He was born in Delft, in Holland, 163*, and died 1723 He is celebrated fo.- his microfcopical discoveries; his papers are chiefly in the Tranfa&ions of the Royal Society of London, about the year 1674. 22 OF THE MEMBRANES OF THE BRAIN. which he at first conceived might have escaped from the globules that were necessarily cut by the knife. This fluid also he found to consist of very minute globules, thirty-six times less than those of the blood* These small globules he conceived to have probably constituted a fluid, which, during the life of the animal, was moveable, and in vessels, though now in death congealed and fixed.:}: The colour ofthe cortical substance he found to depend upon the minute ramification of the vessels which were of a dark brown colour, while, in the medullary part, they were clearer and more transparent. In- dependently of this distinction of vessels, he could observe little difference in the medullary and cineritious substance ; the refraction ofthe rays of light amongst the transparent globules being the cause of the whiteness of the former. R. della Torre, in his microscopical observations, describes globuli in the brain ; he says, that he saw them floating in a pellucid viscous fluid. But ProchaskaJ thinks Delia Torre must be mistaken in this, for when he took a small portion of the brain, he saw it consisting of innumerable globules, which continued to adhere to each other, even after three months maceration in water: and thence he concludes, that it could not be as R. della Torre conceived, that these spherical bodies move from the brain on towards the extremities of the nerves ; nor do these bodies lie imbedded in a glutinous fluid (he con- tinues) but they are connected by the extremely minute and pellucid sepimentae of the pia mater, and by the vessels which pervade both the cortical and medullary matter, and which nourish as well as support and connect these corpusculi. Prochaska cannot, from his own observations, determine whether these globular bodies be convoluted vessels, or what they are. R. della Torre had observed, that they were largest in the cortical part, less in the medullary substance, still di- minishing in thq medulla oblongata, and least of all in the nerves ; but succeeding observation did not support this asser- tion.^ Malacarne expresses himself to be nearly ofthe same opinion in regard to the vesicular structure of the cortical sub- stance of the brain. The minute processes of the pia mater, says he, embrace and support the medullary substance, which * Anatomica Contemplatio, 30. + Among thofe globules, of which the brain is compofed, he faw alfo globules ofthe blood, which it was eafy to diftinguifh by their roundnefs. Thefe red glo- bules, he fuppofes, had escaped in confequence of the minute veffels having been cut by the knife. £ Tracl. Anatom. de StrucT:. Nervorum. § This was certainly a theoretical deception ; it is like the accurate obfervation of Tracaffati, who could diftinguifh a difference of tafte in the medullary and cineritious fubftance of the brain. OF THE MEMBRANES OF THE BRAIN. 23 is surrounded with a matter of a darker colour, and less dis- tinctly fibrous, but not less essential, and which is composed of corpuscules, that, in figure and arrangement, resemble the vesicles of the pulp of a lemon.* Many authors endeavour to support their conjectures regar- ding this vesicular structure ofthe brain by morbid dissection.f We see the brain frequently degenerated into hydatids, or into little vessels, or into knobular glandular-like schirrosities. I have seen this vesicular appeal ance in great portions of the pia mater. I have seen the pia mater with innumerable little bodies like miliary glands upon it ; and also the whole upper and external part of the brain degenerated into one mass of disease. It was hard, schirrous, tuberculated, and like a dis- eased gland.J But I cannot conceive that any conclusion^ in regard to the natural structure ofthe brain, can be drawn from such appearances. They are to be considered as the diseases of the vessels and membranes rather than of the peculiar mat- ter of the brain. When the brain is examined in the foetus ofthe early months, although the substance of the brain is extremely soft, and even of a fluid consistence, the membranes and vessels are fully formed, exquisitely minute, and perfect in all their processes, so that they give form and firmness to the brain. We see, con- sequently, that the due increase and complete organization of the brain is a gradual process, and like the growth of the other parts of the body. OF THE SENSIBILITY OF THE SUBSTANCE OF THE BRAIN. It cannot but appear strange, that the very source or centre, to which every sensation is referred, should itself be destitute of sensation ; yet, we are assured, by the experiments of Hal- ler and Zinn, that the cortical substance of the brain has been irritated, without the animal being convulsed, or giving signs of pain ;§ but when the medullary part ofthe brain is irritated, the effects are instantaneous, and the animal is convulsed. It has been observed, that as the injury of a nerve causes convul- * Malacarne, page a. feci:. 4. f Wepfer de cicuta aquatica. Mangetus.—Malacarne, &c. j There has been obferved a ftruclure like the bronchial gland. Huber, Obfcr- vationes Anatom.—A/;v ^/Tarelnoms Plate rft//e Glands. ,31 P. us Vol. JR. P.2S The /..mjitudtnal Shm* laid open % the Glandular Facchumi OF THE VEINS OF THE BRAIN. 29 chioni had taken his plate, was previously macerated in vine- gar. These bodies being soft and vascular, have allowed the minute injection to transude in some of the experiments of anatomists, which has given rise to the opinion of the actual communication of the arteries of the dura mater with the sinuses. As to their use,* I am in considerable doubt. Joan. Fautonus (in his letters to Pacchioni) conceives that they give out a fluid into the sinus, to dilute the venous blood.f Pac- chioni describes ducts passing from them to the pia mater, (which are those connections that we have already remarked,) and conceives that they lubricate the surface, or communicate with the substance of the brain; and that they are pressed, and their secretion promoted by the motion of the chordae Willisianac, and the action ofthe dura mater.i; I should rather conceive that they had a valvular action on the mouths ofthe veins ; they project from the mouths of the veins into the sinus, and the blood passing from the veins must filter through them, and be checked in its retrograde course, and perhaps obstructed in its natural course when they are enlarged. As these bodies differ very much in the variety of subjects, they must sometimes impede the free egress ofthe blood from the veins of the cerebrum into the longitudinal sinus, and cause disease, especially as they are softer and larger in old men.§ At all events, they are too much over- looked in morbid dissection. The veins which answer to the arteria corporis callosi, and which are seen lying upon the corpus callosum in a verv nne cellular membrane, rise and pass into the inferior longitudinal sinus, that which is formed in the lamina of the inferior edge of the falx. * It is curious that thefe bodies arc confined to the longitudinal finus. " Mirum, & xque animadverfione dignum eft, hafce glandulas ad folius longitudinalis finus latera reperiri cum in lateralibus finubus vel nunquam, vel raro admodum per pauca earundem veftigia adnotentur, ubi prxferum prxfati canales dcorfum indi- nare incipiunt, antequam ab interfeptorum dorfodifcedant.'' Pacchioni, p. 117. f " Ego aqueum humorem in glandulis egregari. fluere lympbam in tubnlis, quos tecum lymphaticos appello, nunquam negaverim, fed liquidi fiuxum ab utrifque verfus finurn magis quam verfus ambitum cerebri verifimilem, magifque naturx legibus confonum efle affirmo." Fautonus Epift. D. A. Pacch. Oper. Pacch. 177. t '• Ex iis autem in minimum quidem vafculum lymphaticum prodire confpicere potui." Ruyfch. § " Fibris carneis tenuiffimis circumambiuntur unguis, unde colorem carneo- palliduni nancifci videntur : in fenibus vero, in quibus hujufmodi fibrx enervatx nimis laxamur, et ferme difparent, glandulx albefcentes, & magis turgidx cemuntur : quod, & in hydrocephalic!", comatofis, & id genus aliis obfervari poffe arbitrarer." Pacchioni Oper. p. 126,127. JO OF THE VEINS OF THE BRAIN. OF THE INTERNAL VEINS OF THE BRAIN, AND OF THE CHOROID PLEXUS. Under this title of the internal veins of the brain, the cho roid plexus comes naturally to be considered. The Choroid Plexus and Vena Galeni taken from the Brain and spread so as to shout their connection. X, Choroid Plexus ofthe right Side, 2. Plexus of the left Side spread out. 3. Arteriei to this part, -where it lies in the interior horn. 3. Plexus ofthe J,d. Ventricle formed by the ^function of I. 2. J. Vena Galeni. The most remarkable, thing in the ventricles of the brain is, that they have lying in them this very peculiar vascular struc- ture, the choroid plexus. The lining membrane of these cavities is extremely thin and smooth, insomuch, that some anatomists have denied its existence ; but through the whole ventricle there run certain folds or plaits of this membrane, which are so loaded with vessels as to resemble a fleshy sub- stance, and to lose altogether their resemblance of the lining membrane. The plaits, before they are unravelled, look like masses of tortuous vessels, lying loose and unconnected in the bottom ofthe ventricles. The largest portion of each plexus choroides comes up from the posterior prolongation of the lateral ventricles; they then run forwards. In each ventricle they lie in the groove, be- twixt the thalamus nervi optici and corpus striatum; and cover the tenia semicircularis geminum. These two plexus of the lateral ventricles unite under the anterior crus ofthe fornix, OF THE VEINS OF THE BRAIN. 31 and form a small plexus, which is continued upon the inferior surface of the velum interpositum, and even into the third ventricle. Again, there is a plexus which lies in the fourth ventricle. Vicq d'Azyr also describes, as occasionally oc- curring, little insulated plexus attached to the veins, branching on the corpora striata.* Thus each division ofthe brain has its choroid plexus. These vascular webs must have an important use. I should conceive that they chiefly secreted the fluids of the ventricle ; for I believe the tortuosity to be the most unequivocal mark of the activity of its vessels. This opinion, however, is nothing new.f Another prevailing idea was, that the blood accumu- lated in these convoluted vessels occasioned such a gentle con- tinued heat as favoured the circulation of the spirits through the cavities of the brain, and preserved the fluidity of the water of the ventricle.^ Great variety of opinions have pre- vailed regarding the structure of those bodies. We see them consisting of knots of convoluted vessels; chiefly veins; or these at least are most evident from their size, and the colour of their blood. These convolutions of vessels are by many good anatomists described as glands. Varolius, Sylvius, Wharthon, Willis, Santorini, and Lieutaud, consider them as such.§ Three sets of arteries pass up to the plexus choroides, from the base betwixt the crura of the brain; they come, 1st, from the curve ofthe internal carotid artery; 2d, from the communication betwixt the basilar and carotid ar- tery; 3d, from the basilar artery, and most posterior part ofthe branch of communication. These arteries, which are small, " Sur le c&te des ventricules lateraux, j'ai quelquefois obferve' de petits plexus choroides ifolcs, que accompagnoient quelquefuns de ces rameaux des veins de Galien, que Ton voit paffer fousle txnia femicircularis, & s'etcndra fur le corps fine." Vicq d'Azyr Memoir. l'Acad. Roy. 1781, p. 540. f The fuppofed glands of the plexus choroides were conceived to fecrete the fluid of the ventricles. Where the plexus lies upon the pofterior crura of the fornix, it is often difeafed, having knots like glands, or, being raifed into veficles, like hydatids. " Eas bulbs humorem ventriculorum fecernere olim conjeiftura fuit. Verum vitio cum nafcantur vix perpetuum habitum generare idonex erunt." Haller, torn. iv. 48. { See Duverney, torn i. p. s$. " Ut enim fanguis intra finuum cavitates aggeftus, Balnei calidioris vicem preftat, quo fpiritus animates in extima & corti- cali cerebri parte uberius diftillcntur: ita fanguis intra plexus hujus vafa exilia contentus, quo iidem fpiritus in penitiori ac medullari subftantia idonee circulentur Balnei minoris, & magis temperati loco efle videtur." Willis Cerebri Anat. p. 47. § Galen gives a good description of the choroid plexus; he defcribes the in- numerable veins of which it is compofed, and their joining the fourth Gnus by the vein which retains his name. Some have confufed themfelves with a paffage of Ruyfch. Thes. iii. No. lxv. &c. in which he is fpeaking of the choroid plexus, where it appears in the bafe of the fcull, from the bottom of the fourth ventricle. They have underftood him to fay, that the plexus was covered not with the pi;< mater, but with the tunica arachnoides. 32 OF THE VEINS OF THE BRAIN. are convoluted into great minuteness* in the membrane, and th : , hood is returned by veins, which taking a very tortuous course, seem to entangle their branches, and form a mesh ot veir.s. The blood of the two plexus of the lateral ventricles, and that of the third, is conveyed into the velum interpositum, or that membrane which stretches under the fornix, and over the third ventricle. The branches of veins also which extend themselves upon the sides of the lateral ventricles, and into the processus digitalis, being gathered together upon this mem- brane, open into the vena galeni, or rather form it. The most remarkable branches of veins in the lateral ventri- cle are these : a considerable branch is seen to collect its bran- ches upon the anterior part of the ventricle, and in the anterior sinus, or horn of the ventricle. This vein runs back towards the anterior crus of the fornix, and dips under it, just above the communication of the ventricles ; and joins the veins in the velum of Haller. Other small veins are seen collecting their branches upon the corpora striata; and passing under the centrum semicirculare geminum, connect themselves with the plexus. Again several branches of veins are extended in the posterior part of the ventricle. These are from the medullary substance of the posterior lobe of the cerebrum. They pass under the posterior crus ofthe fornix and join the vena galeni. Lastly a vein remarkably tortuous, frequently full of blood, passes forward and is seen at intervals in the plexus choroides. This vein taking an acute turn, joins its fellow under the an- terior crura of the fornix and is reflected backwards and under , the fornix, so as to form the beginning of the vena galeni. The vena galeni then is the great central vein ofthe brain. It stretches from the extremity of the fourth sinus into the in- ternal part of the brain, to receive the blood from the mem- brane lining the ventricles,—from the substance of the brain,— from the plexus choroides,—and from the velum interposi- tum. f It lies under the posterior part of the corpus callosum, under the fornix and above the nates and testes. It is en- tangled in the velum itself. It consists of two great branches which lie parallel to each other, and which sometimes have the • " Huncce plexum nil effe niG arteriolas, ad vifum fuccofas, a naturali confti- tutione arteriofa non nihil recedentes, mirumque in modum contortas, ferpentino- que modo reptantes, glandulafque rrprefentantes." Ruyfch, Thes. v. AiTer, quartus No. lxviii. Not. 2. f The velum lying upon the nate , and teftes, and adhering to them and the pineal gland, the vena galeni receives here alfo veins from thofc bodies, and from the upper part of the cerebellum. OF THE VEINS OF THE BRAIN. 33 appearance of being twisted, and these unite before they enter the fourth or straight sinus. In the basis of the brain the veins are not remarkable nor do they require any description distinct from the sinuses into which they open. They are small, having little way to run ; and before they become large trunks, they empty themselves into the numerous lesser sinuses betwixt the dura mater and base of the scull.—* This is perhaps a provision against the pressure of the brain. In passing into those sinuses, the veins take a long oblique course betwixt the lamellae of the dura mater ; which has given occasion to anatomists to describe many intricate lesser sinuses. OF THE PARTICULAR SINUSES. Although by the term sinus we are to understand the great veins of the brain, yet as having some circumstances pecu- liar to them, it is well tO distinguish therri by a distinct appella- tion. SUPERIOR LONGITUDINAL SINUS. This is a triangular channel, running in the falx from the crista galli of the aethmoid bone to the crucial ridge of the oc- cipital bone. It is not constant in its origin. Sometimes it begins from a blind foramen before the crista galli.* Some- times from the orbital sinus."j" In some subjects it begins only opposite to the fontanelle, or even further back, and then at once swells out to a large size. As the sinus passes backwards it is gradually enlarging for the reception of the veins from the surface of the cerebrum.—■ As we have already demonstrated by the marginal plate of the section ofthe longitudinal sinus (page 12,) the base ofthe an- gle is curved, answering to a sulcus, which runs in all the length ©f the cranium, from the aethmoid bone to the crucial ridge of * Malacarne, Haller, Gautier. f Thefe Gnufes as frequently are continued into the inferior longitudinal Gnus or into the circular or elliptical Gnus; they are like azure ftreaks under the dura mater, covering the orbital procefs. " Molti fra i voti biflunghi, ovali, tondi, irre- gulari, che ft vidono all', angolo inferior del fono L. S. Sono caverne cieche o le une cofle altre communicanti lafciate dai gia defcritti fafci della fibrofa, fenza che ad cfle giunga vafo aliuno." Malacarne, p. 94. " Hx cellulx ab expofito Gnu ad verticem ufque, uberiores, atque magis amplx pcrfpiciuntur, et inequaliter hinc inde locantur ; ipfarum plurimx vacux funt ha- bentque orificia in oppofitasquaG partes hiantia ; membrania circumteguntur qux eft inftar valvulx femilunaris.totam tamen cavitatem non bccludentis ; reliquae ve- ro faveolas tantummodo impervias rcprefentant." Pacchioni,p. 124. Vol. III. E 34 OF THE VEINS OF THE BRAIN. the occipital bone. The lateral planes are drawn tense and converge into an acute point ; the angle formed by the splitting of the internal layers of the dura mater, is strengthened by strong slips of fibres, which upon the inside of the sinus have the effect of making it irregular, and in some degree having the appearance of cells, into some of which cells the probe en- ters, and leads to the veins on the surface of the brain ; others are blind, or lead to lesser sinuses, which not unfrequently run parallel for some length to the great sinus ; or the probe passes from one of these cells to another. Sometimes, howe- ver, the sinus has no such irregularities, but is straight and smooth through its whole length.* This sinus has in some rare instances been found of a square shape ; its lower surface serving as a roof for another sinus of a triangular form, which, for some way, runs parallel with the great sinus, and which was of course also included in the lamina ofthe falx—these Malacarne calls seni subalterni. Ir- regular lesser sinuses are by no means uncommon, and they form, sometimes, communications through a great extent of the longitudinal sinus ; or again it will be found that the longi- tudinal sinus deviates considerably, in some subjects, from the straight line, taking a curve or circle, generally behind the fontanelle ; or it sends off branches, which again unite with it; or it is fairly divided. In all these cases the chords or fascicu- li of the dura mater stretch out over the sinuses, and protect them from compression. Instead of reaching backwards to the crucial line upon the occipital bone, the longitudinal sinus has been found to divide at the beginning of the lambdoidal suture, and to follow them in a direction towards the petrous bonef while the lateral sin- uses, running in the duplicature of the tentorium, were reduc- ed to a very narrow compass. From the strength of the connections of the sinuses, and from the languid course of the blood through them, I scarcely believe that the sinus has ever suffered the distention, which Malacarne describes in some cases. I should rather suppose that what he mentions had been natural and congenital en- largements ; especially considering that the sinuses, like the other veins of the body, are very apt to be irregular. * The internal membrane of the finus is perfectly fmooth, and is continued into the coats of the internal jugular veins; it is ofthe fame nature with the interna' coat ofthe vein. + Malacarne, part i. 148. OF THE VEINS OF THE BRAIN. 35 LATERAL SINUSES, OR THE FIRST AND SECOND OF THE ANCIENTS. The lateral sinuses are formed by the splitting ofthe lamina of the tentorium, as the longitudinal sinus is by that of the falx. From the crucial ridge ofthe occipital bone they stretch nearly horizontally ; following the connections ofthe tentori- um in a direction toward the petrous bone ; then they take a curve downwards and forward, to terminate in the internal ju- gular vein ; passing through the foramen lacerum of the tem- poral and occipital bones. Very frequently the one lateral sinus is larger than the other, generally the right is the larger, and sometimes the left is en- tirely wanting.* They diverge from the termination of the superior longitu- dinal sinus at the crucial point of the occipital bone : but some- times they are irregular, diverging higher, and even passing round in the circle of the posterior part of the cranium, at some distance from the tentorium.f The right lateral sinus for the most part begins higher than the left. It is generally longer, and may be considered as the continuation ofthe longitudinal sinus. Nay, in some subjects, the right or left lateral sinus begins from the longitudinal one, while that of the other side is continued from the fourth, or the torcular hierophili; and the lateral sinuses are separated at their origin by a membraneous isthmus—if it should happen that the left lateral sinus receives the superior longitudinal one, it would be found to be four times the size ofthe right; some- times, also, the longitudinal sinus, turning to the right is con- tinued into the sinus of that side ; and the left lateral sinus opens or begins by two or more irregular holes4 I have seen a more remarkable variety of the lateral sinuses. The blood which should flow from all those parts of the brain from which the superior and inferior longitudinal sinus, and the vena Galeni, and fourth sinus are derived, seemed, instead of passing by the root ofthe tentorium, to have forsaken these channels ; the lateral sinuses were left diminutive : and the blood had taken a course in the tract of the posterior occipital sinuses, and, after incircling the foramen magnum, it gained its usual outlet.^ * Lieutaud Anat. Hift. + Malacarne. j See Morgagni Adverfaria VI, tab. i. fig. i. § There are inftances of th? lateral finufes opening into thr external jugular. v:r>. 36 OF THE VEINS OF THE BRAIN. The angles ofthe lateral sinuses are strengthened by mem- braneous fasciculi; which pass radiated from point to point, or are confusedly intricated ; betwixt these the veins enter as in the longitudinal sinus ; where the sinus descends from the level of the tentorium in the angle formed by the occipital and petrous bones, there are many strong irregular fasciculi of fibres : under this point, being no longer protected from com- pression, by their triangular shape and the tension of the ten- torium, the sinuses are irregular ; they are now sunk in the sulci of the bones, and the dura mater spreads its sheath over them. The great irregular cavity,* in which the extremities of the lateral sinuses lie,"f" and the foramen lacerum, have much varie- ty, and their straightness seems to affect the size of the sinus in its whole length.^ OF THE INFERIOR LONGITUDINAL SINUS. The inferior longitudinal sinus, or simply the lesser, or in- ferior sinus of the falx, runs in that edge of the falx which penetrates betwixt the hemispheres of the cerebrum. It is extremely small towards the fore part of the falx ; but, as it passes backwards, it goes on increasing by the accession of veins which come from the hemispheres, and corpus callosum, and from the falx itself. It is formed betwixt the lamina of the falx. Sometimes it runs in its very edge, but as frequently a little way removed from it; sometimes it is found beginning very far back in the falx. The fore part of it is more like a vein running in the falx than a sinus. It is in general to be seen more superficial, and in every respect like a vein, (there being no provision for preserving it from compression) upon one side ofthe falx. It very often takes a waving course upon the falx ; while it receives veins, which branch in the sub- stance ofthe falx, and form communications betwixt it and the superior longitudinal sinus. It opens into the straight or in- ternal sinus, near the edge of the tentorium. * Lower conceives that the fize of the jugular foffa was the effect ofthe reflux ofthe blood ; and that the greater fize of the finus of the right fide was to be tra- ced to the practice of nurfcs laying their children chiefly on the right fide ! See alfo Morgagni Adverfaria Anat. f See Will's Anatom. Cereb. Hum. p. 29. and the plate. | Some very large veins open into the lateral finus ; they are derived from the pofterior lobes of the cerebrum and cerebellum. Thefe infinuating irregularly betwixt the lamina of the tentorium, and running for fome way, have been con- fidered as additional Gnufcs. See Haller, torn. iv. p. 149. OF THE VEINS OF THE BRAIN. 37 OF THE INTERNAL, STRAIGHT, OR FOURTH SINUS * I would call this the internal sinus, from its situation, but more particularly from its receiving the veins from the internal part of the brain. This sinus is formed chiefly by the vena galeni; which, coming out from betwixt the corpus callosum and tuberculi quadrigemini, enters betwixt the lamina of the middle part of the tentorium, where it is united to the falx ; so that by the tension of these two partitions this sinus is drawn into a triangular form, and is as incompressible as those sinuses which run connected with the bone. It opens, for the most part, by an oval mouth, formed by strong pillars of fibres, into the left lateral sinus, rather than directly in the middle ofthe communication ofthe three great sinuses. We shall find this like the other sinuses suffering considerable variety ; or irregular smaller sinuses will often be found running betwixt the lamina ofthe tentorium. POSTERIOR OCCIPITAL SINUSES. These are so called in opposition to some irregular and small sinuses, which run upon the occipital bone before the great foramen. The posterior occipital sinus lies in the little falx of the cerebellum ; it rises upwards, and opens into the common union of the longitudinal and lateral sinuses; it com- monly, however, lies rather to the left, and empties itself into the left lateral sinus. It is by no means j* constant: like the other lesser sinuses it is subject to great variety ; and, before it rises into the tentorium, or empties itself into the larger sinuses, it has a communication or emissarium, by which part of the blood may pass into the external veins, thtough a fora- men in the centre of the occipital bone.l; THE INFERIOR LATERAL SINUSRS. The inferior lateral sinuses are still more rarely to be found than the last, in so much that Vicq d'Azyr says he never has * Sinus quartus, Perpendicularis. Haller—The fourth finus; the two lateral being the firft and fecond, and the longitudinal being the third Gnus. t Vicq d'Azyr. \ Malacarne —This Gnus is fometimes double; or it has two branches encircling the pofterior margin of the occipital hole ; or, as I have already obferved, it takes the office of the great fuperior lateral finufes, and empties it into the foramina la- cera; or they communicate with the vertebral veins. See Obfervations fur un dilatation finguliere des Gnus occipitaux. Mem.de l'Acad. Roy. Anno 1781, p. 596- 38 OF THE VEINS OF THE BRAIN. seen them. They run in the lamina, or under the dura mater, of the posterior fossa of the base of the scull; that is the hol- low of the occipital bone, which is under the tentorium. They are so irregular that they frequently occur in one or other side only. They communicate with the posterior part ofthe fora- men lacerum ; with the posterior petrous sinus or vertebral veins ; or lastly they occur as an irregular collection of chan- nels running in the several neighbouring sinuosities.* We see then that there is a point of union for all these sinus- es, which we have not as yet described : we see that the su- perior longitudinal sinus, the two lateral sinuses, the fourth (and consequently the inferior longitudinal sinus,) and the pos- terior occipital sinus, unite at the crucial spine of the occipital bone. This is the torcular hierophili,t torcular, lacuna, platea, tertia vena, palmentum, pelvis, laguncula. It was natural that the attention of the ancients should be drawn to this part; for, upon opening this union of the sinuses, we find a large irregu- lar cavity, which seems to be particularly strengthened by these strong fasciculi of fibres, which form the support of the sinus- es4 Ignorant of the circulation, imagining that the blood as- cended by the great jugular veins to the lateral sinus, and see- ing that the lateral sinuses opened into this central cavity, they conceived that the blood destined for the brain underwent an operation there, and was thence sent through every part ofthe brain.§ • " Independentc dai feni lateralia inferiori ho veduta tra le robufte lamine e le fibre, dalle quali incomincia craffiflimo l'imbuto vertebrale intorno al maggior foro del cranio una quantita di caverne, de cellulle communicanti infieme, le quali formavano un feno cercolare irregolariflimo appoggiato fulla parte fuperiore, o fia ful margine interno del foro medefimo." Malacarne, p. 113,114. f Herophilus was a Greek phyfician, and difciple of Praxagoras, and contempo- rary with Erafiftraius. J " Deinde et illia per fectionem fcalpellum injiciens, furfum adigere conoberis ad ufque verticem ubi venx dux invicem congrediuntur ; quam rcgionem Hero- philus nominat lenon, torcular Galen. Lib. Nonus de Cerebri, &C. DifTectionc." * " Coeuntes autem in vertice capitis, qux fanguinem deducunt meningis dupli- caturx, in locum quendam vacuum quaft cifternam (quern fane ob ib ipfum Hero- philus torcular folet nominare,) inde velut ab arce quadam omnibus fubjectis parti- bus rivosmittunt; quorum numerum nemo facile dixerit, quod partium nutrien- darum numerus Gt infinitus. Manant autem rivorum nonnulli quidem ex medio ipfo loco in totum cerebellum, fecti,ac derivati, eodem prorfus modo, quo ii qui in areolis, alii autem ex parte anteriore feruntur, ea fcilicct qua torcular excipit dixeris utique velut rivum quendam fanguinis, quern et ipfum ex crafla meningc admodum ingeniofe fabricata eft, partibus enim ipfius meningis qux fanguinem duxerunt ad torcular appulfis, dimiffaque illinc aliqua in partes fubjectas, non am- plius, quod fuperarat, uni venx concredidit, fed preterea ex craflx meningis parti- bus anterioribus extenfis rivulum efficit, ex quo primum multos rivulos per totam viam produxit." Galen, cap. vi. de torcular. Et quo patio venee intra cerebrum diftri- huantur. OF THE VEINS OF THE BRAIN. 39 OF THE LESSER SINUSES IN THE BASE OF THE SCULL. Besides those larger sinuses which we have described, and which convey back the great proportion of blood circulating in the brain, there is a set of lesser sinuses which lurk betwixt the dura mater and the anterior part of the base of the scull. These last are fully more intricate than the others; they lie upon the irregular surface of the sphenoid, temporal, and oc- cipital bones ; and tend backwards to the great embouchoir formed by the irregular hole in the temporal and occipital bones. THE SPHENOIDAL SINUSES. The superior sphenoidal sinuses are seated in a fold of the dura mater, on the internal margin ofthe wing of Ingrassi- as, and before the great wing of the sphenoid bone ; they re- ceive the blood in part from the orbit, and from the dura ma- ter ; they open into the cavernous sinus, or perhaps into the ophthalmic sinus, which of course, for the most part, conveys the blood into the superior or inferior longitudinal sinus. The inferior sphenoidal sinus is very irregular and in- constant. It is in the dura mater, covering the great wing of the sphenoidal bone; the blood of this sinus is emptied into the cavernous sinus, or escapes by emessarii into the trunk of the temporal veins. The anterior clynoid sinus__The posterior clynoid sinus, or elliptic sinus, and the circular sinus, are one and the same; the difference consists only in the manner of describ- ing them; the circular sinus lies within the clynoid pro- cesses of the sphenoid bone, and surrounds the glandula pituitaria.* As this circular sinus opens upon each side into the cavern- ous sinus, it is not unaptly divided into two ; the anterior half ofthe circle, being the anterior clynoid sinus of some author ; the posterior half (which is in general wider,) the elliptical or posterior clynoid sinus, or semilunar. * Ridley defcribes it in thefe words; « Another I difcovered by havine in- jected the veins with wax, running round the pituitary gland on its upper fide lorwardly within a duplicature ofthe dura mater, backwardly between the dura mater and pia mater, there fomewhat loofely ftretched over the fubjacent eland itfelf, and laterally in a fort of canal made up ofthe dura mater above, and the carotid artery on each outfide of the gland, which, by being faftened to the dura mater, above and below, at the bans of the fcull, leaves only a little interftice be- twixt itfelf and the gland. (Acuratius tameri a Rilleyo defcriptus eft. Haller. I Rut Ridley is afluming merit to himfelf. Brunnerus defcribe* this fi"'i = 40 OF THE VEINS OF THE BRAIN. This sinus, like most of the lesser sinuses, is irregular in its shape, its size, its communications, and its origin.* Its natural communication is with the cavernous sinus, which in fact encroaches upon its side ; it will be found to communicate also with the sphenoidal sinuses, and the obliqui or petrous sinuses|: at one time the anterior half of the circle is wanting; at another the posterior.!; THE CAVERNOUS SINUS. The cavernous sinus is a great irregular centre of communi- cation with the lesser sinuses in the base of the scull. This sinus is sunk upon each .side of the sella turcica, and is formed in the irregular splitting of the lamella of the dura mater : it is of triangular shape ; it extends from the sides of the sella turcica, even to the foramen spinali.§ The pointed extremity of the tentorium, which extends forwards from the angle of the petrous bone to the posterior clynoid process, covers and protects it. The cavernous sinus is different from all the others ; it is an irregular cavity, full of fibrous cords traver- sing it, which gives it a kind of cellular appearance. It is like a diseased part into which the blood had been driven, till the cellular texture had been distended and partly destroyed. After a minute injection, small arteries are seen to ramify among these fibres ; the internal carotid artery rises through it and the sixth pair of nerves is involved in it, in their pas- sage from the scull. This sinus is the centre ofthe little sinuses and veins of the anterior part of the base of the brain and cranium: four or five veins pour their blood into it, from the anterior lobes of the brain and the fossa silvii ; sometimes, even the ophthalmic veins open into this receptacle.|| The superior and inferior petrous sinuses, and the basilar sinus, open into it behind ; the circular before ; the sphenoidal sinuses and veins of the * " Varie fono le origini, e le foci di quefto feno. Alcunc volte il fonda della foffa pituitaria vi invia due canaletti longitudinali, che fcorrono ful dorfo di quelle due pieghe fottili falcate ond-ie tripartita la glandula pituitaria. Altre volte le foffa divifa per traverfo da una fimil piega che pure ha ful dorfo il fuo feno, alia elittico lo invia.'' Malcarne, p. 123. f Haller, torn. iv. p. 154. | " Nunc anterior nunc pofterior ejus arcus amplior eft ; nunc anterior nunc pofterior ejus arcus deficit; nunc totus ipfi defideratur ; interdum vere duphcem fuiffe, referunt." Sommerring, vol. v. p, 354. § Malacarne. [j This vein, the vena angolana, makes a very remarkable emiffaria, but it is more probable that the blood in fuch veins runs inwards than that it efcapes from the fcull to the external veins.—Cum venis pofterioribus frequentes nexus init Sommerring, vol. v. p. 354. m. m y. ■t /> p. 1,1 OF THE VEINS OF THE BRAIN. 41 dura mater upon the side; while the right and left sinuses often communicate by means of the transverse sinus. Besides these the petrous sinuses have several communications, or emissaria as they are called, viz. by the inferior maxillary foramen, the funnel of the carotid artery, through which de- scends a vein, (the vena sodalis arteriae carotidae,) which ter- minates in the pterygoid plexus of veins, the sphenoidal fissure, the interosseous sinus of Malacarne.* The transverse, or posterior clynoid sinus, runs across from one oblique sinus to another behind the posterior clynoid processes.f In its form it is not peculiar, nor is it very regular. There are two petrous sinuses, the anterior and posterior* or the inferior and superior sinuses; these two come off nearly together from the cavernous sinus, and running back upon the petrous bone, terminate in the lateral sinuses or beginning ofthe internal jugular vein; but which two to take as petrous sinuses is a1 question. For example, Malacarne shows that there is a sinus, by no means uncommon, which belongs as strictly as those others to the petrous portion of the temporal bone. He calls this new sinus the anterior petrous sinus} and the superior of other writers, he calls the posterior petrous sinus j and the inferior petrous sinus of other writers, as it lies more upon the cuneiform apophysis of the occipital bone, and runs slantingly, he calls the oblique. I would on the contrary con- sider two of these as the petrous sinuses; the oblique sinuses of Malacarne, as the lateral basilar sinuses : and those which run on the middle ofthe cuneiform apophysis, as the middle basilar sinuses. The anterior petrous sinus runs upon the anterior face of the petrous bone, from near the spinal hole;J whence, making a semicircular curve in the angle of the petrous and squamous portions of the temporal bone, it terminates in the lateral sinus. The posterior petrous sinus § lies in that pointed ex- tremity ofthe tentorium, which stretches forward, connected with the acute angle of the petrous bone. It is narrow ; and a sulcus or groove on the angle of the bone gives a partial • The emifTaria 4ta, of Tabarini. Obferv. Anatom.p. 42, et. feq. t In truth the fuperior, and inferior, or oblique finus, the cavernous, and the tranfverfe, meet nearly at a point. } And here it has a tranfverfe branch of communication with the cavernous finus, which runs under the extended point of the tentorium. § Or fuperior petrous finu- Vicq d'Azyr. Vol. III. 1 42 OF THE VEINS OF THE BRAIN. lodgement to it; it passes from the cavernous sinus to the great lateral sinus. The lateral basilar sinus* is shorter and larger than the last; and it makes an oblique curve from the cavernous sinus under the pointed extremity of the tentorium, which is continued by the side of the sella turcica, to the termination of the lateral sinus, or rather into the beginning of the jugular vein, by a channel, separated by a bony lamina from the ter- mination of the lateral sinus ; or it is continued into a vein in the base ofthe cranium, which afterwards joins the great jugu- lar vein. The middle basilar sinus. This scarcely deserves the name of sinus. It consists, in general, of a few cellular-like communications, formed in strong fibres of the dura mater, which here partakes of the nature of a ligament. These open into the last mentioned sinus, or sometimes into the vertebral sinus. The vertebral sinuses are veins included in the lamellae of the dura mater; and, divided into right and left; they de- scend into the tube of the vertebrae, on its fore part, and pass down even to the sacrum. They are connected in all their length with the vertebral, dorsal, and lumbar veins. These sinuses, or veins, at each vertebra, are joined by a transverse branch ; they are connected at the top of the spine with the basilar or anterior occipital sinuses, and with the fossa of the jugular vein. EMISSARIA SANTORINI. "Venae Emissariae" is but another name for those lesser veins which form a communication between the sinuses with- in the head, and the external veins in the base of the cranium. These, then, are chiefly the ophthalmic, f mastoidean, and ver- tebral veins. But the vena sodalis, arteriae carotidas, the small vein which penetrates the parietal bone by the side of the sa- gittal suture, even the venae arteriae meningeae sodales, and the little veins which pass with some ofthe nerves, or through the fissures ofthe bone, are also brought into account. To these a much greater importance has been attached than they merit; particularly in apoplectic affections of the head, they are sup * The inferior petrous, or oblique finus. f " Je me fuis convaincu, par des difie&ions multipliers, que les finus caverneux ct orbitaires communiquent, par un plus grand nombre de veinules, avec lc- arrieres-narines de forte que les hemorrhagies critiques qui fe font par les nez, dans les fievres aigues, ou le tete eft affeclee, s'expliquent facilement par ce moyerr," 8cr- Vicq d'Azyr, Acad. Royale, 1781, p. 504. OF THE VEINS OF THE BRAIN. 43 posed to be eminently useful in emptying the surcharged sinus- es and veins of the brain into the external veins. But those lesser passages for the blood, supposing us to be assured that the blood flowed through them, from the sinus to the external veins, are insignificant, when compared with the great outlet of the internal jugular vein ; to which we have seen all the sinuses tend. But the accumulation of blood in the vessels of the brain is seldom mechanically produced; it is a disease in the action of the system of the brain, to which we become more and more liable as we advance in years: it is the same gradual change which is operating on the venous system from infancy to old age, that causes this class of dis- eases ofthe brain to be peculiar to advanced life. The importance ofthe sinuses in the circulation ofthe blood in the brain, is either vaguely described, or imperfectly under- stood by authors. We find it said, that the sinuses support the blood against compression, and protect its free circulation. This to me seems an erroneous idea. The lesser veins are as in other parts ofthe body, and have no such provision ; and since, within the head, there can be no such partial compres- sion as in the limbs, any cause which would compress the greater veins, were they not supported, must fall upon their extremities with worse effect. The circulation is the only power which can act mechanically upon the brain ; but this can never cause a compression of its veins, because the increased action of the arteries must tend more to the distention of the veins than it will be the occasion of the brain compressing them. The more general idea conceived ofthe use ofthe sinuses is nearer the truth ; viz. to prevent the sudden and violent ac- tion ofthe muscles of respiration, or ofthe muscles ofthe head and neck, from repelling the blood into the vena cava, or inter- nal jugular veins ; and consequently preventing the impulse from being communicated to the blood in the small and tender veins of the brain, which might endanger a rupture of them.* Yet this is not exactly the manner in which the sinuses preserve the lesser veins ; they do not suffocate nor take off the force of the impulse from the regurgitating blood, so much as they would do if they were like the trunks of veins in other parts ; because, being incapable of distention, they throw the undula- tion of the blood, when it is thus checked in its exit, back- wards upon the extremities of the veins. But then the effect is, that no particular vein or trunk receives the shock ; all suf- fer in a lesser degree, and equally, which is their safety. All • Monro, Nervous Syftem, p. 4. 44 OF THE VEINS OF THE BRAIN. the veins in the base ofthe brain, which would be liable to rup- ture, or distention, from receiving, in their sudden turns, the shock of the blood, checked by the muscles of respiration, or otherwise, are preserved by being inclosed in sinuses, and co- vered by the strong lamellae of the dura mater. The lesser vessels again are removed from the shock : its force is spent, because it has spread among many branches; and it has be- come a general impulse upon the brain, which the brain resists, because it is incompressible. That the brain does receive such an impulse, in violent coughing and straining, is sufficiently evident from the rising of its surface on these occasions, when it is accidentally laid open by fracture, or the trepan.* Although the obstruction of the jugular veins were to cause no regurgitation of the blood; although the sinuses were sup- posed to have an effect in preventing the distention of the veins, or return ofthe blood to the head ; still one effect of the continued action of the arteries is, to increase the plethoric state of the brain, when there is a stagnation, or more or less remora, of the blood in the sinuses ; and thence it is, that in every interruption to the free exit of the blood, the distention must ultimately fall upon the extreme vessels.f We ought not to confound the idea of incompressibility ofthe brain with that of a solid substance, which would allow no mo- tion in the vessels within the cranium, and would require us to invent some specious means to account for the circulation of the blood in the brain, different from that of the other viscera of the body. Were the brain thus incompressible, or rather solid, so as to prevent a free action ofthe vessels within the cranium, then, as the blood enters with an evident pulsation, it must necessarily have returned by the veins with a distinct pulsation ; but this pulsation is lost here, as in the other vessels of the body, before it returns by the sinuses. When the blood * The older phyficians, obferving the connection betwixt the motion of refpi- ration and of the brains, conceived that the air was drawn through the nofe and cribriform bone into the brain, fo as to diftend it. Upon this hypothefis followed many wonderful cafes. We have already mentioned'the hypothefis which fuppofed compreffion and relaxation of the cerebrum and cerebellum alternately, by the action of the falx and tentorium. f We fhall fay that thefe veflels cannot fuffer diftention, unlefs there be fpace given for their inordinate dilatation, by blood proportionally fent out from the cranium. But there is a degree of diftention upon them, a tenGon which cannot be relieved, nor the contraction of the arteries allowed. The impulfe from the heart and arteries is ftill continued, and is increaGng the evil. Bleeding here re- lieves this action, and diminifhes the danger; and by this means we can fuit the activity of the veffels entering the brain, to the temporary remora in thofe which convey the blood out of the head. OF THE VEINS OF THE BRAIN. 45 is sent into the arteries ofthe brain, by the stroke ofthe heart, they dilate ; and this dilatation the pliability of the brain al- lows, by throwing a comparative degree of pressure upon the veins. Again, when the arteries (during the dilatation of the heart) are in action, and contract, their blood enters the veins, so as to give to them a degree of dilatation equivalent to their former compression, and which now gives the freedom of con- traction in return to the arteries ; without any compression, therefore, of the brain into a lesser space, there is an activity- allowed in the vessels. This degree of motion, communicated through the brain, is very small, nor does it affect the function of the brain ; as we see, when the scull is laid open, and the pulsations of the ar- teries are, as it were, accumulated, in their effect, to one point; for here the patient does not suffer, although the brain beats so as to be sensible to the eye. The accumulation of the blood in the brain may be obstructed, or it may be accelerated, until this velocity affects the function :* or the blood may be accumulated ; but during this accumulation of the blood there must be a proportional space, freed by the absorption of the brain itself, or the partial accumulation of one part of the vas- cular system of the brain must necessarily be accompanied by a deficiency of the other. * There is much found reafoning and ingenuity wafted on the fubject of the circulation of the brain : as the gentle murmuring of a ftream, fays Lower, lulls to repofe, while the mind is difturbed, or the imagination awakened by the din of a cataract; fo fleep is induced by the gentle flow of the blood in the brain, or flies when the circulation is accelerated. As the fatigue and reft ofthe body required a variation in the impetus of the blood towards it, the neceffary con- fequence was a variation in the degree of velocity in the circulation and quantity of blood in the head, and this to Lower is the reafon of the vicifiltude of wake- fulnefs and fleep. The Gmple fact of the effect of preffure upon the furface of the brain inducing an oppreflion of the fenfes has occaGoned all their theories of fleep to turn upon this one idea of preffure on the brain. ( 46 ) CHAP. III. OF THE VENTRICLES AND INTERNAL PARTS OF THE BRAIN. OF THE CAVITIES OF THE BRAIN IN GENERAL. JL HERE are within the Brain many tubercles and irregular surfaces, of which it is infinitely more difficult to convey an idea by description than of the external parts. These sur- faces, as the name implies, lie in contact without adhering ; and form what we call, though not perhaps with strict pro- priety, the cavities of the brain. Not being separated, they are scarcely to be considered as cavities, although they be ca- pable of distention by the infiltration of the fluid into them. The surface of the cavities or ventricles of the brain is natur- ally bedewed with a fluid or halitus, which flows from the ge- neral surface of the ventricle, and from the plexus choroides. This moisture preserves those surfaces from adhesion ; during life and health it is not accumulated so as to form a fluid ; but in many diseases, and after death, it is effused or collected into a fluid. The external convolutions of the brain we have seen to be cineritious on the surfaces : the internal surface of the brain may be considered also as forming convolutions; but they are chiefly medullary, and are more irregular, or rather have a greater variety of shape, than those ofthe outer surface. In regard to the use of the ventricles of the brain, since the hypotheses ofthe older physicians have been tacitly rejected, no opinion has been offered, except this, that " they seem to be made of a necessary consequence, and towards the greater use and distinction of parts ;" or, as we have already had oc- casion to mention, that the ventricles serve to increase the sur- face ofthe pia mater, and that whatever may be the purposes which are served by that membrane on the surface of the brain, we must suppose the same to be performed by it within the ventricles. But this is a conclusion which may not be al- together satisfactory to an inquisitive mind. It is necessary to take into consideration the general peculi- arities of the brain: we find that within the scull there is no OF THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN. 47 adipose substance, though it pervades every other part of the body. We at once see a reason for this. It is evident that as the fat is so incessantly undergoing changes (being alternately absorbed and deposited;) as at one time it is deposited in greater quantities and at another absorbed; as it is in perpetual variation according to the prevailing habits of the body, the proportion of exercise taken, or the state of the health; its continual changes would have the very worst consequence upon such a part as the brain; that if accumulated it would oppress the circulating vessels; if rapidly absorbed it would be fol- lowed by accumulation or surcharge of the vessels ; for the scull does not allow of distention, nor is it possible that it can admit of depletion. I conceive the ventricles to be a provision for allowing those changes to take place, which necessarily, from time to time, arise, or are occasioned by disease in the substance of the brain itself: they prevent an instantaneous bad effect. When fluids distend the ventricles, it sometimes occurs to us that the fluid, secreted and accumulated, must have compressed the substance of the brain, and caused its absorption ; but I con- ceive that frequently the cause is reversed; the absorption of the mass of the brain being the disease or its consequence, and the fluid being poured out in the ventricles to supply this defi- ciency : I also conceive that the collected fluid being in the central parts, is a particular provision by which the whole mass ofthe brain is kept uniformly distended ; whereas, if the sur- face had been equally, or more disposed to such secretion of fluid, the internal parts would have fallen flaccid, and been compressed rather than supported. There cannot be a more erroneous notion than that in Hy- drocephalus the compression produced by the secreted fluid occasions the wasting of the brain. In that disease the sub- stance of the brain is not firm and compressed, so as to prevent the veins from being completely filled; but, even in a very- early stage, the mass of the brain is soft and fluid ; the veins peculiarly distended or enlarged ; and from the first or in- flammatory stage of the acute hydrocephalus, or the perma- nent state of the chronic, the disease is not a dropsy of the ventricles, but a universal affection of the brain. The effect of the disease is, that there is a change in the relative powers which incessantly secrete and absorb the brain itself, as even other part ofthe body is secreted and absorbed. And in con sequence of this there is a diminution ofthe solids of the brain, and an accumulation of the fluids to supply their loss. It is not to be supposed that the ancients, so fertile in their hypotheses, and so easy in their proofs, could neglect the 48 OF THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN. evident importance of the ventricles of the brain. We ac- cordingly find that the spirits were manufactured in these cavities; that they were the " spirituum animalium officina," whence the spirits were conveyed over all the nervous system.* They were again degraded from this higher office, and became the mere receptacles of the excrementitious matter of the brain (meras cloacas esse asseruerintf;) and Willis seems in- clined still further to degrade the importance ofthe ventricles, by considering them merely as of secondary importance ; or rather as resulting solely from the accidental conformation of the brain.i; Again we find it a prevalent opinion that the ven- tricles contained air ; that the air supported the soft medullary substance of the brain ; and that it gave motion to the whole mass, so as to circulate the spirits in the substance of the brain.§ OF THE CORPUS CALLOSUM AND CENTRUM OVALE OF VIEUSSENS. The corpus callosum is a medullary body which is a cen- tre of communication ; or it is the great commissure|| passing betwixt the hemispheres of the cerebrum :^| it is seen without incision by merely separating those hemispheres with the fin- gers. It is a white body, firmer than the rest of the medullary substance. It is but slightly convex upon its upper part, but turns convex downwards upon the fore and back part. As the corpus callosum is the continuation of the internal medullary * Lately by chemical aids, (which make the cineritious fubftance black, or dark brown, while the medullary matter remains white, or takes a flight greenifh tinge,) the origins of many of the nerves have been traced into the fubftance of the brain, even to the furface of the ventricles, which has given occafion to the revival of Gmilar ideas of the ufe of the ventricles. f Willis Cereb. Anat. p, $2. | " Porro G quis cerebelli fabricam exacto confiderat, et ferio perpendit, quod hi ventriculi non ex primaria naturae intentione efformentur, at fecundario tantum et accidentaliter de cerebri complicatione refultent," &c. § Malpighi. || Commiffure is a term applied to thofe tracts generally of medullary matter, which paffing through the brain are fuppofed to be a medium of communication. ^[ Willis conceiving thefpirits to lodge and circulate in the fuperficial convolu- tions of the brain, (upon the conformation of which depended the capacity or abil- ity,) gives to tj»e corpus callofum the property of collecting and concentrating the fpirits," quafi in publico emporio commorantur ;" and here they were depurated by repeated circulation.—But the language in which all this is delivered better veils the abfurdities of the doctrine: " fpiritus recens nati undequaque ab extima hujus corporis ora verfus anteriorem iftius corporis callofi partem, ubi craflinum exiftit perpetim blande fcatent; ibidemque, fi opus fuerit, aut imaginationis actui impen- duntur, aut medulla; oblongata; crura fubeuntes, appendicem nervofam actuant et infpirant." What remains fuperfluous of the fpirits returns hackwards and circu- lates through the fornix, and is Hill farther fubtilizcd, "hocmotu fuhtiliores quof- damplnntafia; actus peragunt." OF THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN. 49 substance ofthe brain, it is superfluous to say that it is continu- ed down, anteriorly, into the medullary matter betwixt the corpora striata, terminating in its pedunculi; or, backwards, that it is continued with the fornix and cornua ammonis and the surface of the posterior prolongation of the lateral ven- tricle. We see upon the surface of the corpus callosum two medul- lary lines considerably raised, running parallel to each other* in the length ofthe body. Betwixt these salient lines there is of course a kind of rut, called sometimes the rapha, or suture, which may be considered as dividing this body into two equal parts, and which, in truth, forms the accurate division of the two sides ofthe whole brain.f Other lines, less elevated from the surface, are to be observ- ed running across these, as if passing from one hemisphere to the other. If the corpus callosum be cut horizontally, and the section be continued into the substance ofthe hemispheres, we still can perceive those transverse lines, and observe them to be lost in the medullary matter of the hemispheres.}: The centrum ovale is merely the appearance which the white and internal part ofthe cerebrum takes when the brain is cut horizontally on the level of the corpus callosum ; for then the corpus callosum is the centre of the great medullary mass ofthe cerebrum, and the external cineritious matter being on the edges only forms it into an irregular oval. THE SEPTUM LUCIDUM. The two lateral ventricles lying under the corpus callosum and medullary centre are divided by a partition, which de>« scends from the lower surface ofthe corpus callosum, and rests upon the fornix. This septum ofthe ventricles is transparent, and consists of two laminae, and these consist of medullary and cineritious matter.^ Betwixt these is the cavity of the sep- * They are not ftrictly parallel in all their length ; we find them often fepara- ted both upon the fore and back part; but generally more feparated upon the back part, and even fometimes they are curved. f In which conceit Duverney calls this" clef du cerveau,'' from its being the centre of communication. Tom. i. p. 39. t The neceflity of explaining paralyGs and convulfive motions of that fide ofthe body oppofite to the fide of the brain injured, has made anatomifts attend to thofe tranfverfe lines, in the hopes of finding fuch a decuffation of these lines as would account for it. Sabbatier fays, they have brought themfelves to believe that there was a decuffation, but after careful inveftigation he could find no fuch thing. See Winflow. Ludwig (de Cinerea Cerebri, fub. p. 5.) obferved ftrise of cineritious fubftance in the corpus callofum. Sec alfo Gunz. and Haller. § Vicq d'Azyr. Vol. III. Qi so OF THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN. turn lucidum.* The size and shape of this cavity differ in a variety of subjects. It is of a triangular shape, and from eighteen to twenty lines in length.! It has a fluid exhaling in- to it like the ventricles, and is by\ some counted as a fifth ven- tricle : according to Santorini it dpens in the base of the brain, opposite to the union ofthe optic nerves. Vieussens describes it communicating with the third ventricle.!; Winslow also has seen it reaching a great way backwards, and conceives it to open into the third ventricle. Soemmerring describes it as large in the middle, contracted backwards, and having no communication ; but he asserts that it is shut in on every side.§ In the base of the brain we find a narrow longitudinal sulcus betwixt the pedunculi of the corpus callosum. In the bottom of this cavity there is a medullary lamina, which Vicq d'Azyr calls "■ Cloison a la cav'ite du septum lucidum.1'' And the sul- cus he calls "Fosse de la base du septum lucidum." By a careful section of this medullary substance we lay open the ca- vity of the septum lucidum. The Anterior Curvature of the ThtPedun the Fornix". cles of Fornix. Optic '''<4^-'i~!*!>jJj£gF*^ Nerves. Corpora Albicantia. LATERAL VENTRICLES. Under the corpus callosum and medullary centre, are the lateral ventricles. They are distinguished into right and left. * It was difcovered by Silvius. See alfo Santorini. f Sabbatier. | " In qua pellucidem non raro reperimus aquamque haud dubie in tertium illabitum ventriculum." Vieuflens de Cerebro,p. 59. § De Corporis Humani Fabrica, torn. iv. p. 55. OF THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN. 51 They are of a very irregular shape, stretching into three pro- longations or cornua, whence they have the name of tricornes. They are the great ventricles of the brain; the third and fourth being comparatively very small. What may be considered as the bodies of these ventricles are formed betwixt the corpus callosum and medulla of the brain, and the convexity of the corpora striata and thalami nervorum optLorum. Following the cavity forwards, we find what is calkd its anterior horn or sinus, formed betwixt the more acute convexity of the cor- pus striatum and the anterior part of the corpus callosum ; in- to the posterior lobe of the cerebrum, resting upon the tentori- um, there stretches backwards with some considerable curve, and, at the same time, with a slight inclination downwards, the posterior horn. Again, the inferior or descending horn is like the con- tinued cavity ofthe ventricle ; it takes a curve backwards and outwards, and then turning forwards it descends into the mid- dle lobe of the brain. The lateral ventricles do not terminate in the others by any of those prolongations; but they communicate, upon a very high level, with the third ventricle and with each other, by a wide opening, formed under the fore part of the arch of the fornix. This communication we easily find by following the choroid plexus forward and under the fornix : it is a space be- twixt the most anterior part of the convexity ofthe optic thala- mi and the anterior crura of the fornix. OF THE PARTS SEEN IN THE LATERAL VENTRICLES, The fornix is a medullary body, flat, and of a triangular shape, which divides the two lateral and the third ventricles: its lower surface is towards the third ventricle: its lateral mar- gins are in the lateral ventricle. On its upper surface it sup- ports the septum lucidum, or partition ofthe two lateral ventri- cles, and under its most anterior part is the communication be- twixt the lateral ventricles and the third ventricle.* One of the angles is forward, and the other two towards the back part: it rests chiefly upon the thalami nervorum opticorum, but it is separated from them by a vascular membrane, which is conti- nued from the external pia mater, and which stretches into the brain betwixt the posterior part of the corpus callosum and tu- bercula quadrigemina, and which membrane connects the plex- us of the lateral ventricle. The fornix leaves betwixt it and * Of this communication fee farther in the Anatomy of the Brain illuftrated by Engravings. $2 OF THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN. the concave face of the most anterior part of the corpora stri- ata, a triangular space, which is in part occupied by the sep- tum lucidum. The extremities of this body are called crura. The posteri- or crura coalescing with the corpus callosum, (which is conti- nued downwards posteriorly,) are prolonged into the hippo- campi, and the anterior crura forming the anterior angle being close together, bend downwards behind the anterior commis- sure, and are connected with it: they then bend round the thalami, and may be traced into the crura cerebri ; or, accord- ing to others, they form the corpora albicantia.* Those pil- lars or crura of the fornix are fibrous in some slight degree like a nerve. This is to be observed by cutting them either across or in their length.f Upon the lower surface of the fornix there are lines like those of the corpus callosum, and which are erroneously con- ceived by many to be the impression ofthe vessels ofthe ve- lum. It is this lower surface of the fornix which is called Lyra, corpus psalloides, it being compared to a stringed instrument.^ * Two white bodies feen on the bafc of the brain behind the infundibulum. f Vicq d'Azyr, Acad. Scien. I78i,p. 517. j The prevalent idea amongft the older authors regarding the ufe of the fornix was, that it acted like a ligament binding together the internal parts ofthe brain ; or that it fupported the incumbent weight of the upper parts of the brain from preffing upon the lower. " Verum alter atque ifte infignior fornicis ufus effe vide- tur quem modo invenimus; nempe ut fpiritus animales per ejus ductum ab altera cerebri extremitatc ad alteram immediate tranfeant atque ita quafi per pelicani ros- trum in fui ipfius ventrem intortum circulentur." Willi*. OF THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN. 5S OF THE HIPPOCAMPI, OR CORNUA AMMONIS, AND OF THE TENIA HIPPOCAMPI. Plan ofthe Connections ofthe Fornix with the Hippocampus, fcrc. Those parts are to be seen continued from the posterior crura of the fornix. We have observed, that upon the back part, the fornix adheres to, or is continuous with, the corpus callosum. We shall find also that its posterior crus on each side divides into two laminae of medullary matter: the one of these is continued into the cornu ammonis, and the other (be- ing the anterior of these portions) forms the tenia hippocampi. The hippocampus is narrow at its commencement in the posterior crus of the fornix ;* but it is enlarged as it descends, * In fpeaking of the origin of the hippocampus as from the fornix, I mean Gmply that the ftudent having gained the knowledge of one part of the brain may trace the others from their relation to it, and that, underftanding the Gtuation and relation of the fornix, he traces its crura until he finds them terminating in the hippocampus. We might fully as well fay that the hippocampi are formed from the pofterior part of the corpus callofum, for they are the fame medullary matter continued. 54 OF THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN. following the course of the inferior prolongation of the lateral ventricle towards the base of the brain. It is, indeed, merely a relief or particular convexity of the floor of this lower horn of the ventricle, like a pad. The inferior extremities of the hippocampi on each side turn inwards, pointing to the crura cerebri, and taking thus a curve like a ram's horn.* In its whole extent the hippocampus consists of an internal cineri- tious substance, and a superficial layer of white medullary matter.f The TENIA hippocampi, or CORPUS fimbriatum, is the prolonged margin of the fornix : it is merely the thin edge of the hippocampus, which follows in the whole of its circuit, and terminates in an acute point near its bulbous extremity. The lesser hippocampus, or colliculus, is a relief or convexity in the floor of the posterior horn of the ventricles, which may be traced backwards from the crura ofthe fornix. It has the same relation to the fornix which the greater hippo- campus has, and lies in the posterior horn or prolongation of the ventricle into the posterior lobe of the brain, in the same way in which the great hippocampus lies in the inferior horn or prolongation of the ventricle into the middle lobe of the brain. The velum and plexus require to be taken away before we can fully understand the situation of the third ventricle, or of those tubercles which are but partially seen in the lateral ventricles. The vflum lies in the centre of the brain, and extends from the surface of the brain inwards betwixt the posterior lobes of the cerebrum and the cerebellum, then betwixt the corpus callosum and nates and testes, and then under the fornix. It forms thus a great communication betwixt the ex- ternal and internal membranes of the brain. As it lies under the fornix, that medullary lamina adheres to it, while the velum again adheres to the thalami nervorum opticorum. Its margin seems to be terminated laterally by the choroid plexus (when we view it after raising the fornix ;) but it is not strictly so, for the choroid plexus is continued with the membrane of the ventricles, and has no where a termination. For the vascularity of this membrane, turn to what has already been said in speaking ofthe internal veins ofthe brain. * Betwixt the extreme point of the hippocampi and the crura cerebri (when the bafe of the brain is turned up) we can infinuate the probe into the inferior horn of the lateral ventricle without piercing the fubftance of the brain, but merely tearing the pia mater. f " Vers la partie inferieure et pofterieure du corps calleux, on trouve, de cha- que cote, un petit bourrelet de fubftance grife qui fe prolonge dans I'epaiffeur de l'hypocampe dont il fait partie : bourrelet eft recouvert dans fon principe par uru: lame de fubftance blanche." Vicq d'Azyr, loc. cit. OF THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN. 55 Seeing how the plexus choroides are formed and connected, they cannot be strictly said to have either beginning or termina- tion ; they are the connected folds and plicae of the internal membrane of the ventricles loaded with vessels ; but to de- scribe them intelligibly we must, notwithstanding, trace them in this manner. The plexus of the lateral ventricles rise from the bottom of the inferior horns of these ventricles betwixt the pedunculi or crura cerebri and the termination of the hippocampi j they lie large and fleshy-like in that lower horn. As they rise into the superior level, they are at their greatest size (there they have often a diseased appearance, being hard, and as if schirrous or full of little vesicles or hydatids;) they then pass forwards and inwards, diminishing in thickness until they coalesce under the fornix, and imme- diately behind the communication betwixt the ventricles. The plexus of the third ventricle, formed by the union of those of the lateral ventricles, turns back upon the lower surface of the velum, and is comparatively very small. The corpora striata are smooth, cineritious convexities in the fore part of the lateral ventricle. They are somewhat of the shape of a pear ; they are obtuse forwards ; they ap- proach each other towards the fore part with a regular con- vexity, and they are narrow as they pass backwards, separat- ing at the same time; their posterior extremity being as it were pushed out by the thalami nervorum opticorum. These last lie more under the back part of the fornix, and are more concealed when the lateral ventricle only is laid open. These bodies are called striata, from the intermixture of the medul- lary matter, which gives the appearance of striae when they are cut. They descend down to the base, and give origin to the first pair, or olfactory nerves.* The striae of medullary matter pass from above downwards, they therefore appear in the horizontal sections of this body like white points. A su- perficial horizontal section of the corpora striata shows those striae connected with the medullary matter of the middle and posterior lobe. A deeper incision brings into view a mass of cineritious substance betwixt those striae and the medullary matter of the middle lobe Another incision shows the course of the striae altered, and brings into view the connection be- twixt the corpora striata of each side, by means ofthe anterior commissure.f • Sommerring. f " Hac pars commune fenforium eft, quod fenfibilium omnium ictus a nervis cujufque organi dilatos accipit adeoque omnis ftnftonis perceptionem officii ; rujufmo- di fenfibilium ictus, cum hinc ulterius in cerebrum trajiciuntur fenftoni ftstim ima- ginatio fuccedit ; atque infuper hsec corpora, uti feufuuni omnium impetus, ita 56 OF THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN. The commissura anterior is a cylindrical medullary cord, which unites the fore and lower part of the corpora striata, and which spreads its connections for a full inch and a half into the middle lobe of the brain upon each side. We see it stretched transversely immediately under the anterior crura ofthe fornix. It is in figure like a bow; its extremities stretching (with a convexity forward) into the middle portion of the brain towards the extremity of the fossa silvii, where it terminates in the medullary matter of the middle lobe of the brain. The thalami nervorum opticorum are hid by the pos- terior angles of the fornix, and the plexus choroides: we do not see them fully until we have lifted the fornix and the velum or membrane which stretches under the fornix. They are somewhat of an irregular oval shape ; they are whiter than the corpora striata, their surface being chiefly of medullary matter. Internally they are cineritious ; and the medullary and cineritious matter is blended in striae like the anterior tu- bercles of the ventricles on the corpora striata. The thalami nervorum opticorum, having their convex sur- face towards each other, unite under the fornix by what is called the commissura mollis, in opposition to the commis- sura magna, which is the corpus callosum ; the commissura anterior, which unites the fore part of the corpora striata; and the commissura posterior, which is yet to be described. Thus the soft commissure of the brain, or the union of the optic thalami, is so soft that the slightest force will tear it, or in dissection, the parts being unequally supported, the thalami will be separated and this connection lost.* After such se- paration of the tubercles there remains very little appearance of their having been united. Sabbatier, after the most care- ful dissection, says expressly that he could never observe this union, and he conceives, that in the smoothness of the conti- guous surfaces he has a proof of there never being such a uni- on ; but he goes on to say, " The fruits of my research were, that I constantly found a soft cord of a cineritious co- lour, and about a line or a line and a half in diameter passing betwixt them." I have seen, when the ventricles were distended in hydro- cephalus, and the communication betwixt the three ventricles enlarged to a square cavity of nearly an inch in diameter,f motuum localium fpontaneorum primos inftinctus fufcipiunt. Willis, Edit. 4. P-43- * Morgagni and Vicq d'Azyr fay they have feen this commiffure double : it may, however, have been a partial laceration of it. f In quadrupeds the adhefion is more extenfivc. 6F the ventricles of the braik. $7 that this union was drawn out to some length, but still was above half an inch in diameter. The commissura mollis is exceedingly soft, of a cineritious colour, and vessels are some- times seen to cross upon its surface. It seems to be the con- tinuation ofthe grey or cineritious substance which covers the internal surface of the optic thalami.* Towards the fore part of the thalami we have to observe a peculiar eminence or convexity, viz. the anterior tuber- cles of the optic thalami. In making a horizontal section of the thalami, wre find that we cut across a medullary streak or cord which descends from this tubercle to the mamillary pro- cesses, or corpora albicantia, in the base of the brain.f Its course is deep in the substance of the brain, and somewhat oblique. The limits of the thalami externally are contiguous to the corpus striatum, but betwixt them there intervenes a white medullary tract, which is continuous with the medullary striae, and which, as it marks the limits of the two great tuber- cles of the lateral ventricles, takes a course inwards towards the anterior pillars or crura ofthe fornix and middle ofthe an- terior commissure. The surface of this tract, as seen in the lateral ventricle, is the tenia semicircularis geminum, which we shall presently more particularly describe. To understand the further connections and importance ofthe optic thalami wre must dissect the base of the brain. There we find that it is through the corpora striata, and the thalami nervorum opticorum, that the crura cerebri establish their ex- tensive connection with the internal mass of the brain ; partic- ularly we find that the crura shoot up into the back and lower part ofthe thalami. Here on the lower part also we may observe the tractus opticus, which wemay trace backwards from the optic nerves. They surround the crura cerebri with a semicircular sweep, swelling out at the same time, and terminating in three con- siderable tuberosities : they are finally confounded with the lower part of the optic thalami ;\ at the same time there runs up a division of it into the nates. The tenia semicircularis geminum is the tract of the • Miis il n'y a point de contintiitc, propremcnt dite, entre la fubftance intime de ces couches et la commiffure molle dent il s'agit. Vicq d'Azyr, Planc.de Cerv. P *3- f See Vicq d'Azyr, plate xii. Mem. de l'Acad. Royale, 1781, p. ja8, and plate a, fig. 5. | Willis feeing the firft and fecond pair of nerves fo clofely connected with thefe tubercles, and fuppofiiig, as we have mentioned in a former note, that the corpora ftriata were the common fenforium, concludes, " hinc ratio patet, cur odores fine olfactus objecta ipfum adeo cerebrum feriunt, et immediate afficiunt ; item cur inter vifioneni et imaginatiourm communicatio citiffima habetur," P. 44. Vol.. III. H 58 OF THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN; medullary matter, which is betwixt the two great anterior tu- bercles of the U.teral ventricle, the corpus striatum and thala- mus nervi optici. Towards the fore part of this tract its sur- face is covered with a layer of a semi-transparent greyish mat- ter, through which we see the veins which pass from the sur- face ofthe corpora striata to join the vena galeni.* Sabbatier makes the anterior extremity of this medullary body join the anterior pillar ofthe fornix : Haller makes it join the anterior commissure: and Vicq d'Azyr says they separate again, where they seem to unite forwards and lose themselves on the corpora striata. Their posterior extremities are lost in the hippocampi ; they thus form a kind of longitudinal commis- sure which establishes a communication betwixt the fore and back part of the cerebrum. OF THE THIRD VENTRICLE. The third ventricle does not at all answer to the conception We form of the ventricles from the lateral ones. It is a mere sulcus, lying betwixt the thalami nervorum opticorum, and be- twixt the crura cerebri, which are continued down from these tubercles* It is a longitudinal slit, rima, or gutter-like cavity, which is made irregular, and is divided by the union of the op- tic thalami; and finally, it is canopied by the fornix and vascu- lar velum which stretches over the thalami.f Plan of the communication ofthe Lateral and third Ventricles, represented by a Perpendicular Section. • " Quelquefois il fe detache du txnia femicircularis cntre le corps fti ie et la cou- che optique un filet blanc, que faifant un angle tre3 aigu, foit en devant, foit en arriere, monte a une certaine hauteur fur le corps cannele." Vicq d'Azyr Mem. de l'Acad. Royale, 1781. p. 530. f " Hauc caveam ventriculum tertium vulgo vocant, qua et ipfa cum r lena nV omnia nihil eft nifi contiguorum thalamorum limes." Haller. OF THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN. 59 The third ventricle opens forward and upwards into the two lateral ventricles, and under the common communication it opens into the infundibulum. Backwards it is continued by a canal which passes under the tubercula quadrigemina, or nates and testes, into the fourth ventricle. The bottom of the third ventricle is closed by a small stratum of cineritious matter, cloison pulpeuse du troisieme ventricu.'e ; this fills up the space betwixt the junction of the optic nerves and the anterior com- missure. We see it when dissecting the base of the brain.— Lifting the optic nerves, we shall find it strengthened by the pia mater, and consisting of striae which pass obliquely back- wards and downwards, and some of which, while they adhere to the optic nerves, pass into them. As we have found that the pia mater could be traced into the lateral ventricles, and as by tearing with the probe the con- nections of those membranes we could penetrate into the later- al ventricle without piercing the substance of the brain ; so here we can penetrate into the third ventricle, which is deepest of all; and also into the fourth, without lacerating the sub- stance ofthe brain. Thus, after raising the vascular membrane of the base, we can pass a probe under the corpus callosum backwards into the third ventricle, and by raising the cerebel- lum from the medulla oblongata, and separating the adhesions of the pia mater, we get access to the fourth ventricle. We conclude then, that the ventricles are not formed, as we should at first conceive, in the substance of the brain, but that they are formed by the replication and foldings of the convolutions of, the brain. 60 OF THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN. Plan of the Infections of the Pia Mate;. See foot Note. OF THE INFUNDIBULUM. As I have explained in my tables of the brain, there is much confusion regarding the terms vulva and anus. Vulva is the space by which the three ventricles communicate, as seen when the fornix is lifted, viz. betwixt the thalami nervorum optico- rum and before the commissura mollis. The anus is behind this commissure, and near the nates and testes ; both these are mentioned as communications betwixt the ventricles : but we know that the union ofthe plexus choroides, of the two lateral ventricles, and ofthe termination ofthe velum under the ante- rior part of the fornix, leaves the vulva free. But the velum spreading over the thalami, and under the posterior part ofthe fornix, closes up the anus ; and it appears as a communication similar to the other only when the velum is torn up. EXPLANATION OF THE PLATE. i. The pia mater defcending betwixt the hemifpheres to the corpus calioilr* a. Betwixt the pofterior lobe of the cerebrum and the cerebellum. 3. Under the fornix in form of the velum. 4. Into the inferior horn of the lateral ventricle. 5. Into the bottom of the fourth ventricle. OF THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN. Gl If we pass a probe gently downwards and forwards from the vulva or foramen commune anterius, or communication be- twixt the ventricles, we pass it into the infundibulum. The infundibulum is a funnel of a soft cineritious matter, which leads from the bottom and fore part of the third ventricle to- wards the glandula pituitaria, which is seated in the sella tur- cica of the sphenoid bone. The infundibulum is formed of cineritious matter, which is continued from the bottom of the third ventricle, and which adheres to the back part of the optic nerves ; or, according to Warthon, of an external membrane with cineritious matter internally. Its cavity becomes contracted before it reaches the glandula pituitaria. Whether it be really capable of conveying the fluids ofthe ventricles, or whether it be actually pervious, is likely to remain a disputed point. Tarin, and M. Adolphus Murray, and Haller, believe with the older writers that it is pervious. Soemmerring and Vicq d'Azyr have in their ex- periments found it shut.* But to the opinion that the infun- dibulum conveyed the superfluous moisture from the ventri- cles,! it did not seem necessary to Vieussens that we should find it to have a cavity in all its length. He conceived that where the apparent cavity terminated, less visible pores were continued towards the gland. * " Sed non ad apicem ufque pervium." Soemmering. f " Structura, fituque infundibuli fpectatis, connexionis, et focictatis, quart] cum cerebro, et glandula pituitaria habet, rationibus aequo judicio perpenfis, uni- cum iliius ufum effe, ut aquofum, feu lymphaticum quemdaem cerebro depluentem humorem, majoris, ad inftar vaGs lymphatici excipiat et pituitariam verfus glan- dulam fenGm tranfmittat, non autumare non poffumus: etenim eum intertextarum plexibus choroiaeis glandularum ufus fit, ut fanguinis calvariam fubeuntis, fpirituf- que animalis materiam fuppeditantis.aquofiorem partem, definentibus in ipfas ab arteriis depofitum excipiant, que deinceps per infenfiles rariffimae, qua obducun- tur, membranae poros, fenfium transfluit, et partim per vulvam partimve per- anum, in tertium cerebri ventriculum delabitur ; nullus effe videtur ambigendi locus, quin aquofus omnis humore glandulis, quae plexuum choroidasorum vafis in- terferuntur, fenfim affluens, ad infundibulum deferatur." Vieuffens, p. 50___ Such was the opinion regarding the ceconomy of the brain, and now we have no theory, good or bad, nor any explanation of this connection of the gland with the ventricles ofthe brain to offer. 62 OF THE VENTRICLES 01 THE BRAIX. INFUNDIBULUM AND PITUITARY GLAND. Gland and Infundibulum Pituitary Gland Seated taken out. in the Sella Turcica. What is called the pituitary gland is a reddish body of a glandular-like structure,* which is seated in the sella turcica of the sphenoid bone. It is plain upon its upper surface, or rather perhaps a little hollowed, of a globular shape below, and having a division into two lobes. The infundibulum termin- ates in it, piercing the dura mater, a thin lamina of which spreads over the gland. The gland, as is seen in the above plate, lies surrounded with the circular sinus, and has the cavernous sinus upon the sides ; into these last, vessels have been seen to pass from the gland,+ which, as Soemmerring observes, were probably veins. A distinction of substance has been observed in this gland, and it is by some considered as a part ofthe brain, or being like the cineritious substance, it has been supposed that it gave nerves to the fifth or sixth pair. It was conceived that the body receiving the superfluous moisture of the brain, conveyed it into the nose ; or into the neighbouring sinuses.:]: To countenance this opinion, there was no want of cases proving the accumulation ofthe fluids ofthe ventricles, in consequence of the schirrus of this gland,§ while in truth dissection has shown no connection betwixt the dis- eases of the ventricles and pituitary gland. M. Littre gave • It perhaps has only the form of a gland. Haller fays ** non acinofa quidam, neque nullius alterius glandulas fimiles, qua; potius cerebri quedam fit appendix." See alfo Bordeu, recherch___Anatomiq. fur les Glands. \ Adolph. Murray de infundib. \ Lower Tract. De Corde. § Schneider (de catarch.) firft oppofed this theory ; fhowed that there was no communication betwixt the brain and the nofe, and maintained that no fluid, not even the blood which flowed from the nofe, had any connection with the brain : he was fupported by other able anatomifts. The old opinion was revived by M. Bouillet, Elements de Medecine pratique. OF THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN. 63 both a vascular structure and muscular fibres to this body, and conceived that its operations brought down the water and air from the ventricles ofthe brain.* THE TUBERCULA QJJADRIGEMINA. The tubercula quadrigemina, or nates and testes, are seen when we continue to lift back the posterior part of the fornix and corpus callosum, and when we have lifted back the velum with the vena galeni. We find, in doing this, that the velum is connected with the pineal gland, which is seated upon these tubercles. The tubercula quadrigemina are not in the cavities or ventricles of the brain, but are seen upon lifting and turn- ing forward the posterior lobes of the cerebrum from the ce- rebellum. These four tubercles are behind the third ventricle, and above the fourth. As they are immediately in the centre of the brain, they form a kind of commissure, and they both communicate with the tubercles, from which the tractusopticus emerge. The uppermost two are the nates, the lower are the testes ; the former are less white than the latter. A little under the inferior tubercle, we find sometimes a small tract of medullary matter, which extends to the thalami nervorum opticorum, and the crura cerebri. And from the lower part ofthe testes there projects backwards, connecting itself with the crura cerebelli, a thin medullary lamina, which is the VALVULA VIF.USSENII, PROCESSUS a CEREBELLO AD TESTES, or velum interjectum. Behind the posterior tubercle, or from this medullary lamina itself, the fourth pair of nerves take their origin. Sometimes those four tubercles are of the same size; sometimes the posterior, sometimes the anterior tubercles, are the larger: a perpendicular section of them shows a mutual communication of striae of medullar}- and cineritious matter, but those are faintly seen only. • See Littre, Mem. de I'Acad. des Science, 170- b4 OF THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN, THE PINEAL GLAND. Tuberc uLi Quadrigemina. The pineal gland is seated above the tubercula quadrigem- ina, and behind the thalami nervorum opticorum ; it is fixed, says Winslow, like a button. It consists of cineritious matter covered with the pia mater ; its base is surrounded with me- dullar}' matter ; it adheres firmly to the velum, and is apt to be displaced or torn from its pedunculi in lifting that mem- brane. It is a small soft greyish body, irregularly round, or of the figure of a pine-apple ; or, of all things, most like the heart of a frog.* Its pedunculi, or footstalks, pass out from a transverse medullary base, which unites it to the posterior commissure. Those pedunculi pass on each side to the thala- mi nervorum opticorum (leaving a passage under and betwixt them to the fourth ventricle.) Their extremities pass forward upon the internal surface of the thalami nervorum opticorum, and are united to the anterior crura ofthe fornix. Vicq d'Azyr remarks, that although the ideas of Galen and Descartesf, and a crowd of others are remembered only with ridicule, there are still some peculiarities in the situations and connection of this body, which marks its importance. It is composed of cineritious substance ; it is in fact a prolonga- tion ofthe substance ofthe brain, and by its pedunculi, which are like two nerves, it is connected with the thalami nervorum opticorum, with the fornix, and consequently with the corpus * Ruyfch confidercd the fubftance of this gland as 'different from that of the cerebrum or cerebellum, and different, alfo, from all other glands. f Alluding to their opinion of this being the feat ofthe foul; Willis impofed upon this part a lower office," Ejufque munus non aliud omnino effe quam aliarum glandularumquasjuxta vaforum fanguifeorum concurfus difponuntur; nempe ut humores ferofos, a fanguine arteriofo depofitos, excipiat et, in fe retineat ; donee aut vena depletions facts eofdem reforbeant, aut lymphae duiftus (fi qui ajfuerint) eo's extra convehant." Willis, p. 46. OF THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN. 65 Callosum, the hypocampus and corpora albicantia, which are themselves the centre of union to several medullary cords; therefore he concludes that the pineal gland must be an im- portant organ.* The pineal gland has often in it little peculiar grains and calculi.f It has a great variety of form and size; I have found it surrounded with pus in an ideot boy, who was accustomed to wander about the Leith glass-houses. He died with symp- toms of hydrocephalus, and in his ventricles, accordingly, there was found much fluid. Malacarne gives a case oi its having degenerated into hydatids, like a cluster of grapes. It has not been found upon dissection in some cases. POSTERIOR COMMISSURE. The base of the pineal gland is connected with the posterior commissure of the brain. This commissure is seen like a cord, or like the anterior commissure, towards the back part of the third ventricle, before the tubercula quadrigemina, and above the iter ad quartum ventriculum. Betwixt this com- missure and the base of the pineal gland, we have to observe two or three medullary filaments, not passing from the gland, but lying parallel to the commissure. But this part of the brain, which appears like a cord, does not deserve the name of commissure; it does not pass on each side into the sub- stance ofthe brain as the anterior one does; it is lost in the neighbouring border of medullary matter, and is merely this matter reflected, so as to have a rounded edge. OF THE FOURTH VENTRICLE. The fourth ventricle descends perpendicularly before the cerebellum ; it is inclosed above by the valvula cerebri, below by the medulla spinas, and on the right and left by the crura cerebelli. * Mem. de 1'Acad. Royal, An. 1781, p. 533. See Obferv. par M. Mechel fur {a gland pineale, fur la cloifon tranfparente, et fur I'origine du nerf de la feptieme paire. L.'Acad. Berlin, 1765. f " La parte anteriore della bafe n'e ordinari amente midollare, e qui appunto l'ho moltiffime volte veduta geffata, offofa, tartarosa e friabile, vizi, che ho trovati anche molte volte, nei piccuoli." Malacarne, part ii. p. 8r. Acervulus ,• Meckel, Mem. de l'Acad. des Sciences a Berlin, 1755, fig. 1. b. b. Vicq d'Azyr, tab. xxvii. Super medullofum conarii vinculum vel in ipfo vinculo, vel in ipfo denique acervu- lo, plerumque vero ante acervnlum iam in fetibus immaturis peculiarea quidam \ lapilli, mox maiorum acervulum, mox vero duo vel tres minores acervulos con- ftituentes,helui, femiperlucidi, iunioribus femper pallidiores, innofioribus fusciores, infantibus ob coloris languorem et perluciditatem difficiles cognitu Gccati albidiorei et opaciores inveniuntur." Soemmerring, p. 63. Vol. HI. T 66 OS THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN. When we pass our probe obliquely backwards and down- wards under the posterior commissure, it passes into the iter ADQUARTUM VENTRICULUM, Or AQJJEDUCT of SlI.VlUS. This passage to the fourth ventricle, goes before the tubercula quad- rigemina. The valvula vieussenii, it was supposed, pre- vented the falling down of the moisture of the other cavities into the fourth ventricle :* it is more properly called the pro- cessus cer^belli ad tkstes, being a medullary lamina spread over the ventricle and betwixt the crura cerebelli, as thev rise from the arbor vit^E, or the internal medullary part ofthe cerebellum. From the aqueduct there is continued down upon the fore part of the fourth ventricle a kind of fissure, wrhich Vesalius, conceiving it to have some resemblance to a writing quill, call- ed calamus scriptorius. The same fissure or furrow is con- tinued down some way upon the spinal marrow. There pass up obliquely outwards, on each side of the cala- mus scriptorius, medullary lines, three or four in number, but sometimes seven are observed.f One of these fibres ascends to the valvula Vieussenii ; some are the origins of the au- ditory neive, and one or two striae go to form part of the eighth. In the fourth ventricle, as in the others, are some convolu- tions of the plexus choroides; these are on each side at the termination ofthe vermis; they are continued out upon the base ofthe brain, and are seen exposed betwixt the seventh and eighth pair of nerves. • Alveus Silvii. f Haller, Phyfiol. torn. iv. p. jb OF- THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN. 67 OF THE BASE OF THE BRAIN AND ORIGIN OF THE NERVES. Relation ofthe Brain and Scull-cap. We have anticipated much that might have fallen to be treated of in this division of our subject; but my intention here is to give a connected view of the parts, as seen when we have raised the brain from the scull, and when, having the base presented to us, we are about to enumerate the origius of the nerves. * The first appearance which strikes us is the great proportion of the medullary matter in the base of the brain ; the whole surface of the brain, while seen from above, was cineritious, but now the centrical medullary part of the brain is seen emer- ging from the envelopement of the cineritious matter, and, gathering together from the several internal medullary pro- cesses of the brain, it concentrates the essential properties of the encephalon, and is fitted to give out the several nerves.— Those great medullary prolongations of the cerebrum and cerebellum, are called the crura. The crura cerebri are composed of a white fibrous me- dullary matter, in which also there is a mixture of cineritious 6« OF THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIV. substance. They are formed from the whole central medulla- ry part of the cerebrum ; or more immediately from the infe- rior and lateral part of the corpora striata, and from the supe- rior and internal part of the thalami nervorum opticorum ; and, from the conflux of medullary matter, from the anterior and posterior lobes of the cerebrum. From all these various parts the medullary matter, passing downwards and backwards, forms the crura.* The crus of either side of the brain, con- tracting their diameters, unite at an acute angle, and are unit- ed to the pons varolii, or nodus cerebri, formed by the crura cerebelli; they pass on to form the medulla oblongata, and, as they unite with it, they raise it into the eminences, called Cor- pora Pyramidalia. In those processes of the cerebrum, the cineritious and medullary substances mingle with some degree of confusion ; so that when we make a section ofthe crura ce- rebri near to their union with the. pons varolii, we observe a substance of a dark-brown colour, surrounded with white or medullary matter. In the angle of the union of these crura cerebri, behind the corpora albicantia, and before the protu- berance of the pons varolii, we observe a matter less perfectly white than the surrounding medullary substance, which forms a floor to the third ventricle. This part is perforated with a great many holes, and is the substance perforce of Vicq d'Azyr, f and gives origin to the third pair of nerves along with the crura themselves. CRURA CEREBELLI. The crura cerebelli are more exposed than those of the ce- rebrum ; the latter lying deeper, and being comparatively smaller. They are formed by the union ofthe internal medul- lary part of the cerebellum, or the arbor vitae. They are alto- gether composed of medullary matter, except near the pons varolii* where we observe a mixture of coloured striae. pons varolii. The pons varolii, tuber annulare, or nodus cerebri is formed by the union of the crura cerebri and cerebelli ; those names are almost descriptive of its shape and relation to the other parts. Varolius, looking upon those parts inverted, com- • I fpeak ftill of the relation of thofe to each other, according to their natural Gtuation in the fcull. ■f Vicq d'Azyr makes three divifions of thisfubftance perforce—ift, At the roots of the tubercles, from whence the firft pair of nerves emerge betwixt the roots of thofe nerves, and near the origin of the optic nerves, z. Thofe I mention be- twixt the crura Cerebri. 3d. On the outer contour of the optic thalami. OF THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN. 6* pares the crura cerebri to a river passing under a bridge, and thence named it Pons. The nodus cerebri, again, is a name well applied, since this medullary eminence has much the appearance of a knot cast upon the medullary processes of the cerebrum, and is in fact the central union of the elongated medullary matter of both cerebrum and cerebellum. On the surface of this medullary protuberance there are many transverse fibres, which, uniting in a middle line, form a kind of rapha, which, upon a superficial section, shows a longitudi- nal medullary line. The fibres upon the surface of this body are uniform and parallel to each other in the most projecting part; but upon the sides, they disperse to give place to the fifth pair of nerves and crura cerebelli. A deeper incision of the pons varolii, while it shows the in- timate union of the crura cerebri, cerebelli, and pons varolii, also shows the white medullary tracts which extend from the crura cerebri through the pons varolii to the corpora pyrami- dalia; part of these pass through the locus niger crurum ceri bri, andean be traced to the corpora striata. We see also the transverse fibres of the medullary and cineritious sub- stance, which makes a right angle with those longitudinal tracts. medulla oblongata. lie Varolii. r*. Corpora Pyramidalia, Oblongata. 2. Corf«ra Olivariit. TO OF THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN. The medulla oblongata is the prolongation ofthe substance of the crura cerebri and cerebelli, and the pons varolii ; it is consequently the continuation of the encephalon, which, after giving off the nerves that pass through the foramina of the scull, enters the canal ofthe spine to supply the spinal nerves. The medulla oblongata is marked at its upper end by a deep sulcus dividing it from the pons varolii; but towards the spinal cavity it decreases in thickness, and there is no natural dis- tinction or sulcus to mark the point where the medulla oblonga- ta ends, and the medulla spinalis begins: nor perhaps is the medulla oblongata to be considered in any other light than as the beginning ofthe spinal marrow. When it passes the fora- men magnum, it ceases to be called the medulla oblongata. We have to observe four eminences upon the medulla ob- longata, viz. two corpora pyramidalia, and two corpora oliva- ria. The corpora pyramidalia, so called from their shape, are those in the middle. There is formed betwixt them and the pons varolii (being three tubercles placed together) a little sulcus, which some have called the foramen CvECUM. Be- twixt these eminences there is a longitudinal fissure, in the bottom of which there may be observed transverse little cords, which are like commissures connecting the two sides of the medulla oblongata. The corpora olivaria lie upon the sides of the corpora pyramidalia. They are in some degree, like them, limited by the sulcus which bounds the pons varolii, rounded above and bulging, but gradually subsiding, at their lower part, into the level of the medulla spinalis ; yet they are internally different, for anatomists had observed a mixture of a yellow or cineriti- ous coloured matter in the corpora olivaria, but Vicq d'Azyr has observed a regular oval medullary substance, or body : ur- rounded with cineritious coloured substance, like a miniature representation ofthe cerebrum itself ; he calls it corpus dex- TATUM EMINENTI.EOL1VARIS. MEDULLA SPINALIS. The medulla spinalis, from its structure, its two substances, its membranes, and its use, as evident in the consequences of injury, must be considered as an elongation ofthe brain. Its name implies its situation contained within the tube of the spine. Though chiefly composed of medullary matter, it is not entirely so ; for there is an irregular, central, cortical sub- stance, through its whole extent, having something of a cruci- OF THE VENTRICLES OF THE BRAIN. , 71 al form in the section of this part.* There are continued down from the calamus scriptorius behind, and the rima, formed by the corpora pyramidalia, before, two fissures which divide the spinal marrow into lateral portions. On the back part, howe- ver, the fissure is very little distinguishable. Into the anterior one the little vessels penetrate to supply the cineritious matter with blood. The spinal marrow diminishes in thickness as it descends in the neck ; but below the giving off of the brachial plexus it again enlarges, then continues gradually to diminish. The tube of the vertebrae is connected by a strong ligamen- tous sheath, which runs down the whole length within the tube. The dura mater, after lining the internal surface of the crani- um, goes out by the great foramen, and forms a kind of fun- nel ; at the occipital foramen it is united firmly to the ligament. Under this, however, it forms a separate tube. The tunica arachnoides again adheres loosely, having a kind of secretion within it, while the pia mater closely embraces, and is intimate- ly united to the medullary matter. From betwixt the ninth nerve and vertebral artery to the se- cond and third lumbar nerve, there is a membraneous connec- tion betwixt the lateral part of the spinal marrow and the dura mater of the spine. From the manner of its connection to the dura mater, by distinct slips irregular and pointed, it is called the Ligamentum Denticulatum, or Dentatum. SCHEME AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE ORIGINS OF THE NERVES OF THE ENCEPHfALON AND SPINE. In enumerating the nerves which pass from the cranium, I shall keep to the old way of Willis, counting only nine nerves ofthe encephalon. I do not find that the subdivisions of the nerves in this classification, and the description of the several fasciculi, of which the pairs of nerves are composed, cause in- tricacy. It rather, I am from experience convinced, connects some circumstances with many ofthe pairs of nerves thus enu- merated, to which the memory of the student can attach.— The common enumeration seems a natural one ; it serves well the purpose of dissection, and consequently will never be en- tirely exploded. The use of new classifications and arrange- ments, and names, whilst we must also retain the old, adds much to the intricacy of demonstration. * The furface of the fpinal marrow has alfo been obferved to be of a darker colour, and in large animals diftinctly cineritious. (Dr. Monro's Nervous Syi- cm.) 72 THE ORIGIN OF THE NERVES. From the olfactory nerve to that which passes out betwixt the cranium and first vertebra, there are nine nerves.* "J Carunculce mamillares Math, de j Grad. \ Processus ad nares.. Gonth I d'Andernc. 8uro par, Spigel. J 1st pair of Willis. I Nervus visivus, seu visorius.— Carpi. 1m par antiquorum. 12d pair of Willis. 1st pair—Olfactory nerves. 2d pair—Optic nerves. 3d pair-Motores oculorum. \ W erts moti£rs ,con ^ v i yeux.—Winslow. }2umpar, Fallop. et Vesal. ^ ^ Nerfs moteurs communs des 4th pair—Trochlearis. Sth pair—Trigemini. 6th pair—Abductores. 33d'pairofWillis. Minor propago 3" Paris, id est 5'' recentiorum, Fallop. Gracilior radix 3" Paris, id est 6' recentiorum. Vesal. )>Nervus qui prope nates oritur, Eustach. 9um par Cortes: et Columb. 4th pair; or,'pathetic nerves of J Willis. "J Nervus anonymus trigeminus- [ multorum. }>3"ra par Fallop. et Vesal. J 5th pair of Willis. Trijumeaux of Winslow. 4,,m par Fallop. Radix gracilior 51 Paris, id est 7i recentiorum Vesal. Par oculvs prospiciens. ^8ampar Capp. Bauhini, 6th pair of Willis. Nerfs oculo-musculaires, ou moteurs externes de Wins- low. » In the following table, I am of coarfe much indebted to the fynonymie or Vicq d'Azyr. ' A THE ORIGIN OF THE NERVES. 73 ") Auditory nerves. 7th pair Nervus communi cans faciei. < 1 8th pair Glosso-pharyn- geus. Par vagum. Spinal accessory nerve. l)th pair—Lingual. Vol. III. f2um par Alexand. Benedict. j 4"m par Carol. Stephan. •cj 5um par Vesal. et aliorum. 6um par V. Home. I^Portia mollis, of the moderns. rDistinctus a molli nervus. Fal- I loP' j Portio ut prcecedens, 5' Paris, id est 7l recentiorum. Ve- sal. Portio dura, of the Moderns. Le petit sympathique, of Win- slow. [^Facial nerve. f^ui ad musculus lingua! etfau- cium tendet. Fall'p. Le rameau lingual de la 8e paire of Winslow. ■^ 8th pair d'Andersch. Superior fasciculus of the 8th pair of Willis. Glosso Pharyngeus. Haller. fNervus sextus Galeni et alio- rum. 5* conjugatio Carol. Stephan. 7"m par Alex. Benedict. 6um par Casp. Bauhini. 9um par Bidloo et Andersen, 8th pair of Willis. Le moyen sympathique of Win- slow. I The spinal nerve. "7um par Fallop. Vesal. et ali&* rum. Il"" par Bidloo. 10um par Andersch. Par linguule medium, vel ner- *> vus lingualis medius. Hal- ler. Soemmerring et alio- rum. The hypoglossal, sublingual, of gustatory. -The 9th pair of Willi?. 74 THE ORIGIN OF THE NERVES. 10th pair of Willis.' nerve* J cervical nerve. ~\ 10th pair ot vv uns^ ,n, . . . , f 1st spinal, or cervical nerve, of 10th pair—Suboccipital J- H'aller. I count this the first FIRST PAIR; OR, OLFACTORY NERVES.* The olfactory nerve is soft and pulpy, and soon resolved by putrefaction ; therefore, we should not be surprised that it was neglected by the Ancientsf. It adheres firmly to the lower surface of the anterior lobe of the brain, but it does not take its origin here. It is of a triangular shape, as if moulded to the sulcus in which it lies ; by being sometimes sunk into the sulcus more or less on one side than the other, it has the ap- pearance of being larger on one side than the other. It takes its origin by three medullary tracts!; ; 1st, From the Corpus striatum ; 2d, From the medullary matter of the anterior lobe ; 3d, From the fore and under part of the corpus callos- um.§ When a section is made of it, we observe in it a cineri- tious portion. Towards the fore part, this nerve expands into a bulbous oval lobe, which consists of a semi-transparent cineritious substance. Tb:.3 l'es upon the cribriform plate, and from it are sent V ^vi; che nerves which expand upon the membrane of the nose, and compose the organ of smelling. |[ * In the prefent enumeration and defcription of the nerves, we attend chiefly to thur relation to the brain. In the introduction to the next part of this volume, th y will be found arranged and claffed previous to the detail of their minute diftribution. f The olfactory nerve is in brutes a large prolongation of the fubftance of the brain, and is the proper mammillary proceffes. 1 heir olfactory nerves have a cavity or ventricle in them, and it was natural for the Ancients to imagine that the pituita o! the brain was from this drained through the cribriform plate into the nofe. Vefalius proved the ahfurdity of this opinion; it was, however, re- vi >^ed by Dulaurens, who was perhaps more of a courtier than an anatomift. But Willis is not much better, when he defcribes the proper ufe of thefe nerves. He fuppofed the cribriform plate of the aethmoid bone to prevent bodies from pafling up into the brain (" ne quid afperi ant molefti cum illis una ad cerebrum fera- tur;") while the lymph in thofe nerves corrected the two pungent odours; " odorum fpecies demulcere eafque fenforio quadantenus praeparare." f: Or we fay that the external root generally fplits, having two fafciculi. See Prochafka, tab. I. § Vicq d'Azyr, M. de l'Acad. Roy. 1781.—" Breviores fibrx mcdullorx cum longiorfous exterioribus connexae nonnunquam cincream particulam excipiunt." Socmr" "rring. l| Duverney has fhown us, that thofe nerves pafling through the cribriform plate become firm nerves, like thofe in the other parts of the body. They are t? be feen by tearing the membrane of the nofe from the bone. THE ORIGIN OF THE NERVES. 75 SECOND PAIR; OR, OPTIC NERVES.* The optic nerves arise from the posterior part of the optic thalami, and also (and perhaps more directlyf) from the tuber- cula quadrigemina. When we trace the optic nerves back- wards into the tractus opticus, we find them taking a circle round the crura cerebri, then enlarging, each forms a tubercle towards the back part of the thalamus opticus, and afterwards unites with the posterior tubercle of the thalamus opticus; at the same time a division stretches towards the testes, while betwixt the posterior tubercle of the thalamus opticus and the nates, there is an intermediate communication. When those tubercles are fairly exposed by separating the middle lobes of the brain, and dissecting away the tunica arachnoides and pia mater, they are seen smooth, and formed of medullary mat- ter ; which is uniformly continued from the one to the other, following their gentle convexities with an uninterrupted sur- face. Within those tubercles is a mixture of cineritious and medullary matter, and, especially, there is a distinct streak which passes from the tractus opticus to the nates. Thus there is a communication betwixt the nates and testes, and the optic nerve ; but we must still consider the nerve as arising in a peculiar manner from the thalamus opticus, while at the same time it receives additions from the crura cerebri, where the nerve adheres closely to the crura. Tracing the optic nerves from their origin in the brain to- wards their exit from the scull, we find them approaching gradually and uniting just before the corpora albicantia and the infundibulum. • The optic nerves were the firft pair of Galen and many of the older ana to- mifts, they being ignorant of the olfactory nerves. f " Les nerfs optiques naiflent en arriere des eminences nates et teftes vers la partie pofterieure de celles que 1'on nomine les couches des nerfs optiques." Sabbatier 76 THE ORIGIN OF THE NERVES. Section ofthe Union of the Optic Nerve. Since the days of Galen, it has been a disputed point, whether there is a union simply ofthe nerves, or a decussation, Fishes have the nerve arising from one side ofthe brain pas- sing to the eye ofthe other side : they cross, but they do not unite. Birds have but one optic nerve arising from the brain, which splits and forms the right and left optic nerves, Vesa- lius dissected a young man at Padua, who had lost his eye a year before ; at the same time he dissected a woman, whose eye had been lost a long while. In the latter he found the mrve of that side smaller, firmer, and of reddish colour, through all its extent. In the young man he observed no effect upon the nerve. He also gives a plate of an instance in which he found the optic nerves pass on to the eyes of the same side from which they take their origin, without adhering at all. Valverda, a physician of Spain, who travelled into Italy, and studied the Works of Vesalius and Human Dissection, says that at Venice he had frequent opportunities of assuring himself that there was no decussation; for robbers were punished for the first offence by losing one of their eyes ; and for the second by death. Riolinus, Rolefinkius, and Santo- rini, give observations of the nerve of the injured eye being small and shrivelled, and of their having traced them past their union to the same side ofthe brain with the eye to which they belonged. Vicq d'Azyr, who, of all authors I conceive to be the best authority upon such subjects, is decidedly of Opinion that, there is no decussation. Zin also agrees with the opinion of Galen, that there is an adhesion and intimate union pf substance, but no crossing of the nerves. Soemmerring deems it sufficient to point out the authorities on both sides of THE ORIGIN OF THE NERVES. 77 the question, while he has no decided opinion whether there be a perfect decussation or not.* Porterfield, while he allows the intimate union of the optic nerves, has several observa- tions, proving that they have no intersection or decussation. Sabbatier, encouraged by the authority of Morgagni, says, that he could trace the affection of the nerve of the injured eye no farther than to the union. He discredits the accounts of their having been traced to the same side of the brain, and believes the assertions to be the consequence of previous opinion and prejudice. There are certain observations of Valsalva, Cheselden, and Petit, which seem to prove, that where the brain is injured, it is the eye ofthe opposite side that is affectedf. After their union the optic nerves are much contracted in diameter; still the optic nerve is the largest of the head, excepting the fifth pair. It is the firmest of all the nerves of the senses, but softer than the other nervesi;. What remains to be said of the optic nerves, falls more naturally to be treated of when speaking ofthe organ of vision. THIRD PAIR OF NERVES ; MOTORES OCULORUM. The third pair of nerves arise from the internal margin of the crura cerebri, and the perforated medullary matter which is betwixt the crura. The delicate filaments of this nerve can- not be traced far into the substance of the brain, but still we may observe them spreading their filaments, and traversing the dark coloured spot which we have already mentioned to be visible in the crura cerebri. Some anatomists have said, that the third pair ofthe nerves had an origin also from the nates and testes. Ridley describes them as rising from the pons varolii^. In relation to the arteries, those nerves are betwixt the posterior artery of the cerebrum, arising from the division of the basilar artery and the anterior artery ofthe cerebellum||. They diverge from each other, as they proceed forwards, and each penetrates under the anterior point of the tentorium bv * " Ergo, utrum omnes nervorum fibraae, an quasdam tantum mutuo fe fecent, ccrte ftatui nequit." f If Petit and others are proving that the optic nerves are affected in the fide oppofite to the injury of the brain, they are proving that they have no decuffation ; for if they had, it would counteract that effect, which, from the ftructure of the brain, they muft have in common with the other nerves. { Soemmerring. § They feem to come from the angle betwixt the crura cerebri and pons varolii. They are flat near their origin, but become round and firm. || " Cette difpofition peut expliquer pourquoi on eprouve tant de pefanteuranx yeux aux approaches du fonimeil, dans l'ivrcffe & dans certains efpeces de fievre." Sabbatier. This is a mechanical and a moft improbable way of accounting for fuch an effect. 78 THE origin of the nerves. the side of the cavernous sinus, and passes through the fora- men lacerum. In the general description it is sufficient to say, that they are distributed in common to all the muscles ofthe eye. THE FOURTH PAIR OF NERVES. The fourth pair of nerves, pathetici, or trochleares, are the smallest nerves of the encephalon, being not much larger than a sewing thread. This nerve comes out from betwixt the cerebrum and cerebellum, passes by the side of the pons varolii, and after a long course pierces the dura mater behind the clynoid process, runs along for some way in a canal or sheath, formed by the dura mater ; it then passes through the cavernous sinus, continues its course onwards through the foramen lacerum to the orbit, and is finally appropriated to the superior oblique muscle of the eye. The origin of the fourth pair, if we take implicitly the des- criptions of authors, seems to have a much greater variety than any of the other nerves ; so that it is common to say, the fourth pair of nerves arise about the region of the nates and testes*. The trochlearis arises sometimes by two filaments, but more commonly by one undivided rootf. This root is seen to emerge from a point betwixt the medullary lamina of the cerebellum, or valvula Vieussenii, and the lower of the tubercula quadrigemina!;. From the connections ofthe parts whence this nerve arises with the rest of the brain, it is presumed, that this fourth pair of nerves has a very immediate and universal connection with the internal parts ofthe brain ; yet there is nothing in the final distribution of the nerve, which should incline us to believe that there should be any particular provision in its origins. * " Pone corpora bigemina pofteriora mox paullo fuperius, mox paullo inferius mox magis exteriora, mox magis interiora verfus radice fimplici, duplici. triplici* quin et quadruplici oritur. Nonnunquam origo ejus in cerebri valvula, nonnun- quam in ipfo frenulo patet ut humore ventriculi quarti alluatur." Soemmerring, vol. iv. p. 209. f Santorini fays, they have three roots or little fafciculi. Wrifberg following Vieuffens, fays, the fourth pair arifes from the valvula cerebri. Vicq d'Azyr See Haller. fas. vii. tab. 3. " Origo alius fimplex eft, alius duplex ; quand'o fimplex eft, a proceffu a cercbello ad teftes exterius prodit, quam eft tranfverfa ftria, qua eosproceffus conjungit." Haller Phys. vol. iv p. 208. j Et fouvent iis fe confondent avec un tractus medullaire place tranfverfale- ment au-deffus de la valvule du cerveau." Vicq d'Azyr. This nerve* fays he caisnot be followed into the anterior part of the brain from its extreme delicacy' and becaufe it is formed from the medullary fubftance itfelf, without the admix- ture of filaments to give it ftrength. He quotes thofe words of Soemmerrine •—• " Continua medulla oritur." fa ' i^xr. OF THE NERVES. 79 FIFTH PAIR OF NERVES ; TRIGEMINI. The fifth nerve of the brain arises from the fore and lowest part of the crura cerebelli, where they unite with the pons Varolii. The origin of this nerve may be divided into two portions : an anterior is small, and somewhat elevated above the other. The posterior part of this origin takes its rise a little lower than the anterior part. These two origins of the nerve are connected by cellular membrane, and have betwixt them a little groove, in which not unfrequently an artery creeps. According to Santorini, the anterior of these divi- sions is formed by the transverse fibres ofthe pons varolii, and the posterior by the crura cerebelli. But this nerve appertains truly to the cerebellum ; and Vicq d'Azyr could never, except in one dissection, perceive that any of its fibres arose from the pons varolii*. The nerve of the right side has been observed sometimes larger than that of the left. This fifth nerve, the largest of the scull, passing forwards and downwards, slips in betwixt the lamina of the dura mater, opposite to the point of the pars petrosum of the temporal bone. It is here firmly attached to the dura mater, and forms a flat irregular plexus. From this plexus there pass out three great branches :—1st, One to the socket of the eye and fore- head, through the foramen lacerum ; 2d, One to the upper jaw and face, through the foramen rotundum ; and 3d, One to the lower jaw and tongue, passing through the foiamen ovale. SIXTH PAIR OF NERVES ; OR, ADDUC ENTEsf. The sixth nerve of the scull seems to arise from betwixt the pons varolii and medulla oblongata. In the origin of its fibres it has, however, much variety ; and authors differ very much in this point of the description!;. We may say, however, that the sixth pair of nerves arises from the corpora pvramida- lia.—Sometimes the nerve rises in two branches, which do not unite until they are entering into the cavernous sinusj. The sixth nerve is in size somewhat betwixt the third and fourth : it passes forward under the pons varolii, until near the lateral * " Oritur e nodo cerebri, prope cerebellum duabus partibus, &c." Soemmer- ring. f Or, motores externi. j Simple as the anatomy of the nerve is, Vieuffens, Morgagni, Lietaud, Wins- low, Sabbatier—all differ in their account of the origin of this nerve in fome little circumftance; and Vicq d' Azyr gives fix varieties of it. § Sabbatier. 80 THE ORIGIN OF THE NERVES. and lower part of the body of the sphenoid bone : it thence continues its route forwards and downwards by the side of the carotid artery, through the cavernous sinus : here it seems increased in size.—It gives off that small twig which anato- mists account the beginning of the great sympathetic nerve.— The sixth nerve, after giving off this delicate thread, passes on through the foramen lacerum to the abductor muscle of the eye. SEVENTH PAIR OF NERVES ; OR, AUDITORY. The seventh nerve arises from the posterior and lateral part of the pons varolii, at the point, where it is joined by the crura cerebelli. But this seventh pair of Willis consists of two parts; the facial nerve or portio dura, and the auditory or portio mollis ; the last is the larger and posterior portion.* The portio dura comes out from the fossa formed betwixt the pons varolii, corpora olivaria, and crura cerebelli ;f and upon a more careful examination we find it rising distinctly from the crus cerebelli. The origin of the portio mollis, of the seventh pair, is to be traced from the fore part of the fourth ventricle.!; We ob- serve passing obliquely upwards from the calamus scriptorius several medullary striae ; those vary in number from two to seven, and are sometimes not to be discerned.^ To these are added certain fibres arising from the pons varolii, and as these fibres proceed from their origin, they become still more dis- tinctly formed into fasciculi. The whole of this portio mollis is larger than the third nerve, firmer than the first, but less so than the second pair : it forms a kind of groove which receives the portio dura. The portio mollis and portio dura entering * And we may add a third portion ; the portio media of Wrifburg. f " Foffe de l'eminence ohvaire," of Vicq d'Azyr. j Prochafka, fpeaking of the fourth ventricle, continues thus:—"Super has ulcimas eminentias folent medullares candicantes quafi fibrae decurrere, a quibus proprie originem portionis mollis nervorum auditorium saltern pro parte dedu- oint." (Ridley, Haller, Lobftein, cum per antiquo au&ore Piccolhomini et etiam recentiffimus Soemmerring.—" Ego poilquam multoties in lineas illas medullares in quarto ventriculo inquifiviffem, dicere poffum, non femper illas in originem ner- vi acuftici mollis terminare; nonnunquam enim paulo fupra nonnunquam paulo infra dcfinunt, aliquanda in uno latere, & haud raro utrinque defiderantur, ita ut ex his obfervationibus perfuadear illas medullares quarti ventriculi ftrias ad origin- em portionis mollis nervi acuftici minime effentiales effe." Prochafka, tab. iii. f. f. § It is a curious circumftance, fhould future observation confirm it, which has been mentioned by Santorini, that thofe origins of the auditory nerve have been obferved particularly flrong in a blind man, whofe hearing had been very acute. THE 0RIGIH OF THE NERVES. 81 the meatus auditorius internus of the petrous bone, the former is divided into four portions which pass to the several parts of the internal ear. The latter passes through the ear, and comes out by the stylo-mastoid foramen behind the ear, spreads upon the cheek, and forms the principal nerve of the face. EIGHTH PAIR OF NERVES. To understand a very intricate demonstration, it is necessa- ry to recollect that the eighth pair of nerves, as they have a re- lation to the brain, consists of three distinct nerves.—These are, 1st, The glosso-pharyngeal nerve; 2d,The par va- gum ; 3d, The spinal accessory.—Taken all together, they arise from the superior and lateral part of the medulla oblon- gata. The glosso-pharyngeal neRve is only distinguished within the scull as a larger filament of the eighth pair: it is however distinct in its course from the origin to the point where it pierces the dura mater ; it is the uppermost of the fibres of this pair of nerves.—Sometimes there is a very de- licate filament running parallel with its lower edge which be- longs to it. It has the same origin with the fibres of the par vagum.* The par vagum is composed of ten or twelve very small filaments, which are sometimes united into three or four fasci- culi. These filaments arise from the outer border of the cor- pus olivare, or from the lateral part of the medulla oblongata.^ Sometimes they arise in a double series like the nerves of the spine : a few fibres are to be traced from the side of the cala- mus scriptorius of the fourth ventricle. The spinal accessory nerve comes up from the spine to join the par vagum ; it begins by small twigs from the posteri- or roots ofthe fourth, fifth, sixth, and even the seventh cervical nerves. In the size, length, and origin of those little slips, there is much variety : as the nerve ascends to the top of the spine, it connects itself with the suboccipital nerve; it then passes behind the trunk of the vertebral artery, approaches the * Nervus gloffo-pharyngeus fasciculo mox una, mox duabus, quatuor, quin- que fibris compofito oritur ex summa atque priore parte medulla: fpina; pone cor- pora olivaria nervum facialem inter atque nervum vagum, nonnunquam etiam ex quarto ventriculo vel ex cruribus cerebelli ad fpinx mcdullam, nonnunquam fub pofteriori fulco nervi vagi, deductus ab eo vel diftindius, vel obfcurius interpofita artena, vel vena, vel arteria et vena fimul, vel parte plexus choreoidis, quid quod ipfa directionc a nervo vago eft diftinctus." Soemmerring. t Some filaments, according to Vieuffens, Santorini, and Soemmerring, are de- rived from the paries of the 4th ventricle. Vol. III. L 82 THE ORIGIN OS THE NERVES- par vagum, and receives some filaments from the medulla ob« longata.—Those three nerves, the glosso-pharyngeal, par va- gum, and accessory nerves, in their passage out of the scull are connected in a very intricate way.* They there separate from each other. The anterior branch, the glosso-pharyngeal nerve goes to the tongue and pharynx ; the middle nerve, the par vagum, has an extensive course through the body, and finally terminates into the stomach; the lowest nerve, the acces- sory, passing into the neck, perforates the mastoid muscle, and distributes its branches amongst the muscles of the shoulder. NINTH PAIR OF NERVES ; OR, LINGUAL. The ninth nerve of the scull originates from betwixt the corpora pyramidalia and olivaria. Like all the nerves of the spine, it is composed of several little filaments ; those unite into a fasciculus of a pyramidal shape : still those filaments do not form a nerve before perforating the dura mater, but pierce it severally ;.f they then unite and pass out of the scull by the condyloid foramen of the occipital bone ; they are then con- nected with the eighth pair and ganglion of the sympathetic nerve.—The final distribution of the nerve, is to the muscles ofthe tongue.!; the tenth, or suboccipital nerve. From its origin, its manner of passing betwixt the sculLand first vertebra, and its distribution, it must be classed with the nerves of the spine. The nerves of the spine are divided into the eight cervical, twelve dorsal, five lumbar, five, and sometimes six or seven, sacral nerves.§ Each of those twenty-five nerves arises in two fasciculi, one from the fore, and the other from the back part of the spinal marrow. They are to be traced a great way in • The minuti»of which will afterwards call for attention. ■f The ninth pair of nerves often differ very much in one fide from the other, in regard to the origin and number of thofe fafciculi. J " Forfan etiam nimio fanguine plena arteria vertebrali preffus laeditur, ut inde hsefitantia atque refolutio linguae ebriorum, ex cerebri phlegmone infanientiunr, attonitorum explicari poffit.—Collapfa vero eadem arteria ex nimio fanguinus pro- fluvio lingua ob fangmnis forfan defectum refolvitur. Ex ejusdem nervi nexu cum nervis cervicalibus vocis jacturam poft lasfam fpinalis medullas partem qux in cer- vice eft, explicarunt." §" Plerumque quinqflc funt, nonnunquam fex, raro tres vel quatuer" Soerrf- merring. the rigmj or thk nerves. S3 the length of the spinal marrow before they pass the mem- branes. The posterior and anterior fasciculi penetrate the dura mater separately, and afterwards unite. The posterior fasciculi of the dorsal nerve before they unite with the other, swell into a little ganglion. The posterior fasciculi of the cer- vical nerves communicate with each o$her by intermediate fila- ments. E^NB OF THE ANATOM? OF THE »RAI#. ( 84 ) CHAP IV. OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. THE FIRST PAIR OF NERVES ; OR, OLFACTORY NERVES. W E have described the three roots of this pair of nerves : their triangular form, their bulbous extremities, and their manner of perforating the cribriform plate of the aethmoid bone. Where the soft and pulpy-like mass of the olfactory nerves perforates the aethmoid bone, the dura mater involves them and gives them firm coats.* There are two sets of nerves ; first, Those which pass through the holes in the cribriform plate, nearest the crista galli, run down upon the septum of the nose, under the schneiderian membrane, and betwixt it and the periosteum. They become extremely minute as they de- scend ; and they, finally, pass into the soft substance of the membrane. Secondly, Those filaments which pass down by the outer set of holes ofthe aethmoid plate, are distributed to the membrane investing the spongy bones. Although branches of the ophthalmic, pterigoid, palatine, and suborbital nerves pass to the membrane of the nose, there js reason to believe that they have no power of conveying the impression of odours. These nerves are necessary that the membrane may possess the common properties bestowed by the nerves. Upon the question, whether those additional branches of nerves to the nose, assistin conveying the impression of odours, there has been much controversy. It is a subject upon which we might reason by analogy; but, certainly, little dependence can be placed upon those cases brought by either partv, of dis- eases affecting the one set of nerves without influencing the other. From the nature of the parts, ulceration or tumors, which destroy the bones of the nose, must press equally upon the branches ofthe olfactory nerve, and of the fifth pair. We find that there pass also to the other organs of sense, subordi- * Duyerney firft obferved this courfe and firmncfs of the olfaftory nerves. OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. 85 nate nerves ; and we know that a nerve may be modified to much variety of function ; and this is evident from the nerve of taste being a branch of the fifth pair. But it is doubtful how far a nerve may be capable of receiving at one instant various impressions. Far from considering distinct nerves sent to the same organ, as affording an argument for these nerves receiv- ing one uniform impression, and conveying one simple sensa- tion, it would seem more rational to infer, that one individual nerve cannot perform two functions, and that two functions are often required in the organs of sense. I am inclined to believe, that the olfactory nerve is incapable of bestowing com- mon sensation on the membrane of the nose ; and that the other nerves which ramify on that membrane, do, on the other hand, contribute nothing to the sense of smell, as we find that the inflammation of the pituitary membrane, which raises the sensibility ofthe branches of the fifth pair of nerves, does in no degree make those of the olfactory nerve less acute. The membrane is painfully inflamed, but the sense of smell is dead- ened. In attending to the delicate sensibility of the nerves of the senses, we neglect to take into account the less prominent, but no less curious peculiarities in the sensations, and sympa- thies of the common nerves. The senses of taste or smell are »ot more distinct from each other, or from common sensation, than are the peculiar sensations which belong to the sensibility ofthe several viscera. The stomach and intestinal canal pos- sess as great a discriminating power as the organ of taste, al- though the sensations are less perfectly conveyed to the senso- rium. There is a variety in the susceptibility of the several organs and viscera, a distinct sensation and proportioned ac- tion and election which is essential to the order and ceconomy of the general system. This is conspicuous in the variety of the affections in remote parts, when food, medicine, or poison is received into the body. These peculiarities in the impression of which each organ is susceptible, are so far distinct as to be essential to the due excitement of that organ ; and are yet so general, as to connect, in one combined action, the whole sys- tem, and to occasion sympathies in remote parts, which per- plexes, and give that degree of intricacy to the living actions., which renders medicine an uncertain art. ARRANGEMENT OF THE NERVES PROCEEDING FROM THE CRANIUM. The first nerve we have seen passing to the nose. The second, third, fourth, part ofthe fifth and sixth, pass to the eyet or through the orbit. 86 OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES* The seventh nerve is that which becomes the organ of hear- ing. Part of the fifth, seventh, eighth, ninth, and suboccipital nerves pass to the bones of the face, the integuments and mus- cles ofthe face, the jaw, and throat. From the sixth pair of nerves is derived the great sympa- thetic ; from the eighth is sent downwards the par vagum. The extreme branches ofthe fifth pair, ofthe seventh, ofthe eighth, ninth, and first cervical nerves, form a chain of connec- tions, surrounding the head, face, and neck. SECOND PAIR, OR OPTIC NERVES. In this part of the work there is no occasion to deliver any- thing further concerning the optic nerves, than has been already said of their origin, and final expansion in the retina of the eye. It will be more proper to consider them fully when treating of the eye in particular. THIRD PAIR OF NERVES, OR MOTORES OCULORUM. These nerves have the name of motores oculorum, because they are distributed to the muscles which move the eye-balls. They pass upwards from their origin ; and then diverging, they penetrate the dura mater under the extreme point of the tentorium; they descend again by the side of the cavernous sinus, and pass out of the cranium by the foramen lacerum of the sphenoid bone. The nervus motor oculi having come into the socket divides into two branches: the inferior branch passes forward along the outside of the optic nerve ; it then divides into these branches : 1. To the adductor muscle. 2. To the rectus inferior. 3> To the external oblique and to the lenticular gan- glion. But the branch ofthe third nerve, which, with the fifth, forms this little ganglion, is, by no means, constantly derived from this branch. The lesser and superior branch of the third, is distributed to the rectus superior oculi and levator palpebrae superioris. FOURTH PAIR OF NERVES, TROCHLEARES, ORPATHETICI. These nerves are very small. Their origin, from about the tubercula quadrigemina, and their long course under the base of the brain, have been already described ; after proceeding a OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. 8?. considerable way, in cases in the duplicature ofthe dura mater, where it forms the extreme point of the tentorium, they pass amongst the lamellae ofthe dura mater, where it forms the ca- vernous sinus. They pass by the outside of the third pair of nerves; turn round -so as to be above them, and make their egress through the foramen lacerum of the sphenoid bone.— They pass forward in the orbit, undiminished by the giving off of branches ; and are each finally distributed to the superior oblique muscle or trochlearis. Sometimes, however, in their course, they send branches to unite with those of the fifth pair, which pass to the nose, or even to the frontal nerve; but this is very rare.* As this nerve is derived very far back from the brain, and as the parts from which it originates are less affected by the dis- tention ofthe ventricles than almost any other part ofthe brain, this may be a reason why in hydrocephalus we so frequently see the eyes turned obliquely towards the nose. The origins of these nerves being less affected, they will give a compara- tively greater power to the superior oblique muscle. It has been observed also, that in death the power of the superior*- oblique muscle has a preponderance. THE FrFTH PAIR, OR TRIGEMINI. The tracing of the branches of the fifth pair, by dissection, is a difficult task, for those branches are distributed among the bones of the face, to the eyes, nose, mouth, tongue, and throat. From this extensive distribution the fifth nerve is necessarily the largest of those that pass out ofthe cranium. It is of a flattened form ;f it penetrates the dura mater at the anterior point of the petrous bone, and spreads flat under it. Here, under the dura mater, it is matted into one irregular ganglion ; viz. the semilunar, or Gasserian ganglion. This ganglion lies on the anterior point of the temporal, and on the sphenoidal bone. In their passage from the brain, the filaments, composing the fifth nerve, are loose, or • easily separated; at this place, they are all found so subdivided and entangled, as to resist further division* The nerve here swells out into a greater size ; it seems to be incorporated with the dense fibres of the dura mater; it becomes of a dark red, or mixed colour ; all which circumstances have, by no means, been unobserved by anatomists* Vieussens supposed, that the use of this gan- glion ofthe fifth pair, before it perforates the cranium, was to strengthen the nerve, and enable it to withstand the motion dY • Steemmernng. £ So it h fold, by Mickel, trj referable the flat worm, or t«ert.' 88 OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. the jaws ! But it would rather seem to be a ganglion connect- ing in sympathy all those parts to which the nerve is finally distributed.* The connection of the Gasserian ganglion with the dura mater, is so firm, that it yet remains undecided, whether there are sent off here any nerves to that membrane; but I conceive, that there are none, and that the connection of the ganglion with the fibrous membrane, or sheath which covers it, haS been mistaken for nerves passing from the ganglion to the dura mater. From the semilunar or Gasserian ganglion, the fifth nerve divides into three great branches ; whence the name of tri- gemini: 1st, The ophthalmic branch of willis, which passes through the foramen lacerum into the orbit. 2d, The superior maxillary nerve, which passes through the foramen rotundum. 3d, The inferior maxillary nerve, which passes to the tower jaw, through the foramen ovale. The ophthalmic branch ofthe fifth pair. This nerve enters the orbit in three divisions ; these are, the frontal, the nasal, and the lachrymal nerves. 1st, The first of these runs under the periosteum of the up- per part of the orbit, and above the levator palpebrae superioris. Upon entering , the orbit it gives off a small branch, which passes to the frontal sinus ; the nerve then divides into the super trochlearis, and the proper frontal nerve. The first of these passes to the inner part of the orbicularis oculi and fron- tal muscle. The other, the outermost, and the proper frontal nerve, passes through the hole, or notch, in the margin ofthe orbit, and mounts upon the muscles and integuments of the forehead. These superficial branches communicate with the extreme branches of the portio dura, or nervus communicans faciei. Cases are on record of wounds of the frontal nerve occasion- ing a great variety of nervous symptoms, and especially loss of sight; and it certainly marks a very particular connection and sympathy betwixt this branch and the common nerves which pass to the eye-ball and iris, and the retina, that blindness is actually occasioned by the pricking of the frontal nerve.— Morgagni supposes this to be occasioned by the spasmodic * " Et affectum animi indicia in faciei partibus depingere adjuvet." Hirfch. Sand. Thes. Diferta, p.491. OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES... 89 action of the recti muscles pressing the globe of the eye down against the optic nerve. It is also remarkable, that impres- sions acting solely on the retina, will convulse the muscles of the eye, give them irregular contractions, and consequently distort the eye-ball and produce blindness. Such has been found to be the effect of lightning in some instances. 2d, The nasal branch ofthe ophthalmic nerve sends off a slip or twig to form with a branch ofthe third pair, the len- ticular or ophthalmic ganglion ; while the trunk of the nerve passes obliquely forwards, and inward through the orbit, and gives off one or two extremely small twigs, which join the fasciculi of ciliary nerves. The nasal branch then continues its course betwixt the superior oblique and adductor muscles; before piercing the orbital plate, it sends forward a branch, which passing under the pulley ofthe superior oblique muscle, joins that division of the frontal nerve which passes over the pulley. The nasal nerve then passing through the internal orbital foramen, enters the scull again, and runs under the dura mater, which covers the aethmoid bone, to pass through the cribriform plate of that bone, and again to escape from the cranium. It is finally distributed to the upper spongy bones, and to the frontal sinuses. We thus observe such a connection of the nerves of the eye and nose, and of those distributed to the inner angle of the eye, and muscles of the eye-lids, a3 sufficiently accounts for the sympathy existing among those parts. We see the neces- sity of this connection, since the excitement of the glands which secrete the tears, the action of the muscles, and the absorption ofthe tears into the nose, must constitute one sym- pathetic action. The Lenticular, or, ophthalmic ganglion, comes natu- rally to be considered under this division of the fifth pair. The lenticular ganglion is formed by a twig from the nasal branch of the fifth pair, after being united to that branch of the third pair of nerves, which goes to the levator palpebrae and the rectus superior muscles. The ganglion is of a square form, and is situated upon the outside of the optic nerve. The ciliary nerves pass out from this ganglion into two fasci- culi ; they are ten or twelve in number; they are joined by branches of the continued nasal nerve. The ciliary nerves run forward amongst the fat of the orbit, to the sclerotic coat of the eye, and pierce it very obliquely in conjunction with the ciliary arteries. The ciliary nerves and arteries then pass forward betwixt the sclerotic and choroid coats of the eye to the iris. The iris is considered as the part the most plentifully supplied with nerves fas it certainly is also with arteries) of any Vol. Ill M 90 OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES*. part in the body. It follows, indeed, from what wc formerly said, that a profuse circulation of blood is necessary to an ac- cumulated nervous power. From the connection of these ciliary nerves with those pas- sing to the nose, Soemmerring accounts for sneezing being the consequence of a strong light upon the eye. This may per- haps be true ; but, certainly, the temporary loss of light, from sneezing, does not depend upon this connection of the nerves, but upon the immediate affection of the optic nerve and retina, from the concussion and interruption to the circulation, or upon the accumulation of blood in the eye. 2. The lachrymal nerve is the least of the three divi- sions ofthe ophthalmic nerve ; it divides into several branches before it enters the gland. Several of these branches pass on to the tunica conjunctiva, being joined by twigs of the first branch ofthe superior maxillary nerve. Others connect them- selves with the extremities of the portio dura of the seventh pair, and with the superior maxillary nerves. The second branch of the1 fifth pair ; viz. the superior maxil- lary nerve. The superior maxillary nerve, having passed the foramen rotundum, emerges behind the antrum highmorianum, at the back part of the orbit, at the root of the pterigoid process of the sphenoid bone. The infra orbital canal lies directly oppo- site, and ready to receive one branch, while the spheno-max- illary, opening into the orbit, is above, ready to receive another. The chief part, or trunk, of the nerve may be said to be seated, and to give out its divisions in the pterigo-palatine fOssa. Through the spheno-maxillary hole, the first branch of the superior nerve is sent into the socket ofthe eye. This twig unites with branches of the lachrymal nerve, and in general supplies the periosteum of the orbiu It then sends, through the foramen i»the os mallae, a branch which is distri- buted to the orbicularis muscle of the eye-lid, and communi- cates with the branches ofthe portio dura of the seventh pair, or nervus communicans faciei. Another branch of this first division passes upwards from the zygomatic fossa, in a groove ofthe wing ofthe sphenoid bone, to the temporal muscle, and getting superficial, it accompanies the branches ofthe temporal artery. Independently of this branch, which passes upwards to the temporal muscle, Miekel, in his first dissertation on this nerve, divides its branches into four: 1st, The infraorbital; 2d, The descending branch, which again gives off the vidian OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. 91 and nasal nerves ; 3d, The palatine nerve and posterior alveo- lar nerve. It was not till afterwards that he discovered the ganglion which takes his name ; and, of course, the previous description must be imperfect. The superior maxillary nerve, after sending off the small branches which I have described to enter the orbit, having fairly emerged out of the cranium, sends down two small branches which, uniting, form a little ganglion of a reddish colour, and of a triangular shape, like a heart. This, the spheno-palatine ganglion, or ganglion of Miekel, is exactly opposite to the spheno-palatine hole ; and those nerves, and this ganglion are immersed in the soft fat which fills up the space betwixt the sphenoid palatine and superior maxillary bones. From this ganglion are sent out several lesser nerves, and particularly thenasal, vidian, and palatine nerves. The superior nasal branches pass by the spheno-palatine hole to the membrane on the back part of the nose, and to the cells ofthe sphenoid bone, through the spheno-palatine hole. The vidian nerve comes off from the back part of the ganglion, and passes into the foramen pterigoideum back- wards. It first gives off some small branches to the nose (the superior and posterior nasal nerves of Miekel) ; these per- forating the bone laterally, are distributed on the pituitary membrane, covering the vomer. The vidian nerve continuing its course backwards, splits ; one branch, after a long retro- grade course through the petrous part of the temporal bone, forms a connection with the portio dura, while the other forms one ofthe roots of the great sympathetic nerve, by joining the branch of the sixth pair, which passes down with the carotid artery. From the .distribution of this branch ofthe fifth pair to the membrane of the nose, and its connection with the sympa- thetic, some physiologists account for the effects of odours in causing fainting, as the chief nerves of the heart are received from the sympathetic. They also account thus for the excite- ment of the heart, in deliquium, by stimulant applications to the nose. The palatine nerve is the largest of the branches sent out from the ganglion. We have to recollect, that there are two canals passing down behind the palate ; one anterior and larger ; and another running nearly parallel to it, a posterior and smaller one. The division of the palatine nerve, which descends through the anterior palatine hole, is of course the larger branch ; as it passes through the canal, it gives branches which enter the nose, to be distributed upon the pituitary membrane. This larger branch, in its further progresn 9* OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. through the bone, divides, and having emerged from its holt is distributed all along on the left palate. The posterior divi- sion of the palatine branch, passing down by the posterior pa- latine foramen, is distributed to the velum pendulum palati and its muscles. There is yet a third branch of the palatine nerve; viz. the external palatine nerve. It is the least of all the branches; and, sometimes, instead of coming from the ganglion, is de- rived immediately from the superior maxillary nerve. This branch descends before the pterigoid processes, and on the convex surface of the upper maxillary bone, and is distributed to the velum palati and uvula. The superior maxillary nerve, after sending off the branches which form the spheno-palatine ganglion, passes obliquely downwards to the infra orbital canal. In this course it gives off the posterior nerve to the teeth of the upper jaw ; and this again gives off a twig, which takes a course on the outside of the maxillary bone, and supplies the gums and alveoli, and buccinator muscle. While passing in its canal, the infra orbital nerve gives off the anterior nerve to the teeth ; and when it emerges from the infra orbital foramen, it spreads widely to the muscles of the face, connecting itself with the extremities of the portio dura ofthe seventh pair, or nervus communicans faciei. The " tic douloureux," and the " tic convulsif," of the French authors, are diseases attributed to the affection of this nerve. The seat of the tic douloureux, is the side of the face, the nostril, the cheek-bone, and root of the alveoli. Sauvage calls it the trismus dolorificus, or maxillaris. But it is a disease not absolutely fixed to this point of the cheek-bone ; but on the contrary, from the universal connection betwixt the nerves of the face, it takes, sometimes, a wide range ; and the disease, I have no doubt, is sometimes seated in the portio dura of the seventh pair. Sauvage has given to one species of it, the name of occipitalis. It is a disease attended with extreme pain, which forces the patient to cry out in great agony. The pain is felt deep rooted in the bones of the face, and seems to spread upon the ex- panded extremities of the nerve ; it is sudden, violent, and reiterated in its attack, and it varies in the length and repeti- tion of its accession. It is confined chiefly to those advanced in years, and is as violent in the day as during the night ; and in the advanced state ofthe disease, when the face is swelled, the slightest touch will excite the pain. This disease is apt to be confounded with the affection ofthe antrum highmorianum, the tooth-ach, rheumatism, and clavin OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. 93 hystericus, or even with venereal pains. It has been cured by dividing the infra orbital nerve. In hemicrania, the affection of the three branches of the fifth nerve, is such as to mark their distributions. There is swell- ing and pain of the face, pain of the upper maxillary bone, pains in the ear and in the teeth, difficulty of swallowing, and lastly, stiffness in moving the lower jaw, in consequence of the affection of those branches which pass up to the temporal muscle. There are cases spoken of by Sabbatier, where this infra or- bital nerve being wounded, unusual nervous affections, and even death, were the consequence: but it would rather appear, that, independently altogether of the affection ofthe nerves of the face, inflammation spreading from the wound to the brain, had, in the examples which he gives, been the occasion of the unusual symptoms, and ofthe death ofthe patients. Third branch of the fifth pair ; or, lower maxillary nerve. This, the last of the three great divisions of the fifth pair of nerves, the largest but the shortest branch within the scull, passes out by the foramen ovale. It is distributed to the mus- cles of the lower jaw, tongue, and glands. The trunk ofthe nerve having escaped from the cranium, lies covered by the ex- ternal pterigoid muscle ; and is at this point divided into two great branches, which again subdivide into numerous small branches ; many of which it would be superfluous to describe. It is sufficient to mention them as going, 1, to the masseter muscle ; 2, to the zygomatic fossa and temporal muscles ; 3, to the buccinator muscle. We regard as the two greater divisions of the lower maxil- lary nerve ; first, The proper nerve which passes into the low- er jaw; and, secondly, The gustatory or lingual nerve. The division into these two great branches is formed, after the nerve has passed betwixt the pterigoid muscles. The gustatory nerve, immediately after it separation from the nerve ofthe lower jaw, is joined by the chorda tym- pani; or, perhaps we should rather say, a branch of this nerve., by traversing the petrous portion ofthe temporal bone in a re- trograde direction, unites itself with the portio dura of the seventh pair, as it is passing through the ear. This nerve, be- ing seen passing across the tympanum, is the reason of its be- ing called, chorda tympani. The gustatory nerve, proceed- ing obliquely downward, sends off twigs to the salivary glands and muscles, situated betwixt the jaw-bone and tongue.— Where it is passing by the side of the maxillary gland, it gives $4 OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. out some filaments which form a small ganglion, from which branches penetrate the gland. The trunk then proceeding on- ward betwixt the sublingual gland and the musculus hyoglos- sus, several twigs are sent off, which form a kind of plexus amongst the muscles and salivary glands ; and communicating with the ninth pair of nerves, are distributed, finally, to the gums and membrane of the mouth. Th* gustatory nerve terminates in a lash of nerves, which sink deep into the substance of the tongue, betwixt the inser- tion ofthe stylo and genio-glossal muscles. These pass to the papillae on the surface of the tongue. The sense of taste, the impression of which is received upon this nerve, is seated in the edge and anterior part of the tongue: the action of the tongue against the palate farces the sapid juice of the morsel to extend to the edge of the tongue. The proper lower maxillary nerve, which enters into the lower jaw-bone, sometimes called, mundibulo labralis, passes downward in an oblique direction to the groove of the lower jaw-bone. Before this nerve enters the canal of the borte, it gives off branches to the mylo-hyoideus and digastricus, to the submaxillar)7 glands and to the fat. The nerve then entering the bone, runs its course all the length ofthe lower jaw within the bone, and comes out at the mental hole. In this course it gives branches which enter the roots of the teeth, and accom^ pany the branches ofthe arteries. When this lower maxillary nerve has escaped from the mental hole, it divides into two branches upon the chin ; one of these is distributed to the orbi- cularis and depressor anguli oris, and to the skin and glands of the lips; the other to the depressor labii inferioris and integu- ments, and forms a kind of plexus, which surrounds the lips. These nerves are also connected with the wide spreading branches ofthe portio dura of the seventh pair; and they are the lowest branches ofthe facial nerves, and the last enumerat- ed of the intricate branches ofthe fifth pair. THE SIXTH PAIR OF NERVES ; ABDUCENTES, OR MOTORES* EXTERNI. The sixth pair of nerves, as we have seen, arises betwixt the tuber annulare and the corpus pyramidale. Advancing forwards and upwards, sometimes above and sometimes be- neath the branches of the basilar artery, it penetrates the dura mater by the side of the basilar sinuses. It then passes by the side ofthe carotid artery, and through the cavernous sinus.—?- Here it gives off filaments, which, clinging to the carotid arte- ry, descend with it until they are joined by a branch of the OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES.' 9"i» vidian nerve. These together form the origin of the great sympathetic nerve. It is a disputed point, however, whether this be a branch given out from, or received into, the sixth pair; and in the description of the sixth pair, we might say, that as it passes the carotid artery, it receives one or more nerves which come up through the carotid hole, and encircle ^e nerve. The sixth pair enters the orbit by the foramen la- cerum, with the third and fourth pairs, and first branch of the fifth. It pierces the abductor muscle of the eye before it is finally distributed to its substance. It has been presumed, that the sixth nerve does not give off the sympathetic nerve, but receives those branches from it, be- cause the sixth nerve is larger betwixt this point and its distri- bution in the orbit, than betwixt the same point and its origin from the brain. But I conceive, that this enlargement ofthe sixth pair is not owing to such a junction ; but that, on the contrary, the nerve naturally swells out when it enters the sin- us, not from being soaked in the blood of the sinus, but from its having additional investing coats, or from the coats being strengthened in order to prepare the nerve for its passage through the blood of the sinus. Again, that the sympathetic nerve sends up those branches to join the sixth, has been presumed from the effects of experi- ments on animals, of cutting or of bruising the sympathetic nerve. But I should not be apt to give implicit credit to the result -of these experiments. Supposing that the sympathetic in the neck gave an origin to the sixth pair, should not paraly- sis of the abductor muscle of the eye, and in consequence of this, the turning of the eye towards the nose, be the effect of cutting the sympathetic ? We shall probably cease to dispute this point, when We con- sider the relations and use ofthe sympathetic nerve. The nerves cannot be considered in any other light than as being formed of the same matter with the brain, as having similar functions and powers, rather co-existing than depend- ent on the brain : and the sympathetic nerve may be defined, a tract of medullary matter, passing through and connecting the head and neck, the viscera ofthe thorax, abdomen, and pelvis, into one whole. The sympathetic nerve is singular in this, that it takes no particular origin, but has innumerable origins, and a universal connection with the other nerves through all the trunk of the body. Those viscera to which it is distributed are entirely in- dependent ofthe will, and have functions to perform too essen- tial to life to be left under the influence ofthe will. The sym- pathetic nerve is thus, as it were, a system within itself, having* 96 OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES* operations to perform of which the mind is never conscious ; whilst the extent of its connections occasion, during disease^ sympathetic affections not easily scrutinized. The function of this nerve is thus, in a great measure, insula- ted from the brain. The operations connected with it proceed, even when the brain is wanting ; and it is impossible seriously to consider the sixth nerve as giving the origin to the sympa- thetic in any other light, than as such an expression may be subservient to arrangement, description, and general enume- ration of the nerves ;—a thing most necessary in so intricate a piece of anatomy. OF THE SEVENTH PAIR OF NERVES. The nerves ofthe seventh pair consist each of two fasciculi, which arise together, and pass into the meatus auditorius in- ternus.-* But these portions do not pass through the bone in union; for the anterior and lesser fasciculus, is a common nerve, which passes through to the face, and is invested, like the common nerves ofthe body, with strong coats. It is therefore called the portio dura.j The more posterior fasciculus is the auditory nerve, and is distributed to the organ within the pars petrosa of the temporal bone ; and in distinction it is call- ed the portio mollis. The portio dura, or nervus communicans faciei, in passing from the brain to the internal auditory foramen, is lodged in the fore part ofthe auditory nerve, as in a groove.— When it leaves the auditory nerve, it passes on through the bone, and emerges on the side of the face through the stylo- mastoid foramen at the root of the styloid process, so as to come out just under the tip of the ear, covered, of course, by the parotid gland. This portio dura, while passing through the canal ofthe temporal bone (which is the aqueduct of Fallo- pius,) gives off a branch which unites with the vidian nerve of the fifth pair ; or rather, we may conclude with the best au- thors, that it receives a branch which comes retrograde from the vidian nerve, passing through the small hole on the anterior surface ofthe petrous part ofthe temporal bone. The portio dura, when it has proceeded onwards by the side of the tym- panum, gives off one or more very minute branches to the * The intermediate filaments of Wrisberg, which is betwixt thefe two por-< tiocs of the feventh nerve, is afterwards united to the portio dura, and muft be confidered as one of its roots. ■J- Galen divided all the nerves of the brain into thofe two claffes, mollis and dw ra; of which the firft were thofe of the fenfes, the latter the motores corpo*' ris. OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. 97 :i - s witii.r. the tympanum, which give tension to the small t the ear. A tittle further on, this nerve gives off a more r. rt-U'if branch, which, passing across the tympanum, is cjli'.U croa ttmpani. This is the branch which, as we for- merly mentioned, joins the gustatory branch ofthe lower max- illary nerve. The corda tympani passes through the tympa- num betwixt the long process of the incus and the handle of the malleus ; then, received into a groove of the bone^ it pass- es by the side of the eustachian tube, and after enlarging con- siderablv, it is united with the gustatory nerve* When the portio dura, or nervus communicans faciei, has escaped from the stylo-mastoid foramen, but is yet behind the condyle of the lower jaw, and under the parotid gland, it gives off, 1st, The posterior auris. This has connection with the first cervical nerve, and passing up behind the ear, it is con- nected with the occipital branches of the third cervical nerve. 2d, The nervus stylo-hyoideus to the styloid muscles, and to unite with the sympathetic. 3d, A branch which supplies some of the deep muscles, and joins the laryngeal branch of the eighth pair. The portio dura, rising through the parotid gland, spreads out in three great divisions : 1. An ascending branch, which divides into three tem- poral or jugal nerves ; so called, because they ascend upon the jugum, or zygomatic process. Two orbitary nerves, which, passing up to the orbicularis muscle, branch upon it, and inos- culate with the extremities ofthe fifth pair. 2. The facial nerves. The superior facial nerve passes out from the upper part of the parotid gland, across the face to the cheek and orbicularis muscle of the eye. The middle faci- al nerve passes from under the risorius santorini; it goes un- der the zygomatic muscle, and encircles the facial vein ; it sends branches forward to the lips, and upwards to the eye- lids, and to unite with the infra-orbital nerve. There is an inferior facial nerve, which comes out from the lower part of the parotid gland, passes over the angle ofthe jaw, and is dis- tributed to those fibres of the platysma myoides which stretch up upon the face, and form the risorius santorini: it passes on to the angle of the lips, and is distributed to their depressor muscle. Betwixt those facial nerves there are frequent com- munications, while they are at the same time united with the extremities of several branches ofthe fifth pair. 3. The descending branches pass along the margin of the jaw, down upon the neck, and backward upon the occiput. Thus we see that the communicating nerve ofthe face is well named.—It is distributed to the side of the face, head, and up* Vol. Ill- N 98 OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES* per part ofthe neck : it unites its extreme branches with thos-r of the three great divisions of the fifth pair, with the eighth and ninth, with the accessory of the eighth pair, with the second and third cervical nerves, and with the sympathetic. From those various connections it has been called the lesser sympathetic. As to the sympathies which physicians have thought fit to ascribe to the connections of this with other nerves, as laughing, weeping, kissing, Sec. they would be tedious to enumerate, and by no means instructive. The portio mollis of the seventh pair of nerves is the acoustic or auditory nerve; which shall be considered in a more distinct and particular manner, when we describe the other parts of the organ of hearing. The nerves which we have now described are connected with the anatomy ofthe head, and circulate chiefly around the bones of the face. Those we are next to consider extend their branches to the neck, and form there a very intricate piece of anatomy, while a class of them still more important, pass down to the viscera of the breast and belly.. THE EIGHTH PAIR OF NERVES. The fasciculus, which, proceeding from the medulla ob- longata, passes out of the cranium by the side of the great lateral sinus, and which, in the view we have of the nerves upon raising the brain from the cranium, is properly enough considered as the eighth pair, consists in truth of three distinct nerves. These are the glosso-pharyngeal nerve, the par vagum, and the spinal accessory nerve of Willis. The glosso-pharyngeal nerve. This nerve, parting from its connection with the par vagum and accessory nerves, perforates the dura mater separatelv from these, and in many subjects, passes through an osseous canal distinct from the par vagum. When it escapes from the cranium, it lies deep under the angle of the jaw, and passes across the internal carotid artery upon its outer side. It is to be seen by lifting the styloid muscles, at which point it sends small branches to the styloid and digastric muscles, and to join the par vagum. It sends also some very small twigs down upon the internal carotid artery ; some of which join OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. 99 that pharyngeal branch* which is formed from the par vagum and accessory nerve. These branches united form a small irregular ganglion, from which again pass off numerous branches to the con- strictor muscles of the pharynx. The trunk of the glosso-pharyngeal nerve, after giving off those nerves which pass in the direction of the internal carotid artery, continues its course attached to the stylo-glossal and stylo-pharyngeal muscles, to which of course it gives more branches, and also to the upper division of the constrictor pharyngis. A division of the extreme branches of this nerve terminates in the tongue, under the denomination of rami Hnguales profundi, rami linguales laterales, nervi glosso- pharyngei.f It appears to me that these branches are distributed amongst the short muscles of the tongue, and perhaps to the large pa- pillae upon the most posterior part of the tongue. Amongst the branches of the pharyngeal nerve is to be enumerated that which turns back to join the ninth pair in its distribution to the tongue.f. The remaining branches of the glosso-pharyngeal nerve, are distributed in innumerable filaments upon the pha- rynx, in which they are assisted by branches from the ganglion of the sympathetic nerve. THE PAR VAGUM. The par vagum is the great and important division of the eighth pair. It is the middle fasciculus ofthe three nerves as they lie within the scull. In its exit, it is separated from the internal jugular vein by a thin bony plate; and sometimes two or three fibres of the nerve pass the bone distinct from the others, and afterwards unite into the proper trunk ofthe par vagum. Deep under the lower jaw and the mastoid process, the glosso-pharyngeal nerve, the par vagum, the spinal acces- sory, the sympathetic nerve, the portio dura of the seventh, and the upper cervical nerves are entangled in a way which will fatigue the dissector, and may account for every degree of sympathy of parts. The par vagum, lying behind the inter- nal carotid artery, and as it were escaping from the confusion • This is a branch to the pharynx which is formed by the par vagum and the fpinal acceffory of Willis. After this nerve is formed, it again forms a connexion with the par vagum —Pain in the thorax having been obferved by Galen to extend to the back, Scarpa explains it on the ground of this conne&ion with the fpinal ac- ceffory nerve. f Scarpa. t Sabbatier -100 OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. ofthe ninth, accessory and glosso-pharyngeal nerves, descends and swells out into a kind of ganglion.* We now observe three branches to be sent off: The first and second pharyn- geal nerves, which pass to the constrictor pharyngis muscle, and the interval laryngeal nerve. This last mentioned nerve is even larger than the glosso-pharyngeal nerve. It is behind the carotid arterv, and passes obliquely downward and forward. In its progress the principal branch passes under the hyo-thyroideus muscle, and betwixt the os hyoides and the thyroid cartilage ; while others, more superficial, pass down and are connected with the external laryngeal, or pharynco-laryngeus ; which is t\ nerve formed by the sym- pathetic, and par vagum conjointly. The principal branch of the internal laryngeal nerve which runs under the hyo-thy- roideus, is distributed to the small muscles moving the cartila- ges. The minute extremities of this nerve pass also to the apex of the epiglottis, and the glandular membrane covering the glottis. We have, at the same time, to remark a very par- ticular communicating nerve betwixt this internal laryngeal nerve, and the recurrent branch of the par vagum. This branch is described by Galen. The par vagum continues its uninterrupted course betwixt the carotid artery and jugular vein, and is involved in the same sheath with these vessels. In this course down the neck, it sometimes sends back a twig which unites with the ninth pair, and when near the lower part ofthe neck, it sends forward twigs to unite with those from the sympathetic nerve, v, hich pass down to the great vessels ofthe heart, to form the superior cardiac plexus, f On the right side, those nerves to the great vessels are in general given off by the recurrent nerve. The par vagum now penetrates into the thorax by passing before the subclavian artery ; it then splits into two. The main nerve passes on by the side ofthe trachea, and behind the root of the lungs ; while the branch, on the right side, turns round under the subclavian artery ; on the left, under the arch of the aorta, and ascends behind the trachea to the la- rynx. This ascending branch of the par vagum is the recurrent nerve. On the right side it is sometimes double. It ascends behind the carotid artery, and sometimes is thrown round the root of the thyroid artery. On the left side, which from its turning round the arch of the aorta, is much lower than on the " Tr uncus gangliformis OCTAVI, tumidulum corpus olivare, Faliopii ; but it is fuf- pected that in this he meant the ganglion of the fympathetic nerve. f The courfe of thefe nerves to the he, a ; ?, is beft treated of with the branches ■f. the fympathetic nerve. OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. 101 right, it gives off filaments which go to the lower cardiac plex- us, after having united with the branches of the sympathetic. Under the subclavian of the right side, also, there are sent branches from the recurrent to the cardiac plexus: and on both sides there pass branches of communication betwixt the sympathetic nerve and the recurrent. When 'the recurrent nerve has turned round the artery, it ascends in a direction to get behind the trachea, and it lies betwixt the trachea and eso- phagus. It here sends off many branches to the back and membranous part of the trachea which pierce this posterior part, to supply the internal membrane. It gives also branches to the oesophagus and thyroid gland. The final distribution of this nerve is to the larynx. It pierces betwixt the thyroid and cricoid cartilages, and separates into many filaments, which terminate in the crico-arytenoideus lateralis and posti- cus, and thyro-aryten6ideus, and in the membrane of the la- rynx. We have already mentioned the branch of communi- cation betwixt the recurrent and internal laryngeal nerves,* and Sabbatier describes a branch ofthe recurrent, which some- times ascends and joins the sympathetic high in the neck. Two cases, mentioned by Galen, of scrophulous tumours in the neck opened, where the consequence was loss of voice, have tempted many anatomists to institute experiments on the recurrent and internal laryngeal nerves.f Notwithstanding the deep situation of those recurrent nerves, Galen says, they were cut in these cases, and he believed that die branch of communication betwixt the laryngeal and recurrent restored the voice after some time had elapsed. Both the internal laryn- geal and recurrent nerves are necessary to the formation of the voice. Experiments have been made upon them in dogs, and the result is curious; although the lesser changes of the strength, acuteness, and modulation of the voice could not be well observed in the lower animals. When the laryngeal nerve is cut, the voice is feeble but acute ; when the recurrent nerve is cut, there is a relaxation of those muscles moving the aryte- noid cartilages which command the opening of the glottis, and in consequence the voice is flatter or graver, or more raucous. The par vagum, after sending off the recurrent nerve, de- scends by the side of the trachea. Before it passes behind the * There is a double communication betwixt thofe nerves; in the firft place by this more fuperficial branch, and again by feveral internal and more minute branches. t Martin, in the Edinburgh Effays, Profeffor Sue of Paris, Dr. Highton, in the memoirs of the Medical Society of London; Cruikfhanjts, Profeffor Scarpa, Arncmann, &c. *4* ***» cnf.r.. 10;2 OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. vessels and branch of the trachea going to the lungs, it sends minute branches which form the anterior pulmonic plex- us.* This plexus is entangled in the connections of the peri- cardium, and is dissected with difficulty. The branches of this plexus throw themselves round the pulmonic arteries and veins, and follow them into the lungs. The par vagum, passing on behind the root of the lungs, forms the posterior pulmonic plexus. From this also the nerves proceed into the lungs, by attaching themselves to the pulmonic arteries and veins, and bronchial arteries, and the branches of the trachea.f The trunks of the nerve, continuing their course upon each side of the oesophagus, unite and split into branches, and again unite so as to form a netting upon the oesophagus ; these are the anterior and posterior plexus gul^e,or oesophageal plexus. The par vagum, thus attached to the oesophagus, pierces the diaphragm with it, the anterior plexus unites again into a considerable trunk, is attached to the lesser arch of the stomach. It stretches even to the pylorus, and sends its branches to the upper side of the stomach and to the lesser omentum ; at the same time it unites with the left hepatic plexus, some of its branches terminate in the solar plexus, which surrounds the root of the caeliac artery. The posterior oesophageal plexus, likewise uniting again into a considerable cord when it has come into the abdomen, sends branches to encircle the cardiac orifice ofthe stomach; it branches also to the inferior side and great arch of the stomach ; it sends also branches to the splenic plexus and solar ganglion, • I do not conceive that this plexus admits of any ufeful divifion, or requires any diftinction of name. •}• Nerves of the Lungs. Galen, Vefalius, and others, conceived that there were very few nerves fent to the lungs, and that thofe which were, went only to the membranes, and not to the fubftance of the lungs. They believed alfo that the difcharge of blood from the lungs and the exiftence of vomicae without pain, while there was great pain in peripneumony, was 3/confirmation of this opinion. Fallopius corrected this idea, and fhowed that the bronchiae were alfo attended through their courfe with nerves. There often exifts vomica: and effufions of blood in the lungs ; and Hal- ler fays, the lungs can be lanced without the animal feeling pain, but ft ill the bronchiae are extremely fenfible.—Water accumulated in the interlobular cellular • membrane, or the infarction of blood into it, gives no acute pain, but only a fenfc of weight and difficulty of breathing. It is an oppreflion in a great meafure de- pending upon the return of the blood from the lungs unchanged in confequence ofthe compr-'fuon of the cells.—The fenfibility ofthe bronchiae, and the exiftence of their nerves, appear in afthma ; and alfo from the pain excited by calculi, and from their irritability excited by recent ulceration, or when vomicae are difcharg- ed into them. The connection betwixt the ftomach and bronchiae, through the medium of the par vagum and pulmonic plexus, is evident from thofe afthmatic attacks whick depend upon foulnefs in the ftomach, OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES* 1C3 Thus we see that the par vagum has a most appropriate name, and that it is nearly as extensive in its connections as the sympathetic itself. It is distributed " to the oesophagus, pha- rynx, and larynx; to the thyroid gland, vessels ofthe neck and heart, to the lungs, liver and spleen, stomach, duodenum, and someames to the diaphragm." The recollection of this distri- bution will explain to us many sympathies ; for example, the hysterical affection of the throat when the stomach is distended with flatus, the exciting of vomiting by tickling the throat, the effect which vomiting has in diminishing the sense of suffoca- tion, that state ofthe stomach which is found upon dissection to accompany hydrophobia, whether spontaneous, or from the bite of a dog. OF THE ACCESSORY NERVE, Or THIRD DIVISION OF THE EIGHTH PAIR OF NERVES. The spinal accessory nerve of Willis, is that which, taking its origins like the cervical nerves from the spinal marrow, as- cends through the spine and foramen magnum of the occipital bone, and passes again from the scull like one of the nerves of the brain. It passes out with the par vagum, is attached to it in its passage, but again separates from it when it has escaped from the scull. Under the base of the cranium it is attached to the ninth pair also. Commonly this attachment is firm ; sometimes, it is by a short filament. This parasitical nerve then passes behind the internal jugular vein, and passes obliquely downward and backward. It then perforates the mastoid muscle, and passes in a direction across the neck to the shoulder. While it pierces, it gives nerves to the mastoid muscle ; and after piercing, it entangles its branches with those ofthe third and fourth cervical nerves. It then passes under the trapezius muscle, and is distributed to it, where it is on the back of the neck and shoulder. From the distribution of this nerve we discover that the shrug of the shoulders is verv natural; and " pourquoi les grandes passions de Tame nous portent a gesticuler, pour ainsi dire, malgre nous !"* OF THE NINTH PAIR, OR LINGUALIS MEDIUS OR HYPO- GLOSSUS. After passing out from the scull by the anterior condyloid foramen, the ninth nerve adheres to the eighth pair, by cellular filaments and the interchange of nerves. It receives also • Sabbatier. 104 OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. branches from the first cervical nerve, or from the branch ot union of the first and second cervical nerves. When dissec- ting in the neck, we find the ninth nerve lying by the side of the internal jugular vein under the styloid muscles, and coming out from under the occipital branch of the internal carotid artery. The nerve here divides, or it may rather be said to give off that branch which is called the Descendens Noni. The con- tinued trunk of the nerve passes before the external carotid artery and forwards under the larger branches of veins in a> direction tending towards the os hyoides. Here it turns up- wards under the stylo-hyoideus and digastricus muscles, and betwixt the stylo-glossus and hyo-glossus. Where the nerve is near the os hyoides, and passing under the stylo-glossus muscle,'it sends down a twig which passes to the fore part of the throat, and chiefly to the sterno-hyoideus and thyro- hyoideus. The continued nerve is distributed to the muscles of the tongue and lower jaw, and glands under the jaw ; and it ter- minates by numerous filaments, which form a net-work amongst the muscles of the tongue ; to which is united part of that branch of the fifth pair which goes to the tongue.* The ramus descendens noni passes downward, and ob- liquely over the trunk of the carotid artery, and under the thyroid vein. In the superficial dissection of the muscles of the neck, two slender twigs of nerves will be seen to come from the side of the neck, and crossing the jugular vein, unite to this descending branch. Those twigs come from the second and third cervical nerves ;f and a little ganglion or plexus is formed by their union with the descendens noni. From this centre are sent out many delicate and superficial nerves to the omo-hyoideus and sterno-thyroideus muscles. Thus we find that the ninth nerve has connections with the eighth pair of nerves, with the spinal accessory, the sympa- thetic, the cervical, and phrenic nerves. When this nerve is injured, the motion of the tongue is lost, but the sense of taste remains unimpaired. On the contrary, when the branch of the fifth nerve going to the tongue is hurt, the sense of taste is lost, while the mobility of the tongue remains.:]: Co- lumbus knew a man who had no sense of taste, aud who eat indifferently every thing presented to him. When he died, Columbus was curious to know the cause of this, and he found • This has been called plexus cerato-bafto-ftylo-gUJus ! f In fome inftances thofe twigs are found to be derived from *b firft origin <-'. the phrenic nerve. \ Soemmerring de Cerebro & Nervis. OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. 105 that he altogether wanted the gustatory nerve or lingual branch of the inferior maxillary nerve. Cases detailed by Professor Scarpa still further illustrate this fact. A woman, subject to epileptic attacks in an early age, was seized in her pregnancy with an hemiplegia and loss of speech. From this attack, by the use of medicine*;, she recovered; but in a future labour the disease recurred. Now the cure was less complete ; for, though she regained the use of her arms, she never recovered* the faculty of speech, or was only capable of articulating with great dissonance the monosyllables, affirming or denying. Upon making her exert herself to speak, they observed no motion in the tongue ; and, upon applying the hand under the jaw, they could feel no motion in the muscles ofthe tongue ; yet she relished her food and drink, and had an acute sense of taste, and could swallow easily. He mentions another case, where the patient was attacked with a sense of weight at the root ofthe tongue, a difficulty of speaking, and copious flow of saliva. In a short time he entirely lost the power of arti- culating, but retained acutely the sense of taste.* From the extensive connection of this nerve, particularly with the eighth and sympathetic nerves, we see why tremor* of the tongue and aphonia may be occasioned by hysteria, hypochondriasis, colics, or worms in the intestines.f of the cervical nerves. First cervical nerve. Tenth pair of the scull.. Suboccipital nerve. This is the least of all the nerves of the spine; it arises by two roots from the medulla spinalis. borne difference has been observed in the manner in which those roots collect their filaments ; and only the anterior root or fasciculus is described by some authors. The posterior fasciculus is indeed the larger, and comes in a direction dif- terentlrom the general direction of the roots ofthe other cer- vical nerves. The roots of the suboccipital nerve are con- nected with the spinal accessory nerve, but seldom form a ganglion with it; and frequently they form a union with the posterior roots of the second cervical nerve. The fibres of the suboccipital nerve passing transversely and a little oblique- ly upwards, go out under the vertebral artery, and betwixt it and.the first vertebra of the neck. The little trunk of the suboccipital nerve, thus formed, and having escaped from the • Tabulae Neurologies, Audtore Anton. Scarpa. t J. F. Will. Bachmcr Comment, de ono pare Nervorum Vol. III. O ICG OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. spine, rises for a little way upwards, swells into a kind of ganglion, and then divides into two branches. The anterior of these branches is the smaller. It passes down upon the inside of the vertebral artery ; its filaments unite with the hypoglossal nerve, or ninth pair, and with the superior cervical ganglion ofthe sympathetic and with the first branch of die second cervical nerve.* The larger and posterior branch divides into eight twigs, which arc chiefly distributed to the muscles moving the head—to the oblique superior and inferior, the recti postici and lateralcs, complcx- us, and splenitis. Some of those muscular branches unite with that branch of the second cervical nerve which ascends up- on the occiput. Second cervical nerve. This nerve, arising by a dou- ble origin from the spinal marrow, like the other nerves of the spine, passes betwixt the first and second vertebrae. It is lar- ger than the last; and after forming a little ganglion by the side of the transverse process of the first vertebra, divides into twr> branches. The superior branch sends up a considerable division be- hind the projection of the transverse process of the first verte- bra, to unite to the suboccipital or first cervical nerve. Seve- ral twigs pass-forward to unite with the superior cervical gan- glion of the sympathetic nerve, and with some of the more an- terior branches of the third cervical nerve, and with the ninth and spinal accessory nerves. Besides these intricate connec- tions, irregular branches of this nerve proceed to the small muscles, moving the head and lying on the fore part of the spine. The posterior branch of the second pair of cervical nerves is chiefly a muscular nerve. It rises up by the side of the complexus, gives branches to that muscle and to the sple- nius, and communicates with the branches ofthe first cervical. Its branches are also distributed to the upper part ofthe trape- zius muscle, from which they extend along the integuments, covering the occiput even to the summit of the head. The third cervical nerve, in the first place, communi- cates with the second and fourth cervical nerves, with the sym- pathetic and lingual nerves, and sometimes sends down a twig to unite with the origin of the phrenic nerve from the fourth cervical nerve. From the anterior division of the third cervical nerve, branches pass to the splenius and complexus, and trapezius, and upwards to the ear. We may observe also a cutaneous * A very fmall nerve is defcribed by fome authors as pafling from the anterior jivifion of the nerve, into the canal of the vertebral artery. OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. xw nerve which accompanies the external jugular vein, viz, ner- vus superfici alis colli ; the distribution of which is chiefly to the angle and margin of the lower jaw, while some of its branches enter the parotid gland, and unite with the extremi- ties of the portio dura and other facial nerves. The small posterior division of the nerve passes to the complexus, spinalis cervicis, and multifidus spinae, while at the same time it unites to the branches of the second cervical nerve. The fourth cervical nerve, coming out from betwixt the third and fourth cervical vertebrae, divides into its anterior and posterior branches like the other cervical nerves. The first goes to form, with the third and fifth cervical tierves, the phrenic nerve. It sends also a branch to the sympathetic, to the integuments ofthe neck and shoulder, and to the supra and infra spinatus musclfes. These are called by Soemmerring superclaviculares interiores, meoii, and POSTERIORES. The great posterior division ofthe fourth cervical nerve, passes to the muscles of the spine and shoulder, in conjunction with the branches of the third cervical nerve. Fifth cervical nerve.—This nerve comes of course from betwixt the fourth and fifth vertebrae, and from betwixt the scaleni muscles. It divides also into two branches. The su- perior of these passes backwards to the muscles of the back and shoulder, and a branch formed by it; and the sixth passes down under the scapula and serratus major. This superior division ofthe nerve sends up also two small twigs of commu- nication with the fourth cervical nerve. The inferior division of the nerve sends down upon the side ofthe neck a considerable branch to the formation of the phrenic nerve. It communicates with the root of the sixth nerve, and sends muscular branches backward. The sixth cervical nerve.—The muscular branches of this nerve are large and extensive in their course. They pass into the levator scapulae, extend under the trapezius, and unite with the extreme branches ofthe spinal accessory nerve. They are prolonged to the latissimus dorsi and serratus magnus.— Branches also extend down behind the clavicle, and under the pectoral muscle. Besides these branches, this nerve communicates with the fifth, and gives out an origin to the phrenic nerve ; and lastly, uniting to the seventh, it passes into the axillary plexus. The seventh cervical nerve.—This nerve goes almost entirely to form the axillary plexus. There is a communicating nerve from the last to this, and from that communicating branch 108 OF THE PARTICULAR NERVE;,. generally there passes off a filament to the phrenic nerve ; and from the very root of the nerve there passes off a branch to the lower cervical ganglion of the sympathetic. Irregular twigs also descend from this nerve under the clavicle to the pectoralis minor and major. The eighth cervical nerve—The greater part of this nerve passes to the axillary plexus. It sends small branches to the lower cervical ganglion ofthe sympathetic, and to the mus- cles of the breast; which last descend behind the clavicle. RECAPITULATION OF THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE CERVICAL NERVES. Upon reviewing the description of these nerves, we find that the general tendency of their branches is backwards over the side of the neck, to the muscles moving the head and shoul ders. We find also that they are connected in a very intricate manner with the most important nerves ofthe cranium. High in the neck and under the jaw, they are connected with the por- tio dura, with the fifth pair, with the eighth and ninth pairs, and with the sympathetic. Towards the middle of the neck they are still throwing their connecting branches to the descen- dens noni, and sympathetic, and eighth pair. The lower cer- vical nerves again are still supporting their connections with the lower ganglion of the sympathetic. Further, we find the phrenic nerve derived (most frequent- ly y from the third and fourth, and branch of communication. betwixt the fourth and fifth. The axillary plexus is form- ed by the fifth, sixth, seventh, and eighth cervical nerves, and first of the back. OF THE DORSAL NERVES. There are twelve dorsal nerves. These, as we have descri- bed, are formed by two fasciculi of fibres ; one from the fore, and the other from the back part ofthe spinal marrow. These filaments run for some way superficially in the length of the spinal marrow before they pierce the dura mater. They pierce it separately; the posterior branch first forms a ganglion, and then the two fasciculi are united. They are now betwixt the heads ofthe ribs. We must here recollect, that the trunk of the sympathetic nerve, which passes along the cavity ofthe tho- rax, runs down behind the pleura, and passes before the heads, of the ribs through all the length of the back. It receives, as it passes the interstices of the several ribs, at each interval, a OF «THE PARTICULAR NERVES. ios communicating nerve from the spinal marrow j a branch from the intercostal or dorsal nerves. Those communications are sent in the following manner: the proper dorsal, or intercostal nerve, sends its greater branch forwards betwixt the ribs ; some lesser branches pierce back- wards to the muscles of the back : opposite to this there goes out from each nerve the first branch of union with the sympa- thetic, and this union forms a firm ganglion. Sometimes there run out in this direction two short branches from the spinal nerve, to unite with the ganglion of the sympathetic ; but more commonly there passes in a retrograde direction from the in- tercostal nerve, where it is about to take its course between the ribs, another branch of communication which joins the sympa- thetic. Sometimes the dorsal or intercostal nerves send off three communicating branches to the sympathetic. The intercostal nerves pass on betwixt the ribs, in company with the intercostal arteries, and reach even to the sternum.— In this course they supply the intercostal muscles and triangu- laris sterni, while they are at the same time sending out branch- es, which, piercing the intercostal muscles and fascia of the thorax, are distributed to the muscles on the outside of the ehest.—Those branches which we mentioned as passing be- twixt the heads of the ribs, and which are sent off immedi - ately upon the trunk escaping from the vertebral opening, sup- ply the multifidus spinae and levatores costarum, and other ex- tensor muscles of the spine. Slips proceeding from the second, third, fourth, and fifth intercostal nerves, send branches to the pectoral muscles, the serratus anticus, and serratus posticus superior, trapezius, and rhomboides. The sixth, and all the lower nerves ofthe back, send branches from betwixt the ribs to the latissimus dorsi, serratus inferior, and abdominal mus- cles. The eleventh and twelfth are distributed to the dia- phragm, quadratus lumborum, psoas magnus, and iliacus in- ternus. LUMBAR NERVES. The lumbar nerves are five in number. The first comes out under the first lumbar vertebra, and the others in succes- sion. Their trunks are covered by the psoas magnus. Thev pass very obliquely downward, and the three lowest are of re- markable size. In the general distribution, we may first remark the posteri- or branches, which go backwards to the muscles which sup- port and extend the spine. Again, the anterior branches ; which give, 1st, additional branches to the sympathetic nerve iio OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. as it passes over the vertebras of the loins, and by which it is supported and reinforced till it terminates in the pelvis ; 2dly, they have frequent connection with each other, and with the last nerve of the back, and first of the sacrum ; 3dly, they send out branches, delicate but of great extent, to the muscles of the loins and back, and to the abdominal muscles and integu- ments of the groin and scrotum ; 4thly, the principal anterior branches ofthe lumbar nerves pass down to form (along with the great nerves of the sacrum) the anterior crural nerve, the obturator, and the great ischiatic nerve. SACRAL NERVES. The nerves which come out from the extremity ofthe me. dulla spinalis, or cauda equina, through the sacrum, are in general five in number. Sometimes there is one more or less. The first division of each sacral nerve is into those branches which pass out by the posterior foramina of the sacrum, and those which, by the anterior foramina, come into the pelvis.— The posterior branches are very small, and pass to the mus- cles supporting the spine ; while the anterior ones are particu- larly large, especially the first and second, which, with the low- est of the loins, go to form the largest nerve of the body, the ischiatic nerve. It is difficult to recollect the distribution of the several branches ofthe lumbar and sacral nerves, when taken thus to- gether ; but when we deliver the description of the nerves of the thigh and leg, we count them, and hold them in remem- brance with comparative ease. At present we are best pre- pared to follow the sympathetic nerve in its course. OF THE GREAT SYMPATHETIC NERVE, OR INTERCOSTAL NERVE. Notwithstanding the idea of this nerve which I have en- deavoured to convey, I conceive that we must still continue to speak of the origins of this nerve in the usual way, for the sake of simplicity and arrangement. The sympathetic nerve is in general considered as original- ly derived from the sixth pair; or, we may say, it takes its origin from the sixth, where it passes by the side of the caro- tid artery, and from the vidian branch of the fifth pair. It ap- pears without the scull, sometimes behind and sometimes be- fore the carotid artery, and sometimes it is double in its exit from the base of the scull. Almpst immediately after it has escaped from the scull, it forms its first ganglion ; which is ve- Ot lilt fAivnOULAR NERVES. Ill ry large and remarkable, and has the name of the superior cervical ganglion of the sympathetic nerve. It is of a soft consistence and reddish colour, and it extends from the scull to the transverse process of the third vertebra. It gradually ta- pers downwards until it terminates in the slender nerve, which in the neck is extremely small. This ganglion has much va- riety of shape in different subjects, and may be said in general to receive twigs of nerves upon the back part; it gives them out upon the fore part. The superior cervical ganglion ofthe sympathetic nerve re- ceives nerves from the second, third, and fourth cervical nerves, and even sometimes from the root ofthe phrenic nerve. It has also connections with the hypo-glossal, par vagum, and glosso-pharyngeal nerves. It sends out branches to unite with the glosso-pharyngeal, and which follow that nerve in its dis- tribution to the tongue and pharynx. Many of its branches surrounding the carotid artery form connections with the inter- nal and external laryngeal nerves, and proceed in meshes, or form plexus along with the branches ofthe artery. These may be followed to great minuteness. To be more particular in the description of these anterior branches of the sympathetic nerve, they are called the nervi molles, or nervi vasorum. They are nerves peculiarly soft, with a greater proportion of cellular membrane; they spread in net-works along the arteries, and form frequent con- nections by little knots like small ganglions. Classed with these nervi vasorum, are branches which pass forward from the upper ganglion of the sympathetic, to unite with filaments from the internal laryngeal nerve of the par vagum, and which form the external laryngeal nerve. It is remarked, that none of these branches of the sympathetic nerve are distributed to the larynx and pharynx without being mingled and associated with the glosso-pharyngeal nerve, or with the pharyngeal branch ofthe par vagum.* Ofthe nervi molles, some form a plexus upon the internal carotid artery. These are extremely soft and pulpy, and are united with branches which descend from the glosso-pharyngeal nerve. A net-work is also formed, which covers the beginning ofthe external carotid artery.— From this, as from a centre, branches are sent out with the ar- teries to the neck, and face^ and glands under the jaw ; and these last, with a mesh which passes up upon the temporal ar- tery, unite with the portio dura ofthe seventh pair. It has been often observed, that the branches of the carotid artery have a peculiar provision of nerves, and that these nerves ' Scarpa. 112 OF THE PARTICULAR NERVE*. are more »umerous and minutely distributed than in any othei part of the body. There are indeed no nerves in any part of the body which have so extensive and intricate connections with important nerves as the cutaneous nerves of the face and neck. This distribution of the nerves is, I conceive, a provi- sion for that power possessed by the imagination, or rather that uncontroulable connection which exists betwixt the feelings and the action of the vessels in blushing. The lowest of the nervi vasorum or molles, sent off from the superior ganglion of the sympathetic nerve, descends in the course of the trunk ofthe nerve, and forms, with other branch- es, the superior cardiac. This nerve, generally called nervus cordis superficia- lis, passing down in the direction of the trunk of the sympa- thetic nerve, and near the longus colli muscle, is for some length a very slender branch ; but in its course it receives two, three, or four additional twigs from the sympathetic, and branches which come under the carotid artery from the pharyn- geal nerves, or nervi molles. When this superior cardiac nerve is within an inch or two ofthe subclavian artery, branch- es of union pass betwixt it and the recurrent nerve of the par vagum ; and branches of the nerves passing to the heart from the lower cervical ganglion, also join it. It then, attaching itself to the investing membranes and sheaths of carotid and subclavian arteries, forms with others a plexus of nerves, which run along the great vessels to the heart. The continued trunk of the sympathetic, where it emerges1 from the superior cervical ganglion, is extremely small. It descends behind the carotid artery, and lies near to the spine. When opposite to the fifth and sixth cervical vertebrae, the inferior cervical ganglion of the sympathetic is formed.— In this course, twigs of communication pass betwixt it and the cervical nerves, or join it with the beginning of the phrenic nerve. But not unfrequently there are three cervical ganglions form-' ed by the sympathetic nerve ; the superior, middle, and infe- rior ganglions : or it happens that we find the sympathetie nerve split into two branches in the neck; one of which forms the middle, and the other the lower ganglion. There are received by the middle cervical ganglion, or, thyroid ganglion, branches of nerves from the third, fourth, fifch, and sixth cervical nerves, and also sometimes from the phrenic nerve. The ganglion is by no means constantly found, and it is irregular in its size and shape. When large, and in what may be considered as its more perfect state, it gives off some considerable branches. Of these, part unite with the su- OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. 113 perior cardiac nerve already mentioned; others form the great or deep cardiac nerve, while lesser ones play round the subcla- vian artery, and unite with the lower cervical ganglion, or the the upper thoracic ganglion. The deeper cardiac branch of the sympathetic, splitting and again uniting so as to form rings, runs outwards, attached to the arteria innominata and arch ofthe aorta, to the heart. In this course, while it passes before the trachea, it forms con- nections with the recurrent branch and trunk of the par vagum. Under the arch of the aorta, we find- this branch concentrated to form the ganglion cardiacum of Wrisberg, or ganglion molle and pellucidum of Scarpa. This ganglion is like a mere enlargement or swelling of the nerve. From this, four or five branches may be enumerated; 1st, a branch passing behind the pulmonary artery to the back ofthe heart, and fol- lowing the left coronary artery; 2dly, a small division to the anterior pulmonary plexus of the par vagum ; 3diy, a pretty- considerable branch which, passing behind the aorta, and be- twixt it and the pulmonary artery, is distributed with the right coronary artery to the anterior part of the heart. On the left side of the neck, the sympathetic, receiving on the one side branches from the cervical nerves, and on the other giving off branches, which descend behind the carotid artery to the heart, (viz. the superior cardiac) often splits before it forms the mid- dle or thyroid ganglion, and sometimes throws its branches over the thyroid artery, and the ganglion lies upon that artery. Again, from the ganglion there descend two series of numerous lesser filaments, which form meshes upon the thyroid and sub- clavian arteries to the heart. Others proceed downward be- hind the arteries to the lower cervical ganglion. Those branch- es which descend upon the arteries, intangle the roots of the thyroid, transversalis cervicis, and internal mammary arteries, in their plexus; these uniting, follow the subclavian artery, and form again a plexus upon the arch of the aorta. This is joined by branches from the par vagum and recurrent. The principal branches of this plexus terminate in the cardiac gan- glion under the arch ofthe aorta.* The lower cervical GanglionI of the sympathetic nerve is placed upon the limits betwixt the neck and thorax upon the head ofthe first rib, and by the side of the musculus longus colli; and it is in part covered by the root ofthe vertebral ar- tery. The ganglion is of an irregular cushion-like shape. It * This dcfcription of the fympathetic nerve on the left side follows the mo** ufual diftribution.but is not peculiar to the left fide. f The lower cervical or cardiac ganglion of the fympathetic nervr Vol. III. P 114 OF THE PARTICULAR NER\ ES. lies close to the cervical nerves which go to the brachial plexus and it receives branches from them.* Branches also pass from this ganglion to the par vagum and recurrent, and also pass on to the cardiac and pulmonic plexus. That nerve which must be considered as the continued sympathetic, throws a ring round the root of the vertebral artery, and send- ing out branches upon the subclavian, terminates in the first dorsal or thoracic ganglion. THE SUPIRIOR THORACIC GANGLION. This ganglion surpasses the other thoracic ganglions in sizt It is, indeed, frequently composed of many branches of the nerve in the nerk, coming both before and behind the subcla- vian artery. It receives also nerves from the three or four lowest cervical nerves, and first dorsal nerve. It is of a very irr. gular figure, or rather it varies exceedingly in its shape ; so that by various anatomists it is described as round, oval, triangular, quadrangular, cylindrical!—Filaments proceed from this ganglion into the canal of the vertebral artery, and to the cellular coat of the subclavian artery, and to the cardiac plexus, and also to the pulmonic plexus ; or to supply the posterior surface of the lungs. SYMPATHETIC NERVE IN THE THORAX. The sympathetic nerve, (as we have explained in describ- ing che dorsal nerves,) through all its course in the thorax, has aacr.tional branches from the dorsal or intercostal nerves. It forms also, while it is lying on the side ofthe vertebrae, a di- vision in the thorax, which it will be important to recollect. This nerve is sent more forwards upon the body of the verte- brae, and passes into the abdomen betwixt the crura of the dia- phragm ; while the trunk of the sympathetic continues its course by the heads of the ribs, passes under the ligamentum arcuatum, and downwards upon the lumbar vertebrae. The splanchnic NF.RVE,then is this anterior branch of the sympathetic in the thorax. It is the great nerve ofthe viscera of ihe abdomen. It generally has two or four roots from the trunk of the sympathetic nerve, where it is opposite to the sixth, seventh, and eighth intercostal nerves. It is seen lying under the pleura, and passing obliquely over the bodies of the * And even it receives fonietimes from the fifth and fixth, more rarely the feventh and eighth, from the firft and fecond ofthe back; and laftly, from the phrenic nerve.—Sometimes thefe connections are wanting. OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. 115 lumbar vertebrae, from the seventh to the tenth. It then pas- ses betwixt the crura of the diaphragm, enters the abdomen, and forms the great semilunar ganglion. One or more branches are sent forward from the sympa- thetic, commonly from the ganglions, opposite to the interstice betwixt the ninth and tenth, or tenth and eleventh ribs.— These also pass the diaphragm, and unite with the semilunar ganglion. There is, however, a considerable variety to be observed both in the origins of the splanchnic nerve, and in the number of these subsidiary branches. A larger branch, going off betwixt the tenth and eleventh ribs, is so common, that it has the name of splanchnicus minor, or, acces- sorius. This nerve as frequently terminates in the renal plexus, as in the semilunar ganglion; or sometimes it sends branches to both. celiac ganglion and plexus. The ganglion which is called the semilunar ganglion, has no regular shape—and least of all when it is fully dissected. It is formed by the splanchnic nerve, and by branches which come from the lumbar nerves. It lies by the side of the caeliac artery, and consists of many lesser ganglions, (some- times to the number of eleven or twelve,) matted together into a glandular-like shape. The semilunar ganglions of the splanchnic nerves lying on each side of the root of the caeliac artery, their connection with each other is frequent and intricate ; so that they throw a mesh of nerves round the root and branches of this artery, which is the great source of vessels to the stomach, liver, and spleen.—This plexus, formed by the semilunar ganglions round the caeliac artery, is the solar or caeliac plexus. CELIAC PLEXUS. The caeliac plexus is the great source of nerves to the higher viscera of the abdomen. The splanchnic nerves are the great, but not the only nerves which form this plexus. The par va- gum sends branches down from the stomach which join it; and even the phrenic nerve, which is the nerve of the dia- phragm, sends down twigs to unite to the branches of the splanchnic and par vagum. We shall find also small nerves which come from the seat of the kidney, and which are derived from the superior lumbar nerves. These pass across the crura of the diaphragm, and enter into the caeliac plexus. In pursuing the nerves of the viscera further, we have it no 116 OF THE PARTICULAR NERVFS. longer in our power to follow individual branches, but have rather to mark the course, and enumerate the various sources of the plexus, and net-work of nerves which follow the great vessels. From the caeliac plexus, there pass out, 1. Nerves which accompany the phrenic arteries upon the lower surface of the diaphragm. 2. Nerves to the liver :—and of these there are two plexus, the right and left hepatic plexus ; one passes along the vena portae, biliary ducts, and right hepatic artery, to the right side of the liver, the gall-bladder and ducts ; this of course is the right hepatic plexus: the left hepatic plexus passes along the left hepatic artery ; and this has con- nection with the cardiac nerves, branches of the par vagum. 3. That plexus, which runs upon the lesser curve of the stomach, while it is formed in a great measure by the par va- gum, has also connection with the solar or caeliac plexus. 4. The plexus of nerves which pass to the lower orifice of the stomach and duodenum is chiefly a division of the right he- patic plexus. These nerves, to the liver, stomach, and duodenum, are attached to the branches of the caeliac artery. Along the great splenic artery, which is also derived from the caeliac artery, there passes out a plexus of nerves to the spleen. From this splenic plexus there pass nerves to the great oment- um ; and they even unite with those passing out upon the duodenum, and which attach themselves to the right epyploic artery, and take a course upon the great curvature of the stomach. Thus the solar or caeliac plexus is a great central net-work of nerves, which pass out in divisions to the liver, spleen, pancreas, stomach, duodenum, and omentum. superior mesenteric plexus* The place and connections ofthe superior mesenteric plex? us is at once known, when it is considered that it is formed upon the root of the superior mesenteric artery.—It is formed by the caeliac plexus being continued down upon the aorta so as to involve the root of the mesenteric artery, and by nerves coming over the side of the vertebrae of the loins from the lumbar nerves. This plexus spreads betwixt the lamina ofthe mt sentery, and extends upon the branches of the artery, and of course is distributed to the small intestines and part of the colon. It consequently supplies the mesenteric glands, and sends nerves also to the pancreas, that join those which it re- ceives from the splenic plexus. OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. 117 INFERIOR MESENTERIC PLEXUS. The same mesh of nerves, being continued down upon the face of the aorta, surround the lower mesenteric artery, and follow its branches. This is the lower mesenteric plexus, or mesocolic plexus ; and it is formed in a great measure from the branches ofthe continued trunk of the sympathetic nerve. As this plexus spreads upon the branches ofthe lower mesen- teric artery, it passes to the left side of the intestinum colon and rectum—while the lower mesenteric plexus is continued from the upper one. On the side ofthe lumbar vertebrae it is continuous with the renal and spermatic plexus; and towards the pelvis, with the hypogastric plexus. Before considering the other lesser plexus of nerves in the abdomen, it is necessary to follow the continued trunk of the sympathetic nerve which we had described as following close- ly the lateral part ofthe dorsal and lumbar vertebrae, whilst the splanchnic nerves pass obliquely over them to the viscera ofthe upper part ofthe belly. The continued trunk of the sympathetic nerve, after it has given off the splanchnic nerve in the thorax, sends seve- ral small nerves forward over the vertebrae to the mediastinum and sheath of the aorta. It then passes the diaphragm, keep- ing close to the transverse process of the vertebrae. When, however, it comes lower upon the lumbar vertebrae, it lies more upon the side of their bodies, and the connections with the lumbar nerves are by small and numerous twigs which stretch over the side of the vertebrae. In this course, it is giving off upon the fore part numerous irregular twigs to the several plexus. Where it lies under the vessels which pass to the kidney, it sends up some branches to the renal plexus. The renal plexus, however, is not entirely formed of these branches of the continued sympathetic, but is rather a contin- uation from the caeliac and superior mesenteric plexus ; while the lesser splanchnic nerve, which was sent off in the thorax, also terminates in it. This plexus is thrown over the vessels of the kidney, and forms several little ganglions. From the renal plexus descends the spermatic plexus.—■ This plexus of nerves in woman follows the spermatic artery in its distribution to the ovaria and uterus. In passing down upon the loins, the sympathetic nerve forms five or six ganglions with the branches from the lumbar nerves. These are oblong, angular, stellated—irregular in their form, as in their number, situation, size, or the twigs which, in their union with the sympathetic, form them. Betwixt these gan- 118 OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. glions or connections with the lumbar nerves, the sympathetic is not always one nerve, but is sometimes split into several smaller nerves, which unite again. From the sympathetic nerves of either side we have to observe frequent interchange of branches, which sometimes attach themselves to the lumbar nerves, sometimes creep under the aorta, or unite to the plexus covering the face of the aorta.—There are several little gang- lions formed by these nerves upon the face of the lumbar ver- tebrae : they have the name of ganglia accessoria. Before the sympathetic nerve descends into the pelvis, it has become extremely delicate. In many subjects it seems to ter- minate in the last lumbar, or first sacral nerve; but, upon more minute dissection, lesser branches will be found to de- scend amongst the loose cellular substance of the pelvis.— When regular, or perhaps we may say with truth when regu- larly and fully dissected, the sympathetic nerves of each side are seen to descend upon the fore part ofthe sacrum, and form connections with the sacral nerves similar to those with the dor- sal nerves.—As they descend, they of course approach, and finally unite in an acute point on the os coxigis.—At the points of union of these extreme branches of the sympathetic nerves with the branches of the sacral nerves, small ganglions are formed : and there pass out branches from them, which cover the intermediate surface of the sacrum with an extensive plex- us. The ultimate ganglion, formed by the union of the two sympathetic nerves, is the coxygeul ganglion, and from it there pass three or four nerves to the extremity ofthe rectum. HYPOGASTRIC PLEXUS. This is a plexus which lies on the side ofthe pelvis, and in- volves the hypogastric artery. It consists of the nerves pass- ing to the parts contained in the pelvis ; which do not, howe- ver, pass in distinct branches, but, like those ofthe abdomen, are formed into minute interwoven net-work. The hypogas- tric plexus takes no determinate origin, but is continuous with, or formed by, the extreme branches of the sympathetic nerves, the extremity ofthe spermatic plexus, the sacral nerves, (and particularly the third sacral nerve,) and by the branches of the accessory ganglions on the sacrum. OF THE PHRENIC NERVE. The phrenic or diaphragmatic nerve arises from the cervi- cal nerves, passes obliquely down the neck, enters the thorax, and is distributed to the diaphragm.—This nerve has much va- OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. 119 riety in its derivation. It comes chiefly from the third cervi- cal nerve, deriving also some twigs from the fourth and second. But sometimes it takes an origin very high in the neck, from the par vagum or ninth nerve ; and even the superior cervical ganglion ofthe sympathetic is described by some as furnishing a root.—Lower in the neck it will be found in some subjects to derive very small additional twigs from the fifth or sixth cer- vical nerves, or lower ganglion ofthe sympathetic. The phrenic nerve, thus formed, descends into the thorax betwixt the subclavian artery and vein. In the chest it pro- ceeds downward and forward, attached to the mediastinum and before the root of the lungs.* It takes its course upon the outside ofthe pericardium, and from the pericardium slips off to the surface of the diaphragm. From the position of the heart, the left phrenic nerve differs a little in its course from the right; and it passes over the pericardium, covering the apex of the heart. The phrenic nerve of the right side, besides supplying the diaphragm, sends down through the diaphragm (to the right side ofthe vena cava) the ramus anastamoticus.— This communicates with the semilunar ganglion of the sympa- thetic, or with the division of the solar or caeliac plexus which passes along the phrenic arteries. From the phrenic artery of the left side, there pass down with the oesophagus small nerves which, appearing in the abdomen, unite with the caeliac gang- lion, or some of its divisions ; and both phrenic nerves will be found by some minute branches to unite to the par vagum. These however, are but minute branches. The great des- tination ofthe phrenic nerve is to the diaphragm. The branch- es strike out from the diaphragm like roots from a centre ; they pass some way only covered by the pleura, and then pierce into the substance ofthe muscle. There are innumerable ex- periments upon living animals, which shew the connection of this nerve with the action ofthe diaphragm. When the nerve is stimulated, the diaphragm is excited to contraction ; when cut, pressed, or tied, it becomes relaxed and inactive, and there is difficulty of respiration ; when the spinal marrow is injured • Ludwig. Martin, in the Edinburgh Effays, and others explain the action of the diaphragm upon the fuppofition of the mechanical preffure of the lungs up- on the phrenic nerve. It is a piece of doctrine inconfiftent with knowledge ofthe general laws of the ceconomy. It is repugnant to comparative anatomy, and it is evident that the foft and elaftic diftention ofthe lungs could not comprtfs the firm nerve. Moreover, the lungs when diftended do not prefs upon the mediaftinum, for it is the dilation ofthe thorax which caufes the lungs to inhale the atmofpheric m: See Wrisberg de Nervo Phrenico. Sandift. Thef. vol. ii. p. 260. It is betwixt •he heart and mufcles of refpiration that the ftrict relation and fympathy exift.__ When in turning the child in utero, and when the cord has been preffed, I have felt the ftrong convuldvc fetches of the mufcles of respiration endeavouring, by the play of the lungs, to compenface for the lofs ofthe placenta. 120 OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. low in the vertebrae ofthe neck, or in the vertebrae ofthe back, the external muscles of respiration cease to act, but the dia- phragm still continues its function ; and in this case, as observ- ed by Mr. Hunter, the patient lives for some days, breathing by the diaphragm. If the phrenic nerves be divided in a liv- ing animal, the diaphragm ceases to act, and the abdominal muscles lose their opponent muscles, and remain as in expira- tion ; but still the respiration is continued by the motion ofthe ribs. If after this the spine be divided, the motion of the lungs ceases entirely, and the animal dies suddenly.—The injury of the spinal marrow above the origin ofthe phrenic nerves, is of course suddenly fatal, because it destroys at once the function ofthe diaphragm, and muscles moving the chest. From the connection of the phrenic nerve with the par vagum, we may explain the sympathy betwixt the trachea and the diaphragm, how the irritation of the trachea occasions coughing and the convulsive action ofthe diaphragm; in the same manner in the affection of the stomach, singultus, from the sudden action of the diaphragm and abdominal muscles,(which usually alternate in their action,) may be explained. Again, a connection of nerves might be followed from the origins ofthe phrenic to the sympathetic nerve, and branches ofthe fifth pair to the nose : which accounts for that sympathy of action which occasions sneezing from irritation ofthe membrane ofthe nose. NERVES OF THE ARM ; AXILLARY, OR BRACHIAL PLEXUS. The nerves which proceed from the spine, and go to supph the arm, are formed into an intricate plexus before they divide into the several nerves of the arm. This brachial or axillary plexus, is formed of five of the spinal nerves ; viz. the fifth, sixth, seventh, and eighth cervi- cal nerves,* and the first dorsal nerve. The highest of these nerves proceed from betwixt the fourth and fifth cervical ver- tebrae ; the last from betwixt the first and second dorsal verte- brae. They pass out betwixt the middle and anterior division of thescaleni; and even while covered by these muscles, and before they have proceeded far from their foramina, the last nerve ofthe neck and first ofthe back unitef—The plexus is continued from above the clavicle to the edge of the tendon of the latissimus dorsi. It allows of no natural division. The * This is of courfe counting the fuboccipital as the firft cervical nerve. f Before the nerves which form the plexus intermix their filaments, or are con- pected together, they fend off fmall branches to the fcalenic mufcles, to the muf- cles ofthe fpine, and to the levator fcapula. The branches which they give to the fympathetic nerve, we have already noticed. OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. 121 axillary nerve passes for some way close under it, and then per- forates betwixt the divisions which form the radial nerve. From the axillary plexus proceed these nerves : 1. The thoracic nerves. 2. The supra and infra scapular nerves. 3. The circumflex, or articular nerve. 4. The perforans casserii, or external cutaneous nerve. 5. The radial nerve. 6. The ulnar nerve. 7. The muscular spiral nerve. 8 The internal cutaneous nerves. 1. The thoracic nerves. Although the nerves which supply the muscles ofthe chest are derived from the intercostal nerves, as we have seen, yet there also pass off branches from the axillary plexus to the great and little pectoral muscles, to the latissimus dorsi, to the skin and mamma. These thoracic branches proceed from the upper division of the plexus, or that which gives out the external cutaneous, and one of the roots of the radial nerve. 2. The suprascapular nerve comes off from the upper edge of the plexus, and is the highest of the branches. It runs towards the root of the coracoid process, it passes through the notch ofthe scapula, and goes to supply the supra and infra spinatus muscles, the teres minor, and the subscapu- laris. The subscapular nerves come out from the posterior part ofthe plexus along with the articular nerve. They are at- tached to the subscapular muscle, they turn round the fleshy edge of the muscle, and insinuate their branches betwixt the tendon of the latissimus dorsi and the teres major. 3. The circumflex, or articular nerve, or axillaris, lies very deep. It comes.from the back part of the plexus, passes behind the neck ofthe humerus, and above the tendon of the latissimus dorsi, and teres major. One of its branches we trace into the teres major, while another passes round the bone, and is distributed to the under surface of the deltoid muscle, the joint, and the cellular membrane. 4. Perforans casserii, or the extkrnal cutaneous nerve. This nerve passes through the coraco-brachialis mus- cle before the os humeri, to gain the outside of the arm. From its perforating this muscle, and being described toy Casserius, it is called the nervus perforans Casserii. Before passing through the coraco-brachialis muscle, it sends down a Vol. III. Q 122 of the particular nerves. branch of communication with the radial nerve ; and in many subjects it will be found to be like a branch from one ofthe origins ofthe radial nerve. Where the nervus perforans lies betwixt the brachieus internus muscle and biceps (and, of course, after it has perforated the coraco-brachialis muscle,) a branch or two are sent up to the heads of the biceps muscle ; another branch turns inward to the belly of that muscle ; and, finallv, twigs pass inward to the cellular membrane, which in volvts the brachial artery. The continued nerve passes obliquely across the arm, and under the biceps. When approaching the outside of the arm, it divides into three small branches ; one to the integuments which are upon the supinator longus, another to the integu- ments on the inside of the fore-arm, and a third, which con- tinues its course along the edge of the supinator longus to the wrist. Of this prolonged branch of the perforans Casserii, a minute twig is lost on the ligament ofthe wrist, another passes to the ball ofthe thumb, and a third goes round to the integu- ments of the back ofthe thumb. 5. The radial nervf. This nerve is formed by those di visions of the plexus which surround the brachial artery, and sometimes by a division ofthe perforans Casserii. It takes its course by the side of the brachial artery, and gives off no branches until it has sunk under the aponeurotic expansion of the biceps muscle. When the radial nerve has come to the bend ofthe arm, it gives off three branches. The first belongs to the pronator teres, flexor radialis, and palmaris longus, and flexor digitor- um ; a second passes to the pronator teres ; and a third to the deep muscles ofthe fore-arm, and to the flexors ofthe thumb particularly, and also to the pronator quadratus muscle. The radial nerve, continuing its course down the fore-arm betwixt the flexor subhmis and profundus digitorum, sends off other branches to those muscles. Before passing under the ligament of the wrist, it gives out a branch which emerges from the tendons, and passes to the integuments, short flexor, and ab- ductor muscles ofthe thumb. The trunk of the radial nerve passes with the tendons of the flexor muscles of the fingers under the ligament of the wrist. In the palm of the hand it divides into five branches ; the first passes to the abductor and flexor pollicis brevis ; a second goes to the adductor pollicis, and side ofthe thumb next the fore-finger ; the third passes to the fore-finger, and to the lumbricalis muscle ; the fourth to the side of the fore and middle fingers ; and the fifth to the sides ofthe middle and OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. 123 little finger. All these nerves, while in the palm ofthe hand, send off branches to the lumbricales muscles. 6. The ulnar nerve comes off from the lower part ofthe plexus in union with the internal cutaneous nerve. It descends upon the inside ofthe arm, and is tied down by the fascia, and then passes behind the internal condyle of the humerus.— While above the bend of the arm, it gives off a superficial branch to the integuments on the inside of the arm, and the ulnar side of the fore-arrrf; at the same time it sends a mus- cular branch through the triceps muscle, along with the arteria profunda inferior. Immediately above the elbow joint, twigs are sent off, some of which accompany the ramus anastamoti- cus major of the brachial artery. After passing the condyle ofthe humerus, it sends a branch to the flexor carpi ulnaris, and to the head of the flexor digitorum profundus. It then sinks deeper betwixt the flexor ulnaris and flexor digitorum sublimis ; it is here connected with the ulnar artery, and de- scends along with it to the wrist. In this course, along the fore-arm, the ulnar nerve gives branches to the flexor digitorum sublimis. Often it sends a branch of communication to the ra- dial nerve, while some few lesser muscular nerves are sent off, and accompany the branches of the ulnar artery. When arrived near the wrist, the ulnar nerve divides into two branches. The continued trunk passes on under the pro- tection of the tendon of the flexor ulnaris, and then under the annular ligament into the palm ofthe hand ; while the branch takes a turn under the flexor ulnaris, and over the edge ofthe flexor digitorum profundus. It passes then over the lower end ofthe ulna to the back of the hand. On the back ofthe hand it is found branching over the expanded tendons and un- der the veins, and is finally distributed to the back of the little and ring fingers. This is the ramus posticus. The continued ulnar nerve passes under the palmaris brevis muscle and palmar aponeurosis, and above the flexor brevis and adductor minimi digiti. Here it divides into two, (the sublimis and profundus of Camper,) and these again into four principal branches—to the integuments on the ulnar edge ofthe hand, and adductor minimi digiti—to the outer edge of the little finger,—to the side ofthe little and ring fingers, and a branch which communicates with the radial nerve. Albinus, Monro and Camper differ in regard to the distri- bution of nerves to the lumbricales muscles, which only proves that the twigs passing to those little muscles are irregular.__ They come chiefly from the deep branch of the ulnar nerve, whilst others are from the radial nerve. T. The muscular spiral nerve. We find the external 124 OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. cutaneous nerve, or perforans casserii, passing before the arm-bone. The muscular spiral nerve passes behind the bone, and takes a spiral turn under it to get to the ouiside of the arm. It perforates the fksh of the arm betwixt the middle and the short head ofthe triceps muscle. Before it perforates the tri- ceps muscles, the muscular spiral sends off branches which pass over the tendon of the latissimus dorsi; and before it enters the triceps muscle, it may be observed to divide into several branches. Three of these may be mentioned : a branch to the middle head, and one to the short head of the triceps muscle, and a third and larger nerve which pierces betwixt the muscles, along with the trunk ofthe nerve. This last nerve does not follow the trunk of the nerve in its course, but perforating the triceps more directly across, it comes out behind the supinator longus, where it takes its ori- gin from the os humeri. This is a cutaneous branch, and might be considered as the external cutaneous nerve with as much propriety as the perforans casserii. Often we shall find some lesser branches of the muscular spiral nerve piercing the fibres ofthe triceps muscle, and terminating in the skin. The great cutaneous division of the nerve, after piercing the triceps muscle, takes its course along the integuments co- vering the supinator longus muscle ; and here it sends a branch in upon the bend of the arm, and on the edge of the triceps muscle. It then descends upon the outside of the fore-arm, and divides into three principal branches, and then again into innumerable cutaneous twigs, and is continued down over the back of the thumb and hand. But the great division of the muscular spiral nerve comes out betwixt the head of the supinator longus muscle and the bone, and is deep seated. This branch then lies betwixt the supinator longus, and brachieus internus ; and here it gives off several small twigs to the muscles. Continuing its course by the side ofthe supinator longus and flexor radialis, it divides into a deep and superficial branch. The superficial branch passes down on the side of the tendon of the supinator longus, and near the wrist it becomes quite superficial, and is distribut- ed to the integuments of the back ofthe hand. 8. The internal cutaneous nerves. Of those we may describe three :— 1. The great i ternal cutaneous nerve. This nerve is deriv- ed Irom the ulnaris at its root, or comes off from the plexus along with it, passes down the arm, giving off no considera- ble branches, accompanies the basilic vein and twists its branches over it, divides into four branches upon the fascia of the fore-arm, and running betwixt the fascia and veins of the OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. 125 fore-arm, it is finally distributed to the cellular membrane and integurm nts, while one of its branches reaches to the ligaments of the wrist. 2. The cutaneous nerve ofWrisberg comes sometimes from the axillary plexus, as a distinct nerve ; sometimes it is a branch of the great internal cutaneous nerve ; sometimes it is derived, or a nerve which takes its place is derived from the intercostal nerves. This nerve of Wrisberg is distributed to the integuments of the arm, and terminates near the internal condyle. 3. The upper und internal cutaneous nerve comes from the first intercostal nerve, or from the second, and passes out be- twixt the first and second ribs. It supplies the integuments of the arm, and the glands and fat ofthe axilla.* There are besides several nerves derived from the intercos- tal nerves, which cross the axilla, and supply the arm-pit and side. NERVES OF THE THIGH, LEG, AND FOOT. In tracing the nerves ofthe lower extremity, we find no difficulty in the arrangement at least, for they fall into a very simple and natural order. They are all derived from the lum- bar and sacral nerves. The great nerves are three in number. One passes out under Poupart's ligament to the extensor mus- cles ofthe leg, viz. those which lie on the fore part of the thigh. This of course is called the anterior crural nerve. The se- cond nerve is the obturator nerve, so called because it passes out from the pelvis by the thyroid hole. This nerve lies amongst the deep muscles of the thigh, and distributes its branches chiefly to the adductor muscles. The third nerve is the greatest nerve of the body, viz. the ischiatic nerve. It passes out from the back part ofthe pelvis, through the sacro- sciatic notch, and takes its course down the back ofthe thigh into the ham. In this course it supplies the muscles lying on the back of the thigh, but its chief destination is to the leg and foot. OF THE CUTANEOUS NERVES OF THE THIGH. It will be found considerably to take from the intricacy of the minute anatomy of the nerves of the lower extremity, to dispose first of these nerves which lie under the integuments of (he thigh. • See Syftem of Diffections, vol. ii. plate x. g. 126 OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. These cutaneous nerves of the thigh come from the lumbar nerves, or more immediately from the anterior crural nerve.— They pierce the tendon ofthe oblique muscle of the abdomen, or pass under Poupart's ligament, and are distributed to the groin, scrotum, and betwixt the fascia and integuments of the fore part of the thigh. There may be described five cutaneous nerves on the fore part of the thigh, viz. the external cutane- ous, the middle cutaneous, the anterior cutaneous, the internal cutaneous, and those of the groin and scrotum. The external cutaneous nerve is that which comes out from the belly near the superior spinous process of the ilium. It divides almost immediately into two great branches, and in the front view of the thigh the anterior branch alone is to be seen. It takes a course above the fascia in the direction of the line which divides the vastus externus from the rectus femoris, and terminates near the knee, while the posterior branch pass- es over the tensor vagina; ftmoris, and down upon the outside and back of the thigh. It is derived from the third lumbar nerve. The middle cutaneous nerve rises from amongst the in- teguments ofthe groin, and emerges from under the fascia near the upper edge of the sartorius muscle. It' passes down upon the rectus muscle, and is distributed to the integuments in three or four divisions. The anterior cutaneous nerve comes out to the integu- ments very high up, and in the middle of the groin betwixt the pubes and tuberosity of the os ilii. It passes down the thigh along the surfaces ofthe sartorius and vastus internus muscles. This, like all the other cutaneous nerves, runs along above the fascia, and on the lower surface of the skin. The internal cutaneous nerve is the least regular. It does not pierce the fascia in one trunk, but sends three, four, or five branches through the fascia, which are distributed to the integuments on the inside of the thigh. Some of these, after running a considerable way under the fascia, emerge and encircle the inside ofthe knee. Besides these more remarkable cutaneous nerves, there come down small nerves to the groin and scrotum. The first lumbar nerve sends down the external spermatic nerve. This joining the spermatic plexus, helps to supply the cord and tes- ticle ; and in women the same nerve goes to the womb within the pelvis, and following the round ligament, terminates on the fat of the pubes and groin. A branch from the second lumbar nerve passes also to the glands and fat ofthe groin, the pubes, and cremaster muscle. This branch is remarkable for OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. 127 the circuitous course it takes round the ilium and inside of the ligament of the thigh. ANTERIOR CRURAL NERVE.* This nerve arises from the union ofthe second, third, and fourth of the lumbar nerves, or the second and third lumbar nerves uniting into one trunk, are afterwards joined by a divi- sion of the fourth,! or the anterior crural, is formed by the anterior branch of the third and the first branch ofthe second lumbar nerve,^: or by the four first lumbar nerves; and the an- terior crural nerve, at its origin, lies under the psoas magnus, and, as it descends, it holds its course between the psoas mag- nus and iliacus internus. It then descends towards the thigh, and passes out under Poupart's ligament; and in its course along the brim ofthe pelvis, it is for some way covered by the external iliac artery. Here, while within the pelvis, it gives off several small nerves, which pass into the iliacus internus, and under the psoas magnus muscles. These form a kind of small plexus. As the anterior crural nerve passes under Poupart's liga- ment, it splits into its numerous branches which supply the muscles and integuments on the fore part of the thigh. From the fore part of the nerve there is sent out a musculo-cutane- ous branch, which, while it descends and supplies several of the muscles ofthe thigh, gives out the middle cutaneous nerve. The anterior cutaneous nerve is sent off lower down, but al- most immediately after it has passed under Poupart's ligament. The internal cutaneous nerve is sent off from some of those branches which run under the internal articular artery. The last of the cutaneous branches of the anterior crural nerve, and the most important, is the nervus saphenus, or cutaneus longus. This is the chief cutaneous nerve of the leg ; but it is to be distinguished as a particular nerve, so high as under the external articular or circumflex artery, being a di- vision of what is called the nervus longus. This nerve is sometimes joined by a branch ofthe obturator nerve ; and the muscular branches which it gives off, pass into the vastus in- ternus. When we are dissecting in the course of the femoral artery, we have to observe two nerves running parallel to, and con- nected with the sheath of the artery. That which is on the in- side is the largest, the course of which we shall prosecute. It * Crural nerve, truncus lumborum,femerelis magntrs. f Fifcher—Walter. | Sabbatier and Haller. 128 OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. follows the artery through the tendon of the triceps muscle, but it does not descend into the ham with the popliteal artery. It comes out again through the tendon with the perforating branches ofthe popliteal artery, or with the upper and internal articular artery. It then becomes a superficial nerve, and de- scends upon the inside of the leg with the saphena vein, to the inner ancle and foot. Those two nerves, which are so closely connected with the femoral artery in the middle of the thigh, are very often taken up with the extremitv of the artery in amputation. This oc- casions twitching in the stump :oid a fetid discharge. Where the continued nerve descends upon the inside of the leg, it sends out many twigs to the integuments, and is en- tangled with the saphena vein. Here it has been pricked in bleeding in the ancle.—Sabbatier gives us an instance of this. The patient had been previously subject to nervous affections. She felt in the instant of the operation an acute pain, which was succeeded by convulsive motions, first of the limb and then of the whole body. These attacks returned from time to time, she lost her health, and for many years was still in suffering almost continual.—He relates to us another instance ofthe injury of this nerve accompanying the saphena vein, in the case of a young man who received a wound with the small sword in the inside of the knee. There came on much fever and swelling of the part, with great pain of the limb. This subsiding, there followed slight trembling of the limb, which gradually increased to an extreme degree. The caustic was proposed, but the patient had not resolution to let it be applied. After long suffering with exhausted strength, he was at last re- lieved by nature, and his health gradually returned. These branches we have mentioned are only the cutaneous or superficial branches of the anterior crural. The larger and more numerous set of branches are those to the muscles lying on the fore part of the thigh. These diverge suddenly into innumerable twigs, and are entangled with the branches ofthe arteries, and follow them in their distribution There can be no excuse for bestowing particular names on these branches; to say that one is the branch to the pectinalis, another the branch to the sartorius, another to the rectus, &c. is sufficient. OBTURATOR NERVE. This nerve arises by fasciculi from the second and third lumbar nerves, and sometimes by a small twig from the fourth. It is formed, however, chiefly by the third lumbar nerve. It then lies under the internal border of the psoas magnus. I' OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. 129 descends into the pelvis, and goes obliquely downwards to pass through the ligamentous membrane which fills up the thyroid hole. The obturator nerve, before it escapes from the pelvis, sends off a branch which, accompanying the parent nerve, is given to the external obturator muscle. When it has escaped from the pelvis, this nerve lies before the heads of the triceps, and behind the pectinalis muscle ; and it here divides into two branches in the very middle and internal flesh of the thigh. The anterior of these branches passes down betwixt the ad- ductor muscles, or heads of the triceps, supplies those mus- cles and the gracilis, and sends a branch of communication with the saphenus nerve. The posterior division goes down be- twixt the adductor magnus and brevis, sends branches to the obturator externus and adductor brevis, and continues its course downwards before the great fleshy partition of the ad- ductor muscles, and parallel with the crural vessels, to the fat above the inner condyle of the femur. THE ORIGIN OF THE ISCHIATIC NERVE. The ischiatic nerve is formed by the two last nerves ofthe loins, and the three first of the sacrum : or we may describe its origin more particularly thus; the anterior branch of the fourth lumbar nerve and the trunk of the fifth uniting, form a strong cord of about two inches in length; this root is joined to another nearly as large, formed by the first and second sacral nerves; and again, a third division joins it from the in- ferior branch ofthe second sacral nerve and from the third.* The ischiatic nerve is thus formed of three great roots matted together into a kind of plexus, and then passes betwixt the pyriformis muscle and the gemini, and thus escapes from the back part of the pelvis by the great ischiatic notch. But before following this great nerve into the thigh, we must take notice of many lesser nerves sent out from the sacral nerves, and from the trunk of the ischiatic nerve. These nerves pass to the muscles and integuments of the nates and back of the thigh to the perineum and private parts. OF THE LESSER NERVES WHICH GO OUT FROM THE BACK PART OF THE PELVIS. 1st. There pass off branches from the second and third lumbar nerves, which form a muscular nerve of considerable • This third and loweft origin, before uniting with the others to form the ifchiatic nerve, gives out many fmall branches to the hypogaftric plexus suifj vifcera ofthe pelvis, to the perineum and private parts. Vol. III. K 130 OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. size. This muscular nerve passes down upon the inside ofthe pelvis, escapes from the back part of the pelvis, and is distri- buted to the gluteus medius, the gluteus minimus, and the ten- sor vaginae femoris. 2d. There pass off one or two very small nerves from the body ofthe ischiatic nerve, while yet within the pelvis, or from the middle divisions of its origins, which go to the pyri- fbrmis and gluteus medius muscles. 3d. Just where the great nerve passes over the posterior ligaments of the pelvis, there goes off a twig to the obturator externus, gemini and quadratus femoris. While these nerves are sent off upon the anterior face of the nerve, there goes backward a large fasciculus of nerves to the glutei muscles., and to the integuments of the nates.* There proceeds a nerve somewhat more important than these from the third sacral nerve, viz. the nervus pudendus. This nerve passes out above the short sacro-ischiatic ligament, and re-enters under the long sacro-ischiatic ligament. It then runs by the side of the ramus ischii, and ascends in the perine- um and branches to the erector penis, accelerator urinae, and transversalis perinei, and passes on to the integuments and ex- ternal parts of generation. OF THE CUTANEOUS NERVES OF THE BACK OF THE THIGH. When the integuments are dissected off from the nates and back ofthe thigh, we see two sources ofthe cutaneous nerves; first from the lumbar nerves, which give out many small nerves which pass over the spine of the os ilii, and the branches ofthe anterior and outer cutaneous nerve ; and secondly, from under the lower margin of the great gluteus muscle, there come many extensive cutaneous nerves. These are derived from the nervus cutaneus posterior et superior, and branches of the ischiatic nerve, in this manner ; Just as the great ischiatic nerve has escaped from the pelvis, it is joined by the superior and posterior cutaneous nerve ; or, rather, a small twig is sent off from the great nerve to join this cutaneous nervef on its emerging from the pelvis. It divides into several branches, and it is one of these * Branches of that root of the ifchiatic nerve which is derived from the third facral nerve, go alfo out to the buttock; and fome defcribe a fuperior, middle, and inferior cutaneous nerve ofthe nates. f The pofterior cutaneous nerve rifes in general from the trunk of the ifchiatic nerve, within the pelvis, and is joined by a branch from the third facral nerve.—r lecrd. Haafe. V. OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. 131 which may be seen superficial and above the delicate fascia, running down upon the outer hamstring muscles, to the back ofthe knee-joint. Another branch piercing the fascia sepa- rately, comes down upon the integuments covering the outer and back part of the thigh, and terminates on the outside of the knee. A little further down, the ischiatic nerve gives off small nerves to the muscles surrounding the hip-joint; and, whilst the sciatic nerve is passing over the quadratus femoris, the inferior and internal cutaneous nerve is given off. This nerve runs down even to the inside ofthe calf of the leg. The external and posterior cutaneous nerve is a branch sent off from the ischiatic nerve, after it has descended from under the gluteus maximus, and just before its division into two fasciculi, viz. the tibial and peroneal nerves. This exter- nal and posterior cutaneous nerve passes down upon the inte- guments of the back part and outside ofthe leg. or the trunk of the ischiatic nerve in the thigh. But we must not allow these lesser branches to distract our attention from the general course of the great nerve, which passes over the gemini muscles, betwixt the tuberosity ofthe ischium and the trochanter major, then runs deep under the bellies of the hamstring muscles, and is lodged immediately in the great cavity behind the knee-joint, in company with the popliteal artery and vein. In this course the sacro-sciatic gives off branches to the quadratus femoris, the biceps cruris, semi- tendinosus, and semimembranosus and triceps. A little below the middle of the thigh, the great ischiatic nerve divides into the internal and greater, and the lesser and external popliteal nerves. But as this is really the division in- to the two great nerves of the leg, we take the more determi- nate names of tibial and fibular nerves, tibial nerve, The greater and more internal of these divisions of the pop- liteal nerve, is the tibial nerve. Whilst it is yet in the hollow behind the joint formed by the hamstring tendons, it gives off a nerve which comes out from the ham, and descends superfi- cially on the back of the leg. This has been called ramus communicans tibiei. When this nerve has arrived oppo- site to the beginning ofthe tendon achillis, it turns a little to the outer side, passing upon the outer margin ofthe achilles ten- don, over the outer side ofthe heel-bone, and is finally distri- 132 QF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. buted on the outside and fore-part ofthe foot. Upon the back of the leg, this nerve unites with a branch descending from the fibular nerve, nearly in the same course, and with the same destination. After giving off this superficial branch, the tibial nerve sends branches to the back ofthe knee-joint and popliteus muscle, to the plantaris muscle, and to both heads of the gastrocnemius. It then descends behind the articulation, and behind the head of the tibia. It then passes under the origins of the solcus, and betwixt the soleus and flexor longus digitorum pedis, and tibi- alis posticus, and descends to the inner ancle. In this course it furnishes many branches to the lower part of the popliteal muscle, to the tibialis posticus, to the flexor communis digito- rum, and to the flexor pollicis longus, and many of these branch- es, and in cutaneous twigs. We have also to observe a parti- cular branch which the tibial nerve detaches, which passes be- twixt the heads of the tibia and fibula, and goes to supply the muscles arising from the fore part ofthe interosseous ligament. Further down, two or more small branches of the nerve also perforate the interosseous ligament, to supply the muscles lying on the outside of the tibia. The tibial nerve, in its course amongst those posterior muscles, accompanies the posterior tibial artery. When it has arrived behind the inner ankle, it sends off a branch to the integuments of the inside of the foot, and to the abductor muscle of the great toe. Continuing its course by the side ofthe heel-bone and under the ligament, it begins to split into those branches which are naturally called the plantar nerves, because of their lying in the sole ofthe foot. THE PLANTAR NERVES. The internal plantar nerve passes over the abductor mus- cle ofthe great toe, and by the inside of the short flexor to the first metacarpal bone ; and in this course it gives out several twigs to the muscles of the sole of the foot. It now divides in- to three branches. These are distributed to the great toe, to the second, the third, and one side of the fourth toes; and these nerves in their course give branches to the lumbricales and interossei muscles. The external plantar nerve is the lesser of the two. It gives branches to the short flexor and adductor ofthe little toe, and to the massa carnea Jacobi Silvii, It gives also a deep branch to the third and fourth interosseous muscle and adductor mus- cle of the great toe. Another of its branches makes the arch with the internal plantar nerve, while its extreme distribution is to the little toe, and to one side of the fourth toe. These, OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. 133 nerves of the sole of the foot are connected with the internal and external plantar arteries, and are protected like them by the plantar aponeurosis. THE FIBULAR NERVE. The fibular nerve is the more external division ofthe pop- liteal nerve. It separates from the tibial branch about four inches above the knee-joint; it does not pass down under the gastrocnemius, like the tibial nerve, but turns towards the outside of the joint, and passes round the head of the fibula, and under the origin of the peroneus longus.—Before the fibular nerve passes from behind the joint, it gives off several branches. There are sent down two branches to the integu- ments. One of these branches unites with the communicans tibiei, and descends with it to the outer ankle. Sometimes this anastamosis is formed high in the leg upon the heads of the gastrocnemius. More generally there is a double commu- nication formed by these nerves about the termination of the belly ofthe gastrocnemius muscle in the achilles tendon. This prolonged branch of the fibular nerve terminates upon the side and upper part of the foot, and upon the little toe. There are also some nerves sent off from the fibular, which are distributed about the back and sides of the knee-joint. When the fibular nerve has turned over the head of the fibu- la, it divides into two great branches. The deeper seated of these branches, though it is not the largest of them, may be considered as the continued trunk. It passes deep amongst the muscles, lying betwixt the tibia and fibula, and supplies the tibialis anticus, the extensor communis digitorum, extensor longus pollicis, and the peroneus brevis. Thus the deeper di- vision of the fibular nerve, taking its course between the tibia- lis anticus, and the peroneus longus muscles, and lower down betwixt the tibia and extensor pollicis longus, continues giving off branches in rapid succession, and when it arrives at the annular ligament, it is much diminished. Here it divides into the ramus dorsalis pedis profundus and superficialis___This division is made after the nerve has crossed under the tendon of the tibialis anticus muscle, and, while it lies betwixt the low- er heads of the tibia and fibula.—Although they are distin- guished by the name of deep and superficial branches, they are both deep compared with the extremities ofthe great and outer division of the peroneal nerve. The branch which lies most towards the outside of the foot, passes under the extensor digi- torum brevis muscle, and on the outside of the tarsus. It distributes its branches to the extensor digitorum brevis, and 134 OF THE PARTICULAR NERVES. interossei muscles. That branch which is more towards the inside ofthe foot, although distinguished by the term superfi- cialis, goes forward not only under the fascia which covers the foot, but also under the tendons ; and after dividing and again uniting, and after sending off some small branches, it comes out betwixt the great toe and the second toe, and sends nume- rous branches to their contiguous surfaces. The GREAT SUPERFICIAL DIVISION of the FIBULAR NERVE is sometimes double, or immediately splits into two. Its first branches are to the peroneus tertius, extensor longus digitorum, and to the peroneus brevis and secundus. The trunk or prin- cipal division runs down under the head of the peroneus lon- gus, and then coming out from under it, continues its course beneath the strong aponeurosis, which covers the muscles on the forepart of the leg. It then pierces the aponeurosis and becomes cutaneous, and runs obliquely down to the convexity of the foot, giving off in its course a nerve which passes over the outer ancle. THE METATARSAL NERVES. When the superficial branch of the peroneal nerve descends before the ankle-joint, it divides into the metatarsal nerves, or the rami dorsales pedis, The external of those branches passes above the tendons, and above the tendinous expansion on the dorsum pedis; is united to the extreme branches of the ramus communicans tibiei, and is finally distributed to the outside ofthe third toe, to the fourth, and to the inside of the little toe.—The internal branch is again subdivided ; one branch extends over the middle of the foot to the second and third toes, while the other passes straight along the metatarsal bone of the great toe (above the tendons;) sends many branch- es over the inside of the foot, and terminates on the inside and dorsum ofthe great toe. END OF THE FIRST PART. INTRODUCTION. OF THE SENSES. JL HE Senses are those faculties by which the active principle within us has communication with the material objects by which we are surrounded. Through them, we receive those simple sensations which are the first elements of our thoughts, and the means of developing all the powers of the understand- ing. The exercise of our senses, however, is familiar to us from so early a period, that we never think of attending to their first simple intimations: before we are capable of reflect- ing on the nature of the perceptions which the several senses convey, they are so complicated and distorted by habits, asso- ciation, and abstraction, that observation comes too late for us to ascertain the simple progress of nature. Philosophy may indeed revive the natural feelings of wonder at the spectacle of the universe ; but often, instead of humble and cautious in- vestigation, we follow the dictates of a creative imagination, and run into error and delusion in studying the operations of nature. To the man, however, who looks upon nature with the calm and chastened delight which is the character of true philoso- phy, there is a conviction, that such researches may be carried too far. Wherever he directs his attention, whether to the structure of the human body, the physiology of vegetables, or the phaenomena of chemical science; whether he endea- vours to comprehend the system of the universe, or pores over the minutiae of natural history, he finds everv where a limit placed to his enquiries ; a line which no industry or in- genuity can enable him to pass. We may please ourselves with conjecture beyond this limit, but we find that all our opinions on these subjects are merely a dream of something allied to the impressions of our gross senses. The agencv of 136 OF THE SENSES'. the senses, the intercourse betwixt mind and matter, and the influence of the will over the body, are mysterious, and, pro- bably, inexplicable phenomena ; yet we scruple not to explain them precisely and mechanically ; we reduce them to the level of our own capacity in the same manner as we fabricate to ourselves the idea of a Deity by the combination of all human perfections. When we imagine that we have discovered the secret of these mysteries, it is mortifying to find ourselves without any sign or language by which to communicate those great truths to the companions of our studies : we struggle for expression ; and, as all our ideas upon such abstract subjects are derived from analogy, we express our opinions respecting the powers of the mind, or the manner in which we perceive the objects ofthe senses, in the same language, and by refer- ence to the same notions, which belong to the sensations them- selves. From this scantiness and inaccuracy of language, it unavoidably happens, that very different ideas of the operation of the senses are expressed by several men in the same terms ; and in attempting to convey our ideas in language more precise and definite, we are insensibly led to materialize the faculties ofthe mind, and to make the operations ofthe senses merely mechanical. What other explanation can we give of theories, which suppose the nerves to be tubes carrying animal spirits, or containing an elastic ether; or which represent them as vibrating cords, and reduce all the variety of sensation to the difference of tension and tone ? These are, indeed, what Dr. Reid calls them, " unhandy engines for carrying images." Nothing has been undertaken in philosophy but entire systems, fathoming at once the greatest depths of nature. The custom has been to frame hardy conjectures ; and if upon comparing them with things there appeared some agreement, however remote, to hold that as fully sufficient. What chi- meras and monstrous opinions this method of philosophising has brought forth, it would be more invidious than difficult to specify. Bacon and Newton laid down the principles of philoso- phising on this basis, that on no account are conjectures to h6 indulged concerning the powers and laws of nature, but we are to make it our endeavour, with all diligence, to search out bv experiment the real and true laws by which the constitution of things is regulated. In the subject now before us, we have a very remarkable proof of the superiority of investigation by experiment over the lazy indulgence of conjecture ; and I hope the whole tenor of the following account of the senses will strengthen the conviction of the student, that it is only by assiduous study, and patient observation of nature, that he is OF THE SENSES. 137 to look for the attainment of knowledge in the medical pro- fession. The office of the brain and nerves is to receive the impres- sions of external bodies, by which corresponding changes and representations are made in the mind. We know nothing further than that, by the operation of the senses, new thoughts are excited in the mind. Betwixt the sensation excited in the organ ofthe external sense, and the idea excited in the brain, there is an indissoluble, though inexplicable, connection ; the brain is not sensible, nor does the eye perceive, but both to- gether give us the knowledge of outward things. But when the sensation is once received and communicated to the brain, it is treasured there, and may afterwards be excited inde- pendent of the external organ : hence comes the term inter- nal senses. INTERNAL SENSES. Though I treat professedly of the external organs of the senses only, it may be necessary here, to say a few words on the internal senses. It appears that all sensations originate in the external senses or organs receiving the impressions of out- ward bodies : imagination is the power of combining these sensations, and memory the power of recalling them. These are powers of the mind, which, by the constitution of our na- ture, are gradually acquired, and increased by exercise. In infancy, the perceptions are simple and transitory ; the memo- ry is perfected by degrees, and with the store of ideas the ima- gination is invigorated. It is in the combination and reciprocal effects of the mental powers and of the impression on the external senses, that we are to find an explanation of the operation of attention and its history. When the mental powers are led to the contempla- tion of an idea which assimilates easily with the sensation about to be presented by the external organ, the perception is quick, and the idea vivid ; but when the mind is strongly impressed and occupied with the contemplation of past ideas, the present operation of the sense is neglected and overlooked. Thus, the vividness ofthe perception or idea, is always proportionate to the degree of undistracted attention which the mind is able to bestow on the object of sensation or of memory. In soli- tude and darkness, the strength of the memory in the con- templation of past events is increased, because there is no in- trusion of the objects of the outward senses ; and the deaf or blind receive some compensation for their loss in the increased powers which are acquired by a more frequent and undistur- Vot. III. S 138 OFTHE SENSES. bed use of the senses which remain, and a keener attention to the sensations which they present. On the other hand, when we are under the enchantments of a waking dream or revery, our attention is wholly detached from the present objects ofthe senses ; and in this state we may even continue to read with- out understanding. This absence, in a certain degree, is com- mon, natural, and by no means unpleasant; it is the exertion of the faculty of the mind. But it may become disease ; for health consists in the due correspondence betwixt the excite- ment and the vigorous action ofthe body, and the operation of the mind when roused by the external senses. The mind (united to the body) suffers in the diseases ofthe body. In the debility of the body, in fever, in spasms, and pain, the faculties of the mind languish, or are roused to un- equal strength or morbid acuteness. Sometimes the phantasms and internal sensations of things once received by the outward senses, become so strong in the mind, as to be mistaken for ob- jects actually present. Such phrenzy or delirium arises from a disordered and acutely sensible state of the internal senses.— These impressions being great in degree, hurry and bustle are in the countenance of the patient, and uncommon strength and violence in his actions ; as passion gives uncommon excite- ment to one in health, with a disregard or forgetfulness of all other things. In health, however vigorous the force of ima- gination may be, there is still a conviction that the ideas which it presents are not realities, and the operation of the external senses preponderates in recalling the attention to what exists around us. But when the internal perceptions become so strong as to be mistaken for realities, the effect is falsely attri- buted to the organs. It indeed sometimes happens, that this false perception is really owing to disease in the organ ; while it also occurs, that a too vivid perception of things absent pro- ceeds from an affection of the brain, and not of the outward senses. There is still another degree or class of diseased sensation, consisting in the modification of objects which are actually pre- sent to the senses. But this modification of things present (as when bodies actually at rest appear to be in motion) is not always occasioned by optical deception. Objects seem to turn round, and this we shall afterwards find to proceed from the insensible motion of the eyes ; but this motion of the eyes is occasioned by the disordered state ofthe internal sensation ; and the same feeling will be experienced if the eyes are shut.— For example, when we turn quickly round on our heel until we become giddy, it would appear that there is a disturbance ofthe usual order of sensation, and that the course of our im- OF THE SENSES. 139 pressions is reversed; for while our sensations were formerly directed entirely by the impression made on the outward sen- ses, the sensorial impressions now draw after them a sympa- thetic motion of the external organs. This inverted communication betwixt the mind and organs is better exemplified in the organ of speech. Thoughts excit- ed in the mind are represented by the signs of these ideas in speech. There occurs, however, not unfrequently, a diseased state of these operations of the internal senses, in which the ideas excited in the mind cannot be associated with their ap- propriate expressions ; and although the patient has a distinct idea of what he means to express, he cannot recollect the words which belong to it; so that, when he asks for one thing, he names another which has no connection with it. Of this he js perfectly sensible, and yet he cannot correcfhimself. There are more frequent instances of diseased corporeal sensation in hypochondriacs. In them, the sensation of pain and unusual feelings are falsely attributed to parts in which there is really no affection : for these feelings there is no appa- rent cause ; they proceed from a disordered state of sensation in which the usual course of the impressions is altered, so as to occasion the patient falsely to attribute his suffering to sound and healthy parts. Thus, indigestion, the irritation of the bile, flatulency, colic, &c. often do not give the usual impressions, but the pains are attributed to outward parts. That there is sometimes an actual connection existing betwixt the external parts, to which these feelings are referred, and the internal or- gans, is evident from the fact, that pressure in the outward and sound parts has occasioned spasms in the internal organs. To such disordered transmission of the irritation of the internal parts we have to attribute the extravagant and ludicrous ideas which hypochondriacs entertain. In these people, there are diseases of parts, of the action of which, during their healthy state, (as I have already explained in the short introductory view ofthe nervous system,) we have no feeling nor conscious- ness, and over which the will has no power. But although in the healthy state of the oeconomy there is no immediate route by which any sensation from these organs can be transmitted to excite a mental perception, it may happen, that, in their dis- eased state, when sensations do arise which forcibly attract the attention, there should be an obscurity in the feelings produced by their derangement, insomuch, that the mind may be de- ceived in regard to the direction ofthe sensation conveyed from them. During health, there are vicissitudes of consciousness, sense, ,nd voluntary motion, and of rest from voluntary exertion, in. 140 OF THE SENSES. sensibility, and oblivion ofthe past. This is true, however, only comparatively, and by a gross reference to degree ; for even during natural sleep there is not a total oblivion of past perceptions, nor is there always a total unconsciousness of the present, as the senses are in part awake ; some one train of ideas is present to the mind ; and the lapse of time is observed. Even these perceptions are sometimes so strong as to be fol- lowed by voluntary exertion, and yet the patient remains asleep. Whatever conduces to take the excitement from the mind, or lessens the vivacity of its impressions, conduces to sleep.— Thus, rest, stillness, and darkness, by excluding the most lively impressions conveyed by the senses ; and haemorrhagy and evacuations, by lessening the velocity of the circulation, in- duce sleep. Again, compression of the returning blood from the head, by giving it a slow languid motion, and by depriving the vessels of their freedom of action, also conduces to sleep ; because, as formerly remarked, the powers and faculties of the brain must be renovated through the means of the circu- lation. By long watching and fatigue, the body is brought nearly to a feverish lowness. By sleep, rest is given to the voluntary muscles, and an abatement of the vital motions ensues ; the quiescent state of the muscles brings back the blood to the heart, with a slow, regular, and calm progression ; the heart is restored to its slow and equable pulsation ; the breathing be- comes slower ; and the wasted strength of the system is re- cruited. We may define sleep to be a state in which the sensations are dull, the voluntary muscles inert, and the vital motions calm and regular. In dreaming, the sensations are dull and obscure, but the imagination more alive and active ; unnatural sleep, or soporific diseases, may be characterized by the disor- dered imagination, and disturbed vital and voluntary motions. The vital actions, which are calm, slow, and equable, during natural sleep, become oppressed ; the sensibility, which is gradually diminished upon the approach of sleep, but always capable of being roused by the senses, becomes quite oppress- ed ; the voluntary muscles continue relaxed, as in sleep, or convulsed by irregular motions. In apoplectic diseases, the functions of the viscera proceed, and are but partially imped- ed ; but when the circulation of the blood and play ofthe lungs are obstructed, the operations of the mind are not equally un- concerned in the paroxysm : for in syncope, the sudden deple- tion ofthe blood-vessels ofthe brain causes instant loss of sense and of voluntary motion. If natural sleep is not profound, the imagination is awake ; OF THE SENSES. 141 but there'may be false perceptions, false judgment and associ- ations, and disproportionate emotions ; and if sensations are perceived, they do not produce the ordinary associations.— If such a state of the intellectual functions occurs during the waking state, it becomes delirium. That this delirium is ana- logous to the perturbed state of the imagination during sleep, appears from the delirium' in fevers uniformly showing its ap- proach in the patient's slumbers only. It is a disposition to form false images and associations, which, in the beginning, the excitement of the outward senses has power to counteract, insomuch that a patient can be roused from delirium as he can be roused from sleep : but, bye and bye, the external senses lose their superiority, and their excitement is attended with unusual associations; they no longer convey impressions to the intellect, but become subservient to and modified by it, and the judgment, which depends on the due balance of memory and imagination, is lost. In fever, the delirium is transitory ; in low fevers, it is combined with a comatose state. In me- lancholy, the delirium runs upon one object chiefly, or trains of ideas, which refer to the patient's health and corporeal feelings. In madness, the variety is infinite ; but chiefly consisting in a vitiated imagination and perverted judgment, with fierceness and increased power of corporeal exertion. There are five organs peculiarly adapted to convey sensations to the mind; and they may be considered as forming a medi- um of communication betwixt the external creation and the sentient principle within us ; they are at the same time the bond of union betwixt sentient beings. These organs are call- ed the external senses; viz. the sense of seeing, the sense of hearing, the sense of smelling, the sense of tasting, and the sense of touch. Individually, these organs convey little infor- mation to the mind ; but by comparison and combination, the simple and original affection or feelings of the mind are associ- ated and combined to infinity, and administer to the memory and imagination, to taste, reasoning, and moral perception, the passions and affections, and every active power of the soul. BOOK I. OF THE EYE. CHAP. I. introductory view of the principles of optics. JLilGHTis a matter thrown out from ignited, or reflected from shining, surfaces ; and which enters the eye and impress- es that organ with the sensation of sight. The minuteness and inconceivable velocity of light, the facility with which it pene- trates bodies ofthe greatest density and closest texture, with- out a change of its original properties, makes it the source of the most wonderful and astonishing phaenomena in the physi- cal world. The smallest stream of light which propagates itself through a minute hole, is called a ray ; and, as rays of light pass through a uniform medium in a straight course, they are represented by mathematical lines. The sun is the greatest source of light, and perhaps the original and only source. But light is not uniform in respect of colour : every part of a ray is not capable of exciting the idea of whiteness which the whole rais- es. White light is composed of different kinds of rays, which individually give the sensation : one of red, another of orange, a third of yellow, a fourth of green, a fifth of light blue, a sixth of indigo, and a seventh of a violet or purple.* These are named the prismatic colours ; because, in the spectrum produ- ced by making a ray of light to pass through a prism, these several colours are seen in the succession in which they are • There is a fact not a little extraordinary regarding the emanation of rays from the fun, and which has been difcovered in the prefent day, viz. that there are invifible rays, giving heat but no light, which are lefs refractable than the coloured rays; and that all rays, in proportion to their refrangibility, have lefs power of producing heat. See Herfchel on the invifible rays of light. Phy» Trans. 1800, part iup. 384. OF THE EYE. 143 above enumerated. Each of these rays individually impress- es the eye with its own colour; but when they all impress the eye at once, the sensation upon the organ of sight is a com- pound effect: no individual colour is presented, but that mix- ed light which is called whiteness, and which may be divided into its individual colours by passing it through a prism. It is the nature of most bodies to absorb some of these rays of light and to reflect others from their surface ; consequently, the colours of bodies depend upon the particular rays which are reflected from them, or upon the combination of such rays as are reflected from them ; and a body appears of that colour of which the light coming from it is chiefly composed. When a ray of light passes from a rarer to a denser medium, or from a denser into a rarer, it alters its course, if there be any obliquity in the original direction ; but if it strikes from one medium into another perpendicularly to the surfaces, its ori- ginal direction is not changed. If the ray passing from the air enters obliquely into glass or water, or any denser medium, it turns more towards the perpendicular; but if it passes through the glass and emerges again into the air, it resumes its original direction, diverging from the perpendicular. This effect of different mediums upon the ray of light, is called refraction: when a ray of light impinging upon a surface does not enter, it rises again to the angle of its incidence ; and this is re- flection. The prism is a piece of glass of a triangular form; the in- clined surfaces of which, when placed in the course of the ray of light, refract, and separate the several parts of the hetero- geneous ray, and show its compound nature. If the sun be permitted to shine into a dark room through a small hole in the window-shutter, and the beam of light be made to fall upon a glass prism, it is, in passing through the glass, separated in- to its constituent parts ; because the several coloured rays have different degrees of refrangibility, in the order in which I have already ennumerated them. If the rays, after passing through the prism, be made to pass also through a convex glass, thev are brought again to a point in the focus of that glass; and the effect of the whole colours thus re-united, is perfect white- ness; We might suspect that the beam of light were homoge- neous, and that the degree of refraction gave different colours to the rays, were it not proved, that how much soever any of the coloured rays is further refracted, it does not change its nature : nor will rays suffer any change bv reflection from bo- dies of different colours, for minium will appear yellow, green. 144 OF THE EVE. blue, &c. according to the colour of the ray ofthe light direct ed upon it.* As the impression of light remains some ^imeupon the nerve ofthe eye, it gave Sir Isaac Newton the opportunity of exami- ning, whether each coloured ray makes a distinct impression upon the eye, or whether they so affect each other as to im- press the sense of whiteness on the eye. When a burning coal is whirled in a circle, the eye perceives an entire circle of fire, because the impression made by the coal in any point of the circle remains until the coal returns again to the same place, and renews the sensation. When all the varieties of colours are painted in a circle, and turned in the same way with the burning coal, they must each make their separate impression upon the optic nerve ; but the general sensation is whiteness; or when the teeth of a comb are drawn across the stream of light issuing from a prism, the different colours are intercepted in such quick succession, that a perfect whiteness is the result of the mixture of impressions. There are many experiments which show, that the inequalities of the refraction of light are not casual; that they do not depend upon any irregularity ofthe glass: on the contrary, it is proved, that every ray of the sun has its own peculiar degree of refractability, according to which, it is more or less refracted in passing through pellu- cid substances,. and always in the same manner: and, lastly, that the rays are not split and multiplied by the prism. When a ray of light falls upon the surface of glass obliquely, it inclines to a line drawn (through the point of incidence) per- pendicular to the surface. * It is found, that the coloured rays have not all the fame power of illuminating obje&s; the orange ray poffesses this property more than the red ; the yellow more tban the orange, &c.; and the maximum of illumination lies in the bright- eft yellow or^aleft green ; nor do the feveral rays equally affe<9: the thermometer. See Herfchel's Exp. Trans. 1800, p. 2. p. 255. OF THE EYE. 145 Thus the ray A. fig. 1, proceeding from the object,* is re- fracted upon entering the mass of glass in the direction B, having a tendency towards the perpendicular line. By this means, if a number of rays proceeding from any one point, as in fig. 2., fall on a convex or spherical surface of glass, they will be inflected so as to gather about the perpendicular line a A in the centre of the glass: which perpendicular line is the axis of the glass. If the rays of light proceeding from an object be made to strike into a mass of glass with a concave surface, the obliquity with which they impinge upon the sur- face, being the reverse of the convex surface, they are not made to converge upon the central line, but diverge from it. Farther, the rays of the sun when passing from a medium of glass into the air, are turned, by refraction, farther off from the central line to which they were drawn in entering the con- vex surface of glass. But if the rays, in passing through the glass, were in a direction converging to the perpendicular line, they will be made to converge still farther, as is seen here in fig. 3. If, however, the rays be made to pass from glass into the air, and the surface of the glass be concave as in fig. 4 , the rays will be made to have a less degree of convergence, so as to remove the image * farther from the surface of the glass. But if the rays passing through the medium of glass have no convergence, but pass in parallel lines, they will diverge as the lines a a, fig. 4, do, when they emerge from the concave surface ofthe glass. Vol. HI T 146 OF THE EYE. We see, then, the operation of a double convex glass, in forming the image of a lumin- ous body upon a surface. If, for example, such a glass be held between a candle and a piece of white paper, (the distances being properly adjusted,) the image of the candle will appear very dis- tinctly upon the opposed surface, but inverted ; because the rays coming from the point A fig. 5., converge at c, and those from the point b at d. Before proceeding farther in this short exposition of the prin- ciples of optics, it will be ne- cessary to take a very slight view ofthe structure ofthe eye. SIMPLE IDEA OF THE STRUCTURE OF THE EYE. The eye being that organ by which we are sensible to the rays of light, may be considered as consisting of two parts ; that which receives the impression, viz. the retina or expanded nerve, and which is indeed the organ of the sense ; and the tunics and humours, the apparatus by which the rays of light are made capable of forming an impression on the retina, or proper organ of the sense. In an anatomical enquiry, it is chiefly the latter division of the subject which must occupy our attention ; for, although we are necessarily led to consider the nature of the substance of the retina, the manner in which it is expanded, and sup- ported by adhesion, and nourished by vessels, we must not venture far in the attempt to investigate the manner of its re- ceiving or conveying the image of objects to the sensorium. We must turn to investigate the more useful subject of the structure, use, and diseases* of the humours and coats of the eye. It is the first principle of the constitution ofthe eye, that the rays of light must be so concentrated as to impinge strongly on the expanded nerve or retina in the bottom of the eye. Now, as we have seen, that a lens (which is a double convex * Of the difeafes only as they relate to the explanation ofthe ftructurc am" economy of '.he eye. OF THE EYE. 147 glass) is necessary, so to concentrate the rays of light proceed- ing from an object, as to form a small and lively image of it, (as in marginal plate, fig. 5.,) so, in the same manner, an essential part of the eye is the lens, which brings the rays of light to a focus; and that the lens may make the rays proceed- ing from an object converge into an accurate focus, so as to form a distinct image on the eye, the vitreous humour is inter- posed betwixt the lens and the surface of the retina : again, it is necessary to the constitution of the eye, that, in order to increase the sphere of vision, the anterior part of it shall pro- ject and form a large segment of a small circle, so as to take a greater circumference into the sphere of vision than could have been done, had the larger sphere of the eye-ball been continued on the fore part. Another necessary part ofthe ap- paratus of the eye is the iris, which is a curtain in the anterior chamber of the eye, perforated with a hole, which is capable of being enlarged or diminished so as to admit a larger or smaller stream of light as may be necessary to perfect vision. In this provision, we see the necessity ofthe anterior humour of the eye being different from the others; being merely an aqueous secretion, while the others possess a degree of firm- ness, viz. that the iris, or curtain of the eye, may move with perfect freedom in it. Fuj.S. The three humours ofthe eye are thus situated, and have this general character: 1. The aojjeous humour is the anterior humour ofthe eye. It distends the anterior and pellucid part of the eye, so as to increase the sphere of vision. It is perfectly fluid, and of a watery consistence, that it may allow free motion to the iris. 2. The lens or crystalline humour is placed immediate- ly behind the perforation in the iris; which perforation is called 148 OF THE EYE. i the pupil. The lens collects the rays of light like a double convex glass, so as to concentrate them, and make a more for- cible image on the bottom of the eye. 3 The vitreous humour is behind the lens. It distends the general ball ofthe eye into a regular sphere, that it may move easily in the orbit; and its diameter in the axis of the eye is so proportioned to the focal distance ofthe lens, (affected also in some degree by the other humours,) that the image of an object is formed accurately on the surface of the retina: ac- cordingly, when the coats are cut from the back of the eye, the picture of a luminous object held before the pupil is seen ex- quisitely minute and distinct on the bottom ofthe eye. While these humours have each its distinct character, they possess, in proportion to their density, different powers of re- fracting the rays of light. This has the still farther good effect of correcting the aberration of the rays and giving the truest colours, as well as the most correct image of the object presented to the eye. If the lucid anterior part ofthe eye be formed too prominent, or if the lens of the eye have too great a degree of convexity, or, lastly, if the size of the ball of the eye, and the diameter of the vitreous humour in the axis of the eye be unusually great, then the person does not see distinctly ; because the powers of the humours, in concentrating the rays of light, are too great, and the image ofthe object is not formed accurately on the retina, but before it. Thus, in fig. 7., the convexity of the cornea, the lucid ante- rior part of the eye, or the fo- cal powers of the lens, being too great for the length of the axis of the eye, the image is formed at a before the rays reach the surface of the re- tina ; and after coming accu- rately to the point, they again begin to diverge ; which di- verging rays, striking the sur- face of the retina, give the in- distinct vision of a near-sight- ed person. But as this indis- tinctness of vision proceccb from no opacity, but only the disproportion ofthe convexiu of the eye to the diameter, th; $&-7 OF THE EYE. 149 defect is corrected by the concave glass, a fig. 8.; for, the effect of this glass being the reverse of the convex, it causes the rays to fall upon the surface of the eye, so far diverging from the perpendicular line, (which is exemplified in fig. 1.,) as to correct the too great convergence caused by the convexity ofthe humours. But, when a near-sighted person has brought the object near enough to the eye to see it distinctly, he sees more minutely, and, consequently, more clearly ; because he sees the object larger, and as a person with a common eye does, when assisted with a magnifying glass or convex lens. The near-sighted person sees distant objects indistinctly; and as the eye, in consequence, rests with less accuracy upon the surrounding objects, the piercing look of the eye is di- minished, and it has a dulness and heaviness of aspect. Again, the near-sighted person knits his eye-brows, and half closes his eye-lids: this he does to change the direction of the rays, and to correct the inaccuracy ofthe image, in a manner which may be understood by the following analogy. If we make a card approach a stream of light passing through the window, it will so attract the rays of light, as to extend the margin of the figure of the circular spot of light upon the wall. In the same way, when a stream of light, proceeding from an object towards the eye, is made to pass through a small hole, the circular margin ofthe hole so attracts the rays, as to produce the same effect with the concave glass ; by causing the rays to take a direction outward, as if proceeding from a nearer object, the image is carried farther back from the lens ; and when a near-sighted person peers through his eye- lids, it makes the rays impinge accurately upon the retina.* The effect of old age, is gradually to reduce the eye to a less prominent state, and, consequently, to bring it to the re- verse of the near-sighted eye. From the decrease ofthe humours, and the lessened con- vexity of the cornea, the image of objects is not formed soon enough to impinge accurately on the retina, the rays tend to form the image behind the retina, as we see in fig. 9, * Short-fightednefs may be produced by accidents. Sometimes I have known it produced by a piece of glafs flicking in the cornea, and caufing great inflamma- tion. Dr. Briggs mentions the cafe of an old man, who had long ufed fpec>acles, becoming fuddenly fhort-fighted, by catching cold, and he was afterwards enabled to read the fmalleit print without glaffes. In general, however, it is by fome ac- cident, and often late in life, that we become fenfible of being fhort-fighted ; and. in this cafe, men are very apt to attribute the d^fecT: ^o fome particular occurren,;. 150 OF THE EYE. In this figure, we have the effect of old age on the humours represent- ed ; without the intervention of the glass a, the rays have a direction which would form the image at some distance beyond the retina, as at b. But by the convex glass a, (which is ofthe nature ofthe common specta- cles for old people,) the direction of the rays of light is so corrected, that the image falls accurately on the bot- tom of the eye. We understand, then, whence these opposite defects of sight arise ; that, in old people, objects cannot be seen distinctly when near, and, in short- sighted people, they cannot be seen distinctly when at a distance. We see, also, why old age corrects short-sightedness by gradually reducing the convexity ofthe eye, enabling the person to see objects farther removed, until, by degrees, he comes to see perfectly at the distance most convenient for the common affairs of life. It has been, by some, thought extremely difficult to account for the image appearing to us, as it is in nature, erect, since it is actually figured on the bottom of the eye in an inverted pos- ture : but the terms above and below have no relation to the image in the bottom of the eye, but to the position of our bo- dies and the surrounding things. When I look to a tall man's face, I direct my eyes upward ; I observe his situation, as it relates to an ideal area before my eye, or to a space in the sphere of vision. When an object approaches towards the eye, the diameter of the picture on the retina increases in the same proportion as r-he distance between the eye and the object decreases ; and, consequently, it decreases in the same proportion as the dis- tance increases. But the degree of brightness of the picture of an object on the retina continues the same at all distances, be- tween the eye and the object, unless some of the rays of light are interrupted in their progress ; for, as the advancing object becomes bright, it increases doubly in length and breadth, or quadruply in surface. The faint appearance of remote ob- jects, therefore, is occasioned by the opacity of the atmos- phere. There is nothing more astonishing in the structure of the eve, than the sensibility of the expanded nerve, as proved by the extent of the changes or degrees of light which illuminate OF THE EYE. 151 visible objects; or the great degree of light which the eye can bear, and the low degree of light at which objects are visible. Thus, the proportion betwixt the degrees of light illuminating an object by the sun, and by the moon, at any equal altitudes, is calculated at 90,000 to 1.* Again, by M. de la Hire's cal- culation, we see the sail of a windmill, six feet in diameter, at the distance of 4000 toises. The eye being supposed to be an inch in diameter, the picture of this sail, at the bottom of the eye, will be the eight thousandth part of an inch, which is the 666th part of a line, and is about the 66th part of a common hair. This gives us an idea ofthe minuteness ofthe structure of the optic nerve. The pupil of the eye is formed by the central perforation in the iris or curtain, which hangs before the lens. This body having muscularity, is moveable; it dilates or contracts the hole or pupil, transmitting the rays so as to adapt the diameter ofthe stream of light, darting into the eye, to the intensity or degree of light. If a body is illuminated but faintly, the pupil is (insensibly to us) enlarged ; and a greater quantity of the rays are allowed to be transmitted to the retina. But as the convexity of the pellucid part of the eye, and the concentrating powers ofthe lens, remain the same, the size ofthe image is not altered by this dilatation of the pupil, but only the strength ofthe image or picture in the bottom ofthe eye is increased. We understand that the rays of light are refracted, when they pass out of one medium into another of different density.— For example, the rays of light are refracted towards the per- pendicular line, when they enter the cornea ofthe human eye ; but they will be refracted in a very small degree in entering the cornea of fish, because the aqueous humour is of the same density with the fluid from which the rays of light are trans- mitted ; accordingly, the cornea of fishes is not prominent: this would limit their sphere of vision, were not the flatness of the cornea counteracted by the prominence of the whole eye, and the more anterior situation of the crystalline lens ; a large pupil and long diameter ofthe eye we shall afterwards find to be necessary to the distinct vision of fishes, f It is natural, on the present occasion, to inquire into the effects of the several humours ofthe eye, in producing in those • See Smith's Optics, vol. i. p. 29. •f Neither fifh out of water, nor other animals within water, can fee an object diftinctly. Divers fee objects as an old man would do through a very concave glafs put near to the eye ; and it has been found, that the convexity of fpc&acle Zinn 158 OF THE COATS OF THE EYE. in extracting the cataract, bend upon it. This turning of the elastic point ofthe knife is very apt to give a wrong direction to the incision ; and, indeed, this occurred to me in my first operation. There is a pellicle, or exceedingly thin coat, which by ma- ceration, can be taken off from the surface of the cornea. This is generally understood to be the conjunctiva continued over it. But I cannot help expressing myself as averse to the ideas of those anatomists who consider every membrane, which can be traced from another by dissection, as either de- rived from it, or in any way allied to it. This can surely serve no useful purpose, if, as here, the membranes differ in their use; are changed in their appearance ; and have no similarity in structure, function, or diseases. The membrane in fishes, analogous to the adnata, lies loose over the cornea; and, in serpents, it is thrown off from the cornea, with the scales of the body, and remains attached to the cast skin of the head ; and in the foetus calf, I have forced the blood in the vessels ofthe conjunctiva into vessels passing over the surface of the cornea. By maceration, I have found, raised in the fluid, a very delicate and transparent membrane from the inner surface of the cornea ; and, after long continued soaking, the whole cornea can be taken out of the sclerotic coat, like an optician's glass from its frame. The cornea possesses great sensibility; although much of the pain, from hard bodies flying into the eye,is to be attributed to the motion of the eye-lids, and the great sensibility with which they are endued. When a splinter of glass or metal strikes and sticks in the cornea, inflammation is excited; in consequence of this, vessels carrying red blood strike into it, or shoot over its surface in a new film of membrane.* Petit thought he observed first in a negro, and afterwards in a va- riety of instances, red lines in the cornea ; which he conceived to be the anastamosing of vessels. There are, besides, says he, many circumstances which argue that there are blood- vessels in the cornea. When the eye receives a stroke, there is often blood effused in its substance ; abscesses, also, are found within it, and phlvctaenae on its surface; and in great inflammation of the eye, the cornea appears red ; which, he supposed, must be produced by the same cause which makes • I have found the fpark from iron, in blackfmiths and mafons buried in the cornea for feveral days, (fome authors fay months,) without exciting pain or much inconvenience. I have alfo more than once picked a little black flough from the cornea, miftaking it for a piece ef iron, when it was only the confequence of the injury. OF THE COATS OF THE EYE. 15$ the albuginea red, viz. the enlargement of its vessels, and the circulation of red blood. But we must not imagine, he con- tinues, that, in the natural state, red blood circulates in the cor- nea ; for the vessels are not to be seen with the microscope ; nor are they penetrated by injection ; nor do they appear in the foetus ; nor, when little abscesses are formed in the cornea ; but only when violence has been done by a stroke upon the eye. In an eye in which the tunica conjunctiva was most minutely in- jected, as well as the internal vessels ofthe eye, I had resolved, carefully to examine the structure of the cornea ; and after a long maceration, in which it had greatly swelled, I observed a set of vessels totally distinct from the extremities of the minute blood-vessels. The minute blood-vessels which were inject- ed, stopt abruptly on the margin of the cornea. But these I now mention are particular ; they are in great profusion, large, and perfectly pellucid ; they are large towards the middle of the cornea, and diminish towards the margin. Their free communication formed a net-work deep in the thickened sub- stance ofthe cornea. The size, perfect pellucidness, and inti- mate connection of these vessels, might perhaps incline one to call this a cellular structure. Mr. Home* says, that an irritation on jthe edge of the cor- nea, and which includes the tunica conjunctiva, will produce greater inflammation, and more quickly, than a stronger ex- citement would produce on the centre of the cornea. This re- mark is probably from observation ; but he adds, it is impos- sible that the vessels ofthe cornea, which naturally carry lymph only, or serum, can be made to carry red blood, unless the irri- tation extends to some neighbouring part supplied with red blood. This, certainly, is an erroneous idea; for the little opacities which surround spiculae sticking in the cornea, the ulcerations on its surface, and little abscesses within its layers,! are the effect of inflammation of the part modified by its pecu- liar structure ; and these will all take place while the margin of the cornea remains clear, and there is no apparent connec- tion of inflammation, or of vessels with the conjunctiva. Vessels attach themselves both to the inner and to the outer surface ofthe cornea ; and when it becomes spongy and vascu- lar in this way, little can be explained of its natural structure. Thus, the pannus and pterygium are membranes which stretch across and adhere to the cornea, while the iris frequently at- taches to its inside. In this case, the cornea becomes spongy • Philos. Trans. 1797, p. 20. t Viz. Onyx, unguis,an abfcefs between the laminae of the cornea, from a fup- pofed refemblance to th;' figure of a nail parrd from the finger 160 OF THE COATS OF THE EYE. thick, and vascular; and, when cut, there is red blood in it ;* and in staphyloma,! the iris is generally attached to the cornea. I have a preparation in which the form and character ofthe iris is entirely lost; it is extended into a reticulated membrane which lines the surface ofthe extended cornea. OF THE CHOROID COAT. The choroid is the vascular tunic of the eye ; it is so called from its resemblance to one of the membranes of the secun- dines. It is the middle coat of the eye, lying betwixt the sclero- tic coat and retina. Injections show it to consist of two layers of cellular tissue ; and it has upon its inner surface a pigment, which being sometimes firm, might be taken for a membrane. It was Ruysch who observed this division of the choroid coat into two laminae; and the inner one, his son called the tunica Ruyschiana : but of these hereafter. Those anatomists who supposed the sclerotic coat to be the production of the dura mater, naturally concluded, that the choroid coat was derived from the pia mater ; and as Ruysch found it to be divisible into two laminae, so Sladius found the pia mater to consist of two membranes. It followed, that the one lamina ofthe choroid coat was the continuation of the tu- nica arachnoides, and the other of the pia mater ; but this ac- count of these membranes has no support from observation.— Betwixt the pia mater and choroid coat, there is no resem- blance ; the latter we shall find loaded with vessels ; but these vessels are peculiar, and minister to a secreting surface. The pia mater in the brain, and optic nerve, is in strict union with the substance of the brain, and supports and nourishes it; but the choroid coat has no connection with the retina or expanded nerve. There can be no better mark of distinction between mem- branes than their degree of vascularity, and particularly in the manner ofthe distribution of their vessels. The choroid coat is most particular in the distribution of its arteries and veins. The great arterial vascularity of the choroid coat is to be seen only after a very minute injection, and the venous vascularity after artificial or accidental infarction of the blood, or by a suc- cessful injection from the superior cava ; although the very * Pterygium, is a membrane which extends over the cornea from thecanthus. Pan n u s, is a congeries of blood-veffels, which extends over the cornea, and is lefs uniform than the pterygium. f Staphyloma uvea, a protrufion and opacity ofthe cornea : which, from the lofs of traDfparency and the general appearance of the tumour, is fuppofed to referable a grape. OF THE COATS OF THE EYE. 161 great vascularity of this coat was known to our oldest writers, yet the appearance of these vessels, when empty, has deceived many. Morgagni* and Maitre-jean, have described fibres which they affirm to be distinct from the vessels, but which prove to be, in fact, the appearance presented by the collapsed vessels. The great peculiarity of the choroid coat, is its being a secre- ting membrane; by which I mean, that the pigmentum nigrum which is applied to the medullary lamina of the retina being a secretion, the choroid coat has necessarily that peculiar struc- ture of vessels which belongs to the secreting membrane. This structure has enabled anatomists to tear it into laminae. For that part of the choroid coat next the sclerotic coat, is merely a vehicle of vessels and nerves, and is a tissue of them con- nected by very fine cellular membrane. The internal part, again, is organized into a secreting surface, and is the tunica Ruyschiana. I conceive, that the division into the choroid coat and tunica Ruyschiana, is warranted from the nature of the membrane, as the divisions of the coats of the intestines are. Morgagni says, that from his earliest youth, he had many proofs that the choroid coat was not single in brutes; he asserts, also, that Franciscus Silvius and Guenellonius had demonstra- ted the double laminae of this membrane before Ruysch.f Cer- tain it is, that Ruysch was not so fortunate in ascribing a use to this tunica Ruyschiana. • He supposed that it gives strength to the choroid coat, and, by bringing a greater afflux of arterial blood, supplies the necessary heat to the otherwise cold hu- mours.! Tapetum. The internal surface of the choroid coat has been long called tapetum, from its villous or fleecy appear- ance, when seen through the microscope. This surface in the adult is of a brown colour ; in very young subjects it is red and bloody ; and, when minutely injected, it is like scarlet cloth*— It is by this vascular surface or tapetum that the black pigment, which is laid under the expanded retina in the human eye, is secreted. The pigmentum nigrum. The pigmentum nigrum is the black or deep brown mucous substance which lies between the choroid coat and retina. It is of a nature to be washed away • Morgagni Epift. Aint. xvii. 2. f Idem. ibid. 3. f Quod ad ufum tunica; Ruyfchianx attinet crediderim hanc tunicam inter ce- teros ulus effe deiliuatam, non folum ad robur choroidex, verum etiam ut a fan- guinis arteriofi majori copia requefitus calor tribus humoribus natura frigidis con- uliaretur. Ruyf. Rcfponf. ad Cbrifh Wedelium, p. 14. Vol. UI. X 162 OF THE COATS OF THE EYE. with a litde water and a soft pencil.* This brown taint per- vades the whole texture of the choroid coat. This matter is in immediate contact with the medullary pulp of the optic nerve. Its use is apparently to stifle the rays of light after they have impinged on the sensible surface of the retina ; for we know that blackness is owing to the absorption of the light, as whiteness and colour are the reflection of it from the surface of bodies. The dark colour of the secreted pigment of the cho- roid coat is, in some measure, peculiar to those animals which see in the brightest light of day ; but is wanting, or of a bright reflecting green or silvery whiteness, in such as prowl by night. The natural conclusion, therefore )is, that the pigmentum ni- grum subdues the intensity of the impression, while the reflec- ting colours of the surface in animals which see in the night, strengthens the effect of the light on the surface of the retina, by repelling it. As fishes have the other provisions for seeing in an obscure light, they have also this of the reflecting sur- face of the tapetum : as it is a secretion of the villous surface of the choroid, we see why it becomes somewhat deficient in old men, and sometimes wanting in the degenerate varieties of animals ; when entirely deficient, the blood circulating in the vessels of the choroid coat gives a livid redness to the reflec- tions from the bottom of the eye.! Finally, in regard to the choroid coat, we have to understand that it consists of two laminae: the outer, and that which is next to the sclerotic coat, being the proper choroid ; the inter- nal lamina, the tunica Ruyschiana : that on the surface of the tunica Ruyschiana, there is a pile or fleece, which is called ta- petum : and, lastly, that the secretion of this inner surface is a pigment, which, in the human eye, has the appropriate name of pigmentum nigrum ; but, in many animals, it is of a silver, golden, or Isabella colour ; though, in my apprehension, the colour, in all these varieties, depends still upon a peculiar se- creted matter. * I cannot conceive how this matter fhould be confounded with the tapetum or tapis, which, as the name implies, is the villous furface of the choroid coat.— Tapetum is, properly, cloth wrought with various colours; and the analogy was firft ufed by the French Academicians, in their account of the diffe<5tion of a lion- efs. " The membrane which is put into the bottom of the eye, and laid on the cho- roides, which we call the tapetum, was of an Ifabella colour, intermixed with a grecnifh blue. , It was eaGly feparable from the choroides, which remained entire, with its ordinary thicknefs, after that we had taken away the membrane which forms the tapetum." The explanation of this, I fuppofe, will be found in Morg- Epift. An. xvii. f As the pigmentum nigrum is a fecretion, we fhall not be furprifed to find it become deficient in the commencement of fome difeafes of the eye. This is known by the poffibility of feeing to the bottom of the eye : that is, the choroid coat be- comes a reflecting furface, and throws out the beams like a cat's eye. See MeeJ. Obfer. and Enquiries, vol. iii. p. 124. OF THE COATS OF THE EYE. 163 OF THE CILIARY PROCESSES. The ciliary processes are formed of the anterior margin of the choroid coat; they give the appearance as if the choroid coat, at the anterior part, were folded inward to the margin of the crystalline lens ; and, as if, to accommodate it to this sud- den inflection, it had been plated, and not regularly contracted ; at least, this is much the appearance of the circle of ciliary pro- cesses, when, after cutting across the eye, we look from behind upon the lens in its natural situation. In this view, we find the pigmentum nigrum of the choroid coat continued over the cili- ary processes, which gives to them the appearance of the regu- lar plicae ofthe choroid coat, converging to the edge of the lens, and forming altogether a disk round it. When the black paint on the ciliary processes is a little wash- ed away, and when we attentively examine this part, we find the ciliary processes to be actually little oblong plicae, which gradually arise from the choroid coat at the angle of its inflec- tion, and terminate abruptly, approximating, but not attached, to the margin of the lens. When the paint is washed entirely away, the whole circle of these processes appears evidently to be the continued choroid coat. When not injected, the ciliary processes are pale and loose ; but when minutely injected, they take a perfect scarlet colour; they resemble, in their uninjected state, the valvular-like doub- lings ofthe villous coat of the stomach and intestines. Before the choroid coat is inflected towards the lens, in the form of cil- iary processes, it forms a firm adhesion to the sclerotic coat near the circular margin of the cornea, and at the same time is united firmly to the root of the iris. From this, the processes tend inward, and a little backwards ; and are, at their internal extremities, detached from the iris ; nor are they attached to the margin of the lens, but are loose and floating. When the vitreous humour and lens fall out from the anterior segment of the eye, we find that the plicae or ciliary processes have left their impression on the anterior surface of the vitre- ous humour, and also on the intermediate expansion ofthe reti- na which extends before the membrane ofthe vitreous humour. This circular impression of the ciliary processes is called by Haller, striae retinae subjectae ligamento ciliari.* I have called this impression halo signatus, because it is formed of a circle of radiations, formed by the impression of the ciliary process- es, and is not peculiar to the retina, but the retina again makes • Fafcie vii. icon. ocul. 164 OF THE COATS OF THE EYE. its impression on the membrane of the vitreous humour. The furrows and doublings of the anterior part of the retina, form- ed by the impression of the ciliary processes, Dr. Monro has called the ciliary processes of the retina ; but, for my part, I think this a term likely to confound and mislead a student; and we might as well speak of the ciliary processes of the vitreous humour, or of the membrane of the vitreous humour, since they also take the impression of the ciliary processes* When the vitreous humour and lens are taken out of the coats, we see also that the ciliary processes have left the stain of the fuliginous paint.! This it is necessary to remark, since I have seen students confound this mark with the ciliary processes themselves. The ciliary processes are of a most elegant vas- cular structure. Their contorted arteries are beautifully re- presented in Zinn's figure. He traces them from the extreme branches of the choroid coat; but, of their veins, he says no- thing further than that they are continued from the branches ofthe vasa vorticosa, or veins ofthe choroid coat. The points of the ciliary processes are not attached to the lens, but float loose in the posterior chamber of the aqueous humour ;\ but at a little distance from their points, they adhere to the retina, where it is continued over the anterior part of the vitreous hu- mour. Through this attachment only, are they connected with the lens ; for, as we shall find presently, the retina (as a mem- brane, but not as the sensible retina) is continued over the crystalline lens,§ The ciliary processes, collectively, form a circle round the lens, which I call corona ciliaris. This circle forming a per- fectly opaque partition, which stifles all rays that might other- wise be transmitted by the side ofthe lens. The corona ciliaris, or ciliary circle, no doubt, serves at the same time as a connex- ion between the outer and strong coats ofthe eye and the trans- parent coats and humours ; for, it is to be observed, that, ex- cepting the connection which naturally exists betwixt the optic nerve and retina, this slender hold which the ciliary processes take ofthe expanded retina, is the only attachment betwixt the humours ofthe eye and the proper coats. • Winflow ufes the term fulci ciliares, for the imprefiion on the vitreous hu- mour. Zinn calls this corona ciliaris, after Camper; he defcribes them well, p. 75. f See Morgagni Epift. Anat. xvii, n. 13, and Ruyfch alfo," Nonnulli pro proceffu ciliari agnefcunt pullas pigmenti nigri reliquias, membranulae tenuiffimx humoris criftallini & vitrei, & quafi fibres mentientes oculo fc. aperto, humoribuf- que exemptis ; hae autem nil funt nifi avulfae particular pigmenti nigri." Ruyfch. Thef. An. ii AfT. 1. No. xv. | This was demonftrated in a particular manner by Ruyfch and Morgagni. § Zinn and other later writers have entertained the idea, that the adhefion of the ciliary proceffes to the membranes covering the vitreous humour is by a kind of gluing, rather than a union by cellular membrane. See Zinn, p. 75. OF THE COATS OF THE EYE. 165 Jn regard to the names appropriated to this part of the eye, there is more confusion than it is possible to believe. It is ne- cessary to attend to this ambiguous use of terms, else we shall be in danger of misunderstanding our best authors. Vesalius considers the whole as a septum betwixt the vitreous and pos- terior chamber of the aqueous humour; but he seems to find much difficulty in giving it an appropriate name.* Fallopius and Morgagni! use the term corpus ciliare for the whole circle of the processes, and in the same sense that I have ven- tured to use corona ciliaris. It is a name which conveys the idea neither of the shape nor of the substance of the thing meant. Ruysch makes great confusion by his use of terms ; the corona ciliaris, or ciliary body, he calls the ligamentum ciliare ; and the lines on the back surface of the iris, he calls processus ciliaris musculosus; or, rather, he means by this, the straight fibres of the iris-! Duverney, with Ruysch and Winslow, following Fallopius, calls the corona ciliaris also ligamentum ciliare. But the ciliary ligament is used by others in a widely different sense, viz. for the circular root of the ciliary body and iris, the annulum album cellulosum, or the fre- nula membranoso of Zinn. By Hovius, what I have called halo signatus, is called ligamentum ciliare. In Haller's fifth figure of the eye, this circular root of the ciliary processes, is called orbiculus ciliaris. Maitre-jean, Haller, and others, call the whole body, or corona, the ciliary circle. M. Ferrein, l'anneau de la Choroide, and M. Lieutaud, denominated the ciliary processes " rayons ciliares,'' and the root ofthe corona ciliaris and iris, " plexus ciliaris." * a Neque mihi uilum occurrit nomen quod ipfi aptius indam quam tunica:: aut fi voles, interftitii vel fepti inter vitreum humorem & eum quem albugineum nun- cubamus repofiti." Vefal. vol. i. p. 558. f Epift. Anat. xvii. 11. i Ruyfch has this expreffion : " Ligamentum ciliare neutiquam effe confideran- dum tanquam mufculum ad pupillae et humoris criftallini motum deftinatum, to- tumque hoc negotium perfici a proceffu ciliari utet a circulo mufculari pofterius in confinio pupillx fito." Thes. Anat. ii. xv. See alfo the explanation of fig. iv. of this Thefaurus, where we have " Iris enim eft facies exterior, proccffus lig. ciliaris faeies interior. ( 166 ) CHAP. III. OF THE IRIS. X HE iris is the coloured circle which surrounds the pupilt and which we see through the transparent cornea of the eye. It is a membrane hung before the crystalline lens.* It is as if perforated in the middle ; and this hole in the middle of the iris is the pupil; and through the pupil only can the rays be transmitted to the bottom of the eye. When we hear of the dilatation and contraction of the pupil, we have to understand the action of the iris, which, by possessing the power of con- tracting and relaxing, holds a controul over the quantity of light transmitted to the bottom of the eye. For by the exten- sion of this membrane, the diameter ofthe pupil is diminished, and, by contraction of the membrane, it is dilated. This mo- tion of the iris, and, consequently, the size of the pupil, is connected with the sensation of the retina ; by which means, in disease of internal parts of the eye, it is often an index to us of the state of the nerve, and of the possibility of giving relief by operation. The iris and corona ciliaris, or ciliary processes, are, in general, considered as being the two laminae of the choroid coat continued forward and split: the internal lamina of the choroid forming the corona ciliaris, and the outer one forming the iris. The former I was willing to consider as the anterior margin ofthe choroid coat, because it has no distinction in its structure from that coat; but the iris I cannot consider as the continued choroid coat: in the first place, because I have found it fall out a perfect circle by maceration ; secondly, be- cause it has no resemblance in structure to the choroid coat; and, chief y, as by its power of contracting, it shows a wridely different character from any of the other membranes of the eye. The outer surface of this circular membrane gives the colour to the eye during life ; and from its beautiful and variegated * Winflow and Haller, and moft of the old anatomifts, call this uvea ; but moft ofthe modern anatomifts follow Zinn and Lieutaud, in calling it iris; though Licutaud and others called the anterior furface only iris, while they ftill continued to call this perforated membrane choroides, or uvea. See Lieut, p. 117. A^ain, others call the pofterior furface of the iris uvea, from its likenefs to the dark colour of a raifin; and the word iris is borrowed, I fuppofe, from the varied colours ofthe rainbow. OF THE IRIS. 167 colours, it has gained to the whole membrane the name of iris. Haller and Zinn, nearly at the same time, explained the cause of this coloured iris, which had been, till then, supposed to be occasioned by the refraction of the light amongst its striae and fibres. When this membrane is put in water, and examined with the microscope, its anterior surface is seen to be covered with minute villi. The splendid colouring of the iris proceeds from the villi; but by beginning putrefaction, the splendid re- flection fades, as the brilliant surface of the choroid of brutes is lost by keeping. For this reason, I imagine the colour and brilliancy of the iris to depend on the secretion of these villi. But the colour of the iris depends, in a great measure, on the black paint upon its posterior surface shining through it ; and the black and hazel-coloured iris is owing to the greater de- gree of transparency of the iris, which allows the dark uvea to shine through it. The iris is acknowledged to be the most acutely sensible part in the body. We have, then, to expect in its composi- tion, muscular fibres, and to account for its acute irritability and sympathy, by a profusion of nerves : again, as the power of the muscular fibre, and the sensibility of the nerve, are both, in some measure, indebted to the circulation of the blood, we may expect to find also a profusion of vessels in the iris. In all these respects, we shall find the iris to be an object of admiration. OF THE MUSCULAR FIBRES OF THE IRIS. It is evident from a note, under the head corona ciliaris, that Ruysch had observed two sets of muscular fibres in the iris ; for, under the name of ciliary ligament, he describes a set of radiated fibres which go from the ciliary processes to- wards the circular margin of the pupil: he observed also, the circular or orbicular fibres which run round the margin of the pupil. Winslow says, that between the two laminae of the uvea (viz. iris) we find two thin planes of fibres, which appear to be fleshy : the fibres of one plane orbicular, and lying round the circumference of the pupil, and those of the other being radiated; one extremity of it being fixed to the orbicular plane, the other to the great edge of the uvea. Zinn describes, with much minuteness, radiated fibres (on the anterior surface of the iris,) but does not consider these as muscular fibres ; and he confesses, that he could not observe the orbicular muscle which Maitre-jean and Ruysch had painted. Even in owb and other creatures, having a strong iris, he could not discover 168 OF THE IRIS. an orbicular muscle; nor were Haller and Morgagni more successful in this investigation.* Wrisberg also affirms, that no muscular fibres could be seen in the iris of the ox. Dr. Monro, on the other hand, adheres to the opinion of the mus- cularity of the iris : he describes minutely both the radiated and sphincter fibres. Wrisberg and others have thought they found sufficient proof against the muscularity of the iris, in the fact of its not contracting when the light falls upon its sur- face. To this Dr. Monro answers, that the colour or paint upon the iris must, like a cuticle, prevent the light from irri- tating the iris. I cannot think that this circumstance should prevent the excitement of the iris. The retina is in a peculiar manner susceptible ofthe impression of light; but we cannot wonder that light should not stimulate a muscle to contraction, when we have every proof that it has no effect on the most de- licate expanded nerve of the other senses. That the iris is to be affected only through the sensation of the retina, or perhaps rather the effect communicated to the sensorium, we have sufficient proof. I have, in couching, re- peatedly rubbed the side of the needle against the iris without exciting any motion in it: I have seen it pricked slightly by the needle without its showing any sign of being irritated ; nay, what was too a convincing proof, I have seen it cut by falling before the knife in extracting the cataract: in this last instance, far from being stimulated to contraction, it hung relaxed.! It is evident, then, that no common stimulus, immediately applied to the iris, has any sensible effect in exciting it to con- traction ; and that it is subject only, in a secondary way, to the degree of intensity of light admitted to the retina. The move- ment of the iris is in general involuntary ; but terror and sud- den fright affect it. In some animals, particularly in the par- rot, it is a voluntary muscle.! As an object, upon which we look, approaches the eye, the pupil contracts, which is an effect of the increasing intensity of the light reflected from the object; for, as the object advances, it fills a greater space in * See Zinn, p. 89 and 90. Morgagni. Epift. Anat xvii. § 4. Haller and Ferrein attribute the motion of the iris to an afflux of humours in its veffels. f This fa tempted to be explained upon the fuppofition of a very fenfible ftate of the retina, which perceives the gutulae exuding from the pores of the cornea, and which, falling over its furface, gives the appearance of their defcending. But it is only felt when the retina is exhaufted or difturbed by preffure on the eye-ball. See Sauvages Suffu- fio Scintillans & Suff. Danae's. • There are, however, cafes of Amaurosis a mvosi, in which there is a con- tracted and immoveable pupil, and children are born with an infenfibility ofthe or- gan in which the pupil is not greatly dilated. I would be willing to attribute this peculiarity of the pupil and apparent amaurofis in newly-born children to the re- mains ofthe membrana pupillaris. f The fyriipathy of the iris with the retina I do not conceive to be immediate, but through the intervention of the brain ; and the degree of dilatation of the pu- pil, I fhould hold to depend on the ftrcngth of the common fenfation of both eyes. By this only can we account for the fenfibility of the retina of one eye affecting the iris ofthe other, or the difturhance ofthe brain,in comatofe difeafes, deftroying the lympathetic connexion betwixt the retina and pupil. i Eft immanis differentia inter fplendorem et adivitatem luminis candelse et lunx: luminis folaris vis eft ad vim luminis candelae 16 pedes diftantis, obfervante D. Bonguer ut 11664 ad 1; et ad lumen lunae in pleni lunio, ut 3740003d 1 <'e- Voi.. III. 2 A 186- OF THE RETINA. tributed to a degree of continued insensibility in the nerve.— The attacks are irregular, and allied to the intermitting amau- rosis. It has been epidemic, and the following cases seem to ally it with the paralytic affections. CASE W OF NYCTALOPIA, OR NIGHT-BLINDNESS, BY DR. HEBERDEN. A man, about 30 years old, had, in the spring, a tertain fe- rer, for which he took too small a quantity of bark, so that the returns of it were weakened without being entirely removed ; he therefore went into the cold bath, and after bathing twice, he felt no more of his fever. Three days after his last fit, be- ing then employed on board of a ship, in the river, he observ- ed, at sun-setting, that all objects began to look blue, which blueness gradually thickened into a cloud, and not long after he became so blind as hardly to perceive the light of a candle. The next morning, about sun-rise, his sight was restored as perfectly as ever. When the next night came on, he lost his sight again in the same manner ; and this continued for 12 days and nights. He then came ashore, where the disorder of his eyes gradually abated, and in three days was entirely gone. A month after, he went on board of another ship, and after three days stay in it the night-blindness returned as before, and last- ed all the time of his remaining in the ship, which was nine nights. He then left the ship, and his blindness did not return while he was upon land. Some little time afterwards, he went into another ship, in which he continued ten days, during which time the blindness returned only two nights, and never afterwards. In the August following, he complained of loss of appetite, weakness, shortness of breath, and a cough ; he fell away very fast, had frequent shiverings, pains in his loins, dysury, and vomitings ; all which complaints increased upon him till the middle of November, when he died* He had formerly been employed in lead-works, and had twice lost the use of his hands, as is usual among the workers in this metah Medical Transactions, published by the College of Physicians in Lon- don, vol. i. p. 60. monftrante D. Euler Mem. de l'Acad. dc Berlin, an 1750, pag. 499. non mirum haque fi vis toties major fufficeret ad fuccutiendam retinam quam tanto minor aoV afficiebat. Sauvages Amblyopia Crepufcularis. OF THE RETINA. 187 CASE II. OF NYCTALOPIA, BY DR. SAMUEL PYE. Pye, servant to a miller, at the 6th mill, on the Lime-house wall, about 40 years of age, came to me October 2d, 1754, for advice and assistance. He told me, that about two months ago, while he was employed in mending some sacks, near the setting of the sun, he was suddenly deprived of the use of his limbs and of his sight. At the time he was attacked with this extraordinary disease, he was not only free from any pain in his head or his limbs, but, on the contrary, had a sensation of ease and pleasure ; he was, as he expressed himself, as if in a pleasing dose ; but perfectly sensible. He was immediately carried to bed, and watched till midnight ; at which time he desired those who attended him, to leave him, because he was neither sick nor in pain. He continued the whole night totally blind and without a wink of sleep. When the day-light of the next morning appeared, his sight returned to him gradually as the light of the sun increased, till it became as perfect as ever ; when he rose from bed, his limbs were restored to their usual strength and usefulness, and him- self in perfect health. But on the evening of the same day, about the setting of the sun, he began to see but obscurely, and his sight gradually de- parted from him, and he became as blind as on the preceding night; though his limbs continued as well as in perfect health ; nor had he, from the first night, any complaint from that quarter. The next day, with the rising sun, his sight returned; and this has been the almost constant course of his disease for two months past. From the second night, the symptoms preced- ing the darkness were a slight pain over the eyes, and a noise m his head, which he compared to a squashing of water in his. ears. After near two months continuance of the disease, on Sep- tember the 29th, the patient was able to see all night; on the 30th September, October 1 and 2, he was again blind all night; on the 3d, he was able to see ; on the 4th, he was blind till 12 ; on the 5th was blind. From this he had no return of his complaint till June 1755 ; from which time till the 3d of October, when I again saw him, he had three or four attacks ; from the 3d till the 10th, he had an attack every evening___He had at this time a purging. I ordered him an electuary of bark and nutmeg, which succeeded in removing the blindness, hut the diarrhce.i continued wasting him. On the 20th, deliri- 188 OF THE RETINA. um came on ; on the 21st, he became deaf ; he died on tho 25th, after having suffered from fever, pain in his bowels, and continued diarrhoea ; but the defect in his eyes never returned after the 10th. This man had clear bright eyes : when his sight failed him the pupils were enlarged about one-third in diameter. Medical Facts and Inquiries, vol. i.p. 111. Boerhaave gives us an example of imperfect vision, from a discordance betwixt the contraction of the iris and the excite- ment of the retina ; so that the pupil did not dilate in propor- tion to the decay of light.* When inflammation extends within the eye, or when the re- tina is excited by sympathy with the ophthalmia of the outer membranes, it may happen that the patient is totally blind dur- ing the day, and yet sees on the approach of evening ; because, from the sensibility of the retina, the pupil is absolutely shut, but as the light is diminished the pupil is gradually relaxed, and the obscure light admitted, and this obscure light, from the irritable 6tate of the retina, gives a vivid sensation incompre- hensible to the by-standers. Our judgments ofthe strength of sensations are comparative merely ; when we have been ac- customed to strong impressions, lesser ones are disregarded. The greater light destroys the capacity of the retina for receiv- ing slighter and more delicate impressions ; while, on the other hand, the absence of light reserves to us the power of seeing objects the most faintly illuminated. We are every day be- coming more acquainted with the invisible properties of light; and we have frequent experience of darkness being relative, and that what we should call total darkness is very often but a fainter light. One man will see distinctly, when another is quite deprived of the power of discerning objects. A man in prison seems to have the light gradually admitted to him ; and many animals are in quick pursuit of their prey, while we are groping our way with the assistance of our other senses. Animals which seek their prey in a light which is darkness to us, have, most probably, a greater degree of sensibility of the retina. But they have also a more conspicuous apparatus in the largeness of their eyes, and the dilatability of their pu- pil, while the sensibility which this provision gives, is often guarded from the light of day by the membrana nictitans, and by an iris capable of great contraction. Their iris possesses also a great power of contraction in narrowing the pupil during the day, as it is capable of dilating during the night, to the • In old people there is an obfcurity of vifion, from a diminifhcd fenfibility of the retina; and the iris does not take a quick fueceffion of contraction and dilat> Xian with the ch ange of light. OF THE RETINA. 189 whole extent ofthe cornea. In the human eye, also, the strict sympathy between the iris and retina is a guard to the latter. But it has often happened that, in using optical instruments, the retina has been hurt by the intensity of the light from the concentrated rays : a lesser degree of this effect we have given Us in the following instance.* " Being occupied in making an exact meridian, in order to observe the transit of Venus, I rashly directed to the sun, by my right eye, the cross hairs of a small telescope. I had often done the like in my younger days with impunity ; but I suffer- ed by it at last, which I mention as a warning to others. I soon observed a remarkable dimness in that eye, and for many weeks, when I was in the dark, or shut my eyes, there appear- ed before the right eye a lucid spot, which trembled much like the image of the sun seen by reflection from water. This ap- pearance grew fainter, and less frequent by degrees, so that now there are seldom any remains of it. But some other very sensible effects of this hurt still remain:—For, first, the sight of the right eye continues to be more dim than that ofthe left; secondly, the nearest limit of distinct vision is more remote in the right eye than in the other, although, before the time men- tioned, they were equal in both these respects, as I had found by many trials ; but, thirdly, what I chiefly intend to mention is, that a straight line, in some circumstances, appears to the right eye to have a curvature in it. Thus, when I look upon a music book, and, shutting my leflt eye, direct the right to a point of the middle line of the five which compose the staff of music, the middle line appears dim indeed at the point to which the eye is directed, but straight; at the same time the two lines above it and the two below it appear to be bent outwards, and to be more distinct from each other, and from the middle line than at other parts of the staff to which the eye is not directed. Fourthly, although I have repeated this experiment times in- numerable within these 16 months, I do not find that custom and experience take away this appearance of curvature in straight lines. Lastly, this appearance of curvature is percep- tible when I look with the right eye only, but not when I look with both eyes ; yet I see better with both eyes together than even with the left eye alone." Herschel, in making his observations on the sun, found the irritation proceeding from the red rays (being those ofthe rays of light which have the propel ty of producing heat in the great- est degree ;) he found, when he used red glass to intercept the too vivid impression of light on his eyes, that thev stopped the ■ Viz. by Dr. Rcid. 190 OF THE MEMBRANA PTJPILLARIS. light, but produced an insufferable irritation from the degree of heat. But when he used green glass, it transmitted more light, and remedied the former inconvenience of an irritation arising from heat. He concluded, that in the darkening glasses for telescopes, the red light ofthe sun should be entirely intercepted. Boerhaave mentions an instance of the retina being injured by the long use ofthe telescope, and he himself was hurt by a similar cause. These injuries are owing to the intrusion of light highly concentrated, and over which the pu- pil has no command ; it is a degree of intensity which the or- gan is not prepared to counteract. >*:* CHAP. VI. OF THE MEMBRANA PUPILLARIS. J. HE membrana pupillaris is an extremely vascular mem- brane, which is extended across the pupil of the foetus. It was discovered by Haller, Albinus, Wachendorf,* and Dr. William Hunter, at the same time or without correspondence with each other. Haller,! after injecting, with oil of turpen- tine and cinnabar, a foetus of the seventh month, saw through the cornea the vessels ofthe iris injected, and some ramifica- tions from them produced into the space ofthe pupil. From conviction that no vessels ramified without an involving mem- brane, he naturally concluded, that a membrane was drawn across the pupil of the foetus, though, in this instance, it was about to disappear. In several other foetuses of the seventh month he confirmed his first observation ; and, cutting off the cornea, he observed the membrane impelled forward by the humours behind like a little vesicle. Albinus, in his first book of Academical Annotations, thus describes the way in which he detected this membrane. In the same child in whom he had filled the vessels of the crystal- * In Commercio Norico, A. 1740, hebd. 18. as quoted by Haller. \ De nova tunica pupillam foetus claudente. Oper. minor. OF THE MEMBRANA PUPILLARIS. 191 line, he also first observed the membrane which closes the pupil, and in which the vessels were injected that came from the margin of the pupil. Upon looking through the cornea, he could see no distinction of parts, but all seemed vascularit)'. He conceived, at first, that these were the vessels of the uvea, and that it had quite contracted and had shut the pupil; then that they were the vessels of the capsule of the crystalline lens ; but having cut into the eye, he found it to be this mem- brane. Dr. Hunter, speaking of this membrane, and of Albinus's claim to the discovery, says, " In justice to this great anatomist, I must declare that I believe this, both be- cause he asserts it and because I know from the circumstances it was hardly possible he could miss taking notice of it in that child." " I have always observed (he continues,) both in the human body and in the quadruped, that there is a great resem- blance to one another in the vessels of the capsula cristallini and of the membrana pupillse. In an injected foetus, I always find both nearly in the same state : if one be filled only with the blood that is drove before the injection, so is the other; if one be filled partly with injection, and partly with blood, the other is in the same condition ; if one, by good fortune, be finely and minutely filled by injection, the other is so too ; if one be burst by extravasations, the other is commonly in the same state ; and when the foetus is so near its full time that the one cannot be injected, neither can the other."* Dr. Hunter, speaking further ofthe artery ofthe crystalline capsule, says, " that it does not terminate at the great circle of that humour. Its small branches pass that circle, and run a very little way on the anterior surface of the crystalline hu- mour before the points of the ciliary processes ; then they leave the humour and run forwards, supported on a very deli- cate membrane, to lose themselves in the membrana pupilla." He continues : " The membrana pupillae receives two different sets of arteries, one larger, from the iris, and the other much smaller, but very numerous from the crystalline capsula." Now I think that every expression in these excerpts confirms the opinion I entertain, that these vessels which are seen filled with red blood, and which take their course through the humours, are subservient merely to the membrana pupillaris. The first time I observed the membrana pupillaris was in the eye of a child born at the full time. I had injected the child very minutely with size and vermilion, and the iris was beau- tifully red and the pupil quite transparent and black, and not obscured by any extravasation ofthe injection into the aqueous * See Medical Commentaries, p. 63. foot note* 192 OF THE MEMBRANA PUPILLARIS. humour: upon very narrowly observing the circle of the iris^ I saw distinctly a small injected vessel pass out from the edge of the iris, and crossing the pupil, divide into two branches which ran into the opposite margin of the iris. This was the remains of the membrane, but so delicate and so perfectly transparent, that the presence of it was only to be argued from the vessel which was seen to cross the pupil. Since that time I have often seen it in the early months, and particularly strong about the seventh month of the foetus. It is then an opaque, and very vascular membrane, and generally it has spots and streaks of extravasation in it. The vascular structure of this membrane is very particular, and I can assign no other reason for this than that it may be a provision for its rapid absorption. It has evidently two sources of vessels, viz. the vessels of the capsules and those of the iris ; but whether the arteries come by the one source, and the veins depart by the other, I cannot as yet determine. In one pre- paration I see the vessels with their trunk in the membrana pupillaris, and the branches sent over the surface of the iris. The larger and flat venous-like vessels ofthe membrane are distributed in a beautiful net-work, in the form ofthe lozenge of a Gothic window. They have a free communication with each other. In their whole course the vessels seem nearly of the same size, (which also is like the character of a venous net-work,) and they terminate apparently in the margin ofthe iris. The use of the membrana pupillaris I think sufficiently ap- parent, though I do not find that it has hitherto been under- stood. Haller makes a comparison betwixt this membrane, which closes up the pupil, and that matter which is accumulated in the passage ofthe ear in the foetus. But there is no analogy. As the waters of the amnios might otherwise be in contact with the membrane of the drum of the ear, and injure what necessarily is of a dry and arid nature, to adapt it for receiv- ing the vibrations of the air, this matter accumulated in the ear ofthe foetus defends it. But at the time, when the mem- brana pupillaris exists in its full strength and vascularity, no light is admitted into the eye—the foetus is lying in its mother's womb. Towards the ninth month, the membrane has become transparent, and if not totally absorbed, it is torn by the first motion of the pupil and altogether disappears. It can there- fore have no effect in obscuring the light, and preventing it from exciting in too great a degree the eye of the newly-born child. To explain the effect of this membrane, then, we have only to consider that it is of the nature of the iris to con- tract its circular fibres during the operation of light, so as to OF THE HUMOURS OF THE EYE. 193 close or nearly close the pupil; that, on the other hand, the pupil is completely dilated through the operation of the radi- cated fibres of the iris in darkness :—To the question, then, why it is not dilated during the foetal state ? The answer, I think, is decidedly this :—The iris is not loose in the foetal state, it is connected and stretched to the middle degree of contraction and dilatation by the membrana pupillaris. Were the iris in a full state of contraction, during the life of the foetus, it could not receive its full nourishment, proper degree of extension, and due powers ; but being preserved stationary and extended, the disposition to contraction, which it must have when the retina is without excitement, is counteracted, until it is about to receive, by the birth of the child, that de- gree of excitement which is to keep up the preponderance to- wards the contracted state of the pupil. * CHAP. VII. OF THE HUMOURS OF THE EYE. OF THE AQUEOUS HUMOUR. JL HE aqueous humour is perfectly limpid. It has no capsule or surrounding membrane, as it is not in consistence allied to the other humours, but is fluid.* The use which I have as- signed to the aqueous humour explains its nature and the ex- tent ofthe chamber wliich contains it, viz. that it distends the cornea and allows the free motion of the iris ; it consequently fills the space between the lens and cornea. The usual descrip- tion is, that it is lodged in two chambers; the one before the iris, called the anterior chamber of the aqueous humour, and the other behind the iris, called the posterior chamber of the aqueous humour. • It poflefles, however, a degree of vifcidity. 'Winflov Vol. III. 2 B 194. OF 1HE HUMOURS OF THE EYE* This posterior chamber was, at one time, conceived to be oi great extent,* and authors spoke of depressing the lens into the posterior chamber of the aqueous humour.! It is found* now, that betwixt the lens and iris there is no space to which we ought to give this name of chamber. Heister, Morgagni, and M. Petit (medecin) first demon- strated the extreme smallness of the posterior chamber, and after them Winslow confirmed the fact, that the iris moved almost in contact with the anterior surface of the lens. M. Petit gave the clearest proof of the smallness of the posterior chamber, by freezing all the humours of the eye, and dissecting them in their solid state. Without this expe- dient it was impossible to prove the relative size of the two chambers ; for, whenever the cornea was cut, the aqueous fluid escaped, and the lens pushed forward. When the eye was frozen, and then dissected, it was found that the ice, which took the shape and dimensions ofthe anterior chamber, was much larger than that found in the posterior chamber ;! in- deed the latter was formed of a very thin flake of ice. The thin piece of ice in the posterior chamber indicated as much fluid only betwixt the iris and lens as might allow a free mo- tion to the iris. These experiments were instituted in the course of investigating the question of the nature of the cataract* The conclusion, that the posterior chamber of the aqueous humour contained but one-fourth of the whole aqueous hu- mour, was admitted with great difficulty and after much con- test. It determined the question, whether the cataract was a membrane or the opaque lens ; for, as those who maintained that it was a membrane, said it could not be the lens, because the lens was far distant from the iris, it was necessary for their opponents to prove that the lens was close upon the pupil, and that the posterior chamber of the aqueous humour was very small. It is agreed that, in the adult, the quantity of the aqueous humour amounts to five grains ; in the foetus it is red, turbid, and weighs about a grain and a half, owing, in part, to the comparatively greater thickness ofthe cornea. As it is natural to conceive that the aqueous humour flows from a vascular surface, it is the most generally received opinion, that it is derived from the points of the ciliary pro- • Viz. by Heifter. They were called the firft and fecond chambers by M Briffeau. f There certainly appears fufficient room for this in Vefelius and Briggs' plate* thefe plates have mifled many. t See Acad. Roy. des Sciences, 1723. Mens. p. 38. OF THE HUMOURS OF THE EYE. 195 cesses and surface ofthe iris. Haller, particularly, and after him Zinn, have thought that the ciliary processes were the secreting bodies ; but there is one argument which, in my mind, determines that these are not the sole secreting parts, viz. that while the membrana pupillaris closes up the commu- nication betwixt the two chambers, I have observed the an- terior one to be full ofthe fluid, which of course must have been supplied from another source than the ciliary processes. I suppose, therefore, that the villous surface of the iris is the proper secreting surface of the aqueous humour.* Zinn ob- serves, that Haller saw the membrana pupillaris distended and bulged forwards by the aqueous humour in the posterior cham- ber. It is scarcely necessary to say, that this must always take place when the cornea is first opened in demonstrating that membrane, whether there be a watery fluid behind it or not. But I believe I shall be able to prove, that the secretion of the ciliary processes can have little power of filling the posterior chamb"', even from the connexion of membranes behind the membrana pupillaris in the foetus. The aqueous fluid is per- petually undergoing the change of secretion and absorption, and this is the reason of its quick renewal when it has been allowed to escape by puncture of the cornea. The ancients were not ignorant of the quick regeneration of this fluid. It was proved to the moderns by a charlatan, Josephus Burrhus (ventosus homo, qui in carcere Romano periit.) Before the physicians of Amsterdam he punctured the cornea of a dog ; then instilling his liquor under the cornea, he bound up the eye ; in a few days he took off the bandage, and showed them the cornea again distended with the aqueous humour. It was soon found that the instilled fluid was of no kind of conse- quence. Redi and Nuck made many experiments, and it was found that the aqueous humour was regenerated in the course of 24 hours. When the disputes regarding the cataract ran high, and when, to make new distinctions in the disease was taken as a mark of practical knowledge and of acuteness, there was a kind of cataract attributed to the aqueous humour. When the aqueous humour became turbid, white, and opaque, and obscured the pupil, they were absurd enough to call this a • The opinion of Nuck is now out of the queflion. He thought that he had difcovered particular aqueducts, which conveyed the aqueous humour into the anterior part of the eye ; but thefe are found to be nothing more than the fhort ciliary arteries which pierce the fore part of the fderotic3. M. Merry and Bon- homme, (fee Zinn, p. 143) obferved, in an adult, the pupil clofed with a membrane, and, in this inftance, there was fcarcely any fluid in the anterior cham? her, whilft the pofterior was turgid with fluid. 196 OF THE HUMOURS OF THE EYE. cataract. The turbid state of the aqueous humour is at once distinguishable from the opaque lens, because it obscures the iris as well as the pupil. Pus is formed in the chambers of the aqueous humour, in consequence of deep inflammation, contusions, &c. and from the same cause, sometimes, proceeds a bloody effusion. When the pus has lodged in the anterior chamber of the aqueous hu- mour, it would appear, upon the authority of Galen, that an oculist of his day performed a cure by shaking the patient's head !* It is an operation of oculists to puncture and allow the pus to flow out, and some have even syringed out the pus with water ;! but this must have been on the principles of Joseph Burrhus's exhibition ; for the natural secretion is here the best diluent. When we recollect the nature of the parts with which the pus lies in contact, we cannot be sanguine in the hope of such an operation saving the eye. Sometimes there remains, after operation on the cornea, or in consequence of ulceration, a continued flow of the aqueous humour ; the con- sequence is a subsiding ofthe cornea :! it becomes corrugated, opaque, and, from the contact of the iris, apt to adhere to the iris. In consequence of this suppuration, there sometimes follows an absolute obstruction ofthe pupil, from the coalescing and adhesion of the edges of the iris.§ THE VITREOUS HUMOUR. The vitreous humour, as already explained, occupies almost entirely the great ball of the eye. It is consequently beyond the lens, and keeps it at the requisite distance, to cause the rays from objects to concentrate and impinge upon the retina. The vitreous humour is considerably denser than the aqueous humour ;|| but its peculiar appearance, its glairy-like consist- ence, is not owing to its density, but to the manner in which it is contained in its membranes. From being contained in a cellular structure of perfectly pellucid membranes, it has the adhesion and consistence ofthe white of an egg. This mem- * Mouchart fays, he has often feen the oculift Woolhoufe repeat this cure by {baking his patient's head over the fide of the bed. He attributed the cure to the falling of the pus into the pofterior chamber, which, he fupposes, has parts more capable of abforbing it. f They were at variance regarding the place at which to puncture for this dif- charge :—Some did it behind the iris ; there we know there is a crowd of veffels; the beft place is the lower edge ef the cornea before the iris. It feems to have been no uncommon accident, in this operation, to find the lens protruded through the pupil. The reafon of this has been already explained. | Rhytidofis, feu fubfidentia & corrugatio corneae. § Viz. Synifefis. There has occurred congenital impcrforation ofthe pupil. j| It is, according to Dr. rVTonro, in the proportion of as i;ruli;:^'. - fiaure. 214 DISTANCE OF OBJECTS. Supposing that these are muscular fibres, from their close- ness and direction, thev would stand acknowledged as forming the strongest and most powerful muscle of its size in the whole body ; yet thev act only on themselves, which requires the least possible degree of power. Again, how are they relaxed ? What power is their antagonist ? Mr. Young demonstrates not only the muscular fibres, but the tendons of the lens ;* us if it were not evident that the lens acted merely on itself, which could require no concentrating of its fibres into tendons ; for tendons are found in other parts of the body only where it is necessarv to concentrate the whole power ofthe muscles so as to operate on one point. We learn from Mr. Home,f that Mr. John Hunter had proved the lens to be laminated, and those lamina? to be com- posed of fibres ; and, upon the same authority, we learn that his opinion was in favour ofthe muscularity of its structure.— Mr. Home wished to follow out this subject, by including it in the Croonian Lecture. Mr. Home found, with the assistance of Mr. Ramsden, that a patient, after the extraction of the cat- aract, still retained the power of adapting the eye to the dis- tances of objects. Indeed, we must be well aware that if a patient, after couching and extracting the lens, could only see at one given distance, an effect so very particular must have been long since observed. This was a conviction to Mr. Home and Mr. Ramsden, that the investigation was to be no further pursued in this tract, and they turned their attention, therefore, to the cornea. Mr. Ramsden contrived an apparatus which, if the gentle- men engaged in the experiments have not deceived themselves, must put this question at rest. By Mr. Ramsden's ingenious contrivance, the head was fixed accurately, and at the same time a microscope was adapted to observe the changes in the convexity ofthe cornea as the eye was directed alternately to near and to distant objects. In these experiments, the motion of the cornea became distinct, its surface remained in a line with a wire which crossed the glass ofthe microscope when the eye was adjusted to the distant objects, but projected conside- rably beyond it when adapted to the near ones, and the space through which it moved was so great as readily to be measured by magnifying the divisions on the scale, and comparing them. In this way, it was estimated that it moved the 800rh part of an inch (a space distinctly seen in a microscope magnifying 30 times,) in the change from the nearest point of distinct vision to the distance of 90 feet. • See Philof. Trans. f Ibid. DISTANCE OF OBJECT3. 215 In the evidence from anatomical structure, I cannot think Mr. Home so happy. He was desirous of determining, more accurately than had hitherto been done, the precise insertion of the tendons of the four straight muscles, so as to know whether their action could be extended to the cornea or not: he found them to approach within one-eighth of the cornea be- fore their tendons became attached to the sclerotic coat. But he did not stop here—he stripped off with them the anterior lamina of the cornea. Now, as it is supposed, in these experi- ments, that the action of the recti muscles upon the sides and back part ofthe ball compresses the humours, and makes them flow forward so as to distend the cornea ; if the extremities of the tendons be inserted into the edge ofthe cornea and even pass over it, as Mr. Home has demonstrated, their effect would be to flatten the cornea, by drawing out and extending its mar- gin. This is a circumstance which Dr. Monro has remark- ed ; and Dr. Monro has also, with more accuracy of observa- tion, found "all the tendinous fibres ofthe recti muscles firmly attached to the sclerotic coat at the distance of a quarter of an inch from the cornea, and no appearance that any part of them, or that any membrane produced by them, is continued over the cornea." Amongst the variety of opinions, the innumerable ingenious but contradictory experiments for discovering the manner in which the eye adapts itself to the distance of objects, I am, for my own part, much at a loss to determine which I should pre- fer. I have often doubted, whether these experiments were not in search ofthe explanation of an effect which has no ex- istence. I have never been able to determine, why a very slight degree of convexity in the cornea of a short-sighted eye should be so permanent during a whole life-time, notwithstand- ing the perfect elasticity ofthe cornea, and its being so adapt- ed as to alter its convexity by the action of the muscles.— Again, a near-sighted person, with the assistance of a concave glass, can command the objects to the distance of some miles, and with the glass still held to his eyes, cau see minute objects within three inches ofthe eye. Now, I cannot conceive how the concave glass should give so great a range to the sight: as there can be no change in the glass, it must be the eye which adapts itself to the variety of distances ; yet, without the glass, it cannot command the perfect vision of objects for a few feet. Again, a short-sighted person sees an object distinctly at three inches distant from his eye; at 12 feet, less distinctly: and when he looks upon the object at 12 feet, the objects beyond it are confused, just as in other men's eyes ; but when he directs his attention to the more remote objects, those nearer become 216 DISTANCE OF OBJECTS. indistinct. Now this indistinctness of the object, seen when he examines narrowly the objects beyond them, would argue, (did we admit this muscular power in the eye of adapting itself to objects,) that the cornea or the lens has become less convex, were we not previously convinced that the utmost powers of the eye could not bring the object at the distance of 12 feet, or any other intermediate distance, to be more distinctly seen than the fixed and permanent constitution ofthe eye admits. I cannot help concluding, therefore, that the mechanism of the eye has not so great a power of adapting the eye to various distances as is generally imagined, and that much ofthe effect attributed to mechanical power is the consequence of attention merely. An object looked upon, if not attended to, conveys no sensation to the mind. If one eye is weaker than the other, the object of the stronger eye alone is attended to, and the other is entirely neglected : if we look through a glass with one eye, the vision with the other is not attended to. Now objects, as they recede from us, become fainter and fainter in their co- lours, and the general effect upon the eye is different from those which are near; and as it happens that the mind must associate with the sensation before it be perfect, there is, conse- quently, an obscurity thrown over distant objects when we con- template near ones ; as, on the other hand, the images of near ones are not attended to when the mind is occupied with dis- tant ones, although they be nearly in the line with the distant object examined. I conceive it to be a good deal like that command of the attention which we can exercise upon very small bodies near us: of two small grains lying on the table, we can examine the one and neglect the other ; though, if we at- tend to both, we can take them into the sphere of perfect vi- sion ; or, in other words, though they both have their images on the more sensible part of the retina. We can attend to one letter of a word, to the whole word, or to the page of a book. I cannot altogether deny the mechanical power of the eye in adapting it to the distance of objects, but I think this operation of attention has been too much overlooked. ( «ir ) CHAP. XII. OF SEEING IN GENERAL* J. HE eye is certainly the noblest ofthe organs of sense. It is that with which we should part the most unwillingly, and of which, when deprived, we are most helpless. A celebrated philosopher says, how much more noble is that faculty by which we can find our way in the pathless ocean, traverse the globe, determine its figure and dimensions, delineate every region of it; by which we can measure the planetary orbs, and make discoveries in the sphere ofthe fixed stars ! Again, how admi- rable is that organ by which we can perceive the temper and dispositions, the passions and affections of our fellow creatures; and, when the tongue is taught most artfully to lie and dissem- ble, the hypocrisy is discovered in the countenance ! we often are able to detect what is crooked in the mind as well as in the body ! Yet, notwithstanding the perfection of the sense of see- ing, much of this perfection is gained by the other senses, and particularly by that of touch. If the human body were mo- tionless and inert, the sensation conveyed by the eye would be very imperfect; we should be able to conceive neither the dis- tance nor the figure of objects. But, as it is the distance of the object, joined with its visible magnitude, is the*sign of its real magnitude ; and the distance of the several parts of an object, joined with its visible figure, becomes a sign of its real figure. Without this combination of the original sensation with the ac- quired perception, we should see form and colour without having any idea of its distance, or ofthe convexity of an ob- ject ; we should have no measure of its length, or breadth, or distance. Upon other occasions, we are apt enough to acknowledge the powers of association. - But the connection of ideas is in no instance more constant and secret than in the ideas conveyed by sight and touch. When a solid body is presented to view, we see only the light and shade ; but this raises in our mind the associated ideas from the sense of touch, viz. solidity, convexity, and angularity, " the visible idea exciting in us those tangeable ideas," which, in the free and promiscuous exercise of our senses, usually accompany it. It is thus that Vol. III. 2 E 218 OF SEEING IN GENERAL. we attribute to the sense of sight what is the act ofthe memory and judgment.* We have seen that the picture of an object is formed in the bottom of the eye. It was formerly sufficient to say, that the mind contemplates this image. We should say now, that this image is conveyed into the sensorium by the optic nerve. This is an hypothesis merely ; and we have no more consciousness ofthe object being in the brain or sensorium than in any other part of the body: we may rather say, that the impression made on the organ, nerves, and brain, is followed by sensa- tion, and that the intelligence is the joint operation of the whole.-f Lastly, the metaphysician calls our sensations the signs of external objects ; because the object itself is not pre- sented to the mind, nor is there an actual resemblance betwixt the object and the sensation of it, but merely a connection established by nature, as certain features are natural signs of anger ; or by art, as articulate sounds are the signs of our thoughts and purposes. We are now naturally led to the consideration of some points, the full comprehension of which, requires the know- ledge, both of anatomy and of the principles of optics. PARALLEL MOTION OF THE EYES. The axis of the eye is a line drawn through the middle of the pupil and of the crystalline lens, and which consequently falls upon the middle of the retina ; and the axes of both eyes produced, are called the optic axes. But the axes ofthe eyes, it is evident, are not always parallel; for when both eyes are directed to a near object, the axes ofthe eyes meet in that ob- ject ; but when we direct the eyes to the objects in the heavens, they may be considered as perfectly parallel in their axes, though perhaps not then mathematically so. To an observer, the eyes seem always moving in parallel directions ; but nature has given us the power of varying them so, that we can direct them to the same point, whether remote or near. This, how- * See Dr. Jurin of Mr. Molyneux's problem, Smith's Append, p. 27. | Euclid, and others of the ancients, contended that vifion was occafioned by the emiffion of rays from the eye to the object. He thought it more natural to fuppofe, that an animate fubftance gave out an emanation, than that the inanimate body did. In 1560, the opinion was confirmed that the rays entered the eye.— The fenfation was not always believed to be in the retina : It was by fome be- lieved that part of the fenfation was to be attributed to the cryftalhne. Kepler, in 1600, fhewed, geometrically how the rays were refracted through all the ru- mours of the eye, fo as to form a diflinct picture on the retina ; and alfo he fhowed the effect of glaffes on the eyes See further, regarding the opinions of the ancients, Boerhaave Prelect. Acad. torn. iv. p. 282. OF SEEING IN GENERAL. 219 ever, is in some measure learnt by custom, and lost by disuse. A child has much difficulty in altering the distance of its eyes, which is the occasion of the vacancy of its stare : and again, we observe that a patient who has long lost one eye, is inca- pable of directing the axis of the blind eye without looking with the other, and even then, the blind organ does not follow the other with that perfect accuracy which exercise gives when both eyes are sound. By much practice and straining, the axis of the eyes may be much further altered from the natural parallelism, which wags and boys often do, so as to distort the eyes, and give a droll obliquity to the countenance. Still, custom alters the direction of the axes of the eyes but a very little ; for the natural constitution of the eye does not allow the child to turn his eyes in every different direption from each other. There is, on the contrary, as we have seen, a par- ticular sensible spot in the retina, which makes it necessary to distinct vision, that this spot shall receive the concentrating- rays of light; and the natural constitution of both eyes, is, that this spot in each eye shall have such a relation to that of the other, that the axes of both should be accurately'in the mid^ die ofthe eye-ball in order to produce single vision. By voluntary squinting or depressing one of the eyes with the finger, objects appear double, because the optic axis is changed in the distorted or depressed eye, and the picture is no longer painted on corresponding points of both. This simple experiment leads us to consider what is the constitution and correspondence of the eyes, that, when each has the picture ofthe object impressed upon it, we should only see it single if the eyes are sound and perfect* For example, the object A. in fig. 16., is exactly in the centre of the .t\( s of both eves ; consequently, it is distinctly seen ; 220 OF SEEING IN GENERAL. and it appears single, because the rays from it strike upon the points of the retina opposite to the pupils in both eyes. Those points have a correspondence; and the object, instead of ap- pearing double, is only strengthened, in the liveliness of the image. Again, the object B will be seen fainter, but single, and correct in every respect. It will appear fainter, because there is only one spot in each eye which possesses the degree of Sensibility necessary to perfect vision : and it will appear -single, the rays proceeding from it having exactly the same re- lation to the centre of the retina in both eyes. Though they do not fall on the centre of the retina, they fall on the same side of the centre in both eyes. But if the eyes are made to fix steadfastly on an object, and if another object should be placed before the eyes within the angle which the axes of the two eyes make with the first object, it will be seen double, be- cause the points of the retina struck by the rays proceeding from the nearer object do not correspond in their relation to the central point of the retina. Thus, the eyes B b, fig. 17., having their axes directed to a, will see the object c double somewhere near the outline D D. Because the line of the direction of the rays from that body c, do not strike the retina in the same relation to the axis a b in both eyes. Upon this principle, we may easily explain why objects, which are much nearer the eyes, or much more distant from them than that to which the two eyes are directed, appear double.. Thus, if a candle is placed at the distance of ten feet, and I hold my finger at arm's length between my eyes and the candle, when I look at the candle, I see my finger double, and when I look at my finger, I see the candle double. This double yision occurs to us all frequently ; but, unless we make the experiment pur- posely, we do not attend to it. Many other instances of the harmony, and of the want of it in the eyes, particularly the reverse of what these diagrams shew, may be easily produced, viz. the seeing two objects single : for, if we look at a half- penny and a shilling, placed each at the extremity of two Mibes, one exactly in the axis of one eye, and the other in the axis of the other eye, we shall see but one piece of coin, and of a colour neither like the shilling nor like the half-penny, but intermediate, as if the one were spread over the other. This relation and sympathy between the corresponding points of the two eyes, is, therefore, to be considered as a ge- neral fact, viz. that pictures of objects falling upon corres- ponding points of the two retinas, present the same appear- ance to the mind as if they had both fallen upon the same point of one retina; and pictures upon points ofthe two retinas which do not correspond, and which proceed from one OF SEEING IN GENERAL. 221 object, present to the mind the same apparent distance and position of two objects, as if one of those pictures were carried to the point corresponding with it in the other retina. Several animals, we see, direct their eyes by very different laws from those which govern the motion of ours : but we are not to reason upon their sensations by the laws of vision of the human eyes ; we must take it as a principle, that nature has been bountiful to them also ; and that the result of organiza- tion in their eyes is perfect vision. In birds, (if we except the owl,) the eyes diverge, and are directed to opposite sides. As the owl seeks his prey in the night, it may be necessary to the distinctness of his vision in weak light, that both eyes be directed to the object. Most fishes have their eyes directed laterally, though there are ex- ceptions ; as those fishes which are flat, and swim at the bot- tom, have their eyes directed upward. In many insects, the surface of the eye has no resemblance to the cornea of vivipa- rous animals ; but when examined with the microscope, it is seen to consist of a number of tubercles, each of which is as a distinct eye. In others, the eye is removed to the extremity of the moveable tenaculx. Very large animals, as the whale, ele- phant, rhinoceros, hippopotamos, have, in proportion to their bodies, very small eyes : so have the animals which live much under ground; and, in general, a large eye is a sign of the ani- mal being able to see in obscure light, because there is propor- tionably a greater number of rays admitted into the eye. For the same reason, fishes have a peculiarly large eye and dilata- ble pupil, because the water is a more obscure medium, and, from the occasional roughness of its surface, much darkened and variable. We must conclude, that in these varieties ofthe eyes, where there is a difference in number, position, and natural motion, there are different laws of vision adapted to these peculiarities and the exigencies of the animals. If we are to judge from analogy, we may suppose, that in many animals, there is no correspondence between points of the two retinas, or it is of a different kind from ours. In those which have immoveable eyes, the centre ofthe two retinas will not correspond so as to give the idea of one object, but of distinct objects, and in their respective places. In other animals, corresponding points would give false appearances ; and in such as turn their eyes in all directions, independently of each other, they would seem to possess a perception of the direction in which they move them, as we have ofthe motion of our arms. 222 OF SEEING IN GENERAL. SQUINTING. We have seen, that there is a point in both retinas more acutely sensible to the impression of light and the image of objects, than any other part of all its concave surface. In a sound eye, this point is immediately opposite to the pupil.— There is a coincidence betwixt this point and the axis of the eye ; and when we look to an object, its image strikes this point ofthe retina : but if it should happen that this sensible point of the retina should be changed, and not be exactly opposite to the pupil when the axis ofthe eye is in the line with the object, there will be an effort of the muscles moving the eye-ball to turn, so that the rays proceeding from the object shall strike upon the more sensible spot of the nerve.* Again, if the great- er sensibility of the nerve should lie in its proper place, and a remote cause should occasion such an action of the muscles and distortion of the eye as we see in a squint, then the image will be double ; for it no longer falls on corresponding points of the retina of each eye, and separate images are conveyed to the brain. If, however, this distortion continues, the single vision is gradually restored. Is there, then, in this case pro- duced a new correspondence betwixt points of the retina which were before discordant ? We find that this is not the case, bv a very simple experiment.—In a person who squints, one of the eyes is directed to the object and the other .appears to be turn- ed from it: if the sound eye be shut, and the person be direct- ed to look to an object with the other, it is directed to it with the proper and natural axis. Now this shows us that the sen- sibility of the proper spot in the bottom of the eye is not lost.— We must explain the single vision in eyes, one of which is dis- torted from its natural axis, upon another principle. Most people who squint, have a defect in one eye, and this is the distorted eye, while the other is directed in the true axis to the object. Now the mind does not attend easily to two impressions, the one being weaker than the other: in a short time the weaker impression is entirely neglected, and the stronger only is perceived.—So in squinting, the impression on the weak eye in a short time ceases to be attended to, the strong and vivid impression is alone perceived, and single vi- sion is the consequence. It is evident, then, that those who squint must have a degree of imperfection in the strength of * This was M. de la Hire's opinion.—He had an idea alfo that fquinting was produced by the obliquity of the object. Both of thefe opinions are refuted by Dr. Jurin. OF SEEING IN GENERAL. 223 the image ; for it is necessary to neglect the impression of one eve, to obtain distinct vision with the other ; the consequence of this is frequently an attempt still further to distort the eye, and turn it so far inward or under the upper eye-lid that no diftdnct impression can be received upon it: at all events, they p;.ceive the object only with one eye, although they may be said to see it with both ; the perception being the combined operation of the organ and ofthe mind. If the sensation of one eye be weak, it is very liable to be neglected altogether, and that eye is apt to wander from the true axis ; and if the person be careless, or given to distort his eyes in childishness, a permanent squint may be given to the eyes. Another cause of squinting, in children, is the being so laid in their cradle, that the light strikes obliquely into one ofthe eyes, whilst the other cannot see it; by which means one of the eyes only comes by degrees to be directed to the light while the sensation of the other is disregarded. What is very ex- traordinary in squinting, is the correspondence in the muscles of the eye, notwithstanding the great distortion of the eye-ball; for, when both eves are open, as the sound eye turns in all va- riety of directions to the surrounding objects, the other eye still follows it, but preserves its distance, so as in a manner to avoid all interference. Blows on the head, drinking and smoak- ing, and a variety of irritations, occasioning convulsions and distortion of the eyes, cause double vision. As this is evi- dently produced by the affection of the muscles moving the eye-ball,* since any change upon the retina could not give oc- casion to such distortions in a state of insensibility, we may naturally conclude, that squinting is sometimes the conse- quence of irregular action of the muscles ; for if those tran- sient causes are apt to affect them, so will they be apt to be permanently affected.f • The command of the voluntary mufcles is firft loft in intoxication ; and, there- fore, it is more likely that the mufcles fhould lofe their natural action and corref- pondcnce than the retina. f In Smith's Optics, there is a cafe of fquinting and double vifion occafionedby a blow. In Buffon's Diffcrtation, in the Acad. Roy. des Sc. 1743, fquinting after long continued pain ofthe head. In the Mrm Roy. de l'Acad. des Sc. 1718, Hift. p. 29, there is a curious inftance of falfe vifion. I find alfo quoted feveral cafes of ftrabifmus from fudden fright, in E/h-m. Germ, cent 3 Is? 4. obf. 152. p. 349. Ib. dec. 3. an. 8 & 11. ob. 57. p. 114 Ib. dec. 3. an. 9 & 10. obf. 67. " Novi Juven. em paralyfi obnoxium, cui cum caeteris oculi finiftri mufcuhs relaxatis, adducens for- tius contraheretur propter oculum ita diitortum objectum quodcunque duplex ap- parent, nee quod verum effet diftinguere potcft " Willis de anima Brut. P. Pby- fiol. p. 77. An inftance of the lols of corufponding motions of the eyes, and ftrange illufions of fight. See in the Inquiry into the nature of mental derange. ment by Dr. Crichton, vol. i. p. 14-. 224 OF SEEING IN GENERAL. We can distort our eyes by an unnatural effort, but we can- not squint: that is to say, we can bring our eyes into such a forced situation that we cannot see any thing distinctly ; but we cannot keep one eye distinctly upon an object and turn the other from it.—Such a position ofthe eyes, at least (and which is exactly that of those who squint unintentionally,) I cannot, by any means, accomplish.* This shows the strict correspon- dence betwixt the moving muscles of the eye-balls. By this experiment, we shall find the difficulty of that method of cor- recting the squint proposed by Dr. Jurin, or of commanding motions of the eyes different from those which have been be- stowed by nature, or acquired by habit. But habit I believe to be much more seldom the origin of squinting than is gene- rally supposed. It is said, by Dr. Reid and others, that we see young people, in their frolics, learn to squint, making their eyes either converge or diverge when they will to a very con- siderable degree : why should it be more difficult for a squin- ting person to learn to look straight when he pleases ? The rea- son of the greater difficulty is obvious, that in making the eyes converge or diverge, the will is acting upon both eyes equally ; but to distort one eye inward or outward, and at the same time to keep the other fixed, is to me like an absolute impossibility. Most people, who squint, have a defect in the distorted eye, a weakness which they do not observe, from want of attention to the impressions upon that eye. It will be difficult to deter- mine whether this defect be an original fault, or the effect of the want of use : since, by tying up the sound eye, the weak one becomes gradually stronger, so that the person becomes able to read with it, much may be attributed to the neglect of impressions. It may be observed, that this neglect of the impressions, which are actually received, is not at all like that disuse, which is the consequence of no impression being received: for dark- ness increases the sensibility of the retina, while this dissipates and exhausts it. That squinting is not produced by the weak- ness of the impression received upon the nerve, would appear from the circumstance that opacity of the humours or the gutta serena do not occasion an alteration of the usual correspon- dence in the muscles moving the eye-balls. It is said, that in those who have lost the sight of one eye, the habit of directing it to the object they look at is lost, be- cause this habit is no longer of use to them.f This I have * It is faid that aftronomers, who are much ufed to attend only to the impreffions of one eye, are fometimes able to fquint at pleafwre. See Mr. Home Phil. Tranf. 1797. P- J7- + Dr. Reid. OF SEEING IN GENERAL* 225 never observed, nor should I think it apt to happen, unless the muscles of the eye had been injured from the same cause which destroyed the sight; at any rate, it is in a very imperfect de- gree, and not such as we should call a squint. In regard to the cure of squinting, it seems the most reason- able, in the first place, to endeavour to strengthen the weak eye by use, and by tying up the sound one. In this case, the distorted eye becomes properly directed to the object, and the strength ofthe impression is in some degree restored. When this has been persevered in for some time, and the person is allowed to look at any object with both eyes, the weak eye will perhaps be again distorted from the true axis ; but, probably, with a painful effort and double vision: which shows some progress in the recurrence of the two eyes, and their proper sympathy, and that the impression on the weak eye is at least attended to. After this, it will be time enough, by Dr. Jurin's method, to endeavour to correct the squint:—" place the child before you, and let him close the undistorted eye, and look at you with the other. When you find the axis of this eye fixed directly upon you, bid him endeavour to keep it in that situa- tion, and open his other eye. You will now immediately see the distorted eye turn away from you towards his nose, and the axis of the other will be pointed at you. But with pa- tience and repeated trials he will, by degrees, be able to keep his distorted eye fixed upon you, at least for some little time after the other is opened. And when you have brought him to continue the axes of both eyes fixed upon you, as you stand directly before him, it will be time to change his posture, and to set him first a little to one side of you and then to the other, and so to practise the same thing; and when, in all these situations, he can perfectly and readily turn the axes of both eyes towards you, the cure is effected. An adult person may practise all this with a glass, without any director, though not so easily as with one.—But the older he is the more patience is necessary. About twenty years ago, I attempted a cure, after this man- ner, upon a young gentleman about nine years of age, with pro- mising hopes of success ; but was interrupted by his falling ill of the small-pox, of which he died." Dr. Jurin preferred this method to the use of tubes or shells with small holes in them, which have been recommended.— But what appears to me the great difficulty, lies in the strength ofthe impression received upon the sound eye, which, causing the impression of the weak eye to be entirely neglected, it is again thrown out of the line of direct vision. I conceive it, therefore, to be a necessary part of the experiment with tubes or shells, that the vision through the tube, applied to the sound Vol. III. 2 F 226 OF SEEING IN GENERAL. eye, shall be so obscured as to have some accordance with the lesser sensibility of the weak eye, and then, objects being seen equally with both eyes, a gradual accordance of the muscles may be produced. The conviction of the necessity of giving an equality to the strength of the sensation of both eyes must have struck M. de Buffon, since he says, in his Dissertation in the Academy of Sciences, that a plane glass should be applied to the weak eye and a convex one to the strong eye, so as to re- duce the last to a state less capable of acting independently of the other. But what is called a weakness, is very frequently, I an; convinced, merely a short-sightedness in one eye : what the effect of this should be we may experience if we look to an object with both eyes, but with one of them through a concave or convex glass ; if we are looking upon a book, there will be produced a confusion of the letters, but, by a little practice, the letters will become again distinct. By an attentive obser- vation, we shall find that this is the consequence of attending solely to the impression received in the naked eye : nay, what is still more strange, we can attend, in this experiment, to the impression upon the point of the axis of one eye, and to the- general impression of both. If, while looking upon the let- ters of a large page, I move the convex glass of a small de- gree of power sideways before my right eye, the whole letters of the page seem to move, leaving distinct and stationary a circular spot containing a word or two. Herer by no effort, while I look with both eyes, can I lose the steady and distinct sight of these few words, because their image is received upon the more sensible central point of the retina of my left eye : but all the other part of the sphere of vision I can see alternately, dimmed or distinct, as I choose to attend to the less powerful impression of the right eye, or the natural sensa- tion of the left. We see, by this experiment, how easy it is to neglect the impression of one eye, if it be no stronger than that of the other, (and of course more easily if it be weaker,) and how impossible it is to neglect the more vivid impression. From such a radical defect in the vision, as the humours of one eye having a different focus from the other, and conse- quently an indistinctness of vision produced from two images of different sizes intermingling their colours, children seem very frequently to be made to squint ; and I have known adults, with a degree of the same inequality in the eyes, kept from squinting only by a particular attention to the direction of their eyes. M. de Buffon, in his Dissertation already quoted, after affirming what has been already delivered, viz. that no ime squints with both eyes at once, says, he has observed three OF THE EYE-LIDS. 227 instances in which the eyes, according to circumstances, were alternately distorted from the object. This he accounts for by finding that, with one eye, the letters of a book could be seen at the distance of two or three feet, and not nearer than fifteen inches; while, with the other, the letters could be distin- guished at the distance of from four to fifteen inches only. Consequently, when looking to distant objects, the image being more distinct with the long-sighted eye, the other was turned from the object; but when objects at a small distance were seen, the image in the far-sighted eye being imperfect, it is turned from the axis, that it may not interfere with the stronger image of the other eye, which is now directed to the object. A frequent effect of the weakness left by long fevers in children, is a squint which gradually goes off as the strength is restored. It is observed, also, that squinting and double vi- sion are, in some fevers, a concomitant with delirium and phrenitis. This symptom proceeds, in all likelihood, from an unequal tension of the muscles of the eye-ball. The double vision is the effect of discordance in the action of the muscles. .«• CHAP. XIII. OF THE EYE-LIDS, OF THEIR GLANDS, AND OF THE COURSE OF THE TEARS. JH.AVING completed the description of the eye, as the organ of vision, we have now to attend to its connections, its adventitious membranes, the glands of the eye-lids, and the course of the tears. It is plainly necessary that the eye should not be loose in the socket; but that, in its rolling motion, it should still be attached j and that, although the delicate an- terior surface must be exposed, the internal parts of the socket r.hould be defended from the intrusion of extraneous bodies. This is accomplished by the tunica conjunctiva. The tunica conjunctiva, or adnata, is the inflection of the common skin of the eye-lids. It goes a little way back into the orbit, and is again reflected, so as to come forward 228 OF THE EYE-LIDS. and cover the fore part of the eye-ball. Here it is pellucid, and the white coat of the eye shines through it. It covers the cornea also; and here it is perfectly transparent; loses its character of vascularity, as the conjunctiva ; and is assimila- ted to the nature of the cornea. As this coat is a continuation of the common integuments, it is, like them, vascular, and liable to inflammation. The tunica conjunctiva, is the com- mon seat of ophthalmia. In the commencing inflammation, we see the vessels turgid or blood-shot: bye and bye, they elongate towards the surface of the cornea ; the patient com- plains of dimness ; the dimness becomes apparent to the sur- geon ; spots of opacity then form in the cornea; and the ves- sels of the conjunctiva now take a course over the turbid surface of the cornea. In this stage of the inflammation, by cutting the turgid vessels of the conjunctiva, we interrupt the source of blood for a time, and procure a small evacuation ; but these vessels soon coalesce again, and the flow of blood is re- newed. The tunica albuginea is the thin tendinous coat formed by the insertion of the recti muscles, which expand over the anterior part of the eye. I would admit this into the enumera- tion of th-i coats of the eye, merely to prevent confusion of nanus, and to make intelligible the descriptions of some of the older writers. It is not properly a coat. Where the con- junctiva covers the anterior part ofthe eye, the white sclerotic coat is seen under it; and in consequence of this, the tunica conjunctiva is sometimes called albuginea. A very material part of the structure of the eye still re- mains to be described ; an apparatus by which the surface of the eye is preserved from injury, kept moist, and perfectly transparent. The eye-lids are composed of the common integuments, with this difference only, that they have a cartilaginous margin to give them shape, and muscular fibres, in the duplicature of their membrane, to give them motion. A small semilunar cartilage, which lies like a hoop in their edge, keeps them of a regular figure, and so as to close neatly over the eye. This cartilage having a triangular edge, and the base of the angle forming the flat surface of the margin of the eye-lid, they meet with the most perfect accuracy. Either end of this hoop-like cartilage is connected with the periosteum at the corners of the eye, so as to move with its fellow as upon a hinge. This cartilage of the eye-lid is called tarsus. The upper eye-lid only, is moved for the admission of light to the eye ; it is raised by the levator palpebrae muscle. But the eye-lids are shut aga^n by the orbicularis palpebrarum-; OF THE SECRETION OF TEARS. 229 which acts on both eye-lids, and sometimes with such power, as to squeeze the eye-ball even to a painful degree. The meibomean glands. These are very elegant little glands which lie under the inner membrane ofthe eye-lids.— About twenty or thirty ducts of these glands open upon the tar- sus of each eye-lid. These ducts run up under the vascular membrane of the inside of the eye-lid, and minute glandular follicules, to the amount of about twenty, are, as it were, attach- ed to each of these ducts. These glands exude a white seba- ceous matter, which defends the edge of the eye-lid from the acrid tears, and closes them more accurately by its unctuosity. The vascularity ofthe inner surface ofthe eye-lid is subservi- ent to these glands ; for the vessels forming their ramification? round the little glands, secrete the sebaceous matter into them. This, then, is the seat of the ophthalmia tarsi; and following this inflammation, the edges of the eye-lids, and the mouths of the ducts, are sometimes eroded with little ulcers. These ducts are the seat of the stye. This is an inflammation and closing up ofthe mouth of one ofthe ducts, which then swells up into a little hard granule in the edge of the eye-lid, ac- companied with inflammation of its cyst or surrounding mem- brane. OF THE SECRETION AND COURSE OF THE TEARS. The lachrymal gland is seated in the upper and outer part ofthe orbit, and behind* the superciliary ridge ofthe fron- tal bone. It is of a flattened form, and is depressed into a hol- low of the bone. Several ducts from this gland open upon the inner surface of the upper eye-lid. By the reflection of the membrana conjunctiva from the eye-lid over the surface ofthe eye-ball, dust and motes are prevented from getting behind the eye-ball: and when they have got under the eye-lids, the ex- treme sensibility of the tunica conjunctiva excites the lachry- mal gland, and the orbicular muscle ofthe eye-lids, (which, by its pressure, accelerates the flow of the tears,) and the dust or motes are washed out. The puncta for re-absorbing the tears and conveying them into the nose, being at the inner angle or canthus ofthe eye-lids, we see the intention of the ducts of the lachrymal gland opening on the inside of the upper eye-lid to- wards the outer angle : for, by this means, the tears are spread over all the surface ofthe eye-ball, by the motion of the eye- lids, before they decline into the puncta. But the tears do not flow only when the gland is excited by motes ; their secretion is perpetual, and, together with the motion of the eye-lids, they 230 OF THE SECRETION OF TEARS. perpetually moisten the surface ofthe eye-ball. Even during sleep they flow continually: and here we may admire a provi- sion for their conveyance towards the inner canthus, in the in- clination of the tarsus to each other; for the eye-lids meet only on the outer edge of the broad surface formed by the tarsus, the consequence of which is, that a kind of gutter is formed in the angle by the inner edges of the tarsus not meeting, which leads the tears from the ducts of the lachrymal gland towards the puncta lachrymalia. The puncta lachrymalia are the mouths of two ducts which form the beginning of a canal for drawing off the tears from the eye into the nose. These puncta are placed at the inner canthus of the eye, and on the termination of the tarsus of the upper and under eye-lid : they are surrounded by a rigid substance ; and their patent mouths absorb by capillary attrac- tion. They lead the tears into the lachrymal sac, and thence the tears pass into the nose. The caruncula lachrymalis is that little granulating- like body which lies in the inner angle formed by the two eye- lids. Very small hairs are seen to 6prout from it, and some small sebaceous follicles open upon its surface. Connected with the caruncula lachrymalis is the membrana or valvula semilunaris. This is avascular membrane which is drawn from under the caruncula lachrymalis by the direction of the eye outward, so as then to appear like a web spread over the white of the eye near the inner canthus. By directing the eye towards the nose, this membrane is again accumulated about the caruncula. This, then, is a very particular mechanism, not as is generally described, for applying the tears to the punc- ta lachrymalia, but for accumulating and throwing out the motes and dust from the eye, and for guarding the puncta from the absorption of such little particles as might irritate or ob- struct them. In birds, the valvula semilunaris is drawn, by a muscle and small tendon inserted into it, quite across the eye, so as to act like a third eye-lid ; it is in them called membrana nictitans. The lachrymal sac and duct lie in the os unguis or lach- rymale. The sacculus is a bag of an oblong or oval figure ; it is sunk into the fossa ofthe os unguis, and defended by the frontal process of the superior maxillary bone ; and it is cover- ed by the ligamentous connection ofthe orbicularis muscle.— This sac is the dilated upper end of the nasal duct; and into it the two canaliculi lachrymales (the extremities of which are the puncta,) open as distinct tubes.* * Dr. Monro. OF THE SECRETION OF TEARS. 231 Two coats are described as covering the lachrymal sac ; a nervous, white, external coat; and a vascular, pulpy, pituita- ry membrane. This sac diminishing towards the lower part, and being received into the complete canal of the bone, be- comes the nasal duct. Taking a course downward and back- ward, it opens into the nose under the inferior spongy bone.— The lachrymal sac and duct are by some conceived to be mus- cular, so as to enable them to convey the tears into the nose ; or it may be conceived, that they act like a syphon, the duct reaching down into the nose acting like the long leg ofthe sy. phon, and drawing the tears in at the openings of the puncta. But I think it would appear, that the connection ofthe orbicu- laris muscle over the sac is of a nature to accelerate the pas- sage of the tears, and even perfectly to compress the sac. The lachrymal sac and duct are very frequently diseased and ob- structed. For example, after small-pox, syphilis, or in scro- phulous constitutions, the inner membrane of the sac being of the nature of the pituitary membrane of the nose, inflames, swells, and adheres. The consequences of this are, first, a swelling of the lachrymal sac in the inner angle of the eye, and a watery or weeping eye ; upon pressing the tumour, the tears, mixed with mucus, are forced back through the puncta ; bye and bye the sac inflames and suppurates ; matter is discharg- ed by pressure of the sac : and, lastly, it is eroded and bursts out, discharging the tears and matter on the cheek. This is the complete character of the fistula lachrymalis. While the sac bursts outwardly, it often does further mischief within, by making carious the thin lamina of bone in which it lies. The theory of the ancients, with regard to this disease, was that the disease was proceeding from the caries of theos unguis, and they perforated with the actual cautery, until the patient smelt it in the nose ! as much with the intention, of remedying the caries, as to give passage to the tears. But it is not the bone which is the obstruction to the perfect cure of this disease by operation, but the membranes, which close again after the most ingenious attempts to preserve the passage. The vis medica- trix, in this instance, seems not to be so well aware of her inte- rest as some physiologists would inculcate. She is, here, ever at variance with the artifice of the surgeon. BOOK II. OF THE EAR. * CHAP. I. OE SOUND, AND OF THE EAR IN GENERAL. JL HE ear is that organ by which we are made susceptible of the impression of sound. Sound is the motion of elastic fluids, occasioned, in general, by the vibration of solid bodies : and this vibration of the so- lids depends upon their elasticity or tension : or sound may be produced by the vibration and motion of the air primarily, but not without the intervention of solids. The human voice, for example, does not depend merely on the percussion of the air, but on that vibration, as combined with the tension and con- sequent vibration of the glottis, excited by the current of air; which, again, is modified by the mouth. In the same man- ner, the sound and variety of tone, in musical instruments, depend on the joint effect of the vibrations of the solids, and of the air. There is no body impervious to sound, or, in other words, incapable of transmitting the vibration. That sound is com- municated through the medium of the air, we know from the circumstance, that a bell, when struck in a vacuum, gives out no sound: and again, from this, that the condensed state of the atmosphere affords an easier communication of sound, and conveys it to a greater distance. The velocity of the impres- sion transmitted by the common air, is computed at 1130 feet in a second ; and sound, when obstructed in its direct motion, OF SOUND. 233 is reflected with a velocity equal to that with which it strikes the solid body by which its progress is interrupted. That water conveys the vibrations producing sound, ha£ been proved by experiment. It was once the saying of natur- alists, that, to suppose fishes to have the organ of hearing, would be to conceive that an organ were bestowed upon them without a possibility of its being of use. But we are assured ofthe fact, that, on the tinkling of a bell, fishes come to be fed ;* and it was the custom for the fishermen on the coast of Bri- tany, to force the fish into their nets by the beating of drums,f as our islanders are at present accustomed to do when the lar- ger fish get entangled amongst the rocks. We are told, that, in China, they use a gong for the same purpose. These facts were once of importance, though more accurate observation has now made them superfluous. The Abbe Nollet took much pains to decide the question, whether water was a medium for sound. After considerable preparation, and acquiring a dex- terous management of himself in the water, (for which he takes great merit to himself,) he found that he could hear under wa- ter the sound of the human voice, and even distinguish conver- sation and music. The human ear being an organ imperfect- ly adapted to this medium of sound, these experiments do not inform us of the relative powers of air and water in the trans- mission of sound. But another experiment of the Abbe Nol- let proves, what indeed to me is sufficiently evident, from the structure of the ear of fishes, viz. that the water transmits a much stronger vibration than the air. When he sunk under water and struck together two stones which he held in his hands, it gave a shock to his ear which was insupportable, and which was felt on all the surface of his body, like that sensation which is produced when a solid body held in the teeth is struck by another solid body .J He observed in other experiments, that the more sonorous the bodies struck were, the less vivid was the impression ; by which it would appear, that water, though it conveys an impression more strongly to the ear than the air, is not equally adapted to the resonance and variety of • Boyle. t M. l'Ahbe Nollet, Acad. R. des Sciences. Naturalifts were very incredulous of the effect faid to be produced by mufic on lobfters. Some may be fo ftill; bi,t we may truft the following obfervation of Minafius, in his Differtation. " Su de tim- panetti dell udito scoperti nei Granchio Paguro." " Proprii obfervationibus certior factus afferit obfcura no&e, placidoque mari, quoties pifcatores ardentibus facculis paguri in littore hxrentis oculos lucis fulgore perftringunt, ut ftupido, et pene prajftigiato animale potiantur, fi forte rumor aliquis ingruit C/pncrum illico ie e littore fubducere recipcreque intra undas." See Scarpa Difquifitiones Anatomica de Auditu in Inlectis, &c. f T hefe experiments were repeated by Dr. Memo. See his Book of Fifties. Vol. HI. 2 G 234 OF THE LARS OF ANIMALS. tone. Indeed, this is a natural consequence of the water, a fluid of greater density being in close contact with the sounding body, and suppressing its vibration. In these facts, we shall find the explanation of some peculiarities in the structure of the ears of fishes. Thus, we see, that the vibration of a solid body is continued through the air and through water, until reaching the organ of hearing, it produces the sensation of sound. Sound, it will be evident, is also communicated through solids. When we put the ear to one end of a log of wood of thirty feet in length, and strike upon the other, we are sensible of the impression ; and when a solid body applied to the bones of the head, or to the teeth, is struck, we are sensible of the noise ;* and this Is felt even by those who are deaf to impressions conveyed through the air : indeed it is partly in this way that we are to judge whether deafness may be cured by operation, as depend- ing upon some injury of the mechanism of the organ, or whe- ther it be an incurable affection ofthe nerve or brain itself. If the sound be perceptible when conveyed through the teeth, or when a watch, for example, is pressed upon the bone behind the outer ear, we are assured that the internal organ is unaffect- ed ; and upon enquiring farther into the case, we may find that the deafness proceeds from some disease of the outer tube of the ear, or of that tube which leads into the throat, and that it can be remedied. CHAP. II. GENERAL VIEW OF THE VARIETIES IN THK EAIvS OF ANIMALS.J X HERE is in the scale of animals a regular gradation in the perfection of the organ of hearing. But, in the human ear, we find united all the variety of apparatus for communicating * Perhaps we cannot call this found. ■f In the following fhort account of the comparative anatomy of the ear, al- though I have taken every affiftance in my power from books, I have defcribed -be ftructure, m all the examples, from my own diffections and obfervatioD. OF THE EARS OF ANIMALS. 235 the vibration to the internal organ, and along with this the most extensive distribution of nerves in the labyrinth, or in- most division of the ear, to receive that impression. The ultimate cause of this more complex structure is the ereater power with which man is endowed of receiving, through the ear, various impressions of simple sounds : lan- guage, music, and various modifications of the sense, of which the lower animals are incapable. As, in treating of the anatomy of the eye, we do not at- tempt to investigate the manner in which light acts upon the retina, in producing the sensation of colours, but endeavour merely to explain the structure of the eye ; to show how the coats support and nourish the humours ; how the humours are subservient to the concentration of the rays of light, and assist their impulse upon the retina : so, in the same manner, in ex- plaining the structure of the ear, we need not investigate the philosophy of sound, nor the nature of those impressions which are made by it on the sensorium through the neives ; our views are limited to the structure of the ear—we have to observe the mechanism by which the strength of vibrations is increased and conveyed inward to the seat of the sense, and the manner in which the nerve is expanded to receive so deli- cate an impression. The method of studying this subject, which is at once the most instructive and the most amusing, is to trace the various gradations, in the perfection of the organ, through the several classes of animals. It is chiefly by comparing the structure of the viscera, and the organs of sense in animals and in man, that comparative anatomy is useful in elucidating the animal ceconomy. For example, in the stigmata and air-vessels of insects and worms ; in the gills of fishes ; in the simple cellular structure of the lungs of amphibiae ; in the more complicated structure of the lungs of birds ; we observe one essential re- quisite through the whole gradation, viz. the exposure of the circulating fluids to the action of the air. And in this variety of conformation, we see the same effect so modified as to cor- respond with the habits and necessities of the several classes of animals. In the same manner, with regard to the circulating system, we are taught the explanation of the double heart in the human body, by tracing the variety of structure through the several classes of animals ; from the simple tube circulating the fluids of insects, the single ventricle of fishes and reptiles, the double auricle and perforated ventricle of amphibiae, up to the perfect heart of the warm-blooded animal. The organs of generation, and the ceconomy of the foetus in utero, is, in the same degree, capable of illustration from comparative anato- 2ob OF THE EARS OF ANIMALS. my. But most especially, in the structure of the ear, is there much scope for this kind of investigation. We find such va- rieties in the ear of reptiles, fishes, birds, and quadrupeds, as lead us, by gradual steps, from the simpler to the more com- plex structure. The simplest form of the organ of hearing is that in which we find a little sac of fluid, and on the inside ofthe sac the pulp of a nerve expanded. If an animal, having such an organ, breathe the air, a membrane closes this sacculus on the fore part ; and, by means of this membrane, the vibrations ofthe air are communicated to the expansion ofthe nerve through the fluid of the sac. But if the animal inhabits the water only, it has no such membrane to receive the impres- sion ; the organ is incased in bone or cartilage, and instead of the membrane, some small bone or hard concreted matter is found in contact with the pulp of the nerve. The sound, passing through the waters, is, in such case, conveyed to the organ not by any particular opening, but through the bones of the head ; and this concrete substance, partaking of the tre- mulous motion, communicates the sensation to the nerve.* For example, in the crab and lobstkr, we find a promi- nent bony papilla or shell, which is perforated with a mem- brane extended across the perforation, and behind this mem- brane there is a fluid, in which the nerve is expanded, and which receives the impulse conveyed to the membrane. In the cuttle-fish, again, there is no external opening ; there is merely a little sac under the thick integuments : this sac has in it a small concretion or bone for receiving the vibration ; which, in this animal, is conveyed by a more general impress sion upon the head than in those last mentioned ; and the vi- bration of this loosely poised bone or concrete seems equal to the provision of the membrane which, in the crab, closes up the external opening in the perforated shell. In fishes, there is a considerable variety of structure. Those which remain perpetually under water, have not the outer membrane, nor any apparatus for strengthening the ■ first-received undulations of sound. But such as lie basking on the surface of the water, and breathe through lungs, have an external opening—a canal leading to the membrane, and behind the membrane bones to convey the vibration to the in- ternal parts, and these internal pr.rts, the seat of the sense, are actually as perfect as in terrestrial animals. * It is conceived by fome that the antenna: of infects conveys to them the vibra- tion of bodi->, and that they may be coniidered ai an imperfect variety of thi> organ. OF THE EARS OF ANIMALS. 237 In neither of the species of fishes, the cartilaginous nor spinous fishes, is there a proper external opening, as in ani-. mals breathing air. They receive the impulse from the water, upon the integuments and bones of the head; but within the head, and in the seat ofthe sense, they have a most beautiful apparatus for receiving and conveying those general vibrations to the expanded nerve. There is in every ear, adapted to hearing under water, a bone or concretion, placed so as to vacillate easily, and which is destined to agitate the fluid in which it is suspended with a stronger vibration than could be produced merely by a general impulse. Besides this provision in fishes, there is a very elegant structure for still further in- creasing the surface destined to receive the impulse, and for exposing to that impulse or vibration a larger proportion of the expanded nerve. It consists of three semicircular tubes, which penetrate widely within the bones of the head. They are filled with a fluid, and have in their extremities a division of the nerve which is moved or otherwise affected by the vi- bration ofthe fluids contained within the tubes. There is a slight variety, however, in the ear of cartilagin- ous fishes. In the head of the skate, for example, there is under the skin, at the back ofthe head, a membrane extended across a pretty regular opening. This, however, is not con- sidered as the opening ofthe ear ; but a passage, like a mu- cous duct, which is beside it, has given occasion to a con- troversy between Professors Scarpa and Monro; and it may not be out of place to inquire a little into this disputed point. We have seen that water conveys the sound of vibrating bodies with a shock almost intolerable to the ear, and with a particular and distinct sensation over the whole body. We see, also, that, in the greater number of fishes, there is con- fessedly no external opening, the whole organ is placed under the squamous bones ofthe head. Yet the cartilaginous fishes, which are supposed to have an external ear, swim in the same element, and are in no essential point peculiar in their habits. And we should receive with caution the account of any pecu- liarity in the organ of hearing of one class of fishes, which is not common to all inhabiting the same fluid. Such animals as occasionally pass from the water into the air, must have a membrane capable of vibrating in the air ; but, even in them, it is expanded under the common integuments, and protected by them. Were it otherwise, when the creature plunged into the water, it would be assailed with that noise, (confounding all regular sounds,) of which man is sensible when he plunges under water. It appears opposite to the general law of nature, fo Fiippose any species offish having that simple and more de- 238 OF THE EARS OF ANIMALS. licate membrane, which is evidently intended to convey at- mospheric sounds only, while, on the other hand, creatures living in the water alone, should have an organization fit to en- dure the stronger vibrations of their denser fluid, and which would be useless and absurd in those existing in our atmos* phere. When we come to examine the ear of the skate, we find, that what Dr. Monro conceives to be the outward ear ofthe fish,* is really, as represented by Dr. Scarpa, a mucous duct merely ;f which does not lead into the sacculi of the vestibule and semicircular canals, as appeared to Dr. Monro ; and that to suppose this would be to acknowledge the free access of air and water to the immediate seat of the organ, and to the soft pulp ofthe auditory nerve, a thing absurd in every view, im- possible in nature, and very wide of the truth4 To me, it ap- pears, that this narrow duct cannot be considered as the ex- ternal ear ; because we find in the skate a proper membrane under the thin integuments, quite unconnected with the duct, for transmitting the sound ; and, upon following this mucous duct, we find it taking a circuitous course, and filled with a strong gelatinous matter ; it is every where narrow, and filled with a glutinous secretion. It has no membrane stretched across it, and bears no resemblance to the external ear of any other animal. We may conclude, then, that fishes have no external opening like terrestrial animals ; that, instead of this outward provision thev have the moveable bone within the organ. Although the cartilaginous fishes have a membrane extended over part of the organ, which, in the spinous fishes, is completely surrounded with bone, it is not to be considered as capable of the tremulous motions of the membrana tympani of terrestrial animals, but may be considered as analogous to the membrana fenestra ovalis : and, since it lies deep under the integuments, we have no reason to believe that sound is transmitted to the organ of • " In the upper and back part of the head of a fkate, and in a large fifh weigh- ing 150 pounds, at the diftance nearly of one inch from the articulation of the head, with the firft vertebra ofthe neck or atlas, two orifices, capable of admitting fmall fized ftocking wires at the diftance of about an inch and a quarter from each other, furrounded with a firm membranous ring, may be obferved. Thefe arc the beginnings of the Meatus Auditorii Externi." Treatife on the Ear, p. 208. f Dr. Scarpa, fpeaking of this opinion of Dr. Monro, fays, " qua in re vehc- menter fibi hallucinatus eft, oftia nimirum ductuum mucolbrum, ut manifeftuni eft, pro auris meatubus accipiens. Etenim omnino nullum eft in cartilagineis piscibus oftium auditus extus adapertum, membrana<2 ovalis fub commu- ni integumento reconditajacct et coopcrta." + " Quod et absurdum eft et a rei veritate quam maxime alienum." Vid. An- ■<>.rK:.ee D'fquiftthnes de audi'.u el olfaclu, auc'-.r" A. Scarpa. OF THE EARS OF ANIMALS. 239 hearing in fishes, any otherways than through the general vibra- tion of the head. The orp-an of hearing in amphibious animals, ^demonstrates to us a difference in the manner in which the sensation is re- ceived • for they have both the outer membrane to receive the vibration of the air, and a mechanism of small bones to con- vev this motion into the seat ofthe sense ; and they have, be- sides within the ear itself, a chalky concretion : a provision plainly intended for propagating the motion communicated through the water. In serpents, birds, and quadrupeds, we shall hereafter trace the various gradations in the perfection of this organ. We shall find, that, as the animal rises in the scale, the cavities and tubes of the ear are extended and varied in their form. Now, I conceive that, while the multiplied forms of the tubes and sphericles of the internal ear afford a more expanded and sus- ceptible surface for receiving impressions, the consonant forms of the parts enable them to receive a stronger vibration, and a more perfect and modified sound. A cord of a musical instrument will vibrate when another in exact unison with it is struck. The vibration communicated to the air is such, as is adapted to the tension ofthe sympathetic cord ; and no other percussion of the air, however violent, will cause it to sound. Again, the air passing through a tube of certain dimensions, will not communicate to it a motion, nor call forth its sound, while the air, passing in equal quantity through a tube of one degree of difference, will rise into a full note. What holds true in regard to the unison of cords, is also true of cylinders, or even of the walls of a passage or room, a certain note will cause the resonance of the passage or room, as a certain vibration will call forth the sound of the tube of an organ ; because it is in all these instances necessary that the impulse be adapted to the position of the surfaces and their powers of reverberation. Sound, as allied to music, consists in the succession, the rhythm or time of its return upon the ear. 1'hese few facts illustrate what I mean, by saying, that the various forms of the internal ear of animals, as they advance in the scale, give additional powers to their organ. In the first example of the simple ear, where a bone vibrates on the expanded nerve, I should conceive that the sensation were, in consequence of this simple percussion, capable of little variety; but in animals where, besides this simpler mechanism, there are semicircular canals, and more especially in those animals, which have still a further complication of the forms of the ear, certain sounds will be peculiarly felt in each of these several cavities and convolutions ; and, while the sensation is becora- 240 OF THE ORGAN OF HEARING. ing more distinct, by the perfection of the organ, it admits, also, of a greater variety of sounds or notes : so that a certain state of vibration will affect the semicircular canals, (one or all of them,) and produce the sensation of sound, which would not at all affect the vibration of the simple lapilli lying in their sac. <£> CHAP. III. DESCRIPTION OF THE ORGAN OF HEARING IN PARTICULAR ANIMALS. IN THE LOBSTER AND CRAB. IN these animals, the structure of the ear is very simple ; but it appears to me, that Professor Scarpa, in his descrip- tion, has imagined the organ to be more simple than it is in nature. In the lobster, there projects from near the root of the great antenna, an osseous papilla of a peculiarly hard and fria- ble nature. In the point of this papilla we observe a foramen, and a membrane stretched over it. This is the seat ofthe or- gan of hearing. It is described as containing a sac of a pellu- cid fluid, which adheres to the membrane, while the auditory nerve is expanded upon the lower surface ofthe sac. Now, the lobster, being an animal which can live on land as well as in water, Scarpa gives this as an instance of a structure calcu- lated to receive the sensation of sound equally well from the water or from the atmosphere. But, from the figure I have given of the ear of this creature, it will not appear to be so ex- ceedingly simple ; while there is evidentlv a provision for the reception of the vibration communicated through the water, though it does not indeed strictly resemble that which is com- monly found in the ears of fishes. There is suspended behind OF THE ORGAN OF HEARING. 341 the sacculus, and in contact with the nerve, a small triangular bone, which, when pulled away,* is found to hinge upon a de- licate cartilage. This bone seems evidently intfchued, by its being thus suspended in the neighbourhood of the pulp of the auditory nerve, for impressing upon that nerve the vibra- tion from the water. The lobster, then, has, like the amphibi- ous animals, a double provision for receiving the communica- tion of sound alternately from the water or from the air.f The ear ofthe crab differs from that ofthe lobster in this, that under the projection, there is a moveable case of bone, to which we see a small antenna attached. Within this is the or- gan of hearing; and there is here an internal provision for the transmission of sound to the auditory nerve, which consists simply in a few circumgyrations of a pellucid and flexible carti- lage : an inspissated fluid surrounds this gyrous cartilage, while the pale auditory nerve is expanded behind it. Of the ear of fishes. In the heads of fishes, there is a cavity separated by a thin vascular membrane from that which contains the brain. Within this cavity there is a sacculus dis- tended with a fluid, and containing a small bone ;J on the in- side of this bag, (which is called the sacculus lapillorum,) a great proportion of the auditory nerve is expanded. In the cartilaginous fishes, there are three lapilli^ contained inifuir proper capsules, and surrounded with a gelatinous matter,fl each of the lapilli having its appropriated division of the acoustic or auditory nerve distributed upon it in a beautiful net-work. This cavity in the head of fishes, resembles the centre of the labyrinth in the human ear, and is called the vestibule. With- in the vestibule there is a limpid fluid, intersected every where by a delicate and transparent cellular membrane ; und the parts within the vestibule are supported in their place by this tissue, which is similar to that which supports the brain in fishes. Besides this central part of the organ in fishes, there are de- parting from the vestibule three semicircular cartilaginous ca- nals,H within which, are extended membranous canals.__ These membranous tubes contain a fluid distinct from that • See fig. a. f From the mucous-like tranfparency of the nerve in the lobfter, it is difficult to afcertain its exact relation to this bone. \ See plate, fig. 3. § In many ofthe fpinous or fquamous fifties, there is only one. In cartilaginous fifties, thefe bodies are not like bone, but like foft chalk. In the fpinous fifties, on the other hand, they are of the fhape of the head of a fpear, and hard like ftone. || The gelatinous matter is rather before the bones, and diftending the little facculi. ^ See plate 7. fig. 3. and fig. 4. ddd, Vol. III. 2 H 242 OF THE ORGAN OF HEARINt-. contained in the common cavity of the vestibule, nor have they any communication with the sacculi, which contain the lapilli, although they are connected with them.* These carti- laginous canals are of a cvlindrical form, and, being as trans- parent as the fluid with "which they are surrounded, are not readily distinguished in dissection. Each ofthe cartilaginous canals is dilated at one of its extremities into a little belly, which is called the ampulla. The auditory nerve in cartilaginous fishesf is first divided into two fasciculi, which are again subdivided into lesser nerves. These go to the three sacculi lapillorum, and to the ampulluke of the semicircular canals. Before the division of the nerve peculiar to the sacculus pierces it, and is finally dis- tributed, it forms a singular and intricate net-work of filaments. The branches to the ampullulae are raised on a partition which is opposed to the mouth of the cylindrical part of the tube. In the spinous fishes, the three semicircular canals unite in a common belly ; but in cartilaginous fishes, the posterior semi- circular canal is distinct from the others. In fishes, all the parts of the ear are filled with a matter of a gelatinous consistence, or viscid fluidity ; and the whole sac- culi and semicircular canals are surrounded with fluid. That jelly is the most susceptible of vibration, is evident, when we fill a glass, and allow a body to fall into it; for then the delicate vibration is communicated to the finger on the outside of the glass, or, by striking the glass, we may observe the tremulous motion of the jelly. The semicircular canals, it is evident, are well adapted to receive the extensive vibrations communi- cated through the bones of the head, and to convey them in- ward to the nerve expanded in the ampulla. From the simpler to the more perfect aquatic animals, we may trace several links of the chain by which nature advances towards the perfect structure of the ear. We return now to observe, in the first example of terrestrial animals, the most simple state of that part of the organ which receives the sen- sation ; but where the structure of the receiving organ is the most simple, the mechanism for receiving the vibration and conveying it to the internal ear, is modified and adapted to the atmosphere. OF THE EAR IN REPTILES AND AMPHIBIOUS ANIMALS. In reptiles, which form the intermediate class of animals * So Profeffor Scarpa afferts, in contradiction to others. f The fifth pair of nerves in fifh anfwers to the feventh in man; it Las the fsme divifien into the portio mollis and dura. OF THE ORGAN OF HEARING. 243 betwixt fishes and quadrupeds, the ear has also an intermedi- ate structure ; in some individuals of this class the ear resem- bles that of fishes, such as we have described, while, in others, it resembles more nearly the common structure of terrestrial animals. In the salamandra aquatica, a variety of the lizard, there is a foramen ovale,* deep under the integuments. In this foramen there is a cartilage, in immediate contact with which, there is a common sacculus lying in the cavity or vestibule ; and in this little sac there is found a cretaceous matter : there are here, also, semicircular canals, with ampullulae and a common belly connecting them. In this animal, then, it is evident, the ear is similar in structure to that of the cartilagi- nous fishes.f In the frog, the outward apparatus is different, but the in- ternal ear is simple.i: Under the skin of the side of the head, a little behind the prominent eye, we find a large circular open- ing, which tends inward in a funnel-like form : and from the upper part of the circle of this meatus we find a sm ill elastic bone, or cartilage suspended. This bone is in contact with the common integuments of the head, which are stretched over the little cavity. This first bone is placed at a right angle with a second bone, and both are lodged in a proper tympan- um.§ This second bone swells out towards its inner extremity, and is accurately applied to the foramen ovale. The foramen ovale opens into a cavity which we must call the vestibule, and which, in this creature, is peculiarly large in proportion to its size. This vestibule contains a sac, upon which the nerve is expanded : it contains also a chalky soft concretion, which is of a beautiful whiteness, and of a regular figure when first seen, but has no solidity.|| The vestibule here, as in all other animals, being the immediate seat of the sense, is filled with fluid. In serppnts, the mechanism external to the seat of the >rgan is less complete than in the frog. From the scales be- hind the articulation of the bone which keeps the lower jaw * This is the appropriated appellation of the opening which leads from the out- er cavity of the ear, or tympanum, into the feat of the proper organ where the nerve is expanded. f It is faid by naturalifts, that the falamander never has been heard to utter a ry ; and as dumbnefs is in general coupled with deafnefs, it is natural to fuppofe t has no cars. This is to confider the organ as fubfcrvient to converfation ! t See plate, fig 5 and 6. § This tympanum, being a cavity containing air, has communication with the uiouth by a tube, which wo fhall afterwards find called euftachian tube. Several have crroncoufly defcribed this animal as receiving founds through the mouth. 1 *<••• fi;;. 6. r>. 214 OF THE ORGAN OF HEARING. extended, a little column of bone* stretches inward and tor- ward. This bone has its inner extremity enlarged to an oval figure, and is inserted into the foramen ovale. This creature has no membrana tvmpani, nor does it appear to have so good a substitute as the frog: the outer extremity of the bone seems rather attached to the lower jaw by a cartilaginous ap- pendage and small ligamenuf Within the scull, serpents have the little sac, with the cretaceous matter and semicircular canals, united bv a common belly.^ In the turtle, we find a proper tympanum, and by lifting the scalv integuments from the side of the head a little above the articulation of the lower jaw, we open this cavity.— Through this cavity there extends a very long and slender bone, which, upon the outer extremitv, is attached by a little clastic brush of fibres to the cartilaginous plate under the in- teguments, while the inner extremity is enlarged, so as to ap- ply accurately to the foramen, which opens into the vestibule ; and a pissage also opens from the cavity of the tympanum into the fauces. In this animal, as in all which we have classed under the prtsvr.t division, the intern..1 ear consists of a central cavity, or vestibul.-, which contains a sac with fluid, and cretaceous matter, and of three semicircular canals connected by a common belly. This common belly of the semicircular canals has no common;nation with the sacculus vestibuli which contains the cretaceous matter, further than as it lies in contact with it, and as they both lie surrounded by a fluid; they equally receive the impression of the little bony column, the extremity of which vibrates in the for;.men ovale. There being enumerated forty or more varieties of the LAcerta or lizard, many of these have very different ha- bits. Some of them never pass into th- water, but inhibit d.*v and dusty places. Thelacerta agilis, or cnn.i:>n green lizard, which is a native both of Europe and of In lia, is nimble, and bask, during the hot weather, on the trunks of oil trr.'.s and on dry banks ; but on hearing a noise, it retreats quicklv to its hole. It has the skin over the tympanum extre.u !y thia, and such as to answer precisely the office of the membrane ofthe tympanum. So all the varieties of reptiles which, in their habits and d-'ice.rv of hearing, resemble terrestrial animals, have either the membrane ofthe tymp mum or a skin so deli- cate as to produce the sume effect; while those, which inhabit * Plate, fig 7. b. f See Scarpa, tab. v. fi^ ix. i Serpents are afF'ct^-1 by mufic; and they will raife ar.J twift themfelvej with every vir'ety of lively motion to i*r. pipe and tabor. OF THE ORGAN OF HEARING. 245 the water, have a rough integument, or a hard scale, drawn over the txmpanum. Besides this, some have a small muscle attached to the bone, which runs across the tympanum ; it is like the tensor tympani, and is another step towards the proper structure of the terrestrial ear. OF THE EAR IN BIRDS. Comparing the internal ear of birds with that of those ani- mals which we have already described, we find a very import- ant addition. We find here the internal ear (or labyrinth, as we may now call it,) consisting of three divisions : the vesti- bule, or middle cavity; the semicircular canals ; and the cochlea ; which last is an additional part, and one which we have not in the class of animals already described. Leading into these three cavities, there are two foramina : the fenes- tra rotunda, and the fenestra ovalis ; and both these openings have a membrane stretched over them in the fresh state of the parts. The first, the fenestra ovalis, or foramen ovale, receives the ossiculus auditus, which is in birds like that which we have already described in reptiles.* This ossiculus connects the membrana tympani (which is here of a regular form) with the vestibule, and conveys the vibration of the atmosphere to it. The semicircular canals are here also three in number, and are distinguished by the terms minor, major, andmaximus; but as the major and minor coalesce at one of their extremities, and enter the vestibule together, the semicircular canals open into the vtstibule by only five foramina in place of six. Each of the semicircular canals is dilated at one extremity into an elliptical form, while the other extremity is ofthe natural size ofthe diameter ofthe tube. These canals are formed of the hard shell of bone, and are surrounded with bone, having wider and more open cancelli. In the dry state ofthe parts, we find a cord passing through the semicircular canals, which some have called the zonula nerv.e. But these are the membranous canals, which are * Mr. Home, in his lecture on the mufcularity ofthe membrana tympani, (vid. Phil. Tranf. A. 1800,) fays, in birds this membrane has no tenfor mufcle to vary its adjuftmcnts, but is alw.ys kept tenfe by the preffure of the end of the flender bone. Thh is a very imperfect account of the mechanifm ofthe tympanum in birds. There are two bones, or one fmall bone with a cartilage, which lies along the membrana tympani. This elaftic cartilage has two little tendons attached to it. Even the flender bone which ftretches from the cartilage to the foramen ovale, the inner extremity of which is enlarged to fill up that hole, feems to have a fmall tendon inftrtcd into it; but whether this be a mufcular or ligamentous connection, I am unable at prefent to fry 246 OF THE HUMAN EAR. contained within the bony ones, dried and shrunk up. With- in the bony cavities of the labyrinth, there is laid a pellucid membrane, which contains a fluid, has the nerves expanded upon it, and is the true vestibule and semicircular canals ; while the bony case, which we have described, is merely the mould of these and the support of their delicate texture.* The cochlea, one ofthe three divisions ofthe labyrinth, is but imperfect in birds, when compared with that part of the organ in quadrupeds and in man. The cochlea in birds con- sists merely of two cylinders, formed of cartilage, which are united toward their further extremity. While the opposite extremities diverge, and while one of these cylinders opens in- to the vestibule, the other opens outward into the cavity of the tympanum, f That which more than any other circumstance distinguishes the organ of birds from that of animals inhabiting the waters, is the want of the bone or stony concretion in the sacculus ves- tibuli. * CHAP. IV. OF THE HUxMAN EAR. A HE anatomy ofthe human ear will naturally be consider- ed under three heads : the external ear; the tympanum; and the labyrinth. The outward ear requires no definition.— From the outward ear there is a cartilaginous tube, which leads into the tympanum. The tympanum is the cavity within * I lately, by accident, drew out the facculus veftibuli and femicircular canals from the bony part of the ear of a bird, and I found the membranous femicircular caml to confift apparently of the fame pellucid elaftic matter with thofc of fifties. f We find Mr. Home faying that the cochlea is neither abfolutely neceffary to fit the organ to be impreffed by founds communicated through the air, nor to ren- der it what is termed a mufical ear; and that this is fufficiently proved by that part being wanting in birds, whofe organ is particularly adapted to inarticulate founds. That the cochlea is not neceffary to the communication of found through the atmofphere, we have feen from the examination of the tar of the reptile. But fince we fee that it forms part of the labyrinth in birds, we may be led to doubt Mr. Home's conclufion. OF THE HUMAN EAR. 247 which is placed that mechanism of bones and muscles which increases the strength ofthe vibration, and conveys it inwards to the labyrinth. The labyrinth is the general name of those intricate canals which contain the expanded nerve, and the im- mediate seat of the organ. SECTION I. OF THE EXTERNAL EAR. The external ear is formed of an elastic cartilage, cover- ed w ith very thin integuments. The apparently irregular sur- faces of the outer ear will be found, upon examination, to be so formed that the sinuosities lead gradually into each other, and finally terminate in the concha or immediate opening of the tube ofthe ear. By the constant motion of the external ear of quadrupeds, we see its importance to them, both in collecting sound, and in judging of its direction. In most men, the mo- tion of the ear is lost, but some men still retain it; and this is very remarkable, that when the more internal mechanism of the ear is injured, and ceases to strengthen the sound before it conveys it inwards to the labyrinth, the external ear resumes the office to which it was originally adapted, and by a degree of motion and erection, assists the hearing. In Europeans, the outward ear is in a great degree flattened to the head by the dress ; but in Eastern nations, and in ancient statues, we see the ears stand prominent, and bear a part in the symmetry and expression ofthe whole head. The muscles moving the car- tilages, besides being intended to give motion, appear to have a more essential use in giving a due tension to the outward ear These cartilages are surrounded with their peculiar perichon- drium ; but as to their vessels and nerves, it seems very super- fluous to give a minute description of them here. ' 248 OF THE HUMAN EAR. When the cartilages are dissected, they appear thus : Fig. 18. A. The helix. It is the outer margin, the edge of which is turned over and forms the cavitas innominata. bcd. The anthelix. It is very prominent; of a triangu- lar shape ; and within the outer rim or margin. e. The sc apha, which is a depression or cavity on the ante- rior part of the anthelix. f. The TRAGUS. G. The antitragus. These are the two prominent points which approach each other, and form the margin of the great cavity ofthe ear. l. The concha, or great cavity ofthe ear, and which is the trumpet-like opening of the meatus auditorius externus. The few pale-coloured fibres which are found on the cartilages, are scarcely to be recognized as muscles.* The lobe of the ear, or that part which hangs down and is pierced for the ear-ring in women and savages, consists of skin and cellular substance merely. The meatus auditorius exttrnus, is the tube which leads into the tympanum. This tube is partly bony and partly cartilaginous. The outer portion of the tube is cartilaginous, and about three quarters of an inch in length, and is divided by fissures. The internal part of the tube is formed in the bone, * See Valfalva & Santorini. OF THE HUMAN EAR. 249 as we find upon turning to the description of the temporal bone. Glands of the passage. The cuticle, covering the in- side of the tube, is very fine, and there project from it many small hairs which stand across the passage. Under this skin there is a set of small glands, which pour their secretion into the tube, and are called the gl andul/E c erumenos/£.* These glands, secreting the wax of the ear, have their little ducts opening betwixt the roots of the hairs ; and this secretion, with the hairs which stand across the passage, guards the inter- nal parts of the ear from insects. The whole passage, consist- ing of the long canal of the temporal bone and the cartilaginous tube placed upon it, has an oblique direction. It first passes upward and forward, and then makes a slight curve to descend to the membrane of the tympanum. ^ This external tube ofthe ear, being ofthe nature of a secre- ting surface, and exposed to the air, is liable to inflammation. There follows a dryness ofthe passages, and then a more fluid secretion. If the inflammation of the tube should extend with- in the bonps, then, like the affections of all parts surrounded with solid bone, the pain is extreme and the danger considera- ble -.there is not only suppuration in the tympanum and des- truction ofthe membrana tympani, but the "disease may be still further communicated internallv. Hildanus gives us an ob- servation ofthe effects of a ball of glass dropt by accident into the ear, in which the inflammation was so extensive, and the pain so excruciating, that the whole side ofthe head and even the arms and leg of that side were affected in consequence of the brain partaking of the inflammation. Such things as peas and cherry-stones and pins are very apt to be put into the ear by children ; and awkward attempts 'to extract the foreign body very often push it further in ; and acrid fluids put into the ear to kill insects, have forced them deeper, with such an increase of pain as has thrown the patient into a condition little short of delirium. A defective or too profuse secretion from the glands of the tube, will cause a degree of deafness : and some- times the wax is so indurated as to cause a very obstinate deaf- ness.f * "Hsfiguramobtinentvariam: major tamen harum pars vel ad ovalem vel ^XuCT/CCed,lCOl°K tmgUntur flavo ab hum°'e ™ «™m folliculisconten toquiob affiduam fibrarum carnearum reticulanum prtffionem, per cutis corref- Se n^nt^Ta '" meatUS aUdUOrii CaVitatCm "»**«"!•£• Valfalva de Tit ofn V ' F> IC\ ", Talis funditalis a duodecim annis affligentis curatio » T! -rl .V J f""""'»' Placantmus, » De auditus orrano," lib. I. cap. 20 *. 00 I! re^alfo mention made of an adventitious membrL/clofing vp\he pafage 250 OF THE HUMAN EAR. In the fcetus, the concha and meatus externus are narrow, and there is secreted a thick white stuff, which defends the membrane of the tympanum from the contact ofthe waters ol the amnios. This, after birth, falls out in pieces along with the secretion ofthe wax; but in some instances, it has remain- ed and become very hard. The deafness from birth, caused by this accident, is often thought to depend upon anorganic de- fect, and so is neglected. ># SECTION II. OF THE TYMPANUM OR MIDDLE CAVITY OF THE EAR, AND ITS DISEASES. THE ANATOMY OF THE TYMPANUM. In the foetus, the cavity of the tympanum is superficial, compared with that of the adult; for what forms a tube in the latter, is in the former merely a ring, which is attached to the squamous portion of the temporal bone :* upon this circular bone the membrane ofthe tympanum is extended. The cavity of the tympanum is very irregular ; intermediate betwixt the membrane which is extended across the bottom of the external tube and the labyrinth or internal ear. It contains no fluid, as the labyrinth does ; but is really a cavity, having a communication with the external air through a tube which leads into the fauces. The tympanum communicates also backwards with the cells of the mastoid process.f The inner extremity ofthe meatus externus forms a circle which is pretty and ftretched above the membrana tympani. This is produced by a foul fecretion, and refembles that which fluffs up the paflage in the fcetus. See Fabricius de Chirurg. operat. crp. de aur. Chirurg. Veslingius Anat. cap. 16. See Experi- ments on the folvents of the Ear-wax, by Dr. Haygarth, Med. Obf. and Inquiries, voL iv. p. 198. He gives the preference to warm water over every other fol- vent. • See plate 8. fig. 3. | When Valfalva, in a cafe of ulceration and caries on the maftoid procefs, threw in his injections, he found them flowing out by the mouth • viz. by th: euftachcan tube through the tympanum. Sec Val. de aure humana, p. 89. • F THE HUMAN EAR. 251 regular, and upon which the membrane of the tympanum is extended. That part of the cavity of the tympanum which is opposite to the termination of the meatus externus, is very ir- regular. It has in it the foramen rotundum and the foramen ovale ; and betwixt these, there is an irregular bony tubero- sity from which there stretch back some exceedingly small spicuke of bone, which connect themselves with the margin of the irregular cavity of the mastoid process. The foramen ovalf* is in the bottom of a deep sinus ; it is not strictly of an oval form, but has its lower side straight, while the upper margin has the oval curve. This opening leads into the vestibule or central cavity of the labyrinth. The foramen rotundum is more irregular than the oval hole. It does not look directly forward, like it, but enters on the side of an irregular projection : it does not lead into the vestibule, but into one of the scalae of the cochlea. In the recent state of the parts, the periosteum covering the surface of the cavity of the tympanum, takes away much of its irre- gularity. Where the tympanum leads backward into the CELLULiE mastoidea, this periosteum is also continued. The eustachean tubej extends forward from the ca- vity of the tympanum, and opens behind the palate.:}: In the dry bones, the eustachean tube is more like an accidental fis- sure, than a regular passage, essential to the ceconomy of the ear. It appears thus irregular in the bones from the tube being towards the back of the nose, composed of membrane and cartilage ; as the tube approaches the opening behind the palate, it widens into a trumpet shape ; and the soft extremity of the tube is governed by muscular fibres. There can be no doubt that the eustachean tube is designed for admitting the free access of air into the cavity of the tym- panum, that, by preserving a due balance betwixt the atmos- phere and the air contained within the ear, the motion of the membrane of the tympanum may be free. This, at least, we know, that, when the extremity of the eustachean tube is closed, we suffer a temporary deafness, which can be ac- counted for only by the confined air wanting a due degree of elasticity to allow the vibration ofthe membrane ofthe tympan- um. I conceive it to be necessary, that the air in the tvmpan- um be changed occasionally, which is, perhaps, accomplished by some actions of the throat and fauces forcing a new body of :\ir into the eustachean tube. The extremity ofthe eustachean • Feneftra ovalis. r her a palato ad aurem. $ By fome older writers, the euftachean tube is called aqueduct, becaufe they •onceived that humours were evacuated from the tympanum by this paffage. 252 OF the human'eAr. tube, next to the throat, may be temporarily obstructed by the cynanche tonsillaris, which is frequently attended with pain, stretching from the throat to the ear ; or it may be closed by inflammation and adhesion of its mouth, by adhesion of the soft palate to the back of the fauces, by poly pus in the nose, reaching down into the fauces and compressing it.* OF THE MEMBRANA TYMPANI. The membrane of the tympanum is extended over the cir- cular opening of the bottom of the meatus externus. It has a little of an oval shape, and lies over somewhat obliquely, so that its lower margin is further inward than the upper. Its use is, to convey the vibrations or oscillation of the atmosphere, collected by the outer ear, inwards to the chain of bones in the tympanum. Although this membrane be tense, it is not stretched uniformly like the parchment of a drum, but is drawn into a funnel-like shape by the adhesion of the long pro- cess of the malleus to its centre. It consists of two layers of membrane, and has, naturally, no perforation in it; and the experiments of air and the smoke of tobacco sent from the mouth through the ear, succeed only in those who have had the membrane of the tympanum partially ruptured or eroded by ulceration. This membrane is transparent ; and when we look uro the tube of the ear, and direct a strong light into it, we ohserve it to be of a shining tendinous appearance. The inner lamina ofthe membrana tympani is very vascular. It h;s, indeed, been said to resemble the iris, both in its pro- fusion of vessels, and in the manner of their distribution.! This is carrying the conceit of their analogy too far. I have observed an artery of a very large size, (compared with the surface to be supplied,) running by the side of the long pro- cess or handle of the malleus. In this course, it is giving out small branches ; and when the trunk arrives at the extreme point of the long process of the malleus, it divides into two considerable branches, the extreme subdivisions of which run towards the margin of the membrane. This artery is, never- theless, too small to require us particularly to avoid it in the * The followirj cafe is from Valfalva :—" Quidam plebeius ulcus gerebat fupra uvulam in finiftra parte, quod quidtm earn, quam invafcrat, partem txclierat atque abftulerat fie. ut ulceris cavitascum extrcmo finiftra tubae orificio communicant. Igitur quoties homo mnllem turnndam remediis imbutam in ulceris cavitatem in- tradebat ; toties illico finiftra aure evadcbat furdus, talifque permanebat toto ex tempore quo turunda in ulcere relinquehatur :" p. 90. f See Mr. Home's lecture on the ftrudture and ufe of the membrana tympani Phil, Tranfad. Part. !. ifcc-. OF THE HUMAN EAR. 253 puncturing of the membrane for deafness, produced by ob- struction of the eustachean tube. The opinions regarding the muscularity ofthe membrane of the tympanum, shall be reserved until we have considered the whole mechanism of the parts in the tympanum. OF THE CHAIN OF BONES IN THE TYMPANUM. The vibrations of the membrane of the tympanum are transmitted to the foramen ovale by four moveable bones ; the malleus, incus, os orbiculare, and stapes. These bones are named from their shape, and the names assist in conveying an idea of their form. They are so united by articulation and small ligaments, as to form an uninterrupted chain ; and, while they transmit the vibration, their mechanism is such, that they strengthen the impulse. They have also small mus- cles attached to them, by which it is probable, the whole ap- paratus has a power of adapting the degree of tension to the force of the impulse communicated to the membrane of the tympanum. I conceive that they increase the power ofthe ear for receiving the weaker sounds, and are, at the same time, a guard to the internal parts, from such violent shocks as might injure the nerve. How necessary it sometimes is to damp and suffocate, in some degree, piercing sounds, we must all be sensible: and in those who are habitually exposed to the sudden eruption of sound, the susceptibility of the nerve is injured, and they be- come very deaf. We have, in a late publication, an example of this in blacksmiths, in whom, it is common to find a degree of deafness; and we frequently find old artillery-men quite deaf, from the long practice of their profession. The malleus* receives its name from a resemblance to a hammer or mallet : it is, in some degree, like a bludgeon ; the great head stands obliquely off from the body of the bone, (if such it may be called,) like the head of the thigh-bone.— Anatomists can scarcely be blamed, if, in describing the pro- cesses of this bone, they forget the body. I should consider that part as the body of the bone which stretches down from the circular margin of the tympanum, and is attached to the membrane, or what we should consider as the handle of the mallet. This part of the bone stands at an angle with the head and neck ; tapers towards the extremity, and is a little curved down towards the membrane. From the larger end of the body of the bone there stands out an acute process ; and * cr« plate 9. fig. 1. .v 2i4i OF THE HUMAN EAR. from the neck attaching the bulbous head to the body of the bone, there stands out a very slender process, which is often broken off. The great head of the bone does not form a regu- lar ball to be socketed in the body of the incus ; there are irre- gularities in the contiguous surfaces of both the bones. The incus* is the second bone of the chain : it receives its name from its resemblance to the blacksmiths anvil. It more resembles a tooth with two roots. On the surface ofthe body, it has a depression like the surface of the first molaris. Into this depression of the incus the head ofthe malleus is received. The shorter of the two processes, and the body of the bone lie on the margin of the circular opening ofthe tympanum ; and the acute point of this process is turned back into the opening of the mastoid cells. The long leg or process of the incus hangs down free into the tympanum,f and has attached to its point the os orbiculare. The os orbiculare is like a grain of sand, and is the small- est bone of the body : it is a medium of articulation betwixt the incus and stapes. The stapi s\ or stirrup is well named, for it has a very close resemblance to a stirrup-iron ; the little head is articulated with the os orbiculare : the arch of the bone is exactly like that of the stirrup-iron, but elegantly grooved within, so as to give lightness to the bone. The base answering to that part of the stirrup-iron upon which the foot rests, is not perforated, nor is it of a regular form, but is flat on one side, corresponding with the foramen ovale. It is this base ofthe bone which is attach- ed to the membrane stretched over the foramen ovale. CONNECTION AND MOTION OF THESE BONES. The malleus hanging on that part which we have called the neck of the bone, has the long handle or body of the bone stretched down upon the membrane of the tympanum. It is, consequently, destined to receive the oscillations of that mem- brane. The head ofthe malleus is so articulated with the incus, that the degree of motion communicated to that bone is much increased. • See plate 9. fig. 1. b. f See plate 4. fig. 1. o. r See plate 9. fig. 1. c. OF THE HUMAN FAR. 255 V .. cV*rfr»^*6*£2*. Cx"ofthe. MaUtao From this scheme, we see, that the head of the malleus is so articulated with the body of the incus, that the centre of motion of the incus is in a line drawn through the centre of its body, and, consequently, that the extremity of the long pro- cess, to which we see the os orbiculare and stapes attached, moves through a greater space than that which receives the impulse of the head of the malleus. Thus, a very small de- gree of motion communicated by the head of the malleus to the body ofthe incus, must be greatly increased in the extremity of the long process of the incus, and, consequently, this me- chanism ofthe bones essentially assists in giving strength to the vibration which is transmitted inward to the seat of the nerve. Theos orbiculare stands simply as a link of communication betwixt the extremity ofthe incus and the upper part of the stapes, and its use is evidently to promote the accurate and perpendicular motion of this long lever ofthe incus upon the head of the stapes : for, if this bone had not been so placed, the motion ofthe long lever of the incus must have given an obliquity to the impulse upon the stapes. The base of the stapes almost completely fills up the foramen ovale. It is seat- ed on a membrane which is stretched over the foramen.* The stapes, then, acts like a piston on a membrane of much less circumference than that ofthe membrana tympani. From all which considerations, we may learn how much, and how strong- ly, the agitation of the air in the outer canal ofthe ear is in- creased, before it strikes upon the fluids ofthe labyrinth. • Valfalva has the following obfervation ; fee page 24. « Olim namque in cujufdam furdi cadavere furditatis caufam in eo fitam inveni nempe quod indicata membrana in fubftantiam offeam indurata, unum continuatum os conftituebat cum bafi ftapedis et margine feneftr* ovalis." 256 Of the human ear. OF THE MUSCLES WITHIN THE TYMPANUM.] The laxator tvmpani runs in a fissure ofthe temporal bone on the outside of the eustachean tube, and is inserted into the long process ofthe malleus. The tensor tympani:}: runs also by the side ofthe eustachean tube ; it is inserted into the body ofthe malleus ; it is a long and slender muscle. The exter- nal or superior^ muscle of the malleus, which is denied by some anatomists to be of the nature of muscle, comes down from the upper part of the tympanum, and is fixed by a small tendon to the neck of the malleus. The stapedius|| is the smallest muscle, and is attached to the smallest bone. It has a small round fleshy belly, taking its origin from the rough side of the tympanum, and is inserted by a small round tendon into the head of the stapes. As all these muscles are inserted either into the malleus or stapes, and not into the middle bone, it would appear that their operation is chiefly upon the membranes ofthe tympanum, and ofthe foramen ovale, through the medium of the bone imme- diately attached to them. Mr. Home, in the Philosophical Transactions for 1800, as- serts, that the membrana tympani is muscular; that its fibres run from the circumference towards the centre ; and that they are attached to the malleus. But, what is the supposed use of this muscular membrane ? Mr. Home says, it is principally by means of this muscle that accurate perceptions of sound are communicated to the inter- nal organ ; that it is by means of this muscle that the membra- na tympani is enabled to vary its degree of tension, so as to re- ceive the vibrations in the quick succession in which they are conveyed to it. But we have seen, that the tension and relaxa- tion of the membrana tympani is already sufficiently provided ; for " the malleus has three muscles by which it is moved ; one of them is called the tensor, from its pulling the malleus inward and tightening the membrane ofthe tympanum ; the other two act in an opposite direction, and relax the membrane."* We should naturally suppose this to be sufficient; but, accor- ding to Mr. Home, these muscles act only to bring the mem- brane into such a degree of tension, as to enable the minuter f Mufculus proceffus minimi mallei. Valfalva. \. Mufculus procefTus majoris mallei. ' § Mufculus proceffus minoris. Valfalva. lj This mufcle is particularly ftrong in the horfe, where it was firft difcovered by Cafferius. *■ Mr. Home's Lecture. OF THE HUMAN EAR. 257 changes of the muscular membrane to have their full effect; and that the play of these muscles gives the perception of grave and acute tones. But the more favourite idea of Mr. Home is, that, upon the accurate adjustment of the membrana tympani, the difference between a musical ear, and one which is too imperfect to dis- tinguish the different notes in music, depends ; that this judg- ment or taste is owing to the greater or less degree of nicety with which the muscles of the malleus render the muscular membrane capable of being truly adjusted ; if the tension be perfect, all the vibrations produced by the action of the radia- ted muscle will be equally correct, and the ear truly musical. Mr. Home proceeds upon the idea, that the membrane of the tympanum is like a musical instrument, or, as he expresses himself, like a monochord ; but he is fundamentally wrong in supposing, that it requires a more delicate organ to be percepti- ble of musical tones than of articulate sounds or language. In the first place, we may require an explanation of the use of that muscle which is inserted into the stapes. This stape- dius muscle would seem to have the same use, and to affect that bone in the same manner, in which the muscles of the malleus affect it. Surely Mr. Home will not go so far as to say, that the membrana fenestra ovalis is also muscular. It may be further worthy of attention, in considering this subject, that whatever affects the membrane of the tympanum, affects, also, the membrane of the vestibule; that, if the one be relax- ed, the other is rendered tense, from the close connection that exists between them through the chain of bones. In the paper already quoted, the following case is given, as illustrating the manner in which the loss of the natural action of the muscles affects the ear, in regard to its capacity for mu-, sic. A gentleman, thirty-three years of age, who possessed a very correct ear, so as to be capable of singing in concert, though he had never learned music, was suddenly seized with a giddiness in the head, and a slight degree of numbness in the right side and arm. These feelings went off in a few hours, but on the third day returned ; and for several weeks he had returns ofthe same sensations. It was soon discovered that he had lost his musical ear ; he could neither sing a note in tune, nor in the smallest degree perceive harmony in the performance of others. For some time, he himself thought he had become a little deaf, but his medical attendant was not sensible of this in conversation. Upon going into the country, he derived s;reat benefit from exercise and sea-bathing. In this case, continues Mr. Home, there appeared to be ■.ome affection of the brain, which had diminished the action Vol III. . > K 258 OF THE HUMAN EA£. ofthe tensor muscles of the membrana tympani, through the medium of the nerve which regulates their actions ; this gradually went off, and they recovered their action. Another case is given of a young lady who was seized with a phrenzy which lasted several years, when, from being with- out a musical ear, she came to sing with tolerable correctness, to the astonishment of her friends. Now, to me, the symptoms of both cases argue an affection of the br;'in, and of the nerves. It is more probable that the delicate auditory nerve should be affected in such a disease, than that the portio dura should be affected. We now proceed to put the incorrectness of this reasoning concerning the muscular power of the membrane of the tympanum, in a more particular point of view. Mr. Cooper was led to pay particular attention to the action of the mem- brane ofthe tympanum, from being consulted in a case where the membrane was lost with little injury to the function of the organ.* He found, that, instead of the total annihilation of the powers ofthe organ, the gentleman was capable of hearing whatever was said in company, although the membrane of both ears was destroyed. He could even hear better in the ear in which no traces of the membrane remained. This gentle- man was only in a small degree deaf from the loss of the membrane ; but his ear remained nicely susceptible of musical tones, " for he played well on the flute, and had frequently borne a part in a concert ; and he sung with much taste, and perfectly in tune." This case puts aside, at once, that theory * Cafe. This gentleman had been attacked at the age of ten years, with an inflammation and' fuppuration in his left ear, which continued difcharging matter for feveral weeks: in the fpace »f about twelve months after the firft attack, fymptoms oi a fimilar kind took place in the right ear, from which matter iffued for a confiderable time. The difcharge, in each inftance, was thin, and extremely offenfive to the fmell; and in the matter, bones, or pieces of bones, were obfer- vable. The immediate confequence of thefe attacks was a total deafnefs, which continued for three months; the hearing then began to return ; and, in about ten months from the laft attack, was reftored to the ftate in which it at prefent re- mains. Having filled his mouth with air, he clofed the noftrils, and contracted the cheeks; the air thus compreffed, was heard torufh through the meatus auditorius with a whiffling noife, and the hair hanging from the temples became agitated by the current of air which iffued from the ear. When a candle was applied, the flame was agitated in a fimilar manner. Mr. Cooper then pafftd a probe into each ear, and he thought the membrane on the left fide was entirely deftroyed, fince the probe ftrnck againft the petrous portion of the temporal bone. The fpace ufually occupied by the membrana tympani, was found to bean aperture without one trace of membrane remaining. On the right fide, alfo, a probe could be paffed into the cavity of the tympanum; but here, by conducting it along the fides of the meatus, fome remains of the cir- cumference of the membrane, could be difcovered, with a circular optning in the rentre, about the fourth of an inch in diameter. See Trans. Roy. Soc. for i8c? Part. I. p. iji. ' OF THE HUMAN EAR, 259 which supposes the musical ear to depend on the minute play of the muscles of the tympanum. It appears, then, that the membrane of the tympanum may be destroyed, that the bones may be washed out by matter formed in'the tympanum, and still the patient retain the use of the organ. But this is only while the stapes retains its place j for, if this bone be also destroyed, the membrane of the fora- men ovale will be destroyed, and the fluids of the labyrinth be allowed to flow out, or be otherwise lost. We see, that, if the chain of bones, and only a part of the membrana tympani be left, still this shred of membrane, if it be not detached from the handle of the malleus, will vibrate in the air, and communicate those vibrations through the other bones to the vestibule. We see, also, that though the bones only remain, and though they be detached from the membrane of the tym- panum, the sound will still be communicated. We see, that a rupture of the membrane will not destroy the organization so far as to prevent the hearing, unless there follow clots of blood or inflammation, suppuration, or fungus. When Mr. Cooper found that the membrana tympani could be torn without injur- ing the organ, he did not stop short in his investigation : but as he found, by daily experience, that obstruction of the eusta- chean tube caused deafness, he thought of puncturing the membrana tympani, as a cure for that kind of deafness. He expected, by this operation, to give elasticity to the confined air. Accordingly, by puncturing the membrane of the tym- panum with a small trocar, he found, with much satisfaction. that the hearing was instantly restored.* Valsalva made a good distinction, when he said, that the membrane of the tympanum was not absolutely necessary to hearing, but only, to perfect hearing. We have, in this fact, the explanation of the following circumstance, amongst many others : |l In naturali surditate a conformations vitio inter tandum istud experimentum, (viz. an ossiculi et membrana tympani aliquis sit usus auditum,) quod inopinato et feliciter successit cuidam, qui intruso auri scalpio in aurem profundis- sime disrupit tympanum, fregitque ossicula et audivit." Bio- lanus Encherid. Anat. lib. 4. c. 4. See also Bonetus de Auri- um A feet. Observ. IV. Willis also knew, that the destruction of the membrana tympani did not deprive the person of hear^ ing. Vid. de Anima Brutorum. * I am only afraid that fuch pundures will not continue open, as in Valfalva's experiments they healed up very foon. But, when there is no other ingrefs and elcape to the air in the tympanum, but through the punottired hole, it may tend to keep it open. .360 OF THE HUMAN EAR. § 2. OF THE DISEASES OF THE TYMPANUM. Valsalva denied the existence of periosteum to these bones ofthe tympanum, while he allowed that they had minute ves- sels distributed on their surfaces : but these vessels he supposed to creep along the naked bone independently of any membrane. This, however, is contrary to all analogy. These bones, as well as the cavity of the tympanum, are covered with a very fine membrane or periosteum, which, after a minute injection, is seen covered with many small and distinct vessels, as well as with intermediate extravascular effusions of the injection, as happens in injecting in other membranes. When the tympanum becomes diseased, there is fetid matter collected, the membrane of the tympanum suffers, and the small bones are sometimes discharged. In such a oase, we have little farther to do than, by injections, to prevent the matter from accumulating. But, let us not confound this se- rious cause of deafness with the slighter suppurations in the outer passage of the tube : although such suppurations in the tube ofthe ear are apt, when neglected, to destroy the mem- brane of the drum or tympanum, and to spread disease to these internal parts. Authors make a display of the diseases of the membrane of the tympanum under the titles relaxatio, tensio, nimia, in- duratio, and diruptio tympani.* We have seen how little rup- ture of the membrane affects the hearing, and may thence conclude, that these fantastic imaginings about tension and relaxation of the membrane deserve little notice. The idea of relaxation of the membrane of the tympanum, I have no doubt, has arisen from the effect of cold and moist weather in injuring the hearing; but deafness from this cause is not produced by relaxation of the membrane of the tympanum, but by swelling of the mouth ofthe eustachean tube.f Induration of the membrane is less of an imaginary disease, since there are instances ofthe membrane becoming thickened by inflammation, or cartilaginous, or osseous. The mem- brana tympani has been found to adhere to the extremity of the * See Du Verney de Organo Auditus. p. 41. f " Relaxatio fit ab humore fuperfluo qui membraoam hanc humectat et fymp- toma hoc conimuniter cum obftructione meatus ex tumore glandularum con- jun&um eft, de qua jam fupra dictum eft : multum autem facit ad difficultatem audiendi in perfonis qua defluxionibus catarrhofis obnoxise funt et per eandem rationem auftri nebula: et aer pluvius auditum minuunt ut experiri quotidic poffu- mr.i." Du Verney loc. cit. p. 41. OF THE HUMAN EAR. 261 incus.* Independently of the want of elasticity, which such an adhesion must produce, the mechanical effects, the vibra- tion of the bones, is prevented, and a degree of deafness is ine- vitable. Fungous or polypous excrescences from the glands in the outer passage ofthe ear, press back and destroy the membrane of the tympanum. In the cure of these by the knife, caustic, or ligature, there is much danger of injuring the membrane.— Fungous tumours project from the membrane itself. A stroke upon the head will cause bleeding from the ear. This is often a sign of concussion of the brain ; that is to say, a shock so severe as to rupture the membrane of the tympanum* will most probably injure the brain,f after bleeding from the ear. Sometimes suppuration follows ;\. and blood flowing thus from the membrane of the tympanum, or other part of the ear, runs back into the cavity of the tympanum, and, filling it with coa- gulum, causes deafness, by obstructing the free motion of the bones and membrane. Mr. Cooper, in a case of this kind, punctured the membrane, and, after a discharge of blood which continued for ten days, the hearing was gradually restored.— It is supposed by that gentleman, that the blood effused be- comes, in some instances, organized, so as to obliterate the tympanum, causing permanent deafness. I think it is more likely that the blood has, in such cases, destroyed the mechan- ism by suppuration. The danger in suppuration and caries of the tympanum is, that the disease may penetrate backward into the mastoid cells and labyrinth, or into the brain itself; for inflammation and suppuration so confined amongst the deep recesses ofthe bone, must give great torture, and be apt to extend the mischief to the brain, or throw out matter on the inside of the cranium, the effect of which must be mortal. Such, I think, I have seen to be nearly the effect of suppuration deep in the ear. In a man who had been deaf for many years, and who was killed by a fracture of the skull, I found the celts of the temporal bones filled with matter, and a thin greenish fluid lay betwixt the temporal bone and dura mater. Valsalva gives us a case of injury of the head, in which the patient was relieved while the discharge of pus by the ear was free ; but he died when it was entirely suppressed.^ • See the London Philofophical Tranfactions for 1800. Part I. p. 5. t When Valfalva found the ventricles of the brain full of blood, and blood alfo m the tympanum, he fuppofed that the blood in the latter was derived from the brain through certain foramina which he difcovered. See p. 10. i See Valfalva, p. 16. V * § Valfalva, p. 83. See alfo a cafe in Bonetus de Aurium Affeft. Obferv. I. and 262 OF THE HUMAN EAR. But, after such suppuration as we should naturally think must totally destroy so delicate an organization, we are some- times agreeably surprised with a gradual recovery of the func- tion. This is owing to the nerve accommodating itself, or be- coming sensible to a less forcible impression, and by the ear acquiring new properties. I already mentioned, that the des- truction of the mechanism of the tympanum arose sometimes from suppurations beginning in the outward ear : and we may suppose that the apparatus within the tympanum, when par- tially hurt, is sometimes capable of being, in some degree, re- placed by a natural process ; of which, the following case from Valsalva is a remarkable proof. " I lately examined the ears of a woman whose hearing had been much injured by an ulcer of the tympanum and caries of the small bone. I found the ear in which she was deaf with- out a membrana tympani, and the stapes only remaining of the bones, and a fibrous mass, like an excrescence, in the tympa- num. But, in the tympanum of the opposite ear, I found the membrana tympani almost entirely eroded; so that the malleus and incus were uncovered, and distinctly seen. I could even observe, that the long process of the incus, which should be articulated with the head of the stapes, was separated from it: but nature had curiously restored the eroded membrane.— Thus, from the edge of the injured membrane, a new mem- brana tympani was obliquely stretched across the cavity of the tympanum, so as to exclude the malleus and incus from that cavity, but including the head of the stapes, as if nature, find- ing the separated bones no longer necessary, had attached the membrane to the head of the stapes.* We have already remarked, that, when the organ of one side is injured, we hear so much better with the other, that we attend only to the sensation conveyed by it, and neglect the duller sensation.— The consequence of this is, that the bad ear becomes worse. It is much like that effect which takes place in eyes by squint- ing. GuL Ballonius Epid. et Ephem. lib. 2. p. 270. When the matter was fuppreffed, there came pain of the head, and weight, which yielded to no remedy; on direc- tion, there was found an abfcefs within the fkull. In Bonetus loc. cit. a cafe is related, in which an ignorant furgeon compreffed a fiftulous ulcer in the ear, and fo caufed the death of the patient. • See Valfalva de Aure Humana Tract p. 79. In thofe deaf from birth, it has been twice found that the incus was wanting. See Bonetus de Aut. Ajfccl. Obferv. IV. OF THE HUMAN EAR. 2*63 SECTION III. OF THE LABYRINTH. The labyrinth is the internal ear; the proper seat of the sense of hearing. It consists of the vestibule or middle cavity ; of the semicircular canals; and of the cochlea. It has its name from those cavities and tubes leading into each other in so in- tricate a manner, as to be followed out with much difficulty. We understand that the cavities hitherto described in the human ear contain air, and communicate with the atmosphere: but, in the cavities we have now to describe, the nerve is ex- panded, and there is, in contact with it, not air, but an aqueous fluid. In treating of this division of our subject, we have, first, to attend to the forms of the cavities, as seen when sec- tions are made in the dry bones next to the soft parts contained in those cavities ; and, finally, to the distribution of the nerves. To give an idea ofthe exquisitely delicate and complex struc- ture ofthe many canals, excavations, openings, sulci and fovea?, of the bones ; of the tubuli, sacculi, and partitions of the mem- branes ; and, lastly, of the soft expansions of the nerves, with- out the assistance of plates, would be impossible. Albinus, in his academical annotations, begins very formally a chapter on the ear ; but, after a few words, dismisses the subject, refer- ring merely to his plates. The vestibule, or central cavity of the labyrinth, is of an oval form, and about a line and a half in diameter.* It has two remarkable pits or hollows in it, and has numerous fora- mina opening from it into the neighbouring cavities, besides lesser foramina for transmitting that portion ofthe nerve which is distributed on the sacs contained in it. One depression or fovea is in the back and lower part of the vestibule, another in the outer and superior part of it: the one is circular, the other semi-oval. Morgagni, and other anatomists, examining the dry bones, speculated on their use in reverberating the sound in the cavity ; but we must not regard them in this unnatural state : on the contrary, they contain in the living subjects membranous sacculi filled with fluid, and have the nerve ex- panded upon them. That foramen over which the stapes is placed, and which is called the foramen ovale, transmits the vibration into the vestibule. For the foramen ovale opens di- rectly into the vestibule, and through the vestibule, only, does * Du Verney CEuvres Anatomiques: ^64 OF THE HUMAN EAR. the vibration of the bones in the tympanum reach the other parts of the labyrinth. Semicircular canals. When we have cut into the ves- tibule, by taking away that portion ofthe os petrosum which is behind the meatus auditorius internus, we see five circular fo- ramina : these are the openings ofthe semicircular canals.— There are three semicircular canals ; and they are distinguish- ed by the terms, the superior or vertical, the posterior or oblique, and the exterior or horizontal. The one which, in this view, is nearest, is the opening common to the inner ends of the posterior and superior semicircular canals. When we pass a bristle into this common foramen, and direct it upward, it passes along the superior semicircular canal, and will be seen to descend from the upper part or roof of the vestibule, almost perpendicularly on the foramen ovale, which is open, and im- mediately opposite. If, again, we pass a bristle into the fora- men which is near the bottom of the cavity, (and which will be just upon the edge of the fracture that has laid open the ves- tibule, if not included in it,) it will come out by the opening common to the superior and posterior semicircular canal. It has passed, then, along the posterior canal. The two open- ings ofthe exterior or horizontal canal are upon the back part of the vestibule ; and the canal itself takes a circle which brings its convexity to the confines ofthe mastoid cells. These canals are formed of a very hard brittle bone, their calibre is so small as not to admit the head of a common pin ; they form some- what more than a half circle ; and of each of them, one of the extremities is enlarged like the ampullula of fishes. Valsalva imagined that the enlarged extremities of these tubes were trumpet-like, to concentrate and strengthen weak sounds.— We shall find, on the contrary, that there is in the human ear, as in fishes, a particular expansion ofthe nerve in these extre- mities of the tube, opposed to the circulatory vibration of the fluids in the canals. The cochlea. The third division of the labyrinth is the cochlea. It is so named from its resemblance to the shell of a snail, or from the manner in which its spiral lamina turn round a centre like a hanging stair. It has been minutely, but not simply, described : and, indeed, there can be nothing more difficult, than to describe it in words. When the os petrosum is cut from around the cochlea, it is seen to be of a pyramidal shape, and to consist of a scroll, ma- king large circles at the base, and gradually lesser ones to- wards the apex. It is formed in the most anterior part of the petrous bone, and has its apex turned a little downward and OF THE HUMAN EAR. 265 outward ; and the base is opposed to the great cul de sac of the internal meatus auditorius. The spiral tube, of which the cochlea is composed, form9 two turns and a half from the basis to the point ; and it consists of the same hard and brittle matter with the semicircular ca- nals. When the whole cochlea is cut perpendicularly in the dry state of the bones, and when the membranes have shrunk away or spoiled, the sides of the spiral canal appear like parti- tions, and are, indeed, generally described as such. Incon- sequence of the spiral tube of the cochlea having its sides cut perpendicularly, the cochlea appears as if divided into three circular compartments or successive stages ; but there is really no such division ; because the spiral turnings of the tube lead from the one into the other. Fig. 19. Cochlea. A. Scala ' B. Lamina Spiralis. C. c. Modiolus.—H. Infundibulum. What gives particular intricacy to the structure of this pare of the labyrinth, is the lamina spiralis. This spiral parti- tion runs in the spiral tube of the cochlea, so as to divide it in its whole length ; and, in the fresh state of the parts, this la- mina of bone is eked out by membrane, so as to form two per- fectly distinct tubes. These tubes are the scal^E cochlEjE ; they run into each other at the apex of the cochlea; but at the base, the one turns into the vestibule, and the other opens into the tympanum by the foramen rotundum. Vol. III. 2 L 266 or the human ear. In the middle of the cochlea there runs down a pillar, which is the centre of the circumvolutions of the scala;. It is called the modiolus. This pillar is of a spongy structure ; and through it the nerves are transmitted to the lamina spiralis, and sides of the cochlea. The modiolus opens towards the apex of the cochlea like a funnel; and when we take away the outward shell of the apex of the cochlea, which is Called the cupola, we look into this expansion of the upper part ofthe modiolus as into a funnel; it is therefore called the infundibulum. The infundibulum is that part which, in a perpendicular section, we should call the upper partition.* The scalar or divisions of the spiral tube of the cochlea, have a communication at their smaller extremities in the in- fundibulum ; and as, again, their larger extremities do not open into the same cavity, but one into the vestibule, and the other into the tympanum, the vibrating motion, which is com- municated through the cochlea, must pass either from the tym- panum into the foramen rotundum, circulate round the modio- lus by the scala tympani, pass into the lesser extremity of the scala vestibuli in the infundibulum, and circulate through it towards the base of the cochlea, until it pass into the vestibule; or it must pass from the scala vestibuli into the scala tympani. The first is the opinion of Scarpa and others. But I trust it will afterwards appear, that the oscillations of sound are in the first place conveyed into the vestibule, and thence circulate round both the semicircular canals and cochlea. In the dry bones, when we cut into the cochlea, there ap- pears a spiral tube, as I have described ; with a partition run- ning along it, and, of course, taking the same spiral turns with it towards the apex. This is the bony part of the lamina spi- ralis ; but, as the membrane which extends from its circular edge quite across the spiral tube of the cochlea, has shrunk and fallen away in the dry state of the parts, the lamina spiralis is like a hanging stair, and the scalae are not divided into distinct passages. In this bare state of the shell of the cochlea, when we cut away the cupola or apex of the cochlea, and look down upon the infundibulum, we see the extreme point of the lamina Spiralis rising in an acute hook-like point. The modiolus or central pillar, and the lamina spiralis which encircles it, are of the most exquisite and delicate structure ; for, through them the portion of the seventh nerve destined to the cochlea is conveyed. To say that the modiolus is formed of two central bones, is saying that there is no central column * That is fuppofing the cochlea to reft on its bale. OF THE HUMAN EAR. 267 at all; or, that the modiolus is the cavity seen in the bottom of the meatus auditorius : and to affirm, at the same time, that the modiolus is a nucleus, axis, or central pillar, is a con- tradiction in terms. When we break away the shell of the cochlea, and break off, also, the spiral lamina, we find the little funnel-like de- pression in the bottom of the meatus internus reaching but a little way up into the centre of the cochlea.—We find this de- pression of the meatus auditorius internus perforated with in- numerable small holes ; and these foramina are so placed as to trace a spiral line, because they give passage to the nerves go- ing to the spiral lamina, and must take the form of the dimin- ishing gyrations ofthe lamina spiralis. In the centre of these lesser foramina, which are seen in the bottom of the great foramen auditorium internum, there is a hole of comparatively a large size, which passes up through the middle of the pillar. The modiolus is formed of a loose spongy texture, and resem- bles the turns of a cork-screw ; and this spiral direction is a necessary consequence ofthe lamina spiralis, being a continua- tion of the spongy or cribriform texture of the modiolus. Internal periosteum of the labyrinth. We find that the vestibule, the semicircular canal, and cochlea, besides their soft contents, which we have yet to describe, have their proper periosteum, which, after a minute injection, appears vascular ; and this, as it has appeared to me, is particularly the case with the last mentioned division of the labyrinth. I see very considerable vessels distributed on the vestibule; par- ticularly, I see their minute ramifications on the circular fovea, while very considerable branches are seen to course along the semicircular canals. In the cochlea, I see distinct branches of vessels rising from the root of the lamina spiralis, and arching on the scalse, to the number of ten in the circle ; and, after a more minute injection, I have found the osseous part of the lamina spiralis tinged red, and the membranous part of a deep scarlet.* We have observed the meatus auditorius internus to be a large oval foramen in the posterior surface of the pars petrosa of the temporal bone. This tube transmits the seventh or au- ditory nerve. It is about five lines in diameter, but increases as it passes inward ; and appears to terminate in two deep fo- vea, which are divided by an acute spine. But the auditory foramen only appears to terminate in these fovea, for they are * In a preparation before me, I fee a confiderable artery derived from thebafilar ►rtery, and entering the meatus auditorius internum From this trunk, I conceive !iat moft of thefe arteries which I have defcribed, are derived. 268 OF THE HUMAN EAR. each perforated by lesser holes-, which lead into the three divi- sions ofthe labyrinth, whilst a larger one convex3 a portion of the nerve through the cavities of the temporal bone altogether, and out upon the side of the face. This larger foramen is in the upper part of the superior and lesser fovea. It first as- cends to near the surface of the petrous part of the temporal bone,* and then descends and turns backward and takes a course round the tympanum above the foramen ovale ; and close by the posterior semicircular canal. Its termination is the foramen stylo mastoideum.f Where this canal of the portio dura advances towards the surface of the pars petrosa, it is joined by a very small canal which extends from the videan hole on the fore part ofthe inclining face ofthe bone : again, after it has passed the tympanum, it is joined by a short canal which receives the corda tympani, after it has passed the tympanum. The other foramen which is in the upper and lesser fovea of the meatus internus, is rather a cribriform plate, as it is a deep pit with many foramina in it. These lead into the vestibule, and form the macula cribrosa vestibuli.:}: In the in- ferior and larger fovea, we observe several dark spots, which, when more narrowly examined, are also distinguished to be cribriform plates, or collections of lesser foramina. We par- ticularly observe that conical cavity which is perforated with many little pores for transmitting the nerve into the cochlea, and which we have already mentioned. From the form which these foramina take, this is named the tractus spiralis FORaminolosus. These foramina, after passing along the modiolus cochleae, turn at right angles, and pass betwixt the plates of the lamina spiralis. Besides the tractus spiralis foraminolosus, the bottom of the larger fovea has many irregular foramina, which are like cancelli: for very delicate speculae of bone stand across some of them. There is a range of these foramina which stretches from the tractus spiralis. This may properly be called the tractus calthratus rctus;§ they do not lead into the vestibule, but into the beginning of the lamina spiralis, where it divides the two scahe cochlea?, and turns the orifice of one Of them, (by a beautiful curve,) out into the tympanum. Nearer to the ridge which divides the two fovese of the meatus internus, there is a little pit which has also a cribriform plate (like that which is in the upper fovea, and is called ma- • In the fcetus, it becomes here fuperficial. f This is the aqueduct of Fallopius. * See Scarpa, Plate VII., fig. i, m. 5 Tracfus fpiralis foraminulofi initium. Scarpa. ©F THE HUMAN EAR. 269 cula cribrosa ;) opposite to this point, the inside of the vesti- bule is rough and spongy : it transmits a portion of the nerve to the sacculus in the hemispherical sinus ofthe vestibule.* OF THE SOFT PARTS CONTAINED IN THE LABYRINTH. Within the vestibule, semicircular canals, and cochlea, there are soft membranes independent of the periosteum. These form sacculi and tubes which contain a fluid, and have the extreme branches of the portio mollis distributed among them. Betwixt the soft and organized sacculi and tubes, and the periosteum of the osseous labyrinth, a watery fluid is exuded. . Sacculus vestibuli. The hemispherical and semi-elhp- tical fovese which we have described in the vestibule, contain, or at least receive partially, two sacculi. The sacculus which is in the hemispherical cavity, receives the most convex part of the sacculus vestibuli. This sac is distended with a fluid, and is pellucid, and fills the greater part ofthe vestibule ; for only a part of it is received into the fovea. It forms a complete sac, and has no communication with the other soft parts ofthe labvrinth, though lying in contact with the alveus communis, presently to be mentioned ; and being surrounded with an aqueous fluid, it must receive the impressions of sound in common with them. Alveus communis ductuum semicircularum. This sacculus lies in the semi-elliptical fovea of the vestibule, or, like the other sacculus, is in part received into it. This sac- culus receives the extremities of the tubuli membranacei which lie in the semicircular canals ; it is a little bag common to them, and connecting them altogether, as in fishes: it is filled with fluid, and is so pellucid, as to be distinguished with much difficulty.f Upon pressing the common sac, or the ampullula? of the semicircular canals, the fluids are seen to circulate along the membranous tubes of the canals. These two sacculi in the vestibule lie together, and firmly adhere, but do not communicate ; yet, (as may be easily imagined,) they cannot be separated without tearing the partition. Tubuli membranacii. The tubuli membranacii are the semicircular tubes which pass along the osseous semicircular canals, and to which the latter are subservient, merely as sup- porting them. They are connected by means ofthe common • Scarpa. f Proprio humore turgidusadeotranflucct ut ablongum bullulam aeream men- tiatur. Scirpa, p. 47. 2?0 OF THE HUMAN EAR. alveus in the vestibule, and form a distinct division of the organ. It was believed by anatomists formerly, that the osseous ca- nals had the pulp of the nerve expanded on their periosteum. But we find, on the contrary, that the membranous tubuli do not touch the bones, but are connected with them by a trans- parent cellular membrane-like mucus. Each of the semicircu- lar membranous tubes has one extremity swelled out into an ampulla of an oval form, answering to the diluted extremity of those osseous tubes which we have already described.— These ampullae have the same structure and use with those formerly mentioned in describing the ear in fishes. When the central belly of these tubes is punctured, both the ampullae and the membranous canals fall flaccid. Busides those vessels which we have described running along the periosteum of the cavities ofthe labyrinth, vessels also play upon the sacculi and membranous tubes. The ampullae of the tubes are, in a particular manner, supplied with blood- vessels.* In the cochlea there is also a pulpy membrane, independ- ent of the periosteum ; but of this I can say nothing from my own dissection. ©><*-— SECTION IV. OF THE NERVE. As the seventh pair of nerves arises in several fasciculi, they form what would be a flat nerve, were it not twisted into a cylindrical form, adapted to the foramen auditorium internum. While these fasciculi are wrapped in one common coat, they are matted together. In the canal, the nerve is divided nearly into two equal parts ;f to the cochlea and to the vestibulum and semicircular canals. Those fasciculi, which are destined for the vestibule, are the most conspicuous ; and on the portion * " Caetcrum univerfum hoc canaliculorum membraneorum alveique commu- nis machinamentum, fanguiferis vafis inftruitur, quorum crafliora, circum alveum communem, ferpentino inceffu, ludunt; crebra et conferta alia ampulla imprimis recipiunt ob quam caufam rubella plerumque funt et cruore veluti fuffufae."— Scarpa, p. 47- t Ofthe portio dura we have already fpoken. OF THE HUMAN EAR. 271 destined for the ampullae of the superior and external canal, there is formed a kind of knot or ganglion. Before the auditory nerves pass through the minute forami- na in the bottom of the meatus auditorius, they lay aside their coats and become more tender and of a purer white colour ; and, by being still further subdivided by the minute branching and divisions of the foramina, they cannot be followed, but finally expand in a white pulpy-like substance on the sacs and ampull*. W^ must, however, recollect that there was a differ- ence to be observed in the apparent texture of these expanded nerves in the lower animals : we may observe here, also, that part of the nerve which is expanded on the common belly or sacculus tubulorum, is spread like a fan upon the outer sur- face of the sac, and has a beautiful fibrous texture ; but upon the inside of the sac, upon which it is finally distributed, it loses the fibrous appearance. We must suppose its final distribu- tion to be in filaments so extremely minute, that we may call it a pulp ; though by the term it must not be understood that an unorganized matter is meant. That part ofthe nerve which stretches to the ampullae, im- mediately divides into an opaque white mucous-like expansion. Beyond these ampullae, there has been no expansion of the nerve discovered in the membranous tubes. The sacculus vestibuli* is supplied by a portion of the nerve which perforates the macula foraminulosa in the centre ofthe osseous excavation, or that which receives into it part of the sac. This part of the nerve is expanded in a soft mucous-like white matter in the bottom and sides ofthe sac. A division of the nerve, as we have already explained, pass- es from the meatus auditorius internus through the cribriform base ofthe modiolus into the cochlea. Owing to the circular or spiral form of the foramina when the nerve is drawn out from the meatus, its extremity appears as if it had taken the impression of these foramina from the extremities of the torn nerves preserving the same circular form. These nerves, passing along the modiolus and scalae cochleae, are in their course subdivided to great minuteness. Part of them perfor- ate the sides of the modiolus, whilst others pass along betwixt the two plates of the lamina spiralis, and out by the minute holes in the plates and from betwixt their edges. Lastly, a central filament passes up through the centre of the modiolus, and rises through a cribriform part into the infundibulum to supply the infundibulum and cupola. • i. c. In oppofition to the facculus tubulorum 272 OF HEARING IN GENERAL. Where the nerves pass along the lamina spiralis, their deli- cate fibres are matted together into a net-work. According to the observations of Dr. Monro, they are quite transparent on their extremities. CHAP. V. OF HEARING IN GENERAL. VV HEN aerial undulations were, by the experiments on the air pump, first proved to be the cause of sounds, philosophers looked no further to the structure of the ear than to discover an apparatus adapted to the reception of such vibrations.— When they observed the structure ofthe membrane ofthe tym- panum, and its admirable capacity for receiving these motions of the atmosphere, they were satisfied, without considering the immediate objects of sensation. In the same way, an igno- rant person, at this day, would rest satisfied with the fact that sound was received upon the drum of the ear. But after so minutely explaining the anatomy ofthe ear, it becomes us to take a general survey of a structure the most beautiful which the mind can contemplate. We cannot say that it surpasses in beauty the structure of other parts of the body : but the parts are adapted to each other, in a manner so simple, efficient, and perfect, that we can better understand and appreciate the har- mony of their structure than that of organs, which perform their functions by qualities and actions almost entirely unintel- ligible to us. We see that the external ear collects the vibrations of sound at it moves in the atmosphere with circular undulations from the sonorous body : here we may observe, that where the ne- cessities of animals require them to be better provided with this external part ofthe organ than man, the superiority is only in the simple perception of sound; while man, from the per- fection of the internal organ, excels all animals in the capacity ofthe ear for articulate and musical sounds. From the external ear we observe, that the trumpet-like tube conveys the sound inward to the membrane of the tympanum. OF HEARING IN GENERAL. 275 Behind the membrane of the tympanum, there is a cavity which, in order to allovf of the free vibration of the membrane, contains air.—When this air is pent up, by the swelling or ad- hesion ofthe eustachean tube, the elasticity ofthe air is dimi- nished, and the membrane prevented from vibrating.* In the tympanum, we have seen that the operation of the chain of bones is to increase the vibration received upon the membrane of the tympanum, and to transmit it to the mem- brane of the foramen ovale. In the cavity of the tympanum we observed two foramina, the foramen ovale and the foramen rotundum, both of which lead into the labyrinth ; but one of them (the foramen ovale) into the vestibule, the other (the fo- ramen rotundum) into the scala ofthe cochlea: now it becomes a question, whether the oscillations of sound pass by one or by both of these foramina ? It is the opinion of many, that while the chain of bones re- ceives the motion ofthe membrane ofthe tympanum, the mo- tion of this membrane at the same time causes a vibration of the air in the tympanum which reaches the foramen rotundum, and thus conveys a double motion through the cochlea. In the labyrinth there is no air, but only an aqueous fluid : now this, we have seen, conveys a stronger impulse than the atmosphere ; stronger in proportion to its greater specific gra- vity and want of elasticity ; for an elastic fluid like air may be compressed by concussion, but an inelastic fluid must transmit fairly every degree of motion it receives. But if the fluid of the labyrinth be surrounded on all sides ; if, as is reallv the case, there can be no free space in the labyrinth, it can partake of no motion, and is ill suited to receive the oscillations of sound. Against this perfect inertia of the fluids of the labyrinth I con- ceive the forami n rotundum to be a provision. It has a membrane spread over it, similar to that which closes the fora- men ovale. As the foramen ovale receives the vibrations from the bones of the tympanum, they circulate through the intricate windings ofthe labyrinth, and are agiin transmitted to the air in the tympanum by the foramen rotundum. With- out such an opening there could be no circulation ofthe vibra- tion in the labyrinth ; no motion of the fluids communicated through the contiguous sacculi, nor through the scalaeofthe cochlea; because t^"re would be an absolute and uniform resist- ance to the motionof the fluids.—But, as it is, the provision is beautiful. The membrane of the foramen rotundum alone gives way of all the surfaces within the labyrinth, and this • See Recberchesy &c. relatives a Vorgane de Vouii tSf a la propagation d:. wns, par M. Perolle, Socict. R. de Medecine, torn. iii. Vol. III. 2 M 2 74 OF HEARING IN GENERAfe. leads the course ofthe undulations of the fluid in the labyrinth in a certain unchangeable direction. To me it appears, that to give a double direction to the motion of the fluids, or to the vibration in the labyrinth, far from increasing the effect, would tend to annihilate the vibra- tions of both foramina bv antagonizing them. The common idea is, that there is a motion communicated through the mem- brane of the foramen rotundum along the scala tympani, and another through the foramen ovale into the vestibule, and through the vestibule into the scala vestibuli ; and that the concussion of these meet in the infundibulum of the cochlea. But as there is no space for motion in the fluids in either the one or other of these tracts, the vibration must have been re- ceived in the infundibulum at the same time that the motion was communicated to the membranes ofthe foramen ovale and rotundum ; for if a tube full of water, a mile in length, loses one drop from the extremity, there must be an instantaneous motion through the whole to supply its place. The evident consequence of this double motion would be, (if they were of the same strength) to suppress all motion or vibration in the fluids of the labyrinth. But we have shown that the strength of vibration commu- nicated to the foramen ovale and foramen rotundum are not the same : for the mechanism of the bones in the tympanum is such as to accumulate a greater force or extent of motion on the membrana ovalis, than is received upon the membrana tympani ; therefore the greater vibration which is communi- cated through the medium of the air in the tympanum, can- not be supposed capable of opposing the stronger vibration which circulates from the foramen ovale through the labyrinth, and returns by the foramen rotundum. Besides, the air in the tympanum has a free egress, and cannot therefore strike the membrane on the foramen rotundum forcibly. For these several reasons, I conceive that the following ac- count ofthe manner in which the sound is conveyed is errone- ous :—" Et quo ad zonam cochleae spiralem quoniam altera cochlese scala in vestibulo patet, altera a fenestra rotunda initium sumit, atque earum utraque aqua labyrinthi repleta est, et scala? in apice cochleae simul communicant, zona spira- lis inter duas veluti undas sonoras media, a tremoribus per vasim stapedis, simulque ab iis per membranam fenestra rotunda advectis utraque in facie percellitur et una cum percil- lis acoustici neryi per eam distributis contremiscit: quibus porro omnibus, in ampullis videlicet canaliculorum semicir- cularium, alveo eorum communi, sacculo vestibuli spherico OF HEARING IN GENERAL. 275 et lamina cochleae spirali acoustici nervi affectionibus auditum contineri nemo non intelligit."* As to the immediate seat of the sense of hearing, there can- not, after what has been explained regarding the distribution of the nerves, remain any controversy; though before the structure of the ear was so well understood, some imagined that the vestibule, others that the middle part of the semicir- cular canals, was the seat of hearing ; others, again, that the lamina spiralis was better adapted for receiving the vibrations of sound. It is evident that the soft expansion of the nerve, in all the three divisions of the labyrinth, is destined to receive the undulation of the contained fluids, and that this motion of the fluids gives to the nerve, or to the nerve and brain con- jointly, the sensation of hearing. Since we have, in some measure, traced the structure of the ear from the animals of a simple structure to those of a more complicated organization, and have observed some parts of the ear common to all animals, some peculiar to certain or- ders ; and since all have the sense of hearing, more or less acute, it becomes natural to inquire what are the parts of the organ the most essential to the mere perception of sound, and what parts conduce to a more perfect state of the sense. All the external apparatus of the ear is not necessary to give the animal the simple perception of sound. There are many classes of animals altogether without them, and even in man we see that they are not absolutely necessarv; since when deprived of them by disease, man still enjoys the sense. He is deprived of no essential variety of the sensation ; he is ca- pable of perceiving the distinctions of articulate sound ; and still possesses his musical ear. The external apparatus of the ear, the membrane of the tympanum, the little bones, and even die external ear, only receive, concentrate, and increase the tremors of the external air, and render the slighter im- pressions audible. It would appear, that the simple sac of the vestibule is suf- ficient to receive the impression in some animals, and that in many the vestibule and semicircular canals form solely the organ of hearing. It is evident, therefore, that these are the most essential parts. We see also an intention in the strict similarity of figure and place in these canals through all the varieties of animals, from fishes to man. It would seem to indicate, that there is in .their form and position a peculiar pro- vision for the oscillation of sound producing the full effect. We find, however, that the cochlea is imperfect in birds ; • Scarpa, p. 6f. 276 OF HEARING IN GENERAL. and that it is fully formed only in man, and in quadrupeds : we must, therefore, conclude, that it is subservient to the more exquisite sensations. I do not conceive that the cochlea or any part of the organ particularly conduces to the bestowing of a musical ear, although it is by hearing that we are capable of the perceptions of melody and harmony, and of all the charms of music ; yet it would seem, that this depends upon the mind, and is not an operation confined to the organ. It is enjoyed in a very different degree by those whose simple faculty of hearing is equally perfect.* Even after studying, with, all diligence, the anatomical structure of the ear, we cannot but be astonished with the varieties to be found in the sensation ; for example :—" The ear is capable of perceiving four or five hundred variations of tone in sound, and probably as many different degrees of strength ; by combining these, we have above twenty thousand simple sounds that differ either in tone or strength, supposing every tone to be perfect. But it is to be observed, that to make" a perfect tone, a great many undulations of elastic air are required, which must all be of equal duration and extent, and follow one another with perfect regularity ; and each un- dulation must be made up of the advance and recoil of in: pumerable particles of elastic air, whose motions are all uni- form in direction, force, and time. Hence we may- easily • conceive a prodigious variety in the same tone, arising from irregularities of it occasioned by constitution, figure, situa- tion, or manner of striking the sonorous body ; from the con- stitution of the elastic medium, or its being disturbed by- other motions ; and from the constitution of the ear itself upon which the impression is made. A flute, a violin, a hautboy, a French horn, may all sound the same tone, and be easily distinguishable. Nay, if twenty human voices sound the same note, and with equal strength, there will still be some difference. The same voice, while it retains its proper dis- tinctions, may yet be varied many ways; by sickness or health, youth or age, leanness or fatness, good or bad humour. The same words, spoken by foreigners and natives, nay by different provinces ofthe same nation, may be distinguished."! That this variety of sensation does not entirely depend upon the structure, but is the operation of the sense and intellect conjointly, appears from the long experience which is requisite to give this perfection. Nature is bountiful in providing the jneans of simple and acquired perception, but the latter is the • See Rcid's Enquiry. ■£ P.eid's Enquiry, p. 98. DISEASES OF THE INTERNAL EAR. 277 result of long experience, and continued effort, though we have lost the feeling of its being originally a voluntary effort. * CHAP. VI. OF THE DISEASES OF THE INTERNAL EAR. KJ F all the causes of deafness, that which proceeds from an organic disease of the brain is, of course, the most dangerous. In apoplectic affections, with faltering of speech and blind- ness, deafness is also produced by the general affection ofthe brain. But worst of all is the case where a tumor of the brain, or betwixt the cerebrum and cerebellum, compresses the origin of the nerves.* I have, however, observed, that a tumor in the vicinity of the origin of the auditory nerve, though it ran its course so as to prove fatal, had rather a con- trary effect on the organ of hearing ; and while the pupil of the eye remained stationary, and the man saw indistinctly, he had a morbid acuteness of hearing. This had probably been pro- duced by the surrounding inflammation having extended to the origins of the auditory nerves. The auditory nerve often becomes morbidly sensible, and the patient suffers by the acute- ness of perception, or is distressed with the tinnitus aurium, which is, in this case, analogous to the flashes of light which sometimes affect the eye in total darkness, and which those ex- perience who are totally blind or have cataract. So morbidlv acute does the sensation sometimes become, that the slightest motion of the head will excite a sensation like the ringing of a great bell close to the ear.f Wkh delirium, vertigo, epilepsy, • Vidit Clariff. Dom. Drelincurtius Tumorem fteatomatis confiftentia pugnique magnitudine, cerebrum et cerebellum inter, eo precise loco ubi conarium utrique fubfteritur choroidis plexus ahe, fpatio femeftri a fenfibili lxfione, caecitatem primo, furditatem fubinde, omnium denique fenfuum et functionum animalium abolitionem et necem ipfam iutuiiffe." Bonet. vol. i. p. 143. ob. 53. In Sandifort Obs. Anatom. Path. torn. i. p. u6. there is an inftance in which the auditory nerve had a cartilaginous tumor adhering to it. t F. Hoffman. Coniult. et Refponf. Cas. xxxix. We muft not, however, take his reafoning after what we have feen of the ft.ruc~f.ure of the ear, that the vifcid petuita, feparated ii> the concha, cochlea, and labyrinth, refolved into halitus endeavouring to efcapj, prodticcs the fufurrus et tinnitus aurium> 278 DISEASES OF THE INTERNAL EAR. hysteria, the increased sensibility ofthe organ becomes a source of painful sensation. In apoplectic affections, with faltering of speech and blind- ness, there is also deafness ; because the affection of the brain is general. With a paralytic state of the muscles of the face, there is deafness ofthe corresponding ear, if the affection ofthe nerve be near the brain ; which is explained by the strict con- nection betwixt the auditory nerve and the nervus communi- cans faciei. From observing the course of the nervus com- municans faciei through the temporal bone, and its connections in the tympanum, we understand whv, in violent tooth-ach and in the tic douloureuse we find the eustachean tube and root of the tongue affected. The ear is sometimes affected by sym- pathy of parts : for example—from foulness of the stomach and bowels ; and the same reason may be assigned for the complaint of hypochondriacs, that they are molested with strange sounds. And in the case of intestinal worms, we find the patient complaining of murmuring and ringing in the ears.* Ofthe organic diseases ofthe labyrinth, there is little on record. It would appear, that the fluids become often so altered in their consistence as to prove an absolute destruction to the organ. Mr. Cline found in a person deaf from birth, that the whole la- byrinth was filled with a substance like cheese. A disease ofthe auditory nerve, like that ofthe retina in the gutta serena, is no unfrequent complaint.f We ought, at all events, before proposing any operation on the ear, to observe whether the disease be not in the seat ofthe sense, and such as will not yield to any practice ; otherwise, as in the more important operations when done in circumstances which preclude the possibility of success, the public is impress- ed with its inefficacy and danger, and we are precluded from giving relief on occasions more favourable for our operations. Deafness, in acute fever, is a good sign ; because, say authors, it argues a metastasis of the morbific matter. We should rather say, because it argues a diminution ofthe mor- bid sensibility ofthe brain.:}: But the surcharge of the vessels * Hoffmann. Med. Confult. Boerhaave. The fympathy is fometimes exerted in another way :—" Ex muflces tonitru aut fola meatus auditorii externi contrecta- tione, vomitus urinas incontinentia." Sauv. t Dyfecoea (atonica) fine organorum fonos tranfmittentium vitio evidente. Cullen. Cophofis Sauv. Copbofis a Paracuft diftinguitur ut atnaurofts ab amblyopia refpecliva. Sauv. | But the difficulty of knowing when the deafnefs is the refult of difeafe, or malconformation in the parts transmitting the found to the nerve, and when in the brain and nerve, has led to more uncertainty and confufion with regard to the fpecies and varieties ofthe diforders of the ear than in the eye; where the tranfpa- r.^ncy of the humours aflift in the definition. DISEASES OF THE INTERNAL EAR. 27"9 of the brain or of the auditory nerve will also produce deafness and unusual sensations in the ear: as in suppression of the menses and haemorrhoids, in surfeit, &c.in which cases it is of- ten preceded by vertigo and head-ach. There occurs a very curious instance of analogy betwixt the ears and eyes in the following cases :—" A certain eminent musician, when he blew the German flute, perceived at the same time the proper sound of it and another sound of the same rhythm or measure, but of a different tone. His hearing seemed thus to be doubled. It was not an echo ; for he heard both sounds at one and the same moment: neither were the sounds accordant and harmonious, for that would have been sweet and pleasant to his ear. Having for several days persis- ted in his attempts, and always been shocked with this grating sound, he at last threw his flute aside. The day before he first became sensible of this strange affection, he had impru- dently walked in a very cold and damp evening, and was seiz- ed with a catarrh in the right side. Whence, probably, it arose that the natural tone of that ear was altered : the sound appeared more gfave, and dissonant from that received by the left ear. Having recovered from the catarrh, the distinct hearing of his ear was restored." Sauvage, who relates this case, subjoins another :—" Very lately," says he, " a foreigner came for advice in a similar sit- uation. He complained that when any person spoke to him, he heard the proper sound of the voice, and at the same time another sound accompanying it an octave higher, and almost intolerable to him. As it must have happened that if the ac- companying sound had preserved the true octave above the voice, and been synchronous with it, the ear would have re- ceived them as one sound, and been pleased with their concord: it is probable that the accompanying sound was not in unison with the true." Sauvage, vol. iii. p. 3.72. BOOK III. OF THE NOSE AND THE ORGAN OF SMELLING. OF THE SENSE OF SMELLING*. OMELLING seems to be the least perfect of the senses. It conveys to us the simplest idea, and is the least subservient to the others. The sensations it presents to us we can less ea- sily recal to memory ; and the associations connected with it are less precise and definite than those of the senses of hearing and seeing. Animal and vegetable bodies, during their life, growth, pu- trefaction, and fermentation, and, most probably, all bodies whatever, are perpetually giving out effluvia of great sub- tlety. Those volatile particles repelling each other, or being diffused in the atmosphere, are inhaled by the nose, and con- vey to the pituitary membrane of the nose the sensation of smell. Immediately within the nostrils, there are two cavities se- parated by the bony partition, which has been already descri- bed in treating of the bones. These cavities enlarge as they proceed inward, and open backward into the throat, and, consequently, communicate with the moi\*n. They extend upwards and sideways into the cells of th^bcrfies of the face ; and the pituitary membrane is mucJh. extended over the surfa- ces of these winding passages, and over the irregular surfaces ofthe nose, formed by the projecting cartilages of the aethmoid and lower spongy bones ; which, also, have already been suffi- ciendv described. OF THE SENSE OF SMELLING. 281 The cavities ofthe nose lead into many cells in the bones of the face, which, if not subservient to the organ, assist in giv- ing vibration and tone to the voice. The cavities of the nose are continued upwards into the frontal sinuses, and into the cells ofthe aethmoid bone ; backward and upward into the sphenoid sinus ; and upon the sides into the antra highmoriana or sinuses of the upper maxillary bones. The membrane covering the surface of these bones is called the membrana schneideriana, the mucous or pitui- tary membrane. It is of a glandular structure, or is lubrica- ted by the mucus discharged by the follicules on its surface.-— This secretion on the surface of the membrane, is to defend its delicate and sensible structure from the effects of the air, while it preserves the sensibility of the surface and the delicate ex- panded nerve. It seems of a nature to allow the effluvia to penetrate it. It appears to me, that a very particular provision has been made against the too powerful effect of smells while the mem- brane is inflamed, and, consequently, in a state of great sen- sibility. When the membrane is inflamed, the secretion is so altered, that the effluvia do not penetrate so as to effect the nerve in its state of extreme sensibility. We have already described the course of the first pair of nerves or the olfactory nerves, and also those branches of the common nerves which are distributed to the membrane of the nose. These, it were superfluous to recapitulate here. It was suggested as the most probable opinion, that the olfacto- ry nerve alone is subservient to these parts considered as the organ of smelling, and that the adventitious branches supply merely the common sensibility which the nerves bestow pro- miscuously over the body. This sensible and nervous mem- brane, and this glandular and secreting membrane, is ex- tremely vascular, as it is natural a priori to suppose ; and this vascularity, this glandular structure, and its exposed state, makes it liable to frequent disease : and, when diseas- ed, when tumours and polypi form in it, we must never forget the extreme thinness and delicacy of the surrounding bones, which, when they are either pressed upon by tumours, or have their membranes eroded, are soon totally destroyed.— It is with manifest design, that the organ which so particular- ly admonishes us of the effluvia diffused in the air we breathe, should have been placed in the entrance to the canal of the lungs. It is, in some measure, a guard to the lungs, as the sensibility of the tongue guards the alimentary canal. That the humidity ofthe membrane either preserves the sensibility »t the nose, or is a solvent, in which the effluvia dissolving Vol. III. 2 N 282 OF THE SENSE OF SMELLING. affect the nerves, is evident; for the sense is lost when the membrane becomes dried. The sensibility is also affected in various ways by too abundant a mucous discharge, or by an alteration of its natural properties ; by the infarction and thickening of the membrane, as in ozaena; by obstructions preventing the current of air through the nose, as in po- lypi, &c* BOOK IV. OF THE MOUTH, SALIVARY GLANDS, AND ORGAN OF TASTE. .**' CHAP. I. OF THE MOUTH AND TONGUE. ALTHOUGH it is not necessary to say, that the mouth is u betwixt the nose and chin," that " there are lips serviceable to the purposes of speaking, eating, and drinking ;" though it be not necessary to lay it down circumstantially, that there are cheeks on the face, and a tongue in the mouth ; yet is there much important anatomy, and very useful knowledge necessa- ry to be acquired here. Ofthe tongue, it is only necessary to observe its form, and the terms used in its description. The body of the tongue consists of the muscular fibres, with intermingled fat and cel- lular membrane ; and the muscles which chiefly compose it, are the linguales, styloglossi, and genioglossi muscles. The base of the tongue is connected with the os hyoides. The surface applied to the roof of the mouth is the dorsum ; and on this surface there is to be observed a middle line, di- v iding the tongue into two lateral portions ; a division which is very accurately preserved in the distribution of the blood- vessels and nerves of either side. On the dorsum, towards the base, the surface is rough with the papillae maxima? and fora- men caecum of Morgagni. These papillae are like small glands seated in little superficial fossulse, so that their broad mush- room-like heads alone are seen ; but they are connected with the bottom ofthe fossulae by short stems or necks. This is al- 284 OF THE MOUTH AND TONGUE. together a glandular apparatus. The foramen caecum is, in truth, only an enlarged apparatus of the same kind, for, in the bottom of this foramen, many glandular papillae stand up ; and in its bottom small foramina have been observed, which are generally conceived to be the mouths of small salivary ducts.* This secreting mucous surface begins here, towards the root of the tongue, to resemble the glandular structure of the oesophagus, which, by bedewing the surface of the morsel, fits it for an easy passage through the gullet. In this rough- ness of the root of the tongue, there seems to be a provision for the detention of the sapid particles, and the prolonging of the sensations of taste. The papillae peculiar to the human tongue, are divided into four classes. 1. These larger papillae upon the root of the tongue are the truncatae; and they are often studded on the dorsum of the tongue in a triangular form. 2. The fungi- formes are obtuse papillae found more forward on the tongue ; they are little hemispherical tumid papillae, or of a cylindrical shape, with an obtuse apex. These are interspersed among the 3d division, the most numerous and universally prevalent papillae, viz. villosi or conicae. 4. The more important papillae, however, are those which are endowed with peculiar sensibility to sapid bodies; they are to be distinguished by their superior redness and brilliancy upon the point and edges ofthe tongue. The' tongue is invested with the cuticle and rete mucosum like the skin in other parts. The lower surface of the tongue is similar to the general lining membrane ofthe mouth, being a villous and secreting surface. It is reflected off upon the bot- tom of the mouth. It forms here the frenulum linguae. This ligament seems evidently intended to limit the motion of the point of the tongue backwards. I believe a very false opinion has much prevailed, that the shortness of this ligament, or its being continued too far forward toward the point ofthe tongue, prevents the child from sucking. The tongue, as I conceive, would sufficiently perform the necessary action on the mother's nipple, although its lower surface were universally adhering to the bottom of the mouth. But, observe the bad consequences which may arise from cutting this frenulum, from the obstinate importunity of the nurse, or the weakness of a surgeon. The ranine vein or artery which runs near it may be cut, and the child will continue sucking and swallowing its own blood ; and children have actually died, and the stomach has been found • Vater, who injeded thefe du«< CHAP. III. VELUM PALATINUM; UVULA; ARCHES OF THE PALATE ; AND AMYGDALAE. J. HE velum pendulum palati is the vascular and fleshy membrane, which, hanging from the bones of the palate, di- vides the mouth from the fauces and throat. It is not a sim- ple membrane, but has betwixt its laminae many glands, which open upon its surface by little patent follicules, and is thickened and strengthened by muscular fibres: so that it is more of a fleshy partition, stretching backward and eking out the palate, than a hanging membrane. The edge of the velum palati is not square, but turned into elegant arches ; and, from the middle of the arches ofthe pal- 288 ARCHES OF THE PALATE. ate, hangs down the uvula, so named from its resemblance t© a grape. It is a large, soft, and glandular papilla, peculiarlj irritable and moveable, having in it muscular fibres, and hang- ing from the moveable soft palate. It seems to hang as a guard over the fauces, and, by its sensibility, in a great degree governs the operation of these parts. The arches of the palate or fauc es descend on each side from the velum palati. They are muscular fibres, cover- ed with the soft vascular and follicular membrane ofthe fau- ces.* There are two on each side. These arches stand at some distance from each other, so that the isthmus ofthe fau- ces resembles the double-arched gateway of a citadel, or the arched roof of a cathedral, with the uvula hanging as from the central union of four semicircular arches. Fig. 20. Uvula, JwysduL. The tongii Anterior Arch, "* Posterior Arch ef the Palate. Behind the soft palate is the opening of the nose backward into the throat. Now, the use of the velum is that in swal- lowing it may be drawn up like a valve upon the posterior opening of the nose ; and there being, at the same time, an ac- tion ofthe arches of the palate, the whole is brought into a funnel-like shape, directing the morsel into the pharynx and gullet. In this action, the direction of the food assists, but, * See vol. I. Conftri&or Ifthmi faufcium and Palato-pharyngeu*. OF THE SENSE OF TASTING. 289 in vomiting, the valvular-like action ofthe velum is not so ac- curate ; and often the nose is assailed with the contents of the stomach. amygdala. Under the velum palati, and betwixt the arches ofthe palate on each side, lies a large oval gland ofthe size and shape of an almond. These are the tonsils or amyg- dalae. The amygdala is a mucous gland: it is loosely covered with the investing membrane of these parts: its surface is seen, even in a living person, to be full of large cells like lacunae ; these communicate ; and the lesser mouths of the ducts open into them. The gland is of a soft relaxed nature, adapting itself to the extensive motion of those parts. From this naturally loose texture, and from its being a vascular and secreting body, exposed to the immediate vicissitudes of wea- ther, it is often inflamed, and greatly impedes the action of the surrounding muscular fibres in the action of deglutition. The use ofthe amygdala is evidently to lubricate the passage ofthe throat, and facilitate the swallowing of the morsel; and, for this reason, are the mouths of its ducts cellular and irre- gular, that they may retain the mucus until ejected by the ac- tion of deglutition. In this operation, the amygdalae are as- sisted by numerous lesser glands, which extend all over the arches of the palate and pharynx. But these are parts which come again to be recapitulated, as introductory to the account of the structure of the oesophagus and stomach, in the succeed- ing volume. CHAP. IV. OF THE SENSE OF TASTING. v/N the surface ofthe tongue are to be observed erect papil- lae. In these the extremities of the gustatory nerve are ex- pended, and they are the seat of the sense of tasting. These papillae are in the true skin of the tongue, and are extremely vascular. They are covered by the rete mucosum, and a very fine cuticle, and indeed they have much resemblance to the papillae ofthe skin; while, betwixt these papillae, there is a fleece Vol. III. 2 O 290 OF THE SENSE OF TASTING. or down bearing a perfect analogy to the villi of the skin. The papillae, which are the organs of taste, are to be seen on the point and edge of the tongue, and consist of a pretty large vascular soft point which projects from an opaque and white sheath. If we take a pencil and a little vinegar, and touch or even rub it strongly on the surface of the tongue, where those papillae are not, the sensation only of a cold liquid is felt; but when you touch one of these papillae with the point of the brush, and at the same time apply a magnifying glass, it is seen to stand erect and rise conspicuously from its sheath, and the acid taste is felt to pass as it were backward to the root of the tongue. The exquisitely sensible papillae are placed only on the point and edge of the tongue ; for the middle of the tongue is rough, and scabrous, not to give the sensation of taste, but to force the sapid juices from the morsel, or break down the solids against the roof of the mouth, and assist in their solution. The more delicate and vascular papillae would be exposed to injury if situated on the middle of the tongue. Before we taste, the substance dissolved in the saliva flows over the edges and point of the tongue, and then only comes in contact with the organ of taste. It would appear, that every thing which affects the taste must be soluble in the saliva ; for without being dissolved in this fluid, it cannot enter readily into the pores and inequalities of the tongue's surface. A curious circumstance, in the sense of taste, is its sub- serviency to the act of swallowing. When a morsel is in the mouth and the taste is perfect, our enjoyment is not full: there follows such a state of excitement in the uvula and fauces, that we are irresistibly led to allow the morsel to fall backward, when the tongue and muscles of the fauces seize upon it with a voracious and convulsive grasp and convey it into the stomach.—The measure of enjoyment is then full. This last shor.t-lived gout is the acme. Were not this appetite ofthe throat and uvula connected with the action which im- pels the food into the stomach, the complete enjoyment ofthe sense of taste alone would preclude the brutal resource ofthe Roman feasts : but as it is, the connection of the stomach and tongue is such, that the fulness of the stomach precludes the further enjoyment of the sense of taste. The senses of smelling and taste have their natural appetites or relish ; but they have also their acquired appetites, or delight in things which to unsophisticated nature are disagreeable : so that we acquire a liking to snuff, tobacco, spirits, and opium. u Na- ture, indeed, seems studiously to have set bounds to the plea- sures and pains we have by these two senses, and to have con- OF THE SENSE OF TASTING. 291 fined them within very narrow limits, that we might not place any part of our happiness in them; there being hardly any smell or taste so disagreeable that use will not make it tolera- ble, and at last, perhaps, agreeable; nor any so agreeable as not to lose its relish by constant use. Neither is there any pleasure or pain of these senses which is not introduced or followed by some degree of its contrary which nearly balances it. So that we may here apply the beautiful allegory of the divine Socrates : " That although pleasure and pain are con- trary in their nature, and their faces look different ways, yet Jupiter hath tied them so together, that he who lays hold of the one draws the other along with it." BOOK V. OF THE SKIN AND OF THE SENSE OF TOUCH. OF TOUCH AND OF THE SKIN. JJY the sense of touch we perceive several qualities, and of very different kinds: hardness, softness, figure, solidity, mo- tion, extension, and heat and cold. Now, although heat be a quality, and cold the privation of that quality, yet in relation to the body, heat and cold are distinct sensations. But in a more precise acceptation of the term, the sense of touch is said to be the change arising in the mind from external bodies applied to the skin, and more especially to the ends of the fingers. To understand the organization adapted to this sense, we must premise, in a short view, the structure ofthe skin. OF THE SKIN. The skin is divisible, by the art of the anatomist, into four laminae or membranes, distinct in texture and appearance as in their function or use, viz. the cuticle, or epidermis; the cor- pus mucosum, or reticular tissue ; the cutis vera dermis, or true skin : but from this last there is separated a vascular membrane, below which is the organized surface of the true skin. ° <„rIrfi^Un1CLE or/*IDERMis, or scarf skin, is the most superficial lamina of the skin • \t ;c ~ . , • hie nelUrl*. «-h^K • * a transparent and msensi- Die peiucie w men serves in mu, V Fig. 4. 1'iff. 5. ^c •'<• JSrtf «V! Lrnev Je'. explanation of the plates. 301 Fig. 4. The appearance of a vessel which took its course across the pupil in the full-grown foetus, indicating, that the membrana pupillaris was still present, although it had become pellucid. Fig. 5. A section of the optic nerve, to show its great degree of vascularity. A. The body ofthe nerve quite red with injection. B. The coat of the nerve. Explanation of Plate VII. Fig. 1. The representation of an eye with a cataract, dissected. A. The cornea cut from the sclerotic coat, and hanging by a shred. b. The scl rotic coat. c. The iris. D. The opaque lens or cataract, it is seen to have formed an adhesion with the iris. Fig. 2. This figure represents the effect of couching a soft cataract. The needle, instead of depressing the cataract, cut it into three pieces. a a. The cut edge of the sclerotic coat. b. The choroid coat, and ciliary processes. c. The cataract adhering to the ciliary processes in three dis- tinct pieces. Fig. 3. This figure represents the place into which the couching needle must be introduced. A. The pupil seen through the transparent cornea. 302 EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES. B. The IRIS. c The needle, with the handle elevated, so as to depress the point. d. The lens and point of the needle in outline ; this repre- sents the position of the lens when depressed : to com- plete the operation, it must be carried a little back be- fore withdrawing the needle. Fig. 4. A scheme, shewing the bad effect of introducing the needle near the margin of the cornea. a. The vitreous humour. b. The LENS. c c The ciliary body ; on the lower part, torn by the nee- dle. d d. The iris. e. The anterior chamber of the aqueous humour. Fig. 5. Shows the situation of the cataract when depressed. A. The anterior chamber of the aqueous humour. b. The posterior chamber ofthe aqueous humour. c The iris. D. The vitreous humour occupying the seat of the lens. e. The depressed lens or cataract. Explanation of Plate VIII. Showing some varieties in the structure of the ear in the lower animals. Fig. 1. The ear of the lobster. a. The membrane which covers the projecting mouth of the shell containing the organ of hearing. b. A transparent pulp or vesicle, upon the bottom of which, the web of the nerve is expanded. c The inside of the shell containing the organ, which is, of course, represented broken open. m r.i in. P.302. I^ney fc*. I explanation of the plates. 203 Fig. 2. This represents a little bone which is suspended in contact with the pulp of the nerve, and which is seen but imperfectly in the first figure. A. The bone.. b. An elastic membranous, or rather, cartilaginous substance, by which the bone is suspended. Fig. 3. The head of a haddock with the bones broken up, to shew the brain and semicircular canals. A. The BRAIN- c The semicircular canals. Fig. 4. The organ of hearing taken out and displayed. a. The sacculus vestibuli. b. The bony concretion which lies within, and which, by its vibration, increases the impulse. C. The auditory nerve passing to be distributed on the sacculus vestibuli, and the extremities ofthe semicircu- lar canals. D D d. The three semicircular canals. e. One of the extremities of the semicircular canals in which the branch of the nerve is seen to be expanded. f. A lesser division of the auditory nerve. Fig. 5. The head of a frog with the skin taken off: and we now see the cavity of the tympanum in this animal, over which the common integuments of the head spread tense, so as to answer the purpose of the membrana tympani. a. The point of a little elastic bone which is attached behind the tense integuments, and receives their vibration.— Its further connections are seen in the next figure. Fig. 6. . A magnified view of the internal structure of the frog's ear. a. The first bone, which is attached to the skin. b. The second bone, which has its inner extremity enlarged 304 EXPLANATION of the plates. so as to fill up the foramen ovale, which leads into the inner cavity of the ear. c The great inner cavity of the ear of this animal, answering to the vestibule of the more perfect structure'. D. A chalky concretion which lies within this cavity. Fig. 7. The head of a serpent. A. A bone connected with the lower jaw. b. A bone which passes from the integuments (behind the large bone a) to the opening into the cavity of the ear, and which, of course, receives and conveys the vibra- tion of sound into the cavity which contains the expan- ded nerve. Fig. 8. The head ofthe land tortoise. a. A large scale which serves the use of the membrana tym- pani. B. A single bone which is seen to pass through the cavity of the tympanum : it is attached by an elastic brush of fibres to the scale a, and is enlarged to a head upon its inner extremity. This, filling up the foramen of the inner cavity, conveys the vibration. Explanation of Plate IX. In this plate, the anatomy of the bones of the human ear is explained. Fig. 1. We have here the bones which form the chain betwixt the membrane ofthe tympanum and the membrane ofthe foramen ovale. A. The MALLEUS. b. The incus. c. The stapes. Vol III /.\'W A.i '-j. ,/S?-, Fui J. Fie/. 6'. '•""K /.'Vrf,, EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES. 305 o. The os orbiculare which forms the articulation betwixt the incus and stapes. Fig. 2. In this figure, we have a view ofthe inside ofthe temporal bone, the petrous portion being broken away : we see the cavi- ty of the tympanum, the membrane of the tympanum, and the chain of bones. A. The groove for the lodgement of the lateral sinus. b. The hole in the sphenoid bone for the passage ofthe artery of the dura mater. c The petrous portion of the temporal bone. d. The irregular cavity ofthe tympanum laid open by the breaking off of the petrous part ofthe temporal bone. E. The membrane of the tympanum closing the bottom of the meatus auditorius externus. F. The malleus, the long handle of which is seen to be at- tached to the membrane ofthe tympanum e. g. The incus, united to the great head of the malleus F. H. The stapes, which is seen to be articulated with the long extremity of the incus through the intervention of the os orbiculare. Fig. 3. Shows the division of the temporal bone into the squamous and petrous portions. Fig. 4. A. The squamous part of the temporal bone. B. The circular ring, which forms the meatus auditorius externus in the child. c. The zigomatic process. o. Cells, which afterwards enlarge into those of the mastoid process. Fig. 5. The petrous portion ofthe bone, with a view of the tym- panum. a. The cavity of the tympanum. b. Mastoid cells. Voi. III. 2 Q .k.O EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES. j:. The foramen ovale, into which the stapes (see fig. 1. c. and fig. 2. h.) is lodged. e. The more irregular opening ofthe foramen rotundum. Fig. 6. Represents the labyrinth of the human ear, with the solid bone which surrounds it cut away. A. The FORAMEN OVALE. b. The three semicircular canals. d. The cochl. a. e. The tube, which conducts the portio dura of the seventh pair through the temporal bone. Fig. 7. Explains the manner in which the lamina spiralis divides ihe cochlea into two scalse, and the opening of the one scala in- to the common cavity of the vestibule, and the termination of the other in the foramen rotundum. a. The bone broken, so as to show the cavity of the tympa- num. B. The FORAMEN OVALE. c. Cellular structure of the bone. D. The FORAMEN ROTUNDUM. e. One ofthe scALiE ofthe cochlea, which is seen to termi- nate in the foramen rotundum. f. The other scala, which is seen to communicate with the vestibule. Explanation of Plate X. 9 These two figures are taken from the beautiful plates of Pro- fessor Scarpa, and illustrate the soft parts contained within the osseous labyrinth, and the distribution ofthe nerves. Fig. 1. There is seen the membranous semicircular canals, their common belly, i-nd the distribution ofthe acoustic or auditorv nerve. a. The ampulla of the superior membranous semicircular canal. Fir/, i. If'!a. 2. BM ~/r ,,,-/ /.rest's/ ,»v / TH.tr nIV BeeM os?/' /. *s>rt/ Vol. IK I'l.V t\ f'/ie , hen if B. Bui6 of the Crethra C. Msssibr-ustons/il'ItTie Crethra D. Brest ate ^l} l*mrts?y ,sc~* Nt; Vol. IV. JPTertr .TOT. IB * € J-i«Wt)r>' -£*"•&*!$ ffnfr. I'M . JisHuhed h Collins t'/fflfc" *SM explanation of the plates. xi Fig. 1. The deciduous efflorescence formed by the womb is seen here entire, and seen as if moulded to the cavity of the womb : it is only necessary to observe that it hung inverted. a. The lower part of the conception, which was near the neck of the womb, and which has some coagula of blood attached to it. B. b. Quills introduced within the decidua by an opening near the neck of the womb, and their points brought out at that part of the membrane which answers to the open- ing of the Fallopian tubes : there it is either entirely deficient, or it is so thin that it has been torn at c. c. Fig. 2. Here the other side of the conception is shewn, and the ovum is seen to have adhered to the outer surface of the decidua. A a. a a. The quills introduced into the cavity of the decidua. b. The shaggy surface of the decidua. c. c. The fleecy outer surface of the chorion. It is here to be observed that the ovum, c d e. may be sup- posed to be as it has descended from the ovarium, only some- what enlarged, and it is here evidently on the outside of the decidua, but it has been torn open, and that deciduous surface which connected it to the surface of the womb at this place has been left with the womb, to be afterwards thrown off with the discharges. d. The delicate membrane the amnios. E. The umbilical chord, and part of the foetus. Explanation of Plate VIII. This and the following plate represents a conception of the third month, and as the abortion was thrown off very entire, we have another opportunity of observing the state of the decidua in a more advanced state. A. A thread passed through the more solid placentary mass suspending the whole. b. b. The decidua, having a peculiar reticulated appearance. e. c Shreds of the decidua, where it has burst in the de- livery. XU EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES. d. The decidua refl xa, through which also the proper membranes have burst. E. The TRUK CHORION. F. Very small curling arteries which are entering the decidua, or what may be considered as the maternal portion of the placenta. Explanation of Plate IX. We have here presented a view of a section of the same conception. A. The DECIDUA. B. b. The cut edge of the decidua, which will be seen to surround the whole ovum, and particularly it may be observed to form on the upper part a distinct lamina from the placenta f. e. c. The dkcidua. d. The decidua reflexa. f. The plac 1 nt a already formed by the accumulated vessels of the chorion. G. The chorion towards the lower part of the womb ; here, it mav be observed the fleecy vessels have disappeared. h. The amnion. i. The umbilical chord twisted three times around the neck of the foetus. /'l.,/r LV PiiNw't.-tf hy I'ttQfl*i.'Jir/eins /Mlo. INTRODUCTION. ® view of the system of the viscera, and of the structure of glands. IN this last volume we have to comprehend the anatomy and functions ofthe several viscera ofthe abdomen and pelvis, con- sidered not only as individual parts, but as connected together and as forming with the lymphatic and circulating systems of vessels a great part of that chain of mutual dependence and relation which constitutes the animal oeconomv a whole. It becomes necessary therefore to take here a slight and cursory view ofthe ceconomy ofthe intestinal canal and absorbing sys- tem, including at the same time something of the history of opinions regarding secretion and the structure of glands. It will be understood, that these introductory observations are meant only to combine the several parts, and to prevent that manner of description, which is necessary to accuracy and mi- nuteness, from leading us to consider the several parts as dis- tinct and insulated. An animal body is never for a moment stationary : the re- motest part is in action, and every point is suffering a perpetu- al change. From the first moment of our existence we have commenced a revolution: we, by slow degrees, advance in ac- tivity and strength, and ripen to maturity ; but by a slow and as sure gradations we decline to feebleness and infirmities; and the more rapidly that animals -idvance in the first stage of their progress, so is the proportion of their decline. But it is not in observing the changes of the animal body from youth to age'that the operations of the ceconomy are the most interesting. It is when we find the living body to con- sist of parts performing a variety of functions, and these con- nected and mutually dependent; when we see the circulating fluid throwing out fluid and solid secretions to build up and support the body, which is in incessant and daily decay.— Vol. IV. A 2 INTRODUCTION. Again, our admiration is strongly excited when we observe tlx system to consist of fluids and solids, and the existence of the animal to depend upon the balance of their power ; the fluids separating and combining in new affinities, and forming the various secretions ; and the solids having action, and thut ac- tion controlling the affinities and new combinations of the cir- culating fluids. We find that life subsists by the due action of solids and fluids; or that an incomprehensible influence in a living body is exerted on the latter, and that the chemist can never so combine the fluids out of the body as to imitate the changes produced in a living system of fluids and vessels.— Forgetting that animation is the essential character of living bodies, physiologists have too much endeavoured in every age to explain the phenomena of animated nature by illustrations drawn from mech inks, chemistry, or hvdraulics. In a body in which there is life there is a perpetual waste ; first by secretions, which for particular purposes are thrown into the cavities and afterwards carried out of the body en- tirely by the excretions of the kidney, the perspiration by the surface, the exhalation by the lungs, the secretions of the inter- nal cavities as ofthe intestines. But more thun this, there is a decomposition ofthe solids ofthe body which are carried in- to the circulating fluids, and finally dismissed from the svs- tem. Lastly, we cannot but observe, that even the powers of muscular motion, nay, the powers of the mind and of the sen- ses, are exhausted by exercise, and renovated through the in- fluence of the circulation. The continued action of a muscle is followed by feebleness, and the continued impression of the rays of light exhausts the retina, so that the object becomes first faint and then vanishes. Since there is waste ofthe solids and fluids, and exhaustion of the energies of the system, so also must there be a source of supply and means of renovating its action. Accordingly ani- mals have appetites requiring the supply of food, and the call of hunger is controlled by the necessities of their svstem___ When food is received into the first passages, there is thrown out from the stomach a fluid, which dissolves it, changes its properties, and is itself essentially altered. The work of assi- milation is thus begun. As this converted fluid takes its course through the intestines, it is more and more changed ; more assimilated to the nature of the peculiar fluids of the animal ; and having still additional secretions united to it, particularly the bile, it is by these means separated from the grosser parts of the aliment. This fluid, which is now called chyle, is ab- sorbed by a particular and appropriate system of vessels, which, from their conveying this white and milky-like fluid, INTRODUCTION. i) are called the lacteals. These lacteal vessels carry the chyle to the thoracic duct, the trunk of the absorbing system ; but not directly'; for the chyle is deposited in the mesenteric glands, from which it is again absorbed and carried forward. Or if we suppose these glands to be merely convoluted vessels, its flow is at least delayed, so that it is not at once thrown into the mass of circulating fluids. We find then that the stomach performs digestion, and the spleen, we will venture to affirm, is subservient to it. The secretion of the liver we find to prepare the chyle for absorp- tion, while at the same time it is the peculiar stimulus to the intestines. The pancreas pours out a fluid which tempers the acrid bile. The superior part of the intestinal canal absorbs the nutritious fluid or chyle, while the gross remains of the food move on to be deposited in the great intestines. The great intestines are not only receptacles, but form at the same time an extensive secreting surface useful in the ceconomy, by throwing off the waste of the system. The lacteal vessels, which take up the chyle, are but branch- es of the system of absorbents—which is a system consisting of two great divisions, the lacteals and lymphatics : the first re- ceiving the nutritious fluids from the intestinal canal, and the latter being absorbents, taking up the fluids which have been thrown out upon the cavities and surfaces of the body ; and we presume upon the solid parts of the body also. Thus the new fluids, rich in supplies, are mingled with those which are fraught widi the waste and decomposition of the system.—The thoracic duct, the trunk of this system, conveys these fluids thus mingled together into the right side of the heart, where they are received into the vortex of the circulating red blood. These fluids, now agitated and wrought up with the blood in the cavities of the heart, are sent through the circulation of the lungs, and submitted to the influence of their action and the ex- posure to the atmospheric air. When chyle is formed in the stomach and intestines, it is observed to consist of albumen, serum, globules, and salts : but the change which it may undergo by its reception into the lacteals, its being deposited in their glands, its mingling with the lvmph, its agitation in the heart, have not been observed, though it is natural to suppose that by degrees it assimilates in its nature to that of the circulating blood, and does at last be- come perfectly similar by the operation of the lungs. By the exposure of the circulating fluids to the atrnosphere in the lungs a gas is absorbed, which becomes an active prin- ciple in the blood, and from the blood is communicated to the =i0lids. 4 INTRODUCTION. That the blood of an animal has properties which distinguish it from mere matter we readily allow ; but to say that it pos- sesses life is to use a term in which few will acquiesce. It possesses properties while circulating in the vessels distinct from those which it shews out of the body ; and these do not depend on the agitation and incessant motion, nor on the de- gree of heat, nor on any similar circumstance, but apparently on some secret influence which the vessels exert over it. The analysis of the blood by the chemists holds out to us little hope of advancing in the knowledge ofthe ceconomy of a living ani- mal. Chemistry, when applied to the analysis of animal matter, leaves its devotees in a perplexity of knowledge at d discoveries which have no end, and which point to no con- clusion. There are produced from the blood a variety of fluids by or- gans which are called glands, and the formation or separation ol these fluids is secretion. But the solid parts of the body ought to be considered as secretions equally with the matter which flows from the ducts of glands. For there is formed and deposited from the blood, during the round of its circula- tion, bone to support the incumbent weight ofthe body ; mus- cular fibre, to give it motion ; as well as all the other variety of solids and fluids. The only difference betwixt these solid depositions from the blood and the glandular secretions is, that the former are still within the influence of the vascular system, and that they are dt composed and re-absorbed, conveyed again into the mass of circulating fluids before they can be finally ex- pelled from the body. The chemists have observed the division of animal bodies into solids and fluids, but the subdivisions of these are very in- accurate. The fluids they have distinguished into three class- es ; 1st, Recrementitious humours, which go to nourish and support the body: 2dly, The excrementitious fluids, which are carried out of the body by certain emunctuaries ; and the 3d are of a compound nature, being partly recrementitious and partly excrementitious. We must observe, however, that the fluids enumerated under these heads shew it to be a very in- correct arrangement. The jirst division comprehends the fat, the marrow, the matter of internal perspiration, and the osse- ous juice. The second comprehends the fluids of insensible transpiration, the sweat, mucus, cerumen, urine, faeces. And the last division comprehends the saliva, the tears, the bile, the pancreatic juice, the gastric and the intestinal juice, the milk, and the seminal fluid. To attend to their arrangements of the solid parts of animals would be equally far from serving am useful end ; for they have thrown together parts so discordant INTRODUCTION. 5 in function and so unlike in structure that they can be of no use in a general view of the ceconomy, and cannot in chemical analysis shew a uniform result.* Perhaps all the correctness to which we can at present pre- tend is some such division as this. Besides forming the solid mass of the animal body, these secretions are drawn from the blood : fluids which are subservient to the assimilating of new matter to the system ; fluids which are useful in preserving the mobility of parts ; and, lastly, the secretions which convey away the waste and debris of the body, which is successively replaced by the opposition of new matter. From this short view of the system we understand how in- cessantly the powers are spent in action, and the fluids ex- hausted by deposition and secretion, and how essential to life the functions of those parts are which act upon and assimilate the food. It is the consideration of these parts which forms the subject of the first section of the present volume. As in the consideration of these functions the structure of the glandular organs becomes a chief subject of inquiry, it will be natural at present to consider in a general way the opinions which have been entertained regarding the structure of glands. The peculiar nature of that organization by which the several secretions are formed, has hitherto eluded absolute proof by experiment or dissection. It is imagined that there are some organs which do little more than separate the parts of the blood like to the exudation by exhaling arteries. But neither in the exhalent arteries nor in the simpler organs can I imagine a simple straining of the blood, but rather that the same principle influences all, and that the several varieties of secretion depend upon a modification of the action. It would appear that the fluids in circulation and the vessels containing them must reciprocally affect each other: we know that a change on the state ofthe circulating fluids will alter the nature of the glandular action, and an excitement of the gland will still more powerfully change the nature of the secretion ; the active power of the solids appearing to be an agent which con- trols and directs the chemical affinities. We are struck with the variety of form in the secreting ergans. We see a simple surface pouring out its fluids ; or a simple canal into which the arteries throw out the secretion. We find again the secreting vessels and their ducts convoluted and massed together, forming proper glandular bodies ; of whicW kind are the solid abdominal viscera. When we dissect the glands we do not find them to have a * See Fourcroy's Analyfis of Animal Suhftances. ti INTRODUCTION. similarity in structure. Thus the substance ofthe liver, the kidney, the testicle, &c. are quite unlike, and as their secre- tions are different so are their sympathies : the effect of dis- ease upon them, and the consequences of medicine operating through the general circulation will be to attach to one indi- vidually, leaving the others in their accustomed action.— Glands are different not only in their outward form, their general appearance when cut into, and the manner of the con- nection of their parts, but also in a remarkable manner in the length, size, and form of their vessels and ducts. In considering the opinions of physiologists or anatomists regarding glandular secretion, and the structure of glands, we find in the first instance that the old physicians contented them- selves with saying that the glands or viscera possessed a pecu- liar power to select and separate the fluids from the blood. The next class had recourse to hypothesis : they spoke of the separation of certain parts by means of fermentation,* or by a kind of filtering through the pores or vessels of glands ; that these pores allowed only particles of a particular size or figure to pass them.f It was opposed to this hypothesis, that the thinner fluids must have run through the organs destined for the grosser secretions. But when a theory such as this is re- ceived, no argument nor proof seems necessary to overthrow it. Resting upon authority alone, it stood until it was overturned by the fashion of new doctrines : one equally puerile was raised upon its overthrow. We observe, says the founder of this theory,f that wet or oiled paper will only transmit fluid of that kind with which it is previously imbued, it will not transmit the oil when wetted, nor will the water make any impression on the paper when pre- viously oiled. Upon these facts are to be raised a theory of secretion ! Betwixt the secreting vessels and the ducts, in the peculiar tissue of which glandular structure consists, there is interposed a fluid of that particular kind which is required to be secreted, and when the blood is driven against this tissue so imbued, no fluid but of a nature resembling that already de- posited can be transmitted. By this hypothesis they explained secretion, making it to depend on the attraction and repulsion of the particles of the blood by fluids previously secreted. We may surely leave this class of physiologists accounting for the original depositation ofthe fluids in the glands, without a wish to search with them into the mystery of glandular secre- • * Van Helmont. Vieuffens, &c. f Charleton, Defcartes, Borelli, Verheyn, &c. &c. i Winflow. Helvetiire. INTRODUCTION. 7 tion. Commentators on this theory, by taking into the system the action of the nerves, indicated that they did not altogether forget that the body was alive* Another set of physiologists attributed the whole effect of secretion to the velocity of the blood in the glands or secreting vessels ;f others, to the length and curves of the vessels, and their action upon the fluids. Again, others have been satisfied with the round assertion that the vital action was the essential cause of secretion. This, it ought to be understood, must be universally acquiesced in, while yet there may remain an in- quiry as to the apparent structure of glands. Disappointed in obtaining an unexceptionable general theory of secretion, we are only enabled to conclude, that while a power exists in an animal body, directing its actions, perhaps both in the solids and fluids, and particularly in the mutual influence which they exert, the form, length, and activity of the vessels and ducts give occasion to the greater or less degree of intricacy in the operation of the principles upon which the secretion depends. Let us then attend to the observations of the strict anato- mists, and to the appearance which the glandular viscera present under the knife. It is not perfectly clear what the older anatomists meant by the expression Parenchyma. It would appear however to have saved them the trouble of investigation, and all abstruse speculation. They meant flesh, yet not muscular substance, but such as the liver presents. This matter thev seem to have conceived to be formed by the blood. Thus Highmore de- scribes the liver to be formed of the blood of the umbilical vein : the opinion originally of Erasistratus. Previous to the time of Malpighi it is fruitless to trace the opinions of anatomists regarding the structure of glands. He was the first who sought to throw light upon this obscure subject by anatomical investigation, and he made a more rapid progress than has been done by any man since his day. If we take into consideration the difficulties he had to encounter in a new field, and the prejudices of the learned with which he had to combat, his merits will be found greater than even those of Ruysch. The opinions of Malpighi were received by those who, forsaking the authorities of names, saw the importance ofthe study of anatomy. Ruysch himself gave credit to the opinions of Malpighi in the early part of his life. But Ruysch's more attentive observations being contradictory to those of Malpighi, his maturer judgment rejected that anatomist's * Conor, Tentamen epiftolarc de Secretione. f Eocrhaave, Pitcarne, &c. 8 INTRODUCTION. proofs, and with a boldness in which he was never remarkabl) deficient he invented a new theory, or at least alleged new facts, and swayed men's opinions with an absolute authority. Malpighi was an Italian, and born near to Bologna. Whilst yet a young man, being sunk under the accumulation of family distress, absorbed in grief, and lost to the considera- tion of his interest, he received comfort and assistance from his master, who urged him to embrace the medical profession. His progress was rapid. After studying at Padua, he was called to fill one of the chairs in Bologna. He was then so- licited by Ferdinand 11., Duke of Tuscany, to be professor in the university of Pisa. Here he was associated with liberal men : and now only in his second professorship did he learn to despise the scholastic learning of the time, and betook him- self to experiment as the only means by which philosophy could be raised from the oppressive barbarism of the schools. Malpighi and Borelli were associated ; they dissected to- gether ; they suggested thoughts to each other ; they doubted, and canvassed freely each other's opinions ; and were to each other an excitement and encouragement to perseverance and industry. They were supported by government; popular in their teaching; while they collected round them the learned men of the time. This was the origin of the famous Acade- my del Cimento. Malpighi was, after this, professor in Messene, and died in the Quirinal palace at Rome of a stroke of the apoplexy,* after having been some time physician to Pope Innocent XII. Malpighi had many enemies, and even some of his colleagues were animated against him with a dis- honourable jealous}'. Many laughed at his studies and occu- pations, as frivolous and absurd. Something must be allowed for men who had laboured with diligence to become learned ; for these his opponents, had passed their lives in the study of the Arabian writers. With them studies were enforced which held science in subjection ; studies which, in place of invigo- rating, served only to chill and paralyse exertion, and retard ingenious investigation. Even Borelli, but from other mo- tives, opposed and censured some of the dissertations of Mal- pighi. Malpighi has been considered as the inventor of this depart- ment of anatomy, which the French, curious in distinctions, have called the analytic method. He shewed the impropriety of the term Parenchyma, as applied to the substance of glands. He proved that the lungs, for example, (which they * Two pounds of coagulated blood were found in the ventricles of his brain by Baglivi. INTRODUCTION. 9 also called parenchymatous,) were not fleshy, and had no re- semblance to the glandular viscera of the abdomen. He taught, that though glands are smooth on their outer surface, they consist of lobules connected by cellular membrane : and, upon a still more minute investigation, that they consist of in- numerable little follicules or sacs ; that these are interposed be- twixt the arteries which convey the fluids and the excretory ducts going out from them ; that the arteries, or the vasa afferentia, after ramifying and encircling these bodies, pierce them and secrete the particular fluids into them. On other oc- casions he describes these little glandular bodies as applied to the ramifications of the arteries, like fruit hanging by the branches of a tree. Malpighi threw in his liquid injections ; dissected and ex- amined with the microscope ; made careful observations and experiments on living animals ; and lastly, attended in a parti- cular manner to the phenomena of disease. By disease no doubt parts swell out and are magnified, and become distinct; but it is not a test of the natural structure, or implicitly to be trusted to. Scheme of Malpight's opinion. Fig. 1. Boerhaave'a plan of Malpighi's doctrine, aaa folliculos glandularum simplicissimarum denotat. b b b sin- gularia emissaria cuique utriculo a, propria atque in commu- nem canalem excretorium d, c, suos humores demittentia qui tandem per hujus aperturam c, emittantur. Fig. 2. is a scheme farther to elucidate the opinions of Malpighi. A, an artery entering a portion of a viscus. B, the returning veins. C, the branch of communication betwixt the artery and vein which serves to circulate the blood, and Gonvey a part into the veins. D, another division of the arterv, which after various plavful meanderings terminates in Vol. IV. B 10 INTRODUCTION. the follicule or little glandular bag E. F, the ducts which re- ceive the secreted fluid from the follicules. Ruysch studied at Leyden under Van Home, and at a very early age attached himself to anatomy and botany. At this time he brought himself into notice by a defence of the professors against one Bilsius, who, although he was learned and acute, had attacked them with all the weapons of a Charlatan. Returning to his native country, he was raised to the professorship of anatomy and botany in Amsterdam. It was here that Ruysch made those discoveries in anatomy, and that wonderful and sudden progress in practical anatomy, which not only raised him above his cotemporaries, but has been the admiration of all since his time. Though new and various methods of preparing the body have been discovered since the time of Ruysch, yet there has been no approach to the elegance with which he displayed the structure of minute parts. It has been said that, while others preserved the hor- rid features of death, Ruysch preserved the human body in the softness and freshness of life, even to the expression ofthe features. We must no doubt ascribe some part of this en- comium to the exaggeration naturally arising from the novelty ofthe thing. But as to his superiority in the manner of dis- playing the minute vessels of delicate parts, and his methods of preserving the parts in liquors, transparent and soft and so as to float in their natural folds, there can be no doubt.— Neither can the minuteness and success of his injections be denied : we have too many occasions in which we must resort to the catalogue of Ruysch's museum for the true anatomy, to doubt his great success, or to question the truth of those en- comiums which have been bestowed upon him. Kings, princes, ambassadors, and great generals, but more than these, all the learned men of the time, crouded to the museum of Ruysch. We must not blame him if, whilst others were merely speculating about the structure of parts, he, surrounded by so princely a museum, should simply have laid open his cabinets, and bid them satisfy themselves whether or not he was right. Ruysch's preparations went to contradict the opinions of Malpighi. His injections, pushed more minutely, showed those round bodies which are to be seen in some of the glandular viscera (and which Malpighi took to be little bags into which the secreted fluid was poured) to be merely convoluted arteries. Ruysch taught, that the minute arteries after making these convolutions terminated in the be- ginning of excretory ducts ; that there was no substance or apparatus interposed, but that the vessels and ducts were con- tinuous. His opinions being formed upon the strength of INTRODUCTION. U more minute preparations, and a superior dexterity of anato- mical investigation, fe>w anatomists chose to be outdone, or to acknowledge that they could not see what he saw. This I believe to be pne reason of the rapid progress of Ruysch's opinions. Scheme of Ruysch's opinion. 1 1 The smaller arteries which do not enter into follicules, but are convoluted. 2 2 The appearance of bodies or bags, but which are merely owing to the convolutions and tortuous figure of the arteries before they terminate in the excretory ducts. 3 3 Excretory ducts or vessels formed by the continued extreme branches ofthe arteries.* The opinions of Malpighi and Ruysch have held the schools in perpetual controversy ; most anatomists however leaning to the authority of Ruysch. There follows these a crowd of French academicians, who, with Boerhaave, may be con- sidered as mere commentators on the original authorities of Malpighi and Ruysch. Some of these argue for secretion by continuous vessels, and contend that the arteries terminate in the excretory ducts ; others, that the secretions are made into follicules ; and some, as Boerhaave, insist that both are right in their observations, and in the proofs which they have adduced, that secretion is in part performed by continuous vessels, partly by a more intricate glandular apparatus. • Ruyfch's doctrine again was thus opposed : Ruyfchius auget arte fua replendi extenfionem vaforum ultra naturalem magnitudinem. Ruyfchius arte fua deftruit glandulas ; dein negat. Ruyfchius negat omnes glandulas. Melius eft & tutius omnia haec demonftrare in cadavere recenti." F. Ruyfch Epift. ad Vir. Clar. Her. Boerhaave, p. 50. It may be farther obferved, that it was not in the mere fact of there being follicules, in which Malpighi and Ruyfch differed; for the latter conceded that there were hollow membranes, but contended that thefe were not glands. Their dif- ference of opinion is expreffed in the following words of Ruyfch : " Adeoque dif- crepantia inter magnum ilium virum et inter me eft, quod ille putat humores delabi in glandulas dictas fimpliciffimas,— ibi foveri, mutari: Ego pnto, quod yrterix ultirns fuccos faciant, & factos ibi deponant." 12 INTRODUCTION. As the forms of the parts which throw out secretions have an infinite variety, it may be useful in this introductory view to point out these varieties, and their appropriate names.* In the first place, although in general language the term gland im- plies a secreting body, yet this does not follow from the defini- tion of that word. According to Hippocrates, it is a tumid round body, soft, smooth, and shining. Many such bodies, and which we call glands, have no excretory ducts, and do not secrete a fluid ; while most secreting parts admit of no such definition. When, again, we admit the definition of authors who have taught their peculiar opinions regarding their struc- ture, we have a still less admissible description. Thus Mal- pighi defined a simple gland to be "Membrana cava cum emissario ;" and Ruysch says, *' Glandulae nullae compo- nuntur ex sola membrana cava cum emissario, sed pnecipue ex vasis." These definitions of glands being optional and uncertain, it is necessary to use names appropriated to the several varieties of form in secreting parts. Indeed the term gland is inadmis- sible as conveying any knowledge ofthe minute parts of which the viscera are composed. We must observe, however, that there is a division of glands still in use into conglobate and conglomerate. The first implies a gland simple in its form, the latter a gland having the ap- pearance of an assemblage of several glands.f Now there is no gland that has not more or less the appearance which is des- cribed by conglomerated ; that is, consisting of several parts, united by cellular membrane : and the distinction is attended with no advantage. Acini form the last sub-division which we observe in the vis- cera, as in the liver ; they are round bodies, not regularly in- vested with membranes, and which cantoe teased out into par- cels of minute vessels.^ Cryptoe are numerous in the body. We have an example of them in the great intestines.^ Crypta is a soft body, con- • The terms acini, cotulse, cryptz, folliculi, glanduke, lacuna, loculi, utriculi, have been almoft promifcuoufly ufed; being fo many names for bundles, bags, bottles, holes, and partitions. f As the falivary glands and the pancreas. Farther, the lymphatic glands are generally called conglobate glands, being fmooth and apparently fimple in their ftru CHAP. III. OF THE SOLID OR GLANDULAR VISCERA OF THE ABDOMEN. SECTION I. OF THE LIVER. OF ITS SEAT, AND CONNECTIONS BY LIGAMENTS, AND OF THE DIVISIONS APPARENT ON ITS SURFACE. vyUR attention is now naturally drawn to the liver, as it holds, in so eminent a degree, the sovereignty over the mo- tions of the intestinal canal, and as it is so strictly connected • Winflow. OF THE LIVER. 59 with it by its system of vessels, and by its functions. The liver is the largest viscus in the body, and as in its size and proportion to the whole body it is great, so are its connections in other respects with the whole system very intimate. This is particularly evident in the diseases of the liver, and was the cause of the ancients ascribing to it so eminent a place in the ceconomy. Function of the liver—In all ages authors have paid particular attention to the liver, and have exercised their inge- nuity in giving various explanations of its function. The an- cients made it the supreme director of the animal system. They supposed that they could trace the nutritious fluids ofthe intestines through the meseraic veins into the porta and into the liver, and that it was there concocted into blood. From the liver to the right side ofthe heart they found the cava hepatica, carrying this blood formed in the liver to the centre of the system : and through the veins they supposed the blood to be carried to the remote part of the body. The liver is the largest glandular body ofthe whole system. Its use is to secrete the bile, which is carried into the intestines, and performs there an essential action on the food while passing in the tract of the intestines. Seat of the liver.—The liver is seated in the upper part of the abdomen, under the margin of the ribs, and to- wards the right side, or in the right hypochondrium. In the foetus it occupies more ofthe left side than it does in the adult. Indeed it is nearly equally balanced in the foetus, but the older the animal (or at least for the five first years) the greater will be the proportion of it found lodged in the right side. Without going into the more minute subdivisions of this viscus, we mav observe, that it is more uniform, and smooth, and convex on the upper surface ; on the lower, more irregu- larly concave. Its upper surface is applied in close contact to the concavity ofthe diaphragm, and in the foetus its margin is in contact with the abdominal muscles, because it falls lower than the margin of the ribs. Its lower and concave surface receives the convexity of the stomach, duodenum, and colon. In a healthy adult subject the liver does not extend from under the margin of the ribs, unless near the pit of the stomach, but in the foetus and child it is much otherwise. In a fcetus ofthe third and fourth month the liver almost fills the belly; it reaches to the navel, covers the stomach, and is in contact with the spleen. After the seventh month other parts grow with a greater rapidity in proportion. Indeed some have af- firmed, that the liver, or at least the left lobe, actually- de- 60 OF THE LIVER. creases towards the time of birth.* But from this time to the advance to manhood the chest becomes deeper ; the sternum is prolonged ; and the diaphragm becomes more concave ; so that the liver it tires under the margin ofthe ribs, and its mar- gin on the left side in the adult reaches no farther than to the oesophagus. When however the liver becomes schirrous and enlarged, its hard margin comes down so as to be felt through the abdominal paries under the border ofthe chest. This en- largement of the liver, and consequent descent of its margin, is to be felt more easily by grasping the integuments of the btlly, as if you expected to lift up the acute edge of the liver, than by pressing with the point of the finger. By this means we shall be sensible of the elasticity and softness below the liver, and ofthe resistance and firmness of the margin of it. The ph\ sici;:n, however, should not forget, that the depres- sion ofthe diaphragm, and consequent protrusion ofthe liver by disease in the thorax, gives the feeling of an enlargement and hardening ofthe liver. The left great division ofthe liver is perhaps as often diseased and enlarged as the right, in which case it is more difficult to ascertain it by examination, and it must be harm from other circumstances besides the actual touch. Neither should a physician be ignorant, that by suppuration in the lungs, and consequent rising of the diaphragm, the livt r is elevated considerably, so as to retire farther under the protection of the false ribs.f M. Portal, by running stilettos into the belly of the subject as it lay upon the table, or was raised into the perpendicular posture, found that in the latter posture the liver shifted two inches. But it is almost superfluous to remark concerning these experiments, that they are by no means conclusive. In the dead bod}-, the abdominal muscles are relaxed ; thev yield to the weight of the viscera; and the diaphragm is pulled down by the weight of the abdominal viscera. The margin of the liver necessarily falls lower, but in the living body there is a close and perfect bracing of every part by the abdo- minal muscles ; thev do not yield, and very little if any altera- tion can take place in the situation ol the viscera. It must be observed, however, that a considerable motion of the liver is the effect of respiration, and of the action ofthe diaphragm. This motion is chiefly on the back part of the right lobe of the liver. The left lobe being more on the centre ofthe belly, and consequently opposite to the centre and less • M. Portal, Acad, de Sciences, 1773. > 1 hefe obfervations in detail belong to another place. OF THE LIVER. 61 moveable part ofthe diaphragm, it is less affected by the respi- ration than the larger right lobe. LIGAMENTS OF THE LIVER. The peritoneum is reflected in such a manner from the neighbouring parts upon the liver as to form membranes re- ceiving the name of ligaments. It has been explained, how- ever, that these are not the sole support of this viscus ; and that the compression of the surrounding abdominal muscles is the principal support of the liver, as it is of the other viscera. The broad ligament* of the liver is formed by two la- mina of the peritoneum, connected by their cellular mem- brane, descending from the middle of the diaphragm and point of the sternum to the convex upper surface or dorsumf of the liver. This ligament is broadest where it passes down from the point ofthe sternum to the fossa umbilicalis ; but as it retreats backward it becomes narrower, and is united to the coronary ligament near the passage of the vena cava. This circumstance, with the curve which it naturally takes on the surface of the liver, gives it the shape of the falx, as it is formed by the dura mater. ligamentum teres. The round ligament of the liver is the firmer ligamentous-like cord, which may be traced from the umbilicus along the peritoneum into the duplicature of the broad ligament, and into the fossa umbilicalis. It is formed by the degenerated coats of the great vein which brings the florid blood from the placenta into the veins of the liver, and from thence conveys it into the right side of the heart of the foetus.f The coronary ligament of the liver is formed in conse- quence of the attachment of the liver to the diaphragm. The attachment is of course surrounded by the inflection of the peritoneum from the diaphragm to the liver. It is called the coronary ligament, though it has been observed, that this attachment of the liver is not circular, but of an oval, and very oblong shape. It appears, that it is this close adhesion of the liver to the diaphragm, which is the occasion ofthe sympa- thy of the diaphragm in disease of the liver, and the cause of the pain felt in the shoulder and neck from inflammation, and suppuration in the liver, in consequence ofthe course and con- nections ofthe phrenic nerve. The lateral ligaments are formed by the peritoneum ■ Ligamentum latum fufpenforium, falciforme. f See Plate I. of this volume. } See vol. ii.p. 106. and Plate, p. 107. 62 OF THE LIVER. continued laterally. The right lateral ligament, like a mesen- tery, attaches the right and great lobe of the liver to the dia- phragm, and the left lateral ligament connects the left lobe with the diaphragm, and with the oesophagus and spleen. FORM AND DIVISIONS OF THE LIVER. The liver is convex and smooth on the upper surface ; con- cave and more irregular on the lower part ; thick and massy behind and towards the right side ; but anteriorly and toward the left side it is thin, and has an acute edge, so that it lies smooth over the distended stomach. Great right and left lobes of the liver.—The first great division ofthe liver is marked on the convex surface by the broad ligament; which running back from the fossa umbilicalis divides it into the two great lobes, the right and left. When the concave surface of the liver is turned up, we see the same division into the right and left lobes by a fissure which runs backwards. It is on this lower surface of the liver that we have to mark the greater variety of divisions in this viscus. Farther, it is on the right lobe that those eminences are to be observed which, with the indentations and sulci, give some intricacy to this subject. Lobulus spigelii.*—The lobulus spigelii is betwixt the two greater lobes, but rather belonging to the right great lobe. From its situation deep behind, and from its having a particular papilla-like projection, it is called lobulus posterior, or papil- latus. To the left side it has the fissure for the lodgment of the ductus venosus ; on the right, the fissure for the vena cava ; and above, it has the great transverse fissure of the liver for the lodgment of the cylinder of the porta : obliquely to the right, and upwards, it has a connection with the lower concave surface of the great lobe by the processus caudatus, which Winslow calls one of the roots of the lobulus spigelii. It is received into the bosom ofthe lesser curve of the stomach. Lobulus caudatus.f—This really deserves the name of processus caudatus, for it is like a process ofthe liver, stretch- ing downward from the middle of the great right lobe to the lobulus spigelii. It is behind the gall-bladder, and betwixt the fossa vense portarum and the fissure for the lodgment of the vena cava. * Lobulus posterior—posticus—p.ipcUattt?. * Processus caudatus. OF THE LIVER. 63 Lobulus anonymus* is the anterior point of the great right lobe of the liver : or others define it to be that space of the great lobe betwixt the fossa for the umbilical vein and the gall- bladder, and:extending forward from the fossa for the lodg- ment of the porta, to the anterior margin of the liver. Sulci, and dt.pressions of the liver.—On the lower surface of the right lobe there may be observed two slight ex- cavations, formed as it were by the pressure of the colon and ofthe kidney. On the lower surface of the left lobe there may also be observed depressions answering to the convexities of the stomach and colon. But these are only the slighter irregu- larities which might pass unnoticed. There are, besides these, deep divisions which pass betwixt the lobes and lobuli, and indeed form these eminences. Umbilical fissure.!—From the anterior point of the two lobes there passes backwards to the left side of the lobulus spigelii a deep fissure, which in the foetus gives lodgment to the umbilical vein, and which in the adult receives the round liga- ment, where it is about to terminate in the left division of the vena portae. The back part of this fissure gives lodgment to the ductus venosus in the foetus. This fissure divides the liver into its two right and left divisions, and upon the right side joins the transverse fissure. The transverse fissure is that which passes above the lobulus spigelii, and lobulus quadratus ; the processus caudat- us, and the lobulus lobi sinistri. It is in this fissure that the great transverse division of the vena portae lies. The posterior fissure:): gives lodgment to the ductus venosus. It is a division in the posterior margin of the liver betwixt the left lobe, and the lobulus spigelii, and great lobe on the right. Sometimes, instead of the fissure or sulcus, there is a canal, as it were, in the substance of the liver. The fourth great fissure, is that for the lodgment of the vena cava. It sometimes is called, in contradistinction to the last, the right fissure, or the fissura ven^e cav^. It is a large deep division betwixt the lobulus spigelii and the back part of the right lobe, for receiving the vena cava as it passes up upon the spine. The gall-bladder being sunk in the substance of the liver, the pit or excavation which receives it has been considered improperly as a fissure or fossa.$ There likewise occur irre- • Lobulus accessorius—anterior—quadratus. f Horizontal fiffure, foffa longitudinalis, longa anterior. t. Or fulcus ductus venofl, the left fiffure. § It is generally called, fovea fellis, or vallecula 'oeficuleeftUea. 64 OF THE LIVER. gular fissures in the substance ofthe liver, which are like the cuts ofthe knife, and hold no regular place. OF THE VESSELS OF THE LIVER, AND OF THE CIRCULATION OF THE BLOOD THROUGH IT. There belong to the liver five distinct systems of vessels : these are the vena porta? ; the arteria hepatica ; the vena cava hepaticaa ; the lymphatics ; and the biliary ducts.* These, with the nerves, form a very intricate system of vessels, but a lesson of the most particular importance to the physician. Before speaking ofthe connections which these vessels consti- tute with particular parts, or with the entire system, we shall take a strictly anatomical view of their origin and course. THE VENA PORTiE. This vein is divided into two parts ; that which belongs to the intestines, and which, ramifying on the m_-senterv, receives the blood of the mesenteric arteries; and that part which branches in the liver, and distributes there the blood which it has received from the arteries of the membranous viscera. Even from this division we see that the vena portae has a very particular distribution ; that while it is collecting its branches from the spleen, stomach, and intestines, like the veins in the other parts ofthe body, into a trunk, this trunk, instead of leading directly to the heart, or uniting with other veins in their course to the heart, enters the liver, and, like an artery, spreads into minute ramifications ; hence it is called the vena arteriosa. It resembles an artery in this also, that it has no valves like other veins. To be more particular ; the vena portae takes its origin from the extreme branches of the cceliac, upper and lower mesen- teric arteries. The roots of the portae answering to these ar- teries are the splenic vein ; the gastro-epiploic vein which runs upon the great arch ofthe stomach ; the mesenteric vein re- turning from the small intestines ; and the right and middle colic veins, and internal hemorrhoidal vein and left colic return- ing upon the mesocolon. These answering to the three great branches of the abdominal aorta, pass obliquely upward in three great divisions, and unite with some lesser veins, as the coronary and smaller veins of the stomach, and pancreatico- * And we might add, the arteries of the outer membrane of the liver which arife from the internal mammary, phrenic, epigaftric, and even the fpermatic arteries. OF THE LIVER. 65 duodenalis. The trunk of the vena portae is now involved in the irregularly reticulated web of the hepatic vessels, arteries, veins, glands, lymphatics, nerves, and biliary ducts, with their cellular membrane. It passes upward somewhat obliquely to the right; and enters the porta* or the sinus betwixt the pro- cessus caudatus and lobulus spigelii. When the vena portae has entered the liver, it divides into two great branches, which running directly transverse, and be- ing of large capacity, are sometimes called the cylinder ofthe vena portae. Of these two great branches of the vena portae within the liver, the right is greater in diameter, but shorter fj* it ramifies in the great right lobe of the liver. The left is lon- ger considerably, and filling the transverse fissure, it is reflect- ed up into the umbilical or horizontal fissure, and is given to the left lobe, to the upper and more anterior part of the right lobe, viz. lobulus anonymus, and to the lobulus spigelii. The minute ramifications of the vena portae every where pervade the substance of the liver, and inosculate with the veins of the surface belonging to the peritoneal coat. The blood of the vena portae, after secreting the bile, is received in- to the extremities ofthe venae cavae hepaticae. ARTERIA HEPATICA. For the course of this artery from the root ofthe cceliac ar- tery, to its entrance into the liver, see vol. ii. p. 257", and 259. The arteria hepatica and the venae portae are supported by the same sheath, the lesser vessel encirclin'g the greater, like a ten- dril. While they have distinct functions, both terminate in the same returning veins : that is to say, whether we admit that one or both open into the biliary ducts, yet they have the same relation to the venae cavae hepaticae which the arteries of the other parts of the body have to their returning veins. VEN.E CAV/E HEPATICiE. We have seen, that the right auricle of the heart is close to the diaphragm above, and that the liver adheres to the lower surface ofthe diaphragm. We have also found that there was. a groove in the back part ofthe liver for the transmission of the venas cavae abdominalis. Now as the venie cavae ascend- ing from the lower parts of the body to the heart is perforating * Sometimes it has been found divided before entering the liver. It has been alfo found to divide into three branches, in which cafe, fays Haller, two go to the left fide J Into this branch fometimes the vein of the gall-bladder enters- Vol. IV. I 66 OF THE LIVER. the diaphragm, it is joined by two large veins from the liver, which, from their size and form, being the returning veins of the liver, are termed in general the venae cavae hepaticae. These veins sometimes pierce the diaphragm along with the cavae abdominalis, so that there is to be observed one large perfora- tion in the diaphragm, but generally they pass the diaphragm close to the great vein, but so that there are three openings in the diaphragm. When these hepatic veins are traced into the substance of the liver, they are seen to be gathered together from all parts of the liver in two, or sometimes three great branches. The communication betwixt the vena portae and the venae cavae hepaticae are so free, that several anatomists have imagined a peculiar and more immediate communication of their branches than holds in other parts of the body betwixt the arteries and veins; a circumstance which appeared to them the more necessary, considering the lesser impetus with which the blood flows in the vena portae than in the arterial system. BILIARY DUCTS.* The last subdivision of the substance of the liver, or acini, as we shall presently find, is supplied with a branch ofthe ve- nae portae, arteria hepatica, and venae hepaticae. With these there is also seen a minute ramification of the excretory duct of the liver. These last minute branches are the roots of the • Explanation of the plate of the gall-bladder. A The gall-bladder. B The cyftic duct. C The hepatic duct. D The common duct. E The hepatic artery. F The cyftic artery coining off from it. OF THE LIVER. 67 biliary duct; which running into each other, form trunks re- sembling the branches of veins, and which attaching them- selves to the vena portae, form the greater trunks, answering to the right and left side of the liver. These two divisions of the hepatic duct approaching each other, unite (C), while they are attached to the right branch ofthe vena portae. Their union constitutes the hepatic duct, or ductus choledochus. When the duct of the liver has advanced a little way from the transverse fissure, it is joined by the cystic duct (B), or perhaps we should rather say, considering the use ofthe cystic duct, that it is reflected from it at an acute angle to the right side. The ductus cysticus is much smaller than the hepatic duct; and is somewhat curved in the direction towards its ex- pansion into the gall-bladder; for there it takes a very sudden turn downward, as is seen in the marginal plate. The hepatic duct, after being joined by the cystic duct, con- tinues its course under the name of ductus communis choledo- chus, or common duct.* Now become somewhat larger, it takes its course under the head of the pancreas to the back part of the duodenum, about five inches from the pylorus. Before it enters the gut, or more generally while included in the coats, it is joined by the pancreatic duct. Having pierced the muscular coat, it runs for some time in the cellular coat, in the length of the gut, and then opens upon the eminence of a considerable valvular plica ofthe inner coat. This hole is regularly limited, and by no means equal to the diameter of the duct, either where it is contained within the coats of the gut, or in its course from the liver to the gut. Sometimes the hepatic and pancreatic duct open by distinct perforations. The outer coat of these ducts is smooth and strong ;f within this a cellular and nervous coat is described,}: and muscular fibres imagined ; but the inner coat is worthy of attention. It is reticulated in such a way, that a probe pushed up the duct is catched by their valve-like action.§ gall-bladder. We have already noticed, that the gall-bladder is attached to the lower surface of the right lobe of the liver, and partly bu- • Ductus choledochus, hepatico cyfticus, (D.) f Although this coat refills, in a confiderable degree, the diftention of the duct, when blown into or injected, yet the whole arc fometimes fo diftended as to idmit the thumb. But this is rather to be confidered as growth and enlarge- "iicnt, than diftention. | By Haller. > Thefe I have f«en miftaken fur actual obftructions. 68 ©P THE LIVER. ried in its sinus : it has sometimes occurred that it was merely suspended to the liver by a membrane like a mesentery. It is a bag of a pyriform shape ; its greater end or fundus is contigu- ous to the colon ; its lower end or neck to the duodenum. It has been found wanting altogether.* It is generally of a size to contain an ounce, or an ounce and a half of bile. The coats of the gall-bladder are the outer peritoneal coat; j a middle cellular coat, what from its analogy to that of the in- testines we should call vascular coat; and an inner coat. In the intermediate coat muscular fibres have been looked for with great eagerness, but none have been demonstrated, although a conviction remains that there are muscular fibres in the com- position of the coats of the gall-bladder. This coat gives form, limit, and strength to the gall-bladder. The third or inner coat is formed into innumerable rugae, so as to take a cellular or reticulated texture. These loculi, as we may call them, thus formed by the duplicature of the internal mem- brane, are of considerable variety of shape, square, round, Or triangular. These rugae, and the whole internal membrane oi the gall-bladder, have a beautiful and minute net-work of Vessels upon them ; and in these cells there can be little doubt th.a there are small mucous follicules, or pores, or an exudation from extreme vessels, whose discharge sheaths the surface from the irritation of the acrid bile. The extreme degree of vascularity and reticulated texture of this inner coat of the gall-bladder is not apparent before the sixth or seventh month ot the foetus, and then it takes a peculiar texture in preparation for the reception of the secreted bile. Towards the opening ofthe bladder into the cystic duct the rugae take a semilunar figure, and seem to have a valvular action, in at least so far that they seem intended to give a de* gree of difficulty to the passage of the bile. The same struc- ture of the internal coat prevails in the cystic duct. However strange it may appear to one, considering the re- lation ofthe liver as a gland to its ducts, and to the gall-bladder as a receptacle of the bile, an opinion was entertained that the bile of the gall-bladder was secreted by its own coats, and that it was of a different nature from the bile conveyed from the substance of the liver. Without further argument it is • In which cafe the dilated ducts in their courfe would feem to have been capable of retaining a quantity of bile ready to be evacuated into the inteftine. A double gall-bladder has fometimes been found. f Like the peritoneal coat of the liver, it feems to poflefs very diftinct veflels from the vafcular coat below. " Si itaque ea, a reiiquis membranis folvi tur ex- pletis antea materia quadam colorata vans, ab arteria hepatica et vena portarum venientibus; videmus earn ne minimum quidem accipere furculum quo oroanjtiit neri/ea et vajiulofa." Annotationes Acad. F.. Aug. Walter, p. 57. OF THE LIVER. 69 sufficient to say, that when the cystic duct is tied, or when it is preternaturally obstructed, there is no bile secreted into the gall-bladder.* From the connections of the gall-bladder, and from the consideration of the whole anatomy, there can remain no doubt that the gall-bladder is a mere receptacle, reserving a sufficient store of this fluid for the due change to be performed upon the food : that as the stomach is not at all times loaded with food, nor the chyme and fluid from the stomach inces- santly passing through the duodenum, neither is the bile at all times running from the gall ducts. On the contrary, as the stomach is emptied of its contents at stated intervals, there seems to be a provision for a quantity of bile being evacuated from the receptacle and ducts proportioned to the food, and while it is passing the duodenum. Whether we should con- ceive that this is a necessary consequence of the retention of the bile in the gall-bladder, or a wise provision of nature, I am uncertain ; but it appears, that the longer the bile is retained, or the longer the fast and the deficiency of food in the duode- num, the more acrid and inspissated is the bile, and the greater also in quantity. This inspissation of the bile takes place in consequence ofthe activity of the lymphatics, which ramifying on the coats absorb the thinner part ofthe bile. Further; I cannot look upon the rugae and cellular structure of the inner coat of the gall-bladder in any other light than as the means of increasing the surface, and exposing the bile to a further absorption of its watery parts than otherwise would take place. The gall-bladder is supposed by some to be emptied by the general pressure of the abdomen; an opinion founded on a mistake, which a very little consideration might correct. Others think that the stomach, or duodenum, or colon, being- distended by the food, compress and empty the gaU-bladder ; while others with more apparent correctness allege, that it is emptied in consequence of a consent of parts. With the latter I would confidently affirm, that as the aliment passes the duodenum, the bile follows apace, either from the alternate contraction and relaxation of the duodenum occasioning a re- laxation of the orifice ofthe ducts, or more probably from the ducts being excited, as the salivary glands are excited by the presence of sapid bodies in the mouth. By want and hunger, • Were there no other proof of the gall-bladder being merely a receptacle, and not in any degree for fecrtt.ng the bile, the courfe of its veins (which run into the vena ports) would be fufficient indication. If they had returned the blood from having performed the fecretion of the bile, they would have dropt into the cava, and not into the portae. ro BF THE LIVER. on the contrary, the gall-bladder is allowed to distend ; there is no call for its evacuation. Experiments would even teach us, that the gall-bladder has not the same irritability excitable by stimuli applied to the coats, as the stomach, intestines, or bladder of urine ; which is a proof that, like the iris, and many other parts of the body, its action is roused more powerfully by the stimulus of sympathy and consent of remote parts, than by the distention ot its coats ; whereas the intestines and bladder have it in their constitution to be excited to contraction by simple distention. From experiments it would appear, in confirmation of what is here alleged, that while the food is in the stomach little bile is discharged ; but that it flows when the matter is passing the duodenum, so that a great quantity is then formed in the gut. On the contrary, in a state of want and hunger, the gall- bladder is greatlv distended, and yet little bile flows from it ; although it is not only more accumulated, but more acrid and bitter.* The gall-bladder is not destitute, however, of irritability and the power of contraction ; for it would appear from many cases that, like the urinary bladder, it contracts upon concre- tions,.and becomes thick in its coats. The retention of the bile, surcharging the ducts, and dis- tending the gall-bladder, and the sudden discharge of ac- cumulated bile, and the irregularities of its course when in- fluenced by disorder of the viscera, are the source of the most severe and distressing symptoms.f In the dead body we see the colon and duodenum, or what- ever parts lie in contact with the gall-bladder, stained with bile ; but this evidence of transudation which is found in the dead body, is not seen in the living ; while the stain from the bile is observed to be deeper and more extensive in bodies long dead. It is therefore another example of the peculiar proper- ties inherent in the living fibres, that no transudation is allow- ed ; but that the fluids, which appear as if exuding from the living surfaces, are discharges from organic pores, or from the extremities of vessels. OF THE MINUTE STRUCTURE OF THE LIVER. The liver is firmer and dryer in some degree than any of the other viscera ; the intexture of membrane is weak, and in • Anat. generale de Xav. Bichattom. iv. p. 6 5. •j- We have one example of this in a late Treatife on the Difcafes of the Bowels of Children, by Dr. Cheyne : an effay moft particularly ufeful in its objects; and the reafoning of which is founded on anatomical obfervation, fupported by facts and deductions from practice. OF THE LIVER. 71 consequence the substance of the liver is friable and easily torn. When cut or torn, it seems for the greater part vascu- lar ; or it displays the mouths of innumerable ducts and ves- sels, and, after a minute injection, the blood-vessels seem to pervade every particle, even when examined with the micros- cope. This texture of vessels, in which we may say the substance of the liver chiefly consists, is surrounded with a delicate membrane, the continued peritoneum. It retains the character of peritoneum, in being a simple membrane, whitish, and a little pellucid. In this membrane minute arteries and veins ramifv, which are unconnected with the internal system of vessels, and in the close cellular membrane beneath it the lymphatic vessels take their course. When a section is made of the liver, the vessels may be thus distinguished : the ducts by the thickness of their coats, and their yellow colour ; the arteries by a less degree of thick- ness, and a more resisting elasticity ; the branches of the vena portae and the cava hepaticae by the thinness of their coats, of which those of the latter are considerably the weaker. With the investiture of the peritoneal coat of the liver even the vascular tissue of the body of the liver has no communica- tion by vessels.* It is therefore considered as an organ of a peculiarly distinct organization. By the proofs from anatomi- cal injections we are informed, that there is a free intercourse through the extreme branches of all the five systems of vessels in the liver. From minute injections, and the trying and making of sections in the liver, there seems no likelihood of gaining information of the structure and connections of these vessels. Walther, who seems to have examined more metho- dically and minutely than any other anatomist in any age, could make no distinction of parts. In whatever way he mad/: his sections, whatever system of vessels he filled, whe- ther the whole vessels or each separately, he could not ascer- tain the direction and course of any particular vessel, nor its inosculations, but all was obscure, and as if constituting one chaotic mass. In wet preparations, however, he observed, that the extremities of the branches of the hepatic artery- opened into the vena portae : that the branches of the vena portae had a double termination : that some of them, by a sud- den turn and serpentine course, terminated in the branches of the venae cavae hepaticaef ; while others were seen to terminate • Soemmering. Walther, loc. cit. &c. f I fhould imagine thit in this he might have been deceived by the leffer branches of the portse (filled with injection) opening into the fide of the larger 72 OF THE LIVER, or open into the biliary ducts. Further he observed, that iu all the branches of the vena portae there was a peculiar com- pressed appearance which distinguished them from all the other vessels of the viscus. There have been observed, by almost every author, inter- sections of the intimate membrane ofthe liver, which divides and subdivides the fasciculi of vessels. These are, however, obscure divisions. The last perceptible divisions have been called acini ;* and they are rather presumed than directly proved to have in their composition an extreme ramification of the several vessels of which the liver consists.f We have seen Malpighi conceiving that these bodies were simple glands collected on the ramifications of the vessels ; that they were little vesicles ; and that from them the pori bilarii took their origin. In this opinion he was successfully opposed by Ruysch, who affirmed that these were vascular ; and in this he has been supported by Albinus. It would in truth appear, that the description of these partitions of the substance of the liver, and the ultimate subdivision of it into these little grains, about which there has been so much specu- lation, is not founded in an accurate observation, and that there are neither criptae, hollow or cellular, nor little bodies made up of convoluted arteries, but the minute parcels of vessels which are observable may be called acini, in the strict definition which has been given in the introduction. Finally, Ruysch's opinion may be given in these words : (Epist. ad Virum Clar. Ner. Boerhaave, p. 69.) " Sed nolo diutius tergiversari, fateor ergo, quod, quando primo incipie- bam me exercere in anatomicis, videbam tunc quidem, quod in jecore humano se ostendebant acinuli parvi innumerabili numero, quae turn temporis appellabantur glandulae ; nam nemo cogitabat aliter sed manet sola jam haec questio, an aci- nuli hi hie herentes sint glandulae simplicissimae, folliculi cavi cum emissario an quid aliquid ? dico nemo demonstravit illos tales esse ut hie assumis. Imo vero facile jam erit demon- strare, acinos hos cum criptis antea pertractis nihil commune habere : quia oculis nostris non apparent ut membranulae cavae & quia etiam non habent emissarium. Sed componuntur tan- tum ex extremitatibus ultimis vasculorum sanguiferorum unitis in formam spherae rotunditatis, neque, quantum possum videre etiam membranula aliqua sua singulari circumambiuntur." trunks; and that there is no fuch termination of the hepatic arteries in the fides of the vena portarum, fo that their open mouths are difcermble. * See the definition in the introduction to the prefent volume. f Acinos nemo rejicit, ne Ruyfchius quidem, fed de interiori fabrica difputatur. Halltr. Of THE LIVER. f& OF THE SECRETION OF THE BILE. Upon reviewing the whole system of the liver the peculiari- ties in the vena portae strike us the most. It occurs to us that the passing of this profusion of blood retrograde into the liver, with the slow motion peculiar to venous blood, and after having gone the circulation through the intestines, and consequently lost those properties which constituted it arterial blood, is a provision for the secretion of the bile. It is almost universally concluded, that the secretion of bile is made from the blood of the vena portae. But as we see that this blood distributed by the branches of the vena portae in the liver must be so far exhausted as to be« come incapable of all the uses accomplished by the arterial blood in other glands, that although the vena portae be pecu- liarly adapted to secrete the bile, it is not capable of supplying the nutrition and the energy to the substance and vessels of the liver, there is a necessity for arterial blood being sent to this gland through a branch of the arterial system. We have had occasion to remark, that no part reti-irs is function in vigour, nor the living properties which are inhiient in it, while the whole ceconomy is entire and correct, unless the blood be cir- culated through it. Therefore it would appear necessary that the arteria hepatica, a branch of the aortic system, should also be bestowed upon this viscus. These arteries perform the same office here in the liver that the bronchial arteries do in the lungs, or the coronary arteries in the heart, or the vasa vasorum in the great vessels. The pulmonic artery carries venous blood into the lungs, which having returned from the circulation of the body cannot send off smaller branches to supply the membranes and vessels of the lungs, it is necessary that for this purpose branches of the aortic system shall enter the lungs. Again, in the heart the blood contained in its ven- tricles is incapable of supplying its substance, or the blood coming through the calibre of the great vessels cannot be the means of ministering to their active powers, but for this pur- pose the vasa vasorum are distributed through the coats of the vessels. These vessels therefore bear an analogy to the arteria hepatica in the liver. We must not however suppose that this 9cheme of the action of the vnscular system of the liver, however rational and simple, will be universally allowed. Indeed there are circumstances which seem to stand in opposition to it. Of these, the most interesting is the case of unusual distribution Vol. IV. K 74 OF THE LIVLR. of the vessels of the liver communicated by Mr. Abernethy o* St. Bartholomew's hospital. The subject was a female infant which was supposed to be about ten months old. Among other varieties it was olserv- ed, that the branch ofthe cceliac artery distributed to the liver was larger than common, and exceeded by more than one- third the usual size of the splenic artery. This was the only- vessel which supplied the liver with blood for the purpose of either nutrition or secretion. The vena portarum was formed in the usual manner, but terminated in the inferior cava nearly on a line with the renal veins. The liver was of the usual size, but had not the usual inclination to the right side of the body : it was situated in the middle of the upper part of the abdomen, and nearly an equal portion of the gland extended into either hypochondrium. The gall-bladder lay collapsed in its usual situation. It was of a natural structure, but rather smaller than common. On opening it there was found in it about half a tea spoonful of bile. The bile in colour resem- bled that of children, being of a deep yellow brown, and tasted like bile, but it was not so acridly bitter and nauseating as common bile. Mr. Abernethy remarks upon this case, that when an anato- mist contemplates the performance of biliary secretion by a vein, a circumstance so contrary to the general oeconomy ot the body, he naturally concludes that bile cannot be prepared unless from venal blood ; and he also infers, that the equal and undisturbed current of blood in the veins is favourable to the secretion ; but that the circumstances of this case in which bile was secreted by an artery prove the fallacy of this reasoning.* We may further observe on this case, that it does_ not prove the bile in the natural oeconomy to be secreted by the arteries and not by the vena portae ; for the artery here was unusually large, so that it performed a function in this instance which it does not usually perform. On the contrary, had the arters been of the usual size, we might then have concluded that the vena portae was distributed to the liver to serve some lesser use in the ceconomy of the svstem, and that it did not secrete the bile. The liver, it is said, was of the ordinary size. Now as th<. hulk of the liver is, in its natural state, made up of the dilated veins, it is some proof of what I should imagine had taken place here, that bv some provision of the vessels the arterial blood had been diffused, and the celerity of its motion checked * See Mr. Abfrnethy's cafe, of uncommon formation of the livtr. Phyi Trnr factions. OF THE LIVER. 75 "previous to its ultimate distribution. Nay, it may have opened into the branches of veins answering to the extremities of the vena portae. In the deficiency of the due acrid and bitter state of the bile, there is in this case evidence that the bile formed from the arterial blood is still unfit for the perfect secretion. I conceive this to be countenanced by the circulation of the blood in the livtr of the foetus, and by its effects upon the secretion. We have seen that almost the entire gland is supplied with arterial blood returning from the umbilical vein ; and the natural deduction from this is, that it is the cause of the less stimulat- ing quality of the bile in the foetus. I conclude, that this singular and interesting case may strengthen the opinion which some have entertained that the extreme branches of the hepatic artery pour blood into the ex- tremi'ies of the vena port-t previous to this formation of the bile by these veins ; but it still leaves us with the general con- clusion that the peculiarities in the distribution of the vena portae are a provision for the secretion of the bile, and that the branch of the aortic system, the hepatic artery, is otherwise necessary to the support of the function of the liver. Finally, as to the use of the liver independently of the secretion ofthe bile, we must lay aside the opinions mentioned by Haller that it supports the diaphragm, protrudes it up in expiration, and receives the contraction of it equally in inspira- tion, so as uniformly to compress the other abdominal viscera ; or that it foments and cherishes the stomach by the heat of its blood. These are at least as bad as the theories of the ancients mentioned in the beginning of this section. Haller's failing is the promiscuous admittance of all facts and every kind of theory, with a timorousness and indecision in giving his own opinion. There is another remark of Haller which deserves attention. When I reflect, says he, that there is no bile required in the foetus, there being no food received : when again I see that the liver is of great size in the fcetus, and not small like the lungs, which are destined to an operation in the ceconomy after birth, I cannot but suspect that it has some other use in the foetus than the secretion of the bile. If the umbilical vein had opened directly into the cava, he thinks it would have returned with too great an impetus upon the heart, and would by its prepon- derancy have retarded the return of the blood from the lower extremities. He thinks that the liver is useful in breaking and weakening the impulse of the blood from the umbilical vein ; that it is a guard to the right auricle, which would be other- ivays endangered by the rapid flow of the blood. Now surely V6 OF THE PANCREAS. the liver is much less able to stand the impulse of the blood thm the heart; and yet there is no provision for the breaking ofthe force of the blood in the liver. Further, there is a direct duct of communication leading to the heart. There is no reason to believe that the umbilical vein carries back the blood with greater force than any other returning vein : on the contrary, from its size and the length of its course it is natural to suppose the motion of the blood in it to be very slow and equable. We must look upon the peculiarities in the circulation of the blood in the liver of the fcetus as a provision against the secre- tion of stimulating bile ; for when the child is born and the circulation altered, bile is formed more abundantly, and be- comes the stimulus to the whole abdominal viscera, rousing them to new action. As to the comparison which Haller has made between the state of the liver and that of the lungs, it is evident that the latter, though small in bulk, are fully formed, and want only inflation to complete their function. On the contrary, in the hver of the fcetus the vessels are necessarily distended with blood, to give them the size requisite for this future function ; but that blood, either from its qualities or from the easy and direct passage it has into the heart, does not secrete the bile in quantity and quality so as to stimulate the ducts and intestines, as in the adult circulation. If it did, we should not see the alimentary canal of the fcetus loaded with matter, and yet not stimulated to action, but in a state of in- activity and torpor. SECTION II. OF THE PANCREAS. The Pancreas is a gland the largest of those which have been called conglomorated, that is, distinctly consisting of lesser parts united. It is of a long form like a dog's tongue, and lies across the spine, and behind the stomach. Its excre- tory duct opens into the duodenum. The pancreas is confined betwixt the two lamina of the me- socolon, and it is united to them by a loose cellular membrane ; it lies before the great mesenteric vessels : its small extremity touches the spleen, and is near the capsuli ofthe left kidney : but towards the right extremity it increases gradually in massi- OF THE PANCREAS. 77 ness until its head lodges upon the duodenum. It is like the salivary glands in its appearance, consisting of lobules succes- sively smaller and smaller ; and it also resembles them in the manner in which its duct is formed. The duct* begins to- wards the left extremity by exceedingly small branches ; these running together form a middle duct, which taking a serpen- tine course towards the great extremity, and increased by the accession ofthe lateral branches in its course, becomes nearly of the size of a writing quill. Now approaching the duode- num it unites to the biliary duct, and opens along with it into the duodenum. A valve has been described as in the ex- tremity of the pancreatic duct, but it is certainly incapable of the action of a valve, as the bile has been found to have gone retrograde into the trunk of the pancreatic duct. Sometimes there are two pancreatic ducts, but more frequently the part of the gland next the duodenum, and which is called the round head of the pancreas,! has an excretory duct peculiar to itself, which either opens into the duodenum separately from the main duct, by piercing the coats ofthe intestines nearer the stomach, or sometimes opens further down. De Graff, Ruysch and many others have made experiments to discover the nature of the secretion from the pancreas. Tubes were introduced into the ducts, and bottles were ap- pended to them in living dogs, so as to catch the pancreatic fluid : it was found ropy, insipid, and like the saliva. It has therefore been concluded, from the colour, structure, ducts, and secretion of the pancreas having so strict a resemblance to those of the parotid and submaxillary glands, that it is of the nature of the salivary glands of the mouth. The general opinion has been, that it is useful in secreting a fiuid which dilutes and moderates the acrimony of the bile. More accu- rate chemical examination of the pancreatic fluid has not been made, or has not been successful in showing any peculiarity in it. Considering the pancreas as a salivary gland, how great must be the quantity of fluid poured out by it, if, as we are entitled to do, we take the analogy ofthe parotid submaxillary and sublingual glands. These salivary glands, although they may be said to surround all the jaws from the zigomatic pro- cess on either side, are nothing in massiness and size to the pancreas. Again, the pancreas is most plentifully supplied with blood-vessels. Besides lesser branches of arteries, the pancreatico-duodenalis gives two branches, which take an ex- • Ductus Virfungi. f This is what Winflow calls the little pancreas, and is fometimes schirrous fe as to comprefs the biliary ducts. 78 ©F THE PANCREAS. tensive course through it, and are joined by other mesenteric twigs ; and twigs proceed from the vessels ofthe stomach, and even from the hepatic artery : but more particularly we have to observe the large branches bestowed upon it by the splenic artery, where it takes its course close upon it. While the masticators are working, the parotid gland pours out so great a quantity of saliva, says M. Helvetius, that it is inconceivable, and what I should not believe, had I not seen it in a soldier of the guards. A cut with a sabre in the cheek had opened the salivary duct: the wound healing on the inside of the cheek left a fistulous discharge from the parotid duct. When he eat, there flowed from this hole a great abundance of saliva, so that during dinner, which is not long in the Hotel Dieu, it moistened several napkins. How much must flow from all the salivary glands ? How much from the pancreas, which is greater than them all collectively ? Like the biliary secretion it is probable that the contents of the stomach passing the duodenum or the bile flowing from the biliary ducts, form the stimulus to the discharge of the pancre- atic fluid ; and as we see that the morsel in the mouth will quickly produce an almost instantaneous secretion and dis- charge of saliva, so we are led to conclude that the flow of pancreatic fluid may be as suddenly produced without the ne- cessity of a reservoir, as in the biliary system. We naturally conceive that the effect of this fluid is to diminish the viscidity ofthe bile, and by dilutingit to mix it uniformly with the food. There are however few facts to enable us to reason on the ef- fects ofthe pancreatic fluid. If we give full credit to the ex- periments of Malpighi and Brunner we may conclude, that when the pancreas is taken away, the more acrid bile causes vomiting or voracious appetite by its stimulus. Schirrus of the pancreas has been found attended with a costive and slow motion of the intestines ; which seems to contradict the lesult of these experiments on animals; but by the schirrosity and enlargement of the pancreas the biliary ducts may have been more or less compressed, and the retarding of the usual quan- tity- ofthe biliary secretion might produce the slowness ofthe bowels.* * According to the hypothefis of Siivius, the ufe of the pancreas was to fupply an acid fpirit or juice, and the biliary fecretion being of the nature of an alkali, thefe two ftruggling together caufed the feparation of the chyle from the feces. This good fight did not flop here, but thefe enemies being carried into the blood, continued their warfare in the heart itelfand lighted up the vital flame there. Nay, if we believe the experiment of F. Schuly, (de Veteri Med.) this hypothefis was not without its proofs ; for having tied in the portion of the duodenum of a living dog, where the pancreatic and bil^ry duels cnu r, he law the cbulition Irom This ftruggle pf the acid and the alkali; and when he compreffed the hepatic duct, OF THE SPLEEN. 79 SECTION III. OF THE SPLEEN. The spleen is a viscus of an irregular, oval figure, and dark purple colour. It is attached to the great extremity of the stomach. It is soft in its substance ; and has the peritoneal coat very delicate. We should be glad could we say that it \s of a parenchematous structure, for in truth little is known of its organization. In treating of this subject we must be indulged in some spe- culation ; and indeed it is privHedged ground ; for the history ofthe opinions regarding the supposed function of the spleen is full of loose conjectures or wild hypothesis, and nothing is as yet certainly known of its use. SEAT AND CONNECTIONS. The spleen is seated in the left hypochondrium ; above the left kidney ; and under the protection ofthe false ribs ; and of course it is under the edge of the diaphragm. It is connected with the stomach by the cellular membrane, by the omentum and in a still more particular manner by the vasa brevia. It has also connections with the left extremity of the pancreas by cellular membrane, and the branches of. the splenic vessels. Lastly, it has a firmer attachment to the diaphragm, by means of a ligament formed by the peritoneum.* The spleen is of no regular figure. Where it is contiguous to the diaphragm it is uniformly convex : towards the stomach its surface, while it is hollowed out and concave, presents two sides, so that we say the whole mass is somewhat of a triangu- lar form. The anterior edge of the spleen is notched with deep sulci ; behind and at the upper part the margin is large and round. The substance of the spleen is the most spongy, tender, and soft of the abdominal viscera ; so much so that not only does the finger make an impression upon its surface, but it actually disorders and tears its vessels. After a successful injection the the tumefaction ofthe inteftine fubfided: when he took off this compreffion it was again blown up. As this experiment has not fucceeded fince, as Haller ob- ferves, Schuyl was probably deceived by the periftaltic motion of the inteftines. * Yet the fpleen is very apt to change its fituation, or to fall down under the protection ofthe falfe ribs. It is liable to enlargement in afcites. From which circumftances it will not be wonderful if it is wounded in tapping for the afcites. Sec Monro on Dropfy. 80 OP THE SPLEE£. whole seems made up of vessels ; and if any thing like acini or globules are to be observed, the microscope will show them to be accidentally produced by the fasciculi of vessels. It has a strict resemblance to the substance of the placenta. The spleen is seldom smaller th in natural; often greatly enlarge J. I have seen it equal to the liver in size, and filling the whole left side of the belly. It has been frequently found thus en- larged, without any peculiar symptoms indicating such a dis- ease during life. From its soft texture and great vascularity, like the liver, it has been found rent by blows and falls ; and wounds here, as in the liver, by opening the large vessels are suddenly fatal. Sometimes it is hard and schirrous, and marbled in its colour. There is seldom suppuration in it. The spleen has been supposed to swell up and enlarge when the stomach is empty, and to be contracted when it is full. It has been observed, that it is large and spongy in those who have died a lingering death, or who have been long ailing: that on the contrary, it is smaller and firm in those who have died suddenly of a violent death. We are informed, that the blood of the splenic vein is pecu- liar, insomuch that it does not coagulate like the blood in the other veins ofthe body.* That which more than any other circumstance excites our attention, is the great size of the blood vessels of the spleen. Both the splenic vein and the artery are of great size in pro- portion to the bulk and weight of the spleen ; and in their course they are particularly tortuous. I conceive we may also draw consequences from the distribution of their branches to the stomach (viz. the vasa brevia and left gastro epiploic) and to the pancreas. Its lymphatics are numerous. It is supplied with nerves, but has very little sensibility. It has no excretory duct. OPINIONS REGARDING THE USE OF THE SPLTEN. Of the various uses of the spleen, the lowest conjecture in respect to ingenuity or probability is, that like a sand-bath it foments the stomach, and promotes the process of digestion. This notion is perhaps not inferior in absurdity to that opinion which ascribed to the spleen the office of forming an acid juice, which being carried by the vasa brevia into the stomach, was supposed to excite the appetite.f * With regard to this point I have no opinion, having hitherto neglected to examine the fact. f 1 am miftaken in calling this the loweft in abfurdity. The fpleen has been •onfidered as the feat of the foul! the caufe of venereal appetite I the gland OF THE SPLEEN. 81 It was a better conception that the spleen is the seat of me- lancholy ; " that moping here doth hypochondria sit :" or of " laughter holding both his sides," of which the holding of the sides was an evidence. And again, since tickling the ribs is a demonstration of the effect from this excitement of the spleen,* that the growth of the spleen promotes laughter to such a de- gree, that it becomes a permanent silly simper impertinently excited. Nay further, we have authority for the excision of the spleen from those who are otherwise incurable in their pro- pensity to laughter. The following is a theory which has been very commonly received. A great quantity of blood is imported into the spleen with a slow motion, owing to its serpentine, course. When the stomach is empty, the blood is received in a greater quantity by the spleen, where it has an opportunity of stagnat- ing. Here the blood fomented, attenuated, and in a manner dissolved by the neighbourhood of the putrid faeces in the co- lon, enters upon the first steps of a begun putrefaction. By this resolving of the blood it is made more fluid, in which state it is returned by the veins, there being no excretory ducts. Now when the spleen is compressed between the distended stomach and the ribs, and the contracting dia- phragm, the blood is pressed out from it in greater quantity and celerity towards the liver, mixing with the sluggish blood in the trunk of the vena portae, replenished with the tat and oil of the omentum, it dilates it and prevents its stagnation and tendency to congeal. In short, the spleen has been supposed to be subservient to the function of the liver, and to the pre- paration of a watery (and subalkaline) fluid to the blood of the portae. Another opinion has been, that it counterbalanced the mass of the liver seated to the right side of the belly. Hewson entertained a theory regarding the use of the spleen which sullies his high character and reputation. He conceived that the spleen added the flat vesicle of the globules of the blood : his only observation in way of proof was, that he saw a few red globules returning by the lymphatics of the spleen : the effect, I have no doubt, of the injury of its substance, or of the compression of its vessels. It seems to me strange that Which formed the mucilaginous fluids of the joints! The atrabilis was received here concocted and tranfmitted to the liver. It drew forth and formed blood from the ftomach, &c. Other phyfiologifts, not contented with the theories prefented to them, and yet incapable of fuggefting others more likely, have very modeftlj afferted that the fpleen was of no ufe at ail. • Rifus in liene fedes videtur ex effectu titilationis nataque in plunrais mortah- bus rifum excitat. &c. Haller. His fobcr objection is, that tickling the right fide will do as well as the left. Voi,. IV. J> 82 OF THE SPLEEN. such a man seeing the large splenic artery throwing its full tide of perfect arterial blood into the spleen, full of globules, com- plete in every respect, and again seeing a few globules carried back by the lymphatics, should imagine that this artery formed these few vesicles with which it was already so fully charged. Of late years we have seen men endeavouring to raise them- selves into notice by an attachment to the opinions of their departed patrons ; by supporting those opinions ; by holding, as thev imagine, the proofs and illustrations of them in their possession : but seldom do we see the memory of great men honoured by such obsequies. The officiousness of Hewson's friends in promulgating his opinions has done no honour to his memory. They have attempted to support, on insufficient grounds, what he might have had the ingenuity to render plausible, and which are very far from honourable to his repu- tation, imperfect as they now appear. I conceive the spleen to be an organ subservient to the sto- mach : and not only the constant attachment of it to the sto- mach in the human body, but the constancy with which it is found connected with the stomach in the lower animals, con- firms the opinion. I regard it as a provision for giving the vessels of the stomach an occasional power and greater acti vity, enabling them to pour out a quantity of fluid proportioned to the necessity of the digestion. In the first place, let us ex- amine the course and form of the splenic artery, and I think we shall find the great peculiarity of its size, and tortuous form, and strong coats, a provision for occasional great in- crease of power ; while, if not roused by the peculiar sympa- thies which actuate it, it is of a form to retard and weaken the velocity of the blood. This is founded on these propositions : 1. The muscular power of an artery increases as it recedes from the heart; the elastic power diminishes. 2. An artery, the nearer it approaches to its final distribu- tion, is the more immediately under the excitement and con- troul of the organ ; is active when the organ is excited; is, relatively speaking, quiescent when that organ is not called by its sympathies to exercise its function. 3. An artery tortuous in its course has more muscularity and greater power of action than one which takes a straight course ; but in proportion to the increase of power which it obtains by its increase of length in this tortuous and bending course, will these turns retard and weaken the force of the heart upon the extreme ramifications of the vessel. Thus a tortuous artery is the means of increasing the velo- city of the blood by its own action, but it makes the organ less dependent on the general force of the circulation. We ac- OF THE SPLEEN. 83 cordingly find that in those organs where there is occasional activity alternating with a quiescent state, the artery is tortu- ous ; and where there is an increase of force required in the circulation, there, the artery, from being straight in its course, becomes crooked and twisted in every way.* From these remarks, we may be inclined to draw, from the tortuous figure of the splenic artery, a conclusion somewhat different from that which has hitherto been deduced. We may conclude that it is not the means of retarding the blood in its circulation, but of giving force to it. The splenic artery does not only ramify in the spleen, but it supplies all the left part of the stomach, and that great sacculated extremity in particular which receives the food, and in which the process of digestion is chiefly performed. My idea is, that when the stomach is empty, when there is no food in it to solicit the dis- charge of the gastric fluid, the blood circulates in a moderate degree in the coats of the stomach, and the spleen receives the surcharge of blood; but when a full meal is taken into the stomach, when the action of the gastric juice is required in great quantity, the action of the splenic artery is solicited to the vasa brevia and left gastro-epiploic artery, and thus a sud- den flow of the gastric fluid is bestowed by the increased activity of the splenic artery. When again the contents of the stomach are fully saturated with the fluids from its coats, there is no longer an excited action of the splenic vessels, and the artery terminating in the veins, the spleen returns the blood to the liver. While the vessels of the stomach partake largely of the supply of blood, the arteries to the pancreas also re- ceive some increase of activity ; and even the blood of the vena portae requires an additional activity. We have seen that the stomach and intestines, the liver, pancreas, and spleen are combined in function, connected by the same system of vessels, mutually subservient to each other, and tending to the same end, the reception, digestion, and first stage ofthe assimilation of nutritious matter to the system. We leave this subject therefore until we can take up that of absorption and the lymphatic system, and pass to the kidney and viscera of the pelvis. • This has been fuppofed the effect of the impulfe ofthe blood, but nothing can be more falfe. Let any one examine the artery of a limb when a great tumour is growing; the artery will be found tortuous to fupply it. Again, iu the aneurifmal varix where there is a breach in the artery, and the blood finds a freer return to the heart, the artery will be found enlarged and tortuous in order to fupply the lower part ofthe limb ; while there is a quantity of the blood withdrawn from the circu- lation by the communication with the vein. 84 OF THE KIDNEY. SECTION IV. OF THE KIDNEY. The kidnies are distinct from those parts which have hithertv engaged us, as they secrete the urine, and form therefore tht link betwixt the viscera ofthe abdomen and those of the pel- vis ; for though lying in the abdomen, they are more strictly connected with the parts in the pelvis. The structure of the kidnty forms a very interesting subject of inquiry ; because it is the field of dispute betwixt the contending parties regarding the structure of glands and the theory of secretion. It is chiefly from the kidnies that the facts are drawn in illustration ofthe opinions of Malpighi, Ruysch, and all the others. Form, seat, and connections. The kidnies lie on each side of the spine ; sunk as it were in the fat of the loins ; attached to the muscles of the loins ; and in part lying on the lower belly of the diaphragm ; which last connection is the cause ofthe pain felt in respiration during inflammation in the kidney. The kidney lies betwixt the 6pine of the ilium and the lowest rib. The right kidney is placed somewhat lower than the left, which is owing to the great size of the liver on that side. The kidnies are without the abdomen, that is to say, behind the peritoneum ; for the kidney lying close upon the muscles of the loins, the peritoneum is merely stretched over it. This is the reason why calculi in the kidney have wrought them- selves out by fistulas in the loins ; and it is the ground ofthe hazardous proposal of cutting into the kidney to extract calculi. The adipose membrane surrounds the kidney, and forms a perfect capsule ; for it is this which is sometimes in an extra- ordinary degree loaded with accumulated fat. Upon this cap- sule the cecum is attached on the right side, the colon on the left, and betwixt the kidnies and the intestines there is a strict Sympathv, which is apparent in the nephritic colic. The figure ofthe kidney is that of an oval bent, or a little in- curvated, So as to form a sulcus or general concavity to one side, while the other takes a greater convexity. By the con- cave surface of the kidney, which is towards the spine and great vessels, the arteries and veins and ureter pass in by the sinus round which the substance or glandular body ofthe kid- nev terminates abruptly. The abdominal aorta and the vena cava lying close on the spine and near to each other, give off laterally the emulgent OF THE KIDNEY. 85 arteries and veins. The renal or emulgent artery comes from the side ofthe aorta betwixt the upper and the lower mesenteric arteries : that of the left kidney has its origin a little higher than the right: and the aorta being on the left and the cava towards the right side of the spine, the left emulgent artery is shorter than the vein j the artery longer than the vein on the right side. Again, the aorta being more closely attached to the spine, the emulgent vein lies rather above the artery. The vessels, and especially the arteries of the kidney, are very irregular in their number and form. Where they enter the body of the gland, they are accompanied with a capsule which continues with them to this final distribution. Some- times a solitary vessel is seen making its exit by the convex surface of the kidney. We have had occasion to remark on the nerves of the kid- nies and their connection with the coverings of the testicle, and to notice their effect in producing"numbness of the thigh and retraction of the scrotum in inflammation of the gland, when stones lodge in the pelvis or ureter. Upon the subject of the sensibility of the kidney, however, we must be aware that disease, inflammation, suppuration, nay even total wasting of the kidney may take place without any indication from pain. The excretory duct of the kidney is called ureter : it leads from the kidney to the urinary bladder. When we trace it into the kidney it is found to enter the navel-like sulcus of its concave side ; here it is enlarged into a considerable sac which is called the pelvis of the kidney. This is a kind of reservoir which, lying in the embrace of the solid and glandu- lar part of the kidney, sends up several elongations almost like the finger of a glove, which receive into them the papillae, the concentrated uriniferous tubes. These processes of the pelvis are called the colices or infundibuli. It may be observed, however, that the term pelvis is taken from the greater dilatation of the ureter within the gland, which is seen in brutes ; and that in man it is not so remarka- ble, the ureter branching with only a lesser degree of the sac- culated form into three or four divisions, and these into the lesser infundibuli. The coats of the ureter are three in number ; a dense outer coat; a middle coat, apparently consisting of circular muscu- 86 8F THE KIDNEY. lar fibres, though this has been denied ; and a smooth inner coat, (very improperly called villous,) which secretes a mucus to defend it from the acrimony of the urine. The ureters do not run in a direct course to the bladder of urine ; they take a curving direction ; are in some places irregularly dilated, as when they pass over the psoas muscle,* dropping deep into the pelvis, and getting betwixt the rectum and bladder they open obliquely into the latter. MINUTE STRUCTURE OF THE KIDNEY. The ancients, says Malpighi, contented themselves with the idea of a sieve, as conveying a knowledge of the manner in which the urine was drawn off by the kidney ; that the fibres of its parenchematous matter attracted the serum ofthe blood ; that the fibrous matter was perforated with innumerable fora- mina ; or that the whole was a congeries of canals through which the urine was strained and drawn off. Malpighi set himself to refute these vague opinions by the minute examina- tion of the structure of the kidney; and he seems to have known almost all that we now know. Though we do not ac- quiesce in his opinions regarding the final and minute struc- ture, he describes accurately every part of the gland. Capsula Renalis. 'The Lobulated Kidnies of the Fetus. • When the bladder is contracted in confequence of a ftone, or when it is dilated by obftruction, the ureters are dilated alfo ; particularly in the firft cafe. Whilft they are dilated, their coats become thickened, and their courfe is tortuous. OF THE KIDNEY. 87 In the first place, when we examine the outward appearance •f the kidney ofthe foetus, as in this annexed plate, we observe that it is not, like that of the adult, smooth and uniform ; but that it is tuberculated or lobulated ; that it consists of distinct parts, or glands united together. Again, when we examine the kidnies of other animals, we find in several instances that the full-grown animal retains this lobulated form. In short, it im- mediately strikes us that the kidney is not a uniform mass of glandular matter, but that it must resemble those glands which they call conglobate, and which consist of several compartments or distinct glands united together. Accordingly a section of a kidney shows us that this is the fact. Example of the Lobulated Kidney. The * section of the kidney shows us these parts. First, we see towards the surface that which is called the cortical or • Explanation of the annexed plate. A B C D. The feveral divifions of the kidney which give it the lobulated figure. £ E. The cortical part of the kidney, being the outer, and it is fuppofed, the fecreting part. F F. The tubular part ofthe kidney. G. The papilla, or that part which projects into the calyx or divifion of the pelvis. H. The perceptible ducts in the point or apex of the papilla. III. The other papillae. L. The point of one of the papilla which we fee projecting into the pelvis. M. The pelvis of the kidney. N. B. This reprefents only one half of the kidney. 88 OF THE KIDNEY. glandular part E. Secondly, striae, converging towards the centre of the kidney, being what is called the tubular part of the kidney.* These tubuli are divided into fasciculi, taking a conical shape ; and these converging unite at the apex ; two or three of them united form the papilla. The papillae are generally ten or twelve in number, or even more in each kid- ney ; their points are received into the extremity of the infun- dibula ; they pour the urine into these tubes, and it is collected in the pelvis. Now when we examine one of these papillae in a lobulated kidney, we find that it is the centre ot one of these subdivisions. Thus, A A. Cortical Huofauce. B. Tubular pari. C. Papilla. D. Duils. The papilla C is merely the continuation of the tubuli B i but it is that part which projects from the body of the kidney into the calyx ; and although these divisions of the substance ofthe kidney are enumerated as three distinct parts, the corti- cal, tubular, and papillar parts, they are properly only two, the cortical and tubular parts. Some however have made a new distinction, by asserting that a vascular part is to be observed betwixt the cortical and tubular or striated parts, as at ;* but it is not the case ; for al- though when we make a regular section of the whole gland, the mouths of some larger vessels will be observed betwixt the fasciculi of the urinary tubes, yet they are irregular ramifica- tions tending to the outer cortical part, and not such as separate the tubular and cortical part, nor so regular as to be considered as one of the subdivisions of the kidney. • Improperly medullary,fometimes striata sulcata. F F. OF THE KIDNEY. Id OF THE CORTICAL PART. The external and cortical part of the kidney is by all allow- ed to be the secreting, or, as they rather term it, the secerning part of the organ. It was this part which the older writers considered as in a more particular manner to consist of a peculiar fleshy substance of parenchymatous matter. It is in this cortical matter that the glandular bodies described by Malpighi are supposed to be seated. The appearances which he describes are to be very distinctly seen in many animals ; for example, in the horse's and cow's kidney ; and are to be seen represented in these plates. But he asserted these bodies to be also observable in the human kidney ; to demonstrate which he ejected a black liquid mixed with spirit of wine, by which the kidney becoming universally tinged, you may then see, he said, when you have torn off the coats of the kidney, small glands partaking of the colour of the arteries. These are the glands of the cortical part of the kidney, which Mal- pighi described as hanging upon the branches of the arteries like fruit upon the pendant branches, and round which the arteries and veins ramified and convoluted, like delicate tendrils, so as to give them the dark colour which they have. Into these bodies he supposed the urine to be secreted, and from these bodies it was conveyed into the uriniferous ducts or tubular part ofthe kidney ; but he acknowledges that the com- munication betwixt the ducts and glands is very obscure. Ruysch and Vieussens held a very opposite opinion regard- ing the structure of the kidney.* Ruysch, by throwing his injections into the renal arteries, found that he filled the urinary tubes, the ducts of Bellini, and the pelvis itself. Hence he conjectured that the tubuli uriniferi or excretory ducts of the kidney were the continued branches of the renal artery, with- out the intervention of any glandular apparatus^ * Ruyfch and Vieuflens long contended for the claim of the difcovery of the continuation of the arteries of the kidney into the urinary ducts. Ruyfch at firft acquiefced in the opinion of Malpighi, as we have faid. t Thes. Anat. ii. p. 31. Vor. IV. M 90 OF THE KIDNEY. Example of Ruysch's doctrine. Ruyscb's Plate. Ruysch did not neglect the examination of the little bodies which are to be seen in the cortical substance. He did not howevei . How they were glands, but confidently asserted that they wfie merely the convoluted arteries which were formed into these contorted bundles before finally stretching out, and terminating in the straight urinary tubes, j " Exhibet renis humani dimidiam partem ita diffectam, ut reptatus vaforum, prefertim fanguineorum, luculentus quam in precedenti Thefauro, tab. iv. fig. iii. videre poflit ; ubi magis inherebam, ut conjuniftiones arteriolarum cum ducti- bus Bellini exhiberem, in hac autem figura diftinctiffime vaforum fanguineorum curftfti vermicularem per interiorem renis partem exprimere volui. A. Facies renis exterior per quam vafa fanguinea reptatum obfervant vermi- cularem. B. Facies renis interior ubi vafa fanguinea non minus curfum vermicularem obfervant quam in facie exteriore. C. Papillae renales. D. Pelvis renis. E. Cavitas pelvis in quam papilla urinam ftillando cxprimunt_____Sec The- faur. Anat VV. p. 27. f In hoc Thefauro X. quoque inveniuntur objecta renalia ex homine defumpta, in quibus non folum luculenter apparct quid judicandum fit de prtetenfis glandulis renalibus, verum etiam quid inveftigatoribus renum impofuerit, fe in renibus in- dagandis faspiflime occurrunt corpofcula rotunda glandulas mentientia qux revera nil funt nifi arteriolarum ultima extremitates contortas ; cum autem exactiflime repleantur arteria renaks difiblventur vel expanduntur, quemadmodum fili glo- OF THE KIDNEY. -91 When arter minute injection of the kidney we make a section of its whole substance, we see vessels emerging from the more confused intricate vascularity ofthe cortical part, and running inward in striae towards the papillae; what we see there, are in my conception, chiefly veins. And this I conclude, both from the result of injections, and from knowing that the veins are in general numerous surrounding the excretory ducts; besides they retain the blood in them like the veins. These vessels running in straight lines and converging towards the papillae are not the tubuli uriniferi, but the blood vessels accom- panying them, the tubes themselves being transparent. Yet I imagine it was by these vessels that Ruysch was de- ceived ; for tracing them from the extreme arteries, and seeing them suddenly altered in their form and direction, and run- ning towards the Papillae, he imagined them to be the excre- tory ducts continued from the extreme branches ofthe arteries. Winslow supposes the corpuscules, which are seen in the cortical part of the kidney, to be the extremities of the cut tubuli, filled either with blood or with a coloured injection. But this they evidently are not; for bv making the substance around them transparent, they are seea within the surface, and they are little grains not the extremity of tubes, nor extended in lines. . . D , Boerhaave, although he saw in the preparations ot Kuyscti the injection passed into the uriniferous tubes, yet m the mam favoured the opinions of Malpighi ; and having sometimes observed these tubes filled with injections, while at intervals they were transparent or pale, and contained only a watery fluid he ventured to conclude that there was a double opera- tion going forward in the kidney ; that the pale watery urine was quickly drawn off bv the continuous tubes; but that the urine of the other quality and higher colour was separated by a more perfect and slower secretion through the glandular In the history of opinions, to Boerhaave succeeds Benin, who writes a long and laboured paper in the Memoirs of the Academy of Sciences for 1744; upon the whole, he may be considered as endeavouring to prove by dissection what was rather an hypothesis with Boerhaave. Berlin describes glands mer ita ut nil minus fint, ficuti dixi. quam partes per fe fubfiftentcs & peculiar! membranulaobduot^ fine quo immerito dicuntur glanduhe. Interimconfideran- dum ejufmodi contorfiones1 vaforum fang, nufquam ,n cxtens v.fcenbus> rrpenru nThApift. to Boerhaave, p. 77, we find Ruyfch fpcaking much ™re modeft y . iln rene humano rotunda corpufcula effe, tateor, fed lane tam «>»! Bt "J£ poflim definite de illis. Adeoque non licet magis dicere quod fint glanduhe, quam iliud quid." 92 OF THE KIDNEY. in the substance of the kidney ; but these he is careful to dis- tinguish from the corpuscules of Malpighi, which he also con- ceives to be the extremities of vessels merelv. M. Berlins Plate. From this plate we shall easily understand Benin's descrip- tion. He observes, in the first place, that there are to be seen serpentine vessels, such as Ruysch described : for example, at A A A,* which arising at the circumference of .the cortical substance, are reflected inward in a tortuous form, and which, at last, approaching the tubular part, terminate in straight tubes, or are continued into the tubuli uriniferi (for example at BB.) But betwixt the mesches of vessels which are described, and which are seen here to terminate in the tubuli, there are beds of glands C C C, which acervulae of small glandular bodies are as it were laid in the tract from the circumference towards the centre, and appear to terminate, or to be connected with the tubuli uriniferi as the arteries are. ±1. Ferrein has opposed all these opinions in a paper of the Academy of Sciences for 1749. He asserts that the body of the kidney is neither composed of glands nor a congeries of blood vessels ; that it is a peculiar substance, which when ex- amined is found to consist of transparent vessels. These, he says, are wonderfully convoluted in the cortical part of the • Mefches de M. Winflow on veffcaux fpongicux de Vieuffens ou tuyaux fer- pentans de Ruyfch, OF THE KIDNEY. 93 kidney, so as to resemble glands, and stretch in parallel lines towards the papillae, where they form what is called the tubuli uriniferi. Amongst these transparent tubes, the blood vessels ramify to great minuteness, and accompany them where they are reflected directly inward to form the tubuli. Much ridi- cule, he observes, has been thrown upon the term parenchyma ofthe ancients ; but notwithstanding he affirms that there is in all glands a substance dissimilar from the blood vessels, a gelatinous-like matter, which consists of or contains these pellucid tubuli. Tubular Part__The term here used is universally re- ceived ; and all seem agreed that the striae converging to the centre ofthe kidney, and taking a pyramidal shape are the ex- cretory ducts. We have seen that they were supposed by some anatomists to be formed by the continuation ofthe ex- treme branches of the arteries ; but this opinion we shall ven- ture to sav arose from the appearance of the blood vessels in- jected, which lie parallel and close to them. They are evi- dently transparent tubes, and probably the fibrous appearance of the whole pyramidal bodv formed by them is owing to the accompanying blood vessels.' These lesser ducts, as they ap- proach the papillae, terminate in larger ducts, which finally open into the ducts of Bellini at the point of the papillae. Th* papillae we have seen to be that part of the pyramidal body which projects into the calyx or infundibulum, and from their point little drops may be perceived to run (from the ducts of Bellini) when they are compressed. I have detailed the several opinions regarding the structure of the kidney ; and neither do I wish here to vamp up an opinion from the aggregate of these contradictory reoorts,nor have I been able to draw a decided conclusion trom my own experience. In truth, the observation from one dissection I have hitherto found so completely contradicted by other ex- periments, that I must conclude there yet remains much to be done in investigating the minute structure of the glandular viscera. OF THE CAPSULE RENALES.* The renal capsules are glandular-like bodies one attached to each kidney. The capsule is seated like a cap on the upper end of the kidney. It is of a form like an irregular crescent, and suited to the shape of that part of the kidney to which it is attached ; at the same time that it has three acute edges, or * GlanduU atrabilariee renes futcenturiate. Glandula renales, 94 OF THE KIDNEY. takes a triangular form—(See the drawing of the kidnies of the fcetus.)—The upper edge has been called crista, while the lower edges have the name of lobes. It is in the fcetus that the renal capsule is large and perfect ; in the adult it has shrunk, and no longer bears the same relative size to the kidney. In the fcetus the renal capsule is as large as the kidney, and the capsules of each side are continued into each other, being stretched across the aorta and vena cava. The vessels sent to this body are somewhat irregular ; they come from the renal or emulgent arteries and veins, from the caeliac artery or phrenic, or from the trunk of the aorta, and even from the lumbar arteries. By separating the lobes of this body we find something like a cavity, which has been roundly asserted by some to be a re- gular ventricle; by others altogether denied. Finding a cavity, they supposed they must discover the excretory duct. Some conceived that it must be connected with the pelvis of the kidney ; some with the thoracic duct ; some with the testicle ; but every thing relating to the use of this body has hitherto eluded research, and all is doubt and uncertain speculation. For my own part I rather conceive that this body is useful in the foetus, by deriving the blood from the kidney, that gland not having its proper office, of secreting the urine, to perform in the foetus. PART THE SECOND. OF THE MALE PARTS OF GENERATION. x\S there is no very accurate division betwixt the viscera of the abdomen and those of the pelvis ; as the viscera of the pelvis, when distended, rise into the belly, and are in every re- spect like the abdominal viscera, many have objected to a divi- sion of the viscera of the abdomen and pelvis : nevertheless, there appears to be good reason for this division of the subject. The function ofthe parts is different; the manner of their con- nection is different; their diseases have widely different effects. We have seen that the pelvis consists ofthe sacrum and ossa innominata, and that anatomists have distinguished the true and the false pelvis. The false pelvis is formed ofthe extend- ed wings of the ossa ilii, and supports the viscera of the abdo- men. The true pelvis, marked by the cavity sinking beneath the promontory of the sacrum and the linea innominata, con- tains the rectum ; the urinary bladder ; the prostate gland ; the vesiculae seminales ; and part of the urethra. The manner in which these parts are connected, and the ana- tomy ofthe urinary bladder, prostate gland, and urethra, will form the subject ofthe first section ; while the anatomy ofthe parts connected with those of the pelvis in function, but seated without, will form the subject ofthe second. ( 96 ) CHAP. I. OF THE PARTS WITHIN THE PELVIS. VV E have seen that the abdominal viscera are involved in a common membrane ; that this membrane is uniformly smooth ; and that it has a secretion on its surface which bedews the whole, and allows the parts an easy shifting motion on each other. The parts in the pelvis must also have motion, but they are at the same time more strictly connected ; a loose cellular membrane is the medium of adhesion here : the parts are im- bedded in cellular membrane, which is interwoven with mus- cular fibres towards the lower opening of the pelvis, and fur- ther braced by the levator ani muscle. This gives to the whole due support; enabling them to resist the compression and action ofthe abdominal muscles, which they must receive in common with the higher viscera ofthe belly. By turning to the first plan in this volume we find, that the division of the parts in the pelvis and abdomen is not well de- fined ; but we see that the peritoneum is reflected from the pu- bes over the urinary bladder, and mounts again upon the rec- tum. The line of division, therefore, is the peritoneum ; while we understand how the bladder which belongs to the pelvis, being distended, carries the peritoneum before it, and rises into the abdomen. SECTION I. OF THE BLADDER OF URINE. As the general nature ofthe urinary bladder is so well known, nothing is more superfluous than a general definition or description. It is attached behind the os pubis ; is nearly of a regular oval, when moderately distended, with the ends ob- tuse ; but from its connections, and the pressure of the sur- rounding parts, this regular extension is not allowed in the living body ; it stretches more laterally ; its fore part is attach- ed broad to the back part of the os pubis ; and, behind, it is opposed by the rectum. What the name would imply to be the lower part, is above ; for the fundus of the bladder is that part which, when distended, rises into the belly : the neck is where it terminates in the urethra behind the arch of the os OF THE BLADDER OF URINE. 9f pubis. When the bladder is empty, or contains only a mode- rate quantity of urine, it takes a triangular figure, the base of which rests on the rectum, and the apex is attached to the back of the os pubis ; and when in dissection you look down into the pelvis, you find the back part of the bladder flat, and as it Were stretched obliquely up upon the os pubis.* Structure of the bladdlr —Like the other hollow vis- cera, the bladder consists of several coats. The pkritoneal coat of the bladder does not surround the bladder, but only covers the fundus and back part. It is like in every respect to the peritoneal coat of the abdominal viscera ; smooth without; and adhering to the inner coat by cellular membrane ; which cellular membrane is, however, of a looser texture, and in greater quantity than in the abdominal viscera. This peritoneal coat is no doubt of much service as a division in obstructing the course of inflammation arising from the diseases in the lower part of the pelvis, or from operations performed on the bladder, rectum, or perinaeum : were it not for Ji'„' loose peritoneum spreading over the cellular texture of the pelvis, we could neither be so bold or so successful in our operations here. That portion of the peritoneum which co- vers the back part of the bladder, forms a particular transverse fold when the bladder is contracted. This fold surrounds the posterior half of the bladder, and its two extremities are stretched towards the side ofthe pelvis, so as to form a kind of lateral ligament. Though in the contracted or moderately distended state of the bladder, the peritoneum stretches from the back of the os pubis to the bladder, the distention ofthe bladder, in an immo- derate degree, raises the peritoneum off from the pubes, so that the bladder can be struck with a trochar, or lithotomy per- formed above the pubes, by an incision directly into the blad- der, without piercing the outer or peritoneal coat. Towards the lower part, the bladder, as we have seen, is in- vested only by cellular membrane, which takes the place ofthe peritoneal coat of the fundus. While we are aware of the ef- fect of the peritoneum, stretched over the parts in the pelvis^ in obstructing the progress of inflammation from the bottom of the pelvis towards the abdominal viscera, we must recollect that there exists such a sympathy betwixt the bladder, and the stomach and bowels, that both after operation, and in conse- quence of obstruction of urine, the patient will sink, in conse- * This flatnefs of the bladder, and the nearnefs of the back part of it to the os pubis, the furgeon would do well to remember, before he thiufts the gorget or ftilet with fuch relentlefs impctuofity as I have feen done. Vol. IV. N 98 OF THE BLADDER OF URINE, quence of abdominal inflammation, without the direct spread ing of the inflammatory action. Muscular coat__The muscular coat of the bladder is very strong. Three strata of fibres are described by authors. They are so strong as to have been classed with the distinct muscles, and the whole coat has been called detrusor urin^e. Towards the lower part of the bladder the fibres are particu- larly strong, and formed into fasciculi, and are like a net of muscles inclosing the bladder. Towards the neck of the bladder the circular fibres are strengthened ; and embrace the beginning ofthe urethra ; and form a sphincter, which, no doubt, is assisted in its operation by the levator ani muscle, throwing its strong fibres around the neck of the bladder. The muscular coat of the bladder becomes greatly stronger, where difficulties oppose its dis- charge ; and when there is a source of irritation, within the bladder, acting for any time, the whole coats become thicken- ed, sometimes to the depth of half an inch or more ; in which case, as we have observed, to take place in the stomach, it is capable but of a very inconsiderable change, either by deten- tion or contraction ; consequently the urine runs frequently by painful discharges. The lithotomist would do well to distin- guish when this symptom is merely the consequence of a stone in the bladder, and when it is owing to an increase in thick- ness, and a rigidity of the coats of the bladder ; for, in the latter case, the operation of the gorget is attended with very serious evils. We have an idea of the wonderful degree of contraction in the bladder, and indeed the extent of motion in the muscular fibre in general, when we consider that the bladder extends so. as to contain two pounds of urine, and contracts so as to force out the last drop from its cavity. When, however, the fibres are stretched too far, they lose the power of contraction, and often the young surgeon is deceived by what he conceives to be- an incontinence of urine while it is really an obstruction. VASCULAR COAT, OR CELLULAR COAT. When I call this third coat of the bladder the vascular coat, it is merely from its analogy to that coat ofthe intestines which I have distinguished by the name of vascular. Anatomists have called it the nervous and cellular coat; the first of which is quite improper and the last apt to be confounded with the surrounding cellular outer coat. This coat (if coat it may be called) consists of very extensile white lamellae of cellular OF THE BLADDER OF URINE. 99 membrane. It gives distribution to a few vessels, and connects the muscular fibres and inner coat. The internal coat of the bladder is very smooth on its general surface, and is bedewed with a sheathing mucus. When the bladder is distended, no inequalities are to be ob- served ; but when contracted it falls into folds and rugae. From an acrid state of the urine ; from strangury, from cal- culus, the mucous discharge is increased, even so as to form a great proportion of the fluid evacuated from the bladder. No visible source of this mucus is to be observed on the inner sur- face of this membrane ;* so that probably it is a general dis- charge from the surface. Indeed, it appears, that no follicules or criptse, discharging at particular points of the surface, could have the effect of bedewing and defending the whole surface from the acrimony of the urine. The great sources of the mucus discharged with the urine are, the neck of the bladder, the prostate gland, and the urethra.f The Ureters, which convey the urine from the kidnies to the bladder of urine, open very obliquely into the bladder, to- wards the back and lowest part of it. The consequence of their oblique perforation of the coats is, that, the greater the tendency of the urine to pass retrograde into them from the bladder, (there being a proportioned distention of the coats of the bladder,) the more their mouths are compressed. Thus, in the dead body, there is no degree of distention which causes the water to pass by the ureters. The contraction, or rather the resistance to distention, of the ureters and pelvis of the kidnies seems much greater than the powers of the bladder are able to oppose ; for in obstructions of urine in the urethra, there is still an incessant accumulation in the bladder, even when the bladder has increased to such a size as to be com- pressed by the action of the abdominal muscles. The cause of this yielding of the bladder to the secretion of the kidney is, that it has little permanent contraction, though occasionally its action is very great. The urachus does not belong to the human bladder. It is a tube which, in the fcetus of quadrupeds, communicates be- twixt the bladder of urine, and the membrane called alantoes. But in the human foetus there is no such communication ; both in the fcetus, and somewhat less distinctly in the adult, there is a ligament like the remains ofthe duct which runs up between » Winflow, however, defcribes the glands, and Heifter and Haller defcribe fol- licules, near the neck of the bladder, and round the infertion of the uret.rs. f When the mucous fecretion is diminifhed by a difeafe of the furface, it leans r-uch more readily to allow the calculous concretion to form upon it. loo of the prostate glanb. the peritoneum and linea alba of the abdomen towards the umbilicus.* SECTION II. OF THE PROSTATE GLANB. On the neck of the bladder, and surrounding about half au inch of the beginning of the urethra, there is a gland nearlv of the size and figure of a chesnut. This body is called the prostate gland. In ail the extent of anatomv, there is not a more important subject for the attention of the surgeon than this of the size, relation and connection, and diseases (with their effects) of the prostate gland : but to enter upon these is not now our object. The shape of this body is round, but at the same time somewhat pyramidal, for it is broad towards the bladder, and points forward. It has also a division, forming it into two lobes ; and the older anatomists speak of it as double. The urethra passes through it; not in the middle, but towards its upper surface ; so that the gland is felt more prominent down- ward, and is distinctly felt by the point of the finger in ano. This gland indeed rests, as it were, on the rectum. By the annexed drawing,! it is meant only to give an accurate com ception of these parts, and not to represent them as they are felt in the living body. For this reason the drawing is made from a preparation, and not from the recent dissection. When the catheter is introduced, and the surgeon examines the state of parts by the rectum, he will first distinguish the curve of the staff, covered with the bulb ofthe urethra : behind this the catheter will feel more bare of parts, but still covered with a greater thickness of parts than one should expect from the description of the membraneous part of the urethra. And behind this, again, he will feel the prominence of the prostate gland, not round, distinct and accurately defined, but gradu- ally lost in both before and behind, among the surrounding cellular membrane and muscular fibres which involve it. The texture of the gland is a compact spongy substance, and when cut has considerable resemblance to a schirrous * .It has occurred, that the urine has been in part difcharged by the umbilicus 7 his, no doubt, is owing to the ligament remaining permanently as a duct. + Plates III. and IV. STRUCTURE OF THE PENIS. 101 gland. From each lobe there are small follicules opening into the urethra, and from these the ducts may be injected. It has been said, that there is really no division of this gland into lobes: but perhaps the best authority on this question is disease. Now it happens sometimes that only one side of the gland is enlarged, which is a proof that there is some division betwixt the lobes. This unequal swelling of the gland distorts the urethra, and gives it a direction very difficult to be followed by the catheter. In general, when equally swelled, the greater part of the gland, being beneath the urethra, raises it up so that the point of the catheter must be raised over the enlarged gland before we can pass it into the bladder. This body is little liable to inflammation, and occa- sional tumefaction, so as to obstruct the urine ; its enlargement is a chronic state, and peculiar to advanced age. CHAP. II. OF THE PARTS CONNECTED WITH THE VIS, CERA OF THE PELVIS, BUT SEATED WITH- OUT IT__OF THE PENIS AND URETHRA__ OF THE TESTES. SECTION I. OF THE PENIS AND URETHRA. STRUCTURE OP THE PENIS. A HE penis consists of three spongy bodies ; which, being constituted to receive the influx of blood, admit of distention, and consequent erection. Two of these bodies are called the corpora cavernosa penis, and form the body ofthe penis ; the other is the corpus spongiosum urethra, a vesicular and spongy substance, which surrounds the whole length ofthe 102 structure of the penis. urethra, and expands into the bulb of the urethra in the peri- neum, and into the glands on the point of the penis. Corpora cavernosa. The body of the penis consists of two tubes formed of a very strong sheath. This sheath has a great degree of elasticity, but at its utmost extension power- fully resists the farther distention with blood. These tubes are 'united in the greater part of the length ofthe penis, or they are parted by an imperfect partition. The root of these bodies, or crura penis, as they are called, separate in the perineum, so as so take hold on the ramus of the os pubis. Foreward, these bodies or tubes terminate in rounded points under the glans penis. These tubes are of a ligamentary nature, bating that they have a certain degree of elasticity. They inclose and support the cavernous structure of the penis. This substance consists of cells connected with each other and having a free commu- nication through the whole extent of the penis. These cells are interposed betwixt the extremities of the arteries and veins, or probably while the arteries have communication, and open into the extremities ofthe veins, in the common wav, they have such connections with the cellular structure, that in the accelerated action they pour their blood into the tells ; yet the blood circulates in the penis during erection a<: at other times. Section ofthe Penis as inflated. Section of 1 jj the Pen A, Corpus Cavernosum Penis. B, Septum. C, Urethra, D, Corpus Spong. Minus, or spongiosum Urethrae. structure of the penis. 1#* Corpus spongiosum urethra. Surrounding the urethra there is a spongy body similar to that which forms the body of the penis. Where this spongy sheath of the urethra lies in the perineum, betwixt the crura of the penis, it is enlarged with a round head, which is called the bulbous part ;—it is upon this, and on about an inch and an half of the lower part ofthe spongy body, that the ejaculator seminis, or accelerator urinae acts ; and, as within this enlarge- ment of the spongy body which surrounds the urethra there is also a dilatation of the tube ofthe urethra itself, the use of the muscle is evident. It contracts upon this sinus of the urethra when distended with the discharge from the vesiculae, the prostate glands, and testicle. As an accelerator urinae, it can- not act, but it expels the last drop of urine, as a consequence ®f their detention in this more dilatable part of the urethra. The spongy sheath of the urethra, as we have hinted, is enlarged into the glans, so that the action ofthe accelerator muscle affects the whole length of the spongy body of the urethra and the glans by the compression of the blood in the bulb. There is a connection betwixt the glans, spongy tube of the urethra, and accelerator muscle. The excitement ofthe glans gives the action to the accelerator or ejaculator muscle ; the action of this muscle compresses the bulb, and in consequence the whole spongy body to the extremity of the glans is made tense, elongates, and contracts the diameter of the urethra, adapting it to the emission of semen. Mr. Home, I observe, supposes " that an action takes place in the membrane of the urethra during copulation, to reduce the size of the canal, and fit it for throwing out the semen with the necessarv velocity:" but for this, there seems no ground nor proof; and I imagine, the action of the accelerator, and the state of distention ofthe spongy body, will be a good substitute to his conjecture. The obtuse point ofthe glans is spread upon the extremities ofthe cavernous bodies of the penis, which yet have no com- munication with the glans. We observe a circular margin, the corona glandis, and behind this the cervix. About the corona and cervix there are many little glandular follicules,* which are no doubt for preserving the mobility ofthe preputium. The preputium is a loose prolongation of the integuments ef the penis, which hangs over and defends the delicate and sensible surface of the glans. Its inner surface is of course * Glandul. odorif. of Tyfon. See Morgagni. 104 , structure of the penis. the continued surface of the common integuments, while it again is reflected over the glans. Upon the lower side the preputium is tied in a particular manner to the surface ofthe glans behind the orifice of the urethra. This connection li- mits the motion of the preputium, and is called frenum preputii. The whole integuments of the penis are of the same cellular structure with those ofthe rest ofthe body, and may be with equal facility inflated : they are particularly loose and distensi- ble, and unincumbered with fat. A third common integument 6f the penis is distinguished, and is called the tunica nervosa. It is of a more firm elastic ligamentary substance. A ligament, however, is not elastic, and the firmness here is merely that of a greater degree of condensation in the common membrane. It is this membrane, which being attached to the os pubis, and supporting the penis, forms the ligamentum elasticum suspensorium. A Glans. B B Corona Glandis. C Cervix. D Corpus Caverno- fum Penis. E E Corpus Spongi- ofum Urethrae. F Crura ofthe Penis, by which it is attached to the Ramus of the Pubes. H Vena ipfius Penis. E STRUCTURE OF THE PENIS. 105 OF THE URETHRA. The urethra is all that length of the canal from the neck of the bladder to the extremity of the penis. It is formed ofthe continuation ofthe inner and third coat ofthe bladder, which last forms a reticular membrane, uniting the inner membrane to the spongy body. It is, however, supported through all its length, near the bladder, by passing through the prostate gland and sphincter fibres ; further forward than this, where it passes from the prostate to the beginning of the spongy body of the urethra, it is invested and supported by firm cellular and liga- mentous membranes ; and in the length of the penis it is in- cluded in the spongy body, which extends from the bulb to the glans. It cannot be described as a cylindrical canal, for it ad- mits of very unequal distention. It begins large at the neck of the bladder, where, immersed in the prostate gland, it forms a little sinus ; it is contracted again in a remarkable degree behind the bulb; it dilates into the sinus of the urethra within the bulbous enlargement of the spongy body ; it is gradually diminished forward ; and it may be considered as cylindrical forward to the point of the glans, where it is much contracted,* and where we often find calculi detained, which have passed the whole length of the canal. The canal of the urethra is bedewed with mucus. The sources of this mucus are here particularly apparent; for, besides the general surface, there are large lacunae seen ; into which the mucus is secreted, and from which, as from recep- tacles, it is pressed as the urine flows. The inner membrane ofthe urethra is very delicate, and, when torn by the catheter, or by violent chordee, or opened by the caustic, bleeds pro- fusely. The internal membranes of the bladder and urethra are particularly sensible ; drawing after them, when excited, not only the action of all the muscles in the lower part of the pelvis, but having sympathies in a particular manner with the testicle, stomach, and bowels, and with the whole system. The more curious and important effect ofthe injury ofthe urethra is the paroxysm of fever which it induces. Observing the regular occurrence of an intermitting fever in cases of fistula in the perineum, we should imagine it to be the effect of the extra- vasation of the urine in the cellular membrane, and the effect of general irritation ; until it is observed that the simple * Haller Com. lib. xxvii, fecf. i. § xxx. Mr. Home's Strictures. Vol. IV. O 106 STRUCTURE OF THE PENIS. stricture produces that effect, and that a touch of the caustic" brings on a violent paroxysm. When the reticular membrane is inflamed, of course it: losey its elasticity, and gives pain in erection. Sometimes the in- flammation, being continued to the spongy body surrounding the urethra, makes it unequal in its capacity of distention to the cavernous bodies ofthe penis, and sometimes their cells are united by adhesion in the worst cases of chordee. I cannot imagine with some, that the urethra is muscular ; first, because I see no end it could serve in the ceconomy ; secondly, because there is no proof in support of the opinion ; thirdly, because it is surrounded with strong fibres and a spongy body, which conjointly seem calculated for every pur- pose of the oeconomy, and likely to account for every symptom which might be mistaken for spasmodic action in the canal it- self. The idea of muscularity is derived from the symptoms of stricture and irritability of the canal. I shall therefore, in the first place, shew how I conceive stricture is produced. The urethra is very elastic ; not only allowing a very large bougie to be passed, and closing upon a thread, but it still more remarkably admits of elongation than of distention in the width of the canal. It is surrounded, as we have seen, with a spongy body and the cellular coat which is betwixt the deli- cate lining membrane of the urethra, and tlie spongy body partakes of the structure of both, and is very elastic. But when an inflammation attacks the canal, this cellular mem- brane is its principal seat. The point affected loses its elasticity ; no longer stretches with the penis and urethra, but consolidates, and throws the inner membrane into a fold in a direction across the canal. Thus the mem- brane at A has contracted and con- a densed in consequence of inflamma- tion, or rather, when contracted by B the shrinking of the urethra in length and its spongy body has formed an adhesion, and, in consequence of in- flammation, has lost its elasticity and no longer dilates in the proportion of the rest of the canal. The conse- quence of this, is, that the point ofthe inner membrane B makes a projecting ring round the urethra- To suppose this stricture to have been formed by the muscul-ar STRUCTURE OF THE PENIS. 107 contraction in the diameter of the canal,* would be to allow the partial action of one or two fibres ; (for the stricture is like that which would be produced by the tying of a pack-thread round the canal, being a narrow circular ridge ;) which is very unlikely. Sometimes, however, the stricture is only on one side of the canal, which, allowing it to be formed as I have here supposed, is very likely to happen : but in consequence of the muscular action, cannot easily be supposed to take plac€fc since the drawing of the muscular fibres would equally affect the whole circle. As to the effect of heat and cold on an obstruction, it may be explained simply, without the supposition of muscular con- traction : for as we know that the penis, spongy bodies,, and of course the whole canal, relax and elongate in warmth, as they are shrunk up and contracted in cold, like the skin of the body in general, without implying muscular contraction: so we see how this state would affect a stricture ;—that, when the penis and the urethra was shrunk, the effect of the stricture would be increased, and the patient could pass his urine only when the parts were relaxed, by sitting in a'warm room, or by the use of the bath. But when surgeons speak of spasms of the urethra, they seem to forget the action of the surrounding muscles. Thus acrid and stimulating urine, or an irritable state of the urethra, will be followed by a small stream of urine: or perhaps a temporary obstruction is the consequence: but why should we suppose that the membrane of the urethra, which has no ap- pearance of muscularity, causes this effect, when it is probably produced by the sphincter muscle, the fibres which surround the membraneous part of the urethra, the levator ani, and, above all, by the accelerator urinae, a muscular sheath of fibres surrounding three or four inches of the canal. Round the membraneous part of the urethra, and behind the bulb, there is much interlacing of muscular fibres; and the levator ani, splitting, embraces it. Round the sinus of the urethra and the bulb which covers it, is the accelerator urinae, more properly the ejaculator seminis: and as the ejaculator seminis contracts upon the sinus, it drives onward the semen along the urethra, since the seminal fluids do not pass backward into the bladder, unless when the action ofthe parts is much disordered ; there must be a contraction round the urethra behind the bulb during the action of the ejaculator. The sensibility of the glans * '* A ftricture," fays Mr. Home, " whether in the fpafmodic or permanent ftate, is a contraction of the tranfverfe fibres of the membrane which f»rm* the ranal" 108 OF THE TESTES. holds a controul over the action of these muscles ; and the disease of the bladder and of these parts affects the glans. There is, in short, a complicated apparatus here, and we can- not wonder, that the most frequent seat of disease is just at the beginning of the sinus of the urethra, where the muscular action is stronger, and the canal narrowest. At this place is the stricture of the urethra most common, and here if spasm and muscular action should bring it on, if spasmodic action should prevail during the permanent stricture, or blistering bring on a strangury, (seeing that this point is so surrounded with muscular fibres destined to a particular action,) we must not take these symptoms as indicating a muscularity in the whole tract of the urethra. I believe it is found, that stricture is most frequent just behind the bulb of the urethra ; where I have alleged, the muscularity is greatest; and also about the distance from the extremity of the urethra which answers to the termination of the ejaculator muscle. SECTION II. OF THE TESTES. The testicle might be considered as more naturally con- nected with the abdominal viscera, than with those of the pelvis, as its original seat is on the loins amongst'the abdominal viscera, and as it receives its coats from the peritoneum, and its vessels from the abdominal vessels. The testes are two glandular bodies which secrete the se- men : they receive their vessels from the aorta and cava, or the emulgent vessels ; their excretory duct runs up into the belly, and it terminates in the urethra near the neck of the bladder. The scrotum, in which the testicles are lodged, is a con- tinuation of the common integuments ; its cellular membrane is particularly lax and free from fat, and anasarca extremely apt to fall down into it, so as sometimes to distend the scrotum to a transparent bag of enormous size ; and not unfrequently it has been blown up to counterfeit rupture and other diseases. The cellular substance of the scrotum is peculiar in its ap- pearance, being red and fibrous. It has been considered as a muscle, and called dartos : although this is denied by many. Its action is to support and brace the scrotum ; and in bad health,* and in old age, it is so much relaxed as to allow thr * Nurfes particularly attend to the ftate of the fcrotum in children. OF THE TESTES. 109 testicles to hang upon the chords. But besides the simple cor- rugation and relaxation, the scrotum has a motion like the vermicular motion of the intestines, from side to side, and alternately. Its contraction has a relation to the healthy secre- tion of the gland within. Upon the surface of the scrotum, directly in the middle, there is a line passing from the lower part of the penis to the anus ; the rapha. This line marks a division in the scrotum, not superficial merely ; but a partition, or septum, is formed, dividing the scrotum into two distinct cellular beds for the testicles. Coats of the testicle. Besides the involving scrotum, each testicle has two distinct coats, the tunica vaginalis and tunica albuginea. The tunica vaginalis covers the testicle loosely ; that is, without adhering to its general surface ; but the albuginea is in close union with it, and is the immediate coat of the testicle. The inner surface of the vaginal coat is perfectly smooth, and an exudation is poured out from it, as from the peritoneum within the belly, the outer surface of the tunica albuginea is also smooth and firm, and white, whence its name. But on its inner surface, like the peritoneum, which covers the intestine, and adheres to the muscular coat, it adheres to the tubes of the testicle itself. These investing coats are in some respects dissimilar, yet in general much alike, being continuations of the same membrane, and both prolongations of the peritoneum. The outer membrane, the tunica vaginalis, is a protection to the testicle, gliding easily on the inner coat, and with the mobility of the cellular mem- brane of the dartos it preserves the testicles from bruises and strokes to which it would be exposed if it were more firmly attached. The inner tunic, or albuginea, gives strength and firmness to the substance of the testicle. Betwixt these coats is the fluid collected, which forms the hydrocele. They also contain the congenital hernia ; but the common hernia is with- out both coats of the testicle. To understand the principles of anatomy of this part, we must attend to the descent of the testicle, and to the manner in which these coats are formed. OF THE DESCENT OF THE TESTICLE. In the foetus, some months before birth, the testicles arc lodged in the belly, and are in every respect like the abdominal viscera. They are sealed on the fore part of the psoae muscles, by the side of the rectum. They are of course covered and invested by the peritoneum ; for, as we have explained how the solid viscera and the intestines are behind the peritoneum, 110 OF THE TESTES. so it will be understood how the testicles lying on the loins are behind the peritoneum : that is to say, the glandular substance of the testicle is invested by a single coat, and that coat is the peritoneum, which, after covering the body of the testicle, is reflected upon the loins ; as the coats of the liver, for example, are to be traced from its surface to the diaphragm : no words, however, can well explain this subject, and it will be better understood by sections and plans. First Plan of the Testicle. xst Plan of the Tefticle. We see that the body of the testicle A is seated on the loins, that it is attached by vessels, and invested by the peritoneum. This surrounding of the body of the testicle by the peritoneum forms that coat which is in union with its substance, and which descends with it into the scrotum, and forms the tunica al- buginea. The figure and presenting surfaces of the testicle, while within the belly, are the same which we find after it has de- scended into the scrotum. It stands edge-ways forward, and the epididimis lies along the outside of the posterior edge of the testes. We see that it is attached, by the peritoneum being reflected off* from its back part, and we can trace the peritoneum upwards over the kidney G, and downward over the rectum F, and bladder of urine E. We may also observe a process ofthe peritoneum which has OF THE TESTES* 111 passed through the abdominal ring, and which in this plan is marked D. Now it may easily be understood that the testicle A, gradually shifting its place from its connections in the loins, drops down into this sheath D. It will also be easily understood how the testicle covered with its first coat B, (viz. the tunica albuginea,) when it has fallen into D, is invested bv this sac of the peritoneum, and that this last covering will come to be the tunica vaginalis. The tunica vaginalis is so called because it covers the testicle like a sheath ; that is, it does not universally adhere to the surface of the albuginea, as that coat does to the body of the testicle. Understanding the nature of the peritoneum, we may learn the meaning of this looseness ofthe outer coat of the testicle. By turning to the introductory section of the abdominal mus- cles, we find, that the inside ofthe sac of the peritoneum is smooth, and forms no adhesion ; whilst the outer surface, being in contact with the substance ofthe several viscera, has a connection with them by a common cellular membrane. Now, as the inside of the peritoneum does not adhere, as the surface of the peritoneum, (which in this first plan is towards C ) is smooth, and has no tendency to unite with the surface of the viscera ; so neither has the surface of the peritoneum at D, the tendency to unite with the peritoneum (or the sur- face of the albuginea,) at B, when it descends to meet it: consequently the coat of the intestines may be represented in this second plan, thus. Second plan ofthe Testicle. zd. Plan of the Tefticle. 3<*- P*an of the Tefticle. 112 OF THE TESTES. In the first plan, we had the situation of the testicle in the foetus represented. In the second plan, we have the middle stage of the descent represented: and, in the third, we have the full descent. In the second figure, A is the body of the testicle, B is the first peritoneal covering or tunica albuginea, which can be easily traced, reflected off from the loins at C ; again, D is the portion of the peritoneum, which having de- scended before the testicle is presently, when the testicle has fully descended, to become the second, or vaginal coat of the testicle ; F is the continuation of the peritoneum upon the inside of the abdominal muscles. In the third figure of this series, we find the testicle A has descended into the scrotum ; that it has one coat covering it, which we recognize to be the same with B, in the first figure, and that the peritoneum in this third plate at B, can be traced to C, the peritoneum within the belly. Now supposing this to be the state of the testicle immedi- ately after it has descended, we see that there is still a com- munication betwixt the cavity of the tunica vaginalis D, and the cavity of the peritoneum E. F is the kindey, covered by the peritoneum, and nearly in the situation in which the testi- cle was before its descent. Fourth Plan ofthe Testicle. From this fourth plan of the testicle, we may learn the nature of the congenital hernia. It is a hernia produced by OF THE TESTES. 113 the intestine slipping down, from the communication betwixt the general cavity of the peritoneum, and the cavity of the tunica vaginalis, or in consequence of an adhesion betwixt the testicle and a portion of the gut, which of course causes the gut to follow the testicle, and prevents the communication be- twixt the belly and the cavity ofthe tunica vaginalis from being shut. Thus, fig. 4. A, is the testicle, as it is seen in plan 3d. B, the tunica albuginea; C, the peritoneum within the belly; D, the tunica vaginalis, which we can trace from C, and which is distended and separated from the surface of the testicle, (i. e. ofthe albuginea) by a portion ofthe gut, which has de- scended through the ring: F, the intestines within the belly : G, the intestine which has fallen into the tunica vaginalis, and is in contact with the testicle ; that is, in contact with the tuni- ca vaginalis, which is in close union with the gland, and is con- sidered as its surface. We have explained the change which takes place in the situ^ ation of the testicle, as it relates to the peritoneum ; but how this change is brought about, it is very difficult to understand. It is not a sudden pulling down of the testicle, but a very gra- dual process, continuing for months ; it is not the effect of gra- vitation, for the foetus may be in every variety of posture while in the womb, and generally the head presents. It is not respi- ration. Is it then the effect ofthe action ofthe cremaster mus- cle ? or must we refer it to a law such as that which controuls and directs the growth of parts ? When the parts in a foetus before the descent of the testicle are dissected, there is found a ligamentous, or cellular cord, mingled with the fibres of the cremaster muscle, and which takes its origin from the groin, is reflected into the abdominal ring, and stretches up to the body of the testicle. This body is called ligament or gubernaculum, and to the agency of this bundle of fibres, is the descent of the testicle attributed. There are, however, objections to this. If we suppose that the cremaster muscle, by its exertion, brings down the testicle to the ring, how does it pass the ring ? for surely we cannot suppose that this muscle, which takes its origin from the inter- nal oblique muscle, consequently within, can contract, not only so as to bring the testicle to the very point of its origin, but to protrude it past that point, and through the tendon of the ex- ternal oblique muscle. Again, animals have the cremasier muscle, whose testicles never descend out ofthe belly;—ag iin, the vessels of the chord, before the testicle has fully descended, show no marks of being dragged down, for they are elegantly tortuous. As the testicle passes very slowly from the loins to the ring j Vol. IV. P 114 OF THE TESTES. so, after it has escaped from the belly, it passes slowly from the ring to the bottom of the scrotum. It commonly remains sometime by the side ofthe penis, and only by degrees de- scends to the bottom of the scrotum.* In this change the testicles do not fall loose into the elonga- tion of the peritoneum like a piece of gut or omentum in a rupture ;—but, carrying the peritoneum with them, they conti- nue to adhere to the parts behind them, as they did to the psoas muscle while in the loins : a point of importance to be recol- lected by the young surgeon. The communication betwixt the belly and the sac of the va- ginalis is very soon obliterated by the adhesion of the upper pan, and then the whole extent of the passage (viz. from E» to D. in plan 3d of this series,) is shut. When this process is prevented in the first instance, when nature is baulked in the humour of doing her work, as Mr. Hunter observes, she can not so easily do it afterwards. It has also occurred that, this communication remaining af- ter birth, a hydrocele has been produced by the distention of the tunica vaginalis, by fluids descending from the belly. The character of such a tumour will be, that the fluid will be easily forced into the belly. It may, however, be mistaken for a con- genital hernia.f It will already be understood, that in the common hernia of the groin or scrotum, the gut does not pass by the communica- tion from the belly into the vaginal coat; that such communi- cation no longer exists, and that when there is a rupture from preternatural wideness of the abdominal ring, or in conse- quence of a great violence, a new portion of the peritoneum de- scends with the gut before the chord ofthe testicle. • Mr. Hunter has fhewn, that the detention of the tefticle in the belly is in con- fequence of fome defect and want of action in the tefticle, and that thofe who have the tefticle remaining in the belly have it imperfect or fmall. This is con- trary to an old authority :—The tefticles are feated externally," for chaftity's fake, for fuch live-wights as have their ftones hid within their body, are very lech- erous, do often couple, and get many young ones!" f Such is the remark ef Mr. Hunter. OF THE TESTES. 115 Fifth Plan ofthe Testicle. This 5th plan will now illustrate the relation of the testicle to the herniary sac in the common scrotal hernia. A, the scro- tum : B, the testicle ; which will be easily understood to pre- serve its attachment to the back part of the scrotum : C, the tunica vaginalis, which here invests the testicle, but which is not now (in the adult or perfect state of the coats of the testi- cle,) as is seen in plan 3d, open from D to E, but forms a short sac surrounding the tunica albuginea : D, the cellular mem- brane of the chord of vessels passing down to the testicle. And now there are no remains of the tube of communication be- twixt the belly and vaginal cavity ; it is obliterated and resol- ved into this cellular membrane. We see then, that in this plan the testicle and its coats, and the spermatic chord, are in their natural situation, and that the herniary sac has descended before them. E, is the ring of the external oblique muscle of the abdomen, through which not only the testicle, with its coats and vessels, has descended, but also the hernia : F, the herniary sac, which contains a portion of the gut ; it is formed of the peritoneum, fallen down from the belly, but it is quite distinct from the sac ofthe tunica vagi- nalis C. Whilst this new process of the abdominal peritoner 116 ©F THE TESTES. um has descended, it has contracted adhesions, and cannot now be replaced. In thus explaining these important principles of anatomy, and which the anatomical student will find wonderfully to faci- litate the more minute study of surgical anatomy, it only re- mains to show the nature ofthe hydrocele. The hydrocele is a collection of water within the sac of the tunica vaginalis ; that is, betwixt the tunica vaginalis and tuni- ca albuginea. For, as we have seen, that the same surface ot the vaginal coat is contiguous to the surface of the testicle (viz. the albuginea,) with that of the peritoneum, which is contiguous to the viscera of the belly ; and as it has the same exudation, so it has the same disease, viz. a collection of water, from the absorption being disproportionate to the exudation. When the tunica vaginalis is distended with the water of a hy- drocele, the testicle is towards the back part of the scrotum ; it can be felt there ; and when the scrotum is placed betwixt the candle and the eye, we see the transparent sac on the fore part ofthe tumour, the opaque mass of the testicle behind; gene- rally the distended vaginal coat stretches up before the chord, conically. Thus, Sixth Plan ofthe Testicle. A, the penis ; it is generally corrugated thus, in consequence of the distention of the scrotum hi scrotal hernia and hydro- OF THE TESTES. 117 cele : B, the scrotum : C, the testicle, covered only by the tu- nica albuginea; D, the cellular membrane ofthe chord : E, the tunica vaginalis, distended with the water of the hydrocele^ and consequently separated from the surface ofthe testicle : F, that part of the sac of the vaginal coat, which often extends conically before the cellular membrane of the chord D. Now we see that the distention of the vaginal coat does not open up the old communication with the belly ; but that, the former communication being shut, and the peritoneum there degene- rated into the cellular membrane ofthe chord, the hydrocele is a distinct sac, surrounding the testicle, and formed of the tuni- ea vaginalis. To understand this subject of the coats of the testicle, it is not necessary merely to consider the descent ofthe testicle; but the student must consider it in every point of view, turn it as it were into every variety of posture, without which his dif- ficulties will perpetually return upon him. It is for this reason that I have endeavoured to represent simply the various states of the coats of the testicle in disease. OF THE VESSELS OF THE CHORD AND TESTICLE. In attending to the descent ofthe testicle, we have a cue al- so to the vascular system. If we did not know that the testi- cles were originally placed in the loins within the belly, we might wonder at the length and origin of the spermatic ves- sels. The spermatic artery rises from the fore part ofthe aorta, below the emulgent artery, or from the emulgent artery, (generally on the right side,) and sometimes from the arteries of the renal capsule ; sometimes there is only one, sometimes there are two spermatic arteries. This artery, which the chord receives from the aorta or emulgent, is called the superior sper- matic artery, because there is another which rises from the hy- pogastric artery : this branch runs upward, connected to the vas deferens, as it rises out of the pelvis. These arteries, taking their course under the peritoneum, join the fasciculus forming the chord, and supply the chord, and send twigs to the investing peritoneum ; they then pass through the abdominal ring, and in their course they are beautifully tor- tuous. The veins of the testicle rise on the right side from the trunk of the cava, a little below the emulgent vein, and from the emulgent vein on the left side. In the origin of these veins there are frequent varieties ; there is also, accompanying the vas deferens, a vein, which joins the internal iliac vein. These 118 OF THE TESTES. veins, in their course from the testicle, are protected from the column of blood, and from the bad consequences of com- pression, by numerous valves. These valves are very strong, and will bear a great column of mercury before they give way or burst. This plexus of convoluted veins of the chord is the most beautiful in the body. This convoluted state of the veins is ever attendant on great activity and exertion ofthe arteries of the part. If there is a provision in the shape, course, and strength of the arteries, for occasional acceleration of the blood through them ; so will there be found in the veins a tor- tuous and varicose appearance ; and again, if by accident there is excited an uncommon action in the arteries of a living body, that action will be apparent from the distended or enlarged state ot the veins. In the testicles of such animals as have their seasons, the artery and veins of the testicle are still more con- voluted, and form a mass of vessels, which has been called the corpus pyramidale.* The nerves ofthe testicle, like the blood vessels, come from the loins, and are continued down upon the vessels in the sper- matic plexus. This still farther allies the testicle to the abdo- minal viscera, giving them much of the same sympathies. The stomach, intestines, and testicle, sympathise readily with each other. As we find the tunica albuginea of the testicle to be very firm, dense, and unelastic, the great pain in inflammation of the testicle has naturally been attributed to the resistance made by this coat to the swelling of the substance of the testi- cle, but much must be ascribed to the natural sensibility of the part, independently of swelling and tension ; for in the very moment of a blow, a person faints and falls down from exqui- site pain. The lymphatics ofthe testicle are numerous, and easily de- monstrated by blowing up the cellular structure ofthe body of the testicle ; and we shall by-and-by find, that this has been the ground of dispute between physiologists ; and the proofs of some important points in the doctrine of absorption have been drawn from the injection of the lymphatics of the testicle and chord. The cremaster muscle, as we have seen in the first vo- lume, takes its origin from the internal oblique muscle ofthe abdomen, and, passing down over the vessels ofthe chord, is ex- * Corpus varicofum,—Corpus Pampiniforme; Galen de Semme. Alias paraf- tatam varicofam, Hall.—As the old phyfiologifts' faw and obferved this wonderful tortuofity, and the tendril-like form of the fpermatic artery, they thought that a? there muft be fomething peculiar in this ftructure, the blood was here begun to be changed into fcmen, and therefore they called them the vafa preparantia. OF THE TESTES. 219 panded on the tunica vaginalis : its use is to suspend the testi- cle, and prevent it from dragging upon the vessels ofthe chord. By constitutional weakness, or the relaxation induced by warm climates, this muscle becomes relaxed, and artificial sus- pension becomes necessary. Sometimes this muscle draws the testicle spasmodically to the groin ; yet I cannot allow that this is the muscle which retracts and corrugates the scrotum, for the testicle will be thus drawn up by the cremaster, without corrugation or contraction of the scrotum. In some this would appear to be a voluntary muscle ; it possibly accelerates the motion of the semen, or at least promotes its secretion. Thus we find the chord ofthe testicle, as it is called, to con- sist of the arteries, veins, and nerves ; of the lymphatics re- turning from the testicle ; of the cellular tissue embracing and supporting all these vessels ; and lastly, of the fibres of the wemaster muscle. OF THE STRUCTURE OF THE TESTICLE. It is to De Graaff that we owe the knowledge of the struc- ture of the testicle ; and indeed the merit of this great anato- mist has not been acknowledged with sufficient gratitude by modern anatomists : but after the fervour of disputation has subsided, the merit of ingenuity and of discovery must return to him to whom it is due. No one more highly values than I do the improvements of anatomy by the Hunters and Monro : but I must say, that the structure ofthe testicle was demonstra- ted by De Graaff to his fellow anatomists of Montpelier, and his discoveries published in a manner so perfect, as to leave us little to learn from more modern authors. De Graaff, by exciting animals to venery, and tying the sper- matic chord, had the seminal vessels distended. He did not depend upon injections ; by maceration and dissection in this distended state, he unravelled all the intricacies of their tubes. More modern anatomists have proved the truth of his observa- tions by injections of mercury, and have succeeded in a variety of ways of preparing the testicle. Tubuli testis.—When the tunica albuginea testis is lifted, the body of the testicle is found to consist of innumerable very delicate white tubes; which, when disentangled from the mi- nute cellular membrane which connects them, and floated in water, exhibit a most astonishing extent of convoluted ves- sels. By a closer attention, however, to this structure before it is thrown into confusion by pulling out the tubes, they appear to be regularly laid in partitions of the cellular membrane. These sepimenta are very regular in some animals, and while 120 OF THE TESTES. they separate the seminal tubes, they support and convey the blood-vessels to the secretion of the semen. Dr. Monro has denied the formal divisions which De Graaff has engraved, but acknowledges them less regular, less easily found, and not so limited in their number ; nor does he find them to prevent all communication betwixt the tubes of the testicle. These seminiferous tubes of Haller, or tubuli testis of Monro, running in meshes, 15 or 20 in number, terminate on the back of the testicle. Each of these tubes seems to be cylindrical, or of one diameter throughout their whole extent : we see no communication betwixt them ; no branches given out or going into them ; no beginning for the whole, nor for any one of them. Though we cannot prove it, yet there seems to be only one tube wonderfully convoluted and folded up in each subdivision of the testicle. Rete testis.—When the tubuli come out from the body of the testicle, they run along the back of it, and communicate by inosculations with each other, so as to form a net-work of vessels, from which appearance Haller named them rete testis. Here it often happens that the mercury stops, when it has been injected backward from the vas deferens ; and it is this part which has been better described and drawn, in conse- quence of mercurial injections, than it was by De Graaff; for he, as we have said, saw this part only filled with semen. Connected with the rete testis is the corpus highmorian- um.—Where the lines of the membranous septa, and cellular membrane of the testicle, meet on the back of the testicle, and under the epidimis, they form a white line. This white line running along the testicle, was supposed by Highmore to be a hollow tube ; it was compared with the salivary duct ; it was thought to be a cavity leading from the body of the testicle to the head of the epididimis, and to form the communication by which the semen flowed from the testicle. De Graaff first refuted this notion, and shewed that it was not by this one great duct, but by these smaller tubes forming what has been now called the rete testis, that the semen came from the testi- cle : still it had continued a question, whether this white line was really solid, or a tube ; and upon faithful examination of the point it appears, that this is expressly as it was explained by De Graaff, viz. that it is a mere collection of the mem- branes of the body of the testicle, forming a linea alba ; and as the septa are more distinguishable in some animals, so is the corpus highmorianum.* * Thi» body called a mere frmamentum or binding, Winflow; the nucleus tefti*- OF THE TESTES. m Vasa efferentia.—The tubes running on the back of the testicle, and forming the rete testis, we have understood to arise from the tubuli testis ; now it is the continuation of the rete testis which is called vasa efferentia. The vasa efferentia are very delicate vessels which run out from the head of the testicle, single at first, but they are soon convoluted, and by these convolutions they are formed into an equal number of vascular cones, which constitute the head or I irger part of the epididimis. These vasa efferentia and vascular cones are con- nected by a very delicate cellular membrane ; and it is a piece of very nice dissection to display them after they are injected with mercury. Epididimis.—The vasa efferentia, after forming thin coni- cal convolutions, unite and form larger tubes ; these again uniting, form one large excretory duct, the vas deferens : but this vessel being convoluted to a wonderful degree, forms a body, which being, as it were, placed upon the testicle, has been called epididimis. Seventh Plan of the Testicle. 7th Plan of the Tefticle. In this representation ofthe dissected testicle, A is the body of the testicle divested of its coats ; B, the tubuli testis ;* CC, the rete testis ; D, the vasa efferentia; E, the vascular cones; F, the epididimis formed of the convolutions of the vas deferens ; lastly, G is the vas deferens. In the substance of the testicle there are no glands nor * Where the tubuli are emerging to form the rete Tafculefum, they are called the vafa recta. Vol. IV. Q 122 OT THE TESTES. follicules; the arteries minutely ramify amongst the seminal tubes, and, there is reason to believe, secrete the semen into them. The seminal vessels in the substance of the testicle, or tubuli testis, run together upon the surface of the testicle, and form the rete testis. From the rete testis are continued the vascular cones: these convolute, and running together form the epididimis ; from which the tube is continued under the name of the vas deferens. It passes up the chord ; enters by the ring into the abdomen ; and then passing down into the pelvis, terminates in the vesiculae seminales, in a manner presently to be explained. It is not likely that the vis a tergo, the power of the arteries, pushes the semen through all this length of tube, of which the epididimis itself is reckoned to be several feet in length, if the various convolutions were un- done. Such an action on the testicle as that of the dartos or cremaster muscle, could give only a general stimulus, but could not force on the semen in tubes which take so great a variety of directions. We are therefore left to the supposition, that these tubes themselves have a power of accelerating the fluids through them. Of the lymphatics of the testicle we shall afterwards treat; it is, however, necessary here to remark, that Prochaska found in his injections a difficulty in making the mercury pass the rete testis into the testicle. Observing at the same time in his preparations, and in the drawings of all authors, an ap- pearance of irregularities in this part like the valvular structure of lymphatics, he has been led to suppose that there is a pro- vision here for preventing the semen from being forced back- ward into the testicle by the action of the cremaster muscle ; he conceives that when the cremaster muscle draws up the testicle to the groin, it may accelerate the semen in the epidi- dimis, whilst this valvular structure prevents the regurgitation upon the delicate vessels of the substance of the testicle. The annexed plate represents the appearance which I have found in my preparations. A, the vas deferens by which the mercury was injected; B, the epididimis ; C, vessels running up the chord from the great head of the epididimis. There is a duct which sometimes arises from the epididimis, and which has been found to terminate abruptly in a blind end—of this, Mr. Hunter speaks in the annexed note.* * «' By a fupernumerary vas deferens, I mean a fmall duct, which fometimes arifes from the epididimfe, and paffes up the fpermatic chord along with the vas deferens, and commonly terminates in a blind end, near to which it is fometimes a little enlarged. I never found this duct go on to the urethra, but in fome in- ltances, have feen it accompany the vas deferens as far as the brim of the pelvis. There is no abfolute proof that it is a fupernumerary vas deferens; but as we find OF THE TESTES. 123 OF THE TESTICLE IN GENERAL. The testicle is of an oval form, and ofthe size of a pigeon's eep;: it is a little flattened on the sides : it hangs m the scrotum by the spermatic chord ; one end of the oval, forward and hie-h; see plan 8th B; while the other is backwards, and drops lower, C. The spermatic chord consists otthe artery which brings blood; ofthe veins which return it; of the vas deferens, which carries the semen to the vesiculae seminales at the neck ofthe bladder; of lymphatics, which are essential to the structure of every part. This chord of vessels.comes down from the belly, and passes by thermg of the abdominal muscle ; it is about four inches in length, and is fixed into the upper and fore part of the body of the testicle. The body of the testicle is easily distinguished, and is the place where the secretion is performed. It is strictly the body of the gland, while the part above it is only the duct by which its fluid is discharged. .,,,.- • • *,„:no . The ancients called the testicle dydimi, gemini, twins , they, therefore, called that part which is laid on the back ot the testicle epididimis, as added to it. To the surgeon, it is essentiaUy necessary to attend to the relation of the parts oi the testicle as felt through the scrotum. Eighth Plan ofthe Testicle, Sth Plan of the Tefticle. Fy.2,. the ducts of glands in general very fubje«St to Angularities, and that there are; fre- ouentlv fuoernumerary duds, there being often two ureters to one kidney, fome- SSliSSStobiinoing'toeBd, at olher times both arifing from one pel*,; 124 OF THE TESTES. In this 8th plan, fig. 1. we see the testicle as in its natural situation, covered with its membranes, and appearing like one body ; while, in the second figure, it being represented freed from its outer coat, we see the epididimis as laid upon the testi- cle, and consisting of the convoluted tube. First, we observe A, the body ofthe testicle ; B, the beginning of the epididi- mis, or the large h*=ad of the epididimis.* Then we see it laid along the back of the testicle, and observe C to be the small head of the epididimis.f where the tube is reflected to reascend upon the testicle, and to form D, the vas deferens. Now, we have to observe, that the point C, fig. 2. or small head of the epididimis, hangs over the testicle, and points backwards to the perineum, and can be felt through the whole coats ; and that the body of the testicle A, is towards us when we examine a patient.—Further, as the letters in figure 1 and 2. refer to thr same points, we have only to notice the fainter indication ofthe parts in fig. Ii it being invested with the coats ; and to observe the general relation of the testicle to the scro- tum and penis. There is one other circumstance to be observed, viz. that the epididimis is always laid on the outer side of the insertion of the chord into the testicle ; from which we distinguish, with ease, in a preparation, to which side the testicle belongs. Thus, in the annexed plans, the testicle of the left side is represented, which we know from the points c, being directed backward, while the epididimis is laid along the left side ofthe insertion of the chord. OF THE VESICULA SEMINALES. Behind the prostate gland, and attached to the lowest part of the urinary bladder, lie two soft bodies, which are the vesi- culae seminales. They appear like simple bags when seen from without, but dissections show them to consist of a cellu- lar structure ; each of these bodits is about three fingers- thefe ducts, arifing from the epididimis, I am inclined to believe from analogy, are of a nature fimilar to the double ureters. They refcmble the vas deferens, as being continuations of fome of the tubes of the epididimis, are convoluted where they come off from it, and afterwards become a ftraight canal paffing along with it for fome way, when they are commonly obliterated. " The idea of their being for the purpofe of returning the fuperfluous femen to the circulation is certainly erroneous, from their being fo feldom met with, and fo very feldom continued further than the brim of the pelvis." • Globus major, or head. f Globus miner eanda. This part we often diftinguifli retaining its hardnefs after the fubfiding of the general fwtlling of hernia femoralis. From this point we can trace all the connections of the other parts. ©P THE TESTES. 125 breadth in length ; their backmost point is large and round, and, at the same time, that they diverge from each other, their narrow points unite, or are contiguous to each other forwards, and enter at the back part of the base of the prostate gland. As we have seen, the peritoneum does not descend far enough betwixt the bladder and rectum to cover or invest these vesicul* ; they are therefore involved in the cellular texture, and covered with strong fibres, besides being subject to the compression of the levator ani muscle. When the vesiculae are cut into, and especially when they are distended, dried, and cut, they present a cellular appearance ; but if they are carefully dissected, they present the appearance of a small blind intestine convoluted. This cellular appearance is given by the duplication of their inner membrane, together with the distortions and curves of the canal. Their outer surface is covered with a fine mem* brane, which, like a frenum, connects these cellular convo- lutions. These are copiously supplied with arteries ; their surface is covered with veins and lymphatics when these vessels are minutely injected, and their coat is thick and spongy. Heister, Winslow, and others, have described small glands as seated in their sinuosities ; but these are confidently denied, and in their place there is described a pile or efflorescence. I'here can be little hesitation in affirming, that these vesiculae are themselves glands, or, in other words, that the arteries secrete into them a peculiar fluid. The fore part of each of the vesiculae, which we have said sink into the back part of the prostate gland, runs under the neck of the bladder, and opens by distinct mouths into the urethra, on the surface of the verumontanum. The connection of the vas deferens with the vesiculae, is very particular, it does not open directly into them, but opens with them into the urethra in such a way, that the semen from the testicle can pass into the vesiculae, though its direct course is into the urethra.* If air is blown into the vas deferens, the vesiculae will be distended at the same time that the air passes into the urethra : the union of the extremities of the vas deferens and vesiculae, forms a kind of septum betwixt them. * The extremity of the vas deferens joins the duct of the vesiculae where it is imbedded in the prostate gland ; the union ef the vas deferens and duct of the vesiculae is not attended with an enlargement of the duct j on the contrary, as the duct * Sao explanation of plate III 126 OF THE TESTES- passes forward deep into the substance of the gland to arrive at the urethra, it becomes remarkably narrower until it opens in a very small orifice in the verumontanum, as we see repre- sented in the third plate. The duct (if we may so call it,) of the vesiculae passes a full inch forward into the gland before it terminates in the urethra. These vesiculse have been in general supposed to be recepta- cles for the semen ; but as this is an opinion depending on the connection of these bags with the extremities of the vas de- ferens, and as comparative anatomy shows many instances of these vesiculae being unconnected with the ducts of the testicle, there is much reason to doubt whether they really are merely reservoirs. They have always appeared to me as useful in adding a fluid to the secretion of the testicle, which being poured together into the sinus of the urethra, give a disten- tion, exciting and giving effect to the contraction ofthe ejacu- lator seminis : For unless there were a provision of fluid suf- ficient to distend the sinus ofthe urethrae, the semen could not be thrown out from the urethra. This supposition is not op- posed by the facts stated by Mr. Hunter, that in many animals the vesiculae and vasa deferentia open by distinct foramina into the urethra, because in that case the fluids of these secreting bags might be equally mingled with the semen in the sinus of the urethra, although they do not flow from the same tube. Verumontanum.—The verumontanum, or caput galina- ginis, is an eminence on the lower part of the urethra, where it is surrounded by the prostate gland. As we observe in the drawing, it is larger and round towards the bladder, and stretches with a narrow neck forwards. On its summit, the two orifices of the seminal vessels open ; and around it there are innumerable lesser foramina and mucous follicules. PART THE THIRD. OF THE FEMALE PARTS OF GENERATION. THE ANATOMY OF THE PARTS IN THE FE- MALE PELVIS. A HERE is considerable difficulty in presenting such a view of the anatomy of the parts of generation in woman, as may bear a due relation to this general system of anatomy, and, at the same time, be intelligible and complete. The subject is in itself extensive and important, sufficient to fill several volumes: it is much connected with practice ; and the phenomena and diseases ofthe system serve greatly to illustrate the strict ana- tomy of the parts. I cannot here be allowed to give to it its due importance, whilst yet it is a subject not easily understood from a short abstract. The parts of generation are divided into the external, which are those without the pelvis ; and the internal, or viscera of the pelvis, and which lie within the bony circle of the pelvis. ( 128 ) CHAP. I. THE EXTERNAL PARTS OF GENERATION. T J- HE external parts of generation are the mons veneris, labiae, clitoris, nymphae, urethra, hymen, or carunculae myrtiformes. Upon these subjects we have no want of books and informa- tion ; for accoucheurs of the old school dwelt upon the descrip- tion with particular accuracy. These parts were within their ken, which we cannot say of the viscera of the pelvis : and, therefore upon the former we shall be more brief. In very young children these external parts bear a large pro- portion to the body, greater than at any subsequent period be- fore the age of puberty. At puberty they are suddenly and completely evolved, and acquire an increase of size ; while, from the age of two years to twelve or thirteen, there has been little increase. Immediately before menstruation, com- mences the connection which occasions, or accompanies that flux. It begins to effect the evolution of the uterine system, and to fit it for its peculiar function. The parts become turgid and vascular ; the fat is deposited in the surrounding cellular membrane. About the fortieth year, when the menses disap- pear, this fulness of the private parts also ceases, and the fat is reabsorbed. The mons veneris is that prominence on the symphysis pubis, which consists of the skin raised and cushioned up by the fat inclosed in the cellular membrane. There is of course a great variety in its size. In early life it is small: it be- comes, as we have said, more prominent at the age of puberty ; in fat women it is of an enormous size ; and in some warm climates a particular laxity prevails. From the hair on this part, marking the age of puberty, it is called pubis. As the lax texture admits of distention with the fluid of anasarca, it is sometimes from this cause very greatly swelled. The LABiiE. These are often named alae, from a slight resemblance to wings, and they are also called externa?, mag- nae, or majores, from their place, and from their superiority in respect of size over the nymphae. The labiae seem to be the mons veneris continued downward, and laterally until meeting below, they form the vulva; at their lower angle, by their union, they form the fourchette, or frenum labiorum. The structure of the labiae is similar to that of the mons veneris ; sometimes one is larger than the other. The external parts of generation. 129 The great sensibility of the membrane which lines the inside of the labiae, requires some defence, and therefore the whole surface is amply supplied with mucous follicules and glands. The labiae are a protection to the other soft parts, so necessary, that the clitoris, or nymphae, when they project beyond them, are subject to violent inflammation. The parts here have either such folds, or are of so lax a texture, as to permit a great degree of distention during the passage of the child. But, as the labiae have no muscular power, and depend entirely on their elasticity for restoring them to their original size, they commonly, after being very much dilated, remain in some degree larger and more lax. It is different with muscular parts, as the orificium externum, which, by the power of its sphincter, is restored after labour to its original size. In man, hernia descends from the abdo- minal ring into the scrotum ; but, in woman, when there is a rupture from the ring, (which is rare) it may fall into the labiae, though, I believe, it will be seldom found to descend thus far. The nymphjE named labiae vel alae minores, or labiae in- ternae, to distinguish them from the great labiae. They are like a miniature representation of the great labiae ; they are covered with a very delicate membrane, and have great sensi- bility. They begin immediately under the glans clitoridis, and seem to be only an extension of its preputium, formed by a folding of the membrane. Their size varies much. They commonly stretch downward, and backward to the middle of the orifice of the vagina ; sometimes no further than to that of the orificium urethrae, and in a few instances they extend even the length of the fourchette.* They are very vascular, and have somewhat of a cellular structure, and thus partake of a degree of turgid ity, inconsequence of irritation and vascular action. The most modest of the uses ascribed to them is, that of directing the stream of urine. As they are obliterated during the passage of the child's head through the vulva, it is probable that they facilitate the necessary dilatation. The nymphae are, in their natural situation, covered and completely protected by the labiae externa?. When naturally large or increased by disease, or in a very relaxed state, they are deprived of this covering: they project from under the labiae, and are apt to become inflamed, and even to ulcerate. The original disease, or tumour, is augmented, or they be- come perhaps hard and callous. In children they bear a very great proportion to the other parts, and are more conspicuous • Both Riolin and Morgagni have obferved the parts without the nymphs. Vol. IV. R 130 THE EXTERNAL PARTS OF GENERATION. and prominent than in the adult. Their diseased enlargement sometimes requires to be extirpated, in which operation, as they are very vascular, and as with their growth, their blood- vessels enlarge, considerable haemorrhagy may be expected. A surgeon of this city, in extirpating a tumour of this kind from a young ladv, thought his duty fulfilled when he had ap- plied a piece of lint upon the surface after the operation, so that he even neglected to appoint an attendant. The haemorr- hagy returned, and continued so profuse that before the sur- geon arrived the lady had fainted. The clitoris is similar to the male penis. Like the penis, it consists of cells for receiving blood, and in a similar manner, it arises from, or takes hold of the rami of the os pubis by two crura ;—these unite at the symphysis pubis, to form the body of the clitoris, which is suspended from the os pubis, like the penis, by a kind of ligament. The clitoris has also a kind of glans, over which the integuments make a fold like a preputi- um. In short, it has the same sensibilities, the same power of erection with the membrum virile; only it has no urethra nor spongy body, like that of the urethra of man. The stories of the increase of this instrument, even to its pre-eminence in size over the male penis, are very idle, but there seems to be a peculiar predilection for them. It is not wonderful that a clitoris of such magnitude should suggest the idea of a hermaphrodite, or person partaking equally of the distinguishing attributes of either sex. OF THE URETHRA. The urethra of the female is short, straight, and wide ; its length an inch and a half, or two inches ; its direction nearly straight, or only slightly bending under the os pubis ; and its diameter such as will admit a catheter the size of a writing quill. The consequences of these peculiarities are, that the catheter is easily passed when there is no very unusual obstruc- tion ; that women are not so much exposed to the disease of stone in the bladder as men, for though this is much owing to constitutional peculiarities, yet it is obvious, that when a small stone is formed, and passes from the bladder, it is easily dis- charged ; and, lastly, that lithotomy is a very simple operation in woman. The opening of the urethra is in a direct line under, or be- hind the clitoris, and about an inch from it: It is in the middle of a slight prominence, and its vicinity is plentifully supplied with mucous glands. If the relation of the orifice to the clitoris be observed, there is, in the natural state of the parts^ THE EXTERNAL PARTS OF GENERATION. 131 wo difficulty in slipping the point of the catheter, on the end of the middle finger, from the clitoris, until it is catched, upon the lacuna-like orifice of the urethra ; but even in this part of the operation, I have experienced great embarrassment, from an irregular ulcerated or cancerous surface of the parts, by which all the usual distinctions were lost. From the length and sudden turns of the male urethra, from the double function it performs, and from its being em- braced by the prostate gland, the obstructions of the urine are more frequent, and the catheter less easily passed, than in woman. The catheter too requires to be of a very peculiar form. The short and wide urethra of woman requires only a simple and almost straight tube : and although, accurately to adapt it to the course of the urethra, a considerable curve might be given to it, yet that is not necessary in common cases; and circumstances will occur to the accoucheur which will pre- clude the possibility of using such an instrument. We shall only mention here such cases of obstruction of urine as are in a particular manner illustrated by the anatomy and connection of the parts. These are tumours of the ovari- um, tumours of the womb, polypi, distention of the vagina, displacement of the womb, as procidentia, prolapsus, retro- versio, &C. ; and lastly, the child's head in labour. The ovarium being enlarged, and falling down into the pelvis, either presses upon the neck of the bladder, causing obstructions, or pressing and weighing on the fundus of the bladder, it occasions a stillicidium urinae. Tumours ofthe womb, especially of the neck or orifice, as it is in contact with the urethra, very soon affect this organ. Thus, I have seen a cancer of the orifice of the womb, by ex- citing inflammation in all the surrounding parts, and by mas- sing them together into a tumour filling the pelvis, occasion ob- stinate obstruction of urine. Polypi attached to the orifice of the womb, and filling the vagina, produce the same effect, In all such cases, perhaps, the tumour may be pushed up, so as to permit the flow of urine, or the introduction of the catheter. A case occurred to Mr. John Bell, in which the tumour of the womb compressed the neck of the bladder. A catheter was passed, and gave instant relief. The midwife, after some time came, and said, that the catheter would not pass. He found that he could pass the catheter into the bladder, but no urine flowed ; and it was discovered, that the tumour in- creasing backward, came to press upon the ureters, so as com- pletely to obstruct them where they enter the bladder. The 132 THE EXTERNAL PARTS OF GENERATION. woman unavoidably died ; each kidney and ureter was found to contain four or five ounces of urine. A slight sketch of the parts in the female pelvis will, per- haps, better explain the connections ofthe neck of the bladder than any description, and will certainly better illustrate the cause of some kinds of obstruction, particularly that arising from the change in the posture of the womb. First Plan of the Female Pelvis. A, the os pubis cut through.—B, the spine and sacrum also cut directly down.—C, the urinary bladder moderately disten- ded, and rising behind the pubis.—D, the urethra, very short, and taking a gentle curve under the symphysis of the os pu- bis.—E, the fundus of the womb—F, the os tincae, or orifice of the womb.—G, the vagina.—H, the rectum. Prolapsus, or falling down of the womb, is frequent with those who have born many children. By this slipping down of the body ofthe womb F, into the vagina G, it presses on the neck of the bladder, or urethra. This is also apt to happen in the first months of pregnancy, from a degree of difficulty which the womb in its enlargement has in rising above the brim of the pelvis. We may observe also from the place of the vagina G, that its diseases, its scirrhous hardening, its distention by the men- ses, will iiito compress the urethra and neck of the bladder. The retroversion ofthe womb is the most formidable obstruc- tion to the urethra. It is produced by distention of the blad- der acting on the womb in" a particular situation, and is the cause of suppression of the urine. When the womb in thf THE EXTERNAL PARTS OF GENERATION. 133 third or fourth month of gestation has increased so much as to produce a degree of compression on the surrounding parts, and to rise above the brim, and shoot up into the abdomen, a distention of the bladder is apt to throw the fundus under the projection ofthe sacrum. We have to observe the connection betwixt the back and lower part ofthe vagina. By the disten- tion ofthe bladder, the vagina is stretched, and the orifice of the womb is raised, which throws back the fundus of the womb, so that this comes to be the situation ofthe parts. Second Plan ofthe Female Pelvis. A, the os pubis ; B, the sacrum ; C, the bladder of urine much distended, and rising above the pubis ; D, the connection betwixt the back part of the bladder and the upper part of the vagina, and through which the rising of this part of the blad- der (in consequence of its distention) has drawn up the orifice ofthe womb, and thrown back the fundus. E, the orifice of the womb, which being raised and turned up, no longer pre- sents so as to be felt by the finger in the vagina. It will be ob- served also, that the womb now lying across the pelvis, this lower part is forced against the neck of the urethra, so as to compress it, and cause total obstruction of urine. F, the va- 1S4 THE EXTERNAL PARTS OF GENERATION. gina, which is stretched in consequence of the rising and turrt- ing up of the orifice of the womb. G, the fundus of the womb enlarged and distended by impregnation, fallen back under the promontory of the sacrum, and compressing the rec- tum H. Now, when the fundus of the womb is thrust back, and the orifice raised by the distention and consequent rising of the bladder, the natural and simple cure is to introduce the cathe- ter, and draw off the urine. But should this not be done at first, then there being distention of the bladder, and pressure on the rectum, the abdominal muscles sympathize with these parts, so that bearing-down efforts are made, and the fundus of the womb is forced further down into the hollow ofthe sacrum, while the orifice is directed upward. Were this distention to happen at any other time than just when the uterus is of such a size, that being thrown back, it catches under the sacrum, and does not rise again, no harm could follow.—I last year attended, with Mr. Cheyne senior, a woman afflicted with obstruction of urine, who died. I after- wards opened the body, where the womb being enlarged by disease, had produced much the same effect as if it had been enlarged by pregnancy, viz. obstruction of the urethra ; for the body ofthe womb had fallen into the hollow ofthe sacrum, and had formed adhesions there with the rectum, while the orifice ofthe womb pressed forward upon the os pubis, so as to produce an obstruction of urine. The parts were otherwise diseased, but this was one cause of the obstinacy and fatal de- termination of the complaint. As we treat of those subjects only as connected with the urethra, we may observe, that sometimes the urethra takes a course not round behind the os pubis simply, nor straight up- wards, but curved backwards, so that the convexity of the ca- theter requires to be towards the sacrum, to allow the point to pass over the orifice of the womb, or perhaps the flexible, or the male catheter may be required. The effect of the wedging of the child's head in a tedious labour, is to elongate and compress the urethra in a very parti- cular manner. Many young men have felt the difficulty of in- troducing the catheter in this case. But it is a difficulty pro- ceeding generally from ignorance, or inattention. I have ne- ver seen a case in which the compression was so great as to pre- vent the passing ofthe catheter. But often practitioners forget the direction which the urethra necessarily takes, when the child's head has sunk into the pelvis. THK EXTERNAL PARTS OF GENERATION. 135 Third Plan ofthe Female Parts. Thus, when in the second stage of the labour, the child's head A, has sunk into the pelvis, the urethra C, is pressed be- twixt it and the os pubis D. The urine consequently collects in the bladder, and the bladder E, rises above the brim ofthe pelvis, and, I have found it stretching to the scorbiculus cordis. There is danger from the distention of the bladder, and the la- bour-pains cease. Now the young surgeon or accoucheur, in- troduces the catheter in the usual way, in the position F, of course he finds great difficulty, and gives pain in the attempts. But after inserting the point of the catheter, he must incline its handle much towards the perineum, as in the inclinations of the dotted lines G, so that the point may glide up in the direc- tion betwixt the child's head and the pelvis. Orificium vagina. This is also named orificium ex- ternum, in opposition to the uterine orifice. I notice it under the head of the external parts, because we have to speak of the parts which surround the orifice as the hymen. The orifice of the vagina of the human female is abridged by the hymen, which is a peculiar membrane. It is of a semi- 136 the external parts of generation. lunar form, and sometimes surrounds the lower part ofthe ori- fice ofthe vagina ;—commonly it surrounds only the lower half of the circle, though it would seem to vary considerably in shape, place, and strength. It has been found surrounding the whole circle of the orifice, leaving only a small hole in the cen- tre, or upper part; or it is described as perforated with lesser holes, allowing the evacuation of the menstrual blood. In other cases, it has been found a complete circle, preventing the evacuation of the menstrual blood. This is a fact which I do not dispute, for I know that the perforation for the evacuation ofthe menstrual blood is sometimes necessary. When I have seen the imperforated vagina in the child, it was not the hymen which closed the orifice, but an adhesion of its sides ; yet this adhesion, if it had come to be distended with the menstrual blood of several periods, would have presented the appearance of a tense membrane stretched across the orifice. Such a membrane as I have described, will occasionally be seen in the female parts ; but it has such an appearance as may easily be destroyed in the preparation ofthe parts, if the ana- tomist be inattentive or careless. It is neither a guard, nor is its existence a test of female chastity. Often in tender chil- dren there is no such thing to be seen ; while, on the other hand, it has been cut to admit of labour and delivery.* Either of these facts is sufficient proof of the idle notions entertained concerning this membrane. It has been a favourite topic in all ages, and in all situations. The savage, and the gentleman, make much the same enquiries on visiting a museum ; and such was the subject of Omai's speculations in the museum of Dr. Hunter. The caruncula myrtiformes—are small and irregular tumours at the back, or lower part of the external orifice; they are seated rather at the sides than exactly at the back part; they are generally supposed to be the ruins of the hymen, which being lacerated, shrink into two or three tumours on each side. Some have said, that these exist originally joined to- gether by a thin membrane, or delicate tissue of small vessels, the rupture of which causes an effusion of blood. They seem to be simply corrugations of the inner membrane, which serve as a provision for the dilatation ofthe parts ; and they accord- ingly disappear during the passing ofthe child's head. The fossa navicularis is a sinus, supposed to be of the shape of a boat, whence its name. It is formed betwixt the • I need not fay how unneceffary and improper fuch operations are. All rigidity, callofities, even tumours, and undoubtedly the hymen, will yield to that general re- laxation of all the parts, which takes place upon the commencement of labour. OP THE BLADDER OP URINE. ISf proper orifice ofthe vagina and the fourchette, or joining of the labiae at their lower edge. It is more conspicuous in young subjects. From the meeting of the labiae below, the Perineum com- mences : it includes that space fiom the frenum to the anus. CHAP. II. OF THE PARTS CONTAINED WITHIN THE FEMALE PELVIS. J. HESE parts are the bladder of urine, the vagina, the womb, the ovaria. We shall consider them under distinct sections. SECTION I. OF THE BLADDER OF URINE. As the coats ofthe bladder of urine in woman do not vary from those of the male bladder, we have under this head only to notice the peculiarities in its relative situation. It is seated behind the os pubis, and betwixt it and the womb ; and on its lower part it is attached to the vagina ; upon the neck ofthe bladder, or the beginning of the urethra, there is not a body like the prostate gland ; and, as we have seen, the urethra is short, wide, and straight, and simple in its use. Women are not subject to calculi, and the operation for the stone is rare in them ; for, as already observed, when the nucleus is formed, or when a stone slips down from the pelvis of the kidney, it passes from the bladder with much greater facility than in the male parts. The urethra of itself has been known to dilate so, as to allow very large stones to pass, or it has been artificially dilated. Indeed the old operation for li- thotomy, was rudely to dilate, or rather tear, the urethra, and the modern operation is simply to thrust the gorget along the Vol. IV. S 138 OF THE BLADDER OF URINE. grooved staff, so as to lay open the side of the urethra and neck of the bladder, by an incision above the vagina. Some- times nature has effected her own relief by the stone working Irom the neck of the bladder into the vagina. A woman had for a very long period suffered great distress, not only the ardor urinae, frequent desire to make urine, with the urine turbid and bloody, and with all the usual symptoms of stone violently aggravated ; but she was delicate and timor- ous, and concealed her distress until the urine had run for some time by the vagina. After she had been exhausted by long suffering, her friends insisted that she should allow an ex- amination, when a stone was found partly in the bladder, with one of the rough ends projecting into the vagina. The opening was enlarged, and the stone extracted. We must, in all cases, recollect the connection ofthe upper part ofthe vagina and orifice of the womb, with the back part of the bladder. We have seen its effect in producing re- troversio uteri. We must also attend to this connection, as tending to the displacement of the bladder in the procidentia uteri. The uterus sinking into the vagina, and the upper part of the vagina being at the same time reflected into the lower part, pulls down the bladder with it, and when (the disease in- creasing) the womb covered by the vagina comes to hang from the external parts, it has happened that the bladder has sunk down and lain upon the fore part of the tumour, but of course within the everted vagina. Fourth Plan. Section fhewing the effect of Procidentia on the Bladder. OF THE VAGINA, ETC. 139 Thus, by comparing this fourth plan with the first of the female pelvis, we may judge of the nature of this displace- ment ofthe womb, and its effects on the bladder of urine. A, the os pubis ; B, the sacrum ; C, the intestines come into the situation of the womb; D, the uterus fallen down, and carrying the vagina before it; E, the vagina still covering the womb, but the orifice of the womb appearing, which is generally distorted and irregular ; F, the bladder, which, from its attachment to the fore part of the vagina, has been dragged down, but is now within the vagina. In such displacement of the bladder, the urethra becomes distorted from its natural direction, there is an obstruction of urine, and the catheter is with great difficulty introduced. We shall, perhaps, have to turn the handle of the catheter in various directions after introducing the point, and by chance get it introduced at last. SECTION II. OF THE VAGINA ; OF ITS SHAPE, CONNECTIONS, ETC. The vagina is a tube stretching from the external orifice to the orifice of the womb. Its orifice is bounded below by the fourchette ; above by the arch of the pubes ; and directly over it, or sometimes within it, is the orifice of the urethra ; below, are the carunculae myrtiformes. It is surrounded by fasciculi of fibres, which are called the sphincter muscle. The canal ofthe vagina is of a conical form. At the outer orifice it is constricted by the sphincter muscle ; but it is wider within, and where it receives the orifice of the womb. It may be distended to almost any degree, but naturally its sides, by their own elasticity, or the contraction ofthe surrounding fibres, or the pressure ofthe surrounding parts, are in contact. In the natural state, the orifices of the vagina and womb, are but three or four inches distant, often only two ; and some- times, where there is a degree of relaxation, they are nearly in contact. In the first months of pregnancy, the orifice of the womb is kept down by the degree of difficulty the body of the womb has in shooting up from the brim ofthe pelvis. But the gravid uterus rising above the pelvis in the latter months, draws up the orifice ofthe womb, and stretches the vagina. The vagina bends gently round the pubes as it were, or fol- 140 OF THE VAGINA, ETC lows the axis of the pelvis ; and as the interior of two circles cut off by the same radii is the shorter, the vagina is longer behind than before. And thus (in this fifth plan) the fore part of the vagina A, is shortt r than the back part B. We may observe from this plan also, that the orifice ofthe womb C, projects as it were into the vagina, so that the finger touches the os tincae, and chiefly its anterior lip, without reaching the upper part ofthe vagina. The vagina takes its curve nearly in the centre ofthe pelvis ; it is of necessity attached by cellular substance to the rectum and bladder. The urethra, as we have said, opens above the orifice, and that canal is attached to the vagina in its whole length ; and the neck ofthe bladder is attached to the upper part. In consequence of this natural connection, disease of i the vagina sometimes throws the whole parts, the rectum, vagina, and bladder, into one fistulous ulcer. The vagina has three coats ; that is to say, it has the inner coat, or surface, a few muscular fibres, and around it a con- densation of the surrounding cellular membrane, which ma\ be-considered as the third coat. The internal, or villous coat, is a reflexure of the delicate covering of the external parts. It is of larger extent, or longer than the others; and is therefore tucked up into rugae, which run across the vagina. They are more remarkable on the fore and back part ofthe vagina; they are less in married Women, and considerably obliterated by repeated labours. To supply a viscous secretion for the defence of this surface, OF THE VAGINA, ETC. 141 mucous glands are numerously, but irregularly scattered over it, and they are particularly numerous at the orifice. The muscular coat is not very strong, nor are the fibres distinct, from which some have suspected their existence, alleging, that there is here only condensed cellular membrane, and that the contraction of the vagina is the effect of mere elasticity. I observe so great a profusion of venous vascularity, that I presume the vagina suffers an inflation of its coats, and consequently contraction from an afflux of blood to it. The muscular fibres are, however, as we have said, gathered into fasciculi near the orifice, so as to be distinctly visible. The firmness and stricture ofthe vagina support the womb; the dilatation ofthe vagina, the relaxation which old age, and frequent labours produce, occasion the falling down of the womb. It is a disease almost peculiar to those who have borne many children, to the old, weak, and relaxed, and to those who are subject to the fluor albus ; every flux from the womb, or discharge from the vagina, having a remarkable effect in relaxing the parts. This, from the nature of the parts, must be an increasing disease ; for no sooner has the womb fallen down into the va- gina, than it becomes a source of irritation, excites a bearing- down pain like tenesmus, an uneasy sensation, a desire to make urine, and an obstruction of urine ; all which is ex- plained by the connection of the parts. The womb lodging in the vagina dilates the orifice, and presses long on the peri- neum, at last it is entirely forced out, and the prolapsus uteri becomes the procidentia uteri: it is in truth a hernia of the womb. The third, and outer coat, as we have said, is formed of the cellular membrane, by which it is connected with the sur- rounding parts ; but the peritoneum comes down upon the upper part ofthe vagina. This is the reason why a portion of the intestine, when it slips down betwixt the vagina and rectum, forms a kind of hernial tumour in the vagina, and why the water of ascites has pushed down the back of the vagina, so as to make a bag capable of being punctured to draw off the water. For the greater space, however, the outer cellular coat of the vagina connects it with the urethra on the fore part, and with the rectum behind. From which close connection of parts, we see the consequence of the delay of the child's head in the second stage of labour, that the head lies violently distending, and compressing the parts, while the woman, ex- hausted by the previous stage, is unable to complete the deli- very. From violent inflammation, with a deficiency of secre- 142 OF THE WOMB. tion, there arises a cold and flabby state of the parts. When the woman is delivered, the parts have suffered so much, that they slough off; sometimes the urethra is laid open on the fore- part, and sometimes the rectum behind. SECTION III. OF THE WOMB. 6th Plan of the Female Parts. Uterus & Tubes. This little drawing will better explain the figure of the womb, when dissected from the vagina and surrounding membranes, than the usual necessary reference to a bottle a pear, or a powder-flask. As, indeed, it strictly resembles no familiar object that I know, we must, for the convenience of description, distinguish it into these parts :—The upper part, or fundus, which is that part above the going off of the Fallo- pian tubes. The body of the uterus, which is that larger part betwixt the fundus and the narrowing below ; the cer- vix, which is the narrow neck ; and the os tince, or orifice formed of the bulging lips, which project into the vagina, of course that part over which the inner membrane of the vagina is reflected. We distinguish also the two surfaces, for the womb is of a flattened form. The anterior surface of the of the womb. 143 body of the womb is convex, but the posterior surface is con- siderably more so, and even during gestation it keeps this re- lative figure. The whole size of the uterus is about three inches in length, and two in breadth, but there is a very great variety in this respect, from age, the effect of pregnancies, and other causes. When, in its usual situation and relations, the fundus is on a level with the brim of the pelvis, or a very little below it. In the fcetus, the womb is like the bladder, considerably above the brim of the pelvis ; but, in a few weeks the pelvis enlarg- ing, it sinks deeper, and soon assumes the same situation as in the adult. Fallopian tubes. From the lateral obtuse angles formed betwixt the fundus and the body of the uterus, the Fallopian tubes are continued. These tubes may almost be considered as a continuation of the uterus, did not we find them so very distinct in their substance. They are about three inches in length, take a tortuous course, and their extremities have an unequal fringed termination, which is called the fimbriae.* Their canal is very small towards the uterus, but enlarges, and is patulous towards the extremities. These canals are the i communications by which the ovum formed in the ovarium is ' carried down into the womb. Ligaments of the uterus. To support the uterus from sinking too deep into the pelvis, and to steady it, and direct it in its ascent during pregnancy, anatomists have generally as- signed as the use of the ligaments. But whatever good they may do in the latter operation, they are certainly unfit for the former. There are four ligaments of the uterus. The broad ligament of the uterus is formed of the peri- toneum ; for this membrane passing down before the rectum, and ascending again, and covering the neck, body, and fundus of the womb, descends on the fore part, so as to reach the va- gina before it rises over the bladder. Thus it invests the womb as it does the abdominal viscera. This investing of the womb with the peritoneum is indeed a provision for its becoming an abdominal viscus, for in pregnancy it rises out of the pelvis ; and, being distended before the bowels, assumes in every respect that relation to the peritoneum which they have. As the womb then is included betwixt the duplicature ofthe peritoneum, it is this peritoneal coat, which being continued off laterally, forms the broad ligament of the womb. This duplicature of the peritoneum being a thin expansion of it, • Morfus diaboli. 144 OF THE WOMB. has sometimes had the name of al^e vispertilionis : It is iu truth like a mesentery to the womb and Fallopian tubes, and serves equally to support and convey the vessels to them. The womb and the two ligaments make a complete partition running across the pelvis. From the side of the uterus, a little below, and before the going off of the Fallopian tubes, the round ligaments arise. I consider these ropes as ligaments, but they are totally unlike any common ligament. They seem intended to give the due inclination forward, and to direct the uterus in its ascent in pregnancy, and accordingly they are not merely condensed and unelastic cellular membrane ; but, on the contrary, they are composed of fibres, with an intermixture of blood-vessels, so that whilst they keep a degree of tension on the uterus, they yield and grow not only in length, but in thickness and strength, as the uterus ascends in the advanced pregnancy : they pass through the abdominal ring, and are attached to the cellular membrane of the top of the thigh. In the gravid uterus, both the broad and the round ligaments considerably alter their position, appearing to rise lower, and more forward from the womb than in the unimpregnated state. This is in consequence of the greater increase of the fundus of the womb, in proportion to the lower part of it. OF THE CAVITY OF THE UTERUS. Sixth Plan. The cavity of the uterus is properly confined to the fundus and body, and takes a triangular figure. In the cervix, it is more like a canal, and differs essentially from the proper ea- OF THE WOMB. 145 vity. A, the cavity of the uterus ; B, the continued cavity-, where it is very narrow towards the cervix. C, the canal of the cervix, where it has an enlargement like a sinus The Fallopian tubes going off from the cavity of the uterus.— These angles ofthe cavity admit no more than a hog's bristle. The third angle, towards the neck, is, of course, considerably larger. The proper triangular cavity ofthe uterus is lined with a peculiar soft and delicate membrane ; it is very vascular, and the vessels either open on the surface naturally, or bursting out from time to time, pour out the menstrual blood. The canal of the cervix shows a very different surface. We observe a prominent longitudinal line on the fore and back part of it, from which oblique and transverse rugae go out. The surface is firmer and callous, and less vascular. Betwixt the rugae there are lacunae, which throw out a mucilaginous fluid ; and towards the orifice we see these larger, and sometimes distinct glandular bodies. This peculiar shape of the cavity of the womb, and the hardness and small degree of vascularity of the lower part, is ofthe most essential importance. The upper part, the proper cavity of the womb, is prepared for the reception and imme- diate adhesion of the ovum, when it shall have descended through the Fallopian tube ; but the long callous cervix is provided, that there may be no adhesion to the lower part of the womb, and that the placenta may not form over the orifice of the womb, for if it should, the most dangerous kind of flooding takes place on the approach of labour from the open- ing ofthe orifice, and the tearing open ofthe adhesions of the placenta, before the child can be delivered. The length of the cervix, and the glandular structure of the orifice is also of much importance in sealing up the cavity of the womb after conception, that there may be no longer communication with the vagina ; for this purpose, a viscid tenacious mucus is poured out; but, on the approach of labour, with the soften- ing and relaxation of all the soft parts, this adhesion and gluing up ofthe orifice is dissolved, and a more fluid secretion is poured out. From the cavity ofthe womb the menstrual blood is dis- charged at certain periods, from the time of puberty to the approach of old age, when the system is no longer capable of giving nourishment to the foetus. We shall presently find, that the subserviency of menstruation merely to the prepara- tion of the surface of the womb for the reception of the fcetus, though it be a principal, is by no means the sole end of this periodical discharge. It was long disputed from what source the menstrual dis- Vol. IV. T 146 OF THE WOMB. charge flowed. Some affirmed, that it must flow from the va- gina, and not from the womb, because it flowed sometimes during gestation. This is a fact which cannot be denied. I have attended a patient who menstruated during the entire period, or to the eighth month ; and I have often observed ladies to menstruate at the first period after conception. On the other hand, we have every proof of the discharge being from the orifice of the womb. For instance, some have ob- served on dissection of the parts of women dying during the flow of menses, that blood was effused under the delicate membrane of the cavity of the womb. The vessels there have been observed particularly turgid, or the whole surface ofthe proper cavity, and especially the fundus, spotted with bloody effusions. More particular observation has shewn, not only the mark of blood poured out from the inner surface, but that the whole substance of the womb was become thick, soft, and vascular ;* and M. Littre affirms, that in the body of a woman who had died during menstruation, and with a con- ception in the Fallopian tube, he found a layer of red coagu- lated blood ; upon removing which, he saw a number of smalJ foramina which admitted bristles."!- But the best and least equivocal proof is, that which has been repeatedly observed in the inversion of the womb, when the inner surface has been turned out after labour, and has re- mained thus inverted, and protruding from the external parts, for then the menstrual blood has b-een seen to distil from the surface ofthe cavity of the uterus. OF THE BLOOD-VESSELS OF THE WOMB, These are four large arteries which supply the system of the womb, and four large veins which return the blood. The spermatic arteries come down from the aorta itself, or from the renal or capsular arteries. The spermatic arterv taking a waving direction, becomes tortuous in a most re- markable degree as it approaches the uterus, it is distributed to the Fallopian tube, the ovarium, but chiefly to the body and fundus of the uterus, where it forms remarkable anastamoses with the artery ofthe other side. The Lowi.R artery—the uterine artery, comes in ge- neral from the hypogastric artery, takes also a serpentine course, and is distributed to the vagina, and the lower part of * The authorities upon this fubject are Spigelias, Morgagni, M. Littre, Mauriceau, Winflow, Sympfon. + This might have been an early abortion, or perhaps the decidua which it i faid is fometimes formed at the menftrual period. OF THE WOMB. 147 the uterus, and inosculates largely with the other vessels, both in the uterus, and by particular branches on the side of the uterus. ... ,r In the first place, it appears, that this copious supply of ves- sels to the uterus, from four different sources, is a provision that the womb and secundines shall not by any accident of po- sition, or by the progress of labour, and the consequent com- pression of one or both the lower vessels, be deprived of their due supply of blood. Again, their tortuous forms give proof of their occasional greater activity, that they admit of a pecu- liar and local action during menstruation, and that the blood will move more languidly when the stimulus of the womb has ceased. It is also a provision for the growth and increase ot the womb, and the supply of nourishment to the ovum. And that an increased activity in a part must be supplied by a more tortuous form, as well as an enlargement of the calibre of the vessels, is in a particular manner illustrated by the change which- takes place in these vessels during pregnancy. For they be- come in a much more remarkable degree tortuous and en- larged. . The substance of the uterus is said to be spongy and com- pact, which, though it is a seeming contradiction in words, does vet really convey an idea of the effects of its copious intertex- ture of vessels. Some have said, (as Mauriceau,) that by pregnancy the womb is distended, and grows thinner: others, that it grows thicker, as Daventer : and others again, as Smel- lie assert, that it continues of its natural thickness. These as- sertions are none of them perfectly correct: for the womb is not distended by the growth of the fcetus and membranes, but prows with them. Again, that the substance of the womb grows in a remarkable degree, is true, but still when distended by the waters in the last months of pregnancy, its walls are thin- ner than in the unimpregnated state. Thus, when it has been cut in the living body, upon the approach of labour, in the Ce- sarean section, I have observed it, not more than a quarter ot an inch in thickness, even at the part to which the placenta adhe- red When I have dissected the womb after a tedious labour, the'waters discharged, but the head wedged in the pelvis, I have found it considerably thicker. And, lastly, in the full contraction ofthe womb, after expelling the fcetus and placen- ta (for example, in rupture of the womb, where the child and placenta had been forced amongst the bowels, and the woman soon after died,) I found the walls of the womb about three quarters of an inch in thickness. 148 OF the womb. SECTION IV. OF THE OVARIA. The ovaria are two oval bodies, which are suspended in the broad ligament behind, and a little below the Fallopian tubes : while they have an oval figure, they are somewhat flattened. By cutting out the ovaria, the animal loses the power of con- ceiving, and desire is extinguished ; they, therefore, bestow what is essential to generation upon the part ofthe female. In vague speculations on the subject of generation, they were sup- posed to prepare a female semen ! but more particular exami- nation demonstrates, that they consist of vesicles, which are ova; but how far incomplete, or in what essential circumstance requiring the approach ofthe male, is not determined. When we hold the section ofthe ovarium betwixt the eye and the light, we see a great many polluted vesicles ; and if we examine the ovarium of an animal killed in full health, and particularly in the season, we shall observe these ova to be in all varieties of states of preparation for impregnation. Some small and pellucid, and yet only discernible in the thick outer coat, by having a degree of greater transparency; others, which have taken a slight tinge of bloody colour from vessels striking into them ; and if the section be made after a minute injection, the vesicles will be seen coloured in the proportion of their maturity ; some without a speck of colour ; others tinged; one or two loaded with injection ; and some vascular, and particu- larly prominent. In very young girls, the substance of the ovarium is whitish, and very soft; the surrounding membrane is thick ; and the round corpuscules scarcely discernible ; and no irregularities, nor any of those bodies called corpora lutea, are to be seen on the surface. But as the girl advances in years, the little vesi- cles begin to appear, and when about ten years of age, or just before menstruation, the ovarium is full of ova of various sizes, and some of them more matured, and forming an eminence upon the surface. In the adult woman, the substance of the ovarium, which appeared as an uniform homogeneous mass in the fcetus, is become a cellular and vascular bed, giving nourish- ment to those numerous vessels or ova. Before impregnation can take place, there must be a certain state of preparation of the ovaria, without which the approach of the male effects no change in the uterine system. The lower animals having their seasons, and these seasons being a state of preparation for the male, impregnation follows the copulation with much certain- OF THE WOMB. 149 ty : but, in women, such a periodical revolution in their system, and instinctive desires, would but ill accord with that superio- rity in attributes of the mind, which distinguish us in the scale of beings. But women also suffer such an occasional excite- ment in the uterine system, though unaccompanied with de- sires, which preserves the womb in a state of preparation for the reception of the ovum, and the ovaria in a state of prepa- ration for impregnation. This is the effect of menstruation. of puberty. Authors have long, with many expressions of surprize, la- boured to assign a cause, or frame a theory for the explanation of those changes which we observe in woman at the age of pu- berty : and generally, in their theories, they have connected with these changes the monthly and periodical discharges of blood from the uterus, which commences with puberty. These theories have been founded in general, on principles remote from the laws of a living system. At this period of puberty, the whole frame is expanded into the fulness of feminine beau- ty ; the breasts rapidly increase, and are matured ; the parts of generation are enlarged ; the hair of the pubes grows, and the menses flow. In explanation of these changes, theoretical conjectures after this model have been entertained. " About this time the growth of the body begins considerably to dimi- nish, and the blood finding easy admittance into the completed viscera is prepared in greater quantity, the appetite being now very sharp in both sexes, a plethora consequently follows. In the male it vents itself frequently by the nose, from the exhaling vessels ofthe pituitary membrane being dilated, ckc. ; and now the semen first begins to be secreted, and the beard to grow. But, in the female, the same plethora finds a more easy vent downwards, being that way directed, partly by the weight of the blood itself to the uterine vessels, now much enlarged, of a soft fleecy fabric, seated in a loose hollow part, with a great deal of cellular fabric interspersed, which is very yielding and succulent, as we observe in the womb : for these causes, the vessels being easily distensible, the blood finds a more easy passage through the very soft fleecy exhaling vessels which open into the cavity of the uterus, as being there less resisted than in its return by the veins, or in taking a course through any other part; because, in females, we observe the arteries of the head are both smaller, in proportion, and of a more firm re- sisting texture. The return ofthe same is, therefore, more slow, both because the flexures of the arteries, from the in- 150 OF THE WOMB. creased afflux of the blood, become more serpentine and fit for retarding the blood's motion,* and likewise, because it now returns with difficulty through the veins. The blood is there- fore first collected in the vessels of the uterus ; next, it is ac- cumulated in the arteries of the loins, and the aorta itself, which urging on a new torrent of blood, augments the force so far as to discharge the red blood into the serous vessels, which at first transmit an increased quantity of warm mucus, after- wards a reddish coloured serum, and by suffering a greater dis- tention, they at last emit the red blood itself. The same greater impulse of blood determined to the genitals, drives out the hitherto latent hairs, increases the bulk of the clitoris, dilates the cavernous plexus of the vagina, and whets the female ap- petite to venery, ckc." We cannot give implicit trust to such speculation, we cannot believe in this plethora, produced by the.diminished growth of the limbs ; neither can we believe that congestion and plenitude is produced in the female system, from the deficiency of perspiration, from their more lax and weaker solids compared with man, from their indolent and sedentary life : for facts are in direct contradiction. The growth and completed function of parts at this particular age, is not to be explained by any theory so partially applicable ; during almost every period of life, there are similar changes taking place in some one part of the body. Parts lie dormant, and are stationary in their growth, which at a particular and stated age of the animal, enlarge and develope themselves by a new and invigorated action. Ob- serve how different the proportions of the foetus are from those of the adult. We see nature careful to perfect certain parts, as the head and liver, at an early period. We see during early childhood how the parts shoot out, and evolve in due propor- tion. We see parts which were large in the fcetus lose their preponderance : we see others, which served some purpose in the foetal system, gradually shrink and disappear, because they have no longer the stimulus to action in the circle of connec- tions which take place in the adult system. We find other parts, as the teeth, for example, lying long within the jaw, instead of proceeding with a gradual and continual enlarge- ment, suddenly rising at certain stated periods from their embryo state, and enlarging and pushing up through the gums, when it becomes fit that the child should take more solid food than the mother's milk. So the second set of teeth, in a more particular manner, lie quite stationary in their growth within " I have fhown that the tortuous arteries always form a provifion for the oc- :afional increafe of the action and acceleration of the blood. OF THE WOMB. 151 their little sacs, yet quickly, at stated periods, they increase, the enamel is formed, and they rise above the gum. There is an infinite number of such changes depending upon the same laws of the ceconomy, and not different from those which con- troul the growth, and direct the shape of parts. They depend upon certain laws of the constitution, which give an excite- ment to certain parts, at stated periods, and which no theory partially applicable will explain. There is a series m which the parts of an animal body are matured, and a succession in which the functions are brought to maturity: and in the female constitution, there are laws determining an action upon the womb and breasts, and all parts subservient to conception and the nourishment of a fcetus ; at that period when the woman is arrived at the age fit to take upon her the part of a mother. OF MENSTRUATION. Under this head, I shall confine myself to such a general view of the subject, as is necessarily connected with the pecu- liar functions we are now endeavouring to comprehend. Menstruation is a state of preparation for conception. When therefore, the menses flow at the natural periods, and in due'quantity, it is a sign that the woman may conceive, and that her system is fit for the support and nourishment of a child. It is a general affection of the system, which has a tendency to relieve itself by a topical action, by the excited action of the uterine system; and this excitement ot the uterine system is the end which nature is accomplishing. 1 o explain this, I may be allowed to take a short preliminary view : each particular organ or viscus, whilst it has its con- nections with the general system, is, in truth, a system within itself, having its peculiar functions, sympathies, and even vascular action, in a certain degree, independently. Were not this in some measure the case, we should see no local dis- ease or topical action ; and no vascular action could be tor a moment stationary and confined to one part. The body would, indeed, be then only one great hydraulic machine. But while the several parts have the property of being excited separately to an accelerated action, they are actuated by remote sympa- thies, and by these sympathies and relations, is the whole sys- tem in a great measure supported. . Before menstruation commences, there is a preceding indis- position, and symptoms indicating a constitutional affection And these complaints are usually more severe in the first, than in the subsequent periods. The general revolution m the sys- tem begins to accumulate its action towards the womb, and 152 OF THE WOMB. those symptoms usually accompanying uterine irritation, show how far it is affected, arid in a little time the menses flow. Now, I conceive, the flow of the menstrual blood, to be not the end which nature is here labouring to accomplish, but the means of allaying the excited state of the uterine system after the object is accomplished. It is not the discharge of a few ounces of blood which relieves the system ;#for drawing blood simply will not do it ; but it is the excited action ofthe Uterine system which relieves the general distress, and that topical action has full relief in the menstrual discharge. General and topical plethora are terms which have been of great service in explaining this periodical change in the female system, but the state of mere fulness, has little effect either on the constitu- tional or topical change. Even in the exhausted and debilitated state of the system, when menstruation ceases from the want of energy and power in the vascular system, still there remain the same laws governing the sympathies, and relations of the several parts; and although they are feebly and imperfectly excited, they give rise to accumulated distress at the period in which the menses should flow. There is more general distress at puberty, and when the menses first flow ; but afterwards, when the periodical action and discharge is established, there is little or no previous in- disposition. With regard to vicarious haemorrhagy from remote parts of the .body, some, whose opinion I greatly value, do not con- sider them as deviations of the menses. At all events, from what I have seen of such haemorrhagies (tumours, for exam- ple, discharging blood at the menstrual periods,) I would ob- serve, that there is an excitement, throbbing, and distention, previous to the discharge of blood, which confirms me in the notion of the necessity of a counter excitement and action, as well as the discharge of blood, being necessary to make a derivation from the uterine vessels. It is by dissection alone that we can form an established opinion regarding the final use of the periodical return of the menses. By dissection we come to the knowledge of the most essen- tial facts. In the first place it is found, that the ovaria, and their vessels, partaking of the general excitement of the spermatic arteries, are enlarged, full of blood, and with every sign of increased action. We find also, that the ovaria are matured and brought to pubulate, and almost to start from their investing membranes. Again, when we attend to the womb, we find, that these are marks of its whole vascular system being roused to action. It has become laxer in its texture, and there is a change similar to what takes place in OF THE WOMB. 153 the first stage of pregnancy, but less in degree. The vessels on the inner surface of the womb have been influenced by an action similar to inflammation, and it is asserted, that even the decidua is sometimes formed. Thus, while the ovaria are ripened to that degree of maturity, which prepares them for impregnation, the surface of the womb, and its whole vascular system, is preserved in a state of preparation for the adhesion of the ovum, when it shall have descended through the Fallopian tube. I conclude that in considering this subject of menstruation, the mere circumstance of the discharge of blood has been too much attended to, while these other more essential circumstances have been neglected. It is not easy to determine, says Haller, either in this, or in any other spontaneous haemorrhagy, from what kind of vessels the blood flows. From the circumstance of the haemorrhoidal discharge, which certainly is from veins, and from the lochia, which is generally supposed to be a discharge from the venous sinuses of the womb after delivery, we have the argument of analogy, that in menstruation also it is a venous discharge. This opinion is further confirmed from stagnant blood being found in the uterine veins of women dying during the flow of the menses, and orifices being observed larger than could well be supposed to be the extremities of arteries. I would say, that it is little probable that spontaneous hae- morrhagy proceeds from the rupture of the extreme arteries, because it is the activity of the arteries which causes the hae- morrhagy ; and because this activity is the exertion of a mus- cular force, and the exertion of a muscular fibre never is such as to tear the fibre itself. On the other hand, we observe that it is the necessary consequence of an increase of the action of arteries, that the corresponding veins dilate, and seem to suffer a force of distention proportioned to their increased activity. We must not forget that many are of opinion, that the men- strual blood flows from the exhaling arteries. This opinion must rest upon argument, and not facts, unless the assertion of Raauw be taken as proof, that he could distinguish their mouths; or that of Mebomius, who said he introduced bristles into them. That anatomists have introduced bristles into pores, or foramina, it would be ungracious to doubt, but that these were the orifices of exhaling arteries, is difficult to believe. I rather imagine, that there is a provision for this evacuation in pores, or foramina, in the extreme veins on the vascular inner surface of the womb. From the consideration of the cause of menstruation, as I have conceived it, from the symptoms which precede and ac- company it, and from the effect attributable to the menstrual Vol. IV. U 154 OF THE WOMB. action on the uterine system, we cannot consider it as a mere evacuation of blood, but rather as of the nature of a critical discharge relieving the symptoms wrhich preceded it. With regard to the opinion of its being a secretion, we must first know accurately what is meant by the term. If those who suppose the menstrual blood a secretion, mean only that the blood is occasionally changed by the action of the vessels ot the womb, I should willingly acquiesce in their opinion, for even during the bleeding from the arm by the lancet, or from a common wound, the blood is altered in the space of the few minutes during which it flows ; and before the final stopping of a common haemorrhagy, there is a change in the properties of the effused blood. When there is an unusual source of irritation in the womb, added to the natural and periodical excitement ofthe parts, the menses become more profuse, they last for a longer period, the time of their intermission is shortened, and, in the end, from some diseases of the womb, there is a perpetual oozing of blood, which debilitates the woman, and destroys her con- stitution, or there is sudden and profuse discharge with coagula. unlike the usual evacuation. OF THE CHANGE PRODUCED BY THE UNION OF THE SEXES. In considering those changes produced on the ovaria and womb by impregnation, we must have recourse to analogy in the first instance. By attending to the changes produced in vegetables, and the lower animals, we may be enabled to com- prehend some of the changes in the female organs consequent upon conception, and which we might not otherwise be enabled to understand. We see that vegetables propagate their branches in even respect like the parent trunk. We see in the autumn the bud lodged in the axilla of the leaf, and observe it pass through the winter in a kind of dormant state ; but when it is influenced by the returning heat of the spring, it shoots out to full ma- turity. This growth is a natural power of propagation, and increase, marked by no very peculiar circumstance, yet bearing a strong analogy to the production of the seed. In the formation of the fruit of the same tree, we see a more complicated provision for the propagation of the plant. We find that although the seed appears to be formed by the natural growth of the part like the bud, yet before it becomes prolific, and capable of growing, and arriving at maturity, it must be influenced by circumstances similar to the union ofthe sexes of animals ; that its power of reproduction depends OF THE WOMB. 155 upon the reciprocal action betwixt the parts of the same plant, or by the approximation of male and female plants. Between the formation, maturity, and impregnation of the seed of plants, and those of the ova of animals, there is a close analogy. The seed is formed and matured while at- tached to the parent plant; but the vessels of the plant having completed this operation, shrink from their connections with the seed, leaving it with its little system of vessels complete, and with a kind of imperfect life, which may be considered as analogous to a dormant state. This imperfect life, or perhaps a state merely capable of being excited into life and motion, continues for the winter season, or for a longer period. The flower of plants solicits the fluids to the seed, as the influence of the leaf cherishes the bud in the axilla. The pulp of the fruit is probably a provision of the same kind, or when it has fallen, to lay the foundation, by its decay, of a soil suited to the tender plant. In the seed itself, we have much to admire. We find it in- cased in a strong husk, or shell, which is in general provided with a porous part ready to imbibe the moisture of the ground. In the nut within the outer shell, there is a soft spongy sub- stance, which, receiving the moisture, swells and bursts up the shell, and relieves the seed. The kernel ofthe nut is then like a common seed, it has begun to vegetate, and these are the parts which form the system of its oeconomy. The principal part of the seed consists of albuminous matter for the supply of the nourishment to the embryo plant, so as to prolong its shoots, and to send down its roots into the earth. The little embryo plant lies complete in all its parts, betwixt the lobes of albuminous matter, in a state of torpor, or in which the opera- tion of the living principle is suspended. From the embryo plant there extends into the albuminous matter of the seed- vessels, or tubes, inactive, but ready on the supply of heat and moisture, to absorb the nutritious matter ofthe albumen, and minister to the increase of the embryo plant. Now the root of the little plant sprouts from the seed, and has a tendency to strike into the ground, and the bud rises to the surface towards the light, and the influence of the atmos- phere. We see in this instance, that the operation of the system of tubes of the embryo plant in the albumen was merely sus- pended, that upon the seed being put into the ground, the heat and moisture promote the germination, by driving the nutriti- ous matter of the albumens to the embryo plant. In the first stage of this change, the matter absorbed by the vessels of the albumen supply that nourishment, which afterwards is con- 156 OF THE WOMB. veyed from the root striking into the earth, and from the leaves absorbing from the atmosphere. And when the roots have struck into the earth, and the first leaves rise upon the surface, the lobes of the albumen are exhausted and fade, or rise up in form of leaves, still cherishing the tender plant. When we come accurately to examine the situation of the embryo in oviparous animals, wTe shall find the same provision for the nourishment and growth of the young animals, inde- pendent of external circumstances, nourishment prepared for it until it shall be enabled to gain strength to feed itself. The manner in which an egg is formed is this : The yolk, with its delicate membranes, are formed in the ovarium of the hen. The ovarium is placed on the back-bone, innumerable yolks are seen gradually formed, and successively increasing in size. When they are matured, they are of the full size we see them in the perfect egg ; they are surrounded with a deli- cate web of membranes, extremely vascular, which bursts when they are mature and impregnated, and then they fall into, or are grasped by the infundibulum, or what answers to the Fallopian tubes in woman and quadrupeds. While yet in the egg-bed, the cicatricula, or embryo, is seen to be included in its membranes, upon the surface, or in the membrane of the yolk ; as the yolk, and the imbibed cicatricula, passes through the uterus, the yolk, in a most curious way, has the addition of the other part of the egg. The uterus of a bird is not like that of other quadrupeds or viviparous animals, simply for the reception of the ovum ; but it is long and convoluted like the intestines. And the yolk, as it drops into the upper part of it, collects as it passes along the uterus, the white of the egg, which is a secretion from it. As it proceeds downwards, it receives the membranes of the white, and before it is ex- cluded, it is coated with the shell to preserve it from injury when it shall be dropt from the hen. In the fully formed and incubated egg this is the situation of the parts. Under the shell is a membrane which invests the whole parts, but leaves a space containing air in the greater end betwixt it and the shell. Within this membrane the glairy white of the egg is contained, and within the white or albuminous matter is the yolk. Under the membrane of the j'olk, there is a small spot of a lighter yellow than the yolk. This, upon examination is found to be a vesicle, and within it we see a lesser circle formed by an inner vesicle: this is cicatricula, and within this the rudiments of the chick are contained. We may ob- serve, that the yolk is specifically lighter than the white ; again, it is fixed, towards the two extremities of the egg to the albumen, or white, by the chalaza. These are like twisted OF THE WOMB. 157 cords, which arise from the yolk, and expand in the white, so that they take a pretty firm hold on its tenacious substance. These chalaza are not fixed to the yolk in its axis, but to the side, so that the buoyancy of the yolk keeps it revolving as the egg is turned, so as always to present the cicatricula to the upper part of the egg, in whatever way it is placed ; conse- quently it is always contiguous to the body of the hen, so as immediately to receive the influence of the maternal heat. By incubation, the principle of life in the chick and its mem- branes is roused, and the first perceptible change appears in little bloody streaks, which, running together, form a circle of vessels, and which are seen to terminate in the umbilicus of the chick. This vascular circle, the most beautiful appearance of any in the oeconomy of animals, ought to be particularly explained. In Mr. Hunter's book treating of the blood, there is a plate which represents the embryo of the chick in the incubated egg, at three different stages of its formation, beginning with the earliest visible appearance of distinct organization.—The pre- parations from which these figures are taken, form part of a complete series contained in Mr. Hunter's collection of com- parative anatomy.—They are meant to illustrate two positions laid down in his work, viz. that the blood is formed before the vessels, and when coagulated, the vessels appear to rise ; that when new vessels are produced in a part they are not always elongations from the original ones, but vessels newly formed, which afterwards open a communication with the original. This to me seems an idea founded on a very limited view of the state of the parts. We must recollect that this is not the formation of new parts or new vessels. The embryo is in that state of which I have endeavoured to convey an idea, by the term dormant; possessing that degree of life which is to be renewed by incubation, or artificial heat, but which will last a great length of time, and, like the germ in plants, be brought to vegetate only in particular circumstances. The tract of these vessels is laid in the original conformation of the embryo and surrounding membranes, they are now merely called into action, and we see only the effect of this action. We see red blood formed; we know that the redness of the blood is derived from the membranes, and matter which surround the embryo, and that it is conveyed to the chick or embryo. Be- fore we allow ourselves to conjecture what is the first motion in the circle of actions which now take place, we must consider whether it be not more likely that the first action of these ves- sels is an absorption ; that is, an absorption in the extremities of these vessels, or is there first, an action of the heart of the 158 OF THE WOMB. chick ?—We are left to this question, Is it probable that a change shall take place in the fluids which shall stimulate the vessels ? or shall the heat of incubation stimulate the vessels to .act upon the contained fluids? or, as seems most probable, does the incubation, at the same time, produce a change in the fluids, and stimulate the vessels to action ? To explain what I should rather conceive to take place, I shall describe the pro- bable series of actions. In common seed, the small germ of the plant has its vessels passing out into the lobes of the albumen to absorb the food, upon the existence of the peculiar circumstances necessary to its being stimulated to activity and growth. We have to ob- serve, that where the nut was attached in its husk to the tree, it has left a porous part; by this cribriform kind of plate the moisture ofthe earth enters ;—that dry scurfy substance which we observe on the inside ofthe shell, swells with the moisture which also penetrates the albumen or kernel—the moisture forming combination when the albumen prepares it for absorp- tion ; the vessels are, at the same time, excited, absorb, and thus nutritious fluids are conveyed to the germ—the nut splits by the swelling of the parts, and the corculum or bud sprouts up. We find then, that in this instance the grain, or nut, is brought into action by the fluids absorbed, forming new com- binations with the albumen or kernel, and the active exertion of the living powers, beginning by an operation in the fluids. In the same manner, I conceive, that the incubation of the egg causes an action first in the fluids, not in the solids (for these are solids according to the strictest signification of the term ; and strong membranes, as a little vinegar will show, when poured upon the albuminous substance of the tgQ.^) A change takes place in the fluids, there are new arrangements suiting them for absorption, by those circles of vessels which are laid on the original formation of the membrane. The fluids act as a stimulus to those vessels, whose alternate action and relaxation never cease until the termination of life. I con- ceive this explanation, which I have offered, to be more con- sonant with the great principles of physiology, and an exten- sive analogy of similar actions in the oeconomy, than that ex- planation of Mr. Hunter, which supposes the specks seen at the sides of the vessels, to be spots of coagulated blood, destined afterwards to become blood-vessels. For, I am apt to conceive, the red blood to be formed only after several rounds of the circulation, and to depend upon a more perfect assimilation than that first excited: and that Mr. Hunter is all along in this mistake, that he is supposing these vessels to be newly formed, which are laid in the constitution of the meni- OF THE WOMB. 159 branes surrounding the embryo, and which are now only called into action, and only become apparent when they convey red blood. In the system ofthe egg there are other circumstances wor-. thy of notice: as the chick grows by the absorption of the white, or albumen, the new combinations reduce to a lesser bulk the whole mass, which is within the shell, and now we perceive the use of the air cell, which enlarging, fills up this space. When the chick has escaped from the shell, the yolk of the egg is not exhausted, but it is found to be received into the belly of the chicken, and to have a conduit leading into the duodenum, by which it is poured into the intestinal canal. It is for some time a source of supply to the young animal until its strength is equal to the digestion of its appropriate food. And in this respect it is analogous to the suckling of viviparous animals. Let us now observe what analogy exists betwixt the genera- tion, or rather the birth and nourishment ofthe embryo ofthe viviparous animal, and those of the oviparous. As to the pre- cise effect which the approach ofthe male has upon the ovari- um ofthe female, whether by this union of the sexes, there is an actual addition to the ovum, or only an influence exerted on the parts already there, by the presence ofthe male semen, it seems almost needless to hope for an absolute decision. The resemblance of the offspring to both parents, would in- fluence us at once to conclude, that there must be a union of the parts from both sexes. But when we consider how much the peculiarities of individual animals depend upon certain pe- culiarities of action ; how the constitutional predispositions must depend on the same peculiarities in the action of parts, since the doctrine of absorption teaches us, that of actual sub- stance nothing is permanent, but all suffers an incessant revolu- tion and change, of which nothing can remain but certain pe- culiarities of action ; we may then come to allow, that the male semen merely influences the state of the parts already formed, and does not bestow an actual substance. In the speculations on the subject of generation, facts and observations have been so very rarely attended to, that those which have been offered seem to have had a preponderance much beyond their real value. Thus the microscopical de- monstration of animalculae swimming in the semen ofthe male, has given birth to an idea that they were homunculi, which be- ing introduced into the proper nidus of the female, grew up to man's estate. Though, where all is conjecture, and, perhaps, as no better explanation is to be offered, it may seem improper so directly to contradict any theory, still I must say, that this is, 160 OF THE WOMB. in my mind, the height of absurdity. To suppose an animal secreted along with the seminal fluid from ihe testicle of the male (and which, in all probability, is the production of stag- nation and putridity,) to swim and be nourished in the male semen, and yet to hold that on being introduced into the ovaria, it changes from an active animal into an impalpable gelatinous- like mass, and, after a series of changes, grows at last to the maturity of a human being, is altogether beyond my compre- hension. The experiments made by the ingenious Dr. Heighton, throw considerable light upon these delusive speculations re- garding the impregnation of the female. He found by experi- ments on rabbits, that upon cutting the Fallopian tubes, forty- eight hours after the coitus, the impregnation was equally ob- structed as when he had cut them previous to admitting the male ; it would appear that in these animals impregnation is by no means the instantaneous effect of the union of the male and female, but that it requires at least fifty hours ; for, when Dr. Heighton cut the Fallopian tubes at that period, it did not pre- vent impregnation. Dr. Heighton proves, that the generative process is not an instantaneous effect, as we should very natu- rally suppose, but an operation requiring time. That the se- men does not reach the ovaria during, or immediately after the coitus, is sufficiently evident; and it is still more so, that the ovum is impregnated while in the ovarium, and not upon its descent into the womb, which is proved from the foetus some- times remaining in the ovarium, or tubes, and growing to ma- turity. Dr. Heighton supposes the semen only to affect the vagina and uterus, and that a consent of parts, or sympathy, is communicated along the tubes and ovary to the ovum; and that neither the semen, nor the aura seminalis reaches the ova- ria. When we look abroad for analogies, however, and find the semen of some animals, as fishes, merely thrown out upon the already evacuated spawn, we cannot readily acquiesce in this opinion of the mere sympathy of the female parts calling the young animal into life. Leaving this subject, we have to observe, that previous to impregnation there is a ripeness and prominence of some of the ova, that by coition the Fallopian tubes do not instantly grasp, impregnate, and cause the bursting of the ovum from the ovarium ; but there is an action commenced which gradu- ally brings about this change. Whilst the ovary is thus affect- ed, the tubes are preparing for their action of embracing the ovum, there is an increased turgescence in their vessels, and an enlargement and swelling ofthe fimbriated extremity. When OF THE WOMB. 161 thus prepared, it approaches the ovarium, grasps, and receives the ovum, and by a peristaltic motion, probably very slow and gradual, the ovum is conveyed into the cavity of the uterus. OF THE OVUM, AND ITS CONNECTIONS WITH THE UTERUS IN THE EARLY MONTHS OF PREGNANCY. The ovum, when it has descended into the uterus, and is perfect in its structure, is a soft oval mass, fringed with vessels, and composed of membranes containing the early fcetus. When opened, or dissected, it presents three cavities, or we observe the foetus to be surrounded with three distinct mem- branes. 1. Decidua, or tunica filamentosa, false chorion, or spongy chorion. 2. The chorion. 3. The amnios. Of these coats, the outer one is formed by the womb, the others consti- tute the ovum as it has descended from the ovarium. We shall, in the first place, attend to the original membranes and general constitution of the ovum, and then to the deciduous Covering wrhich it receives in the womb. Plan ofthe Membranes. A, The Fcetus. B, The Amnios. C, The Chorion. D, The Vesicula Alba. Amnion. The amnion is the vesicle which immediately in- volves the fcetus. It is a very thin and pellucid membrane in the early stage of pregnancy, but it acquires considerable thick- ness and strength in the latter months. The amnion contains a thin watery fluid in which the fcetus is suspended. In the abortion ofthe early months, we find the quantity of this fluid very great in proportion to the whole Vol. IV. X 162 OF THE WOMB. ovum, and this forms a defence to the delicate, and almost ge- latinous substance ofthe fcetus, while it is a provision also for the regular presentation of the head of the child, for now the foetus being suspended in this fluid, and hanging by the umbili- cus, and the head and upper part of the body greatly prepon- derating, it takes that position with the head presenting to the orifice ofthe womb which is necessary to natural and safe la- bour, the fcetus being prevented from shifting in the latter months by the closer embracing ofthe child by th:i uterus. Chorion. The chorion is the second involving membrane ofthe fcetus ; on the inside it is smooth, and betwixt it and the amnion a gelatinous fluid is interposed. In the early months it is much stronger than the amnios, but in the advanced stage it has come in contact with the amnios, no fluid being betwixt them. And in proportion as the amnios gains strength to be of essential service in dilating the orifice of the womb during labour, the chorion has relatively become very thin and weak. On the outside the chorion is shaggy and vascular, and consti- tutes those minute extremities of the vascular system of the ovum, which attach to the surface of the womb, or rather to the flocculent membrane which it throws out. Thl umbilical chord. When we can first discern the fcetus, it is merely like an opaque oval bidy of the size of a common fly, and closely attached to the amnion ; but, by de- grees, it recedes from it, and then we perceive that it is attach- ed by the umbilical chord, which consists ofthe trunk ofthe ves- sels going out from the foetus, and which distributed upon the chorion receive the supplies from the maternal system. Now we perceive that the foetal system which descends from the ovarium, is not merely a foetus or embryo, but that this em- bryo, besides a system of vessels within its own body, is sur- rounded completely with membranes, and that from the vascu- lar system of the embryo, there go out vessels, which being mi- nutely distributed to the outer vesicle, or membrane, and actu- ated by the same heart which circulates the blood through it, our little corporal system prepares for imbibing the due nour- ishment from the uterus. Vesicula alba. The vesicula alba, or umbilicalis, is a little vesicle which lies betwixt the chorion and amnion ; it con- tains a white fluid ; it is connected with the navel or chord, by an artery and vein. Very little has been offered as explanatory of its use, it has been considered as similar to the alantois of quadrupeds, and having a connection with the urachus ; but it has no communication with the bladder, and soon disappears. Whereas, if it had been for receiving the secretion of urine, it would have been prepared for the more mature state ofthe fcetus. OF THE WOMB. 163 I conceive it not to be improbable, that it is a provision of supply for the embryo, previous to its perfect attachment to the uterine system, and during its descent into the womb, perhaps similar to the albumen of oviparous animals, but which, after the perfect establishment of the connection betwixt the foetal and maternal system, shrinks and disappears, as being no lon- ger necessary. OF THE ADDITIONAL MEMBRANES WHICH THE OVUM RE- CEIVES FROM THE UTERUS. While the ovum is taking the changes consequent upon impregnation, the womb partaking of the general sympathy which prevails over the whole uterine system, takes a change adapting it for its reception. The first appearance of action is marked by a greater activity, of the vessels, a swelling andsoft- ness of its substance. While on the inner surface there is an exudation which being converted into a spongy membrane, is peculiarly adapted for the reception and adhesion of the ragged and vascular surface ofthe ovum. In this plan we shall be able to observe the relations and in- flections ofthe uterine membranes or decidua, as seen and de- 164 OF THE WOMB. scribed by Dr. Hunter, and of their correctness, my observa- tions in dissection leave no doubt in my mind. AA, The uterus in outline; B, the amnion with the foetus ; C, the chorion. Now it is observed, upon a careful examination of an abortion ofthe early months, that besides the chorion and amnion, there is a spongy membrane of two distinct lamina which invests the chorion. The outermost of these is found to surround the whole ovum, even investing that part which has become the placenta by the accumulation of vessels. This outer membrane then may be represented by the line DD. It is represented as adhering to the surface of the womb, as it must do in fact. We observe again, that it is perforated where the Fallopian tube enters the womb, that at this part it is not formed ; so that, according to Dr. Hunter, and the pre- parations which I possess, these tubes open into its inside. Upon dissecting up the outer lamina of the decidua, we find that where the placenta commences, it is reflected over the surface ofthe ovum and the shaggy chorion of the ovum, so as to be represented by the letters EE. We shall now understand the distinction betwixt the Decidua Vera DD, and the De- cidua Refiexa EE. It would appear that this membrane is either completely formed, or at least the fluid which is to form it, is thrown out previous to the descent ofthe ovum ; indeed, so intimate is the sympathy betwixt the whole uterine system, that this mem- brane is formed in those cases where the ovum does not de- scend, but constitutes the extra uterine conception. Cavity ofthe Uterus. Dr. Hunter supposed, that the ovum passed into the cavit ofthe uterus whilst the coagulable lymph was pouring out by the arteries of the uterus, and that it was thus immersed in, and surrounded by the decidua, for he could not conceive that OF THE WOMB. 165 it could gain admission betwixt the lamina of the membrane already formed. I should conceive that the ovum A, upon its descent gets in- tangled behind the deciduous membrane B, by which means the ovum is not left loose in the cavity of the womb, but is soon attached and surrounded with a membrane, or vascular web, from which it can immediately draw supplies, and by this provision also its adhesion to the superior part of the uterus is insured. But as the same action of the uterus con- tinues, and, as we must naturally suppose, be rather occa- sioned by the presence ofthe ovum in its cavity, the surface of the uterus at A continues to throw out a coagulable matter which surrounds that part of the ovum, so that this will im- mediately become its situation. A, The Decidua Vera, formed before the descent of the ovum. B, the Decidua Refiexa, formed by the ovum getting behind it, and pushing it down. C, the efflorescence which continued to be poured out, surrounds the upper part of the ovum, and which, from its more immediate supply from the uterus, will in time form the sole support of the fcetus, viz. the uterine portion of the placenta. Of the placenta, and of the nutrition of the fcetus. Wh en the ovum first descends into the uterus, the fleecy surface of the chorion establishes a universal adhesion, but no sooner is the attachment ofthe ovum established, than the vessels of the fcetus which are universally distributed over its surface, begin to accumulate to that point from which the more abundant supply is obtained. Thus, from the universal adhe- sion the vessels of the foetus are massed and accumulated to- 166 OF THE WOMB. gether, so as to form a thick cake or placenta. This takes place upon the same principle that the roots of a plant stretch towards the soil best suited to it, or the branches and leaves of a plant grow and spread towards the light. The placenta is destined to adhere to the fundus of the womb, and there we observe the accumulation of the large vessels of the womb, it being equidistant from the several sources of blood ; and to this point is the tendency of the vessels of the chorion so great, that we sometimes see the vessels of the chord running three or four inches upon the membranes before they reach the placenta, evidently shewing that the point to which the umbili- cal chord had been originally attached, was not opposite to the more vascular part of the womb ; but that the vessels had to stretch and elongate some way from the insertion before they accumulate in form of the placenta, towards that part of the uterus where there was the greater vascularity. But the formation of the placenta on the fundus of the womb is not constant, although there are many provisions for ensuring attachment there. But when it does form low in the womb, or on the orifice itself, we then perceive the reason of nature's solicitous care in preventing it; for it occasions the most dangerous floodings from the placenta presenting on the approach of labour, and its connections being necessarily torn up previous to the delivery of the child. The placenta of the advanced stage of gestation is a mass formed partly by the accumulations of the vessels of the fcetus (the trunk of which is the umbilical chord,) and partly of a vascular and cellular portion formed by the uterus. On the surface attached to the womb, the placenta exhibits deep and irregular fissures which divide it into lobes ; but on the inner surface is smooth from the investing membranes, but raised into irregularities by the numerous and tortuous ramifications of the umbilical vessels. When rudely torn or cut into, it ap- pears to be a spongy substance, formed in a great part of an irregular tissue of vessels. In the human subject we find, that the maternal part of the placenta is thrown off with the other secundines, and does not separate from the foetal part of it. While, in other viviparous animals, the monkey excepted, the filamentous extremities of the foetal vessels separate from the glandular mass formed by the maternal vessels of the uterus. The placenta ry vessels of the foetus never touch the surface of the womb, but communicate with the maternal system through the vessels of the womb, which pierce the deciduous membrane. Still the question of the precise manner in which the vessels of the fcetus communicate with those of the mother OF THE WOMB. 167 remains undetermined. I conceive that in the early stage the deciduous membrane being thrown out by the action of the uterine vessels, those of the chorion stretch into it, and absorb the nourishment. The decidua is a vascular membrane, but it has, at the same time, a peculiar spongy texture. This spongy, or reticulated structure of lamina of the decidua ceases where the placenta is affixed. When we carefully dissect up the decidua to the margin of the placenta, it is found to be more rigid, white, firm, and thick.* When we examine the out- side of an entire ovum, we observe that at the place covering the placenta, it is corrugated and full of irregular eminences like the convolutions of the brain, and among those irregu- larities many small convoluted arteries may be discerned, with spots of extravasation and the flat mouths of veins. Upon dissecting up this maternal part of the placenta, we find it to form the firmest part of it ; and by the difference of colour, as well as by the possibility of tearing it up, or dissecting from the mass of vessels of the chorion, we recognize it as the decidua. This union, however, betwixt the maternal and foetal parts of the placenta is intimate, and it is impossible to determine by dissection with the knife, whether there be inos- culations betwixt the maternal and foetal vessels, or whether the nourishment of the foetus is by absorption, nor can we dis- tinguish in the first months the cellular intertexture which may be observed in the placenta of the full time, as described by Mr. Hunter. In explanation of this part of our subject, I have purposely dissected, and made drawings of the ovum in several stages. ' This point of anatomy relating to the decidua, is particularly explained in Plates VI. and VII. to which I refer the reader. OF THE LIQUOR AMNII, AS CONDUCING TO THE NOURISH- MENT OF THE FCETUS. Some physiologists observing the strict analogy, which exists between the function of the placenta and the lungs of breath- ing animals, have conceived, that the liquor amnii is the source of nourishment, and that it is taken into the stomach. I be- lieve they have conceived some analogy to exist betwixt the al- bumen of the egg and the liquor amnii, which in their minds has strengthened this opinion. But there is here no analogy ; we have seen, that the embryo of oviparous animals being formed with the yolk in the egg-bed or ovarium, descends into * l fpeak after diffecting the ovum of the third month. 168 OF THE WOMB. the uterus, and there receives the addition of the albumen or white. On the other hand, we find that the ovum of vivipar- ous animals is formed in the ovarium ; and that the liquor amnii being within the membranes of the ovum, must be the production of the foetal system. Further, when the ovum has descended into the womb, and grown to some maturity, we see that there is no connection by vessels betwixt the foetus and mother but through the placenta ; that the liquor amnii is within the involving membranes of the fcetus, and that conse- quently it must be thrown out by the vessels of the foetal sys- tem. Thus, to suppose the fcetus to be fed by the liquor amnii, would be to suppose it to draw resources from its own system, and that the vessels poured out a fluid, which is after- wards to be taken into the stomach.* But without adducing arguments, it is sufficient to say, that foetuses have been brought forth, monstrous in their conformation, and without mouths yet well grown. OF THE PLACENTA AS THE SOURCE OR NOURISHMENT TO the fqstus. When we consider the mere speck of the em- bryo in the first weeks, we see that it can have no other source of nourishment than through the extreme vessels of the chorion, connected with the short umbilical chord ; and we may be convinced also, that in its progress to maturity, when the general connections of the chorion cease, and the placenta is formed, the sole supply is through its vessels. Regarding the manner of the communication betwixt the vessels of the mother and child there are many opinions. The simplest ex- planation, but the furthest from the truth is, that the arteries of the womb are continued into the veins of the foetal portion of the placenta. That on the other hand, the arteries of the foetal system are continued into, or inosculate with the veins of the womb ; and that thus, the blood of the mother's system is carried by direct inosculation. A little investigation will con* vince us, that this is a very unlikely conjecture. We see the embryo surrounded with its vessels, and forming a complete system within itself, descend into the womb. We see that the attachment betwixt the surface ofthe ovum and the womb, de- pends on a reciprocal action betwixt them; and when the fcetus is feeble, or diseased, or when it dies, the uterus immediately separates from it, as from a dead part, and there is an abortion. Again, it is not natural to suppose, that the circulating fluids of the adult are calculated for the circulation in the embryo, or * A greater abfurdity than that of which a foreign author is guilty cannot bf imagined, becaufe the liquor amnii, or fome fluid, is found in the trachea, he fur pofes that the fcetus refpires, atid receives oxigenation from the liquor amnii. OF THE WOMB. 16* that the blood ofthe adult is fit for the circulation of the fcetus. When we inject the vessels of the foetus, we find the veins and arteries of the umbilical chord to inosculate freely with each other, and the fluid passes from the arteries to the veins with little extravasation or escape of fluid, and such only as may be supposed to pass from torn vessels. Again, the bleeding of the child does not draw from the maternal system; for ex- ample, when the accoucheur has to perform trie operation of embryulcia, and when the arteries of the brain pour out their blood, the woman does not suffer, nor is there any danger of haemorrhagy from the chord after the delivery of the child. Again, what does the analogy of other animals show us ? We may observe, in the first place, that probably on account of the peculiar form of the womb of woman, and in these cir- cumstances to guard her from danger of haemorrhagy during delivery, it is necessary that the placenta should be accumulated towards the fundus of the womb. Now, to allow less danger of the separation of the secundines from the womb, and con- sequent abortion, there follows a necessity for the human pla- centa being attached in a particular manner ; and in place of the maternal part of the placenta remaining with the womb, as in other animals, the whole mass separates on the delivery of the child. The necessity- for this firmer attachment of the human placenta, causes the connection betwixt the foetal and the maternal portions to be very intimate, and the manner of the vascular connection by no means easily demonstrated. In other animals, however, for example in those which have the small and numerous placenta, or cotylidones, the foetal and maternal portions of the placenta separate easily ; the ma- ternal part being a prominent vascular bed, which is a part of the womb, and is not deciduous. Here we find, that the glandular-like portion which belongs to the womb may be minutely injected, and no particle of colour pass into the fcetal part; and again injection shows the foetal portion to be merelv composed of the fleecy extremities of vessels, which, how- ever minutely injected, do not show any inosculations with the maternal vessels ; in short, here the connection betwixt the extremities of the two systems is so very loose, and the fila- ments so minute, and almost like an impalpable mucus, that we can imagine no other kind of connection than that the ex- tremities of the umbilical vessels take up by absorption the nutritious matter necessary for the system of the child, and that this is secreted by the vessels of the womb. Investigation in every department of natural history shows a similarity, and a simplicity in the operations of nature. Comparative anatomv mav be brought with much advantage Vol. IV. ' V iro OF THE WOMB. in illustration of the very obscure laws which guide the func- tions of the parts of generation. When we turn our attention to the egg, we find, in the first place, that the vascular system is complete within itself, and requires no permanent connec- tion with the maternal system to invigorate its action. We find that the artery which passes out of the umbilical chord of the chick, and which is distributed to the membranes of the white, pulsates strongly, and carries venous coloured blood. We find the returning vein carrying arterial coloured blood. We find then that these vessels must have a double function, they imbibe the nourishment from the white, and convey it to the increase ofthe chick ; and they at the same time, perform an action similar to that of the pulmonary vessels of the adult, seeing that thev carry out dark-coloured blood, and convey it back to the chick, of a bright vermilion colour. Now, I do not conceive, that this change upon the blood is performed by the communication with the atmosphere through the shell, for I see no distinction in the colour of the vessels, which are con- tiguous to the membrane of the shell, and those which are re- moved from it by the expanding of the air-cell. Further we find, that there is an intermediate kind of generation in fishes which are oviparous, but retain the egg within their womb, until the foelus is matured ; here no communication with the air or water can be allowed. Since we see that the chick in ovo is capable of ministering in every essential particular to its own increase, wherefore should we suppose that the fcetus of viviparous animals has any other more particular connection with the womb of the mo- ther ?—The difference is, in my mind, this simply ; the ovum of the oviparous animals descending through the convoluted and intestinal-like womb of the hen, accumulates a quantity of matter around it, which serves everv purpose of nutrition when the embryo shall be finally separated from the maternal system j but in the viviparous animals the ovum descending into the womb remains there, and has an incessant supply of nutritious fluid, secreted from the vessels of the womb, as k is required bv the appetencv of the foetal system. As in tht egg, the membranes surrounding the white have the same effect upon the blood, which is afterwards produced by ths lungs; so has the placenta of viviparous animals the double function ot supplying nourishment, and the oxigenation of their blood. The umbilical vein carries back pure arterial blood, and the common opinion is, that the blood ofthe fcetus coming in contact with the blood of the maternal system, re- ceives the principle from it, which bestows this quantity oi colour, with other necessary qualities, of which this of colour OF THE WOMB. 171 is but the sign to our observation. It is not necessary to this change on the foetal blood, that it should come in immediate contact with the maternal blood, for it is possible, nay probable, that the matter thrown out by the maternal vessels, whilst it is nutritious, has also in it, in a condensed, and not a gaseous form, that which is essential to the change of the blood of the fcetus from the modena colour to bright vermilion. OF THE EXTRA UTERINE CONCEPTION. We find some curious facts relating to the action and sym- pathy amongst the parts of generation, proved by the cases of extra uterine conception. When nature*, balked and inter- rupted in her usual course of operation, shows unusual resour- ces, it would appear, that the ovum, after impregnation, has in some cases remained attached to its original seat in the ovari- um, perhaps owing to some want of due sympathy and synchro- nous action of the Fallopian tubes, which should grasp and receive the ovum. In other instances the ovum has been re- ceived into the Fallopian tubes, but either from a want of suffi- cient dilatation and action in them, they have not been able to propel it forward, or the ovum taking upon it that action which is destined to form its connections with the uterus, adheres, and is enlarged in the tube, so that it cannot be conveyed down in- to the womb. But the most curious instance ofthe extra uterine conception is, where after impregnation the ovum has dropt from the ova- rium, and lies in the cavity of the abdomen amongst the visce- ra. Here also the vessels of the fleecy chorion spread, and attach themselves to the surface of the viscera. These instances of deviation from the natural action of the parts, after conception, prove to us, I think, that from the mo- ment of impregnation there is a principle of life and activity in the system of vessels of the ovum, and that at a stated period this action becomes such, that the efflorescent vessels of the surface of the ovum, attach themselves to whatever vascular surface they are in contact with. Further, it seems to shew, that in the womb, and in the deciduous membrane which it prepares for the reception ofthe ovum, there is nothing very particularly necessary, and that any vascular surface will take upon it the same changes, and being excited probably to some peculiarity of action, will in every thing essential supply the growth and nourishment ofthe ovum and fcetus. It shows us how far the action previous and consequent to impregnation is a universal and sympathetic excitement ot the uterine system ; that the decidua is formed in the cavity of th<° 172 OF THE WOMB. womb, although the ovum does not descend. This points out to us how careful nature is, that there shall be a reciprocal ac- tion in the ovum and womb, so as to ensure the adhesion ofthe ovum, and the ready supply of a proper nidus for it, when it shull have descended into the cavity ofthe womb. It informs us, that the uterus is a spongy and vascular bed, having pecu- liar sympathies which actuate its vessels, and a form of vessels adapted to quick acceleration of action so as to grow, enlarge, and supply the secundines with nourishment. It is not, however, in the mere adhesion and supply afforded to the foetus, that the peculiar adaptation of the womb for the reception ofthe fcetus is shown, but in the provision for the de- livery ofthe child at a regular and stated period. For, it is a curious fact, that in the case of extra-uterine fcetus, on the ex- piration of the nine months, the uterus takes upon it that ac- tion, and that excitement of its muscularity which is destined to expel the foetus. Accordingly we find, that at the usual time of utero-gestation, there are pains excited, and flooding, with the discharge ofthe decidua from the womb, although it contains no foetus. Nay, further it would appear from the rf suit of several cases, that at the expiration ofthe natural term of utero-gestation, the foetus indicates that it is governed by prescribed laws, which render a change necessary, and show that its system is no lon- ger fit to be supplied through the placentary vessels, and as in the situation of extra-uterine foetus this change cannot take place, it dies and becomes with its secundines, as a load of fo- reign or dead matter in the belly. This event is generally fol- lowed by the death ofthe mother, though sometimes an abscess has opened and discharged the foetus, or after much suffering, the bones have been discharged by stool, with much matter and colliquative diarrhoea. Of the womb at the full period of gestation and of delivery. To complete this view of the female parts of generation, it remains only to speak of the state ofthe parts at the full term of nine months, and to observe the process of a natural deli- very. The rapid increase of size ofthe pregnant womb in the short space of nine months, is perhaps the most surprising phenomenon ofthe whole animal ceconomy, it shows the pow- er of a peculiar excitement in calling into action a partial and local system of vessels. This state of pregnancy is the furthest from a state of distention, in so much, that it is observed th** OF THE WOMB. 173 womb feels peculiarly* soft on impregnation, and as if but im- perfectly filled by the ovum. This soft state is a sign of vas- cular action. We may often observe in the discussion of a tu- mour, that before any change.takes place, it swells and becomes soft, and this even where the tumour is about to be absorbed. The fundus ofthe uterus is the part first enlarged ; and af- terwards the inferior parts ; at length the cervix is obliterated, and the uterus, which was originally pyriform, becomes nearly oval, and the distention, as we have remarked, is greatest on the back part of the womb. In the first months the uterus sinks " lower in the pelvis, they say, from its weight, but the specific weight of the uterus is not increased, and on that account it should not sink deeper ; it is, perhaps, rather from its enlarge- ment, and the difficulty with which the fundus makes its way among the viscera in the brim of the pelvis. Having descend- ed considerably, the os tincae projects further into the vagina, but the fundus continuing to enlarge, at last emerges from the circle ofthe bones, and then from the conical form ofthe ute- rus, it sometimes rises suddenly out ofthe pelvis ; now the va- gina will be found elongated, and the os tincae removed from . the point of the finger. Now the ligaments of the womb direct it forward, and it rises close upon the abdominal paries, and before the bowels ; in the first pregnancy it rises almost directly up ; in subsequent pregnancies from the greater relaxation of the integuments and the abdominal muscles, it is allowed to fall more forward ; about the fourth month of pregnancy, the womb may be felt in ' the abdomen, and rising out of the pelvis ; in the fifth month the fundus is about half-way betwixt the pubes and navel; in the seventh, it is about half-way betwixt the navel and scrobi- culus chordis ; in the eighth, it is at its highest, and towards) the end of the ninth month, it rather subsides. Finally, im- mediately before labour it descends remarkably, and shifts into the middle of the pelvis, so as fairly to present the orifice of the womb. The muscularity of the uterus is increasing from the first moment of pregnancy. As the uterus increases in thickness and is distended, the muscular fibres become more distinct, and their power of contraction greater; but what is very particular is the very great muscular efforts made by the womb during labour by these fibres, which have not till that time felt the sti- mulus to action, or been allowed to contract. When the period for the approach of labour is arrived, the nature of that viscid secretion which seals up the orifice ofthe womb is altered, it loses its viscidity, and all the parts are re- laxed and prepared for the transmission ofthe head; even 174 OF THE WOMB. those rigidities, strictures, or callosities of whatever kind, which would seem to promise an absolute obstruction to the passage of the child, yield and relax previous to labour. The action of the womb is at first feeble, as might be expected, and accoucheurs have marked these stages of a natural labour. 1st. The womb has suffered no diminution of its size ; the membranes are entire, and, of course, the contractions of the womb are feeble, because before it is allowed to make some contraction its efforts are not strong. This is a provision for the first stage of labour being slow ; by and b\ the orifice di- lating, the membranes with the waters are f It protruding. The membranes and water is as a soft conical cushion, gently dilating the passage ; and in this stage there should be no officious interference. While the membranes are entire, both the mother and child are in perfect safety. 2d. The orifice continuing to dilate, and the efforts of the womb increasing, the membranes burst, and the head of the child presses on the orifice ; then the womb is allowed to con- tract : this contraction is a stimulus to greater efforts, and, in a few pains, the head descends into the cavity of the pelvis. The orifice is completely retracted, and there is no longer a mark of division betwixt the womb and the vagina ; they are as one canal. If, however, the membranes are burst too early, the labour is not accelerated, but retarded. The orifice is not dilated by the soft and elastic membranes ; the head of the child presses broad on the orifice, which becomes rigid, and perhaps inflamed, its dilatation is slow, and the labour tedious. Though from the form of the bones, and particularly by the retiring of the sacVum, there is a provision and guard for the soft parts of the mother against compression by the head ; yet nature intends this stage to be short, for it is the period of danger. There is now obstruction of urine and faeces, and the vessels of the parts suffer compression. 3d. Now the head of the child presenting at the orifice of the vagina, forms a third stage ; it is the stage of most exquisite suffering : the head is pushed forward during every pain, and recedes again in the absence of pain. An interval of rest pre- cedes this stage, at last the pains return, and the hard head of the child coming to press on the orifice, and the womb coming in close contact with the body of the child, the pains are redou- bled in strength. The face of the woman, perhaps, before pale and flat, becomes red and turgid, the eyes gleam, and are in- flamed ; the pulse becomes quick and hard ; and from the ex- quisite expectation of relief, she looks wildly round on her at- tendants, losing all reason and recollection ; she is frantic, with the most agonizing pain to which the human frame i3 subject. OF THE WOMB. 175 Now the occiput of the child begins to project with its wrinkled scalp through the external parts, but nature intends that this also should dilate slowly ; the ligaments and os coccygis resist several throes, and direct the head forward under the pubes ; at last, after several pains, it rises with a half turn, and is de- livered. 4th. The fourth stage, is the delivery of the body and shoul- ders ; and, 5th. The fifth stage, is the delivery of the placenta. The placenta is expelled by a continuation of the same action of the womb, and is part of the natural process. First a flow of the liquor amnii and blood follows the child, and the woman lies for a time exhausted ; the extreme pain and excitement having ceased. The womb generally recovers its powers in about twenty minutes, and then there is grinding pain in the belly, and the placenta is detached and expelled, or is pushed down into the vagina. Thus we have sketched, in the most superficial manner, the progress of a natural labour, with a view merely to explain the general notion ofthe entire function ofthe womb, not with that minuteness which the accoucheur would look for in treating the subject. Let us, for an instant, attend to the state of the umbilical chord, and the final contraction of the womb. I have already observed, that while the membranes are un- broken, the child is safe, that is to say, there is no danger of the compression ofthe umbilical chord ; but when the membranes have burst, and the waters are evacuated, the chord must suf- fer a degree of compression betwixt the uterus and the child, and there is danger that the chord may fall down before the head, until the head has descended into the brim ; as the uterus contracts, and as it were follows the child, the circulation through the placenta must become somewhat difficult, and the usual function corresponding with that of the adult lungs im- paired. This must be much more the case when the child is delivered, and the placenta remains in the contracted womb. No doubt nature intends by this, that the function of the pla- centa shall be gradually diminished, and not suddenly cut off, that the child may feel occasion for the play ofthe muscles of respiration, and that the function ofthe lungs may, by degrees, take place of the function of the placenta. When the child is first delivered, the chord pulsates strongly ; when the child cries, it becomes feeble; at first, the child has strong and irregular catches ofthe respiratory muscles, but by and by it breathes more regularly, and cries lustily. At first the breath- ing only renders the pulsation ofthe chord feeble, but presently the pulsation becomes so weak, that it is felt only near the 176 OF THE WOMB. umbilicus, and it ceases when the regular and interrupted breathing is established, and the crying ceases. The delivery of the child and placenta is followed by a con- siderable efflux of blood. But after this there continues a dis- charge from the uterus, which is called the lochia. It is like the exudation of blood from an extensive wound, in as much as by the contraction of the vessels from which it flows, it be- comes serous in a fewr days, and ceases gradually like a hae- morrhagy. This open discharge from the womb after delivery, is no doubt a provision against the consequence which would natu- rally result from the sudden and perfect obstruction, and the activity ofthe uterine vessels consequent on delivery. By this discharge the activity of the vessels is gradually relieved, and as it is a discharge taking place ofthe active state of the womb, so the secretion of the milk in the breasts, and the giving of suck, causes the discharge to cease much sooner than it would do if the mother were not the nurse. OF THE MAMM/E. In man and in children of both sexes, there is no mark of the breast, but the little cutaneous papilla, or nipple. These tubercles are, however, surrounded by a zone or disk, of a brownish red colour, the areola. At puberty, as we have said, the breast ofthe female becomes protuberant, and those parts which were in miniature, and without action,quickly grow into a firm glandular mass (speak- ing anatomically.) The shape, rotundity and firmness of the gland depends much upon the adipose membrane surrounding and intersecting the glandular body. The glandular part itself is divided into little masses, which again consist of small granules. These several subdivisions of the glands are closely surrounded by membranes. The lactiferous ducts are gathered together from these les- ser granules, and unite into twelve or fifteen in number of a very considerable size, as they converge towards the root of the nipple. When milk is secreted, the glands are large, a re- markable distention of the ducts also takes place, for they are then become tortuous and varicose, and serve as reservoirs of the milk. Where they pass through the nipple, however, they are again contracted, and open by small pores upon its surface. The nipple is of a spongy and elastic nature, and suffers a dis- tention or erection. When the nipple is contracted, the lactife- rous ducts must be compressed, and perhaps coiled together, so OF THE WOMB. 177 that the milk cannot flow, or flows with difficulty: but by the sucking of the child, the nipple is distended, and the ducts elongated, so that the milk flows. There open upon the areola several superficial or cutaneous glands, which pour out a dis- charge to defend it and the nipple from excoriation. Of the arteries, veins, or lymphatics of the mammae, we need not treat here. We have many occasions to observe the consent and sympa- thy which exist betwixt the womb and the breasts. On the first period ofthe menses, the breasts are much distended. In many women at each return of the discharge, a degree of swelling and shooting pain is felt in them, and the enlargement and shooting pain in the breast, with the darker colour of the areola, is marked as the most prominent sign of pre ^nancy: with the ceasing of menstruation, which is the cessation of the usual excitement and action ofthe womb, the breasts contract and are absorbed. Any unusual stimulus or irritation in the womb, as polypus, or cancers, or even prolapsus and excoria- tion, will affect the breasts, causing them to enlarge and be- come painful. When the function ofthe parts cease, they seem to feel the want ofthe usual excitement to correct action, and are apt to fall into disease ; so it is at least with the womb and mammae, for at that period of life, when the system is no longer able to support and give nourishment to a child, and these parts sub- side from their usual action, they often become schirrous or cancerous, and terminate existence by a tedious, painful, and loathsome disease. Vol. IV. / PART THE FOURTH. OF THE LYMPHATIC AND LACTEAL SYSTEMS OF VESSELS. CHAP. I. OF THE LYp" .-HATIC AND LACTEAL SYSTEMS OF VESSELS. INTRODUCTORY VIEWS. W E have understood that the red blood circulates in the body, through vessels (the arteries and veins) which have a direct communication at their extremities by inosculation ; that although these vessels lie parallel to each other, and extend from the heart to the remotest part of the body, yet the blood is said to pass through the circulation, because it is transmitted from the veins into the arteries through the medium of the heart; and from the extremities of the arteries directly into the veins, returning again to the centre. In this transmission of the blood through continuous tubes, there is in the coats of the vessels an alternation of contraction and relaxation which impels it forward. But besides these arteries and veins carry- ing the red blood through the body, there are other vessels more remote in their connection with what is generally called the circulating system of vessels. 180 OF THE CAPILLARY VESSELS, SECTION I. OF THE CAPILLARY VESSELS. The capillary vessels are those extreme branches which are as minute as hairs ; but this, though the literal, is not the ge- ueral meaning of the term. By capillary vessels is rather un- derstood those branches in which the changes are wrought from the blood, and which are either so minute as not to allow the promiscuous flow of the blood, or possessed of such a degree of irritability and appetency, as only to allow certain parts of that fluid to be transmitted. It is proved that in the living body there is no exudation ; but no sooner is the animal dead, than the fluids exude from the vessels, the secretions pass through the coats of those receptacles which formerly contained them, and the whole parts partake of an universal colour. From this simple fact, we are led to think that a property exists in the living fibre, which by contraction or some other property repels the fluids. Admitting this, it is very natural to suppose that the fibres, and more particularly the vessels, have a discriminating pro- perty ; so that the capillary texture of each organ possesses sensibility, which has its relations to the fluids passing through them, or to be secreted from them. If we admit this, we may also foresee the explanation of the most puzzling phenomenon of inflammation. Inflammation is the effect of excitement: there is increased action of the arteries ; and by the operation of the same cause, there is a destruction of the natural sensibilities ofthe capillary vessels, so that they no longer are possessed of their distinguishing sensibility, and they admit the promiscuous passage of the red blood : they become dilated by the action of the arteries, and visibly distended with red blood. The effect is not merely the mechanical derangement of the particles of the blood. The chemical changes which take place in the extreme vessels are disordered, and the blood deposits upon the extreme branches ofthe nervous system an unusual proportion of irritability ; so that with the redness arising from the circulation of red blood through the hitherto pellucid vessels, in parts not endowed with sensibility, there is acquired an unusual sensibility, and the power of transmitting the sensation to the sensorium. Since we see that in an inflammatory state the pellucid veins transmit red blood, and that this red blood must be supplied by the serous arteries; then it is proved that answering to the. pellucid arteries (in their natural state) there are pellucid veins. OF THE CAPILLARY VESSELS. 181 We should acquiesce therefore in the opinion that supposes both the arteries and veins to have pellucid capillary branches answering to each other, collateral to the larger and more pal- pable anastomosis of their red extremities. These anastomo- sing branches of the arteries and veins in which the red blood is seen to circulate, perpetuate the flow of the greater part of the blood back to the heart, while the several secretions are performed in the capillary vessels ; but there is no reason to suppose that the fluids sent from the arteries into these pellucid capillary vessels are all poured out in form of secretions ; part returns into the extremities of the circulating veins. The secreted fluids and solids are either carried away by ducts into their receptacles, or thrown out from the body : while those fluids which are exuded on the cellular membrane and cavities are re-absorbed by the system of absorbent lymphatics. We say then that arteries terminate, first, in red veins ; which is proved by the microscope, and by mercurial and other injections : secondly, in glands ; thirdly, in cells receiv- ing red blood ; fourthly, in lymphatic veins ; fifthly, in ex- halents, which pour their fluids into the cellular membrane, cavities, joints, &c. and which fluid is taken up by the valvular lymphatic absorbents. But these absorbent vessels, of which we are now to treat under the division of lymphatics, do also perform a circula- tion, in as much as they convey back to the centre of the sys- tem the fluids which have been thrown out from the extremi- ties ofthe arteries. But as these lymphatic vessels are not continued from the extremities of the arteries as the red veins are, as they imbibe the fluids, which have been thrown out of the other system; their fluid contents cannot be conveyed through them by the force of the heart and arteries, they must be peculiar in having powers within themselves, first of ab- sorbing, and then of propelling their fluid onward to the heart. This common property of absorption in the lymphatics, ab- sorbents, and lacteals, and their being connected with the same trunk, occasions their being considered as one system ot vessels ; when, in fact, looking upon the general oeconomy ot the living body, we find them ministering to very different purposes. The one branch of the system, the lymphatics (as we have seen in the introduction to this volume,) takes up the matter which has been secreted, and poured out from the arteries, (viz. all the solids and fluids of the body,) and con- veys it again into the circulating system. The lacteal vessels, on the contrary, are those vessels which opening upon the inner surface of the'intestines receive into them the nutritious fluids, prepared bv the organs of digestion, and suited to supply the 182 OF THE LYMPHATIC SYSTEM. incessant waste and destruction of the solid and fluid parts of our frame, and which have been absorbed and carried aw:iy by the lymphatics. Following this simple view, although the absorbent system be commonly divided into the thoracic duct, lymphatics, lacteals, and glandular apparatus attached to them, I shall throw the present section into the divisions of the lymphatics and of the lacteals. SECTION II. OF THE LYMPHATIC SYSTEM IN PARTICULAR. The lymphatic vessels are tubes whose coats are perfectly pellucid, having a remarkable power of contraction, which causes them to shrink, and disappear, so as to render it difficult to demonstrate them. Indeed they are only to be observed by an eye accustomed to the making of lymphatic injections. They are called lymphatics, or ductus aquosi, from their transmitting a fluid colourless as water. When they are distended with their fluids, they show that they possess a very distinct character from the other circulating tubes. They are irregularly distended, knotty, and sometimes like a chain of beads, or little irregular vesicles connected together. This irregularity is owing to their numerous valves, which are semilunar membranes, like those ofthe veins, and hung across their cavities, so as to catch and interrupt the refluent lymph. They say, in general, that in the space of an inch the lympha- tic vessel has three or four pairs of valves. But this bears no certain proportion ; for as these vessels run where they are ex- posed to occasional compression from the surrounding parts, or bear the weight of a high column of fluid, their valves are more frequent. The lymphatics are improperly called cylin- drical tubes, since they are irregular from their valves branch- ing and frequent communications. The coats of the lymphatic vessels are the strongest of any in the body ; for although ex- tremely thin and pellucid, they give resistance to distention beyond a certain point, and bear a column of mercury which would burst through the valves of veins, and tear the coats of arteries. If there be a muscular coat, and no one ever denied the muscularity of the lymphatics, then we may reckon three coats : First, The inner coat, which is the continuation of the inner tunic ofthe veins, as may be observed in the opening of the thoracic duct into the left subclavian and left jugular veins. It is smooth and polished, forms duplicatures or valves, and OF THE GLANDS OF THE ABSORBENT SYSTEM. 183 prevents the transudation of their fluids : it is connected by cellular membrane to the middle coat. Secondly, The mus- cular or middle coat, which consists chiefly of muscular fibres, which, according to Sheldon, run in every possible direction, though the greater number take the circular direction. And, lastly, the outer coat, which is connected with the general in- vesting cellular membrane. As the inner coat must chiefly form the valves, and as valves possess so wonderful a power of resisting the column of mercury, I should hold that the inner coat is that on which the strength and resistance to distention of the lymphatics depends, though it has been said that it is to the outer coat that they owe this property. The muscularity of these vessels is rather inferred than proved : it is inferred from the unassisted action which they have to perform in pressing the absorbed fluids onward to the heart. Neverthe- less we sometimes see the lymphatics of the lower extremities of a colour so red and fleshy, that we may say their muscu- larity is demonstrable. The lymphatics seem to possess little elasticity ; when they are blown into, they rise with the slightest force, and remain distended, although the passage of the air forward be uninter- rupted : whereas, had they considerable elasticity, they would contract and disappear. Indeed, when empty, in the dead body they may be rather said to be collapsed than contracted. Although the lymphatics can be distended with the slightest inflations, yet when distended, as we have already observed, they firmly resist further dilatation. This is a quality neces- sary to their valvular structure, for if they were elastic beyond this degree of dilatation, the caliber of trie vessel would be oc- casionally so enlarged as to render the valves incapable of meeting, and of preventing the retrograde movement of the fluids. SECTION III. OF THE GLANDS OF THE ABSORBENT SYSTEM. Every where throughout the body and viscera betwixt the extreme branches ofthe absorbent system and the trunk, glan- dular bodies are interposed. Though of various forms they are generally of an oval shape, and they vary in size from the twentieth part of an inch to a full inch in diameter. Sometimes they are segregated,—sometimes accumulated and 184 OP THE GLANDS OF THE ABSORBENT SYSTEM. clustered together. The colour of those bodies is various in the several parts of the body : in young animals they are red- der, and become pale only with age. They are redder and stronger in the outer parts of the body, as in the thigh, axilla, &c. less so within the abdomen and thorax. 2- The latter will not bear so high a column of mercury as the former. The mesenteric glands are said totally to disappear in old age.* It would appear that the glands of this system are of more importance to young animals than to adults. In the foetus and in children the lacteal and lymphatic glands are exceeding- ly numerous ; but they shrink or disappear with old age. In the foetus, indeed, they can be of no very essential use ; they are then rather in a state of preparation for the actions neces- sary in infancy and youth. It is then also that they are most liable to disease, and seem more irritable and ready to inflame, especially in superficial situations. About the age of fourteen or fifteen this disposition is changed, which is commonly said to proceed from the increased vigour of the constitution, and the change which then takes place on the organs of generation. It is rather to be attributed, however, to the diminution of irritability and activity of their vessels in verging to the adult state, which is marked by their comparatively less size, and smaller degree of vascularity. We may further observe that the lymphatic glands, even in the scrophulous diseases, are seldom primarily affected : that they partake of diseased ac- tion from the surface, or from an affection of the intestines, or from the absorption of matter. The structure of these glands has not been satisfactorily investigated ; or the inqui- ry is attended with insurmountable difficulties. Some anato- mists have said, that they consisted of the convoluted absor- bent vessels ; others that they are of a cellular structure. When they affirm that these cells are totally distinct from the lymphatic vessels, it is not so easy to understand them : for cells communicating with each other, and into which the lym- phatic vessels enter, are very much the same with a series of convoluted, varicose, and irregularly dilated vessels. If we could dissect this series of cells, as Haller did the vesiculae seminales, we should have represented to us the appearance of a convoluted varicose vessel. There is a coat of cellular membrane which surrounds the glands. This coat is pervaded by a peculiar fluid which has given rise to some speculation. It is observed chiefly in young animals, and is for the most part, though not always, white and milky, and in the glands of the lungs it is of a black- • By Ruyfch, Morgagni, Haller, Sheldon. ORIGIN of the lymphatics, &c. 185 ish colour. This is the fluid which having globules in it, was supposed by Mr. Hewson to be the first stage of the formation of the red globules of the blood. It is distinct from the ab- sorbed fluids, and is a secretion from the arteries. Physiolo- gists have not determined the nature or use of this fluid. At present there seems no better hypothesis to be offered regarding the use of the lymphatic and lacteal glands, than that they serve to check, controul, and measure the flow of the ab- sorbed fluids into the mass of the blood : without them it ap- pears to me probable that at one time the lymph returning from the body, or at another time the chyle, might flow too rapidly, and in a disproportioned quantity into the veins and heart. But by the check which the glands impose upon this flow, giving a remora and serving as receptacles of the absorbed fluids, those fluids are poured with a more uniform and con- stant flow upon the heart. SECTION IV. ORIGIN OF THE LYMPHATICS, AND OF THE DOCTRINES OF ABSORPTION. The lymphatics, forming a system of absorbents, we might say, in general, that they take up all the fluids which have been thrown out upon the surfaces of the body. Thus they arise from the surface of the skin ; from the surface of the cavities and viscera covered by the pleura and peritoneum ; from the cells of the interstitial and adipose membrane, &C. This is the simple use assigned to this system of vessels: but whe- ther they are the only system of absorbents ; whether they car- ry away all the parts of the system, fluids and solids ; whe- ther they absorb the muscles, membranes, bones, tendons, Jkc. of which the solid body consists, is a question requiring severe examination. It cannot be denied that although the system and doctrines of absorption be the most beautiful and interesting, and apparently the simplest in the whole cecono- my, yet it is founded on very few facts, while there is much doctrine tacitly acknowledged, which seems in symmetry with the facts and the laws of the oeconomy, but which is not founded in absolute proof. We shall first examine the proofs of the lymphatics being the vessels which absorb the fluids of the cavities and surfaces of the bodv. The animal machine Vol. IV. 2 A 186 ORIGIN OF THE LYMPHATICS, universally partakes of motion. A principal provision for this mobility of parts, is the looseness of the cellular mem- brane which everv where pervades the body, and supports the vessels and connects the several parts. This interstitial membrane is elastic, and being cellular, to allow of motion, its surface is bedewed with serous exudation. This fluid is per- petually passing from the extremities or sides of the lymphatic arteries or capillaries, into the cellular membrane, and upon all the cavities of the body. The fluid extravasated is called lvmph, and some have supposed that it passes through in- organiztd pores, an expression that is not very intelligible ; but it bv this is meant (as has sometimes been explained) " accidental pores" in the sides of the vessels, it is a suppo- sition quite improbable and unlikely.* The pores or ves- sels from which this fluid exudes are called exhalent; and their action is no doubt as completely secretion as that which produces the fluids, which in our wisdom we call more per- fect secretions. Th.it the lymphatics take up the fluids thrown out in the cavities of the body, as the abdomen, thorax, pericardium, ckc. there is what nearly amounts to an absolute proof, in com- paring the fluids of those cavities with that contained in the vessels, for by the experiments of Hewson it is found that if the fluid moistening the cavities be collected, it will form a jelly when exposed to the air, as the coagulable lymphatic does. Again, if a lymphatic vessel be tied up in a living ani- mal, and then opened so as to allow the fluid to flow into a cup, it will also form a jelly like the coagulable lymph.f The fluid of cavities alters in animals diseased ; sometimes retain- ing its coagulability, and even acquiring stronger powers ; sometimes losing it altogether. But what is most essential to * Dr Hunter fupported this opinion (Commentaries p. 40.) viz. " that the fluids of cavities were collected by transudation, and rot thrown out by exha- lents;" an opinion which cculd only have arifen from not correcting the ideas received in making injections in the dead body by the phenomena of the living fyftem. See Hctxfon on the Lymphatic fyflem, chap. viii. where the opinion of in- orgsnical filtering is fuccefsfully combated.—bee alfo Cruickfhanks. f But, by difeafe, the fluid in the cavities and cellular membrane is altered. In dropfy, for example, the fluid of the abdomen lofes the property of coagulating on mere txpofure ; it comes to refcmble more the ferum of the blood : this were fufficicnt proof that the collection is not owing merely to the diminifhed abforp- tion, but that there is a change of action in the veffels of the peritoneum, pleura, pericardium, Sec An inflammatory action of the veffels will throw out a fluid more coagulable, jnd which, in a high degree of action, will form a film of coagulable lymph or even pus on the furface. But in a ftate the reverfe of inflatn- matioii, fuch lor example as the debility following inflammation, a ferous effufior will be poured out, having little tendency to coagulate. AND OF THE DOCTRINE OF ABSORPTION. 187 our present purpose, it has been observed, that whatever change takes place in the fluids of the cavities, the same is found to have taken place in the lymphatics. But the student naturally asks, how is the lymph taken into the lymphatic vessels ; and here it must be confessed, there is too much field for conjecture. It was thought formerly that the lymphatic' arteries termi- nated in small pellucid veins : these veins carrying only the thinner, and refusing the red part ofthe blood, were called lym- phatics. When the anatomist threw in his minute injection, and saw the coloured fluid return by the red veins, and the co- lourless fluid return by the lymphatics,* it was held as a suffi- cient proof of the accuracy of the pre-conceived notion, and tallied with observations of Leewenhoeck, and the theory of Boerhaave. See Introduction to Vol. III. When, however, anatomists more carefully examined the state of parts, they found that the lymphatics were not filled, unless the cellular membrane was previously injected by the extravasation of the fluid from the blood vessels. Finding that this alleged experi- ment was really no proof of the anastomosis, and direct com- munication betwixt the extreme arteries and lymphatics, they conceived that it was a proof that these lymphatics took their rise from the cellular interstitial texture. Then injecting with mercury, they found that when the vessels burst, and the co- lumn suddenly descended, and the cellular membrane was fill- ed, the mercury was seen to rise in the lymphatics. Following up this, they blew air, or injected various fluids directly into the cellular membrane, and injected the lymphatics. . Thus by an error, by an accidental effect of their injection, the minds of Dr. Hunter and Monro were opened to a freer discussion of the received opinions and approved authorities. Soon, howe- ver, it was understood by those conversant with anatomy, that these accidental injections of the lymphatics did not prove the lymphatics to take their origin either from the cells or from the extreme arteries ; but already this good effect, at least, was produced, that men's minds were excited to inquire after new facts and trains of observations. It was now recollected, that a strict analogy and correspondence subsisted betwixt the lym- phatics and lacteals; the proofs of the lacteals being absor- bents, were re-called to memory ; new proofs of their being the sole absorbents of the intestines were brought forward; the na- ture of the fluids effused into the various cavities and cells of the body was attended to ; and the conviction followed, that the most essential use of the lymphatic vessels was to serve as • It was probably Nuck who firft iniefted the lymptntics from the arteries. 188 ORIGIN OF THE LYMPHATICS, a s\ stem of absorbents, to take up the extravasated fluids. They reflected that to distend the intestines with injection would never fill the lacteals ; and were convinced that the in- jection of the 1\ mphatics could not be supposed to be thrjough the proper absorbing mouths of these vessels opening upon the cells ; but rather that the injection had entered the vessels by the rupture of their extreme branches. Thus the theory ot the lymphatics being a system of absorbents, came to rest on ana- logy, and the observation ofthe phenomena ofthe living body. The chief proof of the lymphatic absorption has been deri- ved from the manner in which the venereal virus is received into the system. Venereal matter being allowed to lodge upon the delicate skin of the glans penis or preputium, causes an ul- cer there. The matter of this ulcer is absorbed by the lym- phatic of the part ; an inflamed line is sometimes to be traced into the groin; and the lymphatic gland of the groin receiving this absorbed matter, inflames and forms the bubo. Here, then, is a proof that the red veins do not absorb, and that lym- phatics do : else why are they inflamed, and why are the lym- phatic glands inflamed to suppuration ? We must observe, however, that this is by no means an abso- lute proof of absorption ; nor is there here unequivocal evi- dence of venereal matter having been absorbed. Although, therefore, we believe in the general system, we may hazard these queries :—If this matter is absorbed, why is there no in- fection without ulcer (chancre) of the glands ? If this ulcer be produced by absorption, how comes it that the constitution is not infected by the first absorption of the matter, and before it has formed an ulcer ? Is it not probable that the irritation of the venereal matter, lodging on this vascular surface, and with- out being-absorbed, causes a peculiar inflammation, the tenden- cy of which is to form a pustule, and to produce matter similar to that which originally infected the part with the specific and peculiar action ? Again it will be said, however the venereal pustule was originally produced, it appears evident that the ab- sorption of this matter, the conveying of it along the lympha- tic, inflames the vessel, and the next lymphatic gland into which it enters, receiving the venereal matter, inflames and suppurates, &c. But again, I choose to say, with every show of likelihood, that neither is this a proof of absorption ; but that the lymphatic vessel being very irritable, and always re- ceiving its stimulus to action from its extremities, it has parta- ken of the venereal inflammation ; that this inflammation has been propagated to the gland ; that, the gland being formed of the convoluted lymphatic vessels, the effect of this inflammato- ry action is then accumulated to so great a degree as to destroy AND OF THE DOCTRINE OF ABSORPTION. 189 the function of the gland and lead to suppuration.* And fur- ther, that the disease is received into the constitution only in consequence ofthe system at large partaking of the irritation (a word which but imperfectly expresses the change) of the local . action of vessels. Matter might be absorbed and taken into the constitution, and the disease propagated according to the common explanation ; but, according to that offered here, there must be a primary and local disease, from which the general affection is propagated. If we are to take the inflammation and hardening of the lymphatics and axillary glands as a symp- tom of absorption from a diseased mamma, we must acknow- ledge the same proof in evidence of the veins absorbing : for although the lymphatics are more active, and their activity de- pends on the state of their origins and extreme branches, more irritable, more vascular (I will venture to say,) and more liable to inflammation than the veins ; yet are the veins affected in a wa} that would as unequivocally prove them to be absorbents, for we see how they enlarge around a diseased breast, become prominent and hard, and lose their softness and elasticity. But, as we would not say that this is a proof of absorption by the veins, neither is the proof unequivocal that there is absorp- tion by the lymphatics. Again, a suppurating stump, with bad inflammation, will cause inflammation of the lymphatics, and suppuration in the glands of the groin ;f a proof ot ab- sorption of the matter of the stump: but we do not find that from such a stump the veins ascend, inflamed and suppurating, while sometimes a chain of abscesses is formed for a consider- able extent. This, we can have no doubt, is the effect of the inflammation continued along the vessel; and is not the in- flammation produced precisely in the same way in the lym- phatic ? I found my opinion of the lymphatics being absorbents,— first, on the circumstance that their structure is adapted to this action; secondly, on the analogy between them and the lacteals, in which absorption is proved ; thirdly and lastly, upon their continuing to receive and transmit their fluids, after the heart and arteries have ceased to beat, and the red blood to circulate : for then how can they act, but by their own powers ? How can they receive fluids, but by absorption ? Finally, this phenomenon shows in the lymphatics, a greater * If a chancre be indolent, although matter be formed in it, no bubo will be produced: but if the furgeon applies fome corrofive drefling, which, inftead of entirely deftroying the difeafed fpot, inflames it, then will the gland in the groin fympathife and rife into a bubo. ■V Sec Hunter's Commentaries, 190 OF THE ABSORPTION OF SOLTBS. degree of irritability, and stronger principle of activity and tenacity of life, than actuates any other set of vessels. OF THE ABSORPTION OF SOLIDS. On examining the works which within the last forty years have contributed to throw light on this subject, we at once acknowledge how necessarv it is for that part of a systematic book of anatomy, which professes to treat of absorption, to take the form of a critical inquiry. When the absorption of the fluids of the cellular substance, or in the cavities, was universally assented to, physiologists did not make sufficient distinction betwixt the absorption of the fluid thrown out of the influence of the circulating vessels, and that mutter which continued to be involved in the membranes and vessels, and which formed the splid part of our frame. It will readily be allowed that the fluid thrown out upon the surfaces of the body and in the cells, might be absorbed without inferring that every part ofthe body, solids and fluids, were also tak> n up by the lymphatic absorbent vessels. But physiologists observ- ing that the solid parts of the body were suffering perpetual change ; that the whole body and the vessels themselves were formed, decomposed, and carried awav ; they hesitated not to attribute this to the deposition from trie arteries, and the ab- sorption by the lymphatics. This alternate destruction and renovation of parts, the perpetual change which the whole body suffers, has been universally acknowledged and attributed in part to the operation of the lymphatic system, without any other proof than a slight analogy. The interstitial fluids, and the fluid in the cavities, is im- bibed by the absorbing mouths ofthe lymphatics on the sur- face of the membranes ; but where is the analogy between this and the destruction of solid parts ? It has been said that the absorbents eat down the solids, and nibble like th- mouth of a worm! a conjecture, the falsity of which is equd to its apparent absurdity. The solids are raised by the agency of the vessels on the chemical affinities of the circulating fluids. They must be resolved by their decomposition, reducing them again to the state of fluids ; or the secreting vessels throw out fluids which dissolve them : an operation anterior to their ab- sorption. From the comparative simplicity of the fluids of the circulating vessels, and that in the absorbents, we are au- thorized to conclude, that as from the blood the several secre- tions, solids, and fluids are formed ; these fluids, before they are again taken into the active system of vessels, are resolved into their original simple and constituent parts. Thus we are. OP THE ABSORPTION OE SOLIDS. 191 not to look for the matter of the component parts of the body in the absorbing system of vessels more than in the blood, from which these parts'were originally formed. Upon this subject I conceive, that the absorption of the solids depends but in a limited degree on the agency of the lymphatics ; and that there is a necessary change in the aggre- gation of the matter previous to the absorption by the mouths of the lymphatic vessels. EXAMINATION OF SOME OPINIONS OF MR. HUNTER ON THE SUBJECT OF ABSORPTION OF SOLIDS. Mr. Hunter says that his conception of the matter is, that nature leaves little to chance ; and that the whole operation of absorption is performed by an action in the mouths of the ab- sorbents. Physiologists have laboured, he observes, to ex- plain absorption on the principle of capillary attraction, be- cause it was familiar ; but as they were still under the necessity of supposing action in the vessels after the matter was absorb- ed, they might as well have carried this action to the mouths of these vessels. One never could have ventured to suppose the extravagant conclusion to which this idea, once entertained, has led Mr. Hunter.__He proceeds to consider the many kinds of solids the lymphatics have to carry away, and the variety of mouths in different aninUs, suited to the great variety of substances they have to work upon, and then draws the conclusion, or leaves his reader to do so ; that not only are the mouths of the lymphatics calculated to absorb fluids ; not only do they carry awav the solids, but each vessel, according to the hardness and toughness of the material upon which it has to operate, has a mouth adapted for the work. Here we do not see the genius of Hunter, but a poverty of imagination. Mr Hunter takes the merit of a new doctrine relating to absorption___He admits that oil, fat, and earth of bones had always been considered as subject to absorption ; and that some other parts of the bodv, liable to waste had been supposed to suffer by absorption; but that any solid part should be absorb- ed, he supposes to be entirely a new doctrine—Now, I think we may venture to affirm, that not only was it known that solid parts of the body were taken away during lite ; but that physi- ologists knew each and every part of the living body to be un- dergoing a perpetual decay and renovation. Nay, we may venture further to say, that Mr. Hunter did not comprehend, in its full extent, the relation in which the secreting and absorb- 192 OF THE ABSORPTION OF SOLIDS. ing vessels stand to each other. He is fond of calling the ab- sorbents, modellers,—u modellers of the original construction of the body,"—"modellers of the form of the body while growing." No doubt he understood that such terms from their novelty would be acceptable to minds incapable of real conviction, or of receiving or appreciating a new fact or idea. Mr. Hunter could contemplate no change in the body during growth, decay, or disease, where there was an alteration of form or quantity of matter, without attributing it to the " modelling absorption."—A bone cannot be removed without absorption ; nor a part which is useless to the oeconomy (as the alveoli of the teeth, the ductus arteriosus, the membrana pupillaris, the thymus gland) diminished in size or totally car- ried away, without the absorbents being in action. This is undoubtedly true ; but in regard to the manner in which it is performed we cannot agree with Mr. Heinter. When it be- comes necessary that some part should be removed, it is evi- dent that nature, in order to effect this, must not only confer a new activity on the absorbents, but must throw the part to be absorbed into such a state as to yield to this operation. This is the only animal power capable of producing such effects ; and like all other operations of the machine, it arises from stimulus or irritation, &c. Now, this appears to be the fun- damental error of Mr. Hunter's doctrine. I conceive that the absorption of parts in the natural action of health or in disease, is not owing to increased stimulus, but often to a diminution of it. Does it not strike us forcibly that when a gland swells, and leeches and blisters are applied, and it subsides, there can be no means of exciting absorption ; that when pressure is made on a part, and that part is absorbed, this is a strange way of stimulating ? Or when we bleed, is it not odd that this should give new power to the lymphatic system ? for these are the means of giving a counter irritation, and of suppressing action. Mr. Hunter has given to the lymphatics not only the grovel- ling qualities of animals, as eating; but the higher attributes of intellect. They do nothing without forethought and inten- tion ; when they absorb, it is because they have found the parts useless in the ceconomy. He has carried this notion so far, that he does hot only speak of the absorption of the thy- mus gland, membrana pupillaris, alveoli of the teeth, &c. but of the body in fever as a consequence of its becoming use- less when under disease !—The following may perhaps appear to be the more natural supposition : In a living bodv we may observe the agency ofthe nervous, vascular, and absorbing systems: and the phenomena of life OF THE ABSORPTION OF SOLIDS. 193 are not to be attributed to any one, but to the whole of these. We must also observe, that life, or the mutual action of parts producing the phenomena of life, is proceeding from excite- ment, and as in the whole system, so in the individual parts of the body, the healthy action depends on the influence of this excitement to action. The tendency of the growth of the body to peculiar forms, and the increase of parts in disease are produced by it. It acts upon the vascular system in dis- ease, by producing increased action and secretion ; as a mus- cle, in the use of frequent and strong action, will become more fleshy and vascular; as a gland, will be excited to greater action and more profuse discharge, whilst it enlarges and swells up. When a part enlarges in consequence ofthe stimu- lus to increased action, either arising from the natural law of the constitution or from disease, it proceeds from the secreting vessels preponderating over the absorbing vessels. There is a deposition of matter which the latter are unable to take away. But diminish this action of the arteries, or take away their ex- citement, or cause an excitement of some neighbouring part, and thereby subdue their action, relieve them of their fulness, and the absorbents regain their proportioned actions, and the part subsides. The parts of the body, which, in the natural changes from youth to age, are absorbed and carried away, are those in which thete is no longer the stimulus to vigorous action, and of course the lymphatics preponderate over the power of the secreting vessels, and the part gradually dimin- ishes, loses its apparent vascularity, loses its redness, and is at last totally absorbed. And as the tooth of a child lies long hid under the jaw, where it partakes of the stimulus to the action of its vessels, grows and rises up, and the alveoli, partaking of this natural excitement, also form around it ; so when the tooth decays and falls out, the alveoli will also decay and be ab- sorbed ; because the moment these vessels have ceased to par- take of the increased action, their absorbents, though acting with no greater powers than formerly, do yet so preponderate, that a gradual wasting is the consequence. Thus we have to consider not the action of the absorbents merely, but the rela- tion which their action has to that of the arteries. I should conclude that a part which has ceased to be of use in the ceconomy and is absorbed, has not been carried away by the stimulus applied to the modelling lymphatics ; but in con- sequence of a want of the usual excitement of the parts to action, and of the consequent preponderance of the action of the lymphatics ; not by an increase of their action, but by a greater uniformity of action, less dependent on the state of ex- citement of the part. This more uniform state of action, or Vol. IV. 2 B 194 OF THE ABSORPTION OF SOLIDS. lesser degree of dependence on excitement, will not be denied when \v e see them continuing their action after the death of the animal, and after the other phenomena of life have ceased. As to the absorption of the body in general from disease, as in fever, it appears to be simply the effect of the continued ab- sorption, while neither the organs for digesting and assimilat- ing new matter, nor the vascular system for conveying the fluids, are in a state to minister to the wants of the system, but suffer under an unusual irritation, which disorders their function. As to pressure causing absorption and producing the wast- ing of parts, I cannot agree with Mr. Hunter in supposing that the lymphatics are here excited to action ; but should rather infer that the nerves of the parts being benumbed, and the action of the arteries suppressed, the lymphatics con- tinue to do their office, while the arteries are prevented Irom depositing new matter.—For example, when we see a curva- ture of the spine, from a habitual inclination of the body to one side, and consequently greater pressure on the one side of the bodies of the vertebra : it is natural, at first sight, to say, since the one side of the vertebra is of its natural depth, and the other diminished, that the side which is deep has remain- ed, but the other side has been absorbed ; but, when we in- quire a little deeper into the phenomenon which has taken place, we recollect that the matter of bone is undergoing a per- petual change, and that the matter of both sides of the verte- bra is changed ; we see that the pressure may not have excit- ed the vessels to greater action so as t» cause absorption ; but that the pressure has prevented the deposition of new matter, when the old was taken away in the natural routine ofthe system. Mr. Hunter has assigned five causes of absorption, which I conceive may be very naturally resolved into one.—These are, 1, parts being pressed ; 2, parts being irritated ; 3, parts being weakened ; 4, parts being rendered useless ; 5, parts becoming dead : of the first we have already spoken ; the second I should deny, unless when it resolves into the third ; for irritation does not cause absorption, unless when it is to an extent suf- ficient to destroy the natural action and weaken the part. The third and fourth come under the effect of the loss of the natural and accustomed stimulus to action in the arterial sys- tem, which of course gives a preponderance to the absorbents : of the fifth we can have nothing to add illustrative of the liv- ing system. ( *w ) CHAP. II. OF THE COURSE OF THE LYMPHATICS. J- HE lymphatics, in their course and relation to the fascia and muscles ot the extremities, bear a great analogy to the veins j for there are two sets or grand divisions,—the deep lympha- tics which accompany the arteries in their branchings a- mongst the muscles; and the superficial set which accom- pany the external veins. SECTION I. Of the foot, leg, and thigh. Even in the toes the same distinction of the origins of the lymphatics may be ob- served, as in the limb For while a plexus covers the toes superficially, and runs up upon the foot with the veins, deep- er branches accompany the arteries on the side of the toes. When we observe the course and origins of the greater and lesser saphena vein, we cannot fail to understand the course of the several sets or divisions of the lymphatics of the foot and legs. From the toes, dorsum, and edges of the foot, the lympha- tics climb up the leg in four classes. 1. One takes a course from the root of the great toe and inside of tne foot, over the tendons of the great toe and tibialis anticus tendon. It then passes on the inside of the tendon of the tibialis anticus mus- cle, and before the head of the tibia, following the principal branch of the great saphena vein ; and then continues its course in company with the saphena to the inside of the knee. 2. There is at the same time a considerable number of lym- phatics, taking their origin from nearly the same place, viz. the inside of the foot, and before the inner ankle; but they take a different course on the leg from the last class ; for they pass behind the lower head of the tibia : they now attach them- selves to some branch of the saphena vein, and join the for- mer set on the inside ofthe knee. From this thev ascend 196 OF the course of the lymphatics. superficially above the fascia to the glands of the groin. L>* From the outside of the foot there ascend several lymphatics ; a division ot which passes before the outer ankle and across the tibia to join the lymphatics, parasites of the greater saphena vein, and here they sometimes form plexus and contortions ; others turn in behind the outer ankle, and join the branches accompanying the lesser saphena. The lj mphatics which turn round behind the outer ankle pass on the outside of the tendo achillis ; and accompanying the lesser saphena vein, sink into the popliteal hollow. Here they unite with the lymphatics which have accompanied the several arteries of the leg and foot, and particularly the pos- terior tibial artery. Popliteal glands. The glands of the ham-string cavity are generally three in number, and very small. They receive the lymphatics, which pass with the internal tibial artery and with the lesser saphena, and they of course swell and become inflamed in consequence of sores on the calf of the leg, outside of the foot, and sole of the- foot. From the popliteal glands there ascend two large lymphatics, which accompany the popliteal artery and venae comites, and ascend with the latter through the adductor magnus to the fore part of the thigh. They run irregularly, or form a kind of network round the great vessels. On the fore part of the thigh, and still deep, they (or at least some of the principal trunks) enter the lower and deep inguinal glands, or emerging, they pass into the outward glands of the groin. Sometimes these deep lymphatics, instead of being accumulated into larger trunks, divide into many branches, and only unite in the glands of the groin. Inguinal glands. The inguinal glands are in number from five to ten ; they lie involved in cellular membrane on the outside ofthe femoral ligament. Some of them are superficial and moveable under the integuments ; some involved in the laminae of the fascia, descending from the abdominal muscles ; some are close on the femoral artery and vein, and under the fascia. Nearer to the pubes may be observed a division of these glands which belong to the lymphatics of the penis, pe- rineum, &c. The greater cluster of glands on the top of the thigh be- come affected from disease of the integuments on the fore part and inside of the thigh and leg; and of that part of the foot where the great saphena vein commences; nay, further, the inguinal glands swell from sores of the buttocks, about the anus and private parts. They will even swell from disease of the testicle ; but this only by sympathy. of the course of the lymphatics. 197 Lymphatics of the parts of generation in both sex- es. From the penis there run backwards two sets of lympha- tics : superficial ones, which take a course to the groin ; and deeper ones, which take a course along the arteries ofthe penis into the pelvis, or under the arch of the pubes. The superficial lymphatics are the cutaneous vessels, and take their origin from the prepuce, and it is these which, either absorbing the vene- real matter of chancre, or sympathizing with the venereal ac- tion, form sometimes an inflamed line along the penis, and cause the bubo in the groin. But as there are two sets of lym- phatics, the chancre may be in a place where the deep-seated vessels are the absorbents, and consequently the constitution is contaminated without any bubo in the groin; and indeed it has been observed, that a venereal ulcer ofthe prepuce will, in ge- neral, produce bubo, when an ulcer of the glands will not.* When the tract of the matter is through the deep lymphatics which enter the pelvis from below, the gland through which the vessels pass, is not inflamed to form a bubo ; neither do the lymphatic glands within the ligament ofthe thigh inflame to the extent of forming a bubo, either from chancre or from bubo in the groin. This, says a celebrated anatomist, Mr. Cruick- shanks, is very fortunate ; for if the external iliac glands, like the inguinal glands, should suppurate, they could not be open- ed by the lancet, they must be left to themselves ; they might burst; the pus might fall into the cavity of the abdomen ; might produce peritoneal inflammation ; and might probably destroy the patient. Now, there appears no reason to dread any such catastrophe. The matter of these glands would form an abscess, which, like other abscesses in the track of these ves- sels, would fall down upon the thigh. The fact, however, is curious ; that when the lymphatics diseased enter one set of glands, there will be no bubo ; when they take a course to the other, they inflame and suppurate. This I believe may be ex- plained, from considering the position of the inguinal glands, as being immediately under the skin : for experience shows that a part near the surface will inflame and proceed to suppu- ration much more readily than a part deep seated, though suf- fering from the same degree of excitement. In the external parts of woman (by Mr. Cruickshanks's ob- servation) there are also two sets of lymphatics. Those near the clitoris pass up in a direction to the ring; and those from the lower part of the vulva and perineum to the glands of the groin. Lymphatics and glands'within the ligament of the • Cruickfhanks, page 138. 198 OF THE COURSE OF THE LYMPHATICS. thigh. The vasa efferentia ofthe inguinal glands are in num- ber from two to six. The deep lymphatics which accompany the femoral vein and artery, lying under the cellular membrane, pass under the ligament, and soon form a large net-work of ves- sels accompanying the iliac vessels, in which they are joined by the branches of lymphatics from the superficial glands ; some- times the trunks accompanying the great vessels of the thigh pass into a gland, immediately within the ligament; sometimes one or two of them only enter into the glands high in the loins ; nay, sometimes a large vessel passes on directly to the thoracic duct. From six to eight or ten glands are seated in the tract of the external iliac vessels under the name of external iliac glands. And upon the inside of the brim ot the pelvis, and on the hypogastric vessels, the glands are called the internal iliac glands. In proportion to the frequency of disease in the pelvis, these external iliac glands, being in the tract of the lymphatics of the private parts and rectum, &c. are particular- ly subject to disease. Those glands also which are called sa- cral glands, as lying on the meso-rectum, and in the hollow of the sacrum, have been observed to be often diseased. On the psoas muscle, and on the loins it is impossible to trace the vessels as single trunks ; we may observe that one net-work of vessels ascends upon each psoas muscle from the thigh ; that there it is joined by the lymphatics of the pelvis. These ves- sels are in a manner united by those which cover the prominen- cy of the sacrum, and pass under the bifurcation ot the aorta. The two great lumbar plexus of lymphatics continuing their ascent, many of the vessels enter into the lumbar glands ; and on the loins they are joined by the absorbents of the testicle. By the union ofthe lymphatics ascending from the right and left side, with several large trunks of the lacteals from the root of the mesentery, the thoracic duct is formed on the third and fourth vertebra ofthe loins. OF THE LYMPHATICS OF THE ARM. In the arm, as in the leg and thigh, there are two sets of lymphatics :—the superficial, and deep seated. The first of these accompany the cutaneous veins, the latter the deep arteries. As in general there are two great veins on the fore-arm, the basilic and cephalic veins ; but particularly as the veins which gather into the basilic trunk, on the inner and lower edge of the fore-arm, are the larger and more numerous class ; so it is found that the course of the more numerous class of lympha- tics is on the lower and inner side of the fort-arm, and that OF THE COURSE OF THE LYMPHATICS. 199 they accumulate about the basilic vein. These are derived from the palm of the hand, and from the ulnar edge of the hand. This set sometimes passes into glands, seated on the brachial artery, near the inner condyle of the humerus. The absorbents which accompany the cephalic vein, arise from the sides of the thumb and fore finger upon the back of the hand ; they run on the radial edge of the arm, with the veins which ascend to form the cephalic vein. From the bend of the arm these vessels take a course on the outer edge ofthe biceps, and then get betwixt the inner edge ofthe deltoid, and outer edge of the pectoral muscles ; they then pass under the clavicle, and descend into the axillary glands. This set of ab- sorbents receive the branches from the outside of the arm in their whole course. There are absorbents arising from the back of the hand, next the little finger, which following some of the branches of the basilic vein (a larger branch of which is called the ulnaris externa) turn round the ulnar edge of the arm, are inserted into a glmd, very commonly found before and a little above the inner condyle of the humerus. From this gland a large lymphatic passes upwards, and attaching itself to the brachial artery, splits and plays around it. The deep-seated lymphatics of the arm accompany the ar- teries in the same manner as the venae comites do ; in general two with each artery. They all terminate in the glands of the axilla, and can require no particular description. The lym- phatics, from the muscles and integuments on the back of the shoulder, also turn round and enter into the glands of the axilla. The glands of the arm are small, and irregularly placed in the course of the humeral artery, from the condyle to the axilla. They are from three to six in number. The glands of the axilla are large and numerous ; they receive the lymphatics from the arm, breast, and shoulder ;* they lie in the deep cavity of the axilla, formed by the tendons of the pectoralis major, and latissimus dorsi mus- cles. They are imbedded in a loose cellular membrane, which, while it surrounds and supports the vessels of the axilla in the motions of the joint, gives them strength from its elasticity. These glands do not all surround the axillary artery ; but a lower cluster is attached to the branches of the subscapular ar- tery, going forward on the side of the chest, and to the thora- • " They even receive abforbents from the cavity of the cheft, and 1 have known them fwell from pleurify, peripneumony, and pulmonary confumption.' Cruick(hank9. 200 OF THE course of the lymphatics. cic arteries. These it is which, indurating from cancer ot the breast, require so frequently to be extirpated. These glands ofthe axilla greatly enlarging close upon the arter) and plexus of nerves, so as to preclude the possibility of an operation ; they compress the veins and benumb the arm by pressure upon the nerves. When they suppurate, they cause a condensation of the cellular membrane which surrounds them, and in con- sequence, a compression of the axillary nerves and a shrink- ing of the arm. When a wound or puncture, such as that which the student of anatomy may receive in the dissecting room, has been made on the little or ring finger, the red lines which often appear in consequence of it, have taken tht course of the ulnar edge of the fore-arm, and terminated in the inside of the arm, near the condyle ; in some instances they have been continued even into the axilla. If venereal matter is absorbed at any point of the hand, near the little or ring finger, or by those fingers, the gland on the inner condyle of the humerus, or some one in the course of the brachial artery, will most probably inflame and form a bubo, and the surgeon will be aware of this absorption ; but if the venereal matter be absorbed on the thumb or fore- finger, it is possible that it may not pass into the glands until it comes into the inside ofthe clavicle. These glands being out of our sight and feeling, the patient may be infected without the surgeon suspecting it.* LYMPHATICS OF THE HEAD AND NECK. Of the absorbents of the brain, little is known precisely ; but none can deny the probability, next to an absolute assur- ance and demonstration, that the arteries, veins, and lymphatics bear the same relations in the brain as in the other parts of the system. Lymphatic .glands are observed in the course of the internal jugular vein, and even in the foramen caroticum, which are understood to belong to the lymphatics of the brain. The lymphatics of the head are to be observed in the course of the temporal and occipital arteries, which last'terminate in glands, seated behind the mastoid process of the temporal bone. The lymphatics of the face have been observed very numerous accompanying the facial and temporal arteries. But those from the internal parts of the face and nose accompany the internal maxillary artery, and fall into the glands under the parotid, or in the course of that artery. These glands are consequently liable to disease, in consequence of absorption of * Cruickfhanks, p. 182. OF THE COURSE OF THE LYMPHATICS. 201 matter from the face, throat, and nose, and their extirpation is a very hazardous operation. The lymphatics from the gums and jaws also accompany the internal maxillary artery, and emerge under the angle of the jaw ; and some of them joining the external jugular vein, pass^ through glands near the top of the shoulder. The lymphatic vessels from the tongue and parts about the os hyoides, take also the same course. The glands about the face and jaws are of the greatest impor- tance to the surgeon, for nothing is more common than the necessity of cutting out indurated lymphatic glands. These are sometimes mistaken for diseased salivary glands ; now the salivary glands are rarely diseased, the lymphatic glands often. And it will be a guide to the surgeon to inquire into the origi- nal cause ofthe induration, (perhaps a suppuration in the throat, nose, or jaws) and to know precisely the gland diseased, its depth, and connections. On the side of the face, there are in general several small lymphatic glands on the buccinator muscle immersed in the surface of the parotid gland, under the zigomatic process. There are also glands to be carefully noted, which lie under the tip of the parotid gland, where it extends behind the angle of the jaw, and also lying under the base of the jaw-bone, close to the sub-maxillary gland, and on the course of the facial artery. The glands and absorbents ofthe neck are very numer- ous, and the latter form an intricate and beautiful plexus, several branches of which are to be observed accompanying the external and internal jugular veins. Some of the glands lie immediately under the skin, and in the cellular membrane, on the outer edge of the platisma myoides ; many under that muscle, and in the course of the external jugular vein. But there are many seated deep, for the greater number accompany the internal carotid artery, and internal jugular vein or their branches. The lymphatics ofthe thyroid gland have been raised by Mr. Cruickshanks, by plunging a lancet at random into the substance ofthe gland, and blowing into it, or throwing quick- silver into its cellular membrane. The trunks of these lym- phatics join the thoracic duct on the left side ; and on the right side the right trunk, just as it is about to enter into the veins. OF THE TRUNKS OF THE ABSORBENT SYSTEM. The larger and proper trunk of the lymphatic system, is generally called the thoracic duct, because it was first ob- Vol. IV. 2 C JO'J OF THE COURSE OF THE LYMPHATICS. served by Pecquet* to be a vessel which conveyed the chyle through the diaphragm, and which took its course through the whole length of the thorax, to throw its fluids into the veins near the heart. Before his time the lacteals which were dis- covered by Asellius,f were supposed to terminate in the liver. The first discoverers of the thoracic duct, described it as be- ginning from a pyriform bag, to which they gave the name of receptaculum chyli. In dogs, fish, and the turtle, such a cistern or bag may be observed ; but in the human body no- thing further is to be observed than an irregular dilatation of this vessel, like a varicose distention, where it receives the accession of the lacteals from the root of the mesentery. The origin of this great trunk, called the thoracic trunk, is the uni- on of the vessels, which running by the side of the common iliac vessels, are derived from the pelvis and lower extremities. Upon the third and fourth vertebr e, and under the aorta this trunk is frequently joined by a large trunk of the lacteals, and then ascending, it receives the greater number, or the larger trunks of the lacteals. On the vertebrae of the loins, the tho- racic duct is by no means regular, either in its course or size or shape ; often it contracts, and again irregularly dilates, as it seems to emerge from under the aorta. On the uppermost vertebra of the loins, the thoracic duct lies under the right crus of the diaphragm, and then passing the septum with the aorta, it gets on the right anterior surface of the spine, and runs up betwixt the aorta and the vena azygos ; it then passes under the arch of the aorta, and there it is considerably en- larged, from the contracted state which it assumes in the tho- rax. Sometimes it splits, and again unites on the vertebrae of the back. Having passed the arch of the aorta, it crosses to the left side of the spine, and we look for it under the pleura on the left side of the oesophagus. The thoracic duct now emerges from the thorax, and lies deep in the lower part of the neck, behind the lower thyroid artery, and on the longus colli muscle. It gets above the level of the subclavian vein of the left side, and here it receives the absorbents of the head and neck (ofthe left side,) and descends again With a curve, and ter- minates in the angle of the union of the subclavian vein and jugular vein ofthe left side. • Sometimes there are two thoracic ducts; but this is very rare. Sometimes the duct splits near its termination, and the two * In the year 1651. f In the year 1622—About the year 1652, the other branches of the fyf- tem, which take their courfe to every part of the body, were difcovered by Rudbeck, JoJyffe, and Thorn. Bartholin. OF THE COURSE OF THE LYMPHATICS. 203 branches enter the veins separately ; but, in general, when it splits in this manner, it again unites before it terminates in the vein. There is constantly a trunk in the anterior mediastinum un- der the sternum, as large as the thoracic duct itself, which is sometimes inserted into the termination of the thoracic duct; sometimes into the trunk ofthe absorbents ofthe left side, to be immediately described.* THE TRUNK OF THE ABSORBENTS OF THE RIGHT SIDE. The absorbents, from the right side of the head and neck, and from the right arm, do not run across the neck, to unite with the great trunk ofthe system ; they have an equal oppor- tunity of dropping their contents into the angle betwixt the right subclavian and jugular vein. These vessels then unit- ing, form a trunk which is little more than an inch, nay, some- times not a quarter of an inch in length, but which has nearly as great a diameter as the proper trunk of the left side. This vessel lies upon the right subclavian vein, and receives a very considerable number of lymphatic vessels: not only does it receive the lymphatics, from the right side ofthe head, thyroid gland, neck, &c. and the lymphatics of the arm ; but it receives also those from the right side of the thorax and dia- phragm, from the lungs of this side, and from the parts sup- plied by the mammary artery. Both in this and in the great trunk there are many valves. OF THE LACTEALS AND LYMPHATICS OF THE INTESTINAL CANAL. We have already remarked the great length of the intestinal canal, the effect ofthe imperfect valvular structure, in extend- ing the inner coat to a great length : we have remarked also, that while every surface of the body secretes, it is at the same time an absorbing surface ; and finally, that while we chiefly contemplate the intestinal canal, as imbibing and receiving the nourishment, we must not forget that it is also a secreting surface of the first importance to the oeconomy. But at pre- sent we have merely to understand that structure and organi- zation, by which this canal absorbs the nutritious fluid, the chyle, from the food. In the first place, as to the terms lacteals and lymphatics, we presume that the absorbents throughout the whole length of " Cruickfhank9. 204 OF THE COURSE OF THE LYMPHATICS. the canal have the same structure and use ; and that the term lacteals has been suggested merely by the colour of the fluid, which is absorbed from the small intestines. At one time these lacteals convey a milky fluid : at another a transparent fluid, like that which the stomach and great intestines in general ab- sorb. The lacteals, as it is natural to suppose, were the first disco- vered of any part of the system of absorbents ; or, at least, they were first understood to form a part of an absorbing sys- tem. For although Eustachius, a Roman anatomist, disco- vered the thoracic duct in the year 1563, yet he had very im- perfect notions of its importance, and the discovery was very little attended to, till after the discovery ofthe lacteals by Asel- lius in 1622. This anatomist, in opening living animals, to ob- serve the motion of the diaphragm, observed white filaments on the mesentery, which he took at first for nerves ; but, on puncturing them, and observing them to discharge their con- tents and to collapse, he proclaimed his discovery of a new set of vessels—a fourth kind.* Had Asellius only chanced to observe these vessels, his me- rit would have been inconsiderable ; but he also investigated and announced their peculiar office, viz. of absorbing the chyle from the intestinal canal, and carrying it into the blood. For some time, however, after the discovery of the vasa lactea, the opinion of Hippocrates and Galen, viz. that the mesenteric veins absorbed the chyle from the intestines, and conveyed it to the liver, still prevailed. Even after the disco- very of the lacteals was known and received, a part of the old system was still retained, and it was supposed that those vessels carried the fluids absorbed from the intestines into the liver ; and that the fluids were there converted into blood. About twenty years after the discovery of Asellius, Rud- beck, a Swede, and Bartholin, a Danish anatomist, saw Asel- lius's vessels in many other parts ofthe body ; discovered the trunk of the system, and showed that the lacteals did not pass to the liver, but that they were branches of a great and distinct system ; they also demonstrated the unity of this system. We have seen from this sketch that the ancients supposed the veins of the intestines to be absorbents ; and even after the discovery of the lacteals, this idea has been retained by some ofthe best modern anatomists, and principally by Haller, and professor Miekel, of Berlin. If the veins absorb from the surface ofthe intestines, their doctrine would imply that they are also absorbents in general throughout the body. Although * The nerves being counted as veffels. 01 THE COURSE OF THE LYMPHATICS. 205 Bartholin, in his epistle to Harvey, had asserted and given suf- ficient proot that the mesenteric veins were not absorbents, yet the con trovers) w«s left in so undecided a state, as to give oc- casion to the series of experiments in the school of the Hun- ters, which seems to have put the question to rest, in as far as it is connected w uh the lymphatic system.* We have already mentioned that Asellius was employed in opening the belly of a living dog, when he first discovered the lacfeals. He perceived upon the surface of the intestines and mesentery a great many small threads, which at first sight, he took for nerves, but soon discovered his error ; and to dissipate his doubt, opened one of the largest white chords, when no sooner had the incision been made, than he saw a fluid like milk or cream issue from the vessels. Asellius says he could not contain his joy at the sight of this phenomenon ; and turn- ing himself to Alexander Tadinus, and the senator Septalius, who were present, he invited them to enjoy the spectacle ; but his pleasure, he adds, was of short duration, for the dog died, and the vessels disappeared. The natural and simple narra- tion of Asellius represents his astonishment, and gives an idea ofthe sensation, which the anatomist experiences in the instant of making an interesting discovery.f Origin of the lacti als. When the young anatomical student ties the mesenteric vessels of an animal recently killed, and finds the lacteals gradually swell; when he finds them tur- gid, it the animal has had a full meal, and if he has allowed time for the chyle to descend into the small intestines—and empty, or containing only a limpid fluid if the animal has wanted food ; he has sufficient proof that these are the vessels destined to absorb the nutritious fluids from the intestines. Again, when coloured fluids are thrown into the intestines of a living animal, and they are absorbed, he has sufficient proof of their free and ready communication with the inner surface of the gut; but the actual demonstration of the absorbing mouths of the lacteal vessels is difficult and precarious. The difficul- ty arises from these vessels being in general empty in the dead body ; from the impossibility of injecting them from trunk to branch in consequence of their valves ; and, lastly, from their orifices never being patent, except in a state of excitement. The anatomist must therefore watch his opportunity when a man has been suddenly cut off in health, and after a full meal. Then the villi of the inner coat may be seen turgid with chyle, and their structure may be examined. Perhaps the first obser- • See the veins in this Volume. t Sheldon, Portal. 206 OF THE COURSE OF THE LYMPHATICS. vations which were made upon this subject by Lieberkuhn, are still the best and the most accurate. The villi are apparently of a cellular structure, for although they are flat or conical, or like filaments when collapsed ; yet when minutely injected, and especially when they are full of chyle, they take a globular form, and are called the ampullu- LjE. Their distention, in consequence of a minute injection of the veins or arteries, is probably owing to a cellular structure (which they seem to have) into which the injection has extra- vasated. The most probable account of the structure of these ampullulae is that this cellular structure is a provision for their inflation and erection by the blood, when excited by the pre- sence of the chyle in the intestines ; that this erection gives rigidity to the orifice of the lacteals ; and that the first step of absorption is by capillary attraction, while the further propul- sion of the fluid in the extreme absorbents is by the contraction of their coats excited by the presence of the fluid. Thus the absorption is not by an inorganized pore, but depending on excitement and action. Lieberkuhn's observations of the villi are the most accurate and curious. He observes, that having opened and washed a portion of the small intestine, its whole surface will be found covered with little pendulant conical membranes of the fifth part of a line in size, and the bases of which almost touch each other. From the vascular membrane, to which they are attached, he observes there is given off to each villus a branch of a lacteal, an artery, a vein, and a nerve. He found it dif- ficult by injection to show both the vein and artery, the fluid passed so easily from the one into the other. He found that the extreme branch of the lacteal was distended into a little vessel within the villus. And on the apex of which, with the microscope, he saw one or sometimes several openings ; with his glasses he observed the arteries to ramify on the globules or ampullulae and again collect into veins ; and he supposed that still more minute branches plunged into the centre. But he made a still more minute observation than this. Insulating a piece of intestine betwixt two rings, only leaving a space for the entrance ofthe ramification ofthe artery which supplied it, he injected with a column, and examined its progress at the same time with his microscope. As he raised the tube, he saw the artery going in serpentine turns to the villus, and the injec- tion returning by the veins ; at last it passed into the ampulla lactea, distended it and made its exit by the foramina. He prepared the villi in another way :—he inflated the ampullae, and kept them so until they dried; then he cut them with a razor, and found them cellular. This cellular structure OF THE COURSE OF THE LYMPHATICS. 207 Cruickshanks thinks is the common cellular substance, uniting the vessels ot the villus. When this gentleman examined the villi of a patient who died suddenly alter a meal, he observed some of them to be turgid with chyle, so that nothing of the ramifications ofthe arteries or veins were to be observed ; the whole appeared as one white vessel without any red lines, pores, or orifices ; others of the villi contained chyle in a less proportion ; and here the ramifications of the veins were numerous, and prevailed by their redness over the whiteness of the villi. In some hundred villi he saw the trunk of a lacteal forming by radiated branches, one branch in each villus. Mr. Cruick- shanks and Dr. Hunter counted fifteen or twenty orifices in some ofthe villi. Mr. Cruickshanks has remarked a deep and a superficial set of lacteals on the intestines ; but for this division there seems no necessity. Deep in the coats the lacteals seem to accompany the blood-vessels ; but when they get more superficial, they take a course longitudinally on the canal, and turn deviously, or after running a little way, take a sudden turn towards the mesentery. As the greater frequency of the valvula? conniventes in the jejunum, greatly increase the extent of its inner surface of the gut, and consequently give a greater extent of origin to the lacteals ; and, as here the chyle must be in the greater quanti- ty, so the lacteals of this portion of the gut are larger and more numerous than in any other part of the extent of the canal. The lacteals do not attach themselves to the vessels of the mesentery, but take a course individually, or forming plexus. Before they enter the mesenteric glands, they have been called lacteals of the first order; when they emerge from the first into the second glands, secondary lacteals, and glands of the second order. The manner of the entering and going out of glands is exactly the same with that of the lymphatics. The lacteals (or perhaps we should now say the absorbents merely) of the great intestines, are smaller and less numerous than those of the small intestines ; for although the intestines be large, still their inner surface is by no means so extensive : besides the chyle is absorbed, and the contents altered before they have descended into the great intestines. Both Winslow and Haller, however, assert, that they have seen chyle in the absorbents of the great intestines. We know that the lacteals absorb chyle, when it is presented to them : while at other times they absorb different fluids. That the absorbents of the great intestines imbibe the fluid contents is evident, from the 203 OF THE COURSE OF THE LYMPHATICS. change produced on the faeces in their passage. Copious and nutritious injections have been given, which did not return in the same liquid form, and which have supported the strength for some time. Clysters of turpentine give the urine a smell of violets ; and the Peruvian bark has cured fever, when giv- en by the rectum. The absorbents of the stomach form three divisions : one set accompany the coronary artery and vein, and enter the glands on the lesser curvature and omentum minus. Those of the second set accompany the left gastro-epipioic artery, and are joined by the lymphatics ofthe omentum. The third pass down upon the upper part of the duodenum following the ar- teria gastrica dextra : these descend to pass into the same class of glands, which receive the lymphatics of the liver. They are joined in their course by the lymphatics of the right side of the omentum. The lacteals on the mesentery pass from one gland to another till they form one or two large trunks only. These accompa- ny the trunk of the superior mesenteric artery, and run down on the right side ofthe aorta, and join the thoracic duct. The absorbents, from the rectum and colon ofthe left side, pass in- to their glands, or sometimes into the lumbar glands, and join the thoracic duct separately ; those from the right side of the colon join or mingle with the lacteals in the root of the me- sentery. OF THE REMAINING ABSORBENTS OF THE SOLID VISCERA. Where the lymphatics of the lower extremity descend over the brim of the pelvis, they are joined by the absorbents of the bladder, vesiculae seminales, and other parts in the pelvis : small glands belonging to this set are attached to the internal iliac vessels. In the female, the lower set of lymphatics, from the womb and vagina, also come by this route to join those of the lower extremity, or run mingling with them. Another set of lymphatics of the womb pass up with the sper- matic vessels. The lymphatics ofthe testicle are very numerous. They come in distinct sets from the body of the testicle, from the epididimis, and from the tunica vaginalis : theiweaching the chord, form six or ten trunks, and run up direct to the abdo- minal ring ; passing the ring, they turn outward, and then pass over the psoas muscle and into the lumbar glands. The lymphatics of the kidney are in two sets, superficial and deep seated ; but the former are seldom to be observed. Sometimes disease makes them distinct. The internal lym- OF THE COURSE OF THE LYMPHATICS. 209 phatics are demonstrated by blowing into the veins, or tying a ligature and kneading the substance of the kidney with the fingers ; when they rise, they are seen attached to the emulgent vessels, and go to join the lumbar glands, or terminate in large lymphatics near the aorta. It is needless to repeat that the absorbents ofthe spleen are deep and superficial,—for this arrangement is general. Emerg- ing from the spleen, the lymphatics pass along the splenic vessels, and enter into glands attached to the splenic artery in its whole course. In this course they receive the absorbents from the pancreas, and near the head of the pancreas, they are blended with those of the liver, and with them join the thora- cic duct. The lymphatics of the liver are the most easily detected, and may be injected, to greater minuteness, than in any other part of the body. Although they have many valves, yet they do not seem to close the vessels entirely, nor interrupt the mer- cury from passing from trunk to branch. The superficial lymphatics, which are so numerous that we may sometimes see the mercury in them covering completely a considerable space, have free communication with the internal set of vessels which are also numerous and large. The principal route of the lymphatics ofthe upper surface ofthe liver, is by the broad ligament: these perforating the diaphragm join the trunk, which we have noticed under the sternum, and in the anterior mediastinum. It would appear, however, that these lympha- tics of the broad or suspensory ligament, are by no means con- stant and uniform in their course ; for sometimes they run down towards the lactealligament, and perforate it there ; some- times they pass down into the thoracic duct while still in the belly. Other lymphatics of great size, run off from the con- vex surface of the liver upon the lateral ligaments, and pierce the diaphragm. The lymphatics on the lower or concave sur- face of the liver are more irregular than those of the convex side. They unite with the deep lymphatics coming out of the porta along with the vena portae, enter into the glands, which are seated on the trunk of that vessel, and join the thoracic duct near the root ofthe superior mesenteric artery. The lymphatics of the lungs are nearly as numerous as those of the liver ; but, indeed, in regard to this expression, it is more in relation to the facility of injecting and demonstrat- ing the lymphatics, than to their comparative number. For ex- ample, if the lymphatics ofthe other viscera could be injected to as great minuteness as those of the liver, we should cease to consider that viscus as more abundantly supplied than other parts. The superficial lymphatics of the lungs form areolae, Vol. IV. 2 D 210 OF THE COURSE OP THE LYMPHATICS. and cover the surface almost completely. They take a course to the root ofthe lungs, where they are joined by the detp seat- ed vessels, and together pass into the bronchial glands, and here the lymphatics of both sides freely communicate. The glands of the lungs are constantly found both before and behind the bifurcation of the trachea : often these glands are of a very dark colour ; nay, their substance is sometimes found resolved as it were into a sac of inky-like fluid. Upon the arch ofthe aorta, and the root of its great branches, are the cardiac glands, which receive the lymphatics from the heart. The absorbents of the heart are small, but very nu- merous, and their larger branches attach themselves to the coronary vessels. They then pass to the cardiac glands, and mingling with those from the lungs, join the thoracic duct. APPENDIX; CONTAINING THE DESCRIPTION OF THE VENOUS SYSTEM AND THE ANATOMY OF THE TEETH. CHAP. I. OF THE VEINS IN GENERAL. 1 HE veins are those vessels by which the blood carried out- ward by the arteries, is returned to the heart. The system of the veins however is not so simple as that of the arteries, for while there are only two great arteries carrying the blood from the heart, viz. the aorta and the pulmonic artery, there are three great trunks of the veins, viz. the superior and inferior vena cava, the trunks of the great veins of the body ; the pul- monic vein, which returns the blood to the heart from the cir- culation through the lungs ; and the vena portae, which col- lects the blood of the intestines, and conveys it to the liver. There are besides, a greater variety in the distribution of the veins, than in that of the arteries. The French physiologists have departed from the old method of Harvey, in explaining the circulation. He wisely took the heart as the centre of the system, and described the vessels going out from it, forming the two circulations, viz. through the body and through the lungs ; but they have assumed the lungs as the centre ; and the veins of the body, and the arte- ries ofthe lungs, they call systeme a sang no'ir, because it con- tains the dark coloured blood ; and the pulmonic veins and the arterial system of the body, they call systeme a sang rouge, because it conveys blood of the bright vermilion colour. This conceit is perhaps admissible, when introduced as an 212 APPENDIX. illustration of the relation of the lungs to the body ; but in the general announcing ofthe system, and considered as a basis ot demonstration, it gives to a difficult subject an unusual de- gree of intricacy in the mind of the young student: besides, the arteries and veins of the body, and the pulmonic artery and vein, have that strict and mutual dependence in action, which shows how improper and how unnatural it is to make this change, and to separate them in explaining the general system. At all events, let those who adopt this novelty cease to speak of the two circulations, for although in regard to the heart, there are two circulations, yet as the movement of the blood respects the lungs, there is only one. By this division, the blood returning from the body and carried into the lungs, cannot be called a circulation ; but only when it has passed through the lungs, and returned to the same point of its course through the body. GENERAL CHARACTER OF THE VEINS.--The Capacity of the veins, is larger than that of the arteries ; the coats thinner but stronger comparatively, and admitting of much dilatation. The coats of the lesser veins, are comparatively stronger than those of the larger ones, and the veins of the lower extremity much thicker and stronger, than in the upper parts ofthe body, as they bear a higher column of blood. The veins are transparent and the blood is seen through their coats. There can be properly distinguished, only two coats in the veins ; the outer coat, which is flocculent and cellular without, to con- nect with the surrounding parts, smoother and more compact within, where it is united with the inner coat. In it are rami- fied the vasa vasorum ; and a fibrous structure is to be observed in some of the larger and superficial trunks ; the striae or fibres running longitudinally. The inner coat is firm and compact and intimately united to the other ; it is smooth, flexible, and formed into valves in various parts. In all the larger veins, excepting those of the viscera ofthe abdomen, and those of the lungs and brain, there are valves : these valves consist of the inner coat, forming folds like a semilunar curtain, hung across the caliber of the vein ; but at the same time attached so obliquely to the side of the vein, that they present a sacculated membrane to receive the refluent blood. The loose margin of the valve is somewhat stronger than the other part, and betwixt the duplicature some splendid little filaments are sometimes observed. Each valve consists in general, of two semilunar membranes, the margins of which, falling together, prevent the blood from passing retro- grade ; but they yield and collapse to the side of the vein by the current of blood flowing towards the heart. As the veins APPENDIX. 213 are provided with valves only where they are exposed to occa- sional pressuie, and particularly to the compression of the muscles ; their chief use would seem to be, to prevent the re- trograde movement of the blood, from the occasional compres- sion ofthe veins ; but no doubt, they at the same time support the column of blood, as in the lower extremities : and when those veins suffer distention by disease, a great aggravation is, that the valves lose their action, become too small to close the dilated vein, and the whole column of blood presses upon the veins of the legs. The commencement of the minute branches of the veins, is from the extreme ramifications of the arteries ; they are con- tinuous, and perpetuate the motion ofthe blood in that course which is called the circulation. In contemplating the capillary tissue of vessels, the most striking circumstance is, the pre- dominance of the dark«venous ramifications : and in general, two sets of veins will even in these minute ramifications, be ob- served ; one superficial, the other more intimately blended with these minute ramifications of the arteries ; but in the in- ternal parts of the body, and particularly the viscera, the veins uniformly accompany the ramifications of the arteries, and in the solid viscera, a dense cellular membrane gives promiscuous lodgement to both sets of vessels. In the extremities and head, indeed every where but in the viscera, the veins form two distinct sets ; the deep and the superficial veins : the deep veins accompanying the arteries ; and the subcutaneous veins, which emerge from the compres- sion ofthe muscles, and run above the fascia. The union be- twixt the branches of the veins, is very frequent, not only be- twixt the veins, ramifying in the same plane in so much as to make them a mere network ; but also betwixt the deep and the superficial set of veins : such are the venae emissariae of the scull ; the free communications betwixt the external and inter- nal jugular vein, betwixt the deep and superficial veins of the arm, Sec. When in bleeding, the blood flows from the vein of the arm, accelerated by the working of the muscles, the blood escapes by the anastomosis, from the compression of the muscles, and fills the superficial veins ; but the increase ofthe jet of blood, is more the effect ofthe swelling of the muscles, causing the fascia to compress the veins ofthe fore-arm. In the dead body the veins are flat, but when distended, they resume the cylindrical figure which they possessed in the living body: yet they are in general of the cylindrical figure, for a very little way only, owing to the irregular dilatations by the side of the valves, or by the frequent union of their branches. The manner in which the branches join the trunk, has a peculi- 214 APPENDIX. arity which always distinguishes it from the ramifications of arteries ; the arteries branch off at a direct and acute angle, the veins in a direction more removed from the course ofthe trunk, and in general with a curve or shoulder. In infancy and youth, the veins are little turgid, and especi- ally the cutaneous veins, are so firmly embraced by the elastic skin and cellular membrane, that they have a less degree of pro- minency than in more advanced years. In old age, the veins are enlarged, and rise turgid on the surface, and the internal veins also become enlarged and varicose. I do not consider this change in the vascular system, as the effect of mere disten- tion, or of the enlargement of the veins from the long-conti- nued action of the arteries ; but as a necessary change in the proportionate distribution of the blood, which is preceded or accompanied with other peculiarities, the character of old age. When we consider the great proportion of the veins in size, over the arteries, we must conclude that the blood flows but slowly in the venous system : that from the narrowness of the trunks ofthe veins near the heart, the blood must be accelera- ted, as it approaches the heart, and that receiving the impulse from the ventricle, it must take a rapid course through the ar- teries, until again approaching the extreme branches of the ar- teries and passing into the veins, its motion becomes more lan- guid and slow. In youth, as the size of the veins is not in so great a proportion to the arteries, as in advanced life, the blood in a young person, must be in more rapid and quick circula- tion ; but in old age, in proportion to the largeness of the veins and the accumulation of blood in them, the quantity of blood moving slowly through the venous system, and almost stagnant in the dilated veins and sinuses, is very great; it moves but slowly and progressively on towards the centre of the circula- tion ; and upon the whole, the blood in old people, moves less briskly through the vessels, and the proportionate quantity im- mediately under the influence of the arterial system, is less than in youth. There is no pulsation to be observed in the veins, but what they receive laterally from the contiguous arteries. There is no pulsation in the veins, because they are removed from the heart ; because they do not receive the shock of the heart's ac- tion in their trunk, but only by their widely spread branches ; because the contraction of the heart, and of the arteries so al- ternate with each other, in such a manner as to keep up a per- petual and uniform stream of blood into the veins ; whereas the pulsation in the arteries is owing to the sudden and inter- rupted contraction of the heart. In this general account of the venous system, it remains only APPENDIX. 215 to speak of the subject of absorption. Before the suit of expe- riments made on this subject by Mr. Hunter, a vague notion was entertained that the veins were absorbents ; but about that time,* the doctrine that lymphatics are absorbents having been established, the opinion that the red veins were also absorbents, was first questioned, and finally confuted, at least in the opinion of most physiologists. The chief argument to show that veins, arising from cavi- ties, particularly from the intestines, acted as absorbents, was, that some anatomists said they had seen white chyle in the blood taken from the mesenteric veins. It was however soon observed that the serum of the blood, taken from the veins of the arm, was sometimes white, which must arise from some other cause than the absorption of chyle.f The experiments of Mr. John Hunter, proved that there is no absorption of fluid, from aliment contained in the intestinal canal, by the veins of the mesentery, while the lacteals were rapidly absorbing. Emptying a portion of the gut, and the veins of their blood in a living animal, he poured milk into the intestine. The veins remained empty, and without a drop of the milk finding its way into them, while the lacteals became tinged with it. In another experiment, leaving the arteries and veins of the mesentery free and the circulation through them perfect; still no white fluid could be discovered, tinging the stream of blood in the veins. Neither did pressure upon the gut, in any instance force the fluid of the intestines into the veins.—He repeated and varied these experiments, so as to show in a very satisfactory manner, that chyle, or the fluid of the intestines, never is absorbed by the veins. Yet I must say that these experiments are still unsatisfacto- ry, as they regard the general doctrine of absorption by the veins : in the intestines there is a peculiar set of vessels evi- dently destined to the absorption of the chyle and of the fluids of the cavity ; but there remains a question which will not be easily determined : do not the veins throughout the body re- sume a part of that substance, or of those qualities, which are deposited or bestowed by the arteries ?—We are assured that in the circulation of the blood through the lungs, and in the ex- tremities of the pulmonic veins, there is an imbibing or absorp- tion : and in the veins of the placenta, there is not only an ab- sorption similar to what takes place in the extreme branches of the pulmonic circulation, but the matter and substance which goes to the nourishment of the fcetus, is imbibed from the ma- 17,50. f See Hewfon's Exper. Effaysand Lymphatic Syftcm. 216 APPENDIX. ternal circulation.* So by the vessels in the membrane of the chick in ovo, there is absorbed that which being carried to the chick, bestows nourishment and increase. For my own part, I cannot but suppose that, while the lymphatics absorb the loose fluids which have been thrown out on surfaces, or into cavities—the veins receive part of what is deposited from the arteries; but, which is not so perfectly separated from the in- fluence of the circulating system, as that which the lymphatics receive ; and that there are certain less palpable, and perhaps gaseous fluids, which they imbibe in the course of the circula- tion by an affinity of the venous blood, similar to the attraction which takes place in the lungs. We must at the same time ac- knowledge, that the conclusions made in favour of absorption by veins, from experiments upon the dead body, are fallacious, and have no weight.—It is seldom we can determine whether minute injections have taken a course by a natural, or by a forced passage : neither are the experiments of some of the older physiologists more satisfactory or conclusive. Lower affirmed that, by throwing a ligature on the inferior cava of a dog, he produced ascites. He tied the jugular veins of a dog, and the head became dropsical. Hewson repeated these expe- riments, but without the same result. And if the tying of the veins had always produced oedema or dropsy, the experiment would have proved nothing more than is already established by the very common occunence of oedema of the legs, from the pressure ofthe womb on the iliac veins, or a tumor in the groin, or in the pelvis. Now in these instances the compression of the vein does nothing more than cause a difficult circulation of the blood, from the extreme arteries into the veins, and con- sequently a greater profusion of the discharge into the cellu- lar texture by the serous arteries. OF THE VEINS, BRANCHES OF THE SUPERIOR VENA CAVA. The superior vena cava, or the descending cava, is the su- perior trunk of the venous system ; which receives the veins of the head, neck, and arms, and throws the blood directly into the great right sinus, or auricle of the heart. • Dr. Hunter, Hewfon, &c. fay that it is probable there are many fmall lym- phatics in the placenta, which open into the brant her, of the veins, and do not take a courfe along the chord. This is very improbable, and has no fupport from analogy. APPENDIX. 217 SECTION I. OF THE VEINS OF THE HEAD AND NECK. The anterior facial vein.* The facial, or anterior facial vein, runs down obliquely from the inner canthus of the eye, towards the angle of the lower jaw-bone. Here uniting with the temporal vein, it forms the external jugular vein. The most remarkable branches of veins which assist in form- ing the facial vein, are the frontal veins ; which receive the blood from the forehead and frontal portion of the occipito- frontalis muscle, and the ophthalmic vi in, which is one of the emissariae, and comes from the cavernous sinus through the orbit.—In its course down the cheek, the facial vein re- ceives the several cutaneous branches of veins, from the sur- rounding parts : but which have in reality no such importance as to require description.f The posterior facial vein ; or, great temporal vein.—This vein descends from the temple before the ear, through, or under the mass of the parotid gland, and behind the angle ofthe lower jaw. This posterior vein receives those branches which are the proper temporal veins, and which are four in number, and descend upon the side of the head \\ and those which answer to the submaxillary artery, and also the vena transversa faciei, and the auricular veins. Finally into some ofthe deep branch- es of this vein § the blood enters from the veins accompanying the arteria meningea. The posterior facial vein, uniting with the anterior one, forms a common trunk, which in general lies over the division of the carotid artery. EXTERNAL JUGULAR VEINS. The external jugular vein takes a course obliquely down the neck, and across the middle of the mastoid muscle. It lies under the fibres of the platysma myoides muscle, and drops either into the subclavian vein, or into the internal jugu- lar vein. Sometimes there are two external jugular veins on each side ; more commonly there are two branches high in the neck, from the anterior and posterior facial veins, which unite • Facial vein; V. Angularis; V. Triangularis. f Vena dotfalis naft, fuperior et inferior— Vena palpebralis inferior externa et inter- na—Vena alaris naft—Vena labia et magna et minores, &C Vena baccales, 8cc \ Being in two lets, the deep, and fuperficial. § Viz. Vena Pterygoidee. Vol. IV. 2E 218 APPENDIX. about the middle of it. When they are double they have this course ; the anterior and external jugular vein, may be said to begin from the anterior facial vein ; it then receives the sub- mental vein, which comes in under the base of the lower jaw— the ranine veins also, and veins from the glands under the jaw join it here : where it is before the mastoid muscle, it forms free communications with the internal jugular veins ; and here also, it receives veins from the side of the throat.* Almost all the ramifications of veins, which in one subject unite to the external jugular vein, and which come from the face and throat, do in others sink down into the internal jugu- lar vein. Sometimes the anterior and external jugular veins join the internal jugular vein ; sometimes the subclavian vein. The posterior external jugular vein is formed chiefly by the temporal vein, or, posterior facial vein, which comes down from under the parotid gland ; it is then joined by the occipi- tal veins,! a little lower by the cervical veins, and lastly on the lower part ofthe neck it receives the muscular branches from the flesh of the shoulder; it then sinks into the subclavian veins. Of the thyroid veins.—The thyroid gland has two sets of veins, as it has of arteries ; the superior thyroid veins car- ry back the blood from the muscles of the fore part of the throat, from the larynx, from the substance of the thyroid gland, and from the neighbouring part of the trachea and pha- rynx, and even from the fauces. Sometimes these thyroid veins enter the external jugular vein ; sometimes they descend upon the neck, taking the name of guttural veins ; they unite themselves with the internal jugular vein. The lower thyroid veins.—Come from the lower part of the thyroid gland, and descend upon the fore part ofthe tra- chea, and enter the subclavian ; or, more generally, the great, or internal jugular veins. Of the internal jugular vein.—The internaljugular vein is formed by the conflux ofthe several great and posterior sinuses of the dura mater into the lateral sinus, which coming out by the foramen lacerum posteriusof the basis cranii, ceases to be constricted into the triangular shape, and takes the form and peculiarities of a vein. From this foramen, common to the temporal and occipital bone, the jugular vein descends ob- liquely forward and downward, becoming from its deep situa- • Viz. The fuperior thyroid veins, and the deep laryngeal veins. f Thefe communicate with the vertebral veins, and through the pofterior maftoid ieramen with the lateral finus. appendix. 219 tion somewhat more superficial, but in all its extent protected by the sterno-cleido-mastoideus muscle ; and it passes under the omo-hyoideus muscle. The internal jugular vein is very irregular in its form ; being sometimes much contracted under the angle of the jaw ; bulging and much enlarged, or rather capable of being much distended in the middle of the neck ; and again contracted before it joins the subclavians. The carotid artery, the internal jugular vein, and the par vagum lie together in the same sheath of loose cellular membrane. The internal jugular vein receives these communications and branches ; behind the angle ofthe lower jaw, a branch of communication, generally goes down from the posterior facial vein, and often it is joined by the internal maxillary vein : un- der the jaw, it either forms free communications with the be- ginning ofthe external jugular vein, or it receives the ranine and guttural veins; at all events, there is a branch from the side of the throat, and the muscles of the os hyoides which passes into the internal jugular vein. From under the back part of the mastoideus muscle, it receives branches from the occipital veins, and forms communications with the vertebral veins : near its termination the great jugular vein receives the guttural and lower thyroid veins. Of the vertebral veins.—There is difficulty in assign- ing origins to these veins, for they are rather like a chain of communication; they run in the holes of the transverse apophysis ofthe cervical vertebrae, and surround the processes with areolae. First a communication is formed with the great lateral sinus, then they receive the flat sinuses from under the dura mater, covering the cuneiform process of the occipital bone, (the basilar sinuses) and as they descend they form transverse communications, which receive the branches of that chain of inosculations, which runs down upon the spinal mar- row. The vertebral veins, in their descent, send out divisions which run down upon the outside of the canal, and receive branches of veins from the muscles on the fore part of the vertebrae, and some of the proper cervical veins from behind. The vena cervicalis coming from the side of the neck, unites with the vertebral vein near its termination, in the back part ofthe subclavian, or sometimes in the axillary vein. 220 APPENDIX. SECTION II. OF THE VEINS OF THE ARM. The veins of the arm are in two sets, the venae comites ; and the external or subcutaneous veins, being those without the fascia, and not subject to the compression ofthe muscles. Of these, the latter are the more important and require a par- ticular description. On the palm of the hand, the veins are few and small, be- cause they are there subject to compression in the frequent grasping ofthe hand ; but on the back ofthe hands and fin- gers, the veins are numerous and large. The veins creeping along ihe fingers, make a remarkable inosculation on the back of the first phalanges, and then passing in the interstices ofthe knuckles, form a great and irregular plexus on the back ofthe hand ;* the principal branch of which sometimes takes the form of an arch.f The plexus of veins from the back ofthe hand is continued over the back ofthe wrist : when some ofthe larger branches, after playing over the heads of the radius and ulna, take a course, the one on the lower, and the other over the upper edge ofthe arm, whilst the back of the arm is left without any re- markable veins taking their course there. The veins on the back of the hand have nerves interming- ling with them, viz- branches ofthe ulnar nerve, and the ex- treme branches of the muscular spiral nerve : so that it is a great mistake to suppose that bleeding in the back ofthe hand might be substituted with advantage for the common operation in the bend of the arm. Vena cephalic a.—The vein of the back of the thumb running into a trunk, which takes a course over the outside of the wrist, is called cephalica pollicis. From this vein and the division of the plexus ofthe back of the hand, a considerable trunk is generally formed, which takes its course on the radial edge of the arm, and is called cephalica minor, or radialis externa. This vein in its tract over the extensor radialis, and the supinator longus, has many lateral communications, particularly with the median vein. This vein, now joined by the median cephalic, and rising upon the outside ofthe humerus, is the great cephalic vein ; and it passes, first betwixt the biceps and triceps brachii, and • Plexus dorfal'u nanus. -f- Areas venofus dor fa lis. APPENDIX. 221 then betwixt the deltoides and pectoralis major muscles. Se- veral sm di cutaneous veins play over the belly of the biceps muscle, and communicate with the basilic vein ; a little below the external condyle of the os humeri, the cephalic vein de- taches a branch which ascends betwixt the brachialis internus and supinator longus, and which afterwards forms inoscula- tions with the basilic vein, on the back of the arm. The great cephalic vein passing up betwixt the tendons of the pectoralis major and the deltoid muscles, sinks into the axilla and joins the axillary vein. The lesser cephalic is a vein which runs up betwixt the pectoral and deltoid muscles, and sinks generally into the subclavian vein : sometimes it joins the external jugular vein. Vena basilica.* We trace the origin of the basilic vein from those veins which, being continued from the plexus, on the back of the hand, take their course over the lower head of the ulna. (A conspicuous branch of these veins, from the little finger, was called salvatella by the ancients.) From this origin, the basilic vein takes a spiral course on the ulnar edge of the fore-arm, sometimes in one great trunk, oftener in two, sometimes in a plexus of veins; here it may be called ulnaris supirficialis, or cubitalis interna. This vein, now rising before the inner condyle of the humerus, passes on the inner margin of the biceps flexor muscle ; here it forms very free and numerous connections with the internal or brachial vein ; the satellites and cephalica, now passing up, until it sinks under the tendon of the pectoral muscle, it joins the axillary vein. The great basilic vein, or the great trunk, after it has as- cended above the elbow, and received the median basilic, is joined by several deep branches of veins, as those which ac- company the brachial artery, called satellites or comites, a vein which is called profunda brachii; and still nearer its de- termination, it receives the addition of the vena subhumeralis or (irticularis, and the vena scapulares, viz. those answering to the arteries of that name. Vena mediana MAjoR.f—This is a vein which runs up the middle of the fore-arm, beginning from the plexus of veins, which play over the flexor tendons, and come from the ball of the thumb ; it is a vein which is very irregular, being some- times double, and sometimes rather in the form of a plexus, " Brachialis. The ancients termed the bafilic vein of the right arm, the vein of the liver, or vena hepatica brachii, and that of the left, the vena fplenica brachii. f Vena Media, vena fuperfcialis communis. 222 Appendix. than to be considered as a regular trunk ; often it is particularly short, and can be considered as a trunk, only for a tew inches as it approaches the bend of the arm ; not unfrequently it is entirely wanting, and as if annihilated by the preponderance of the branches of the cephalic or basilic vein. But to take the more common course, as an example, when it has ascend- ed on the middle of the fore-ai m, near to the bend of the arm it divides ; one branch passes obliquely outward, and joins the cephalic vein, the other inwards and unites with the basilic vein ; the first, is of course the median cephalic vein, the second, the median basilic vein. These are the two branches which the surgeon most com- monly selects for bleeding. Around the median cephalic, the cutaneous nerves play more profusely, and under the median basilic vein the humeral artery passes. It is bv the aukward plunging of the lancet into the median basilic, that the country bleeder so frequently produces the aneurism ofthe artery ; but the dreadful symptoms following the pricking of the nerve, are more frequently produced by bleeding in the median cephalic ; cases however occur of the pricking of the nerves, while bleeding in the median basilic vein. Axillary vein.—The trunk of the veins of the arm pass- es through the axilla, until it arrives betwixt the first rib and clavicle, under the name of axillaris. Here lying by the side of the artery, it receives many muscular branches from the flesh of the shoulder, the external and internal scapular veins, and the thoracic veins ; in general where it passes by the head of the humerus it receives the cephalic vein. Subclavian veins.—The axillary vein continuing its pro- gress over the first rib, becomes the subclavian vein : on the right side the vein is shorter, and descends more obliquely ; on the left it is longer, of course less oblique, but still its di- rection is downward ; passing before the trachea, and the branches of the arch of the aorta, it joins the subclavian of the right side, and together they form the superior cava : the sub- clavian vein receives these veins, a vein from the shoulder and lower part of the neck, the vertebral vein, with some lesser plexus of veins descending from the neck, the internal jugu- lar vein (and in the angle of the union of these the thoracic duct,) and lastly the thyroid veins. From below they receive the lesser internal thoracic veins. APPENDIX. 223 SECTION III. THE SUPERIOR VENA CAVA, THE VENA AZYGOS, AND LES- SER VEINS OF THE THORAX. The superior vena cava is the trunk of all the veins of the head, neck, arms, and ofthe parts in the thorax ; soon after it is formed by the subclavian veins, it is joined by the vena azygos, and receiving the internal mammary veins and the venvE THYMiCiEand pericardiac branches, the inter- costal and bronchial veins, it descends into the pericar- dium, and dilates or opens into the right sinus or auricle. Vena azygos.* This is the principal vein of the thorax, and chiefly of the walls of the thorax. It is observed to take its origin upon the vertebrae ofthe loins from some of the lum- bar veins, or by inosculations with the renal spermatic or lesser branches of the abdominal cava, receiving the first and second lumbar veins, as in its ascent in the thorax, it receives the in- tercostal veins on either side ;f ascending betwixt the crura of the diaphragm, and by the side ofthe aorta, it sometimes re- ceives the lower phrenic veins ; in the thorax lying on the right side of the bodies of the vertebrae, and before intercostal arteries, it receives the bronchial veins from the root of the lungs, and from the trachea it receives the veins of the poste- rior mediastinum and oesophagus ; through the intercostal veins, it communicates with the external and internal mamma- ry veins, and with the venal circles of the spinal marrow. Upon the third vertebra, the azygos vein separates from the spine, and with an arch, and bending round the root of the lungs, it opens into the superior cava, just where it is about to enter the pericardium : where it opens into the great vein, it is guarded by a valve. This vein however, like most others, has considerable varie- ty, and does not always merit the name of azygos, for some- times it is double, a division ascending on the left side of the spine, and uniting with the branch of the other side, just as it is about to enter into the superior cava. Of the lesser veins in the thorax.—The ven^e mam- m arij£ take a course by the side of the internal mammary arte- ry , and require no description. Like the arteries, they spread their branches on the muscles of the belly, and communicate * Sine pari. f Wc ex ept fome of tbe veins from the interftices of the higher ribs, parti- cularly on the right fide, which enter the luoclavian vein. 224 appendix. with the diaphragmatic and lumbar and epigastric veins. The left mammary vein terminates in the left subclavian vein, the right in the superior vena cava. The Vi NitTHYMiCiE enter, either into the union ofthe sub- clavian veins, or they enter into the guttural veins, or the inter- nal mammary veins. The pericardiac veins gather their branches from the pericardium, from the aorta, trachea and lymphatic glands ; they send down branches by the side of the phrenic nerve, which inosculate with the veins ofthe diaphragm ; they enter the internal mammary vein, or the superior cava, or the termi- nation ofthe right subclavian. The superior intercostal veins.—The right and left intercostal veins differ in their size and distribution ; the right is small, and receives only one or two of the upper intercostal veins, which do not enter into the azygos vein. The vein of the left side begins even so low as the interstice of the seventh rib ; it receives branches from the pleura, pericardium and lungs (viz. the bronchial veins) and from the oesophagus; they enter the subclavian veins. ( 225 ) CHAP. II. OF THE VEINS WHICH UNITE TO FORM THE INFERIOR VENA CAVA. 1 HE inferior vena cava receives the veins of the lower ex- tremities, the hypogastric and abdominal veins, and the veins of the viscera of the abdomen ; but those ofthe membraneous contents ofthe abdomen are received by it only indirectly, and through the circulation of the liver. OF THE VEINS OF THE LEG AND THIGH. We have observed that the veins of the extremities are in two sets ; the deep and superficial. In the leg and thigh the deep-seated veins accompany the arteries, and receive the same name : the cutaneous veins are the saphena major and minor. Saphena major.*—A large and beautiful plexus of veins is formed on the fore-part of the foot, and coming from the back of the toes, and outside of the foot. Two principal veins arise from the arch which these form: one takes the course behind the inner ankle, and is the saphena major ; the other passes over the outer ankle, and forms the saphena minor. The great saphena may be traced from the great toe, from the inside of the foot, and behind the ankle : it receives one or two branches from the sole of the foot. Sometimes the prin- cipal branch passes behind the lower head of the tibia, some- times before it, or it forms circles here : a little above the an- kle a vein from the middle of the metatarsal arch comes ob- liquely over the tendon of the tibialis anticus and joins it. The saphena, now a considerable trunk, runs up the leg be- fore the inner margin ofthe belly of the gastrocnemius muscle, and on the inner ridge of the tibia. In this course it receives numerous cutaneous branches, and backward, over the belly of the muscles, it forms inosculations with the lesser saphena. From the inside of the leg the trunk ascends on the inside of the knee, where it receives several branches, coming round the joint, and over the tibia. Now passing somewhat obliquely, it * Saphena magna, interna. Vol. IV. 2 F 226 APPENDIX. ascends upon the thigh, and, at the same time, turns from the inside to the fore-part of the thigh. In the thigh the great sa- phena receives many branches, and is not always a single vein : for sometimes the branches collecting form a small trunk, run- ning collateral to the greater vein, and which joins it in the groin. In all this course the saphena vein is superficial, and lies imbedded in the cutaneous fat; with but a very slight and imperfect aponeurosis inclosing it ; while it is external to the proper fascia of the leg and thigh. As it ascends upon the thigh, however, it does not dive suddenly under the fascia ; but is gradually enveloped and embraced by the condensed cellular membrane and fascia. When it was more the practice than at present to bleed in the ankle, the saphena major was the vein selected :'but as in all the course of the vein, from the great toe to the knee, it is connected with the nerve which bears its name, there are not wanting instances of those bad effects from pricking of the nerve, which not unfrequently follow the bleeding in the arm. Saphena minor.* This vein arises from the plexus on tht outside of the dorsum pedis : it runs over the outer ankle and above the fascia, covering the tendons of the peronei mus- cles. Here receiving- many branches, and forming frequent deep inosculations, it mounts on the outside of the vagina or fascia, which covers the back ofthe leg, until arriving betwixt the hamstring tendons it sinks into the popliteal hollow, termi- nating in the popliteal vein. The other veins ofthe lower extremity which accompany the arteries in their course, need little description. Anterior tibial vein.—The veins accompanying the an- terior tibial artery form many inosculations, and when minute- ly injected, almost conceal the artery. They are the anterior tibial veins and only unite into a trunk, where perforating the interosseous ligament it joins the popliteal vein. Posterjoh tibial vein.—In the sole of the foot we have the ^external and internal plantar veins, which uniting into trunks, accompany the artery behind the inner ankle. In its course betwixt the soleus and the tibialus anticus muscles, it cannot be called the posterior tibial vein ; for it is a mere net- work of veins surrounding the posterior tibial artery. It re- ceives, near its termination, a branch called Suralis, from the gastrocnemii and soleus: it terminates in the popliteal vein. The Vt n\£ Perone.* are the venae comites by the tibial ar- tery, and are two or three in number. All these veins have free inosculations with each other. * Vena fapbena parva, externa. appendix. 227 The Popliteal vein.—This vein is formed by the three divisions of deep veins accompanying the arteries of the leg, and the saphena minor. It lies more superficial than the arte- ry, and seems to cling round it. As it ascends, however, it twists round the artery, the artery being nearest the bone—a little above the joint it receives the lesser saphena. This vein, perforating the tendon of the triceps, comes to the fore-part ofthe thigh, still united to the artery : it is now the crural vein. As it ascends it gets from behind the artery, so that in the groin it lies nearer the pubes than the artery does : opposite the trochanter minor it receives the internal and ex- ternal circumflex veins, and the Profunda Femoris. About an inch below Poupart's ligament the crural vein receives the saphena major, and the small external pudic veins. External iliac vein. The femoral vein lying on the inside of the artery or nearer the pubes, enters the abdomen under the femoral ligament, and passing by the side of the Psoas muscle becomes the external iliac vein. It receives se- veral lesser veins just within the ligament particularly the epi- gastric vein from the muscles and integuments ofthe belly, and the veins accompanying the arteria circumflexa ilii. The ex- ternal iliac vein is joined by the hypogastric vein which as- cends from the pelvis. It requires no minute description ; it answers to the distribution of the hypogastric artery. This which is the internal iliac joining the trunk from the thigh forms the common iliac vein. Vena cava abdominalis.*—A little lower than the bi- furcation of the aorta, the right and left common iliac veins unite. By this union they form the vena cava. This vein ascends upon the right ofthe aorta. It receives fewer branch- es than would naturally be imagined, because the veins of the viscera take their course by the porta into the liver. It re- ceives the lumbar veins, the spermatic veins, the renal, super- renal, and phrenic veins. Passing upward it is received into its appropriate fossa in the liver, and seceding a little from the spine it receives the VENiE cav^E hepaticae and perforates the diaphragm ; entering the pericardium it expands into the great sinus, or right auricle of the heart. Renal veins.|—These veins are less irregular than the ar- teries of the kidney, which relation of the veins and arteries is uncommon. From the relative situation of the kidneys to the cava it is evident that the right vein must be short; the left comparatively longer and taking a course from the kidney over the aorta4 • Vena Cava inferior. t Emulgent veins. \ The Renal veins however fometimes vary in their number, the right being, double or triple, the left even fometimes in four branches. 228 APPENDIX. Supra-renal veins—These little veins are like the arte- ries in their course. The right one enters sometimes into the vena cava, sometimes into the renal vein. The left sometimes receives the phrenic vein of that side and enters into the renal vein. Spermatic veins—Of the general distribution of these veins nothing need be said, after looking to the description of the arteries.* The Vena Portae has been already described in the second volume* * See page 117. OF THE TEETH. X HERE is naturally an inclination in the author of a system to amplify some particular subjects, and to abridge, or bestow less attention, on others which may to him appear less interest- ing or curious. To restrain this tendency has been the most irksome task which I have felt in completing the present work. The growth and structure of the teeth forms an elegant and interesting subject of inquiry ; and it is difficult to concentrate the view of it so as to be consistent with the arrangement of a systematic work. As the general nature and use of the teeth are sufficiently understood, there can be little objection to our beginning the present subject with considering the structure of the human teeth. Of the structure of the teeth. A tooth consists of these parts.—In the first place, the ena- mel, a peculiarly hard layer of matter composing the surface of the body of the tooth. The internal part, body, or sub- stance of the tooth, is less stony and hard than the enamel, but of a firmer structure and more compact than common bone. In regard to the form of the tooth, we may observe that it is divided into the crown, neck, and fangs, or roots of the tooth, which go deep into the jaw. There is a cavity in the body of the tooth, and the tube of the fangs communicates with it. This cavity receives vessels for supplying the remains of that substance upon which the tooth was originally formed. The roots ofthe teeth are received into the jaw by that kind of ar- ticulation which was called gomphosis. They are not firmly wedged into the bone, for, in consequence of maceration, and the destruction of the soft parts, the teeth drop from the scull. There is betwixt the tooth and its socket in the jaw a common periosteum. Of the enamel. The surface of a tooth, that which ap- pears above the gum, is covered with a very dense hard layer of matter, which has been called the enamel. In this term there is some degree of impropriety, as assimilating an animal 230 APPENDIX. production with a vitreous substance, although the enamel very widely differs from the glassy fracture when broken. This matter bestows the most essential quality of hardness on the teeth ; but it is probably useful in another way, being interme- diate betwixt the central bony part ofthe tooth, which has life, and is subject to disease, and matter altogether foreign to the living body. When the enamel is broken off, and the body of the tooth exposed, it quickly decays. The enamel is the hardest production of the animal body. It strikes fire with steel: in church-yard sculls it is observed to resist decay when the centre of the tooth has fallen into dust. It has been found that the component parts of the enamel are nearly the same with those of bone : in bone the phosphate of lime is deposited on the membranes, or cartilage, but this hardening matter of bones is a secretion from the vessels of the part, and is accumulated around the vessels themselves : it is still within the controul of their action, and is suffering the succession of changes peculiar to a living part. But, in the enamel, the phosphate of lime has been deposited in union with a portion of animal gluten, and has no vascularity, nor dots it suffer any change from the influence of the living sys- tem. Although the hardening matter be principally phosphate of lime, a small proportion of the carbonate of lime enters into the composition both of bone and of enamel. Although we call the earthy deposit the hardening matter, yet it is the union of the glutinous matter which bestows the extreme hardness, for, when the tooth is as yet within the jaw, and in an early stage of its formation, the deposition is soft, and its surface rough ; but, by a change in the surface, which throws out this secretion, the first deposition is penetrated with gelatinous secretion, which, either by this penetration simply, or by causing a new apposition of its parts, (its structure in- deed looks like crystallization,) bestows the density and. ex- treme hardness on this crust. When an animal is fed with madder, the colouring matter coming, in the course of the circulation, in contact with the earth of bone, is attracted by it, and is deposited upon it in a beautiful red colour. This colouring matter penetrates more than injection can be made to do in the dead body ; and, as by this process of feeding, the enamel is not tinged, we have a convincing proof that the vascular system has no operation on the enamel after it is formed. From the composition of the enamel, we must be aware ofthe baneful effects of acidulated washes and powders to the teeth: they dissolve the surface, and give a deceitful whiteness OF THE TEETH. 231 to the teeth ; they erode the surface, which it is not in the con- stitution of the part to restore. Of the central bony part of the tooth. The che- mical composition, and the manner of combination of the matter torming the central part of the tooth, and of the fangs, is similar to the other bones of the body ; but when we exam- ine the hardness and the density of the tooth, and see that it is not even porous, or apparently capable of giving passage to vessels, we doubt of its vascularity, and are apt to suppose that it holds its connection with the living jaw-bone by some other tenor than that of vessels, and the circulation of the blood through it. I must acknowledge that the difficulty in deciding on the vascularity, and degree of vitality which the teeth possess, appears to me so great, that I shall at present venture to give no decided opinion. The vascularity of the periosteum, which surrounds the teeth and vessels which enter by the fangs to the cavity of the teeth, seemed to shew a sedulous care to supply the tooth plentifully with blood. As this part of the tooth has often been coloured by feeding young animals with madder, the reverse of that experiment, which convinces us there is no circulation in the enamel, should satisfy us that there is blood circulating through the body of the tooth, and that it undergoes the same changes by absorption which the other bones are proved to do ; but these experiments may have been made while the teeth were forming by the de- position from the pulp, and of course they might be coloured without the experiment affording a fair proof that the circula- tion continues in the tooth after it is formed. If it be proved that the adult teeth, or a fully formed tooth yet within the jaw, are uniformly tinged with the madder, we must without reserve conclude, that the economy of the teeth is in all re- spects like that ofthe common bones. The teeth undergo changes of colour in the living body, to which it would appear they could not be liable as dead matter. They become yellow, transparent, and brittle with old age ; and when a tooth has been knocked from its socket, and re- placed, dentists have observed that it loses its whiteness, and assumes a darker hue. The absorption ofthe roots in consequence of the caries of the body of the tooth, and the absorption of the fangs of the deciduous teeth, are further alleged in proof of their vascu- larity ; not only the pressure ofthe rising tooth on the fangs of the temporary teeth will cause an absorption of the latter, but the fangs of the temporary teeth will waste and be absorbed, so as to drop out without the mechanical pressure ofthe per- 232 APPENDIX. manent teeth, and before they have advanced to be in contact with the former. The teeth seem acutely sensible, but a little consideration teaches us that the hard substance of the teeth is not endowed with sensibility, and that it must be the remains ofthe vascular pulp, presently to be described, occupying the centre of the tooth, which being supplied with nerves, gives the acute pain in tooth-ach. It is as a medium communicating or abstracting heat, that the tooth itself seems to give pain. When wrought upon by the dentist, no sensation is produced unless the tremor be communicated to the jaw, or unless the abrading, or cutting instruments, be so plied as to heat the tooth : then an acute pain is produced from the heat communicated to the centre ; and so, extremely cold substances, or liquids, taken into the mouth, still produce pain, from the cold affecting the pulp of the tooth. As living parts, the teeth have adhesion to the periosteum, and are connected with their internal pulp ; but when they spoil, and are eroded, the disease spreads inwardly, probably destroying the life of the bony part of the tooth, the progress of which disease is marked by a change of colour penetrating beyond the caries towards the centre of the tooth. When this discolouration has reached the internal surface, the pain of tooth-ach is excited, the pulp, vascular and supplied with nerves, inflames, from a want of accordance with the altered state of the tooth, just as the dead surface of a bone will inflame the central periosteum and marrow. The extreme pain pro- duced by this state of the tooth probably proceeds from the de- licate and sensible pulp swelling in the confinement ofthe ca- vity of the tooth. In caries of the teeth, the body of the tooth is discovered deep in its substance long before the pulp of the central cavity is exposed by the progress of the caries. No exfoliation, or exostosis, takes place upon that part ofthe tooth which is above the gum, which may be owing to the mere compactness of the ossific depositions, for we know that the bones ot greatest density are the most apt to yield altogether to diseased action, and die, instead of throwing off their surface, in exfoliations, or taking any other variety of diseased action. In the further consideration of this subject, there are cir- cumstances which will make us doubt of there being vascular action in the teeth, and perhaps incline us to believe that they possess a lower degree of life, and are less subject to change than other parts. Supposing the bony part of the tooth to be vascular, and to possess the principle of life, is not the firm adhesion and contact of the enamel to the body of the tooth a OF THE TEETH. 233 curious instance of apart destitute of life adhering to the sur- face of a living part, without producing the common effects of excitement and exfoliation, or inflammation, in the latter ? Is the enamel, though not a vascular part, possessed of some qua- lity which distinguishes it from foreign matter, or is the bony part of the tooth possessed of so low a degree of vascular ac- tion, that it is not excited by the contact and adherence of the enamel ? We must suppose that some accordance subsists be- tween^them from what is observed to be the effect of the loss of the enamel, for then the bone of the tooth spoils rapidly, and becomes carious. In rickets, and mollities ossium, and other diseases of de- bility in which the body wastes, or the growth is retarded, the growth of the teeth is not retarded in the one case, nor are the grown teeth altered in their form or properties in the other. This appears to me to support the idea of there being a-distinc- tion in the economy between the manner of the formation of the teeth, and of common bone. The effects which we per- ceive in the bony system under these diseases, are produced by a preponderance of the absorbents over the activity of the secreting vessels ; while in the teeth no such effect can take place if they are formed by a deposition of bony matter which is not re-absorbed, nor undergoes the revolution of deposition and re-absorption, as in other parts of the body is the case. Accordingly we find in rickets, and the mollities ossium, where the hardest bone yields, where the jaw-bone itself is distorted or altered in its form, that the teeth remain distinguished for their size and beauty ; and in rickets the teeth are large, and perfectly formed, while the jaws are stinted and interrupted in their growth. The consequence of this is, that the teeth form a larger range than the jaw, and give a characteristic pro- tuberance to the mouth. The roots of the teeth are sometimes found enlarged, dis- torted, or with exostosis formed upon them. Again the ca- vity of the tooth is found to have been filled up with the for- mation of new matter, or around the fangs we often find a small sac of pus, which is sometimes drawn out in extracting the tooth. Nevertheless, in these examples of disease, there are no unequivocal marks o£ vascular action in the teeth ; the unusual form, or exostosis of the roots, is produced by an ori- ginal defect in the formation. The filling up of the cavity of the tooth is caused by the resumed ossific action of the pulp in consequence of the disease and destruction of the body of the tooth-; and the abscesses which surround the fangs are caused by the death of the tooth, in consequence of which it has lost Vol. IV. 2 G 234 APPENDIX. its sympathy with the surrounding living parts, and becomes a source of irritation like any other foreign body. We must conclude, that the whole phenomena displayed in the formation, adhesion, and diseases of the teeth, show them to be possessed of life, and that they have a correspondence, or sympathy with the surrounding parts. But are we prepar- ed to acquiesce in the opinion of Mr. Hunter, that they pos- sess vitality while yet they have no vascular action within them ? We naturally say, how can such vitality exist inde- pendently of a circulation ? But there are not wanting exam- ples of an obscure and low degree of life existing in animals' ova, or seeds, for seasons without a circulation; and if for seasons, why not for a term of life ? We never observe the animal economy providing superfluously, and since there is no instance to be observed in which the teeth have shown a power of renovation, why should they be possessed of vascularity and action to no useful end ? All that seems necessary to them is, that they should firmly adhere without acting as a foreign and extraneous body to the surrounding parts, and this, vitality without vascular action, seems calculated to provide. OF THE FORMATION AND GROWTH OF THE TEETH. In the jaws of a child newly born, there are contained two set of teeth as .it were in embryo : the deciduous, temporary, or milk teeth ; and the permanent teeth. The necessity for this double set of teeth evidently is to be found in the incapaci- ty of alteration of shape or size in the teeth as in other parts of the body ; the smaller teeth, which rise first, and are adapted to the curve and size of the jaw-bone of an infant, require to be succeeded by others, larger, stronger, and carrying their roots deeper in the jaw. Each tooth is formed in a little sac, which lies betwixt the plates of bone that form the jaw-bone of the foetus, or child, under the vascular gum, and connected with it. When we open one of these sacs at an early period of the formation of the tooth, a very curious appearance presents it- self: a little shell of bone is seen within the sac, but no ena- mel is yet formed. Upon raising the shell of bone, which is of the shape of the tooth, and is the outer layer of the bony substance ofthe tooth, a soft vascular stool, or pulp,* is found to have been the mould on which this outer layer of ossific mat- ter has been formed ; and a further observation will lead us to conclude that this bony and central part of the tooth is in the * i,e noyau, la coque, or le germe de la dent, by the French authors. OF THE TEETH. 235 progress of being formed by successive layers of matter thrown out from the surface of this vascular pulp ; though many have explained the formation of the tooth, by supposing that the layers of this pulp were successively ossified. If we now turn our attention to the state of those teeth which we know to be later of rising above the gum, we shall find the ossification still less advanced, and a mere point, or perhaps several points of the deposited matter on the top of the pulp. The pulp, or vascular papilla on which the tooth is formed, has not only this peculiar property of ossification, but, as the period of revolution advances, where it forms the rudiments of the molares for example, its base splits so as to form the mould of two, three, or four fangs, or roots ; for around these divisions ofthe pulp the ossific matter is thrown out so as to form a tube continued downward from the body of the tooth. Gradually, and by successive layers of matter on the inside of this tube, it becomes a strong root or fang, and the bony matter has so en- croached on the cavity, that only a small canal remains, and the appearance ofthe pulp is quite altered, having shrunk in this narrow space. We have said that the tooth forming on its pulp, or vascular bed, is surrounded with a membrane giving the whole the ap- pearance of a little sac. This membrane has also an important use. It is vascular also as the pulp is, but it is more connect- ed with the gums, and receives its vessels from the surface, while the pulp, lying under the shell of the tooth, receives its blood-vessels from that branch of the internal maxillary artery which takes its course in the jaw. The enamel is formed after the body of the tooth has consi- derably advanced towards its perfect form. It is formed by a secretion from the capsule, or membrane which invests the teeth,* and which is originally continuous with the pulp. The enamel is thicker at the point, and on the body of the tooth, than at it. neck. Mr. Hunter supposed that the capsule always secreting, and the upper part of the tooth being formed first, it would follow of course that the point and body of the tooth would be covered with a thicker deposition ; but it rather ap- pears that the part of the sac opposite to the upper part, and body of the tooth, has a greater power of secreting, being in truth more vascular and spongy, for the whole of the body of the bony part of the tooth is formed before the enamel invests the tooth. We are indebted to M. Herissant for much ofthe explana- • This outer fac has been called chorion, from the numerous veffels diftributed upon it. See Heriffant. 236 APPENDIX. tion of the manner in which the enamel is formed. He de- scribes the sac,* its attachment to the pulp, and to the neck of the teeth—as the tooth advances to its perfect form, the sac also changes. At first it is delicate and thin, but it thickens apace. And he asserts, that if after this progress is begun you examine the inner surface of it with a glass, you will perceive it to be composed of little vesicles in. regular order, and which sometimes have a limpid fluid contained in them. This liquid exuded upon the surface of the teeth he supposes to form the enamel. He explains also how this sac, originally investing the body and neck ot the tooth, being pierced by the edge of the toothr and the tooth rising through it, is inverted, and by still keeping its connection with the circle of the crown of the tooth, rises up in connection with the gum, and in some degree forms the new gum which surrounds the tooth. Succeeding authors have found this membrane double. Wc may examine it most successfully, says Mr. Hunter, in a new- born child, and we find it made up ot two lamellae, an external and an internal; the external is soft and spongy, without any vessels ; the other is much firmer, and extremely vascular, its vessels coming from those that are going to the pulp of the tooth. He adds, that while the tooth is within the gum, there is always a mucilaginous fluid like the sinovia in the joints be- tween this membrane and the pulp of the tooth. Of THE GROWTH OF THE SECOND SET OF TEETH, AND THE SHEDDING OF THE FIRST SET. The first, or deciduous set of teeth, being adapted only for the jaws of a child, are destined to be shed, and to give place to the adult, or permanent set of teeth. Accordingly, in ob- serving the progress of the formation ofthe first teeth, the ru- diments of the second may also be seen in the fcetus of the seventh or eighth month : and in the fifth and sixth month after birth, the ossification begins in them. The rudiments of the permanent teeth maybe observedeven when the sac is very small, and appear like a filament stretching up to the neck ofthe sac of the deciduous teeth. These sacs lie on the inner side of the jaw-bone, and when further advanced, the necks of the two sacs, (both as yet under the gum) are united ; but when the first teeth are fully formed, and have risen above the gum, the alveolar processes have been at the same time formed around them, and now the sac of the permanent teeth have a connec- • Reffemble affez a ur.e petite bourfe fermec. OF THE TEETH. 237 tion with the gums through a small foramen in the jaw-bone, behind the space through which the first teeth have shot. The opinion now entertained, that the second set of teeth pushes out the first, is very erroneous, for the change on the de- ciduous and the growing teeth seems to be influenced by laws of coincidence indeed, but not of mechanical action. Some- times we observe the falling tooth wasted at the root, or on the side of the fang, by the pressure of the rising tooth. Now here we should suppose that the newly-formed tooth should be the most apt to be absorbed by the pressure ofthe root ofthe deciduous tooth, did we not recollect that the new tooth is in- vested with the hard enamel, while the pressure on the other acts upon the bony root. But there is more than this in the phenomenon of the shedding of the teeth, for often the fang is wasted while the tooth adheres only by the gum, and the per- manent tooth has made little progress in its elevation, and has not pressed upon it. This decay and wasting of the fangs of the teeth looks more like a satisfactory proof in support of their vascularity, than any other change to which they are subject. Yet there seems to be no reason why we should not suppose, that as the rudiments of the teeth rise into action at a particu- lar time, and form the bony centre ofthe tooth, this formation should be affected by similar laws ; that at a particular period the tooth should decay, and that the decay ofthe tooth should begin with the destruction of the fangs. Neither can I resist the belief that the bony part of the tooth has a tendency to dissolution independently of a circulation of blood through it, or of an internal action of vessels, and that as the roots waste, the surrounding vascular parts absorb its substance. It is no proof of the first set being pushed out by the second set of teeth, that if the permanent teeth do not rise, the first will remain, their roots unwasted and firm even to old age ; for still I contend that there is an agreement and coincidence betwixt the teeth in their changes, and also "in the alveoli, by which they are surrounded ; but this is not produced by the pressure of the rising teeth. When a dentist sees a tooth seated out of the proper linei and draws it, and finds that he has made the mistake of extracting the adult tooth, letting the milk tooth remain, he must not expect that the milk tooth will keep its place, for the contrary will happen, it will in general fall out. The old and the new teeth are lodged in distinct compart- ments of the jaw-bone, and what is more curious, their alveoli are distinct, for as the roots of the first teeth decay, their alveolar processes are absorbed, while again, as the new teeth rise from their deep seat in the jaw-bone, they are ac- 238 APPENDIX. companied with new alveoli ;* yet these alveoli are not suffi- cient to support the teeth, tor we find that the teeth will remain long perfect while they uniformly retain their relative position and number, but when one falls, the rest more quickly decay ; and the chief art ofthe dentist in shifting the seat ofthe teeth, is gradually to push them along the jaw notwithstanding these bony partitions and processes, so as to bring them into equal and seemlv lines. No circumstance can better illustrate how perfect the de- pendence of the alveoli is upon the teeth, than that of their being thrown off with them in extensive exfoliations. I have a specimen ol this in my collection, where the whole circle ot the alveolar proci sses and teeth is thrown off. This happened after the confluent small-pox. I think I recollect a similar case occurring to Dr. Blake. In those tumours which arise from the alveoli and gums, filling the mouth with a cancerous mass, and softening the upper part of the jaw, there is no eradicating the disease but by taking away the whole adventi- tious part of the jaw which belongs to the teeth, and leaving only the firmer base. But even this operation will be too often unsuccessful. When a tooth is lost, it appears as if the space it occupied were parth filled up by an increased thickness of the adjacent teeth, and partly by the lengthening of that which is opposite : indeed, this appearance has been brought as a proof of the continual growth of teeth. But there is a fallacy in the obser- vation ; for w hen the space appears to have become narrow by the approximation ofthe two adjacent teeth, it is not owing to any increase of their breadth, but to their moving from that side where they are well supported to the other side where they are not. For this reason they get an inclined direction ; and this inclination may be observed in several of the adjoining teeth.f The transplanting of teeth presents another very interesting phenomenon. A tooth recently drawn, and placed accurately into a socket from which one has been taken, will adhere there: nay, it will even adhere to any living part, as in the comb of a cock. This, however, proves nothing further than what all allow, that the tooth possesses vitality, for after a time it will not adhere ; it has become a dead part, and the living sub- stance refuses to coalesce with it. Again, and in opposition to this, is it not very extraordinary that the teeth may be burnt by chemical agents, or the actual cautery, down to the • Mr. Hunter. t Mr. J. Hunter. OF THE TEETH. 239 centre, and yet retain their hold ; or that the body of the tooth may be cut off, and a new tooth fixed into it by a pivot ? Had the teeth any vascular action, this torturing would cause re-action and disease in them. Sometimes the most terrible effects are produced by these operations, as tetanus, abscess in the jaws, &c. ; but this happens in consequence of the central nerve being bruised by the wedging of the pivot in the cavity of the tooth, or by the roots of the teeth becoming, as dead bodies, a source of irritation to the surrounding sockets. The disease produced by the transplanting of teeth has not been satisfactorily explained, though the investigation would throw considerable light on the physiology ofthe teeth, and be in itself of practical use. About a month after transplanting the tooth, and after it has taken perfect adhesion, the disease has appeared. An ulcera- tion is perceived in the gum and jaw ; or the gum shrinking and wasting by ulceration, leaves the tooth and alveoli bare. Soon after, blotches appear on the skin ; and sometimes ulcers in the throat.—In some cases, this disease has been cured without mercury, and in others, seems only to have yielded to the mercurial course. Mr. Hunter entertained the opinion that it was not venereal, but a distinct disease ; and I find that Richter supposes there are two diseases produced, the one ve- nereal, and the other a peculiar affection. Others have suppos- ed that this is not a disease propagated from the one person to the other, but produced by the combination ofthe living prin- ciple of two distinct systems ! In short, the case does not seem to be well understood. Supposing it to be the venereal disease thus propagated, (and this is the most likely sugges- tion,) then it does not appear that we should consider it as an inoculation of the matter of the disease, but of a part long con- taminated, ingrafted : and in this view it will probably be found necessary to continue the plan of cure as for an old affec- tion, and not for the recent disease. We may conclude that the teeth are peculiar in their sub- stance and structure, in the manner of their growth and nutri- tion ; and, as they are distinct from the other bones ofthe sys- tem in their form and connections, so are they in their more essential qualities. Of the gums.—The necks of teeth are surrounded by the gums, a red, vascular, but firm substance which covers the alveolar processes. To the bone and to the teeth the gums ad- here very strongly, but the edge touching the teeth is loose. The gums have little sensibility in their healthy and sound state ; and by mastication, when the teeth are lost, they gain a degree of hardness which proves almost a substitute for the 240 APPENDIX. teeth. The use of the gum is chiefly to give firmness to the teeth, and at the same time, as Mr. Hunter observes, to give them that kind of support which breaks the jar of" bony con- tact. Like the alveolar process, the gums have a secret con- nection with the state of the teeth Before the milk-teeth ap- pear, there is a firm ridge which runs along the gums * but this is thrown off, or wastes with the rising of the teeth: and as the teeth rise the proper gums grow, and embrace them firmly. The gum is firm, and in close adhesion, when the teeth are healthy ; loose, spongy, or shrunk, when they are diseased. The only means of operating upon the general state ofthe teeth is through the gums ; and by keeping them in a state of healthy action by the brush and tinctures, the dentist fixes the teeth, and preserves them healthy ; but when they are allowed to be loose and spongy, and subject to frequent bleeding, (which is improperly called a scorbutic state,) the teeth become loose, and the gums painful. If a healthy tooth be implanted in the jaw, the gum grows up around it, and adheres to it; but if it be dead or diseased, the gum ulcerates, loosens, and shrinks, from :.t; and this shrinking of the gums is soon followed by the absorption of the alveoli. From the disorder of the teeth, the gums are subject to many diseases ; some of them troublesome, some dangerous, or at least giving rise to dangerous diseases. They swell from tooth-ach and inflammation ofthe centre ofthe tooth (parulis,) or form tumours from the side of the tooth (epulis.) Often suppuration follows these swellings ; and the matter making its way by the side ofthe jaw, and destroying the alveoli, trouble- some fistulae are the consequence. The accumulation of tartar on the teeth is the cause of an ulceration and wasting of the gums, in the end very injurious to the teeth. The soft, spon- gy, and bleeding tumours which arise from the gums, are in fact diseases of the bone, or rather the peculiar characteristic of the disease of the alveoli and of the cancelli of the jaw- bone ; and cannot be cured but by a practice which reaches to the root and origin of the disease. OF THE FIRST AND SECOND SET OF THE TEETH. Before we observe the classing of the adult teeth, we must attend to the two sets of teeth, the infantine or deciduous teeth, and the adult or permanent teeth. The first set of teeth are twenty in number: these are divid- ed into three classes; the incisores, four in each jaw ; the • See Hcriffant. OF THE TEETH. 241 cuspidate, two in each jaw ; and the molares, four in num- ber in each jaw. The teeth of a child generally appear in this order: first the central incisores of the lower jaw pierce the gum. In a month after, perhaps, their counterparts appear in the upper jaw. These, in a few weeks, are succeeded by the lateral incisores ofthe lower jaw ; then the lateral incisores ofthe upper jaw. The growth of the teeth is not after this in a regular progres- sion backwards, for now, instead of the cuspidati, which are immediately lateral to the incisores, the anterior molares of the lower jaw slowly lift their white surface above the gum about the fourteenth or fifteenth month. Now the cuspidati pierce the gum ; and, lastly, the larger molares make their appear- ance, the teeth ofthe lower jaw preceding those above. The last tooth does not rise till the beginning ofthe third year. The teeth do not always cut the gum in this order ; it is only the more regular and common order. When the teeth appear in irregular succession, more irritation and pain, and more of those symptoms which are usually attributed to teething, are said to accompany them, an opinion which I believe to have arisen from some casual observations. The deciduous set of teeth terminates with the rising of the second molaris ; for the third molaris being formed about the eighth year, when the jaw is advanced towards its perfect form, is not shed, but is truly the first permanent tooth. The molares ofthe adult are properly the permanent teeth (immutabiles,) for all the others are deciduous, and are replaced by the adult set; yet we must recollect that, in opposition to Albinus, in this arrangement, it is more common to speak of the whole set of the adult teeth as the immutabiles. In the sixth and seventh years the jaws have so much en- larged, that the first set of teeth seems too small, spaces are left betwixt them, and they begin to fall out, giving place to the adult teeth. But the shedding of the teeth is by no means re- gular in regard to time; the child is already no longer in a state of nature, and a thousand circumstances have secretly af- fected the health and growth. The teeth even fall out three years earlier in one child than in another : nay, so frequently are some of them retained altogether, that it would appear ne- cessary to be assured ofthe forward state of the adult tooth before the tooth of the first set should be thoughtlessly drawn. The jaw-bones aie still so small, that the second set of teeth must rise slowly and in succession, else they would be accumu- lated into too small a circle, and of course turned from their proper direction. Vol. IV. 2 H 242 APPENDIX. The incisores of the under jaw are loose commonly when the anterior of the permanent molares are thrusting up the gum. The permanent central iicisores soon after appear, and in two or three months those ofthe upper jaw appear. In three or four months more the lateral incisores of the lower jaw are loosened, and the permanent teeth appear at the same time the anterior molares have appeared. The lateral incisores of the upper jaw follow next; and, in ftom six to twelve months more, the temporary molares loosen, the long fangs ofthe cus- pidati retaining their hold some time longer. The anterior molares and the cuspidati falling, are succeeded about the ninth year by the second bicuspides and the cuspi- dati. The posterior bicuspides take the place of the posterior molares about the tenth or eleventh year. The second perma- nent molares do not appear for five or six years from the com- mencement of the appearance of the permanent teeth. The last ofthe molares, <.r the dens sapientse, appears from the fif- teenth to the twentieth, or even to the twenty-fifth year. CLASSES OF THE ADULT TEETH. The teeth at full maturity are thirty-two in number,* and they are divided into these classes, incisores, cuspidati, bicus- pidi, and molares. The incisores are eight in number, four in each jaw : they are of the simplest form, their edges are even, and laterally they contract equally to the neck : they are gibbous, forward, and slightly concave on the inside ; their roots are simple. The incisores ofthe upper jaw are larger and stronger; those of the lower jaw are smaller, neater, and for the most part evenly set, while the teeth of the upper jaw are more fre- quently irregular from being crowded together. The cuspidatif are four in number, one lateral to the in- cisores of each jaw. They are stronger than the last in their form ; thicker at their base : in the gum more convex forward, and terminate with a notched central point. In general, and particularly in the lower jaw, they project further than the other teeth; their roots are single and long; they stand betwixt the incisores and grinders in form as in place, for they seem neither perfectly adapted to cut like the incisores, nor for grinding. " We may trace in these teeth," says Mr. Hunter * From twenty-eight to thirty-two in number.—Hunter. f Dentes cantni, the eye-teeth, from their place of original lodgment in the upper jaw. OF THE TEETH. 243 u a similarity in shape, situation, and use, from the most im- perfect carnivorous animal which we believe to be the human species, to the most perfect carnivorous animal, the lion." Next in order from the symphysis of the jaw rise the bi- cuspides, the fourth and fifth teeth. These are eight in num- ber, and accurately resemble each other. Taking one, we may observe that it is flattened laterally, answering to the flat side of the root, and that it terminates in two acute points : the internal of these points, even when not worn down, is the least. The second bicuspes is often wanting. The bicuspides are very often called the anterior grinders. Their roots are single, or appear like two fangs united; or the first bicuspes has in general two small fangs, or is rather forked; the others seldom more than one. Their roots are oftener curved than those of the other teeth. The first and second grinders are nearly alike. The body of these forms almost a square ; generally five points project from their grinding surface, which makes an irregular cavity in the centre : often some lesser tubercles, or points, are to be observed at the base ofthe larger ones. The neck of the tooth is but little contracted. There are two fangs, one for- ward, the other backward, with their edges turned outward ; their extremities are broad, often bifurcated, and shorter than those ofthe bicuspides. There are two cavities to each fang leading to the general cavity in the body of the tooth. The fangs at their middle part are generally bent a little backward. The upper grinders have three diverging fangs, and they are more pointed, and have but one canal. They are directly un- der the floor ofthe maxillary sinus. The jaw acquires its full proportion about the age of eigh- teen or twenty, when the third molaris, or the dens sapientice, makes its appearance. It is shorter and smaller, and is in- clined more inward than the others. Its fangs are less regular and distinct, being often squeezed together. From the cus- pidati to the last grinder, the fangs are becoming much short- er ; and from the first incisor to the last grinder, the teeth stand less out from the sockets and gums. FINIS. ::^y:s§0mM-} * v.. . ' ■ • '"jiN', •i<*-»L,n,.' !;)> list'-i^ftr. ,„!. ', ' i. . . S ■ .i,.!,->iv.,■;. 'VSt^wv'vri'Ar JvW,.. .i-'? v- •">■■<<* . i-v-i^^^ilM^^:--:^ ■'■■ > • :■■•'■■ •;^S.^.-:::;•■it:;';- f^3tf^v--X^Xv :- « ; ;■■•/:.:■ • vv.':-;v...«vJ%^s-5^^;jvv:,;< •:■; :«.i^.'; ■v .*".r''. .....' ■ V ■ '• ■:-,.;■:>:». "mI'I; ■ ■...-. , .'-, .-.1 ■ i'i'J-' ' ,.-•■' ••■•'>.•;. • • '■ ' '" lint'- --\ >. J U'. '; '''.•: ■'':.■. •''^^.VvtvC.-.'.'.v. ■">>■"•> '■' • ' ■• ; •'• ' '»J,,"•'♦"«■■''j'-i.-v;'/-'.;^,- •*'■ •»*" ;^:^;■'V.:■^.x•:■w/.v■i;M;l'^^?-^'''•y.;'